lilBM^AB^ Ol' THi: tntiucrsily of 4aHfaititi(f. ^^o Division Range Shelf Received yjAi/ V' .i.Md f~ / ' t Jubrtliis' Series of Jdiit Srjjool ^ooks. PUBLISHED BY CROCKER AND BREWSTER, 51 WASUINGTON STREET, BOSTON. _ THE LATIN SCHOOL BOOKS prepared by Prof. E. A. Andrews, exclu. sive of his Latin-English Lexicon, founded on the Latin-Gennau Lexicon of Dr. Freund, constitute two distinct series, adapted to diflereut and distmct pur- poses. The basis of tlie First Series is Andrews' First Latin Book; of th« Second, Andrews and Stoddard's l^atiu Grammar. FIRST SERIES. This Series is designed expressly for those who commence the study of Latin tt a very early age, and for such as intend to pursue it to a limited ex'tent only, or raoreiy as subsiiiiary to the acquisition of a good English education. It con- sists of the following works, viz. : — 1. Andrews' First Latin Book: or Progressive Les- ions in Reading and Writing Latin. This small volume contains most of the leading princi[)les and grammatical forms of the Latin language, and, by the logicitl precision of its rules and definitions, is admirably fitted to serve iis an iidroductibn to the studv of general grammar. The work is divided into les- sons of convenient lengtli, which are so an-auged that the student will, in all cases, be prepared to enter upon the study of each successive lesson, by pos- sessing a thorough knowledge of those which preceded it. The lessons gen- erally consist of three parts: — 1st. The statement of important principles in tlie form of rules or definitions, or tlie exhibition of orthograuhical or etymo- logical Ibrms; 2d. Exorcises, designed to illustrate such principles or forms; and 3d. Questions, intended to assist the student in preparing his lesson. In addition to the grammatical lessons contained in this volume, a few pages .jf Reading Lessons are annexed, and these are followed by a Dictionarj' co'in- prising all the Latin words contained in the work. This book is adapted to tlie use of all schools above the grade of primary schools, including also Acad- emies and Female Seminaries. It is prepared in such a manner that it can be used with little difficulty by any mtelUgent parent or teacher, with no previous knowledge of the language. 2. The Latin Reader, with a Dlctlonarj and Notes, containing explanations of ditficult idioms, and numerous references to the i.essons contained in the First Latin Book. 3. The Viri Romge, with a Dictionary and Notes, re- ferring, like those of the Reader, to the First Latin Book. This series of three small volumes, if faithfully studied according to the directions contained in them, will not only render the student a very tolerable proficient in the principles of the Latin language and in the knowledge of its roots, from which so many words of his English language are derived, but will constitute the best preparation for n thorough study of the English gi-ammar. SECOND SERIES. Note.— The " liatin Reader " and the " Tiri Romas," in this series, art the same as In tlie first series. This Series is designed more especially for those who are intending to become th;iroughly acquainted with the Latin lanraage, and with the principal classical authors ot that language. It consists of the following works: — 1. Latin Lessons. Tliis small volume is designed for the younger classes of Latin students, who intend ultimately to take up the larger Grammar, but to whom that work would, at first, appear too formidable, "it contains the prominent principles of Latin grammar, expressed in the same language as in the larger Grannriar, and likewise Reading and Writing Lessons, wit*) a DioVonary of the Latin words aoid phrases occurrb.g in the Lesson*. 1 NEW SERIES OF LATIN SCHOOL BOOKS. 2. Latin Grammar. Revised, with Corrections and Ad- ditions. A (irammar of the Latin Language, for the use of Schools and Col- leges. By Professors E. A. Andrews ancfS. Stoddard. This work, which for many years has been the text-book in the department of Latin Grammar, claims the merit of having first inti-oduced into the schools of this country the subject of grammatical analysis, which now occupies, a conspicuous place in so many grammars of the English language. More than twenty years have elapsed since the first publication of this Grammar, and it is hardly necessary to sav that its merits — placing it in a practical view, preeminently above every other Latin Grammar— have been so tully appreciatetl that it has been adopted RS a Toxt Book in nearly eveiy College and Seminary in the country. The present edition has not only been thorougliUj revised and corrtcied {two years of conlinuuus labor havinfj been devoted to its careful revision and to the purjx'se of rendering it eonformable in all resjiects to the advanced -position ickich it aims to ■KciJjiy,)'hut it contains at least one third more matter than the previous editions. To unite the acknowledged excellencies of the older English manuals, and of the more recent German grammars, was the special aim of the authors of this work; and to this end particular attention was directed: — 1st. To the preparci- tion of more extended rules for the pronunciation of the language ; 2d. To a clear exposition cf its inflectional changes ; 3d. To a proper basts of its syntax; and 4th. To greater precision in rides and definitions. 3. Questions on the Grammar. This little volume is intended to aid the student in preparmg his lessons, and the teacher in con- ducting his recitations. 4. A Synopsis of Latin Grammar, comprising the Latin Paradigms, and the Principal Rules of Latui Etymology and Syntax. The few pages composing this work contain those portions of the Grammar to which the student has occasion to refer most frequently in the preparation of his daily lessons. 5. Latin Eeacler. The Reader, by means of two separate and distinct sets of notes, is equally adapted for use in connection either with the First Latin Book or the Latin Grammar. 6. Viri Romae. 'i'^is volume, like the Reader, is furnish- ed with notes and references, both to the First Latin Book and to the Latin Grammar. The principal difterence in the two sets of notes found m each of these volumes consists in the somewhat greater fulness of those which belong to the smaller series. 7. Latin Exercises. Tliis work contains exercises in e^ery department of the Latin Grammar, and is so an-anged that it may be studied in connection with the Grammar through every stage of the prepara- tory course. It is designed to prepare the way for original composition in the Latin language, both in prose and verse. 8. A Key to Latin Exercises. This Key, in which all the exercises in the preceding volume are fuUy con-ected, is intended f jr the use of teachers only. 9. CsBsar's Commentaries on the Gallic War, with a Dictionary and Notes. The text of this edition of Ccesar has been formed hj reference "to the best German editions. The Notes are principally gi-ammatical. The Dictionary, which, like all the others in the series, was prepared with great labor, contains the usual significations of the words, together with an explana- rion of aU such phrases as might otherwise perplex the student. 10. Sallust. Sallust's Jugurthine War and Conspiracy of Cataline, with a Dictionary and Notes. The text of this work, which was based upon that of Cortius, lias been modified by reference to the best modern «diti(>ns, especially by those of Kritz and Geria«h; and its orthography is, in 2 NEW SERIES OF LATIN SCHOOL BOOKS. penernl, conformetl to tliat of Pettier and Planche. The Dictionaries of Cjesar and Sallust connected with this series are original works, and, in connection witli tiie Notes in each volume, fnrnish a verj- complete and satisfactory appa- ratus for the stu ly of these two authors. 11. Ovid. Selections Irom the Metamorphoses and Heroidea of Ovid, with Notes, Grammatical References, and Exercises in Scanning. These selections from Ovid are designed as an introduction to Latin poetry. They are accompanied with numerous brief notes explanatory of difficult phrases, of obscure historical or mythological allusions, and especially of gi-am- matical difficulties. To these are added'such Exeicises in Scanning as^seiTe fully to introduce the student to a knowledge of Latin prosody, and 'especially ci'the structure and laws of hexameter and pentameter verse' 12. Virgil. The Eclogues and Geor.sics of Viriril, with Nnres and a Metrical Key. The text of this edition is, in general, that of Ifcyne as re- t^ised by Wagner. Particular attention has been given to tiie orthography ;"uid pune- liintion. The orthography has been made to conform to the (Standard of prevalent us;;>r«, Ji.'icarding the forms is for es, in the terminations of some accusatives plural, r I.I.I for ijiiii!/t. and the like, as they tend to embarrass the learner, while they give but a vcrv imperfect idea of the peculiarities of the author's orthography, as will be set-ii by examination of the Ortkos:raj.liia VtrifiUcaia, at the end of this edition. The notes are very numerous, and in their preparation the editor has drawn freely from the best com- mentaries on Virgil, both German and English, including tiio.^eofHeyne, Wagner, For- big'T, Ladewig, Marty n, Keightley, Bryee, Coningtou and others. The notes contain many references to the Grammar, which will be found useful. In announcing the Revised Edition of Andrew.? and Stoddakd's Latin Gkammak, the Publishers believe it to bo quite unnecess.iry to speak of the merits of the work The fact that in the space of about Twenty Years, Sixty- Five Editions, numbering above Two Hundred Thousand Copies, have been required for the pui-pose of meeting the steadily increasing demand for the work, sufficiently evinces the estimalion in which it has been held. In preparing this Revised and Enlarged Edition, every portion of the origiir.il work has been reconsidered in the light of the experience of twenty years spent by the present editor in studies connected with this department of" edu- cation, and with the aid of numerous publications in the same department, ■which, during this period, have issued from the European press. The results of this labor are apparent on ahuost every page, in new modifications of the" old materials, and espeaially in such additional information iu regard to its ▼arious topics as the present advanced state of classical education in this country seemed obviously to demand. The publishers commend this new edition to the attention of Teachers throughout the countiy, and express the hope that iu its present form it will be deemed worthy of a continuance of the favor which it has so long received. The following are exti-acts from a few of the many letters the Publishers nave received from teachers from all parts of the countiy in commendation »f this work : — The revised edition of Andrews and Stoddard's Latin Grammar is without doubt the best published iu America. I have no doubt that the time is near at hand when thi-. series of worlis wiH, by all lovers of the classics, be con.sidered as the -National Series.' The pronunciation is now by the same class considered the American .Standard. I will nail with joy the day when every college and school in our country shall have adopted Prof. Andrews' series as the foundation of true classic knowledge. As such I cousidf^r It, and for that reason have I used it since I first knew its existence. — Martin Armstron.g, Potomac Seminary, Romney, Va. Allow me to say, after a careful examination, that, in my judgment, it is the beat manual of Latin Grammar to be found in the English language. In revising it the iuthor has pre.=erved the happy medium between s.aying too much and too little, so de- sirable for ,a Latin text-book for this country. In philo.^ophical arrangement, simplicity of expression, and for brevity and fulness, it must entitle the author to the first rank m American classical scholarship. I shall use it in my classes, and recommend it to all teachera of Latin in this country — iV. E. Cohleig/i, Professor of Ancient Languag-es and Uteratttre, in Lawrence Universiiy, Appleton, Wis. 3 NEW SERIES OF LATIN SCHOOL BOOKS, I have reason to believe that the iniprovemcnts, mtroduced into the last edition ot Andrews and Stoil'lard's l^atin Grammar by ray respected and lamented friend Dr. An- drews, a little before his lUuth, add very decidedly to the valne of a work, which has done more to give the kuo\vledge of that language to the youth of this country than any, perhaps thau all others.— Theodore W. Woolsey, President of Yale College^ New Haven. No bool;. probably, has done more to improve classical training in American schooll than Andrews and Stoddard's Latin Grammar. Its use Is almost universal ; and where it has not itself been adopted asamantial, it has made grammars of similar excellence necesAirv. The last edition, the sixty-fifth, was carefully revised by the lamented Dr. Andrews, not long before his death, by whom it was greatly enlarged by the iucorpora- tioQ of much valuable information, derived mainly from the last edition of the Latia Grammar of Profe.ssor Zumpt. It will therefore be found to be much improved as a re- pository of the principles and facts of the Latin language.— rAomoi A. T/uicher, Profes SOT of Latin ill Yale ColUge, New Haven. It is unnecessary to commend a Latin Grammar, which has been for twenty years in common use in o"ur Colleges, and has generally superseded all others. The Revised Kditioa contains the results of the labors of Dr. Andrews, during all that time, on var rious Latin Classics, and on his great Latin Lexicon; and cannot, therefore, but be greatly improved.— E'/iCarr/ Robinson, D. Z>., LL. D., Prof, of Biblical Literature in Union Tiuol. Seimnary^ New York City. I regard Andrews' and Stoddard's new Latin Grammar, as an exceedingly valuable work. It evidently contains the results of the Author's cartful and long continued in- vestio-ation, and from itz fulness, clearness, and accuracy, will undoubtedly become tlie Standard Latin Grammar of this Continent. In ^W'stern New York, we have for a long time been using the earlier editions, and they have rapidly won upon the pubUc regard. This new edition will give it a stronger claim upon our favor. It must rapidly super- sede all others. I can "unhesitatingly recommend the New Grammar as the best in use.— Lewis H. Clark, Principal if Sodas' Academy, Wayne Co., N. Y. I have looked over the new edition of the Grammar with great interest. It is now eighteen years since I introduced it into this college, and I have never felt inclined to chanc-e it"for any other. The revision, without changing its general character, has added greatly to its fulness and completeness. It is now fully equal to Zumpt's in these re- spects, and far superior to it in adaptation to the class room. There is no other school grammar that can pretend to compare with it. I have introduced the new edition here and have no idea I shall ever wish to substitute another. The services of Prof. .Andrews iu the cause of classical learning in the United States cannot be over estimated.— ill. Stur- giis, Professor in Hanover College, Indiana. I am willing to say that I am decidedly in favor of Andrews' Latin Series.— Geo. Gao.. Galesville University, Wisconsin. Andrews and Stoddard's Latin Grammar I consider decidedly the best Latin GrammaT ever published. — Ransom Norton, North Livermore, Maine, Such a work as Andrews and Stoddard's Revised Latin Grammar needs no recommend- ation, it speaks for itself.—^. A. Keen, Professor of Greek and Latin, Tufts College, Med ford, Ms. I have examined the revised edition of Andrews and Stoddard's Latin Grammar, and think it a complete success. I see it has all of Zumpt's merits and none of his defects, and welcome its advent with great pleasure.— Ja»j«5 M. Whiton, Hopkins Grammar School, New Haven, Conn. I have examined Andrews and Stoddard's Latin Grammar, and say. without hesita- tion that the principles of the Latin language can be more easily and systematically acquired from it than anv work I have ever seen. The arrangement and simplicity ot its terms are such as to make it easily comprehended by the beginner, whUe, at the same time, its copiousness is sufficient for the most advanced student. The author has evi- dently noted and profited by the defects in this respect of most of the Latin Grammai-a now in use. — C. W. Field, Mauch Chunk. Pa. The superior merits of the original work are too well known and appreciated to need any commendation from me. I have had some means of knowing how great pains ami labor Dr. Andrews has bestowed upon this final revision and improvement of the work, end thenifore, was not unprepared to find its acknowledged excellence materially in- creased and I do not hesitate to say, that its value has been greatly enhanced, and that it has beenbrought as near as practicable to the present state of phUological science.— John D. Pliilbrick, Superintendent of Public Schools, city of Boston. I have looked the Grammar through with much care and a great degree of satisfaction, »nd I unhesitatingly pronounce it superior to any Latin Grammar in method and man- ner :>f discu.ssion, and happily adapted to the wants of both teachers and pupils.— J. W. SJmjtrfs, Principal of New England Christian Institute, Andover, N. H. 4 NEW SERIES OF LATIN SCHOOL BOCKS. We have lately introduced tlie Revised Edition, and regard it asa srreat improTenieiiJ npon former editions. We shall use it exolusively in future. — E. Flint, Jr., Pitiici]iai oj" Lee High School. After a due examination, I am happy to state that the Author has admirably accom- pUshed the objects which he aimed at in making this last revision. He has added much that is in the highest dejjree valuable without materially changing the arrangement of the original work. The work appears to me well adapted to the daily use of our CUissi- cal Schools, and I shall b sreafter direct my classes to use it. — C. L. Cushman, Principal of Peabody High School, South Danvers, Ms. The Revised Grammar seems to me greatly improved and to be every thing a scholar eould wish. — Z. B. Stiirgi,<<, Charlestoivn, Indiana. I have subjected the Revised Edition to the test of actual use in the recitation room, and am persuaded that in its present form it decidedly surpasses every other Latin Gram- mar in point of adaptation to the w.ants of students in our Academies, High Schools »nd Colleges. — William S. Palmer.^ Central High School, Cleaveland, Ohio. I think Andrews' Series of Latin Works the most systematic and best arranged course I flave ever seen, — and believe If our pupils would use them altogether, we should find them much better scholars. I shall use them wholly in my school. — A. C. Stotkin, Piincipal of Monynouth Aeademij, Maine. The examination of the Revised Edition has afforded me very great pleasure, and leads me to express the deep and sincere conviction that it is the most complete Grammar of the Latin language with which I am acquainted, and best adapted for ready consultation upon any subject connected with the study of Latin Authors. The paper, the typography, aud the binding. — the whole style of publication — are such as to commend the good taste and judgment of the Publishers. — J. R. Boyd, Principal of Mnpleivood Young ladies Institute, Pittsjield, Mass. I find the Revised Edition to be just what is needed for a Latin Grammar, — clear, com- prehensive, yet concise, in the subject matter. I shall introduce it as a permauent text- book. — B. F. Dakt. Principal of Clyde High School, Wayne Co., N. Y. I have carefully examined your Revised Edition throughout, particularly the Correc- tions and Additions. It now appears to me all that can be desired. It seems like part- ing with a familiar friend to lay aside the old edition, with its many excellencies, and adopt the neiv. but I shall cheerfully make the sacrifice for the greater benefit that will accrue to those commencing the study of Latin from time to time. — J. H. Graham, Prin- cipal of North field Institution, Vermont. I thought before that the old edition was entitled to the appellation of " The Latin Grammar," but I perceive its value has been much inerea.sed by the numerous emenda- tions and additions of Prof. Andrews. The Grammar is now fitted to be a complete hand-book for the Latin scholar during his whole course. — E. W. Johnson, Canton Acad- emy, Canton, N. Y. I unhesitatingly pronounce the Revised Edition of Andrews and Stoddard's Latin Grammar the best Grammar of the Latin Language, and shall certainly use my influence in its behalf.— K. E. J. Clute, Edinboro\ Pa. After a thorough examination, I have no hesitation in pronouncing it the best Latin Grammar for the purpo.ses of the recitation room that I have ever examined. In its present form it ought certainly to displace a large majority of the Grammars in common use. Its rules of Syntax are expressed with accuracy and precision, and are in fact, what all rules ought to be, reliable guides to the learner — Jam,es W. Andrews, Principal of Hopewell Academy, Penn- Andrews and Stoddard'.? Latin Grammar, in the arrangement and adaptation to the learner, has excelled all others, and the revised edition i.s certainly a great improvement, and I do believe is better adapted to the wants of the student than any other. TK^ whole seems to be critically revised and corrected. Prof. Andrews was truly the stu- dent's benefactor. — M. L. Severance, North Troy, Vermont. It gives me great pleasure to bear my testimony to the superior merits of the Latin Grimmar edited by Professor Andrews and Mr. Stoddard. I express most cliperfully, unhesitatingly, and decidedly, my preference of this Grammar to that of Adam, which has, for so long a time, kept almost undisputed sway in our schools. — Dr. C. Beck, Cam- bridge. I know of no Grammar published in this country, which promises to answer so well the purposes of elementary classical instruction, and .shall he glad to see it introduced Into our best schools. — Charles K. Dillaway, Boston. Tour new Intin Grammar appears to me much better suited to the use of student! than any -ther grammar I am acquainted with. — Prof. Wm. M Hallani, Hartford, Ct. ft NEW SERIES OF LATIN SCHOOL BOOKS. I have adopted the Latin flrammar of Andrews and Stoddard in the school under my charge, believing it better adapted, upon the whole; for elementary instruction ttian any similar work which I have examined. It combines the improvements of the recunt Ger- man works on the subject with the best features of that old favorite of the schools. Dr. Adam's Latin Grammar. — Henry Drisler. Professor of Latin in Columbia College. A careful review of the Revised Edition of Andrews and Stoddard's Latin Grammar, Bhows that tills favorite text-book still continues to deserve the affections and confidence of Teachers and Pupils, incorporating as it does the results of Prof. Andrews' own con- stant study for many years with the investigations of English and German Philologists. No other Grammar is now so well fitted to meet the wants of the country as the rapid demand for it will show beyond doubt. — A. S. Hartwell, University of St. Louis. This Grammar of the Latin Language, now universally pronounced the very best, is greatl;^ improved by the corrections, revisions and additions of this revised edition. We do not believe a text-book was ever written which introduced so great an improvement In the method of teaching Latin, as this has done. We wish the revised edition the greatest success, which we are sure it merits. — Rhode Island Sclioolmastcr. I have examined your revised edition with considerable care, and do not hesitate to pronounce it a great improvement upon the old editions, and as near perfection as we are likely to have. I have no doubt it will come into general use. — A. Williams, Professoi of Latin, Jefferson College, Canonsbv.rg, Pa. I have been much interested in the Revised Edition. The improvement is very striking, and I shall no longer think of giving it up and putting Zumpt in its place. I am much pleased with the great improvement in the typography. You have given to our schools a book fifty per cent better in every I'espect, and I trust you will have your reward in largely increased saXes.— Williain J. Fiolfe, Master of Oliver Higli School, Lawrence, Ms. I can with much pleasure say that your Grammar seems to me much better adapted to the present condition and wants of our schools than anyone with which I am ac- quainted, and to supply that which has long been wanted — a good Latin Grammar for common use. — F. Gardner, Principal of Boston Latin School. The Latin Grammar of Andrews and Stoddard is deserving, in my opinion, of the ap- probation wiiioh so many of our ablest teachers have bestowed upon it. It is believed that, of all the grammars before the public, this has greatly the advantage, in regard both to the excellence of its arrangement, and the accuracy and copiousness of its infor- mation. — H. B. Hackett, Prof, of Biblical Literature in Newton Theological Seminary. The universal favor with which this Grammar is received was not unexpected. It will bear a thorough and tliscriminating examination. In the use of well-defined and ex- pressive terms, especially in the syntax, we know of no Latin or Greek grammar which is to be compared to this. — American Quarterly Register. These works will furnish a series of elementary publications for the study of Latin altogether in advance of any thing which has hitherto appeared, either in tliis country or in England. — A?nerican Biblical Repository. I cheerfully and decidedly bear testimony to the superior excellence of Andrews and Stoddard's Latin Grammar to any manual of the kind with which I am acquainted. Every part bears the impress of a careful compiler. The principles of syntax ai-e happily developed in the rules, whilst those relating to the moods and tenses supply an important deficiency in our former grammars. The rules of prosody are also clearly and fully ex- hibited. — Rev. Lyman Coleman, Manchester, Vt. This work bears evident marks of great care and skill, and' ripe and accurate scholar- ship in the authors. We cordially commend it to the student and teacher. — Bihlicat Repository. Andrews and Stoddard's Latin Grammar is what I expected it would be — an excellenS book. We cannot hesitate a moment in laying aside the books now in use, and intro- ducing thSs.—Rev. J. Penney, D. D., Netv York. Andrew? and Stoddard's Latin Grammar bears throughout evidence of original and thorough investigation and sound criticism. It is, in my apprehension, so far as sim- plicity is concerned, on the one hand, and philosophical views and sound scholarship on the other, far preferable to other grammars ; a work at the same time highly creditable to its authors and to our country. — Professor A. Packard, Bowdoin College, Maine. I do not hesitate to pronounce Andrews and Stoddard's Latin Grammar superior to any other with which I am acquainted. I have never seen, any where, a greater amount of Valuable matter compressed within limits equally narrow. — Hon. John Hall, Principai of Ellington School, Conn. We have no hesitation in pronouncing this Grammar decidedly supsrior fte i/aj noti Id use. — Bat on Recorder. VALUABLE CLASSICAL WORKS. ^escnius. Robinson's Hebrew Lexicon. Sixth Ediiion, Revised and Stereotyyjcd. A Hebrew and English Lexicon of the Old Testament, in- chiding theBiblical Chaldee. Translated from the Latin of William Geseiiius, late Professor of Theology in the University of Halle-Wittemberg. By Edward RoBLXsoN, D. D., LL. I)., Professor of Biblical Literature in the Union The- ological Seminary, New York. A new edition, with corrections and large ad- ditions, partly furnished by the author in manuscript, and partly condensed from his larger Thesaurus, as compiled by Roediger. These corrections and additions were made by Dr. Gesenius, during an interval of several vears, while carrying his Thesaurus through the press, and were transcribed ar^J fur- nished by" him expressly for this edition. They will be found to be very riumerous. every page having been materially corrected and enlarged, and a large number of articles having been re-written. It is printed on a new type, the face and cut of which is very beautiful, and has been highly commended and approved. Dr. Robinson had already been trained to the business of lexicographical labor, when he began the translation of the pi-usent work. He is, in au uncommon degree, master of his own native tongue. Ue has diligence, patience, perseverance — yea, the iron dili- gence of Gesonius himself. For aught that I have yet been able to discover, all that can rca.sonalily bo expected or desired, has been done by the translator; not only as tn rcu- dering the work into English, but as to the manner and the accuracy of printing. The work will speak for itself, on the first opening. It does honor, in its appearance, to edi- tor, printers, and publishers. I have only to add my hearty wish, that its beautiful white pages may be consulted and turned over, until they become thoroughly worn with the hands of the purchasers. — Frof. Sliiart, in the Biblical Repository. There is no lexicon in English that can be put on a level with Robinson's. I recommend the present as the best Lexicon of the Hebrew and Biblical Chaldee which an Kiiu'li-'^h scholar can have. — Rev. Dr. Satnuel Davidson, of London. Gesenius' Lexicon is known wherever Hebrew is studied. On the merits of this work criticism has long ago pronounced its verdict of approval. — London Jewish Chronicle. This is a very beaiitiful and complete edition of the best Hebrew Lexicon ever j'et produced. Gesenius, as a Hebrew philologist, is unequalled. — London Clerical Journal. This is decidedly the most complete edition of Gesenius' Manual Hebrew Lexicon. — London Journal of Sacred Literature. Iiobinsoifs Ifcirmomi of % §mph, m feeeli A Harmony of the Four Gospels, in Greek, accord- ing to the text of Hahn. Newly aiTauged, with Explanatory Notes, by Edwahd RonixsoN. D. D., LL. D., Professor of Biblical Literature in the Union The- ological Seminary, New York. Revised Edition. This work of Dr. Robinson confines itself to the legitimate sphere of a Harmony of the Gospels: and we do not hesitate to s.ay that in this sphere it will be found to be all that a Harmony need or can be. The original text is printed with accuracy and elegance. It is a feast to the eyes to look upon a page of so much beauty. Its arrangement is dis- tinguished for simplicity and convenience. No one will ever be able to comprehend the relations of the Gospels to each other, or acquire an ex.act knowledge of their contents, unle.ss he studies them with the aid of a Harmony. The present work furni.?hes in this respect just the facility which is n,»eded; and we trust that among its other effects, it vill serve to direct attention more strongly to the importance of this mode of study. — Fro/. Harkett, 0/ Newton Theological ISeminary. alnur's §iritl]nutit» Arithmetic, Oral and Written, practi(;ally applied by means cf Suggestive Questions. By Thoma.s H. Palmek, .Author of the Prize Essav mi Education entitled the "Teacher's Mamial," "The Moral Instruc- tor,"" «itc. 7 VALUAi^LE CLASSICAL WORKS. Robinson's |)nrmonn of % Gospels, in €nglisl]. A Harmony of the Four Gospels, in English, accord Ing to the common version ; newly arranged, with Explanatory Notes. Bv Edward Robixson, D. D., LL. D. The object of this work is to obtain a full and consecutive accoiint of all the facts of our Lord's life and ministiy. In order to do this, the four gospel nar- ratives have been so brought together, as to present as nearly as possible the true chronological order, and where the same transaction is described by more than one writer, the different accounts are placed side by side, so as to fill out and sui)ply each other. Such an an-angement affords the only full and perfect survey of "nil the testimony relating to any and every portion of our Lonl's lus- tiry. ' The evangelists are thus made their own best interpreters; and it i.s Bhowii how wonderfully they are supplementary to each other in minute as well as in important particulars, and in this way is brought out fully and clearlv the fundamental characteristics of their testimony, unity in diversity. To Bible classes. Sabbath schools, and all who love and seek the truth in their closets and in their families, this work will be found a useful assistant. I have used " Robinson's English Harmony" in teaching a Bible Class. The result, in my own mind, is a conviction of the great merits of this work, and its adaptation to im- part the highest life and interest to Bible Class exercises, and generally to the diligent study ef the Gospel. It is much to be desired that every one accustomed to searching the Scriptures should have this invaluable aid.— Ref. Dr. Skinner, Neiv York. gobiHSOit's iitU0nari| of tl]t §ibh. Robinson's Bible Dictionary. A Dictionary for the use of Schools and Young Person^. By Edward Robinson, D. D., LL. I). Illustrated with Engi-avings on wood, and Maps of Canaan, Judea, Asia Minor, and the Peninsula of Mount Sinai, Idumea, etc. ^Umtiits cf gtstronom]!. The Elements of Astronomy ; or The World as it is and as it Appears. By the author of " Theory of Teaching," " Edward's First Lessons in Grammar,'' etc. Revised m manuscript by GeorM P. Bond, Esq., of the Cambridge Obsei-^'atory, to whom the author is also indebted for super- intending its passage through the press. St0tt's lamilg '§x\iU, Scott's Family Bible. Boston Stereotype Edition. 6 vols, royal 8vo., contaiiiinij all the Notes, Practical Observations, Marginal References, and Critical Remarks, as in the most approved London edition, with a Hue engraved likeness of the Author, Family Record, etc. This Edition is the onlv one that has, or can have, the benefit of the final Additions and Eipendations of the Author. The extent of these may l;e ViAied from the fiict that upwards of Four Hundred Pages of letter-i}ress were added; and as they consist chieflv of Critical Remarks, their importance tc the Biblical student is at once apparent. The Preface to the entire work con- tains an elaborate and compendious view of the evidences that the Holy Scrip- tures were given bv inspiration of God. Prefixed to each Book, bcth m the Old and New Testament, is an Introduction, or statement of its purport and mtont. There are also copious Shirginal References, with viirious lables, a Ohr< i!i>i )gici I Index, and a copious Topical Index. 'Orders solicited. GRAMMAR LATIN LANGUAGE; USE OF SCHOOLS AND COLLEGES. E. A. ANDREWS AND S. STODDARD. ONE HUNDREDTH P:DITI0N. REVISED WITH CORRECTIONS AND ADDITIONS, BY E. A. ANDREWS, LL. D. BOSTON: PUBLISHED BY CROCKER AND BREWSTER. New York: A. S. Barnes & Co. 1 8 G 8. Entered according to Act of Congress, in the year 1867, BY CROCKER AND BREWSTER, In the Clerk's Office of the District Court of Massachusetts. /Oi.y/ PREFACE. As more thau twenty years have elapsed, since the first publication of thii Grammar, it can scarcely be necessary, in offering to the public a revised edition of the work, to make more than a passing allusion to its original plan or to the circumstances tc which it owed its origin. For some years previous to the date of its publication, the progress of classi- cal learning in Europe, and particularly In Germany, had been such, as pkiuly to indicate the necessity of a corresponding advance in the manuals of Latin grammar employed in the schools of this country. Their deficiencies had indeed become so apparent, that various attempts had already been made to furnish a remedy by means of translations of German grammars ; but none of these, however excellent in many respects, had seemed to be fully adapted to the purpose for which they were intended. To unite the acknowledged excellencies of the older English manuals and of the more recent German grammars was the special aim of the authors of this work; and to this end their attention was directed, first to the preparation of more extended rules for the pronunciation of the language, secondly to a clearer exposition of its inflectional changes, thirdly to the proper basis of its syntax, and fourthly to greater precision in its rules and definitions. The system of rules for the division and accentuation of Latm words, pre- pared in pursuance of the plan which has just been specified, was accordingly more copious than any previously found in the Latin grammars in common use in this country. For the purpose also of preventing the fonnation of erro- neous habits of pronunciation in the early part of the student's course, the pe- nultimate quantities of all Latin words occurring in the Grammar were care- fully marked, unless determinable by some general rule, and the paradigms were divided and accented in such a mamier as to indicate their true pro- nunciation. In their treatment of Latin etymology, the authors aimed to render its study less a mere exercise of memory, and in a greater degree an efficient aid in the general cultivation of the mental powers. The principal means adopted for this purpose consisted in the practical distinction, every where made in treating inflected words, between the root, or ground-form, and the termination. 4 PREFACE. The third promineni ^lectiliarity of the original YTorlL -was its direct derivatloi: of the rules of Syntax from the logical analysis of sentences, and its distinct Bpecificatiou of the particular use of each of the several words of which a sen- tence is composed. This method of treating syntax — a method previously un- kno^v^l in the schools of this country — has, since that period, been extensively adopted, and in some instances greatly extended, particularly in a portion of the English grammars recently published in this country, and has probably contributed more to the advancement of grammatical science, than any other innovation of modern times. The errors noticed in the original work have been corrected, as successive editions have issued from the press, but no opportunity has occurred, until the present, of thoroughly revising it in every part. Two years of continuous labor have now been devoted to its revision, and to the purpose of rendering it conformable in all respects to the advanced position which it originally aspired to occupy. In aU the modifications which have now been made, I have aimed to accom- plish these two purposes — to preserve, as far as possible, the identity of the work, and at the same time to bring it as near, as should be practicable, to the present state of philological science. Hence, while I have made no changes either in language or arrangement, but such as appeared to me quite neces- sary, I have omitted none which logical accuracy or requisite fulness of ex- j)lanation seemed to demand. In doing even this it soon became evident, that the changes and additions must be more numerous, than would well consist with the convenient use of the old and the new editions in the same classes. Though not hisensible of the trouble occasioned to the teacher by altera- tions in a familiar text-book, I could not but suppose, that such modifications as the progress of the iBst twenty years had rendered necessaiy, would still be welcomed by him, notwithstanding the personal inconvenience arising from the disturbance of his previous associations. To his pupils, who will liave known no other form of the Grammar, than that in which it now appears, the work, it is believed, will not only be as easy of comprehension in its new, as in its old form, but in its practical application far more satisfactory. Of the minor changes and 8-'lditions occurring on almost every page, and even of the occasional reajrvigement of small portions of the materials, it is unnecessary to speak parti ,alarly. The student familiar with former editions will at once detect these slight modifications, and nota them in his memory for future use ; and though he may fail to find a rule, exception, or remark on the page where he has been wont to see it, he will still meet with it in the frame relative position, — in the same section and subdivision of the section in which it formerly appeared. In the department of Orthoepy will now be found some account of the Con tinental mode of pronouncing Latin; and, by means of the joint exhibition of PREFACE. a this and of the English methods, the stndent -mil be able to use the Gramnrir with equal facility, whether choosing to adhere to the usual pronunciation of English and American scholars, or preferring that of the continental schools. In the Etymology of nouns, no other alteration need be specified, except the introduction, in the third declension, of " Rules for forming the nominative singular from the root." These are copied, in a modified form, from the edi- tor's First Latin Book. In themselves they are of considerable utility in showing the mutual relations between the sounds of certain letters, and they are also closely connected with corresponding changes in some of the verbal roots. In the Etymology of adjectives, besides the minor modifications aheady alluded to, a few chasnges in arrangement have been made in those sections which lelate to Comparison. To pronouns have been added some remarks on Pronominal Adjectives, which seemed to require a more particular notice, than they had heretofore received, both in their relation to each other and to the Adverbial Correlatives. The Etymology of particles has been treated somewhat more fully than in former editions — a fulness especially observable in relation to adverbs and conjunctions, and which was rendered necessary by the more extended treatment of those particles in the revised SjTitax. In almost every section of the Syntax the student will meet with modifica- tions and especially with additions, which, as in other parts of the work, are introduced in such a manner as seldom to interfere with the references made to former editions in the series based upon this Grammar. The principal ex- ception to the latter remark is to be found in sections 247 — 251, which relate to certain uses of the ablative. A comparison of the Prosody in the present and former editions will show, that it has been revised with mmute care in every part. Similar attention has also been given to the Appendix, in which will be found some additions relat- ing to Roman Money, Weights and Measm-es. For the greater convenience of he student the Index in this edition has been much enlarged. In conclusion, I would briefly indicate the principal sources from which have been derived the various additions and corrections, to which allusion has been made. In preparing the original work, the earlier editions of Zumpt't Grammar were consulted at almost every step, and while frequent use was made of the grammars of Scheller, Grant, Adam, Ruddiman, Hickie and ethers, the treatises of Zumpt were even then regarded as the most valuable embodiment of the principles of Latin philology. It was therefore natural and almost unavoidable, in revising a work which had in so many points re- ceived both its form and its substance from the earlier labors of that distin- guished grammarian, to look to his maturer works for many of the materials b\ means of which our original sketch should be made more complete. Accordingly I have constantly consulted the last edition c his Grammar, translated by Dr. S^hmitz, and have freely incorporated in this edition such 1* O PREFACE. of its materials, as were suited to my purpose. In most cases his ideas Lave been either expressed in my o^vn language, or in language so modified as to suit the general plan of my work. In the Etymology, and not unfrequently in the Syntax also, the copious Grammar of Ramshom has furnished valuable materials; and the Grammars of Key and of Kuhner, the latter translated by Prof. Ghamplin, have been consulted with profit and satisfaction. In the sections comprising conjunctions, and especially in those relating to gram- matical analysis, I am happy to acknowledge my indebtedness to Prof. S. S. Greene pf Brown University. To the sources already specified I must add the Latin Lexicon of Dr. Freund, in editing a translation of which I had frequent occasion to note such matters as promised to be of utility in the revision of this Grammar. The additions in the Appendix relating to Roman money, etc., are taken principally from Dr. Riddle's translation of Dr. Freund's School Dictionary. To these references I will only add, that such other notes re- lating to Latin philology, as I have made during the past twenty years, so far as they were adapted to my purpose, have either been used in my former occasional corrections, or are incorporated in the present edition. In taking a final leave of the earliest of the elementary Latin works with which my name has been associated, and with which, in my own mind, must ever be connected the pleasant memory of my early iriend and associate, Prof. Stoddard, I trust I shall be pardoned in commending it once more to the kind indulgence of the teachers of this country, and in expressing the hope that, m its present form, it will be deemed not altogether unworthy of a continuance of the favor which it has so long received. I cannot indeed ven- ture to indulge the hope, that all the imperfections of the work have even now been removed, or that, in my attempts to render it more perf'3ct, I may not sometimes have fallen into new eiTors ; but this I can truly say that since its first publication I have devoted much time to its revision, and have lought to manifest my sense of the kindness with which it has been received, by doing all in my power to render it less unworthy cf public 'avor. E. A ANDREWS. New Britain, Qmn., OcL, 1867. CONTENTS. ORTHOGRAPHY. Page. Letters 9 Division of letters 10 Diphthongs 10 Punctuation 10 ORTHOEPY. Continental pronunciation 11 English pronunciation 11 Sounds of the letters 11 of the vowels 11 of the diphthongs 12 of the consonants 13 Quantity of syllables 14 Accentuation 15 Latin accents 15 English accents 16 Division of words into syllables. ... 16 ETYMOLOGY. Nouns 19 Gender 20 Number 22 Cases 23 Declensions 23 First declension 25 Greek nouns 26 Second declension 26 Greek nouns 29 Third declension 29 Formation of nom. sing 30 Rules for the gender 33 ■ — oblique cases. ... 36 Greek nouns 45 Fourth declension 45 Fifth declension 47 Declension of compound nouns . . 47 Lrregular nouns 48 Variable nouns 48 Defective nouns 49 Redundant nouns 54 Derivation of nouns 56 Composition of nouns 60 Adjectives 61 Adjectives of the first and second declensions 62 Adjectives of the third declension 64 Kules for the oblique cases. ... 67 Page Irregular adjectives 69 Defective adjectives 69 Redundant adjectives 69 Numeral adjectives 70 Comparison of adjectives 74 In-egular comparison 75 Defective comparison 76 Derivation of adjectives 78 Composition of adjectives 81 Pronouns *: 82 Substantive pronouns 82 Adjective pronouns 83 Demonstrative pronouns 83 Litensive pronouns 85 Relative pronouns 86 Interrogative pronouns 87 Indefinite pronouns 88 Possessive pronouns 89 Patrial pronouns 90 Pronominal adjectives 90 Verbs 91 Voices 91 Moods 92 Tenses 93 Numbers 95 Persons 95 Participles, gerunds, and supines 95 Conjugation 96 Table of terminationi 98 Sum 100 Prosum, Possum, etc 102 First conjugation 103 Second conjugation 108 Third conjugation HI Fourth conjugation 116 Deponent verbs 120 Remarks on the conjugations.. . 121 Periphrastic conjugations 123 General rules of conjugation . . . 124 Formation of second and third roots 125 First conjugation 125 Second conjugation 129 Third conjugation 131 Fourth conjugation 139 IiTCgular verbs 140 Defective verbs 146 Impersonal verbs 147 8 CONTENTS. Page. Redundant verbs 150 Derivation of verbs 152 Composition of verbs 154 Particles 156 Adverbs 155 Derivation of adverbs 160 Composition of adverbs 162 Comparison of adverbs 163 Pkepositions 163 Prepositions in composition. . . . 167 Conjunctions 170 Interjections 176 SYNTAX. Sentences and Propositions 177 Subject 178 Predicate 181 Apposition 183 4d)ectives 184 Relatives...... 189 Demonstratives, etc 193 Reflexives 198 Nominative 200 Subject-nominative and verb.. . 200 Predicate-nominative 205 Genitive 206 Genitive after nouns 206 after partitives 211 after adjectives 214 after verbs 216 of place 221 after particles 222 Dative 222 Dative after adjectives 222 after verbs 225 after particles 230 Accusative 231 Accusative after verbs 231 after prepositions . . . 237 of time and space . . 239 ————— of place 240 after adjectives, ad- verbs and interjections 241 Subject-accusative 242 Vocative 243 Ablative 243 Ablative after prepositions 243 after certain nouns, adjectives and verbs 244 of cause, etc 246 of price 252 of time 252 of place 254 — after comparatives 255 absolute 258 Connection of tenses 261 Indicative mood 263 ftubmnot' 79 mood 2€a Page. Protasis and apodosis 268 Subjunctive after particles.. . . . 269 after qui 275 ■ in indirect questions 278 in inserted clauses.. 279 Imperative mood 281 Infinitive mood 2^2 Participles 292 Gerunds and gerundives 296 Supines 299 Adverbs 300 Prejiositions 303 Conjunctions 304 Interjections 306 Arrangement 806 Arrangement of words 306 of clauses 310 Analysis 312 Parsmg 313 PROSODY. Quantity 319 General rules 319 Special rules 322 First and middle syllables .. . . 322 Derivative words 322 Compound words 324 Increment of nouns 325 Increment of verbs 329 Penults and antepeuults... . 331 Final syllables 336 Versification 341 Feet • 341 Metre 342 Verses 342 Figures of prosody 343 Arsis and thesis 346 Caesura 347 Different kinds of metre 347 Dactylic metre 347 Anapaestic metre 350 Iambic metre 351 Trochaic metre 353 Choriambic metre 354 Ionic metre 355 Compound metres 356 Combination of verses 356 Horatian metres 357 Key to the odes of Horace 359 APPENDIX. Grammatical figures 361 Tropes and figures of rhetoric 363 Roman mode of reckoning time. . . 367 money, weight, etc. 370 Abbreviations 374 Different ages of Roman literature 374 Writers of the different ages 375 INDEX 878 LATIN GRAMMAR. § 1, The Latin language is the language spoken by the an- cient Romans. Latin Grammar teaches the principles of the Latin language. These relate, 1. To its -written characters ; 2. To its pronunciation ; 8. To the classification and derivation of its words ; 4. To the construction of its sentences ; 6. To the quantity of its syllables, and its versification. The first part is called Orthography ; the second, Orthoepy ; the third, Etymology ; the fourth, Syntax ; and the fifth, Prosody. ORTHOGRAPHl. § S5. Orthography treats of the letters, and other characters of written language, and the proper mode of speUing words. 1. The Latin alphabet consists of twenty-five letters. They have the same names as the corresponding characters in English. They areA,a; B,b; C,c; D, d ; E, e ; F, f ; G,g; H,h;I,i;J,j; K,k; L,l; M,m; N,n; O, o ; P,p; Q,q; R,r; S,s; T,t; U,u; V, v; X,x; Y,y; Z, z. 2. The Romans used only the capital letters. 8. / and j were anciently but one character, as were likewise « and v. 4. W is not found in Latin words, and k occurs only at the begiiming of a few words before o, and even in these c is commonly used, except in their ab- breviated form ; as, ^ or Kai. for Kalendce or GalendcB, the Calends. 6. F and z are found only in words derived from the Greek. 6. ff, thongh called a letter, only denotes a breathing, or aspiration. The consonants are divided into 10 DIPHTHONGS. PUNCTUATION. § 3 5 DIVISION OF LETTERS. § 3« Letters are divided into vowels and consonants. 1. The vowels are a, e, i, o^ u, y. 'Liquids, I, m, n, r. ( Labials, p, b, f, v. Mutes, < Palatals, c, g, k, q, j. (Linguals, . . . . t^ d. Sibilant, s. Double consonants, . . . . x, z. Aspirate, h. 2. Xis equivalent to cs or ^s; z to to or ds; and, except in com- {)ound words, the double consonant is always written, instead of the etters which it represents. In some Greek words x is •equivalent to chs. Diphthongs. § 4. Two vowels, in immediate succession, in the same syl- lable, are called a diphthong. The diphthongs are ae, at, aw, ei, cm, oe, oi, ua, tie, ui, mo, ««, and yu Ae and oe are frequently written together, cb, ce. PUNCTUATION. § O. The only mark of punctuation used by the ancients was a point, which denoted pauses of different length, according as it was placed at the top, the middle, or the bottom of the line. The modems use the same marks ol punctuation, in writing and printing Latin, as in their own languages, and as- Bim to them the same power. Marks of quantity and of accent are sometimes found in Latin authors, espe- cially in elementary works : — 1. There are three marks of quantity, viz. " , -, >< ; the first de- notes that the vowel over which it stands is short ; the second, that il is long ; the third, that it is doubtful, that is, sometimes long and sometimes short. 2. There are also three written accents — the acute ('), the grave ( ^), and the circumflex ('). These were used by the old gramma- rians to denote the rising and sinking of the voice in the Roman mode of pronouncing words. (See §§ 14 and 15.) In modern elementary Latin works, the acute marks the emphatic syllable of a word, (§ 16), the grave distinguishes certain particles from other words spelled in the same manner ; as, quod, because ; quod, which ; and the circum- flex is placed over certain penultimate and final syllables that aro formed by contraction. The diaeresis ( ") denotes that the vowel over which it stands does uot form a diphthong with the preceding vowel ; as, aer, the air. It is uaud principally with ae, ai, and oe. §6,7 ORTHCRVT. SOUNDS OP THE VOWELS. 11 ORTHOEPY. § 6. Orthoepy treats of the right pronunciation of words. The ancient pronunciation of the Latin language being in a great measure lost, the learned, in modem times, have applied to it those principles which regulate the pronunciation of their ovm languages; and hence has arisen, Lu diiVerent countries, a great diversity of practice. The various systems now prevalent in Europe, may, however, be reduced to two— the Continental and the English— the former prevailing, with only slight diversities, in most of the countries of continental Europe, and the latter in England. Tlieir principal difference is found in the pronunciation of the vowels and^ diphthongs, since, in both methods, the consonants are pronounced in nearly the same manner. The Continental Method. [According to this system, each of the vowels, when standing at the end of a syllable, is considered as having but one sound, which, however, may be either short or long. Thus, Short a, as in hat. Long 5, as in no. Long a, as in father. Short ii, as in tub. Short e, as in met. Long u, as in full. Long e, as in there. ae or oe, as e in there. Short i, as in sit. au, as ou in our. Long I, as in machine. eu, as in feudal. l*iort 6, as in not. ei, as i in ice. Remark. These sounds are sometimes slightly modified when followed by a consonant in the same syllable.] The English Method. In the following rules for dividing and pronouncing Latin words, regard has been had both to English analogy and to the laws of Latin accentuation. See 4 14 and 15. The basis of this system is that which is exhibited by Walker in his " Pronunciation of Greek ancl Latui Proper Names." To pronounce cor- lectly, accordmg to this method, a knowledge of the following particulars is requisite : — 1. Of the sounds of the letters in all their combinations. 2. Of the quantities of the penultimate and final syllables. 8. Of the place of the accent, both primary and secondary. 4. Of the mode of dividing words into syllables. OF THE SOUNDS OF THE LETTERS. I. Of the Vowels. § 7. A vowel, when ending an acr.ented syllable, has al- ways its long English sound ; as, pn'-ter, d^'-cUt, w'^wm, t^'-ri-Ms (ug-zo'-re-us), inexkaustus (in-eg-zaus'-tus). Exc. 2. X, ending an accented syllable before i followed by a vowel, and before m ending a syllable, has the power of hsh ; as, noxius (nok'-she-us), pexui (pek'-shu-i). Remark. Ch and ph. before th, In the beginning of a word, are silent; as, Chthonia (tho'-ni-a). Phihia (thl -a). Also in the following combinations of consonants, in the b«. ginning of words of Greek origin, the first letter is not sounded: — mne-mon'-l-ca, gna'- vus, tme'sia, Cte'si-as, Ptol-e-ma'-us, jisal'4o. OF THE QUANTITIES OF THE PENULTIMATE AND FINAL SYLLABLES. § 13. !• The quantity of a syllable is the relative time oc- cupied in pronouncing it. 2. A short syllable requires, in pronunciation, half the time of a long one. Rem. The penultimate syllable, or penvit, is the last syllable but one. The antepentdt Is the last syllable but two. The quantity of a syllable is generally to be learned from the rules of prosody, H 282 — 801 ; but for the convenience of the student, the following general rules are here in- serted: — 8. A vowel before another vowel or A is short. 4. Diphthongs, not beginning with u, are long. § 14, 15. ACCENTUATION. 15 5. A vowel before x, z, j, or any two consonants, except a mute followed by a liquid, is long by position, as it is called. 6. A vowel naturally sbort before a mute followed by a liquid is common, i. e. either long or short. In this Grammar, when the quantity of a penult is determined by one of the preceding rules, it ia not marked ; in other cusea, except in dissyllables, the proper mark is writteD over its vowel. To pronounce Latin words correctly, it is necessary to ascertain the quantities of theii last two syllables only ; and the rules for the quantities of final syllables would, for this purpose, be unnecessary, but for the occasional addition of enclitics. As these are g*?ii- erally monosyllables, and, for the purpose of accentuation, are considered as parts of the words to which they are annexed, they cause the final syllable of the original word to become the penult of the compound. But as the enclitics begin with a consonant, the final vowels of all words ending with a consonant, if previously short, are, by the addi- tion of an encUtic, made long by position. It is necessary, therefore, to learn the quan- tities of those final syllables only which end with a vowel. OF ACCENTUATION. I. Of Latin Accents. § l4:. 1. Accent, in Latin, signifies the rising and falling of the voice m pronouncing the syllables of a Latin word. It is a general rule of the Latin language, that every word has its accent. The enclitics, however, have no ac- cent of their own, but they modify the accent of the words to which they are annexed, and prepositions lose their accent, when they precede the cases which thev govern. 2. The Latin language has three accents, the acute ('), or rising tone, the grave ( ^ ), or falling tone, and the circumflex C), composed of the acute and the grave, i. e. of the rising and the falling tone. 3. A monosyllable, when short by nature, takes the acute, when long by nature, the circumflex accent; as, pix, it, pars; dus, jus, spes. 4. In words of two syllable.^, the penult is always accented ; as, pd'ter, md'-ter, pen'-na. Rem. 1. Words of two syllables have the circumflex accent, when the vowel of the pe- nult is naturally long and that of the last syllable short ; as, KO-wa, ind-sa, lii-cS^ jfi-ris ; If otherwise, they have the acute; as, liS'-mO, dS'as, RO'^ma (abl.), and ar'-ti, in which a is long only by position. 5. In words of. more tlian two syllables, if the penult is long, it is accented ; but if it is short, the accent is on the antepenult ; as, a-mi'-ciis, dom'-i-nus. Kem. 2. When the accent of a word of more than two syllables falls upon the penult. It may be either the pircumflex or the acute according as the last syllable is short or long The antepenult can take no accent except the acute, and in no case can the accent bs drawn farther back than to the antepenult. Exc. Vocatives of the second declension in i, instead of ie, from nominatives in ins, and genitives in i, instead of ii, are accented as they would be, if the re- jected letters were annexed, i. e. with the acute upon the penult, even when It is short; as, Vir-yil-i; Va-le'-ri, in-ge'^ii. So, also, the compounds of _/acto with words which are not prepositions ; as, cal-e-fd'-cit, tep-e-fd'-cit. § 15. If the penult is common, the accent, in prose, is upon the antepenult; as, vol'-u-cris, phar'-e-tra, ib'-i-que : but genitives in ius, in which i is common, accent their penult in prose ; as u-fit' -us, is-ti'-us. 1(^ DIVISION OF WORDS. § 16-18. • Rem. 8. All the syllables of a Latin word, except that on which the acute or circuin- Bex accent falls, are supposed to have th» grave accent, and were pronounced with tha lower tone. 1. The rules for the accentuation of compound and simple words are the same ; as, se'-cum, sub'-e-o. 2. In accentuation, the enclitics que, ne, t?e, and also those which are annexed to pronouns,* are accounted constituent parts of the words to which they are subjoined ; as, i-ta, it'-d-que ; vi'-rum, vi-rum'-que. n. Of English Accknts. § IG. Accent, in English, is a particular stress of voice upon certain syllables of words. Cf § 5, 2. According to the English method of pronouncing Latin, a word may have two, tliree, or even foxir accents. That accent which is nearest to the termina- tion of the word, and which always corresponds in position with the Latin ac- cent, is called the primary or principal accent, and the secondary accent is that which next precedes the primary. The third and fourth accents, in like man- ner, precede the secondary, and are subject in all respects to the same rules ; as, jM'-ter, md'-ter, ser-m&'-nes, dom'-i-nis ; per^cf-u-lum, con"-ivrTaf-ti-o, op"'- por-tu"-ni-ta'-tes, ex-er""-ci-ta'"-ti-on"-irim'-qv^. 1. If only two syllables precede the primary accent, the secondary accent is on the first ; as, mod"~e-ra-tus, tol"-e-rab'-i-lis. 2. If three or four syllables stand before the primary accent, the secondary accent is placed, sometimes on the first, and sometimes on the second syllable; as, de-mon"-stra-ban-tur, ad"-o-les-cen'-ti-a. 3. Some words which have only four syllables before the primary accent, and all which have more than four, have three accents ; as, inod"'-e-ra"-tiro'-niSf tol"'-e-ra-biL"-i-o-rem, ex-er"'-ci-ta"-ti-d'-nis. DIVISION OF WORDS INTO SYLLABLES. VOWELS. § 17. Every Latin word is to be divided into as many syllables, as it has separate vowels and diphthongs. Remark. In the following rules, the terra vowel includes not only smgle vowels, but diphthongs ; and when a particular vowel is mentioned, a diph- thong, also, ending with that vowel is intended. CONSONANTS. SPECIAL RULES. § 18. Remark. The following special rules, relating to particular letters or to particular combinations of letters, are in aU cases to be regarded rather than the general rules, §§ 19 — 23, when the latter are inconsistent with the former. 1. H, when standing alone between two vowels, is always joined to the vowel that follows it. Thus, rrd'-hi, tra'-he-re., co'-hors, co"-hor-ta^-ti-o. *Them are te, met, pte, ee cine, and dtm ; as, tute, eg5met, nuapte, hicee, Awrtne, idtm § lS-21. DIVISION OF WORDS. SIMPLE WORDS. 17 2. C//, ph, and th, in the division of words into syllables, are con- sidered, not as separate letters, but as single aspirated mutes, and hence are never separated. Thus, A-chil'-les, Ach'Wor^V-na, Nepli'-e-le, Tef-thys. 8. Gl, tl, and ihl, when standing alone between any two vowels, unless the first be u, and bt after u are always separated. Thus, ^g'-le, Ag-lau'-nts, Af-las, ath-lef4-cus ; — Puff-U-us, Pvb-li&-d-la, rt^ ptil/-li-ca. 4. In writing syllables, x, when standing alone between two vowels, is united to the vowel before it, but, in pronouncing such syllablea, its elementary sounds are separated. Thus, sax'-inn (sak'-sum) ; a»-iZ'-to (ak-sil'-lah) ; ex-tm'-plum (eg-zem'-plum) ; ux-o'-^'ir^iis (ug-zo'-re-iis). GENERAL RULES. L Simple Words. ? 1^*3, A. — A single Consonant between two Vowels. ) . A single consonant, or a mute with I or r, between the last two r:-'>''els of a word, or between the vowels of any two unaccented syl- '.ubles, must be joined to the latter vowel. Thus, t in pa'-ter and au'-tem. ; th in ce'-ther ; cl in Hi^er^-d-cles ; q in a'-qua ; cr in a'-cris and vol'-u-cris ; chr in a'-chras ; r in toV'-er^oAnl'-i-^s ; m in et"-y- mo-la'-gi-a; linamf'-bu-la-td'-ri-us; and gr m per'^-e-gi'i-^ia'-ti-o. Respecting ch and th cf. § 18, 2. Exc. Tib'-i and sib'-i are commonly excepted. § 90. 2. A single consonant, or a mute with I or r, before the vowel of an accented syllable, must be joined to the accented vowel. Thxis, t in i-tin'-e^a ; d invi-dv'-to; th in ce-ihe'-ri-us ; cl in Eit-cll'-des and Mer^'-a-cle'-a ; gr in a^gres'-tis and a-griy I ot r in the cases before mentioned, when standing between two vowels, must be sepa- rated. Thus, rp in coi-'-pus, rm in for' -ma and ger-ma'nus ; rv in ca-ter'^a ; sc in ad-o-les'-cens ; nn in an'-nus ; plith in aph'-tha ; cch in Bac'-chus and Ba&'-cha- na'-li-a ; and thl in atMe'-ta. C. — Three or four Consonants between two Vowels. 1. When three consonants stand between any two vowels, the last, -V- or, if that be Z or r after a mute, the two last, are joined to the latter vowel. Thus, mpt in emp'-tor, ad-emp'-tir^ ; str in J'e-nes'-tra ; mpl in ex-em'-plum ; rthr in ar-thri'-tis. 2. When four consonants stand between two vowels, two are joined to each vowel ; as, nstr in trans-trum. n. Compound Words. § 23. 1. In dividing a compound word into syllables the com- ponent parts are to be separated, if the former part ends with a con- sonant ; as, ab-es'-se, in'-ers, cir'-cum-er'-ro, su'-per-est, sub'-i-tus, pra- ter'-e-a, trans'-i-tur, sub'-stru-o. So, also, if a consonant is inserted to prevent hiatus, it is joined to the preceding vowel ; as, prod'-e-o, red'- e-o, sed-it'-i-o. 2. But if the former part either ends with a vowel, or has dropped its termination, it is to be divided like a simple word ; as, def'-e-ro, dil'-l-gens, be-nev'-o-lus, prces'-to, eg'-o-met ; — po'-tes, po-tcs'-tis, an'gi- mad-ver'-to, ve'-ne-o (from venum, eo), 7nag-nan'-i-n- v, am-bd'-geSy lon-gce'-vus. ETYMOLOGY. § 94:. 1. Etymology treats of the different classes of words, their dei'ivation, and their vario is inflections. 2. The classes, into which words ar« divided in reference to their signifioa- tioB are called Parts of Speech. § 25, 26. NOONS. 19 3. The parts of speech in Latin are tight — Substmiive or Noun, Adjective, Pronoun, Verb, Adverb, Preposition, Conjunc- tion, and Inteijection. 4. The first four are inflected ; the last four, which are sometimes called Particles, are not injiected, except that some adverbs change their termination to express comparison. Rem. -.SubstantiTes, pronouns, and adjectives are often included by grammarians un- der the general term nouns; but, in this Grammar, the word noun is iised as synony- mous with substantive only. § 25. 1. To verbs belong Participles, Gerunds, and Supines, which partake of the meaning of the verb, and the inflection of tie noun. 2. Inflection, in Latin grammar, signifies a change in the ter- mination of a word. It is of three kinds — declension, conjugor tion, and comparison. 3. Nouns, adjectives, pronouns, participles, gerunds, and supines, are declined ; verbs are conjugated, and adjectives and adverbs are comjjared. NOUNS. § 26. 1 . A substantive or noun is the name of an object. 2. A proper noun is the name of an individual object ; as, Goesar ; Roma, Rome ; Tiberis, the Tiber. 3. A common or appellative noun is the name of a class of objects, to each of which it is alike applicable ; as, homo, man or a man ; avis, a bird ; quercus, an oak ; leo, a Hon ; mendacium, a falsehood. 4. A collective noun is one which, in the singular number, de- notes a collection of individuals ; as, exercitus, an army. Rem. 1. The following are examples of nouns used as collectiTes, tIz. exercitus, gent juvenius, multitudo, nobilUas, plebs, popiilus, turba, vis, and indgus. 5. An abstract noun is the name of a quality, action, or other attribute ; as, bonitas, goodness ; gaudium, joy ; festinatio, haste Rem. 2. A concrete, in distinction from an abstract noun, is one which denotes an ob- ject that kas an actual and independent existence ; as, Roma, hSmo, populus, fertum. f). A material noun is the name of a substance considered in the gross ; as, lignum, wood ; ferrum, iron ; clbus, food. Rem. 3. Proper, abstract, and material nouns become common, when em- ployed to denote one or more of a class of objects. A verb in the infinitive mood is often used !vs an abstract noun 7. To nouns belong gender, number, and case. REitf. 4. Adjectives and participles have likewise different gejiders, nnia- J>ers, and ca^es, corresponding 'o those of nouns. 20 GS,NDER. § 27-29 GENDER. § 27. 1. The gindei' of a noun is its distinction in regard to sex. 2. Nouns have three genders — the masculine, the feminine, and the neuter. 3. The gender of Latin nouns is either natwal or grammatical. 4. Those nouns are naturally masculine or feminine, which are used to de- signate the sexes ; as, vir, a man ; muUer, a woman. 5. Those are gi-ammatically masculine or feminine, which, though denoting objects that are neither male nor female, take adjectives of the form appropriat- ed to nouns denoting the sexes. Thus, domtnuSy a lord, is naturally masculine, because it denotes a male ; but sermo, Bpeech, is grammatically masculine, because, though not indicative of sex, it takes an adjective of that form which is appropriated to nouns denoting males. 6. The grammatical gender of Latin nouns depends either on their significa- tion, or on their declension and termination. The following are the general rales of gender, in reference to signification. Many exceptions to them, on account of termination, occur: these will be specified under the, several declensions. § S8. Masculines. 1. Names, proper and appellative, ot all male beings are masculine ; as, Homerus, Homer ; pater, a father ; consul, a consul ; equus, a horse. As proper names usually follow the gender of the general name under which they are comprehended; hence, 2. Names of rivers, winds, and months, are masculine, because Jiuvius, ventus, and mensis, are masculine ; as, Tiberis, the Tiber ; Aquilo, the north wind ; Aprllis, AprU. Exc. Styx and some names of rivers in a and eare feminine. ^§ 62, and 41, 1. 3. Names of mountains are sometimes masculine, because mons is mascu- line; as, Wirj/s, a mountain of Thessaly ; but they usually follow the gender of their termination ; as, /iic* Atlas, h] oSoq)^ and metros, are likewise feminine; as, %yn4dus, an assembly; dioTnetros, a diamster. • Pronouncad ne-g(/-ihe^um,. 8m J 12. 28 SECOND DECLENSION. tXCEPTIONS. § 50-53. § d>0« Names of countries, towns, trees, plants, etc. are feminine. Sea k 29, 2 I'et tlie following names of plants are masculine : — Acanthus, bear's-foot. Ebulus, an elder. Riibus, a blackberry-bush. Anuuaiitus, nmnranih. Helleboinis, hellebore. Tribulus, a caltriyps. Asjiarajius, asparagus. Intiibus, endive. Calamus, a reed. Juncus, a bulrush. And sometimes Carduivs, a thistle. Raphanus, o radish. Amaracus, marjoram. Dumus, a bramble. Rharanos, buck-thorn. Cytisus, snait-clover. Oleaster and pinaster, names of trees, are also masculine. The following names of gems are also masculine : — Brrvllus, a beryl. Chrysoprasus, chrysoprase. So also, Carbuuciilus, a carbuncle. Opalus, opal. PjTopus, gold-bronze. Chrysolithus, chrysnlite, and smaragdus, an emerald, are doubtful. Names of females in um are feminine: § 29, 1; as, men Ghjcerium, Ter. Names of trees and plants in mto are generally neuter; as, o^n/ni, parsley; acon'ttum, wolf's bane. Gmopus, Pontus, HeUespontus, Isthmus, and aU plural names ia i of countries and to^\^lS are masculine. Ahydus{os) is doubtful. Names of countries and towns ending in um, or, if plural, in a, are neuter; as, Ilium or Hum ; Ecbdtdna, orum. § 51. The following are doubtful, but more frequently masculine: — Balanus, a date. Grossus, an unripe Jig. Phaselus, a light vessel. Barbltos, a lute. Pampinus, a vine4eaf. Atdmus, an atom, and cdlus, a distaff, are doubtful, but more frequently feini- •ine. Pelagus the sea, and mriis, poison, are neuter. Vulgits, the common people, is neuter, and rarely masculine. Exceptions in Declension. § 52. Genitive singular. When the genitive singular ends in tt, j«e poets frequently contract it into I ; as, ingeni, for ingeiiii. Vocative singular. The vocative of nouns in us is sometimes _ like Ae nominative, especially in poetry ; as, fiuvius, Latinus, in VirgiL So, audi tu, populus Albanus. Liv. Proper names in lus omit e in the vocative ; as, Horatius, Horati ; Virgilius, Vij'giU. Filius, a son, and genius, a guardian angel, make also Jili and geni. Other douns in ius, includmg patrials and possessives derived from proper names, form their vocative regularly Ln e ; as, Belius, Delie ; Tirynihius, Tirynthie ; Ltiertiiis, Laertie. § 53. Genitive plural. The genitive plural of some nouns of the second declension, especially of those which denote money, weight and measure, is commonly formed in um, instead of Drum: § 322, 4. Such are particularly nummum, sestertium, denarium, medimnum, jugerum, mvdiiim, ta/oiliim. Thesame form occnrs in other words, especially in iioetry; as, detim; liberum, Daiiaum ; etc., and sometimes this root, >he vroi J \ declined; thus, rupes, genitive (found in the dictionary) ru^is, root rup, daiive rup\^> v BO ars, gen. arrts, root art, dat. arti, etc. ; opus, gen. opens, root oper, dat. opSti, cte. Rules for Forming the Nominative Singular of tsiV. Third Declension from the Root. I. Roots ending in c, g ; 6, m, p ; u, t, d, and some in r, add s ti form the nominative ; as, trahis, trabs ; hiemis, hiems ; gruis, grus. Remark 1. T, d and r before s are dropped; as, nep6t\&, nepos; laiuTis, lavs; Jlo7-is, fios. So bov'iB, bos, drops v. Rem. 2. Cand g before s forni x ; as, wcis, vox ; regis, rex. So vs forms a in 7Mris, 7iix. Cf. ^§ 3, 2, and 171, 1. Rem. 3. Short i in the root before c, b, p, t, is commonly changed to e ; as, poll'tds, pollex ; coelibis, coelehs; principis, pn^inceps; comitis, comes. So jJ ia changed to e in aucupis, auceps. Rem. 4. Short e or c! before r in neuters is changed to u ; as, geiieris, gcnUs ; temjjdria, ttmpus. Rem. 5. Short e before r is changed to l in the masculines ciner'is, clnis ; cucwnen^, cucumis ; 2)ulveris, jndvis ; vovieria, vmnis. Rem. 6. A few and those mostly monosyllabic roots of masculines and fem- inines, not increasing in the genitive, add es or is, instead of s alone; as, gen. rujns, nom. rupes ; gen. awris, nom. auris. Rem. 7. A few neuters add e to the root to form the nominative; as, reHa, rete ; maris, mare. n. To roots ending in I and n, to some in r and s, and to those af most neuters in t, no addition is made in forming the nominative ; as, animaVis, animal ; canonis, canon ; kono7is, honor ; assis, as. Remark 1. Final on and tn in the roots of masculines and feminines, become in the nominative; as, sentionis, sermo; arundlnis, arundo. Rem. 2. Final In in the roots of neuters becomes en in the nominative; as, jlwninis, flumen. So also in the masculines, oscen, pecten, tiblcen and tubicen. Rem. 3. Tr and br at the end of a root, take e between them in the nominsr live; as, pntris, pater; imhris, imber. Cf. §§ 108, 48, and 106. Rem. 4. Short 6 is changed to u in ebdris, 6b&r ; femdris, femur ; jecdris, je- c&r ; and robOrif, robur. Rem. 5. In the roots of neuters at drops t, and it becomes ut in the nomina- tive; as, pii/'inaiis, poema; capitis, caput. Rem. 6. Roots of this class ending in repeated consonants drop one of thenj la thj nominative; as, fellis, fd ; farris, jar ; assis, as ; bessis, oes. § '7. THIRD DECLENSION. 31 The following are the two forms of termination in this declension:— Singular . Plural Masc. and Fern. Neut. Masc. and Fern. Neut. N. * * N. es, a, (ia), G. is, is, G. um, (ium), lim, (ium), X>. i. i, D. ibus, ibus, Ac. em, (im), * Ac. es. a, (ia). V. * * V. es, a, (la). Ab. e, (i). e, CO- Ab. ibus. ibus. The asterisk stands for the nominative, and for those cases which are lifee it. § 57. The following are examples of the most common forms ot nouns of this declension, declined through all their cases. Honor, honor ; masc. Singular. N. ho'-nor, ho-no'-ris, ho-no'-ri, ho-no'-rem, ho'-nor, ho-n5'-re. G. D. Ac V. Ab Plural. ho-no'-r°s, ho-no'-rum, ho-nor'-i-bus, ho-no'-res, ho-no'-res, ho-nor'-i-bus. Rupes, a rock ; fem. Singular. N. ru'-pes, G. ru'-pis, D. Ac V. Ab ru ■ ru -pem, ru'-pes, ru'-pe. Plural. ru'-pes, ru'-pi-um, ru'-pi-bus, ru'-pes, ru'-pes, ru'-pi-bus. Ars, art; fem. Singular. N. ars, SH-'-tis, ar'-ti, ar'-tem, ars, G. D. Ac V. Ab. ar'-te. Plural. tes, ti-um,* ■ti-bus, -tes, tes, ar '-ti-bus. ar ar' ar ar ar Sermo, speech ; masc. Singular. N. ser'-mo, G. D. Ac. V. Ab. -nis, ser-mo ser-mo'-ni, ser-mo'-nem, ser'-mo, ser-mo'-ue. Plural. ser-mo'-nes, ser-mo'-num, ser-nion'-i-bus, ser-mo'-nes, ser-mo'-nes, ser-iuon'-i-bus. Turris, a tower ; fem. Singular. N. tur'-ris, tur'-ris, tur'-ri, tur'-rim, rem, tur'-ris. G. D. Ac. V. Ab. tur -n, or re. Plural. tur'-res, tur'-ri-um, tur'-ri-bus, tur'-res, tur'-res, tur'-ri-bu8. Nox, night ; fem. Singular. N. nox, noc'-tis, noc'-ti, noc'-tem, nox. G. D. Ac. V. Ab. noc'-te. Plural. noc'-tes, noc'-ti-um,* noe'-ti-bus, noc'-tes, noc'-tes, noc'-ti-bus. Miles, a soldier ; com. gen. Singular. N. mi'-les, G. mil'-i-tis, D. mil'-i-ti, Ac. mil'-i-tem, V. mi'-les, Ab. mil'-i-te. Plural. mil'-i-tes, mil'-i-tum, mi-lit'-i-bus, mil'-i-tes, mil'-i-tes, mi-lit' -i-bus. Pater, a father ; masc. Singular. N. pa'-ter, pa'-tris, pa'-tri, pa'-trem, pa'-ter, pa'-tre. G. D. Ac. V. Ab Plural. pa'-tres, pa'-trum, pat'ri-bus, pa'-tres, pa'-tres, pat'-ri-bu8. •Pronounced ar'-sA«-am, noi/-slie.v,ni. S«e § 12. 32 THIRD DFTLENSION. S.*)? Sedile, a seat ; neut. Singular. N. sp.-di'-le, se-di'-lis, se-di'-!i, se-di'-le, se-di'-le, se-di'-li. G. D. Ac. V. Ah. Plural. se-dil'-i-a, se-dil'-i-um, se-dil'-i-bus, se-dil'-i-a, se-dil'-i-a, se-dil'-i-bus. Carmen, a verse; neut. Plural. car'-mi-na, car'-mi-num, car-min'-i-bus, car'-mi-na, car'-mi-na, car-min'-i-bus. Singular. N. car' -men, G. car'-mi-nis, D. car'-mi-ni, Ac. car'-men, V- car'-men, Ah. car'-mi-ne. VirjTO, a virfjh, fem. Iter, a journey : neut. Singular. N. i'-ter, G. i-tin'-e-ris, D. i-tin'-e-ri, Ac. i'-ter, V. i'-ter. Ah. i-tin'-e-re. Plural. I-tin'-e-ra, i-tin'-e-rum, it-i-ner'-i-bus, i-tin'-e-ra, i-tin'-e-ra, it-i-ner'-i-bus. Lapis, a stone ; masc. Singular. N. la' -pis, G. lap'-i-dis, D. lap'-i-di, Ac. lap'-i-dem, V. la-pis, Ab lap'-i-de. Plural. lap'-i-des, lap'-i-dum, la-pid'-i-bus, lap'-i-des, lap'-i-des, la-pid'i-bus. Singular. N. vir'-go, G. D. Ac. V. Ah. vu" -gi-ni, vir'-gi-nem, vir'-go, vir'-gi-ne. i Hural. vir'-gi-nes, vii''-gi-niun, vir-gin'-i-bus, vir'-gi-nes, vir'-gi-nes, vir-o"in'-i-bus. neut. Animal, an animal , Plural. an-i-ma'-Ii-a, an-i-ma'-li-uni, an-i-mal'-i-bus. Singular. N. an'-i-mal, G. an-i-ma'-lis, D. an-i-ma'-li, Ac. an'-i-mal, V. an'-i-mal. Ah. an-i-ma'-li. an-i-ma'-li-a, an-i-ma'-li-a, an-i-mal'-i-bns. Opus, work ; neut. Singular. N. o'-pus, op'-e-ris, op'-e-ri, o'-pus, o'-pus, op'-e-re. G. n. Ac. V. Ah. Plural. op'-e-ra, op'e-rum, o-per'-i-bus, op'-e-ra, op'-e-ra, o-per'-i-bus. Caput, a head; neut. Singular. N. ca'-put, cap'-i-tis, cap'-i-ti, ca'-put, ca'-put, cap'-i-te. G. D. Ac V. Ah Plural. cap'-i-ta, cap'-i-tum, ca-pit'-i-bus, cap'-i-ta^ cap'-i-ta, ca-pit'-i-bus. Singular. N. po-e'-ma, G. po-em'-a-tis, D. po-em'-a-ti, Ac. po-e'-ma, V. po-e'-aa, Ab. po-em' i-te. Poema, a poein; neut. Plural. po-em'-a-ta, po-em'-a-tum, po-e-mat'-i-bus, or po-em'-a-tis, po-em'-a-ta, po-em'-a-ta, po-e-mat'-i-bus, or po-em'-a-tia. Rem. 1. But numerals in io; as, binio, trinio, etc., except M«io, unity, are masculine. ^ ^.s-cl. thttid declension, o.knber. 8b Rdles for the Gender of Noxtns of the Third Declension § 58. Nouns whose gender is determined by their si^iification, accord- ing to the general rules, \ 28 — 34, are not mcluded in the followuig rules and exceptions. MASCULINES. Nouns ending in o, er, or, es increasing in the genitive, os, and », are masculine; ri, fermo, speech; ddlor, pain; /os, a flower; career, a prison; jaes, a foot; cdtum, a rule. Exceptions in 0. §59. 1. Abstract and collective nouns in io are feminine ; as, ratio, reason ; legio, a legion. Rem. 1. But numerals in io; asculme. 2. Nouns in do and go, of more than two syllables, are feminine; as, arundo, a reed; imago, an image. So also grando, hail. But comedo, 3, glutton ; unedo, the arbute tree ; and harpdgo, a grappling- hook, are masculine. Rem. 2. Margo, the brink of a river, is doubtftd. CuiMo, desire, is often masculine in poetry, but in prose is always feminine. 3. Caro, flesh, and Greek nouns in o, are feminine ; as, echo, an echo. BiAo, the owl, is once feminine, Virg. A. 4, 462. Exceptions in ER. § GO. 1. Luver, a water plant, and tuber, the tuber tree, are feminine, but wlien the latter denotes the fruit, it is masculine. Linter, a boat, is femi- nine, and once, in Tibullus, mascul'me. Siser, skirret, is neuter in the singu- lar, but muftculiuw in the plural. 2. The following, in er, are neuter: — Acer, a maple-tree. Papfiver, a poppy. Tuber, a sweUing. Cadaver, a dead body. Piper, pepper. Uber, a teat. Cicer, a vetch. Slier, an osier. Ver, the spring. Iter, a journti/. Sj)inther, a clasp. Verber, a scourge. Laser, assafeUida. Siiber, a cork-tree. Zingiber, ginger. Exceptions in OR. § GS. Arbor, a tree, is feminine: ador, spelt; cequor, the sea; marmor, viavLie; and cor, the heart, are nenter. Exceptions in ES increasing in the genitive. 1. The following are feminine : — Compes, a fetter. Quies, and Requies, rest. 1 6ges, a mat. Merces, a reward. Inquies, restlessness, lilerges, a sheaf of ccn-n. Si:ges, grouring corn. 2. Ales, a bird; comes, a companion; liospes, a guest; interpres, an inter- preter; 7?ii^«s, a soldier; obses a nosUige; prceses, a president; and satelles, a ufe-guard, are common, § 30. .^s, brass, is neuter. 34 THIRD DECLENSION. GENDER. § 62, 63. Exceptions in OS. 3. Arbos, a tree; cos, a whetstone; dos, a dowry; eos, the mommg; and rarely mpos, a grandchild, are feminine : sacerdos, custos, and bos are common, 80: OS, the mouth, and 6s, a bone, are neuter; as are also the Greek words MiigUis, a mullet. Semis, or Orbis, a circle. Semissis, Piscis, a Jish. Bessis, Postis, a post. Centussis, Quiris, a Roman. Decussis, Samnis, a Samnite. Tressis, Mensis, a month. Sanguis, blood. Sentis, a brier. SoddVis, a companion. ToiTis, a firebrand. compounds Unguis, a nail, of as. Vectis, a lever. VeiTuis, a worm. Vomis, a ploughshare. 4. Names of male beings, rivers, and months in is are masculine ; as, Bis, Pluto ; AnUbis, an Egyptian deity ; Tigris, the river Tigris ; Aprllis, April. See § 28. Exceptions in YS. Names of rivers and mountains in ys are masculine ; as, Hdlys, Othrys. Sea § 28, 2 and 3 Exceptions in S preceded by a consonant. § 04:« 1. DeTis, a tooth; fons, a fountain; ototw, a mountain; and pons, a bridge, are masculine. So also are auceps, a bird-catcher; chdlybs. steel; cliens, a client; ellops, a kind offish; epcps, a hoopoe; gryps, a grilEu; hydrops, the dropsy; merops, a kind of bird. Rudens, a rope, is masculine and very r.arely feminine. 2. Tlie f(jUowing nomis also are masculine, viz. {a.) these which are properly adjectives — conflnens and to^-rens, soil, amvis ; occidens and oriens, scil. sol; (b.) compounds' of t^ens — tridens, a ti-ideut, und bidem, a two-pronged mattock ; — but bide)ts, a sheep, is feminine; (c.) the parts of as enduig m ns; as, sextant, quadrnns, tHens, dodrans, and dextans. 3. The following are common or doubtful : — Ade])S, grease. Sepi, a kind of serpent. Serpens, a serpent Forceps, pincers. Scrubs, a ditch. Stu-ps, the trunk of a tree. Animans an animal, which is properly an adjective, is masculine, feminine, or neuter. Exceptions in X. § G5, 1. AX. Anthrax, cinnabar; cdrax, a raven; cordax, a kind of dance ; dropax, an ointment ; styrax, a kind of tree ; thorax, a breast-plate ; and Atax, the river Aude, are masculine ; Umax, a snail, is common. 2. EX. Nouns in ex are masculine, except fwx, forfex, lex, nex, prex, (obsolete in nom. and gen. sing.), and supellex, which are feminine; to which add (§29) car ex, tlex, murex, pellex, and vUex. Atriplex is neuter and very rarely masculine or femmine. Alex, a fish-pickle ; cortex, bark ; imbrex, a gut- ter-tile; obex, a bolt; and silex, a flint, are doubtful: senex, an old person; grex, a herd; rumex, sorrel; and pumex, pumice-stone, are masculine and verj'' rarely feminine. 3. IX. Gdix, n cnp; fornix, an arch; phcenix, a kind of bird; &nd spddix, a palm-branch, are masculine : Idrix, the larch-tree ; perdix, a partridge ; and tarix, a swollen vein, are masculine or femmine. 4. OX. Box and esox, names of fishes, are masculine. 5. UX. Trddiix, a vine-branch, is masculine. 6. YX. Bombyx, a sdk-worm; calyx, the bud of a flower; coccyx^ a cuckoo; 6i-yx, a wild goat, and names of mountains in yx, as Hryx, are masculine. Onyx, a box made of the onyx-stone, and sarddnyx, a precious stone ; also, calx, the heel, anil calx, lime"; lynx, a lynx, and sandyx, a kind of color, ar« ma.iculine or feminine. Note. Bombyx, when it signifies silk, is doubtful. 7. Quinctmx, stptunf, decunx, deunx, parts of as, are masculine. 36 THIRD DECLENSION. GENITIYE. § 66-69. NEUTERS. § GG. Nouns ending in a, e, i, y, c, I, t, ar, ur, us, and men^ are neuter ; as, diad?ma, a crown ; rete, a net ; hydromeli, mead ; lac, milk ; vecUgal, revenue caput, the head; calcar, a spur; guUur, the throat; pectus, the breast; and flu men, a river. Exceptions in L, C, and E. JVfijgtZ, a mullet, and sol, the sun, are masculine. Sai, salt, is masculine or neuter In the singular ; but, in the plural, it is always masculine, t/ac is neuter and rarely masculine. Prceneste is neuter, and once in Virgil feminine. Exceptions in AR and UR. § GT. Furfur, bran; $alar, a tront; turtur, a turtle dove; and miUur, a vulture, are masculine. Exceptions in US. 1. Lepus, a hare ; and Greek nouns in jms (a-ouc), are masculine ; as, tripus, a tripod ; but lar/opus, a kind of bird, is femiutae. 2. Nouns in us, having fitis, or udu^, in the genitive, are feminine ; as, juvenilis, youth ; incus, an anvil. 3. Pecus, -udis, a brute animal, and tellus, the earth, are feminine. Pesslnus, and Sel'inus. names of towns, are also feminine. See ^29. 4. Grus, a crane ; mit./,, a mouse ; and sus, a swine, are masculine or feminine. 5. Rhus, sumach, is mascuUiie, and rarely feminine. Rules for the Oblique Cases of Nouns of the Third Declension. GENITIVE SINGULAR. § 68. 1. The genitive singular of the third declension of Latin nouns always ends in is, in Greek nouns it sometimes ends in os and us. 2. Nouns in a form their genitive in Stis; as, di-a-de'-ma, di-a- dem-d-tis, a crown ; dog'-ma, dog'-ma-tis, an opinion. E. 8. Nouns in e change e into is ; as, re'-/e, re-tis, a net ; se-di-le, se-dl'-lis, a seat. 4. Nouns in i are of Greek origta, and are generally indeclinable ; but ky> drom'-e-li, mead, has hyd^o-meV-i-tis in the genitive. o. § 60. Nouns in o form their genitive in onis ; as, ser'-mo, ser mo-nis, speech ; pd'-vo, pa-vo-nis, a peacock. § 70, 71. THIRD DECLENSION. GENITIYK. 37 Remark. Patrials in o liave dnis ; as, MacMo, -dnis ; but sojne have 5wm ; as. Eburonea, etc. See 3d exception to increments in 0, ^ 287. Exc. 1. Nouns in rlo and go form their genitive in mis ; as, a-ron'- ^0, a-run'-di-nis, a reed ; i-ma-go, i-mag'-i-nvi, an image. But four dissyllables— cu(fo, udo, Ugo and mango; and three trisyllables— comedo, unedo, and harpago, have 5»is. Exc. 2. The following nouns, also, have inis -.—Apolh ; hdmo, a man; nemo, nobodv ; and turbo, a whirlwind. a • • Cciro, flesh, has, by syncope, carnis. Anio, the name of a river, has Aniem$; Nerio, the wife of Mars, Nerienis ; from the old nominatives, Anien, and N»- riines. Exc. 3. Some Greek nouns in o form their genitive in us, and their other cases singular, in o ; as, Bldo, gen. Didus, dat. Dido, etc. ; Argo, -ws ; but they are sometimes declined regularly ; as. Dido, Didonis. Y. Greek noims in y have their genitive in yos ; as, mlsy, misyos, or, by contrac- tion, misys. c. § 70. The only nouns in c are d'-lec, OrW-cis, fish-brine, and lac, lac'- tis, milk. L. .N. R. Nouns in I, n, and r, form their genitive by adding is ; as, con'-sid, con'-su-lis, a consul ; ca-non, can'-o-nis, a rule ; ho -nor, ho-no^ris, honor. So, An'-l-mal, an-i-ma'-lis, an animal.' Cal'-car, cal-ca'-ris, a spur. Vi'-gil, vig'-I-lis, a watchman. Car'-cer, car^-ce-ris, a prison. Ti'-tan, Ti-ta'-nis, Titan. A'-mor, a-mo'-ris, love. Si'-ren, Si-re'-nis, a Siren. Gut'-tur, gut'-tu-ris, the throat. Del'-phin, del-phi'-nis, a dolphin. Mar'-tyr, mar'-ty-ris, a martyr. Exceptions tn L. Fd, gall, and mel, honey, double I before is, making feUis and mellis. Exceptions in N. § T*!. 1. Neuters in en form their genitive in tnis; as, flu -men, flu'-mi-nit, a river ; glu-ten, glu'-ti-nis, glue. The following masculines, also, form their genitive in tnij .•—«««>», a bird which for*- lx4e; as (a.) verbals in sis ; as, basis, matkesis, etc. (i.) compounds of jwi;.' (5nx/f); as, metropSlis, NeapSlis, etc.; and (c.) a few other proper names, as Charyhdn, Lachisis, Syrtis, etc. In some nouns of this class the Greek genitive is sometimes fouud; as, Nemisis, Nemesios. 2. Greek nouns in is, whose Greek genitive Js in idos (i/oc), form their Latin genitive in idis ; as, a^s, aspis, epheniiris, pyrajnis, tyrannis, JEneis, Iris, NerSis, etc. Tigris has both is and idis ; and in some other words of this class later writers use is Instead of idis. 3. Charts b.a,s Charltis ; Salamis, Salamtnis, a,ni SimSis, Simoentis. OS. § 75. Nouns in os form their genitive in oris or otis ; as, flos, fo-ris, a flower ; ne-pos, ne-po-tis, a grandchild. The following have oris : — Flo3, a flower. Labos or labor, labor. Os, the numth. Glos, a hnsband's sister. Lepos or 16por, mt. Ros, dew. Honos or honor, honor. Mos, a custom. Arbos or arbor, a tree, has 6ris. The following have otis : — Cos, a whetsUme. Monociros, a unicorn. T^^poa, a grandchild. Dos, a doiory. Rhinoceros, a rhinoceros. Sacerdos, a priest. Exc. 1. Custos, a keeper, has custodis ; bos, an ox, bdvis ; and ds, a bone, ossis. Exc. 2. Some Greek nouns in os have dis in the genitive; as, heros, a hero; Minos; Tros, a Trojan; and some Greek neuters in os are used in the third declension in tlie nominative and accusative only ; as, Argos, cetos, ipos, melos. US. § 7G. 1. Nouns in us form their genitive in eris or oris; as, ge r us, gen'-e-ris, a kind ; tern -pus, tem'-^pS-ris, time. 2. Those which make eris are, dcus, {ch&S),fcRdus, fUnus, genus, gUmm, la tfis, munus, dlus, dnus, 6pus, pondus, rUdus, septus, s'ldus, ulcus, vellus, viscus and udnus. In early writers pignus has sometimes pigneris. 3. Those which make 6ris are, corpus, decus, dedecus, /acinus, fenus, frlgut, Upus, lUus, nemus, pectus, pecus, penus, pignus, stercus, iempus, and lergus. Exc. 1. These three in Os have iidis : — inciis, an anvil ; p&lOs, a morass ; and Bubscus, a dove-tail. Pi'cus, a brute animal, has pecudis. Exc. 2. These fiv ^ have Uis :—juventus, youth ; i&liis, safety ; senect&$, old age ; servitOs, slavery virtOs, virtue. ^ THIRD DECLENSION. GENITIVE. § 77, 78. Exc. 3. Monosyllables in fts have uris ; as, cms, the leg; J7is, right; jm, brothj nms, a mouse; /JMS, mattor; r?/s, the country; tus, frankincense; except «rr««^ and SMS, which liave T ablative in e or i ; as, turris, turre or turri. lb.) So Elis, ace. Elidem and Elin, has Elide or Eli. But restis, and most (j-r'-^^k nouns with idis in the genitive, have e only ; as, Paris, -idis, -ide. Exc. 4. (a.) Adjectives in is^ used as nouns, have commonly i in the abla- tive, but sometimes e; a%, famdidris, a friend; naidlis, a birthday; soddlis, a companion; ti-iremis, a trii'eme. — Participles in ns, used as nouns, have cora- •jiouly e in the ablativs, bu continens has »'. § 83. THJED DECLENSION. — PLURAL CASES. 48 ^ (6.) When adjectives mis become proper names, they always have e ; aa Juvenalis, Juvendle. AJf'mis and cedUis have generally e; as have always jttvi^ nis, a youth ; i-iklis, a rod ; and volucris, a bird. Exc. 5. (a.) The following, though they have only em in the accusative, have B or t iu the ablative, but most of them have oftener e than i : — Amnis, Collis, Ignis,- Pars, Supellex, Anguis, Convallis, Imber, Postis, Tridens, Avis, Corbis, Mugilis, Pflgil, Unguis, Bilis, Finis, Orbis, Sordes, Vectis, Civis,. Fustis, Ovis, Sors, Vesper. Classis, {b.) Occiput has only i, and rm has either e or i ; but rure commonly signifies from the country, and ruri, in the country. Mel has rarely i. (c.) So also names of towns, when denoting the place where any thing Ls said to be, or to be done, have the ablative in i ; as, CartJiagini, at Carthage ; so, Anxim and Lacedavidni, and, in the most ancient writers, many other nouns occur with this termination in the ablative. Candlis has i, and very rarely e. Exc. 6. Nouns in ys, which have ym or yn in the accusative, have their ab- lative in ye or J/ ; as, Alys, Atye, or Aty. NOMINATIVE PLURAL. § 83. I. Th'e nominative plural of masculines and feminines ends in es ; as, sermones, rupes: — but neuters Lave a, and those •whose ablative singular ends in i only, or in e and i, have ia ; as, caput, cajnta ; sedile, sedilia ; rete, retia. Aplustre has both a and ia. 1. Some Greek neuters in os have e in the nominative plural; as, m«to«; Dom. plural, mele; (in Greek /ui^at, by oontraction //saji). So Temple. GENITIVE PLURAL, n. The genitive plural commonly ends in um ; sometimes in ium. 1. Nouns which, in the ablative singular, have i only, or both e and i, make the genitive plural in ium ; as, sedile, sedlli, sedilium ; turris, turre or turri, turrium. 2. Nouns in es and is, which do not increase in the genitive singu- lar, have ium ; as, nuhes, nubium ; hostis, hostium. Exc. Cunis. juvenis, fdris, mugilis, proles, sirues, and mtes, have um; so oftener have apis, stngilis, and volucris ; less frequently mensis, sides, and, in the poets only, ambages, cades, eludes, vepres, and ccdestis. 3. Monosyllables ending in two consonants have ium in the geni- tive plural ; as, urhs, urhium ; gens, gentium ; arx, arcium. Exc. Lynx, sphinx, and ops (nom. obsolete) have um. Most monosyllables in s and x pure have um, but the following have ium; dos,mas,glis,'Us,os (ossis), faux, (nom. obs.) nix, nox, strix, vis, generally J'raus and mus ; so also fur and ren, and sometimes lar. 4. Nouns of two or more syllables, in ns or rs, and names of na< tions in as, have commonly ium, but sometimes um; as, cliens, clieu' tiun or clientum , Arpinas, Arpinaatium. 44 THIRD DECLENSION. PLURAL CASES. § 84, 85 (1.) Other nonns in as generally have urn, but sometimes ium; as, cetai, celSf turn or mtatium. Penck is and opiimdtes have usually ium. 5. The following have ium: — cdro, compes, linter imber, uter, venter, Sarmm, Quiris, and usually Insuber. Fwnax and palus have sometimes ium. 6. Greek nouns have generally um; as, gigas, gigantum ; Arabs, Arabum; Tlii'ox, Thracum ; — but a few, used as titles of books, have sometimes on ; as, Epigravima, epigrammaton ; Metamoiphosis, -eon. The patrial Malem also is foimd in Curtius, 4, 13. Kemabk 1. Bos has bourn m. the genitive plural. Rem. 2. Nouns which want the singular, form the genitive plural as if they were complete; as, manes, maniimi; ccelites, ccelitum; ilia, ilium; as if from manis, amies, and lie. So also names of feasts in alia ; as. Saturnalia Saturna- Uum ; but these have sometimes oi'um after the second declension. Ales has Bometimes, by epenthesis, alituum. See ^ 322, 3. DATIVE AND ABLATIVE PLURAL, § 84:. The dative and ablative plural end in ibus. Exo. 1. Bos has b5bus and hfihus, by contraction, for bovV>us ; sus has tubus by syncope, for suibus. § 322, 6, and 4. Exc. 2. Greek nouns in ma have the dative and ablative plural more fre- quently in is than in ibus ; as, poema, poemdtis, or poematihus. Exc. 3. The poets sometimes form the dative plural of Greek nouns, that in- crease in the genitive, in si. and, before a vowel, in sin; as, herois, heroidit; heroisi, or heroisin. Ovid. So in Quintilian, Metammphosesi. ACCUSATIVE PLURAL. § 85. The accusative plural ends, like the nominative, in es, a, ia. Exc. 1. The accusative plural of masculines and feminines, whose genitive Dlural ends in ium, anciently ended in »s or eis, instead of es ; as, partes, gen. partium, ace. parieis or paries. Exc. 2. Greek masculines and feminines, whose genitive increases in is or ot impure, have their accusative in as ; as, lampas, lampadis, lampddas. So also heros, herois, Jieroas, and some barbariau names of nations have a similar form; as, Brigantas, Allobrdgas. Jupiter, and vts, strength, are thus declined : Singular. Singular. Plural. N. Ju'-pi-ter, N. vis. vi'-res. G. Jo'-vis, G. vis. vir'-i-um, D. J6'-vi, D. — vir'-i-bus, Ac. Jo'-vem, Ac. vim, vl'-res, V. Ju'-pi-ter, V. vis, vi'-res, Ab. Jo'-ve. Ab. V. vir'-i-bus. 5 86-88. FOURTH DECLENSION. 45 § 8G. The follomng table exhibits the principal forms of Gieek nouns of the third declension : — IS, -lOS, IS, -ei, -1, Orpheus, Aer, Dido, -eos, -eris, -us, Dat. ■adi, •adibus, 6i, •oibus, -fh -i, -i. 61, -eri. Ace. -adem, -ada, -ades, -adas, -oem, -6a, -oes, -oas, ^ -}Tn, ) it } ( -em,_ ) ( -ea, en, ) -ea, -era, -o. Voc: as, -ades, -OS, -oes, 7. -i. es, -e, eu, -er, AM. -ade. -adibus. •06. •oibus. ■ye or j. i. -e or -i. See § 54. ere. -o. FOURTH DECLENSION. § 87. Nouns of the fourth declension end in tis and u. 3^hose in us are masculine ; those in u are neuter, and, except in the genitive, are indeclinable in the singular. Nouns of this declension are thus declined : — Fructus, fruit. Singular. N. fruc'-tus, G. fruc'-tus, D. fruc'-tu-i, Ac. fruc'-tum, V. fruc'-tus, Al . fruc'-tu. Plural. fruc'-tus, fruc'-tu-iim, fruc'-ti-bus, fruc'-tiis, fruc'-tus, fruc'-ti-bus. Cornu, a horn. Singular. N. cor'-nu, G. cor'-nus, D. cor'-nu, Ac. cor'-nu, V. cor'-nu, Ab. cor'-nu. Plural. cor'-nu-a, cor'-nu-um, cor'-ni-bus, cor'-nu-a, cor'-nu-a, cor'-ni-bus. In like manner decline Can'-tus, a song. Cur'-rus, a chariot. Ex-er'-ci-tus, an army. Fluc'-tus, a wave. Luc'-tus, grief. Mo'-tus, motion. Se-na'-tus, ike senate. Ge'-lu, ice. (in sing.) Ve'-ru, a spit. §88. Exceptions in Gender. The following are feminine : — Acus, a medle. D631U), a tM$e. P'icuB, a fig. Manus, a hand. Porticus, a gaUerij. Tribus, a trtbe. 46 FOURTH DECLENSION. EXCEPTIONS. § 89 OSlus, a distaff, and the plurals Quinqmtrus, a feast of Minerva, and Idus, the Ides, are also feminine. So noctu, by night, found only in the ablative singular Penus, a store of provisions, when of the fourth declension, is masculLue or femlnuie. Secus, sex, is neuter; see § 94. Specus, a den, is masciiline and rarely femmine or neuter. 2. Some personal appellatives, and names of trees, are feminine by signification ; as, Anus, nurus, socrus ; — cornus, laurus, and quercus. Myrtus also is teminine and rarely masculine. See § 29, 1 and 2. Exceptions in Declension. § SO. Damus, a house, is partly of the fourth declension, and partly of the second. It is thus declined : — Singular. Plural. N. do'-miis, do'-miis, G. do'-miis, or do'-mi, dom'-u-iim, or do-mo'-riim, D. dom'-u-i, or do'-mo, dom'-I-bus, Ac. do'-miim, do'-mus, or do'-mos, V. do'-miis, do'-miis, Ab. do'-mo. dom'-i-bGs. (a.) Domus, in the genitive, signifies, of a house; doml commonly signifies, at noma. The ablative domu is foimd in Plautus, and in ancient inscriptions. In the genitive and accusative plural the forms of the second declension are more used than those of the fourth. (6.) Cornus, a cornel- tree ; y"2C«s, a fig, or a fig-tree; laurus, a, laurel; and myrtus, a myrtle, are sometimes of the second declension. Penus is of the second, third or fourth declension. (c.) Some nouns m u have also forms in us and um; as, cornu, cornus, or cor- tuim. Adjectives, compounds of manus, are of the first and second declensions. Remark 1. Nouns of this declension anciently belonged to the third, and were formed by contraction, thus : — Singular. Plural. N. fructus, fiaitues, us, G. fmctuis, -lis, fructuiim, -um, D. fructui, -ii, fructuibiis, -iibus, or -ibiis, Ac. tructuem, -iim, fructues, lis, V. fructus, fructues, -Us, Ab. fructue, -u. Iructulbus, -ubiis, or -ibus. 2. The genitive singular in is is sometimes found in ancient authors ; as, anuis, Ter. A genitive in i, after the second declension, also occurs ; as, send- tus, sendti; tumultus, tumulti. Sail. 3. The contracted form of the dative in u is not often used; yet it sometimes ■jcoors, especially in Casar, and in the poets. 4. The contracted foi-m of the genitive plural in um rarely occurs. 5. The following nouns have ubus in the dative and ablative plural : — Acus, a needle. Artus, a joint. Partus, a birth. Specus, a den. Ai'cus, a bow. Lacus, a lake. Pecu, a jlocTc. Tribus, a tribe. Genu, a knee; portus, a lar^or; loniirus, thunder; uid viru, a spit, have ibm or i^ms. § 90, 91. FIFTH DECLEXSION. 47 FIFTH DECLENSION. § 00. Nouns of the fifth declension end in es, i.nd are of feminine gender. They are thus dedined : — Res, a thing. Singular. Plural. N. res, res. G. rc'-i, re'-rum, D. re'-i, re'-bus, Ac. rem, res, V. res, res. Ab. re. re'-bus. Dies, a day. Singular. Plural. N. di'-es, di'-es, G. di-e'-i, di-e'-rum, D. di-e'-i, di-e'-biia, Ac. di'-em, di'-es, V. di'-es, di'-es, ^6.di'-e. di-e'-bus. Remark. Nouus of this declension, like those of the fourth, seem to have belonged originally to the third declension. 1. Dies, masculine Exceptions est Gendek. , a day, is inascuUne or feminine in the siQo;ular, and always in the plural ; meridies, mid-day, is masculine only. Note. Dies is seldom feminine, in good prose writers, except when it de- notes duration of time, or a day fixed and determined. Exceptions in Declension. 2. The genitive and dative singular sometimes end in e or in i, instead of ei; as, gen. die for diei, Virg. ; fide for fdei', Hor. ; acie for aciei, Cses.— gen. jalebi for plebei, Liv. — dat. fide (or fdei, Hor., pernicie, Liv., and pei-nicii, Nep., for perniciei. The genitive rabies contracted for rabieis, after the third declension, is found in Lucretius. Eemakk 1. There are only about eighty nouns of this declension, andof these only two, res and dies, are complete in the plural. Acies, effigies, eluvies, fades, glades, progenies, series, sjjecies, spes, want the genitive, dative, and ab- lative plural, and the rest want the plural altogether. Rem. 2. All nouns of this declension end in ies, except fovn— fides, faith res, a thing; spes, hope; and plebes, the common people;— and all nouns in ie» are of this declension, except abies, aries, paries, quies, and requies, which are of the third declension. Declension of Compound Nouns. § 01. When a compound noun consists of two nominatives, both -parts are declined ; but when one part is a nominative, and the other at. oblique case, the nominative only is declined. Of the former kind jire respuhlica, a commonwealth, and jusjurandum, an oath ; of the latter, mater-familias, a mistress of a family. Cf § 43, 2. Singular. Plural. res-pub '-li-ca, N. V. res-pub '-li-cse, _ re-i-pub'-li-ciB, G. re-ruin-pub-li-ca'-ruiu, N. V. G.D. Ac. Ab. rem-pub'-ll-ca:ii, re-pub'-li-ca. G. D. Ab. re-bus-pub'-li-cis, Ac. res-pub'-li-caa. 48 IRREGULAR NOUNS. ^ § 92 Singula? Plural. iV. jus-ju-ran -dum, ju-ra-ju-ran -da, G. ju-ris-jn-ran'-di, D. ju-ri-ju-ran'-do, Ac. jus-ju-ran'-dum, ju-ra-ju-rau'-da, V. jus-ju-ran'-dum, ju-ra-ju-ran'-da. Ab. ju-re-ju-ran'-do. Singular. N. ma-ter-fa-mil'-i-as, G. ma-ti'is-fa-mil'-i-as, D. ma-tri-fa^mil'-i-as, Ac. ma-trem-fa-mil'-i-as, V. ma-ter-fa-mil'-i-as, Ab. ma-tre-fa-mil'-i-as, etc. Note. The preceding compounds are diyided and pronounced like the simple words of (rhkh they are compounded. IRREGULAR NOUNS. § 92. Irregular nouns are divided into three classes — Variable, Defective, and Redundant. I. VARIABLE NOUNS. A noun is variable, which, in some of its parts, changes either its gender or declension or both. Nouns which vary in gender are called heterogeneous ; those which vary in declension are called heterocUtes. Heterogeneous Nouns. 1. Masculine in the singular, and neuter in tlie plural ; as, Avernus, Dinclymus, Ismarus, Massicus, Mcendlus, Pangaus, Tartarus, TaygS- tus ; plur. Averna, etc. 2. Masculine in the singular, and masculine or neuter in the plu- ral ; as, j6cus, a jest ; plirr. jdci, or jdca ; — Idcus, a place ; plur. I6ci, passages in books, topics, places; I6ca^ places; — s&'fos, a hissing ; plur. siiito, rarely sjMi ; — intubus, endive ; plur. intubi or intuba. 3. Feminine in the singular, and neuter in the plural ; as, carbdsus, a species of flax ; plur. carbdsa, very rarely carbasi, sails, etc., mad«) »f it ; — Hierosolyma, -te, Jerusalem ; plur. Hierosolyma, -drum. 4. Neuter in the singular, and masculine in the plural ; as, caUm, heaven; plur. codi; — Elysium; plur. Elysii ;—Argos ; plur. Argi. So siser, neut., plur. siseres, masc. 5. Neuter in the singular, and masculine or neuter in the plural ; as, frenum, a bridle; plur. ft'eni ox frena; — rastrum, a rake; plur. rastri, or, more rarely, rostra ;—pugillar, a writing tablet ; plur. pugilldres or pugiUaria. 6. Neuter in the singular, and feminine in the plural ; as, epulum, a feast; plur. epukB ; — balneum, a bath; plur. balnea or balnea; — nundinutn, a market-day ; plur. nundiruje, a fair. 7. Feminine or neuter in the singular, and feminine in the plural as, delicia w deUcivm, delight ; phur. ddicia. § y3, 94. OEKKCTIVE NOUNS. 4& Heteroclites. § 03. 1. Second or tiu-d declension jn the singular, and third in the plural ; as, nom. and ace. jur/emm, an acre ; gen. jugeri or jugiris ; abl. jugiro and jugere; plur., nom., and ace, jugera; gen. jugh-um; abl. jugerisa.na jugeribu$. 2. Third declension in the singular, and second in the plural; as, vds, a vessel ; plur. vdsa, drum. Anc'ile, a shield, has sometimes ariciliorum, In the genitive plunil. Note. Variable nouns pwm anciently t/> have been redundant, and to have retained » part of each of their nrigin;il f>rnis. Thus. ra.n. -em, ice. ; -e, abl. ridicule. 6 50 DEFECTIVE NOUNS. §94. Despicatui, c?a^ ; contempt. Pica, 7W7II. ; dicam, ace. ; a legal pro- cess; — dicas, ncc. pi. Dicis, ffen. ; as, dicis gratia, for Jbrm's sake. Ditionis, gen. ; -i, dai. ; -em, ace. ; -e, abl. ; power. Diu, abl. ; in the day time. Divisui, dat. ; a dividing. Ebiir, ivory; — nDt used in t.e plural. *Effl[agitatu, abi. ; importunity. *Ejectus, nom. ; a ihroioing out. Epos, nam. and ace. ; an epic ^wem. Ergo, abl. (or adv.) ; for the sake. Essedas, ace. pi. ; war chariots. Erectus, worn. ; a carrying out. Fsex, dregs, wants gen. p)l- FamS, abl. ; hunger. Far, corn, not used in the gen., dat., and abl. pi. Fas, nom. ; ace. ; right. Fauce, abl. ; the throat ;^pl. entire. Fax, a torch, wants gen. pi. Fel, gall, wants gen. pi. Feminis, gen. ; -i, dot. ; -e, abl. ; the thigh ; — pi. femina, -Ibus. Flictu, abl. ; a striking. Foris, nom. and gen. ; -em, ace ; -e, abl.; a door ;— 2)1. entire. Fors, nom. ; -tis, gen. ; -tem, aee. ; -te, abl. ; chance. if Frustratui, abl. ; a deceiving. Frux, fruit, nom. scarcely used; — friigis, ge7i., etc. Fulgetras, ace. pi. ; lightning. Gausape, no7n., ace, abl. ; a rough gar- ment; — gausapa, ace. p>l- Glos, 7iom. ; a husband's sister. Grates, ace. jjI. ; — gratibus, cd)l.; thanks. Hebdomadam, ace. ; a week. Hiems, wi/Uer, not used in gen., dat., and abl. pi. Hippomanes, nom. and aee. *Hir, no77i. ; the palm of the hand. Hortatu, abl. ; a7i exhorti7ig ;—pl. hor- tatibus. Impetis, gen.; -e, abl.; a shock ;^pl. impetibus. Incitas, w -a, aee. pi. ; as, ad incitas redactus, reduced to a strait. *Tnconsultu, abl. ; imthout advice. *Indultn, abl.; indulge7ice. luferise, 7iom. pi.; -as, ac^ ; -is, abl.; sacrifices to the dead. lufitias, ace.pl.; a denial; as, ire infit- ias, to deny. Ingratiis, abl. pi., (used aelverbially); agai7ist one''s 7vill. Injussu, abl. ; without command. 'nquies, »jo?«. ; restless7iess. 9star, nom., ace. ; a likenets. Interdiu, abl. (or adv.); \n the day time, *Invitatu, abl. ; an invitation. Irrisui, dat. ; -vmi, aee. ; -u, abl. ; de* risicni. Jovis, 7iom., rarely used; — pi. Joves. Jugeris, gen.; -e, abl.; an acr6;~~pL jiigera, -um, -ibus. Jtissu, abl. ; com7nand. Labes, a spot, wants gen. pi. Lucu, abl. ; day-light. *Ludifieatui, dat. ; a mockery. Lux, light, wants the gen. pi. Mandatu, abL ; a command. Mane, nom., ace. ; mane, or rarely -i, ahl. ; the morning. Mel, honey, not used in gen., dat., and ail. pi. Melos, nom., aee.; melo, dat.; melody; — mele, nom., aee. pi. Metus, fear, not used in gen., dat., and abl. pi. Missu, abl. ; a sending ;—pl. missus, -ibus. Monitu, abl.; admonition; — pi. mon- itus. Natu, abl. ; by birth. Nauci, gen., with non; as, homo non nauci, a man of no account. Nefas, nom., ace. ; wickedness. Nemo, nobody, wants the vac. and the pi. Nepenthes, nom., ace. ; an herb. Nex, death, wants the voc. ; — neces, nom., ace. pi. Nihil, or nihilum, nom. and aee. ; -i, gen.; -o, abl.; 7iothing. Noctu, abl. ; by night. Nuptui, dai. ; -um, ace. ; -u, a^l. ; mari-iage. Obex, nom. ; -icem, ace. ; -ice, or -jice, abl. ; a bolt; — pi. obices, -jicibus. Objectum, ace. ; -u, abl. ; an interposi- tion ;^}l. objectus. Obtentui, dat. ; -um, ace. ; -u, abl. ; a p7'etext. Opis, gen. ; opem, aee. ; ope, abl, ; help ;—pl. entire. Oppositu, abl.; an opposing ;— pi. op- positus, aee. Opus, nrnn., ace. ; need. Os, the mouth, wants the gen. pL Panaces, nom. ; -is, ge7i. ; -e, ahl. ; an herb. Pax, peace, wants gen. pi. ■ Peccatu, abl. ; a fatdt. Peciidis, gen. ; -i, dat. ; -em, ace. ; -e, abl. ;—pl. entire. Pelage, aee. pi. of pelagus; the sea. Pennissu, abl. ; -um, ace. ; permistion, Piscatus, nom. ; -i, gen. ; -um, ace -u, abl.; a fshing. §95 DEFECTIVE NOUNS. 51 Suppetise, nmn. pi. ; -as, ace. ; tup- plies. Tabum, nom. ; -i, gen. ; -o, abl. ; cor- rupt matter. Tempe, iiom. ace. voc. pi. ; a vale in Thessaly. Tus wants gen., dat., and abl. pi. Venui and -o, dat. ; um, ace. ; -o, obL ; sale. Veprem, ace. ; -e, abl. ; a hner ;— vl. entire. VerberiS; gen.; -e, abl.; a stripe; — pi. verb era, um, ibus. Vesper, nom. ; -um, ace- ; -e, -i, or -o, abl. ; the evening. Vespera, nom. ; -am, ace. ; -a, abl. ; the evening. y^icis, gen. ; -i, dat. ; -em, ace. ; -e, abl. ; change ; — pi. entii'e, except gen. Tirus, nom. ; -i, gen, ; -us, ace. ; -o, abl. ; poison. Vis, gen. and dat. rare ; strength; pi. vires, -ium, etc. See ^ 85. Viscus, nom. ; -eris, gen. ; -6re, abl. ; an internal organ, pi. viscera, etc. Vocatu, abl. ; a calling ; — vocatus, ace. pi. Pix, jntch ; pices, ace. pi. Pondo, abl. ; in weight. Cf. § 94, 1. Preci, dat. ; -em, ace. ; -e, abl. ; prayer • —pi. entire. Procer; nom.; -em, ace. ; a peer;— pi. entire. Promptu, abl., readiness. Pus wants gen, dat. and abl. pi. Relatum, ace. ; — u, abl. ; a recital. Repetundarum, gen. pi. ; -is, a6?. ; money taken by extortion, Rogatu, abl. ; a request. Ros, dew, wants gen. pi. Bus, the country, wants gen., dat., and abl. pi. Satias, nom. ; -atem, ace. ; ate, abl. ; satiety. Secus, nom., ace. ; sex. Situs, nom. ; -um, ace. ; -u, abl. ; situor- tion ; — situs, nom. and ace. pi. Situs, nom. ; -us, gen. ; -um, ace. ; -u, abl. ; i-ust ; — situs, ace. pi. Sol, the sun, wants gen. pi. Sordis, gen. ; -em, ace. ; -e and -i, abl; filth ;—pl. sordes,-ium, etc. Spontis, gen. ; -e, abl. ; of one's oum accord. Suboles, offspring, wants gen. pi. Remark 1. To these may be added nouns of the fifth declension, which either want the plural, as most of them are abstract nouns, or have in that number onlv the nominative, accusative, and vocative. Res and t^/es, however, have the plural entire. Cf. \ 90, R. 1. Rem. 2. For the use of the vocative, also, of many nouns, no classical au- thority can be found. § OiT. 2. Nouns defective in number, want either the plural or the singular. (fl) ]\Iany nouns want the plural from the nature of the things which they express. Such are generally names of persons, most names of places (except those which have only the plural), the names of herbs, of the arts, most material and abstract nouns ; but these may have a plural when used as common nouns, (§ 26, R. 3.), and many others. RE>t. In Latin the plural of abstract nouns is often used to denote the exist- ence of the quality, attribute, etc. in different objects, or the repetition of an action ; and in poetry such plurals are used for the sake of emphasis or metre. See (j 98. The following list contains many of the nouns which ivant the plural, and also some, marked p, which are included in the above classes, but »re sometimes used in the plural. Aconitum, wolfsbane, p. Adorea, a military re- ward Aer, the air, p. /£%, brass, money, p. fither, the sky. Mmm, age, lifetime, p. Alburn, an album. Allium, garlic, p. Amicitia, friendship, p. Argilla, it'll i(e clay. Avena, oats, p. Balaustium, the flower of the pomegranate. Balsfimum, bnkcm, p. Barathrum, a gulf. Galium, hardened skin, p Calor, heat, p. 52 DEFECTIVE NOUNS. §96 Carduus, a thistle, p. Ca.ro, flush, p. Cera, wax, p. Cestus. a (jirdle. Cicuta, hemloch, p. Coeiium, 7nud. Contagium, contagion, ^5, Crocum, saffron. Crocus, saffron, p. Cruor, blood, p. Cutis, the skin, p. Diluculum, the dawn. Ebur, ivory. Electnim, amber, p. Far, corn, p. Fel, gall, p. Fervor, heat, p. Fides, /ffiYL Fihius, dung. Fxign, flight, -p. Fumus, smoke, p. Fnror, madness, p. Galla, ow oak-aj)/jle, p. G elu, y^'ost. Glarea, gravel. Gloria, glory, p. Glastum, wood. Gluten, or Glutlnum, glue. Gypsum, mtite plaster. Hepar, the liver. Hespei-us, the evening star. Hilum, a little thing. Hordeuni, barley, p. Humus, the ground. Indoles, native qtudity, p. Ira, anger, p. Jubar, radiance. Jws, justice, law, p. Justitium, a law vacation. Lac, milk. Lcetitia,yoy, p. Languor, /aireiwess, p. Lardum, bacon, p. Latex, liquor, p. Letum, death. Lignum, wood, p. Limus, mud. Liquor, liquor, p. Lues, a plague. Lutum, clay, p. Lux, light, p. Macellum, the shambles. Mane, the morning. Marmor, marble, p. Mel, honey, p. Meridies, mid-day. Mors, death, p. Munditia, neatness, p. Mundus, female orna^ ments. Muscus, moss. Nectar, nectar. Nemo, no man. Nequitia, vnckedness, p. Nilillum, nihil, or nil, 7io- thing. Nitrum, natron. OhViyio, f or getfulness, p. Omasum, bullock's tripe. Opium, opium. Palea, ehaff, p. Pax, jseace, p. Fenum, and "Pmus, 2}rovisions, p. F'lper, pepjjer. Fix, pilch, p. Pontus, the sea. Prolubium, desire. Pubes, the youth. Pulvis, dust, p. Purpiira, purple, p. Quies, rest, p. Ros, dew, p. Riibor, redness, p. Sabiilo and Sabulum, gravel. Sal, salt. Salum, the s&i. Salus, safety. Sanguis, bhjod. Scrapulum, a scruple, pu Senium, old age. Siler, an osier. Sinapi, mustard. Siser, skirret, p Sitis, thirst. Sol, the sun, p. Sopor, sleep, p. Specimen, an example. Spuma, ybam, p. Sulfur, sulphur, p. Supellex, furniture. Tabes, a consumption. Tabum, corrupt matter. Tellus, the earth. TeiTor, terror, p. Thymum, thyme, p. Tribulus, a ijiistle, p. Tristitiaj sadness. Ver, spring. Vespera, the evening. Vetemus, lethargy. Vigor, strength, p. Vinum, wine, p. Virus, jjoison. Viscum, and Viscus, bird-lime. Vitnim, wood. Vulgus, the common peo pie. Zingiber, ginger. Fundi, Locri, Sasa, Gabii, Parisii, SjTacusse, Gades, Philippi, Thennopylse, Gemonise, Puteoli, Veii. § 96. (I). The names of festivals and games, and several names of plat-es and books, want the singular ; as, Bacchanalia, a festival of Bacchus ; Olympia, the Olympic games ; Bucolica, a book of pastorals ; and the following names of places : — Acrocerannia, Baise, AmyelEe, Ceraunia, Aitaxata, Ecbatana, Athente, Esquilise, Note. Some of those in i properly signify the people. The following list contains most other nouns lohich want the singular, and also some, marked s, which are rarely used in that number : — Acta, recm-ds. AJpes, the Alps, s. * Apinte, trifles. Adversaria, a memoran- Aniiales, annals, s. Arguti*, witticisms, 9. duntrJ/ook. Antse, door-posts. Arma, arms. Estiva, so. castra, sumr- Antes, rows. ' Artus, the joints, s. mer qua\iers. Antiaj, a forelock. Bellaria, sweetmeats. §97. de:ective nouns. 5b Bigse, a tiBO-horse char- iot, s. Braccie, breeches. Branchiae, the gills of Jishes. Brevia, shallow places. Calendse, the Calends. Caiicelli, balustrades. Caui, gray hairs. Casses, a hunter's net, s. Caulse, sheep-folds. Celeres, the body-guard of the Roman kings. Cibaria, victuals, s. Clitella;, a pack-saddle. Codicilli, a writing. Ccelites, the gods, s. Crepundia, a rattle. Cunabula, and CunJE, a cradle. Cyclades, the Cyclades, s. Decimse, tithes, 8. Dirag, the Furies, s. Divitiae, riches. Dniides, the Di-uids. ])rj'ades, the Dryads, 3. Epulie, a banquet, s. Eumenides, the Furies, a. ExcubiaB, watches. Exsequia;, funeral rites. Exta, entrails. Exuvise, spoils. Facetiae, pleasantry, s. Farias, holidays, s. Fides, a stringed instru- ment, s. Flabra, blasts. Fracas, the lees of oil. Fraga, strawberries, s. Gemini, twins, s. Gente, cheeks, s. GaiTffi, trifles. Grates, thanks. Habenae, reins, a. Hibema, so. castra, vnn- ter quarters. Hyades, the Hyades, s. Idu3, the ides of ajnonth. Dia, the flank. Inouiiabiila, a cradle. Indutiae, a truce. §97. numbers. ^des, -is, a temple. ^des, -ium, a house. Aqua, water. JLquae, medicinal springs. Auxilium, aid. Aaxilia. anxiliary troops. 6* Induviffi, clothes. Ineptiai, fooleries, 8. lufC-ri, the dead. Liferia;,soc;-i/jtes in honor of the dead. Insecta, insects. Insidise, an ambuscade, a. Justa, funei-al rites. Lactes, small entrails, a. Lamanta, lamentations. Lapicidinae, a stone quar- ry. Latebrae, a hiding place, s. Lauricas, young rabbits. Laiitia, presents to for- eign ambassadors. Lemures, hobgoblins. Lendes, nits Libei'i, children, a. Luceres, a division of the Roman cavalry. Magalia, cottages. ^lajOres, ancestors. Manes, the shades, a. Manubiae, spoils of war. Mapalia, nuts, a. Minacise, and Minae, threats. MinSres, posterity. McKnia, the walls of a city, a. Multitia, garments finely wrought. Munia, official duties. Naiades, water-rimnphs, a. Nares, the 7iostrils, a. Natales, parentaae. Nates, the haunches, a. Nomae, corroding sores or ulcers., a. NoucT., the nones of a month. § 326, 1. Niigae, J esis, nonsense. Nundluoe, the weekly mar- ket. Niiptite, a marriage. ObiimA, forgetfulness, a. OU'ucifE, cheats, a. Optimates, the aristo- cratic party, a. Palearia, the aewlap, s. PandectEB, thepanrlects Parietinae, old walls. Partes, a party, a. Va.acnn., pastures, a. Penates, household gods, a. PhalSrae, trappings. Philtra, love potions. Pleiades, the Pleiads oi seven stars, a. Posteri, posterity. Prsebia, an amulet. Praecordia, the dior phragm, the entrails. Vrmntvx, first fruits. Proceres, nobles, a. Pugillaria, or -ai'es, writing-tablets, a. Quadrigae, a team offowr horses, s. Quirites, Roman citizem, a. Quisquiliae, refuse. Reliquiaj, the remains, a. Salebra?, rugged roads, s. Saljuae, salt pits. Scalae, a ladder, a. Scatebrae, a spring, a. Sc6p£e, a broom. Scriita, old stuff. Sentes, thorns, a. Sponsalia, esjjousals. Stativa, sc. castra, a stationary camp. Superi, the gods above. Talaria, winged shoes. Tenebrte, darkness, s. Tesca, rough places. Tliennaj, warm baths. Tormina, colic-pains. Transtra, seats for rou>- ers, a. Tricre, trifles, toys. Utansiliu, utensils. Valvaj, folding doom's, s. Vepres, branwles, a. VergiliEe, the seven stars, Vindicife, a legal claim, s. Virgiilta, bushes. The following usually diflFer in meaning in the different Bonum, a good thing. Bona, property. Career, a jyrison. Carceres, the barriers of a race-course Castrum, a castle. Castra, a camp. Comitimn, apart of th« Roman forum. Comitia, Vi« assembly for election. Copia, plenty. 54 REDUNDANT NOUNS. § 98, 99 Coplae, troops, forces. Cupedia, -£e, aaintiness. Ciipediae, -arum, and Cupedia, -orum, dainties. Facultas, ability. Facultates, property. Fastus, -us, pride. Fastus, -uum, and Fasti, -5rum, a calendar. Fortuiia, Fortune. FortjinEe, wealth. Fiu-fur, bra7i. Furfiires, dandruff. GraX'm, favor. Gratiaj, thanks. Impedimentum, a hinder- ance. Impedimenta, baggage. Litera, a letter of the al- phabet. Literse, an epistle. Ltidus, pastime. Ludi, public games. Lustrum, a morass. Lustra, a haunt or den of wild beasts. Mos, custom. Mores, manners. Naris, a nostriL Nares, the nose. Natalia, a birthday. Natales, birth, lineage. Opera, work, labor. Operse, workmen. Opis, gen. power. Opes, -um, means, wealth, Plaga, a region, tract. Plagse, nets, toils. Principium, a beginning, Principia, the generalPt -quarters. Eostrum, a beak, pro/m. Rostra, tJie Rostra. Sal, salt. Sales, witticisms. § 08. The following plurals, with a few others, are sometimes used in poetry, especially in the nominative and accusative, instead of the singular, for the sake of emphasis or metre. Jiquora, the sea. Alta, the sea. Animi, (courage. Auroe, the air. CaiiuEe, a keel. Cei-vices , the neck. Colla, the neck. C6m£B, the hair. Connubia, riarriage. Corda, the heart. Coi-pora, a body. Crepuscula, twilight, Cui'rus, a chariot. Exsilia, banishment. Frigora, cold. Gaudia, joy. Gvamina, grass. la, gr 1, the Guttiira, the throat. Hymenai, marriage. Igues, love. Liguiua, the groin. tse, anger. Jej unia, fasting. Jubee, a mane. Limina, a threshold. Litora, a shore. Mensce, a service or course of dishes. Neniae, a funeral dirge. Numiua, tlie divinity. Odia, hatred. Ora, the mouth, the coun- tenance. Orse, confines. Ortus, a rising, the east. Otia, ease, leisure. Pectora, the breast. Reditus, a return. Regna, a kingdom. Rictus, the jaws. Robora, strength. Silentia, silence. Sinus, the bosom of a Bo- man garment. Tcedas, a torch. Tempora, time. Terga, the back. Thalami, marriage or marriage-bed. Tori, a bed, a couch. Tilra, frankincense. Vits, a journey. Vultus,- the countenance. III. REDUNDANT NOUNS. § OO. Nouns are redundant either in termination, in declensioUj in gender, or in two or more of these respects. 1. In tennination : {a.) of the nominative ; as, arbor, and arbos, a tree: (b.) of the oblique cases; as, tigris, ; gen. tigris, or -Idis; a tiger. 2. In declension ; as, laurus ; gen. -i, or -Us ; a laurel. 3. In gender; as, vulgus, masc. or neut. ; the common people. 4. In tern:""nation and declension ; as, senecta, -cb, and senectus, -utis ; old age. 5. In termination and gender; aspileus, masc, and pileurn, neut.; a hat 6. In d3clension and gender; as penus, -i or us, masc. or fem., and penus, •dris, neut. ; a store of provisions. Specus, -us or -i, masc. fem. or neut. ; a cavek 7. In t3imination, declension, and gender; as, mendn, -ce, fem. and mendum^ •4, neut. ; a fault. §99. REDUNDANT NOUNS. 55 The follow'.ng list contains most Redundant Nouns of the above classes : — Acinus, -um, and -a, a berry. Kil-3.g\Vira, and -\o, a proverb. Admouitio, -um, and -us, us, a remind- ing. ^tlira, and tether, the clear sky. Aftectio, afuf -UB, us, affection. Apamemno, and -on, Agamemnon. Alaliaster, tri, and pi. -tra, oruin, an alabaster box. A'.iiDonia, and -urn, aliment. A\\\i\'\o, and -Q,?>, ajiood. Alvearium, «'«<:/ -are, a bee-hive. Amaracus, and -um, marjoram. Amygdala, and -um, aji almond.^ Anfractum, and -us. Us, a idnding. Angiportutn, and -us. Us, a narrow lane or alky. Autidotiis, and -um, an antidote. Arauea, and -us, j, a spider. Arar, a7ul Ai-aris. the river Arar. Arbor, and -os, a tree. Aixliitectus, and -on, an architect. Arcus, -us, and i, a bow. Attagena, and -gen, a moor-hen. Avaritia, and -ies, avarice. Augmentum, and -men, an increase. Baccar, and -aris, a kind of herb. Baculus, and -um, a staff. Balteus, and -um, a belt. Barbaria, and -ies, barbarism. Barbitus, and -on, a harp. BatQlus, and -um, afire-shovel. Blanditia, and -ies, flattery. Bucciua, «n(Z-um, a trumpet. Biira, and -is, ft plough-tail. Buxus, and -um, the box-tree. Cjepa, and ca2ne, an onion. Calamister, tri, and -trum, a crisping- pin. Callus, and -um, hardened skin. Cancer, cri, or eris, a crab. Canitia, aiul -ies, hoariness. Capus, and capo, a capon. CaiTus, and-Mxn, a kind of waggon Cassida, and -cassis, a helmet. Catinus, and -um, a bowl, dish. Chirogi'aphus, and -um, a hand-writ ng. Cingula, -us, and -um, a girdle. Clipeus, «na -um, a shield. Cochlearium, -ar, and -are, a spoon Colluvio, and -ies, filth. Commentarius, and -um, a journal Compages, and -go, a joining. Conatum, and-ns, u.<, an attempt. Concinnitas, arui -tudo, neatness. Consortium, and -io, partnership. Contagium, -io, and -es, contact. Comum, -us, », or Us, a cornel tree. Uo8t03,j, and -um- a kind of shrub. Cratera, ctnd crater, a bowl. Ci'ocus, and -um, saffron. Crystallus, and -\im, crystal. Cubitus, and -um, the elbow. Cupiditas, and -pido, desire. Cupressus, i, or us, a cypress-tree. Delicia, and -um, delight. Delphinus, and delphin, a dolphin. Dictamnus, and -um, dittany. Diluvium, -o, and -ies, a deluge. Domus, i, or Qs, a Iwtise. Dorsus, and -um, the back. Duritia, and -ies, hardness. Effigia, and -ies, an image. Elegla, and -on, i, an elegy. Elephantus, and -phas, aii elephant. Epitoma, and -e, an abridgment. Esseda, and -um, a chariot. Evander, dri, and -drus, Evander. Eventum, and -us, us, an event. Exemplar, and -are, a pattern. Ficus, i, or us, a fig-tree. Fimus, and -um, dung. Fretum, and -us, Os, a strait. Fulgetra, and -um, lightning. Galerus, and -um, a fiat^ cap. Ganea, and -um, an eating-house. Gausapa, -es, -e, and -um, frieze. Gibba, -us, and -er, eri, a hump. Glutinum, and -ten, glue. Gobius, and -io, a gudgeon. Gramiuatica, a7id -e, grammar. Gras, grwis,and wrais, is, a crane. Hebdomada, ana -ma.s, a week. Hellebonis, and -um, hellebore. Honor, and honos, honor. Hyssopus, aiid -um, hyssop. Ilios, -um, and -on, Troy. Incestum, and -us. Us, incest. Intiibus, and -um, endive. Jugulixs, and -um, the throat. Juventa, -us, Utis, and -as, youth. Labor, ami labos, labor. Lacerta, and -us, a lizard. Laums, i, or us, a laurel. Lepor, and lepos, wit. Ligur, and -us, uris, a Ligurian. Lupinus, and -um, a lupine. Luxuria, and -ies, luxury. Maeander, -dros, and -drus, Mc^ander. Margarita, and -um, a pearl. Materia, and -ies, materials. Medimnus, and -um, a measure. Menda, and-\xm., afatdt. Modius, and -um, a measure. Mollitla, and -ies, softness. Momentum, and -men, influence. Mugil, and -ilis, a mullet. Mulclber, eri, or iris, Vulcan. 56 DEKIVATTON OK NOUNS. §100 Mulctra, and -um, a milkrpail. Muiiditia, ajirf -ies, neatnesi. I\Iuria, and -ies, brine or pkkle il_yrtus, i or us, a myrtle. Nardus, a7ul -um, ware?. Nasus, r(?i(i -iim, ^/(e «ose. Necessitas, o/i(/ -udo, 7iecessify. Nequitia, «««? -ies, icortlikssitsss, Notitia, arid -ies, knoidedye. Oblivimn, and -io^fovgcffulness. Obsidium, and -\o, a sieye. (Edipus, i, or 6dis, CEdipus. Ostrea, and -um, an oyster. Palatus, and -um, the palate. Palumba, -us, and -es, apiyeon. Papyrus, and -um, papyrus. Paupertas, and -ies, poverty. Pfivus, and pavo, apieacoclc. Pemis, i, -6ris, or us, and penum, 2^' visions. Peplus, and -um, a veil. Perseus, ei, or eos, Persem. Piletis, and -um, a hat. Pinus, i, or us, apine-tree. Pistrlna, and -uir. a hake-houie. Planitia, and -ies, a plain. Plato, and^Vlaton, Plato. Plebs, and plebes, ei, the common people. Porrus, and -um, a leek. Postulatum, aiul -io, a request. Prassepia, -ium, -es, or -is, and -e, stable. Prajtextum, and -uSj us, a pretext. Prosapia, and -ies, Imeaye. Eapa, aiul -um, a turnip. Eequies, etis or ei, rest. Rete, and retis, a net. Keticiilus, and -um, a small net. Rictum, and -us, Us, the open nwuth. Sffivitia, -Gdo arid -ies, ferocity. Silgus, aiid -um, a military chaJt. Sanguis, and sanguen, Uood. Satrapes, and satraps, a satrap. Scabritia, and -ies, 'roughness. Scorpius, -OS, and -io, a scorpion. Segmentum, and -men, apiece. Segnitia, and -ies, sloth. Senecta, and -us, old age. Sequester, tri, or tns, a trustee. Sesama, aiul -um, sesame. Sibilus, and -a, drum, a hissing. Siuapi, and -is, mustard. Sinus, and -um, a goblet. Spiinis, and -a, drum, a spear. Spurcitia, and -ies, Jilihiness. Stramentum, aiid -men, straw. Suftimentum, and -men, fumigation. Suggestus, and-um, apnilpit, singe. Suppainis, and -um, a linen garment. Suppliciimi, -icamentum, and -icatia a public svpplicaiion. TapC'tum, -ete, and -es, tapestry. Teueritas, a/id-tlido, softness. Tergum, aiul -us, oris, me hack. Tiara, and -as, a turban. Tignus, aiul -um, a beam, timber. Tigi'is, is, or idis, a tiger. Titiinus, arnd Titan, Titan. Tonitruum, and -trus, us, thunder. Torfile, and -al, a bed-covering. Trabes, and trabs, a beam. Tribula, and-um., a threshing sledge. VespC-ra, -per, eri and eris, the evening. ViuacC-us, aW -a, drum, a grape-stone. Viscus, aiul -um, the mistletoe. Vulgus, masc. and neut., the common people. Remark 1. To these may be added some other verbals in ms and io, and Greeli nouns in o and on ; as, Dio and Dion ; also some Greek nouns in es and 6., which have Latui forms in a ; as, Atrldes and Atrtda. See § 45. Rem. 2. Some proper names of places also are redundant in number ; as, ArgosmvX Argi; Fidfna and Fidence ; Tliijbe and Thebw. Note. The different forms of most words in the above list are not equally common, and some are rarely used, or only in particular cases. DERIVATION OF NOUNS. § too. Nouns are derived from other nouns, from adjectives, and Irom verbs. I. From Nouns. From nouns are derived the following classes : — 1. A patronymic is the name of a person, derived from that of his father or other ancestor, or of the founder of his nation. § 100. DIiyVATION OF NOUNS. 57 Note 1. Patronymics are properly Greek nouns, and have been borrowed from that Ian guage by the Latin poets. (a.) Masculine patronymics end in ides, ides, ades, and iiides. (1.) Ntuns in its 3f the second declension, and those nouns of the third de* clensioi, whose ro.:t ends m a short syllable, form their patronpnics hi ides; fts, Priamiis, Priamides ; Agamemnon, gen. dnis, Agaiiiemnonldes. (2.) Nouns in eus and cles form their^patronymics in kfes; as, A-treus, Atrides ; Htracles (i. e. Hercules,) Heraclldes. Rem. 1. Snides, in Virg. A. 9, 653, is formed in like manner, as if from JEneua, instead of ^iicas. (3.) Nouns in as and es of the first declension form their patronymics in ddes, as jEnids, jEneades ; Eippdtes, Hippdtddes. (4.) Nouns in ius of the second declension, and those nouns of the third de- clension, whose root ends in a long vowelj form their patronymics in iddes; as, iltestius, niestiddes; Amphitryo {g<&n. dms), Amphitryoniddes. Kem 2. A few nouns also of the first declension have patronjnnics in lades ; as, AnchUes, Anchislddes. (b.) Feminine patronymics end in is, eis, and ias, and correspond in termination to the masculines, viz. is to ides, eis to ides, and ias to iades ; as, Tyndarus, masc. Ti/ndarides, fern. Tynddris ; Nereus, masc. Nereides, fem. Nereis ; Thestius, masc. Thestiddes, fern. Tkesiias. Rem. 3. A few feminines are fotmd in ine, or imie ; as, Nerlne, ■'AcrisioTie , from Nereus and Acrisius. Note 2. Patronj-mics in des and ne are of the first declension ; those in is and as, of the third. 2. Apatrial or gentile noun is derived from the name of a country; and denotes an inhabitant of that country ; as, Tros, a Trojan man ; Troas, a Trojan woman : Macedo, a Macedonian ; Saintns, a Samnite ; from Troja, Macedonia, and Samniwn. Note 3. Most patrials are properly adjectives, relating to a noun understood ; as, hdmo, clvis, etc. See § 128, 6. 3. A diminutive signifies a small thing of the kind denoted by the primitive ; as, liber, a book ; libellus, a little book. Diminutives generally end in iilus, iila, Ulum, or cuius, cula, cUlum, according as the primitive is masuline, feminine, or neuter. A. 1. If the primitive is of the first or second declension, or its root ends in c, ^ d, or t after a vowel, the diminutive is fonned by annexing ulus, a, um to the root ; as, arula, servulus, puerulus, scutulum, cornkula, reyidus, ca- pitulv.n, mercedula ; from dra, ser-vus, yjuer, scutum, comix, {-Ids), rex, [regit), caput, (-itis), merces, {-edis.) 2. Primitives of the first or second declension whase root ends in e or t, instead of ulus, a, um, add dlus, a, um ; as, JiUolus, gloridla, IwrreOlum ; from Jilius, gloria, horreum. 3. Prhnitives of the first or second declension whose root ends hi I, «, or r, fonn diminutives bv contraction in eV'us, a, um, and some in illus, a, wn : as, ocellus, asvHus, libeltus, lucellum ; from ocultts, asiiia, liber, luci'um ; and dyillun\ tiyillum, from signum, tiyniun. B. 1 If the primitive is of the third, fourth, or fifth declension, the dunina- tive is .'onned in cuius, (or icuIks), a, vjh^ 2. Primitives of the thud declension whose nominative ends in r, or in ob est us from roots ead:-^ in r annex eilus to the nominative ; s^,frater cuius, soror- 58 DERIVATION OF NOU^. § lUl. cula osculum, corpusc&lum; frovaj rater, sdror,6s, (dris),corptis,{-67'is).-—Soal90 primitives in es and is, but thsse drop the s of the nominative ; as, ignicultu, nubecula, dkcula ; from i(^nis, nuhes, dies. 3. Primitives of other tenninations of the third declension, and those of tne fourth, add iculus to the root ; as, ponticMus, coticula, ossiculum, versic&lus, corni- culum; frora pons, cos, es, {ossii j, versus, cornu. 4. Primitives in o, {inis or onis), in adding cuius, a, um, change the final vowel of the root (i or o) into u ; as, homunculus, sermunculus ; from Mmo and sermo ; and a few primitives of other terminations form similar diminutives ; as, avun- cuius, domuncula ; from avus and ddmus, C. 1. A few diminutives end in uleus , as, equuleus, aculeus ; from equus ant' Acv^ ; and a few also mlo; as, homuncio, senecio, from hdnio and senex. 2. Diminutives are sometimes formed from other diminutives ; as, aselMin, from dsellus ; sometimes two or more diminutives with different terminations are formed from the same primitive , as, homunculus, homullvs, and homuncio ; fi-om hdmo ; and sometimes the primitive undergoes euphonic changes ; as ru- musculus, from rumor. Rem. Some diminutives differ in gender from their primitives ; as ranun- cuius, scamillus, from rdna and scamnum. 4. (rt.) An amplificative is a personal appellation denoting an ex- cess of that which is expressed by its primitive ; as, Captio, one who has a large head : so naso, labeo, bucco, fronto, mento, one who has a large nose, lips, or cheeks, a broad forehead or long chin ; from caput, nasus, labia, bucca, frons, and mentum. (6.) A few personal appellatives in io denote the trade or profession to which a person belongs ; as, ludw, an actor ; pellio, a farrier ; from liidus, und pellis. 5. The termination ium added to the root of a noun, indicati s the office or condition, and often, derivatively, an assemblage of the individuals denoted by the primitive ; as, collegium, colleagueship, and thence an assembly of col- leagues ; servitium, servitude, and collectively the servants ; so sacerdoiium, and tninisterium ; from collega, serous, sacerdos, and minister. 6. The tei-mination imonium is added to the root of a few nouns, denoting something derived from the primitives, or imparting to it its peciiliar character : as, testimonium, testimony ; so vadimonium, pati-imonium, matrimonium ; fr-om testis, vds {vadis), pidter, and mater. 7. The termination eijim,^ added to the root of names of plants, denotes a place where they gi-ow in abundance ; as, quercetum, Icmretum, olivetum, fi-om quercus, laurvs, and oliva. So, also, cBscidetum, dumetum, myrtetum, and by analogy saxetum. But some drop e ; as, carectum, salictum, virgultum, and arbustum. 8. The termination arium, added to the root of a noun, denotes a receptaclo of the things signified by the primitive ; as, avidrium, an aviary ; plantdnum, a nui'sery ; from avis, a bird, and^^tento, a plant. 9. The termination lie, added to the root of names of animals, marks the place where they are kept ; as, bovlle, a stall for oxen; so caprile, ov'de; from bds, an ox, caper, a goat, and ovis, a sheep. Note 1. This class and the preceding are properly neuter adjectives. Note 2. Abstract nouns are derived either from adjectives or from verbs. See § 26, 5. II. From Adjectives. § 101. 1. Abstract nouns are formed by adding the terojination Uas, itudo, ia, itia or ilies, edo, and imonia to the root of the primitive $ 102. DERIVATl )N OF NOUNS. 59 2. Abstracts in Has, (equivalent to the English ty or ity), are formed from adjectives of each declension ; as, cupiditas, tenei-itas, celeiitas, crudelitas, fe'ici- tas; from cuj^ldus, tener, celer, crudelis, and J' elix. (1.) When the root ends in i, the abstract is formed in etas; s.s,pietas, from •pins; and when it ends in t, as only is added ; as, honestas from Iio?iestus. (2.) In a few abstracts i before tas is dropped ; as, lihertas, juvenlas, from liber, juvenis. Infacultas and dijjicultas, from /acilis, difficilis, there is a change also in the root-vowel from i to u. (3.) A few abstracts are formed in itus or tus, instead of ite ; s.s, seri^tus, iuventus, from servus and juvenis. See § 76, Exc. 2. 3. Abstracts in itiido are formed from adjectives in us, and some from adjec- tives of the third declension of two or three terminations; as>,ma(jniiudo, alti- tudo,fortitudo, acritudo, from viagnus, altus, foi-tis, acer. Polysyllabic adjectives in tus, generally form their abstracts by adding udo instead of i7r«/o to their root; as, consuetude, from consuetm. 4. Abstracts in ia (equivalent to the English ce or cy,) are for the most part formed from adjectives of one tenuLnation ; as, dementia, constantia, impuden- tia, from demens, constans, irnpudens. But some adjectives in vs and er , including verbals in cundus, likewise form their verbals in ia; as, miseria, angustia, facun- dia, irom. miser, angustus,facundits. 5. Absfracts in itia and ities are formed from adjectives in us and is ; as, justitia, trislitia, duritia, and durities, segnitia and segnities, from Justus, tHsiis, du- rus, and segnis. 6. A few abstracts are formed in edo, and a few in imonia ; and sometimes two or more abstracts of diflerent tenninations are formed from the same adjec- tive : as, ncrltas, acritudo, acrcdo, and acrimonia, from acer. In such case those in ithdo and imonia seem to be more intensive in signification than those in itas. Remark. Adjectives, as distinguished from the abstracts which dre formed from them, are called concretes. in. From Verbs. § 103- Nouns derived from verbs are called verbal nouns. The following are the principal classes : — 1. Abstract nouns expressing the action or condition denoted by a verb, es- pecially by a neuter verb, are fonned by aimexing or to their first root ; as, amor, love ; favor, favor ; viceror, grief ; splendor, brightness ; from OTno, fdveo, nuzreo, and splendeo. 2. (a.) Abstracts are also formed from many verbs by annexing ium to the first or to the third root ; as, colloquium, a conference ; gaudium, joy ; exor- dium, a beginning ; exitium, destruction ; solatium, consolation ; from colloquor, gaudeo, exordior, exeo and solor. 3. Some verbal abstracts are formed by annexing ela, imonia, or imonium, to ttie first root of the verb ; as, querela and queritnonia, a complaint ; suadela, persuasion ; from queroi- and suadeo. 4. (a.) The terminations men and mentum, added to the first root of the verb, generally with a connecting vowel, denote the thing to which the action belongs, both actively and passively, or a means for the performance of the ac- tion ^ a^,fidmen from fidgeo, Jiumen from Jiuo, aqmen from ago, soldmen from gofoj', documentum from doceo, hlaiulimentum from olandioi: (i.) The final consonant of the root is often dropped, and the preceding and connecting vowels contracted into one syllable ; as, ago, (dglmen,) ajfmen; jdveo^ [/bvimentum, ) fim^ntum. 60 COMPOSITION OF NOUNS. § 103. (c.) Some words of this class have no primitive verb in use ; as, atramentwn, ink; but, in tliis case, tlie connecting vowel seems to imply its reference to such a verb as atrdre, to blacken. 5. (a.) The terminations iilum, bulum, culum; hrtm , crum, trum, annexed to the first root of a verb, denote an instrument for performing the act expressed by the verb, or a place for its performance ; as, cingHlum, operculum, vencbUlum, ventildbrum, fulcrum, spectrum, from cinyo, operio, venor, venillo, fulcio, specio. (b.) Sometimes culum is contracted into clum; as, vinclum for vinculum. Sometimes, also, s is inserted before trum; as, rostrum, from rodo, and a con- necting vowel is placed before this and some of the other terminations; an, ardtrum, stabulum, cubiculum, from dro, sio, and cubo. (c.) Some words of this kind are formed from nouns ; as, acetabuluvi, a vin- egar cruet ; turibulum, a censer ; from acetum and tus. 6. (a.) Nouns formed by adding or and rix to the third root of the verb, de- note respectively the male and female agent of the action expressed by the v&rb j as, adjator, adjutrix, an assistant ; fautor, fautrix, a favorer ,- victor, victrix, a conqueror ; from (uljfivo {culjutr), jfaveo (fautr-), vinco [victr-). They are often like- wise used as adjectives. The feminine form is less common than the mascu- Ime, and when the third root of the verb ends in s, the feminine is sometimss formed in trix ; as, tondeo (tons-) tonstrix. (b.) Some norms in im- are formed immediateljr from other nouns ; as, viatoj; a traveller ; janitor, a door-keeper; from via and janua. In meretrix from mereo^ i of the third root becomes e. (c.) The agent of a few verbs is denoted by the terminations a and o annexed to the first root ; as, conclva, a guest ; advena, a stranger ; scr'iba, a scribe ; erro, a vagrant ; bibo, a dinmkard ; comedo, a glutton, from eonvlvo, advenio, etc. 7. Many abstract nouns are foi-med by annexmg io and us (gen. us) to the third root of a verb; as, actio, an action ; lectio, reading ; from ago (act-), lego (lect-); — canius, singing ; visus, sight ; usus, use; from cdno (cant-), video (vis-), uior (us-). Remark 1. Nouns of both forms, and of like signification, are frequently de- rived from the same verb ; as, concursio and concursus, a nmning together ; motio and motus, etc. Eem. 2. Nouns formed by adding the tennination ura to the third root of a verb, sometimes have the same signification as those in io and us, and some- times denote the result of an action; as,positura, position; vinctUra, a binding together ; from po7io, and vincio ; and the termmation ela has sometimes the Baaae meaning; as, querela, complaint ; loquela, speech, from queror and Idquor. Note. One of these forms is generally used to the exclusion of the others, and when two or more are found, they are usually employed in somewhat different senses. 8. The temination orium, added to the third root of a verb, denotes the place where the action of the verbis performed; as, auditorium, a lecture-room; corh ditonum, a repositoiy; from aucEo and condo. COMPOSITION OF NOUNS. § lOcS. Compound nouns are formed variously : — 1. Of two nouns ; as, rupicapra, a wild goat, of rUpes and capra. In some words, compounded of two nouns, the fonner is a genitive ; as, senatHsconsultum, a decree of the senate; jurisconsultus, a lawyer; in others, both parts are de- clined; as, respublica,jmjurandum. See ^ 91. 2. Of a noun and a verb ; as, artifex, an artist, of ars and fdcio; jidi- cen, a harper o^ fides and cdno ; agricdla, a husbandman, of dger and cdlo. § 104 Al JECTn ES. 61 3. Of an adjective and a noun; as, (equinoctium, the equinox, of aquus and nox; millepeda, a mUlepede, oimille audjjes. In duumvir, triumvir, decemvir, centumvir, the numeral adjective is in the genitive plural. Remark 1. When the former part of a compound word is a noun or an adjeo- tive, it usuaUy ends 'mi; as, artifex, rupicaura, agncdla, etc. If the second •word begins with a vowel, an elision takes place ; as, quinquennium, of quinqut and annus ; magnanimus, of magnus and animus. 4. Of an adverb and a noun ; as, ne/as, wickedness ; «e»M), nobody ; of ne, fas, and hOmo. So biduum, of bis and dies. 5. Of a preposition and a noun: as, t«c«ria, want of care, of in and ctira. So intervallum, an interval ; praccrrdia, the diaphragm ; proverbium, a proverb ; sub- sellium, a low seat ; superjicies, a surface. Rem. 2. When the former part is a preposition, its final consonant is sometimes changed,to adapt it to that which follows it : as, ignobilis, illepidv^,imprudentia, irrumpo, of in and nobilis, lepidus, etc. See § 196. ADJECTIVES. § 104. An adjective is a word which qualifies or limits the meaning of a substantive. Adjectives may be divided, according to their signification, into various classes ; as denoting, 1. Character or quality ; as, bdnus, good ; albus, white ; amicus, friendly. 2. State or condition; as, felix, happy; (floes, rich. 3. Possession; as, lier'dis, a master's; patrius, a father's. 4. Quantity ; as, magnus, great ; totus, entire ; parvus, small. 5. Number ; as, Unus, one ; secundus, second ; tot, so many ; qvot, as many. These are called numerals. 6. Time; as, anwMMs, yearly; ^esierTiMs, of yesterday; iiTwas, of two years; trimestris, of three months. 7. Place; as, alius, high; vicimis, near; aeritis, aerial; terrestris, terrestrial. 8. Slaterial ; as, aureus, golden ; fagineus, beechen ; terrenus, earthen. 9. Part ; as, nullus, no one ; aliquis, some one. These are called partitives. 10. Country ; as, Bomdnus, Roman ; Arplnas of Arpinum. These are called patrials. 11. Diminution; as, parvUlus^ from parvus, small; misellus, from miser, nrdser- iible. These are called diminutives. 12. Amplification; as, vinosus and vinolentus, ranch, given to wine; anritiu, having long ears. These are called amplijicatives. 13. Relation ; as, diidus, deshous of ; memoi; mindful of ; insuetus. These are called relatives. 14. Interrogation; as, quantusf how great; quails? of what kind; quot? how manyV quotas? of what nimiber? These are called iwierro^n^/ties ; and, when not usei inten-ogatively, tliey are called correlatives. 15. Specification; as, talis, such; tantus, so gi-eat; tot, so many. These ar<> C&lled demynstratives. 62 ADJECTIVES FIRST AND SECOND DECLENSIONS. § 105. DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES. § 105. 1. Adjectives are declined like substantives, and ard B'ther of the drst and second declensions, or of the third only. ADJECTIVES OF THE FIBST AND SECOND DE- CLENSIONS. 2. The masculine of adjectives belonging to the first and second declensions, ends either in us or in er. The feminine and neuter are formed respectively by annexing a and um to the root of the mascu- line. The masculine in us is declined like dominus; that in er hke gener or ager; the feminine always like musa ; and the neuter like regnum. Remakk 1. The masculine of one adjective, satur, -Ura, -irwn, fall ends in ur, and .6 declined like gerwr. Boniis, good. • Singular. Masc. Fern. Neut. N. bo'-nus, bo'-na, bo'-niim, G. bo'-ni, bo'-nae, bo'-ni, D. bo'-no. bo'-nse. bo'-n5. Ac. bo'-num, bo'-nam, bo'-niim, V. bo'-ne. bo'-na, bo'-niim, Ah. bo'-no. bo'-na. Plural. bo'-no. N. bo'-ni. bo'-na3. bo'-na. G. bo-no'-riim, bo-na'-rfim, bo-no'-rilm, D. bo'-nis, bo'-nis, bo'-nis, Ac. bo'-nos, bo'-nas, bo'-na. V. bo'-ni, bo'-nae, bo'-na, Ah. bo'-nis. bo'-nis. bo'-nis. In like manner decline Al'-tus, Tiigh. Fi' -dus, faithful. Lon'-gug, long. A-va'-rus, covetous. Tm '-pro-bus, wicked. Ple'-nus, full. Be-nig'-nus, kind. In- i'-quus, unjust. Tac'-i-tus, silent. Rem. 2. Like bonus are also declined all participles in us ; as, A-ma'-tus. Am-a-tu'-rus. A-man'-dus. Rem. 3. The masculine of the vocative singular of adjectives in us is some- times like the nomiiiative ; as, vir fortis atque amicus. Hor. Meus has both mi and meus. Rem. 4. The genitive plural of distributive munerals ends commonly in &m Instead jf Srwn ; as, crasdtwk bin&m digitorum. Plin. § 106 ADJECTIVES — FIRST AND SECOKD DECLENSIONa. 63 3. Tener, tender. Singular. Masc. Fern. N. te'-ner, ten'-e-ra, G. ten'-e-ri, ten'-e-rae, D. ten'-e-ro, ten'-e-rae, Ac. ten'-e-riim, ten'-e-ram, V. te'-ner, ten'-e-ra, Ah. ten'-e-ro. ten'-g-ra. Plural N. ten'-e-ri, ten'-e-rae. G. ten-e-ro'-rfim, ten-e-ra'-riim. D. ten'-e-ris. ten'-e-ris, Ac. ten'-e-ros, ten'-e-ras. V. ten'-e-ri, ten'-e-rae, Ah. ten'-e-ris. ten'-e-ris. Neut. ten'-e-rum, ten'-e-ri, ten'-e-ro, ten'-e-rum, ten'-e-rum, ten'-e-ro. ten'-e-ra, ten-e-ro'-rum, ten'-e-ris, ten'-e-ra, ten'-§-ra, ten'-e-ris. In like manner are declined As'-per, rough,. Ex'-ter, foreign. Gib'-ber, crook-backed. La'-cer, torn. Li'-ber, free. Mi'-ser, wretched. Pros'-per, prosperous. Sa'-tur, full. So also alter, except in the genitive and dative singular (see § 107), serrAfer and the compounds of gero and fero; as, laniyer, opifer. Note. Prosper is less frequent than prosperm, and exter is scarcely tiseSION. § 107, 106 In like manner decline iE'-ger, sf^Jc. Ma'-cer, lean. Sca'-ber, rmigh. A'-ter, black. Ni'-ger, black. Si-nis'-terj left. Cre'-ber, frequent. Pul'-cher, fair. Te'-ter, /out. Gla'-ber, smooth. Ru'-ber, red. Va'-fer, crafty. Iii'-te-ger, entire. Sa'-cer, sacred. Dexter, right, has -tra, -trum, and less frequently -tera, -terum. § I®f . Six adjectives in us, and three in er, have their genitive singular in ius, and their dative in I, in all the genders : — AVms, another. Totiis, tvhole. Alter, -tera, -terum, i-o'-ri, mit-i-o'-ri, Ac. mit-i-o'-rem, mit'-i-iis, V. mit'-i-6r, mit'-i-iis, Ab. mit-i-o'-re, or -ri. mit-i-o'-re, or -ri, Plural. M. f F. N.^ N. mit-i-o'-res, mitri-o'-ra, G. mit-i-6'-rum, mit-i-o'-riim, D. mit-i-or'-i-bus, mit-i-or'-i-bus, Ac. mit-i-o'-res, mit-i-6'-ra, V. mit-i-o'-res, mit-i-o'-ra, Ab. mit-i-or'-i-biis. mit-i-or'-i-biis. §111 A.'-ti-or, higher. A i-da'-ci-or, bolder. B-s'-vi-or, snorter. Cru-de'-li-or, more cruel. Dul'-ci-or, sweeter. Fe-lic'-i-or, happier. Fe-ro'-ci-or, Jiei'cer. For'-ti-or, braver. N. G. D. Ac. V. Ah. Singular. N. plus, plu'-ris, 1 plus, In like manner decline Gra'-vi-or, heavier. Pru-den'-ti-or, more pru- dent. U-be'-ri-or, more fertile. Pliis, morCy is thus declined : — Plural. M. ^ F. N. N. plu'-res, plu'-ra, rarely plu -ri-&, G. plu'-ri-ura, plu'-ri-um, D. plu'-ri-biis, plu'-ri-bus, Ac. plu'-res, plu'-ra, y- , , Ab. plu'-ri-biis. plu'ri-bus. (plu'-re, ohs.) So, but in the plural number only, complures, a great many. § 111. m. Other adjectives of the third declension have but one termination in the nominative singular for all genders. They all end in I, r, s, or x, and increase in the genitive. They are thus declined : — Felix, happy. Singular M.^F. iV. N. fe'-lix, fe'-lix, G. fe-li'-cis, fe-li'-cis, D. fe-li'-ci, fe-li'-ci, Ac. fe-li'-cem, fe'-lix, V. fe'-Ux, fe'-lix. Ab. fe-li'-ce, or -ci. fe-li'-ee, or -ci. • Pronounced mish'-e-or., etc. See § 12. §irj. ADJECTIVES — OBLIQUE CASES. 67 Plural. M.^F. N. 2V. fe-li'-ces, fe-Hc'-i-a,* G. fe-lic'-i-iim,* fe-lic'-i-iim, D. fe-lic'-i-bu3, fe-lic'-i-bu8, Ac. fe-li'-ces, fe-lic'-i-a, V. fe-li'-ces, fe-lic'-i-a, Ab. fe-lic'-i-bus. fe-lic'-i-bu9. Prsesens, present. Singular ■«r M. Sf F. N. N. prae'-sens, prae'-sens. G. prae-sen'-tis, prae-sen'-tis, D. prae-sen'-ta, prae-sen'-ti, Ac. praB-sen'-tem, prae'-sens. V. prae'-sens, prae'-sens. Ab. prae-sen'-te, or -ti. Plural. prae-sen'-te, or -G. N. praB-sen'-tes, praB-sen'-ti-a,f G. prae-sen'-ti-fim, prae-sen'-ti-um, B. prae-sen'-ti-bus. pras-sen'-ti-biis, Ac. prae-sen'-tes. pr£E-sen'-ti-a, V. prae-sen'-tes. pras-sen'-ti-a. Ab. prse-sen'-ti-bus. prae-sen'-ti-bus. In like manner decline Au'-dax, -acis, fr9?c7. Par'-tl-ceps, -ipis, i?ar- SoV-lers, -tis, shreiod. Com'-pos, -ctis, master of. ticipant. Sos'-pes, -itis, safe. Fe'-rox, -oaiz,, fierce. Prse'-pes, -etis, swift. Sup'-plex, -Icis, si^ In'-gens, -tis, huge. Pru'-dens, -tis, prudent. pliant. Remark. All present participles are declined like proesens ; as, A'-mans. Mo'-nens. Ee'-gens. Ca'-pi-ens. Au'-di-ens. Note. A few adjectives of one termination liave redundant forms in ««, a, um; see ^ 116. Rules for the Oblique Cases of Ad.iective3 of tub Third Declension. GENITIVE SINGULAR. § 112. Most adjectives of the third declension form their geni- tive singular like nouns of the same termination. The following may here be specified: — 1. Of those in es ( cf. § 73 ) some have -etis ; as, hebes, perpes, preepes, and teres — inquies and locuples have -His ; — some have -His; as, (fires, sospes, and super- gteg ; — some have -idis ; aSj deses, and reses ; — bipes, and tripes have -pedis ;—pube$ f&i puheris, and impub€S,^mpubci-is and impubis. * Ptononnced fe-lish'-e-um etc See i 10, Kxc, and g 7., 3, (6.) t Proa )«nced pre-zen'-s/ie-a, et« 68 ADJECTIVES OBLIQUE CASKS. § 113, 114 2. Compos and impos have -dtis, and exos, exos$is. — Exlex has exlec/is, pernoa h&spernoctis {^ 78), prcBCOx,prcEcdcis, and rklux, reducis. — Cceicbs has calibis (§ 77) ; intercus, iniercutis, andw^Ms, veteris. Those in ceps which are compounds of caput, have -cipUis; as, anceps, prceceps (^ 78, 1); but tue compounds of cept from capio have -Ipis ; as, particeps, participis. — Those in con^ compounds oi c(n\ have ^cwdis ; as, concors, concordis (§ 71, Exc. 2).— Memor and immSmor have -(3m. ABLATIVE SINGULAR. §113. 1. Adjectives which have e in the nominative singular neu- ter have only i in the ablative. Exc. 1. The ablatives bimestre, cceleste, and. perenne axe found in Ovid, and eoy nomine in YirgU. 2. Comparatives and participles in ns, when used as parliciples, especially in the ablative absolute, have rather c than i ; but parti- cipial adjectives in ns have rather i than e. 3. Adjectives of one termination have either e or i in the ablative. Exc. 2. The following adjectives of one termination have only e in the ablar tive : — Bicorpor, bipes, caslebs, compos, deses, discolor, hospes, impos, impubes, ju- vfnis, lociiples, pauper, princeps, puber or pubes, senex, sospee, superstes, tricorpor, tricuspis, and tripes. Exc. 3 . The following adjectives of one termination have omji i in the abla- tive : — Anceps, concors, discors, hebes, immemor, Iners, ingens, inops, memor, par, pr»ceps, recens, repens, vigil, and most adjectives in a;, especially those in plex. Rem. 1. Inerte occurs in Ovid, recenie in Ovid and Catullus, an^ priedpe in Ennius. Rem. 2. Prcesens, when used of things, makes the ablative in i; when used of persons, it has e. NOMINATIVE, ACCUSATIVE, AND GENiTIVE PLURAL § 114:. 1. The neuter of the nominative and accusative plural ends in ia, and the genitive plural of all genders in turn ; but compar- atives in or, with velus, old, and uher, fertile, have a, and um. 2. The accusative plural of masculine and feminine adjectives, whose geni- tive plural ends in ium, anciently ended in Is or eis, instead of es. Cf. § 85, Exc. 1. Exc. 1. Those adjectives that have only e in the ablative singular, have miu in the genitive plural. Exc. 2. Compounds off ado, capio, and of such nouns as make um in their genitive plural, with celer, compar, dciu; dh^es, memor, immemor, prwpes, snp- plex, and vigil, make their genitive plural in U7n. Exc. 3. Dis, locuples, sons, and insons have either iim or mm. The poets and the later prose writers sometimes foi-m the genitive plural of other adjectivea and of participles in m, by syncope, in um, instead* ftui/j; as, aek&lum, Virg. Ovid, etc. § 115, 116. IRREGULAR ADJECTIVES. 69 IKREGULAR ADJECTIVES. § llo« Some adjectives are defective, others redundant. DEFECTIVE ADJECTIVES. - 1. (a.) Many adjectives denoting personal qualities or attributes want the neuter gender, unless when occasionally joined to a neuter substantive used figuratively. Such are the following : — Bicorpor, bipes, ceelebs, compos, consors, degener, dives, impos, impubes, industrius, inops, insons, invitus, juveuis, locuples, memor, pauper, partieeps princeps, puber, or pubes, redux, senex, sous, sospes, superstes, supplex, tri- corpor, vigil. (h.) Victrix&nA ultrix are feminine in the singular, seldom neuter; in the plural, they are feminine and neuter. Such verbals partake of the nature both of substantives and adjectives, and correspond to masculines in tor. See ^ 102, 6, (a.) 2. The following want the genitive plural, and are rarely used in the neuter gender : — Concolor, deses, hebes, perpes, reses, teres, versicolor. 3. The names of months, which are properly adjectives, have only the masculine and feminine genders. 4. Some adjectives are wholly indeclinable. Such are frugi, temperate; ncquam, worthless; sat or satis, sufficient; the plurals allqiiot, tdt, qudt, iotidem, quotquot ; and the cardinal numbers from quatu- or to centum inclusive, and also milh. Cf. § 118, 1, and 6, (6.) 5. The following adjectives are used only in certain cases : — Bilicem, ace. ; doubly-tissued. Cetera, ceterum, the rest, wants the nom. sing. muse. Decempllcem, ace. ; tenfold. Exspes, nom. ; hopeless. Inquies, nom. ; -etem, ace. ; -ete, abl. ; restless. Mactus, and ms,cte, nom. ; macte, ace. ; honored; — m.ViQ,t\,n(ym. plur. Necesse,a7jJnecessum,7JOW. , aoc. ; necessary. Plus, koto., ace. ; pluris, (jtn. ; more ;—pl. plures, -a, nom. ace. ; -ium gen. ; ibus, dot., abl. Cf. § 110. Postera, posterum, coming after, wants the nom. sing. masc. Potis, nom. sing. &ndpl., all genders; able. Pote, nom. sing., for potest; jmssible. Sep- templicis, <7en. ,• -ce,abl.; sevenfold. Siremps, aiic? sirempse, nom. and ace, alike. Tantundem, mmi. ace. ; tantidem, geii. ; tantandem, ace. ; so much Trilicem, ace. ; trebly-tissued ; trilices, nom. and ace. pi. REDUNDANT ADJECTIVES. § IIG. The following adjectives are redundant in termination and declension. Those marked r are more rarely used. Aoclivis, and -us, r, ascending. Inquies, and -etus, restless. Auxiliaris, and -ius, auxiliary. Jocularis, and -ins, r, laughable. Bijugis, rtw/-us, yoked two together. Multijugis, r, and -us, yoked many to Declivis, and -us, r, descending. gether. Exaiiimis, and-\x?,, r, lifeless. Opiilens, and -lentas, rich. Hilaris, and -us, cheerful. Praicox, -coquis, and -coquus, earlf Imbccillis, r, and -us, tveak. ripe. Impubes, and -is, r, -is or -iris, not Procllvis, and -us, r, sloping, groion up. Quadrijiigis, and -us, yoked four to Inennis, find? -us, r, unarmed. ^ j jifi(^^' lufrinis, and -us, unbridled, ^y^^"^ .^-TS^S^lttmi^ and -us, half alive. 70 NUMERAL ' ADj"l;CTIVES. §11/ SemierSflis, aiid -us, half armed. Sublimis, and -us, ;•, hti/h. Semisoirmis, arid -us, r, half asleep. Unanlmis, r, and -us, unanimous. Siugulai'is, aTid -ius, single. Violens, r, and -leiitus, violent. To these may be added some adjectives in er and is ; as, saluber and -bri»^ eeieber and -bris. Cf. ^ 108, R. 1. NUMERAL ADJECTIVES. § 117; Numeral adjectives are divided into three principal classes — Cardinal, Ordinal, and Distributive. I. Cardinal numbers are those which simply denote the number of things, in answer to the question Quot f ' How many ? ' They are, 1. Unus, 2. Duo, 3. Tres, 4. Quatuor, 6. Quinque, 6. Sex, 7. Septem, 8. Octo, 9. Novem, 10. Decern, 11. Undecim, 12. Duodecim, 13. Tredecim, 14. Quatuordecim, 16. Quindecim, 16. Sedecim, or sexdScim, 17. Septendecim, 18. Octodecim, 19. Novendecim, 20. Viginti, 21 Viginti unus, or unus et viginti, 22. Viginti duo, or ) duo et viginti, etc., J 30. Triginta, 40. Quadraginta, 60. Quinquaginta, 60. Sexaginta, 70. Septuaginta, 80. Octogiuta, or octuaginta. 90. Nonaginta, 100. Centum, 101. Centum unus, or ) centum et unus, etc., J 200. Ducenti, -se, a, 300. Trecenti, etc.. 400. Quadringenti, 500. Quingenti, 600. Sexcenti, 700. Septingenti, 800. Octingenti, 900. Nongenti, 1000. Mille, y.ooo. Duo mUlia, or ) bis mille, j one. L two. n. tliree. m. four. . nn. or IV. Jive. V. six. VI. seven. vn. ei(/ht vin. nine. vnn. m- IX. ten. X. eleven. XT. twelve. xn. thirteen. xin. fourteen. Xmi. or XIV. ffteen. XV. sixteen. XVI. seventeen. xvn. eighteen. XVUI. nineteen. XVim. orXIX. twenty. XX. twenty-one. XXI. twenty-two. xxn. thirty. XXX. forty. XXXX. or XL. My- L. sixty. LX. seventy. LXX. eic/hty. ninety. LXXX. LXXXX. ^ XC. a hundred. C. a hundred and ona- CL two hundred. cc. three hundred. ccc. four hundred. CCCC, or CD. fve hundred. 10, or D. six hundred. IOC, or DC. seven hundred. lOCO, orDCC. eicjht huTulred. nine hundred. lOCCC, or DCCC. LjCCCC, or DCCCO a thousand. CiO, or M. two thousand. CIOCIO, or MM. § 118 NUMERAL ADJECTIVES. 71 5000 Quinoue millia, or quiaqiiies mille, 10000 Decern millia, or decie'^ inille, 50000. Quinquagiuta millia, or quinquagies mille, lOOOOO. Centura millia, or )u ceucies mille, Jive thousand, ten thousatid. fifty thousand. . a hundred thousand. 100. CCIOO. 1000. CCCIOOO. § 118. 1. The first three cardinal numbers are declined; from four to a hundred inclusive they are indeclinable ; those denoting hundreds are declined Uke the plural of bonus. For the declension of units and tres, see §§ 107 and 109. Duo is thus declined : — Plural. M. F. N. JV' du'-o, du'-ae, du'-o. G. du-o'-mm, du-a'-rum. du-a'-rum, D. dTi-5'-bus, du-a'-bus. du-6'-bus, Ac. du'-os, or du'-o, du'-as, .In'-o, V. du'-o. du'-ae, = i'-0, Ab. du-o'-bus. du-a'-bus. uu-G'-bus. Remakk 1. Duirrum^ duamm, are often contracted into du&m, especially in <■• . mpoun Js ; a.s, duAmvir, and when joined with viillium. — Arnbo, both, which rtakes of the nature of a numeral and of a pronoun, is declined like dvo. 2. The cardinal numbers, except unus and mille, are used in the •ural only. Rem. 2. The plural of unus is used with nouns which have no singular, or whose singular has a different sense from the plural ; as, unce nuptwB, one mar- riage ; una castra, one camp. It is used also with- nouns denoting several things considered as one whole; as,U7M vesiimenia, one suit of clothes. So. also, when it takes tlie signification of " alone" or " the same "; as, uni Ubii, the Ubiani alone ; unis moribus vivere, — with the same manners. 3. (a.) Thirteen, sixteen, seventeen, eighteen, and nineteen, are often ex- pressed by two numbers, the greater of which usually precedes, united by et ; thus, decern et tres, decern et ndvem, or, omitting et, decern ndvem. Octodicim has no good authority. See infra, 4. (6.) From twenty to a hundred, the smaller number with et is put first, or the greater without et ; as, unus et viginti, or viginti untis. Above one hundred, the gi'eater pr^icedes, with or without et ; as, centum et unus, or centum unm , trecenti sexaginta sex, or trecenti et sexaginta sex. Et is never twice used, but the poets sometimes take ac, atque, or que, instead of et. 4. For eighteen, twenty-eight, etc., and for nineteen, twenty-nine, etc. (ex- cepting sixty-eight, sixty-nine, and ninety-eidit), a subtractive expression is more frequent than the additive fonn; as, duodeviginti, two from twenty; unde- viginti, one fr^ra tT^entj^; duodetriginta, undetviginla, etc. Neither un (unus) nor dvx) can be declined in these combinations. The additive forms for thirty- eight, etc. to ninetv-eight, and for forty-nine, etc. to ninety-nine, except those for sixty-nine, seem not to occur. 5. (rt.) Thousands are generally expressed bj' prefixing the smaller cardinal mimbers to millia: as, decern millia, ten thousand; dticenta millia, two hundred thousand. As there is in Latin no unit above mille, a thousand, the higher units of modem numeration are expressed by prefixing the numeral adverbs to the 72 NUMERAL ADJECTIVES. § 119. combination centena millia; as, decies centena millia, a million; centies centena millia, ten millions. In such combinations centena millia is sometimes omitted; as, decies, scil. centena jnillia. (6.) The poets sometimes make use of numeral adverbs in expressing smaller numbers ; as, bis sex for duodecini ; bis centum for duc'enti, etc. 6. Mille is used either as a substantive or as an adjective. (a.) When taken substantively, it is indeclinable in the singular number, and, in the pluralj has millia, millium, millibus, etc.; as, m,ille hominum, a thou- sand men; duo millia hominum, two thousand men, etc. When mille is a sub- stantive, the things numbered are put in the genitive, as in the preceding examples, unless a, declined numeral comes between; as,habuit tria millia tre- centos milites. (h.) As an adjective, mille is plural only, and indeclinable: as, mille homines, a thousand men ; cum bis mille hoininibus, with two thousand men. 7. Capitals were used by the Eomans to mark numbers. The letters em- ployed for this purpose were C. I. L. V. X., which are, therefore, called Niir vieral Letters. I. denotes wee ,• Y.jice; 'K.ten; h. Jifiy ; and G. a hundred. By the various combinations of these five letters, aU the different numbers are ex- pressed. (a.) The repetition of a numeral letter repeats its value. Thus, II. signifies two; 111. three; XX. twenty ; XXX. thirty ; GC. two hundred, etc. But V. and L. are never repeated. (6.) When a letter of a less value is placed before a letter of a greater value, the less takes away its value from the gi'eater; but being placed after, it adds its value to the greater; thus, IV. Four. V. Five. VI. Six. IX. Nine. X. Ten. XI. Eleven. XL. Forty. L. Fifty. LX. Sixty. XC. Ninety. C. A hundred. CX. A hundred and ten. (c.) A thousand WS.S marked thus, CIO, which, in later times, was contracted into M. Five hundred is marked thus, ID, or, by contraction, D. {d.) The annexing of the apostrophus or inverted C (0) to lO makes its vahie ten times greater; thus, 100 marks Jive thousand; and 10D0,Jifly thousand. (e.) The prefixing of C, together with the annexing of 0, to the number CIO makes its value ten times gi-eater; thus, CCIOO denotes ten thousand; and CGGIDOO, a hundi-ed thousand. The Romans, according to Pliny, proceeded no further in this method of notation. If they had occasion to express a largei number, they did it by repetition; thus, CCCIOOO, CCCIOOO, signified two hundred thousand, etc. (y.) We sometimes find thousaiuls expressed by a straight line drawn over the top of the numeral letters. Thus, III. denotes three thousand; X., ten thousand. § 119- n. Ordinal numbers are such as denote order or rank, and answer to the question, Quotus f Which of the numbers ? They all end in us, and are declined like bonus ; as,prl7nus,&rst; secunJus, second. v) m. Distributive numbers are those which indicate an equal division amoug several persons or tilings, and answer to the question, Quoteni? How many apiece ? as, singiili, one by one, or, one to each ; blni, two by two, or two to each, etc. They are always used in the plural, and are declined like the plural of bonus, except that they usually have dm instead oi orum in the genitive plural. Cf. § 105, R. 4. < 120 NUMERAL ADJECTIVES. 73 The following table contains the ordinal and distributive lumbers, and the (corresponding numeral adverbs, which answer to the question, Quoiies ? How lusiiy times ? — 400. 600. 600. 700. 800. 900. 1000. Ordinal. Pnmus, Jirst. S^cundus, second. Tertius, third. Quartus, fourth. Quiutus, /(/W«. Soxtus, sixth. Septimus, seventh. Octavus, eifflith. N6nu.«, ninth. Di'cimus, tenth, etc. Undecimus. Duodecimus. Tertius decimus. Quartus decimus. Quintus docimus. Sextus decimus. Septinnis decimus. Octavus decimus. Nuiuis decimus. Vicesimus, or vigesimus. Vicesimus primus. Vicesimus secundcts. Tricesimus, or ) trigesimus. ) Quadragesimus. Quinquagesimus. Sexagesimus. Septuagesimus. Octogesiraus. Nonagesimus. Centesimiis. DCiceutesimus. 1. 2. 3. 4. 6. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. Hi. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 30. 40. 50. 60. 70. 80. 90. 100. 200. 300. Trecentesimus. Quadringentesimus Quingentesimus. Sexcentesimus. Septingentesimus. Octingentesimus. Nougentesimus. Millesirous. Distributive. Singuli, one by one. Bini, two by two. Terni, or trini. Quaterni. Quiui. Seni. Septeni. Octoni. Noveui. Deni. Undeni. Duodeni. Terni deni. Quatemi deni. (Juini deni. Seni deni. Septeni deni. Octoni deui. Noveni deni. Viceni. Viceui singuli. Viceni bini, etc. Triceai. Quadrageni. Quinquageni. Sexageni. Septuageni. Octogeni. Nonageni. Centeni. Duceni. Treceni, or trecenteni. Quadrmgeui, or \ Numeral Adverbs. Semel, once. Bis, twice. Ter, thrice. Quater, /our times. Quiuquies. Sexies. Septies. Octies. Novies. Decies. Undecies. Duodecies. Terdecies.* Quatuordecies. Quindecies. Sedecies. Decies et septios. Duodevicies. Undevicies. Vicies. Semel et vicies. Bis et vicies, etc. Tricies. Quadragies. Quinquagies. Sexagies. Septuagies. Octogies. Nonagies. Centies. Ducenties. Trecenties, or ) tricenties. J Quadringenties. Quingenties. Sexcenties. Septingenties. Octiugenties. NonLngenties. 2000. Bis millesimus. Millies. Bis millies. quadringenteni. j Quingeni. SexcSni, or sexcenteni. Septingeni. Octingeni. Nongeni. MLUcni, or singula millia-. Bis milleni, or bina millia. § &S0. 1. In the ordinals, instead of jjrimus, prior is used, if only two are spoken of. Alter is often used for secundus. 2. (a. , From thirteenth to nineteenth, the smaller number is usually put first, without et ; as, tertius decimus. but sometimes the greater with or without et ; as, decimus et tertius, or deci7)ius tertius. (i.) Twenty-first, thirty-first, etc., are often expressed by units et viee.iimus, unus et tricesimus, etc., one and twentieth, etc. ; and twenty-second, etc., by dmi, or idter et vicesimus, etc., in which duo is not changed. In the other com- pound nural ers. the larger precedes without ei, or the smaller with et ; as, viceth mu* quarlus, oi quartus et vicesimus. 74. ADJECTIVES COMLPARISON. § 121, 122. (c.) For eighteenth, etc., to fifty-eighth, and for nineteenth, etc. to fifty-ninth, .he subb'active forms, duodemcesinius, etc., and undevicesimus, etc., are often used. 3. In the distributives, eighteen, tliirtj'-eight, forty-eight, and nineteen and twenty-nine, are often expressed by the subtract! ves duodevicmi, etc., undevi- teni, etc. 4. (a.) Distributives are sometimes used by the poets for cardinal numbers;. as, h'ma spicula, t\vo darts. Virg. So likewise in prose, with nouns that want tha smgular; as, buuc mipiics, two weddings. (b.) The singular of some distributives is used in the sense of multiphcs- tives; as, binus, twofold. So ternus, quimis, se2}tC'nus. 5. In the numeral adverbs, for the intermediate numbers 21, 22, etc., tha larger number also may be put first, either with or without et; and for twenty-eight times and thirtj--nine times, duodetricies and undequadrayies are found. § 131. To the preceding classes may be added the following : — 1. MuUiplicatives, which denote how many fold, in answer to the question, ouotuplex ? They all end injiltx, and are declined like/t'^ix ; as, Simplex, single. Quincuplex,__^ue/bfcZ. Duplex, twoj'uld, or double. Septemplex, serefi/li^d Triplex, threefold. Decemplex, tenfold. Quadruplex, yuM/y'tiW. Centuplex, a hundred fold. 2. Proportionals, which denote how many times one thing is greater than another; as, dttplus, a, uin, twice as great; so triplus, quadruplus, ociuplus, de- cupliis. They are generally found only m the neuter. 3. Temporals, which denote time; as, bimus, a, um, two years oId_; bo trimus, quadrhnus, etc. Also, biennis, lasting two years, biennial; so quadriennis, quin- quennit:, etc. . So also, bimestris, of two months' continuance ; trimestris, etc., biduus, etc. To these may be added certain nouns, compounds of annus and dies with the cardinal numbers; as, biennium, triennium, etc., a period of two, etc. years; biduum, triduum, etc., a period of two, etc. days. 4. Atljectives in arius, derived from the distributives, and denoting of how many equal parts or units a thing consists ; as, binanus, of two parts ; ternarius, etc. 5. Interrogatives ; as, quot, how many V qvMus, of what number"? qiioleni, how many each? quoties, how many times'? Their correlatives are tot, ioiidem, Bomany; aliquot, some; which, with quot, are indeclinable; and the adverbs, tolies, so often; aliquoties, several times. 6. Fractionrd expressions, which denote the parts of a thing. These are ex- pressed in Latin by pars with dimidia, tertia, quarta, etc. Thus, ^, dimidia pars; \. tertia pars, etc. When the number of parts into which ft thing is divided exceeds by one only the parts mentioned, as in f , J, etc. the fraction is expre^>'J simply by dme, ires, etc. /^rn-^es, denoting two out of three, three oat of four, cto, CO^IPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. § 122- 1. Adjective? may be divided into two classes — those which deijcre a variable, and those which denote an invariable, quality or limitation. Thus, bdnus, good, altus, high, and opdcus, dark, denote variable .attributes; but (Bueiis, brazen, triplex, threefold, and diurnus, daily, do not admit of different degrees in their signification. 2. The comparison of an adjective is the expression of its quality *« did e rent degrees. §123-125. ADJECTIVES. — IRREGULAR to jrPARI SON. 7A 8. There are throe degrees of comparison — the positive^ the cjtn paralice, and the superlafice. 4. The positive simply denotes a quality, without reference to otbei degrees of the same quality ; as, alius, high ; inltis, mild. 5. The comparative denotes that a quality belongs to one of two objects, or sets of objects, in a greater degree than to the other ; as, altior, higher ; niitior, milder. 6. The superlative denotes that a quality belongs to one of several objects, or sets of objects, in a greater degree than to any of thereat; as, aUisshnus, highest ; mithslmus-y mildest. Reji 1. Sometimes also the comparative denotes that a quality, at differecl times or in other circumstances, belongs in different degrees to the same object as, est sapientior quamfuit, he is wiser than he was. Rem. 2. The comparative sometimes expresses the proportion between twa qualities of the same object; as, est doctior quam sapientior, he is more learned than wise ; that is, his learning is gretiter than his wisdom. Rem. 3. The comparative is also used elliptically instead of our * too ' oi rather ' ; as. vivit liberim, he lives too freely, or, rather freely. Cf. § 256, R. 9 Rem. 4. The superlative, like the positive withper, (cf. § 127, 2), often indi- cates a high degree of a quality without direct comparison with the same Qual- ity in other objects; as, amicus caa-issimus, a very dear friend. § ISiS* ■ 1. Degrees of a quality inferior to the positive may be denoted by the adverbs minus', less ; miiiime, ]ea.s,t, prefixed to the positive; ixs,jucundus, pleasant; minus jucundus, less pleasant; minime jucundus, least pleasant. 2. A small degi-ee of a quality is indicated bys«6 prefixed to the positive; as, amdrus, bitter; subamarus, bitterish, or, somewhat bitter. 3. An equal degree of a quality may be denoted by tam followed by qunm nque followed by ac, sic followed by ul, etc. ; as, hibes, ceque ac pecus, as stupid as a brute. § 124:. 1. The comparative and superlative in Latin, as in Eng- lish, are denoted either by peculiar terminations, or by certain ad- verbs prefixed to the positive. Cf. § 127, 1. Masc. Fern. Neut 2. The terminational comparative ends in io?; tor, ins ; the terminational superlative in isshnus, issima, isslmum. . 3. These terminations are added to the root of the positive ; as, altn?,, altioT, aWssimus; hicjh, higher, highest. 7niti3, midoT, TniVissimus ; mild, milder, mildest. /eliz, (gen. fellcis,) felicior, /eKcissimus ; happy, happier, happiest In like manner compare Arc'-tus, strait. Cru-de'-lis, cruel. Ca'-pax, capacious. Ca'-rus, «/ear. Fer'-ti-lis,/e7-«j7e. C\e'-mens, {gen. -tis) merciful Doc'-tus, learned. Le'-vis, light. In'-ers, {gen. -tis), sluggish. IRREGULAR COMPARISON. § 125. 1. Adjectives in er form their superlative by adding rimus to that termination ; as, cicer, active ; gen. acris ; comparative, acrior ; superlative, acerrimus. Facilis, facilior, facillimiis, Difficilis, diJEcOior, difEcLLUmus, Gracilis, p-acUior, lumilior, gracillimus, numillimus, Humilis, Similis, similior, simillimus, Dlssimilis, dissimilior, dissimilUnms, 76 ADJECTIVES. DEFECTIVE COMPARISON. § 126» In like manner, pauper^ pauperrimus. Vetus has a similar suj erlative, vete/r^ rimus, from tlie old collateral form veter. 2. Six adjectives in lis form their superlative by adding limus t4 the root : — easy. difficult. slender. low. like. unlike. ImbeciUus or imbecillis, weak, has two forms, imbecillissinius and imhecillimut, 3. (a.) Five adjectives inficus (from/acio) derive their compar- atives and superlatives from supposed forms in ens: — Beneficus, beneficentior, beneficentissimus, beneficent. Honorific-QS, honorificentior, honorificeiitissimus, honorable. Magnificus, magnificentior, magnificentissimus, splendid. Munificus, munificeutior, munificentissimus, liberal. Maleficus, , maleficentissimus, hurtful. (6.) Adjectives in dlcens and vdlens form their comparatives and superlatives regularly; but instead of those positives, fonns in dlcus and vdlus are more common; as, * Maledicens or dicus, maledicentior, maledicentissimus, slanderous. Benevolens, or -volus, benevolentior, benevolentissimus, benevolent. 4. These five have regular comparatives, but irregular super- latives : — Dexter, dexterior, dextimus. right. Extera, {fern.) exterior. exti-emus, or extiraus. outward. Postera, (fern.) posterior. postremus, or postumus, hind. Inferus, inferior, infimus, or Imus, below. Sup eras, superior. supremus, or summus. above. Remark 1. The nominative singular of postera does not occur in the mas- culine, and that of extera wants good authority. 5. The following are very irregular in comparison : — Bonus, melior, optimus, good, better, best. Mains, pejor, pessimus, had, worse, worst. Magnus, major, maximus, great, greater, greatest Parvus, minor, minimus, little, less, least. Multus, plurimus, ^ Multa, plm-ima, > much, more, most. Multum, plus,* plurimum, ) Nequam, nequior, nequissimus, worthless, etc. Frugi, frugahor, fragalissimus, frugal, etc. Rem. 2. All these, except magnus, whose regular forms are conti'aoted, eithei form their comparatives and superlatives from obsolete adjectives, or take thoiB from other words of similar signification. DEFECTIVE COMPARISON. § 1S6. 1. Seven adjectives want the positive: — Citerior, ciiimu?,, nearer. Prior, primus, /orjreer. Deierior, detenlmus, toorse. Propior, proximus, nearer. Interior, intlmns, inner. Ulterior, ultimus, farther: Ocior, ooissimus, swifter. * See i 110. § 127. ADJECTIYES DEFE TIVE -COMPARISON. 77 2. Eight want the terminational ooraparative : — Consnltus, consultissimus, skilful. Par, parissimus, (very rare), equal. Inclutus, inclutissinius, renowned. Persuasus, persuasisslmum (neuter) Invictus, iuvictissimus, invincible. persuaded. Invitus, invitissimus, unwilling. Sacer, sacerrimns, sacred. Meritus, meritissimus, (very rare,) deserving. 3. Eight have very rarely the terminational comparative : — Apncus, apricissimus, sunny. Falsus, falsissinras, false. Bellus, beUissimus,_^»e. Fidus, fidissimus, faithfuL Comis, comissimus, courteous. Novns, novisslmus, new. Diversus, diversissimus, different. Vetus, vetemmus, old. 4. The following want the terminational superlative : — Adolescens, adolescentior, young. Proclivis, proclivior, sloping. Agrestis, agrestior, rustic. Pronus, pronior, bending down. Alicer, alacrior, active. Protervus, protervior, violent. Ater, atrior, black. sequior, worse. Cfficus, c£ecior, blind. Propinquus, pi-opinquior, near. Deses, desidior, inactive. Salutaris, salutarior, salutary. Diutumus, diuturnior, lasting. Sktis, sufficient ; satbis, pre/erabie. TnfinT tns, infinitior, unlimited. Satur, fiAturioT, full. Ingens, ingentior, great. Senex, senior, old. Jejunus, ^ejunlor, fasting. SOvestris, silvestrior, woody. Juvenis, junior, young. Sinister, sinisterior, left. Licens, licentior, unrestrained. Suplnus, supinior, lying on the back. Longinquus, longinquior, distant. Surdus, surdior, deaf. Opimus, opimior, nch. Teres, teretior, round. Remabk 1. The superlative of juvenis and adolescens is supplied by minimuM natu, youngest ; and that of senex by maximus natu, oldegl. The comparatives minor natu and major natu sometimes also occur. Rem. 2. Most adjectives also in His, ilis, dlis, and bilis, have no terminational superlative. 5. Many variable adjectives have no terminational comparative or superlative. Such are, (a.) Adjectives in bundus, imus, tnus (except divlnns), orus, most in ivus, and in us pm'e (except -quus.) Yet arduus, assiduus, egregius, exiguus, indnstrius, per- fetuus, pitis, strenuus, and vacuus, have sometimes a terminational comparison, o, dropping i, noxior, innoxior, sobrior. (6.) The following — alnius, calvus, cdnns, cicur, clavdug, degener, dellrus, dispar, egenus^ impar, impiger, invidus, Idcer, mhnor, mirus, nudus, prcecox, pratut^ rudis, scUvus, sospes, superstes, vulgaris, and some others. § 13T, 1. The comparative and superlative may also be formed by prefixing to the positive the adverbs magis, more, and maxime, most ; as, idoneiis, fit ; magis idoneus, maxime idoneus. 2. Various degrees of a quality above the positive are expressed by admodum, aliquanto, apprime, bene, imprimis, midtum, ippido, per- quam, and valde, and also by per compounded with the t Bsitive ; as, difficilLii, iui(J sui, and commonly also quis and its compounds, are substan- tives: the otiier pronouns, both simple and compound, are adjectives, but ara often by ellipsis used as substantives. 4. Fgo, tu, and stti are commonly called personal j^ronoiins. They are a species of appellatives (§ 26, 3,) of general application. Ego is used by a speaker to designate himself; tji, to designate the person whom he addresses. Hence ego is of the first person, tu of the second. (§ 35, 2.) Sui is of the third person, and has always a reflexive signification, referring to the subject of the sentence. The oblique cases of ego and tu are also used reflexively, when the subject of the proposition is of the first or second person. 5. The remaining pronouns, except qids and its compounds, are adjectives, as they serve to limit the meaning of substantives ; and they are pronouns, be- cause, like substantive pronouns, they may designate any object ui certain situations or circumstances. 6. Meus, tmts, suus, noster, vester, and cvjus, have the same extent of signifi- cation as the pronouns from which they are derived, and are equivalent to the genitive cases of their primitives. 7. Pronouns, like substantives and adjectives, are declined; but most of them want the vocative. Sui, from the natm-e of its signification, wants also the nominative in both numbers. 8. The substantive pronouns take the gender of the objects which they de- note. The adjective pronouns, like adjectives, have three genders. SUBSTANTIVE PRONOUNS. § 133> The substantive pronouns are thus declined :- Singular. jfV. e'-go, /. tu, thou. n r . J. . ' - r ^-L ( su'-i, of himself, her- G. me -1, of me. hi -i, of thee. j Ji/n^^if^ •" ' D. mi'-hi, to me. tib'-I,* to thee. sib'-i,* to himself, etc. Ac. me, me. te, thee. se, himself, etc. F. -; tii, thou. Ah. me, with me. te, with thee. se, with himself, etc. • See } 19, 1) Exc. § 134. ADJECTIVE PRONOUNS. 83 Plural. N. nos, we. ^(nos'-trum ) ^ ( ar nos -tri, ) ■' us D. Ac. V. Ah. no' -bis, to US. nos, us. J\Alm vos, ye or you, ves'-trum or " ves'-tri, vo'-bis, to you. vos, you. vos, ye or you. vo'-bis, with you. you. su'-i, of themselves. sib'-i, to themselves. se, themselves. se, with themselves. no'-bis, with us. 1. Me and mi are ancient forms for mihi. So »nm' for mi&ine, Remark Pers. 1, 2. Rem. 2. The syllable met is sometimes annexed to the substantive prononns. n an intensive sense, either with or without ipse ; as, eg6met, I myself; mihi- tnet ipsi, for myself. It is not annexed, however, to the genitives plural, nor to tu in the nomiiiative or vocative. In these cases of iu, tute or iutemet is used. In the accusative and ablative the reduplicated fonns meme and tete in the sin- gular, and sese in both numbers, are employed intensively. Mepte, intensive, med and iecl, for 7ne and ie, and mis and tis for mei and tui, occur in the comic writers. ^ Nostrum and vestrum are contracted from nostrorum, nostrarum, and »e*- troriny, vestrorum. Respectmg the difference in the use of nostrum and no»tn, vestrum and vestri, see § 212, R. 2, N. 2. 4. The preposition cum is affixed to the ablative of these pronouns in both numbers; as, mecum, nobiscum, etc. Cf. § 136, E. 1. ADJECTIVE PRONOUNS. § 134. Adjective pronouns may be divided into the follow- ing classes : — demonstrative, intensive, relative, interrogative, in- dejinite, possessive, and patrial. Note. Some pronouns belong to two of these classes. DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. Demonstrative pronouns are such as specify what object is meant. They are iUe, tste, hie, and is, and their compounds, and are thus declined : — Singular, Plural. M. F. N. M. R N. N. il'-le, il'-la, ii'-md, il'-li. jl'-lse, il'-la, G. il-li'-us,* il-U'-us, U-li'-us, il-lo'-rum U-la'-rum, il-lo'-nim, D. il'-li. il'-li. il'-li, il'-Hs, il'-hs, U'-hs, Ac. il'-lum, il'-lam, il'-lud. il'-los. U'-las, U'-la, V. il'-le, il'-la, il'-md. il'-h, il'-lae, il'-la, Ah.il' -Id. U'-la. U'-lo. il'-hs. il'-hs. il'-hs. •See) 15,1. 84 DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. §134 Iste is decliiLecl like ille. Singular. Plural. M. F. N. M. F. N. N. Mc,_ haec, hoc. hi. hag, haec. G. hu'-jiis hu'-jiis, hu'-jus, ho'-rum, ha'-rum. ho'-rum, D. huic*, huic, huic. his, his, his. Ac. hunc, hanc, hoc, hos, has, haec, F. hio, haec. hoc. hi, hae. hsec, 46. hoc. hac. h5c. his. his. his. Singular. Plural. M. F. N. M. F N. N. is,_ e'-a, id, i'-i, e'-ae. e'-a, G. e'-jus. e-jus, e'-jus, e-o'-rum, e-a'rnm. e-o'-rnm, D. e'-i, e'-i, e'-i. i'-is or e'-is. i'-is or e'-is. i'-is or e'-is, Ac. e'-um, e'-am. id, e'-os, e'-as, e'-a, V. Ah. e'-o. •:j^ e'-a. e'-5. i -is or e'-is. i'-is or e'-is. i'-is or e'-is. Remark 1. Instead of ille, alius was anciently used ; whence olli masc. plur. in Virgil. like fem., for illius and illl, is found in Lucretius and Cato, as also in Cato, hce for hide fem. ; hice for Id, and hcec for hce in Plautus and Terence. Im for eum, is found in the Twelve Tables; eii for ei, and ibus and iibus fot Us, in Plautus; ecB, fem., for ei, and edbus for its, in Cato. Rem. 2. From ecce, lo ! with ille, iste, and is, are formed, in colloquial language, nom., ecca; eccilla, eccilliid ; ace. sing., eccum, eccam ; eccillum (by syncope ellum), eccillam ; eccistam ; ace. plur., eccos, ecca. Rem. 3. Istic and illic are compounded of iste hie, and ille hie ; or, as some say, of iste ce, and ille ce. The former sometimes retains the aspirate, as isthic. They are more emphatic than ille and iste. N. Istic is thus declined : — Singular. Plural. M. F. N. M. F. N. is'-t!c, is'-tsec, is'-t5c, or is'-tiic, N. js'-tsec. Ac. is'-tunc, is'-tanc, is'-toc, or is'-tuc, Ac. Ab. is'-toc. is'-tac. is'toc. is'-taec. Illic is declined in the same manner. Rem. 4. Ce, intensive, is sometimes added to the several cases of hie, stud rarely to some cases of the other demonstrative pronouns ; as, hujusce, huncce, hancce, hocce, hice, hcece or h(EC, horunc, harmnce, harunce, or harunc, hosce, hasce, hisce; ilUusce, illdce, illosce, illasce, illisce; istace, isiisce ; ejusce, Usee. When ngj interrogative, is also annexed, ce becomes ci ; as, hceccine, hoscine, hiscine ; istuccine, isiacrine, isioscine ; illiccine, illancdne. Rem. 5. 31ddi, the genitive of mddus, amiexed to the genitive singular of q*- monsti'ative and relative pronouas, imparts to them the signification of adjec- tives of quality; as, hujusmodi or hujuscemddi, like talis, of this sort, such; iUimmddi and istiusmodi, of that sort ; cujusmddi, of what sort, like qualis ; ctt- * See 5 9, 5. § 135. IKTENSIVE PRONOUNS. 8A jitscemddi, cujtisquemddi, cujusmodicumque, of what kind soever ; cujusdammdcU, of some kind. 60 also istimCdi, cuimddi mid ctdcuiniddi, instead of istutsn*6di, cujusinddi., etc. Rem. 6. The suffix dem is annexed to is, forming idem, " the same," wLklJ Is thus declined: — Singular. M. F. N. N. i'-dem, e'-a-dem, I'-dem, G. e-jus'-dem, e-jus'-dem, e-jus'-dem, D. e-i'-dem, e-i'-dem, e-i'-dem, Ac. e-un'-dem, e-an'-dem, I'-dem, V. Ah. e-6'-dem. e-a'-dem. e-6'-dem. Plural. M. F. N. . N. i-i'-dem, e-se'-dem, e'-a-dem, C. e-o-ran'-dem, e-a-run'-dem, e-o-run'-dem, D. e-is'-dem, or i-is'-dem, e-is'-dem, or i-is'-dem, e-is'-dem, or i-is'-dem, ^c. e-os'-dem, e-as'-dem, e'-a-dem, V. Ab. e-is'-dem, or i-is'-dem. e-is'-dem, or i-is'-dem. e-is'dem, or i-is'-dem. Note 1. In compoimd pronouns, m before d is changed into n; as, eundem^ eorundem, etc. Note 2. In Sallust isdem, and in Palladius hisdem occur for iisdem ; and En- nius in Cicero has eademmet for eddem. INTENSIVE PRONOUNS. § 13^. Intensive pronouns are such as serve to render an object emphatic. To this class belong ipse, and the intensive compounds sdready mentioned. See §§ 133, R. 2, and 134, R. 4. Ipse is compounded of is and the suffix pse, and is thus decUned : — Singular. Plural. M. F. N. N. ip'-se, ip'-sa, ip'-sum, G. ip-s!'-us, ip-s!'-us, ip-si'-us, D. ip'-si, ip -si, ip'-si, Ac. ip'-siun, ip'-sam, ip'-sum, V. ip'-se, ip'-sa, ip'-smn, Ab. ip -so. ip'-sa. ip'-so. M. F. N. ip'-si, ip'-sae, ip'-sa, ip-so'-rum, ip-sa'-rum, ip-s5'-rum, ip'-sis, ip'-sis, ip'-sis, ip'-sos, ip'-sas, ip'-sa, ip'-si, ip'-sse, ip'-sa, ip'-sis. ip'-sis. ip'-sis. Remark 1. Ipse is commonly subjoined to nouns or pronouns; a.s,, Jvpittt ipst, tu ipse, Jupiter himself, etc. ; and hence is sometimes called the adjunctive pronoun. Rem. 2. A nominative ipstis, occurs in early writers, and a superlative ipai*-, slmus, his veiy self, is found in Phiutus. Rem. 3. In old writers the is of ipse is declined, while pse remains unde- clined; &s, eapse, (nom. 1 ud abl.), eampse, and eopse, instead of ipsa, ipsam &Dd ipso. So also reapse, . e. re eapse, " in fact." 8 86 RELATIVE PRONOUNS. § 136. RELATIVE PRONOUNS. § 136. Relative pronouns are such as relate to a precfcling noun or pronoun. 1. They are qui, who, and the compounds quicumque and quisquisy whoever. The latter are called general relatives. 2. In a general sense, the demonstrative pronouns are often relatives ; tat the name is commonly appropriated to those above specified. They serve to mtroduce a proposition, liniitmg or explaining a precedmg noun or pronoun, to « hich they relate, and which is called the antecedent. Qui is thus declined : — Singular. M. N. G. quae, cu'-jiis, qui, cu'-jus, D. cui,* Ac. quern, V. Ah. quo. qua. GUI, quam. N. quod, cu'-jus, cui, quod, quo. M. qui, quo'-rum, qui'-bus, quos. Plural. F. quae, qua'-rum, qui'-biis, quas, N. qusB, quo'-rum, qui'-bus, quae. qui'-bus. qui'-bus. qui'-bus. Remark 1. Qui is sometimes used for the ablative singular, in all genders and rarely also for the ablative plural. To the ablatives qiw, qua, qui, and qm- his, aim is commonly annexed, cf. § 133, 4. Cicero uses quicum for quocum, when an indefinite person is meant. Rem. 2. Quels (monos3'lIabic, ^ 9, R. 1), and qiiis are sometimes used in the dative and ablative plural for qulbus. Cujus and cui were anciently ^Titten quojus and quoi : and, instead of the genitive cujus, a relative adjective cujus, a, um, very rarely occurs. 3. Quicumque, (or quicunque), is declined like qui. Rem. 3. Qui is sometimes separated from cumque by the interposition of one or more words ; as,, qitxB me cumque vacant terras. Virg. A similar separa- tion sometimes occurs in the other compoimds of cumque. 4. Quisquis is thus declined : — Singular. M. F. N. N. quis'-quis, quis'-quis,t quid'-quid, Ac. quem'-quem, quid'-quid, Ah. quo'-quo. qua'-qua. quo'-quo. N. D. Plural. M. qui'-qii, qui-biis'-qul-bus, Rem. 4. Quicquid is sometinies used for quidquid. Quiqul for qitisquis occufR In Plautus ; and quidquid is used adjectively in Cato R. R. 48. •See §9,6; and cf . §306,(1.) t ef. § 137, E. (1 ) § 137. INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS. 87 INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS. § 137. Interrogative pronouns are such as serve to inquire which of a number of objects is intended. They are Q"i^? , } who ? what ? ?^q"i^ ^ , 1 ^^j;;| 5x! Quisnam ? | Ecquisnam ? U „^, , Cujas ? of what Quinam / ^ JNuinquisnam,J 1. Quis is commonly used substantively; qui, adjectively. The interrogative qui is declined hke qui the relat.ve. Quis is thus decUned : — Singular Plural. M. F. N. M. F. N. N. G. D. Ac. V. quis, cu'-jus, cui, quem. qu«, cu'-jus, cui, quam, quid, cu-jiis, cui, quid, qui, quae, quo'-rum, qua'-rum, qui'-bus, qui'-bus, quos, quas, quge, quo'-nim, qui'-bus, quae. Ah. quo. qua. quo. qui'-bus. qui'-bus. qui'-bus. Remark (1.) Quis is sometimes used by comic writers in the feminine, and even in the neuter. Quisnam, quisque and quisquam also occur as feminine. Rem. (2.) Qui is used for the ablative of quis in all genders, as it is for that of the relative qui. Cf. ^ 136, R. 1. Rem. (3.) Quis and ^wi have sometimes the signification of the indefinite pronoun aliqnis (some one, any one), especially after the conjimctions ec (for en), si, ne, neu, nisi, niim ; and after relatives, as quo, quanta, etc. Sometimes f:its and qui are used in the &Qn&Q oi qualisi what sort? 2. The compounds quisnam and quinam. have respectively the sig nification and declension of the interrogatives quis and qui. In the poets nam sometimes stands before quis. Virg. G. 4, 445. 3. Ecquis and numquii are declined and used like quis ; but are Bometimes adjectives. Virg. EcL 10, 28: Cic. Att. 13, 8. Rem. (4.) Ecqua is sometimes found in the nominative singular feminine ; and the neuter plural of numquis is numqua. Rem. (5.) Ecqui nnd numqui also occm-, declined like the interrogative jw, and, like that, used adjectively. 4. Ecquisnam and nnmquisnam arf>, se ; as, nnnnihal sudmet ipse fraiide captus abiit. Liv. ; but Sallust has meamet facia Rkm. 2. Suus, like its primitive siii, has always a reflexive signification, re- fp' Iff to the subject of the sentence. Meus, tuus, noster, und vester, are also Used reilexively, when the subject of the propcsition is of the first or second person. See § 132, 4. 8* 90 PATRIAL PRONOUNS. PRONOMINAL ADJECTIVES. § 139 PATRIAL PRONOUNS. 4. (a.) These are nostras and citjax. See §§ 100, 2, and 128, 6. They are declined like adjectives of one termination ; as, nostras^ nostrdtid is used in commanding, exhorting or entreating ; as, ama, 1 ; ee thou ; amanto, they shall love. §144,145. VERBS.— TENSES. 93 4. The infinitive mood is used to denote an action or state in definitely, without limiting it to any person or thing as its sub< ject ; as, virtus est vitium fugere, to shun vice is a virtue. TENSES. § 144. Tenses are fonns of the verb, denoting the time of tlie action or state expressed by the verb. 1. Time admits of a tiireefold division, into present, past and future ; and, hi each of these times, an action may be represented either as going on, or aa completed. From these two divisions arise the six tenses of a Latin verb, each of which is distinguished by its peculiar terminations. 2. They are called the present, imperfect, future, perfect, pluper- fect, and future perfect tenses. Present ( action ) amo, I love, or am loving ; Present tense. Past \ not com- > nindbam, I was loving; Imperfect tense. Future ( pleted ; ) amdbo, I shall love, or be loving ; Future tense. Present ( action ) amavi, I have loved ; Perfect tense. Past < com- [■ amaveram, I had loved ; Pluperfect tense. Future (, pleted; } amavero, I shall have loved; Future perfect teme. 3. There is the same number of tenses in the passive voice, in which actions not completed are represented by simple forms of the verb, and those which are completed by compound forms. Present ( action ) amor, I am loved ; Present tense. Past < not com- > amdbar, I was loved ; Imperfect tense. Future ( pleted; ) cnndbor, I shall be loved; future tense. Present ( action ) amatus su7n, or fut, I have been loved; Perfect tense. Past < com- > audtus eram, or fueram, I had been loved ; Pluperfect. Future ( pleted; ) a7?id<«sero, or /?ie>o, I shall have been loved ; FM. VERBS. CONJUGATION. 97 4. Ill the third conjugation, the second root either is tke sane as the first, or is fomed from it by adding s ; the tliird root is formed by adding t. See § 171. Note. In the second and fourth conjugiitlons, e and i before o are considered as belonging not to the root, but to the termination. In verbs whose second or third roots are formed irregularly, the general root often undergoes some change in the parts derived from tUem. 5. The vowel which unites the general root with the remaining letters of the verb, is called the connecting vowel. Each conjugation, except the third, is, in a great degree, distinguished by a peculiar connecting vowel, which is the same as characterizes the infinitives. See § 149, 2. (a.) In the third conjugation, the comiecting vowel is generally e or t. In the second and fourth conjugations, and in verbs in io of the third, a second connecting vowel is sometimes added to that which characterizes the conjiiga- tion ; as, a ui doceaiit, u in tapiunt, etc. (b.) In verbs whose second and third roots are formed irregularly, the con- necting vowel often disappears, or is changed in the parts derived from those roots; but it is almost alwaj's ffliyid in the parts derived from the first root. § 1*j1. 1. From the first root are derived, in each voice, the present, imperfect, and future indicative; the present and imperfec subjunctive ; the imperative, and the present infinitive. From this root are derived also the present partiriple, the gerund, and the fu- tui-e participle passive. 2. From the second root are derived, in the active voice, the per feet, pluperfect, and future perfect indicative ; the perfect and plu perfect subjunctive, and the perfect infinitive. 3. (a.) From tlie third root are derived, in the active voice, the supine in um, and the future participle ; the latter of which, with the verb esse, constitutes the future Infinitive active. (b.) From this root are derived, in the passive voice, the supine in w, and the perfect participle ; from the latter of which, with the verb sum, are formed all tlie tenses which In the active are derived from the second root. The future infinitive passive is formed from the supine in mn, and !/■/, the present infinitive passive of the verb eo, to 20. 4. The y)resent and perfect indicative, the supine in um, and the present infinitive, are called the principal parts of the verb, because from the first three the several roots are ascertained, and from the last, the characteristic vowel of the conjugation. In the passive voice, the principal parts are the present Indicative and Infinitive, and the perfect participle. Note. As the supine in um is wanting in most verbs, the third root must often be determined from the perfect partici[)le, or the future participle active. § 159. The following table exhibits a connected view of the verbal tcrniiiiations, in all the conjugations. By annexinc these to the st!\cral roots, all the jjarts of a verb may be formed. 9 98 VERBS. TERMINATIV.NS. §152 col«'.^2 ,3 1 c a 5 3 3.S .? O O N C C a '3 '3 '2 S >3 •p,s o u >5 M w H > f^ H H «ij « ^ ,-H )-l - ic3 ID )-■ >- , >3 >P >S '. .S5 X-^ >i-( >-^ '3 S 03 cs_g eS (u .2 I I I 1 >3 >;3 )3 '5 2 S S § ■C3 ,d ll ■§ OS (U a).S I 1 T I )3 >3 >3 2 -^ -«->-*-' led lOS IC3 lOS o I 1 T I 105 103 1* 'g C3 O) E-i "S "E '•■' s leS 103 icj n H I I I I A< I I I I s • ■ . . 1— I i-H eq CO Tfi a a a B 03 03 03 s ^ ^ ^ fQ io3 1® la; ;2 3 sii-g T-T >S )P y- 1- 03 u IC^ 'H I T 1 1 c3 a> IS •)= I I I I w to ^^'C, H M ,n* ini -.^ ''*^ 103 133 ■. a § Q O ;z; " 1-5 m CO C 03 S g c 103 b ,3 lO -t^ );3 s -M IC3 ^ S 1 1 I I b lo3 Id) a> I •EiS'SS •"u aj>o3.*2 c 03 a 3 O l-H o > I— I H ^^ 103 10) i:; s )3 .2 2" "'" 'g >2 >3 .3 I S S a If .0, ^ ^ CO )c3 >a) ; vj c/j en >j^ 03 0) U.S I I T I >3 >3 >s '2 2 a s,| 103 103 103 '5 1^ to 0^ .7i ic3 10) 10) ;s 03 q> io> .3: I T I I W TO )3 >3 oT g 03 f ' IC3 10) 'V S SS>2c *; ic3 *^ S 10) 0) 1^ IS -fJ >o3 4J3 Is >i) o))oJ.'2 I T I I 5 £ (N loi 10) . i^ Ol 'I rt o 0) o .X I— e^ eo -^ •uoipoB OT en a) .3 io3 103 ic3 '5 103 10) 10) J^ I I a" 2" 2"! o3 o3 e3_g l3 >d S ej 3 o )3 2 M ^ C (V) ^ >q T-H w CO •* ■5 a 4 >:i >;3 ,a lO 1© ic s ?"?• oJ o .o ici ia> 2^ M I I I I >o O ,o >o ■y •" i; 'X loi Id ;S i^ •9un}nj a a s 'S'C ,-:s -a rl IM CO •^ siN *-* »- '^ 's '3 '3 'a ,« :2 ,£ ,,; S o

- ■_ at ii -■ t. )D -i 'li ., u, u u r > •judsauj 1=3 -OJ '« .i; »— » /^ 00 0) o 3 n rH M CO ■^^ as *J 4J *3 .t^ c fl a c a: a) « S en <>o 00 A C 'r: 13 c IC r ID I3J a 3 s) il I I I I n n u/ n fl )S '^ )d a s a a la) ID la) iS ^ ^ ^ £• Ku >a >a S •a I- ^ t. T '? '^ 't 10, iz> i» ,S .05 ia> xu ,9 a a a g' -1 >i; £! '?' O •Is 3 .a H tJO o si o o Q M n H I o f>| § ►-! g s o -5^ 8 o c .s t3 a eS •a a o a 05 en CD .a *-» a o o I a a 3 SJ b 5- COO >^ lO) >4> CO GQ en C3 O ^' %-. Vh 'fM o > o o H o t: 03 o CJ IH ^ U.' 01 M >P >S '?J I I I H O o M o o I— ( o > > H O <5 e ..,2 en- fc ,2 S .a 2 3 3 a ^'c I I I :'s% 6S en « a 0) m3.22 a a -S ►^ t, :- u. pa < I I a' - o! O ■}u»r3uj 1/2 3 t^l <1 Ph 0,0, H O a ® P 1^ 3 '3 a •t 03 -tj >a> >r> en K en CO ID s'i o,a. o o 100 VERBS. SUM. § 153 Remark 1. In analyzing a verb, the voice, person, and number, are ascor- tamed by the personal terminations. See ^ 147, 3. The conjugation, mood, and tense, are, in general, determined by tlw letter or letters winch intervene between the root of the verb and the personal terminations. Thus in amaba- mus, 7nas denotes that the verb is of the act.ve voice, plural number, and first person; ba denotes that it is of the indicative mood, imperfect tense; and the connecting vowel a determines it to be of the first conjugation. So in amarem- twi, 77U7ii denotes the passive voice, plural number, and second person; re, the subjunctive mood, imperfect tense; and a, as before, the first conjugation. Rem. 2. Sometimes, the part between the root of the verb and the personal termination, does not precisely determine the conjugation, mood, and tense, but only within certain limits. In such cases, the conjugation may be learned, by finding the present tense in the dictionary, and if two forms are alike in the same conjugation, they can only be distinguished by the sense. Thus amcmus and dochnus have the same termination ; but, as miio is of the first, and doceo of the second conjugation, the former is determined to be the subjimctive, the latter the indicative, present. Regar may be either the future indicative, or the present subjunctive — blblmus either the present or the perfect indicative. § Ido> Sum, I am, is called an auxiliary verb, because it is used, in conjunction with participles, to supply the want of simple forms in other verbs. From its denoting existence, it is sometimes called the substantive verb. Remark. Sum is very irregular in those parts which, in other verbs, are formed from the first root. Its imperfect and future tenses, except in the third person plural of the latter, have the form of a pluperfect and future perfect. It is thus conjugated: — PRINCIPAL PARTS. Pres. . Indie. Pres. Injin u Perf. Indie. Put. Part. Sum, es'-se. fii'-i, fii'-tu'-rus. INDICATIVE MOOD. Present Tense. SINGULAR. PLURAL. § (1. sum, lam, sii'-miis, we are, e -| 2. es, tJiou art* es'-tis, ye] are, a. 1 3. est, he is ; sunt, they are. Imperfect. 1. e'-ram, I was, e-ra'-mus, we were. 2. e'-ras, thou wast, e-ra'-tis, ye were. 8. e'-rat, he was; e'-rant, they were. Future. shall, or will. 1. e'-ro, / shall be. er'-i-mus, we shall be, 2. e'-ris, thou wilt be, er'-i-tis, ye will be, 3. e'-rit, he will be ; e'-runt, they will be. • In the second person singular in English, the plural form you is oommonLv used except in solemn discourse; as, tu es, you are. t The plural pronoun of the second person is either ye or you. 153. ^ERBS. SUM. 101 PeTfs ,t. have been, or wait. 1. fti'-i, I have been, 2. fu-is'-ti, thou hast heen, 3. fu'-it, he has been ; 1. ,fu'-e-ram, I had been, 2. fu'-e-ras, thou hadst been, 3. fu'-e-rnt, he had been ; fu'-i-mus, we have been, fu-is'-tis, ye have been, fu-e'-runt or re, they have hee.%. Pluperfect. fu-e-ra'-mus, we had been, fu-e-ra'-tis, ye had been, fu'-e-rant, they had been. Future Perfect shall or will have. fu'-e-ro, / shall have been, fu'-e-ris, thou wilt have been, fu'-e-rit, he will have been ; fu-er'-i-mus, we shall have been fu-er'-I-tis, ye will have been, fii'-e-rint, they icill have been. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Present, may, or can. 1. aim, I may be, si'-mus, we may be, 2. sis, thou mayst be, si'-tis, ye may be, 3. sit, he may be sint, they may be. Imperfect, might, coidd, tvould, or should. 1. es'-sem, I would be, es-se'-mus, we would be, 2. es'-ses, thou wouldst be, es-se'-tis, ye would be, S. es'-set, he would be ; es'-sent, they would be. Perfect. 1. fii'-e-rim, I may have been, 2. fu'-e-ns, thou mayst have been, 3. fu'-e-rit, he may have been ; fu-er'-l-mus, we may have been, fu-er'-i-tis, ye may have been, fu'-e-rint, they may have been. Pluperfect, might, could, would, or should have. 1. fii-is'-sem, I would have been, fu-is-se'-mus, xve would have been^ 2. fii-is'-ses, thou wouldst have been, fu-is-se'-tis, ye would have been, 3. fu-ia'-set, he would have been ; fu-is'-sent, they would have been. IMPERATIVE MOOD. Pres. Fut. 1. es, be thou, 2. es'-to, thou shalt be 3. es'-to, let him be ; es'-te, be ye. es-to'-te, ye shall be, sun '-to, let them be. INFINITIVE MOOD. Present, es'-se, to be. Perfect, fu-is'-se, to have been. Future, fu-tu'-rus (a, um), es'-se, oi fo'-re, to be about to he. 9* 102 VKRBS. — POSSUM. § 154. PARTICIPLE. Future, fu-tu'-rus, a, uirii about to he. § 154. Remark 1. A present participle ens seems tc have been an- ciently in use, and is still found in the compounds absens, prcesens, and pdtens. Rem. 2. The perfect fui, and its derivative tenses, are formed from an obso- lete Juo, whence come also the participle futurus, an old subjunctive present fuam, juas, fuat ; , , fuant, and the forms J'uvimus, perf. ind., Juvi- rint, perf. subj., &nA fuvisset, plup. subj. Rem. 3. From fuo appear also to be derived the following : — &ubi. imperf. fo'-rem, fo'-res, fo'-ret; , fo'-rent. Inf. pres. fo'-re. These forms seem to have been contracted from fu&rtm.. etc., and fuire. Fdrem is equivalent in meaning to essem, but the infinitive jdre has, in most cases, acquired a future signification, equivalent to futurus esse. Rem. 4. Sie7n, sies, siet, sient, for siVra, sis, sit, sint, are found in ancient writers, as are also escii for emt, escunt for erunt, ese, esetis, and esent, for ease, essetis, and essent. Rem. 5. Like sum are conjugated its compounds, absum, adsum^ desum, insum, inlersum, obsum, prcesum, suhsum, and supersum. Rem. 6. Prosum, from the old form prod for pro, and sum, has d after pro, when the simple verb begins with e ; as, Ind. pres. pro'-sum, prod'-es, prod'-est, etc. wiperf. prod'-e-ram, prod'-e-ras, etc. Rem. 7. (a.) Possum is compounded of poth, able, and sum. They are sometimes written separately, and then potis is the same in all genders and numbers. (6.) In composition, is is omitted in pdtis, and t, as in other cases, coming be- fore s, is changed into s. In the infinitive, and imperfect subjunctive, es of the simple verb is dropped, as is also f at the beginning of the second root. In every other respect possum is conjugated like sum, wherever it is found; but the imperative, and the parts derived from the third root, are wanting. Pres. Indie. Pres. Infin. Perf. Indie. Pos'-sum, pos'-se, p6t'-u-i, I can, or I am able. INDICATIVE. SITBJUNCTIVE. Present. pos'-sum, p6'-t6s, po'-test; pos'-sim, pos'-sis, pos'-sit; pos'-su-mus, p6-tes'-tis, pos'-sunt. pos-si'-mus, pos-si'-tts, pos'-sint. Imperfect. pot'-6-ram, pof-e-ras, pot'-6-rat; pos'-sem, pos'-ses, pos'-sSt; p6t-e-ra'-mus, -e-ra'-tis, -e-rant. pos-se'-miis, -se'-tis, pos'-sent. Future. p6f-6-ro, p6t'-e-ris, p6t'-e-rlt; po-tgr'-iTmus, po-ter'-l-tis, pot'-€-runt. Perfect. p6t'-u-i, p6t-u-is'ti, p6t'-u-It; p6-tu'-e-rim, -e-rts, -e-rit; p6-tu'-l-mus, -is'-tis, -e'-runt or -e're. pot-u-er'-i-mus, i-tls, -e-rint. § 155. VERBS. — FIKST CONJUGATION. ACTIVE. 108 p6-tu'-^ram, -^-ras, -6-rat; Pluperfect. pot-u-is'-sem, -ifl'-ses, -is'-egt; pot-u-is-se'-mfls, -ia-se'-tis, -is'-sent. p6t-u-6-ra'-mQs, -e-ra'-tls, -€-rant. Future Perfect po-tu'-e-ro, p6-tu'-e-rfs, p6-tu'-6-rIt; potr-Q-er'-I-mus, pot^u-er'-f-tis, p6-tu'-6-rint. (No Imperative.) INFINITIVE. PARTICrPIAL ADJKCTIVK. Pres. pos'-s6. Per/, pot-u-is'-sfi. po'-tens, able. NoTB. The following; forms are also found ; potissum for possum, potessuni fof possuni, fotessim and vcssiem for possim, 'possies, possiei and potessU for pogsu and possit, potessem for possem, potesse for posse, and before a passive infinitive the passive forms potesinr for potest, poterdtur for poterat, and possttur foi potset. — PotLs cind pot-e without est are sometimes used for potest. § 155. FIRST CONJUGATION. ACTIVE VOICE. PRINCIPAL PARTS. Pres. Ind. Pres. Inf. Perf. Ind. A'-mo, a-ma'-re, a-ma'-vi, - Supine. S-ma'-tunL. INDICATIVE MOOD. Present Sing, a'-mo, a -mas, a'-mat, Plur. S-ma'-mu3, a-ma'-tis, a'-mant. love, do love, am loving. Hove, thou lovest, he loves; we hve, ye love, they love. Imperfect Sing, a-ma'-bam, a-ma'-bas, a-ma'-bat, Plur. am-a-ba'-mus, am-a-ba'-tis, a-ma'-bant, w:,s loving, loved, did love. I was loving, thou wast loving, he was loving ; we were loving, ye were loving, they were loving. Future. shcAl, or will. Sing. a-ma'-bo, a-ma'-bis, a-ma'-bit, Plur. a-mab'-i-miis, &-mab'-i-tis, a-ma'-bunt, I shall love, thou wilt love, he will love ; we shall love, ye icill love, they will love. 104 VERBS. FIRST CONJUGATION, ACTIVE. § 156 Perfect, loved, or have loved. Sing. a-ma'-vi, I have loved. am-a-vis'-ti, thou hast lovedf . a-ma-vlt, he has loved; Plur. a-mav'-i-mus, we have loved, am-a-vis'-tis, ye have loved, am-a-ve -niut or -re, they have loved. Pluperfect. had. Sing. a-mav'-e-ram, I had loved, a-mav'-e-raa, thou hadst loved. a-mav'-e-rat, he had loved ; Plur. &-mav-e-ra'-mu8, we had loved. a-mav-e-ra'-tis, ye had loved, a-mav'-e-rant, they had loved. Future Perfect. shall I, or toUl have. ^ng. a-mav'-e-ro, I shall have loved, a-mav'-e-ri8, thou wilt have loved, a-mav'-e-rit, he will have loved; Plur. am-a-Ter'-i-mus, we shall have loved, am-a-ver'-i-tis, ye will have loved. a-mav'-e-rint, they, will have loved SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD, Present. may, or can. Sing. a'-mem, I may love. a'-mes, thou mayst love, a'-met, he may love ; Plur. a-me'-mus, we may love. a-me'-tis, ye may love. a'-ment, they may love. Tmperfect. might, could, would, or should. Sing. a-ma-rem, I would love, a-ma'-res, thou wouldst love, a-ma'-ret, he would love ; Plur. am-a-re'-mus, we would love, am-a-re'-tis, ye would love. a-ma-rent, they would lc>ve. Perfect, may, oi • can have. Sing. a-mav'-e-rim, I may have loved. a-mav'-e-ris, thou mayst have loved, a-mav'-e-rit, he may have loved; Plur. , am-a-ver'-i-mus, we may have loved, am-a-ver'-i-tis, ye may have loved, a-mav'-e-rint, they may have loved § 156. VERBS. — FIRST CONJUGATION, PASSIVE. 105 Pluperfect, might, could, would, or should have. Sing, am-a-vis'-sem, / would have loved, am-a-vis'-ses, thou wouldst have loved, am-a-vis'-set, he would have loved ; Plur. am-a-vis-se'-mus, we would have loved, am-a-vis-se'-tis, ye would have loved, fim-a-vis'-eent, they would have loved. IMPERATIVE MOOD. Pres. Sing, a'-ma, love thou ; Plur. a-ma'-te, love ye. Fut. Sing, a-ma'-to, thou shall love, a-ma'-t6, he shall love ; Plur. am-a-to'-te, ye shall love, a-man'-to, they shall love INFINITIVE MOOD. Present, a-ma'-re, to love. Perfect, am-a-vis'-se, to have loved. Future, am-a-tii'-rus, (a, um,) es'-se, to be about to foe* PARTICIPLES. Present, a'-mans, loving. - Future, am-a-tu'-rus, S, um, about to love, GERUND. G. a-man'-di, of loving, D. a-man'-d8, for loving, Ac. a-man'-dum, loving, Ab, a-man'-do, by loving. SUPINE. Former. S-ma'-tum, to love. §150. PASSIVE VOICE. PRINCIPAL PARTS. Pres. Indie. Pres. Inf.n. Perf. Part A'-mor, &-ma'-ri. a^ma'-tus. 106 VERBS.— FIRST CONJUGATION, PASSIVE. § 156 INDICATIVE MOOD. Sing. Plur. a Sing. Plur. Sing. Plur. Perfect, have been, or was. Sing. 5-ma'-tus sum or fu'-i, / have been loved, a-ma'-tus ea or fu-is'-ti, thou hast been loved^ 5-ma'-tus est or fu'-it, he has been loved; Plur. Srina'-ti su'-miis or fii'-i-miis, we have been loved, a-ma'-ti es'-tls or fu-is'-tis, ye have been loved, a-ma-ti sunt, fu'e'-runt or -re, they have been loved Pluperfect, had been. Sing, a-ma'-tus e'-ram or fu'-e-ram, / had been loved, S-ma'-tiis e'-ras or fa'-e-ras, thou hadst been loved, Srma'-tus e'-rat or fu'-e-rat, he had been loved; Plur. a-ma-ti e-ra'-mus or fu-e-ra -mus, we had been loved, a-ma'-ti e-ra'-tis or fu-e-ra'-tis, ye had bten loved, a-ma'-ti e'-rant or fu'-e-rant, they had been loved. Future Perfect, shall have been. Sing. 5-ma'-tus e'-ro or fu'-e-ro, / shall hone been loved, a-ma'-tus e'-ris or fu'-e-ris, thou wilt have been loved^ a-ma'-tus e'-rit or fu'-e-rit, he will have been loved ; Plur. a-ma'-ti er-i-mus or fu-er'-i-mus we shall have been loved, a-ma'-ti er'-i-tis or fu-er'-i-tis, ye will have been loved, S-ma'-ti e'-runt or fu'-e-rint, they will have been loved. Pn 3sent. am. a'-mor, a-ma'-rls or -re, a-ma'-tiir, a-ma'-mur, a-mam'-i-ni, a-man'-tiir. 1 lam loved, thou art loved, he is loved; we are loved, ye are loved, they are loved. Imperfect. was. a-ma'-bar, am-a-ba'-ris or am-a-ba'-tur, am-a-ba'-mur, am-a-bam'-l-ni, am-a-ban'-tiir, -re, I was loved, ' thou wast loved, he was loved ; we were loved:, ye were loved, they were loved. Future. shall. or will be. a-ma'-bor, a-mab'-e-ris or armab'-i-tur, a-mab'-i-miir, am-a-blm'-i-ni, am-a-bim'-tiir. -re, I shall be loved, thou wilt be loved, he will be loved; we shall be loved, ye will be loved, they will be loved. ^ 156. VFRB8. FIRST CONJUGATION, PASSIVE. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Present, may, or can he. Sing. S'-mer, / may he loved, a-me'-rls or -re, thou mayst he loved, a-m§'-tur, he may he loved; Plur. a-me'-mur, we may he loved, a-mem'-i-ni, ye may he loved, a-men'-tur, they may he loved. Imperfect, might, could, would, or should he. Sing, a-ma'-rer, / would be loved, am-a-re'-ris or -re, thou wouldst he loved, am-a-re'-tur, he would he loved; Plur. Sm-a-re'-mur, we would he loved, am-a-rem'-i-ni, ye would he loved, am-a-ren'-tur, they would he loved. Perfect, may have been. 107 Sing Plur. Sing. Plur. a-ma'-tus sim or fu'-e-rim, S-ma'-tus sis or fii'-e-ris, a-ma'-tu3 sit or fu'-e-rit, a-ma'-ti si'-mus or fu-er'-i-mus, S-ma'-ti ai'-tis or fn-er'-I-tis, a-ma'-ti sint or fu'-e-rint, I may have been loved, thou mayst have been loved, he may have been loved, we may have been loved, ye may have been loved, they may have been loved. Pluperfect, might, could, would, oi should have been. a-ma -tiis es'-sem or fu-is'-sem, / icould hav, been loved, a-ma -tiis es'-ses or fu-is'-ses, thou wouldst nave been loved^ a-ma'-tiis es'-set or fu-is'-set, he would have .••■"en loved ; a-ma'-ti es-se'-miis or fu-is-se'-mus, we would have bt "n loved, arma'-1a es-se'-tis or fu-Is-se'-tis, ye would have beeu loved, a-ma'-ti es'-sent or fu-is'-sent, they would have beet, loved IMPERATIVE MOOD. Pres. Sing, a-ma'-re, Plur. a-mam'-i-ni, Fut. Sing, a-ma'-tor, a-ma'-tor, Plur. (am-a-bim-i-ni, a-man'-tor, he thou loved ; be ye loved, thou shalt he loved, he shall be loved; ye shall he loved), they shall he loved. INFINITIVE MOOD. Present, a-ma'-ri, to he loved. Perfect, a-ma'-tus es'-se rr fti-is'-se, to have been loved. Future, a-ma'-tum i'-ri, to be about to be loved. fdO 108 VERBS. SKCOND CONJUGATION. §15? PARTICIPLES. Perfect, a-ma'-tus, loved, or having been loved. Future, a-man'-dus, to be loved. SUPINE. Latter, a-ma'-tu, to be loved. Formation op the Tenses. From the f rst root, am, are de- From the second root, From the third root rived a7nav, are derived amat, are derived Active. Passive. Active. Passive. Jnd. pret. amo, amor. Ind. perf. amavi, amatws sum, etc. imperf. sxaabam, amdfiar. plup. amav^ram, z.msitus eram, etc. — fut. amdio, &mahor. fut. perf. amavero, a.matits ero, etc. Subj. pres. amem, amer. Subj. perf. amaveriw, amatws sim, etc. imperf. amarem, amdrer. plup. amavissem, amattw essem, eto Inf. perf. amavisss, amatzw esse, etc. Imperat. pres. amd, amdre. fut. amdto, amdtor. From the third root. Inf. pres. am dre, amdri. Inf. fut. am&turus esse, amatwrn iri. Part. pres. amans, Part. fut. amatu?nts. fut. amandMs. perf. amatMS. Gerund. amandi. Form. sup. amatwrn. Lat. tup. amatu. § 157. SEC< 3ND CONJUGATION. ACTIVE VOICE. PASSIVE VOICE.* PRINCIPAL PARTS. Pres. Ind. mo'-ne-6. Pres. Ind. mo'-ne-or.. Pres. Inf. mo-ne'-re. Pres. Inf. mo-ne'-ri. Perf. Ind. mon'-u-i. Perf. Part. mon'-I-tus. Supine. 'non'-i-tum. INDICATIVE MOOD. Present / advise. I am advised. Sing, mo'-ne-o, Sing, mo'-ne-or, mo'-neg, mo-ne'-ris or -re, mo'-net ; mo-ne'-tur ; Plur. mo-ne'-mus, Plur. mo-ne'-mur, mo-ne'-tis, mo-nem'-i-ni, mb'-nent. mo-nen'-tur. [mperfect / was advising. I was advised. S. mo-ne'-bam, S. mo-ne'-bar, mo-ne'-bas, mon-e-ba -ris or -re, mo-ne'-bat ; mon-e-ba'-tur ; p. mon-e-ba -mua, P. mon-e-ba'-miir, mon-e-ba'-tis, mon-e-bam'-i-ni, mo-ne'-bant. m6n-e-ban'-tur. §157 VERBS. SECOND CONJUGATION. 109 ACTIVE. / shall or will advise. S. mo-ne'-bo, mo-ne'-bis, mo-ne'-bit ; P. mo-neb'-i-mus, mo-neb'-i-tis, mo-ne'-bunt. / advised or have advised. S. mon'-u-i, mon-u-is'-ti, mon'-u-it ; P. mo-nu'-i-miis, mon-u-is'-tis, mon-u-e'-runt or -re. Future. / had advised. S. mo-nu'-e-ram, m5-nu'-e-ras, mo-nu'-e-rat ; P. m6n-u-6-ra'-mus, m6n-u-6-ra'-tis, mo-nu e-rant. / shall have advised. S. mo-nu'-e-ro, mo-nu'-e-rfs, mo-nu'-e-rit ; P. mon-u-er'-i-mus, mon-u-er'-i-tis, mo-nu'-e-rint. PASSIVE. / shall or vnll he advised. S. mo-ne'-bor, mo-neb'-e-ris or -re, mo-neb'-i-tur ; P. mo-neb'-i-mur, mon-e-bim'-i-ni, mon-e-bun'-tur. Perfect. I was or have been advised. S. mon'-i-tus sum or fu'-i, mon'-i-tus es or fu-is'-ti, mon'-i-tus est or fii'-it ; P. mon'-i-ti su'-mus or fu'-i-mus, mon'-i-ti es'-tis or fu-is'-tas, mon'-i-ti sunt, fu-e'-runt or -re- Pluperfect / had been advised. S. mon'-i-tus e'-ram or fu'-e-ram, mon'-i-tus e'-ras or fu'-e-ras, mon'-i-tus e'-rat or fu'-e-rat ; P. mon'i-ti e-ra'-mus or fu-e-ra'-mus, mon'-i-ti e-ra'-tis or fu-e-ra'-tis, mon'-i-ti e'-rant or fu'-e-rant. Future Perfect. I shall have been advised. S. mon'-i-tiis e'-ro or fu'-e-ro, mon'-i-tuS e'-ris or fu'-e-ris, mon'-i-tus e'-rit or fu'-e-rit ; P. mon'-i-ti er'-i-mus or fu-er'-I-mua, mon'-i-ti er'-i-tis or fu-er'-I-tis, mon'-i-ti e'-runt or fu'-e-rint. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. / may or can advise. S. m5'-ne-am, mo'-ne-as, mo'-ne-at ; P. mo-ne-a'-mus, mo-ne-a'-tis, mo'-ne-ant. Present. / may or can be advised. mo -ne-ar, mo-ne-a'-ris or mo-ne-a'-tur ; mo-ne-a'-miir, mo-ne-am'-i-ni, mo-ne-an'-tur. •re, 110 VERBS. — SECOND CONJUGATION. §157 ACTxVE. PASSIVE Imperfect. / might, could, would, or should advise. mo-ne -rem, mo-ne'-res, mo-ne'-ret ; mon-e-re'-mus, mon-e-re'-tis, mo-ne'-rent. / may have advised. S. mo-nu'-e-rim, mo-nu'-e-ris, mo-nu'-e-rit ; P. raon-u-er'-i-mus, mon-u-er'-i-tis, mo-nu'-e-rint. /" might, could, would, or should have advised. S. mon-u-is'-sem, mon-u-is'-ses, mon-u-is'-set ; mon-u-is-se'-mus, mon-u-is-se'-tis, mon-u-is'-sent. P / might, could, would, or should be advised. S. mo-ne'-rer, mon-e-re'-ris or -re, mon-e-re'-tur ; P. mon-e-re'-miir, mon-e-rem'-i-ni, mon-e-ren'-tur. Perfect. , I may have been advised. S. mon'-i-tus sim or fii'-e-rim, mon'-i-tus sis or fu'-e-ris, mon'-i-tus sit or fu'-e-rit ; P. mon'-i-ti si'-mus or fu-er'-I-mua, mon'-I-ti si'-tis or fu-6r'-i-tis, mon'-i-ti sint or fu'-e-rint. Pluperfect. I might, could, would, or should have been advised. S. mon'-i-tus es'-sem or fii-is'-sem, mon'-i-tus es'-ses or fu-is'-ses, * mon'-i-tus es'-set or fu-is'-set ; P. mon'-i-ti es-se'-mus or fu-is-se'-mus, mon'-i-ti es-se'-tis or fu-is-se'-tis, mon'-i-ti es'-sent or fu-is'-sent. IMPERATIVE MOOD. Pres. S. mo'-ne, advice thou; P. m6-ne'-t6, advise ye. Fut. S. mo-ne'-to, thou shalt ad- vise, mo-ne'-to, he shall advise; P. mon-e-to'-te, ye shall ad- vise, mo-nen'-to, they shall ad- vise. Pres. S. mo-ne'-re, be thou advised; P. mo-nem'-i-ni, be ye ad- vised. Fut. S. mo-ne'-tor, thou shall be advised, mo-ne'-tor, he shall be advised ; P. (mon-e-bim'-I-ni, ye shall be advised,^ mo-nen'-tor, they shall be advised. INFINITIVE MOOD. Pres. mo-ne'-re, to advise. Perf. mon-u-is'-se, to have advised. Fut. mon-i-tu'-rus es'-se, to be about to advise. Pres. mo-ne'-ri, to be advisrd. Perf. mon'-i-tus es'-se or 1 a-is'-se, to have been advised. Fut. mon'-i-tum i'-ri, to he about to be advised. §158. VERBS. THFRP CONJUGATION. Ill ACTIVE. PASSIVE, PARTICIPLES. Pres. mo'-nens, advising. I Per/, mon'-i-tus, advised. Fut. mon-I-tu'-rus, about to advise. \ Fut. mo-nen'-dus, to be advited. GERUND. G. mo-nen'-di, of advising, D. mo-nen'-do, etc. Ac. mo-nen'-dum, Ab. mo-nen'-do. SUPINES. Former, mon'-i-tum, to advise. \ Latter, mon'-i-tu, to be advised. FOKMATION OF THE TeNSES. From the first root, num, are de- rived, Active. Pa»sive. moneo, moneor. monebam^moncbar. monebo, monebor. moneam, monear. — — imperf. vaonerem, monerer*. Imperat. pres. mone, monere. fut. moneto, monitor. Jnf. preg. monere, monm. Part pre». mone»w, fut. monendus. Gerund. moaendi. Ind. |W€«. tmperf. fut. Subf. ^res. From the second root, From the third root, monu, are derived, nwnit, are derived, Active. Passive. Ind. perf. monui, monIt«s sum, etc. - plup. monueram, monltrw eram, etc. -Alt. perf. momi^ro, monltiM ero, etc. Snhj. perf. monu^7'm, monIt?« sira, etc. plup. monuJssem, monltMS essem,etc, Inf. perf. monuisse, monittw esse, etc. "From the third root, Jnf. fut. momturus esse, monltum in. Part. fut. monitwrtts, perf. monltiw. Form. Sup. monitum. Lat. Sup. monltti. §158. THIIID CONJUGATION. PRINCIPAL PARTS. Pres. Ind. re'-go. Pres. Inf. reg'-e-rfi. Perf. Ind. rex'-i. Supine. rec'-tum. Pres. Ind. Pres. Inf. Perf. Part. re -gor. re'-gi. rec'-tus. INDICATIVE MOOD. Present. I rule. Sing. re'-gS, re'-gis, re'-git ; Plur. reg-i-mus, reg'-i-tls, re'-gunt. Sing. Plur. I am ruled. re'-gor, reg'-e-ris or ■ reg'-i-tur ; reg'-i-mur, re-gim'-I-ni, re-gun'-tiir. ■re, 112 VERBS. THIRD CONJUGATION. §158 ACTIVE. / was ruling. re-ge'-bam, re-ge'-bas, re-ge'-bat ; reg-e-ba'-mus, reg-e-ba'-tis, re-ge'-bant / shall or will rule. S. re'-gam, re'-ges, re'-get ; P. re-ge'-mus, re-ge'-tis, re'-gent. I ruled or have ruled. S. rex'-i, rex-is'-ta, rex'-it ; P. rex'-i-mus, rex-is'-tis, rex-e'-nuLt or -re. I had ruled. S. rex'-e-ram, rex'-e-ras, rex'-e-rat ; P. rex-e-ra'-mua rex-e-ra'-tis, rex'-e-rant. Imperfect. PASSIVE / was ruled. re-ge'-bar, reg-e-ba'-ris or -re, reg-e-ba'-tiir ; reg-e-ba'-mur, reg-e-bam'-i-ni, reg-e-ban'-tur. Future. / shall or will be ruled. S. re'-gar, re-ge'-ris or -re, re-ge'-tur ; P. re-ge'-mur, re-gem'-i-ni, re-gen'-tur. Perfect / was or have been ruled. S. rec'-tus sum or fu'-i, ' rec'-tus es or fu-is'-fi, rec'-tus est or fu'-it; P. rec'-ti sii'-mus or fu'-i-mus, rec'-ti es'-tis or fu-is'-tis, rec'-ti sunt, fu-e'-runt or -re Pluperfect. / had been ruled. S. rec'-tus e'-ram or fu'-e-ram, rec'-tus e'-ras or fu'-e-ras, rec'-tus e'-rat or fu'-e-rat; P. rec'-ti e-ra'-mus or fu-e-ra'-mua, rec'-ti e-ra'-tis or fu-e-ra'-tis, rec'-ti e'-rant or fu'-e-rant. J shall have ruled S. rex'-e-r8, rex'-e-ris, rex'-e-rit ; P. rex-er'-i-mus, rex-er'-I-tis, rex'-e-rint. Future Perfect I / shall have been ruled. , S. rec'-tiis e'-ro or fu'-e-r8, rec'-tus e'-ris or fu'-e-ris, rec'-tiis e'-rit or fu' e-rit ; P. rec'-ti er'-i-mus or fu-er'-i-mus, rec'-ti er'-i-tis or fu-er'-i-tis, ■ec'-ti e'-runt or fu'-e-rint. § 158. VERBS. THIRD CONJUGATION. lis ACTIVE. PASSIFE. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Present. / may or can be ruled. S. re'-gar, re-ga'-ris or -re, re-ga'-tur ; P. re-ga -mur, re-gam'-i-ni, J may or can ride S. re'-gam, re'-gaa, re'-gat; P. re-ga'-mus. re-ga'-tis, re'-gant re-gan'-tur. Imperfect. / mipht, could, would, or should rule. S. reg'-e-rem, reg'-e-res, reg'-e-ret; P. reg-e-re'-mus, reg-e-re'-tis, reg'-e-rent. [ may have ruled. S. rex'-e-rim, rex'-e-rfs, rex'-e-rit; P. rex-er'-i-miis, rex-er'-i-tis, rex'-e-rint. / might, could, would, or should have ruled. S. rex-is'-sem, rex-is'-ses, rex-is'-set ; P. rex-is-se'-mus, rex-is-se'-tis, rex-is'-sent. / might, could, would, or should be ruled. . .S\ reg'-e-rer, reg-e-re'-ris or -re, reg-e-re'-tur ; P. reg-e-re'-mur, reg-e-rem'-i-ni, reg-e-ren'-tur. Perfect. / may have been ruled. S. rec'-tus sim or fu'-e-rim, rec'-tus sis or fu'-e-ris, rec'-tiis sit or fu'-e-rit ; P. rec'-ti si'-mus or fu-er'-I-mus, rec'-ti si'-tis or fu-er'-I-tis, rec'-ti sint or fu'-e-rint. Pluperfect. / might, could, ivould, or should have been ruled. S. rec'-tus es'-sem or fu-is'-sem, rec'-tus es'-ses or fu-is'-ses, rec'-tus es'-set or fu-is'-set; P. rec'-ti es-se'-mus or fu-is-se'-mus, rec'-ti es-se'-tis or fu-is-se'-tis, rec'-ti es'-sent or fu-is'-sent. IMPERATIVE MOOD. Pres. Ful. S. re'-ge, rule thou, P. reg'-I-te, rule ye. S. reg'-i-to, thou shalt rule, reg'-i-t8, he shall rule ; p. reg-i-to'-tc, ye shall rule, rS-gun' t8, they shall rule. 10* Pres. S. reg'-e-re, be thou ruled; P. re-gim'-i-ni, be ye ruled. Ful. S. rUg'-i-tov, thou shall be ruled, reg'-i-tor, he shall he ruled, P. (rc-gim'-i-ni, ye shall, etc.) re-gun'-tor, they shall, etc. 114 VERBS. THIRD CONJUGATION. §159 ACTIVE. PASSIVE. INFINITIVE MOOD. Pres. reg'-e-re, to rule. Per/, rex-is'-se, to have ruled. Fut. rec-tu'-rus es'-se, to he about to rule. Pres. re'-gi, to be ruled. Perf. rec'-tus es'-se or fu- is'-se, to have been ruled. Fut. rec'-tum i'-ri, to be about to be ruled. PARTICIPLES. Pres. re'-gens, ruling. Fut. rec-tu'-rus, about to rule. Perf. rec'-tus, ruled. Fut. r6-gen'-dus, to be ruled. GERUND. G. r6-gen'-dl, of ruling. D. re-gen'-do, etc. Ac. re-gen'-dum, Ab. re-gen'-do. SUPINES. Former, rec'-tum, to rule. \ Latter, rec'-tu, to he ruled. Formation of the Tenses. From the first root, reg, are de- rived, Active. Passive. rego, regor. regebam, regebar. regam, regar. regain, regar. regerem, reglrer. resere. Ind. pres. - imperf. fut. 8vbj. pres. imperf. Imperat. pres. rege, fut. regfto, Ivf pres. regere, Part. pres. regews, f^- Gerund. regendi. regitor regi. regendus. From the second root, rex, are derived, Active. Ind. perf. • rexi, plup. rexeram, fut. perf. rexero, Subj. perf. res.erim, plup. re's.issem. Inf. perf. renisse. From the third roc \ red. are derived, Passive. rect«s sum, etc. rectw erara, etc rectws ero, etc. rectMS sim, etc. rectus essem, etc. rectMs esse, etc. From the third root. Inf. fut. rectiirus esse, rectwrn iri. Part. fut. rectuT-us. perf. rectws. Form. Sup. rectum. Lat. Sup. rectw. § 1^9. Verbs in 10 of tBe Third Conjugation. Verbs in io of the third conjugation, in tenses formed from the first root, have, as connecting vowels, ia, ie, io, or hi, wherever the same occur in the fourth conjugation ; but where they have only a single connecting vowel, it is the same which character- izes other verbs of the third conjugation. They are all conju- gated like cdpio. §159. VERBS. THIRD CONJUGATION. 115 ACTIVE. PASSIVE. PRINCIPAL PARTS. Pres. Ind. ca'-pi-6r, to be talcen. Pres. Inf. ca'-pi. Ptrf. Part, cap'-tts. / 'res. Ind. ca'-pi-o, to take Pres. Inf. cap -e-re. Perf Ind. ce'-pi. Supine, cap'-tum. INDICATIVE MOOD. Present. ca -pi-o, ca'-pis, • ca'-pit ; cap'-i-mus, cap'-I-tis, ca'-pi-unt. S. ca-pi-e'-bam, ca-pi-e'-bas, ca-pi-e'-bat ; P. ca-pi-e-ba'-mus, ca-pi-e-ba'-tis, ca-pi-e'-bant. S. ca'-pi-am, ca'-pi-es, ca'-pi-et ; P. ca-pi-e'-mus, ca-pi-e'-tis, ca-pi-ent. Imperfect. Future. ca -pi-or, cap'-6-ria or -re, cap'-i-tur ; cap'-i-mur, ca-pim'-i-ni, cS-pi-un'-tur. S. ca-pi-e'-bar, ca-pi-e-ba'-ris or -rfi, ca-pi-e-ba'-tur ; P. ca-pi-e-ba'-m6r, ca-pi-e-bam'-I-ni, ca-pi-e-ban'-tur. 5'. ca'-pi-&r, ca-pi-e'-ris or -r€, ca-pi-e'-tur ; P. ca-pi-e'-mur, ca-pi-em'-I-ni, ea-pi-en'-tur. The parts formed from the second and third roots being entirely regular, only a synopsis of them is given. Peif. ce'-pi. Plup. cep'-e-ram. Fut. pe^f. cep'-e-ro. S. Perf. cap'-tus sum or fa'-l. Plup. cap'-tus 6'-ram or fu'-e-ram. Fut. perf. cap'-tus e'-ro or fu'-e-ro. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Present. ca -pi-am, ca'-pi-as, ca'-pi-at ; P. ca-pi-a'-mus, ca-pi-a'-tis, ca'-pi-ant. S. ca'-pi-ar, ca-pi-a'-ris or -re, ca-pi-a'-tur ; P. ca-pi-a'-mur, ca-pi-am'-I-ni, ca-pi-an'-tur. 116 VERBS. FOURTH CONJUGATION §160. ACTIVE. S. cap'-6-rem, cap'-6-res, cap'-e-ret ; P. cap-e-re'-mus, cap-e-re'-tis, cap'-e-rent. Perf. cep'-€-rim. Plup. ce-pia'-sem. Imperfect. PASSWE, S. cap'-e-rer, cap-e-re'-ris or -ri, cap-e-re'-tur ; P. cap-e-re'-mur, cap-e-rem'-i-ni, cap-e-ren'-tur. Per/, cap'-tus sim or fu'-e-rim. Plup. cap'-tus es'-sem or fu-is'-sem. IMPERATIVE MOOD. Pres. 2. S. c&'-pe ; P. 2. cSp'-l-te. FuL 2. cap'-i-to, cap-i-to-te, • 3. cap'-I-tS; ca-pi-un'-to. S. cap'-e-re ; P. ca-pim'-I-ni. cap'-i-tor, (ca-pi-em'-i-ni,) cap'-i-tor ; ca-pi-un'-tor. INFINITIVE MOOD. Pres. cap'-e-re. Perf. ce-pis'-se. Fut. cap-tu'-rus es'-se. Pres. ca'-pi. Perf. cap'-tus es'-se or fa-iB'-sa. Fut. cap'-tum i'-ri. PARTICIPLES. Pres. ca'-pi-ens. Fut. cap-tu'-rus. Perf. cap'-tus. Fut. ca-pi-en'-duB. GERUND. G. ca-pi-en'-di, etc. SUPINES. Former, cap'-tum. | Latter, cap'-tu. § 160. FOURTH CONJUGATION. Pres. Ind. Pres. Inf. Perf. Ind. Supine. PRINCIPAL PARTS. au'-di-o. au-di'-re. au-di'-vi. au-di'-tum. Pres. Ind. au'-di-6r. Pres. Inf. au-di'-ri. Perf. Pari, au-di'-tus. §160. VERBS. FOURTH CONJUGATION. 117 ACTIVE. PASSIVE, INDICATIVE MOOD. Preseat I hear. S. au'-di-8, au'-dis, au'dit ; P. au-di'-mus, au'-di'-tis, au'-di-unt. / was hearing. S. au-di-e'-bam, au-di-e'-bas, au-di-e'-bat ; P. au-di-e-ba'-mus, au-di-e-ba'-tis, au-di-e -bant. / shall or will hear. S. au'-di-am, au'-di-es, au'-di-et ; P. au-di-e'-mus, au-di-e'-tia, au'-di-ent. i heard or have heard. S. au-di'-vi, au-di-via'-ti, au-di'-vit ; P. au-div'-I-mus, au-di-vis'-tis, au-di-ve'-runt or -re. / had heard. au-div'-e-ram, au-div'-e-ras, au-dlv'-e-rat ; au-di v-e-ra'-mus, au-div-e-ra'-tis, au-div'-e-rant. I am heard. S. au'-di-6r, au-di'-ri3 or -re, au-di'-tur ; P. au-di'-mur, au-dim'-i-ni, au-di-un'-tur. Imperfect. / was heard. au-di-e'-bar, au-di-e-ba'-ris or -re, au-di-e-ba'-tur ; au-di-e-ba'-mur, ai^-di-e-bam'-I-ni, au-di-e-ban'-tur. Future. / shall or will be heard. S. au'-di-ar, au-di-e'-ris or -r6, au-di-e'-tur ; P. au-di-e'-mur, au-di-em'-i-ni, au-di-en'-tur. Perfect. / have been or was heard. S. au-di'-tus sum or fu'-i, au-di'-tus es or fu-is'-ti, au-di'-tus est or fu'-it; P. au-di'-ti su'-mus or fu'-i-mus, au-di'-ti es'-tis or fu-is'-tis, au-di'-ti sunt, fu-e'-runt or -re Pluperfect. / had been heard. S. au-di'-tus e'-ram or fu'-e-ram, au-di'-tus e'-ras or fu'-e-ras, au-di'-tus e'-rat or fu'-e-rat; P. au-di'-ti e-ra'-mus or fu-e-ra'-miifl, au-di'-ti e-ra'-tls or fu-?.-ra'-tis, au-di'-ti e'-rant or fu'-e-rant 118 VERBS. — FOURTH CONJUGATION. §160. ACTIVE. 7 shall ha 'e heard. S. au-div'-e-ro, au-div'-e-ris, au-div'-e-rit ; P. au-di-ver'-i-mus, au-di-ver'-i-tis, au-div'-e-rint PASSIVE Future Perfect. / shall have been heard. S. au-di'-tus e'-ro or fu'-e-r5, au-di'-tus e'-ris or fu'-e-ris, au-di'-tus e'-rit or fu'-e-rit; P. au-di'-ti er'-i-mus or fu-er'-i-muB, au-di'-ti er'-i-tis or fu-er'-I-tis, au-di'-ti e'-runt or fu'-e-rint. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Present. / may or can hear. S. au'-di-am, au'-di-as, au'-di-at ; P. au-di-a'-mus, au-di-a'-tis, au'-di-ant. * / may or can he heard. S. au'-di-ar, au-di-a'-ris or -re, au-di-a'-tiir ; P. au-di-a'-mur, au-di-am'-i-ni, au-di-an'-tur. Imperfect. I might, could, would, or should hear. S. au-di'-rem, au-di'-res, au-di'-ret ; P. au-di-re'-mus, au-di-re'-tis, au-di'-rent. / might, could, would, or sn^dd be heard. S. au-di'-rer, au-di-re'-ris or -re, au-di-re'-tiir ; P. au-di-re'-mur, au-di-rem'-i-ni, au-di-ren'-tur. / may have heard. S. au-div'-e-rim, au-div'-e-rfs, au-div'-e-rit ; P. au-di-ver'-i-mus, au-di-ver'-i-tis, au-div'-e-rint. [ might, could, would, or should have heard. S. au-di-vis'-sem, au-di-vis'-ses, au-di-vis'-set ; P. au-di-vis-se'-mus, au-di-vis-se'-tis, ao-di-vis'-sent. Perfect. I may have been heard. ^ S. au-di'-tus sim or fu'-e-rim, au-di'-tus sis or fu'-e-rts, au-di'-tus sit or fu'-e-rit; P. au-di'-ti si'-mus or fu-er'-i-mu^ au-di'-ti si'-tis or fu-er'-i-lis, au-di'-ti sint or fu'-e-rint. Pluperfect. / might, could, toould, or should have been heard. S. au-di'-tus es'-sem or fu-is'-sem, au-di'-tiis es'-ses or fu-is'-ses, au-di'-tus es'-set or fu-is'-set; P. au-di'-ti es-se'-miis or fu-is-se'-mus^ au-di'-ti es-se'-tis or fii-is-se'-tis, au-di'-ti es'-sent or fu-is'-eent §160 VERBS. FOURTH CONJUGATION. 119 ACTIVE, PASSIVE. IMPERATIVE MOOD. Pres. S. au'-di, hear thou; P. au-di'-te, hea?- ye. Fut. S. au-di'-tS, thou shall hear, au-di'-to, he shall hear ; P. au-di-to'-te, ye shall hear, au-di-un'-to, they shall hear. Pres. S. au-di'-re, he th.u heard , P. au-dim'-i-ni, be ye heard, Fut. S. au-di'-tor, thou shall be heard, au-di'-tor, he shall be heard; P. (au-di-em'-i-ni, ye shall be heard,) au-di-un'-tor, they shall be heard. mPmiTIVE MOOD. Pres. au-di'-re, to hear. Per/, au-di-vis'-se, to have heard. Fut. au-di-tu'-rus es-se, to be about to hear. Pres. au-di'-ri, to be heard. Perf. au-di'-tus es'-se or fu-is'- se, to have been heard. Fut. au-di'-tum i'-ri, to be about to be heard. PARTICIPLES. Pres. au'-di-ens, hearing. Fut. au-di-tu'-rus, about to hear. Perf. au-di'-tus, heard. Fut. au-di-en'-diis, to be heard. G. D. Ac. Ab. GERUND. au-di-en'-di, of hearing. au-dl-en'-do, etc. au-di-en'-dum, ^ au-di-en'-do. ) SUPINES. Former, au-di'-tum, to hear. \ Latter, au-di'-tii, to he heard. Formation of the Tenses. V-1 From the first root, aud, are de- rived Ind. pres. imperf. ' — ./«'• Suhj. jyres. imperf. Imperal. pra fnt. Inf. pres. Part. pres. fd. Gerund. Active. audio, audteoajw, audiam, aud jam, audirewi, :. audi, audito, audire, audie/M, ayxAiendi. Passive. audior. axidiebar. auu/ar. audinr. audlrer. audire. auditor. audin. &ndie7idus. From the third rodi atuiRt, are derived, Passive. auditws sum, etc From the second root, atidlv, are derived. Active. Ind. perf . audivi, , _., plup. andiveram, auditMs eram, etc fut. perf audivero, auditus ero, etc. Sttbj. perf. audiverim, auditits sim, etc. plup. audivissem, auditMsessem,eto Inf. perf. audivisse, auditus esse, etc. From the third root. Inf. fut. auditurws esse, audltum iri. Part. fut. auditurus. perf. audittM. Form. sup. auditw)* Lat. sup. auditu. 120 DKPONENT VERBS. § 161 DEPONENT VERBS. § 161. Deponent verbs are conjugated like the passive voice, and have also all the participles and participial f'ormationa of the active voice. Neuter deponent verbs, however, want the future passive participle, except that the neuter in dum is some- times used impersonally. See § 184, 3. The following is an example of an active deponent verb of the first conjugation : — PRINCIPAL PARTS. Mi'-ror, mi-ra'-rl, mi-ra'-tus, to admire. INDICATIVE MOOD. Pres. mi'-ror, mi-ra'-ris, etc. I admire, etc. Imperf. mi-ra'-bar, etc. I was admiring. Fut. mi-ra'-bor, / shall admire. Perf. mi-ra'-tus sum or fu'-i, / have admired. Plup. mi-ra'-tus e'-ram or fu'-e-ram, / had admired. Fut. Perf. mi-ra'-tus e'-ro or fu'-e-ro, I shall have admired. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Pres. mi'-rer, mi-re'-ris, etc. / may admire, etc. Imperf. mi-ra'-rer, / would admire. Perf. mi-ra'-tus sim or fu'-e-rim, / may have admired. Plup. mi-ra'-tus es'-sem or fu-Is'-sem, / would have admired. IMPERATIVE MOOD. Pres. S. mi-ra'-re, admire thou ; Fut. S. mi-ra'-tor, thou shall admire, mi-ra'-tor, he shall admire ; P. mi-ram'-i-ni, admire ye. P. (mir-a-bim'-i-ni, ye shall, etc.^ mi-ran'-tor, they shall, etc. INFINITIVE MOOD. Pres. mi-ra'-ri, to admire. Perf. mi-ra'-tiis es'-se or fu-is'-se, to have admired. Fut. Act. mir-a-tii'-rus es'-se, to be about to admire. Fut. Pass, mi-ra'-tum i'-ri, to be about to be admired, PARTICIPLES. Pres. mi'-rans, admiring. Perf. mi-ra'-tus, having admired. Fut. Act. mir-a-tii'-rus, about to admire. Fut. Pass, mi-ran'-diis, to be admired. GERUND. G. mi-ran'-di, of admiring, etc. SUPINES. Former ml-ra'-tum^ U. admire. \ Latter, mi-ra'-tu, to be admired. § 162. verbs. — remarks on the conjugations. 121 Remarks on the Conjugations. Of the Tenses formed from the First Boot. § 103. 1. A few words in the present subjunctive of the first and third conjugations, in the earlier writers and in the poets, end in m, is, *, etc ; as, edim, eats, edit, ed'imus ; com&dim, coniedis, comldint; for edam, etc. comi- dam, etc.; dunn, dais, duii, duint; a-iid perduini, perduis, perduit, perduint ; for dew, etc. perdam, etc. from old forms duo and ptrduo, for do and ptrdo : so q'e~ ditis, creduii, and also creduam, creduas, creduui, for credam, etc. from the old form creduo, for credo. The form in iin, etc. was retained as the regular form in sitn and velim, from sum and volo, and ia their compounds. 2. The imperfect indicative in the fourth conjugation, sometimes, especially in the more ancient writers, ends tu ibam and ibar, for iebam and iebar, and the future in ibo and tbor, for iam and iar ; as, vesiibat, Virg., largibar, I'ropert. for vestiebat, largiebar ; scibo, opperlbor, for sdam, opperiar. Ibam and ibo were retained as the regular forms of eo, queo, and nequco. Cf. § 182. 3. The termuiation re, in the second person singular of the passive voice, ia •are in the present, but common in the other simple tenses. 4. The imperatives of dice, duco, facia, and f era, are usually written die, due, facj and fer ; in like manner their compounds, except those compounds of /d«o which change ointoi; as, efflce, conflce; but calf dee also is found in Cicero ; and in old writers dice, edice, add'ice, indice, duce, abduce, reduce, traduce. and face. Inger for ingere is rare. Scio has not sci, but its place is suppUed by scito, and scitote is preferred to sclte. 5. In the imperative futiu-e of the passive voice, but especially of deponents, early writers and their imitators sometimes used the active instead of the pas- sive form ; as, arbiirdio, amplexdto, utito, nittto ; for arbitrator, etc. ; and cen- senlo, utunto, tuento, etc. for censentor, etc. — In the second and third persons singular occur, also, forms in -mino ; as, hortamirw, veremino, fruimiiw ; for hortdior, etc. 6. The syllable er was often added to the present infinitive passive by early writers and especially by the poets ; as, amarier for amdri, dicier for dia. Of the Tenses formed from the Second Moot. 7. (a.) When the second root ends in d, a syncopation and contraction often occur in the tenses formed from it, by omitting v, and sinking the first vowel of the termination in the final vowel of the root, when followed, in the fourth conjugation, by s, and ia the other conjugations, by s or r ; as, audissem for audivissem, amasti for amavisti, imiMrunt for imptev^riuU, mram and nosse for noveram, and novisse. (b.) When the second root ends in iv, v is often omitted without contraction; as, audiero for atulivero ; audiisse for audixisse. (c.) When this root ends in s or a;, especially in the third conjugation, the Bj'llables is, its, and sis, are sometimes omitted in the teruiiuation of tenses de- rived from it; as, evasti for evaslsti, extinxti for extinxisti, divisse tor diviy$se ; extinxem for extinxxssem, surrexe for surrexisse ,• accestis for accestiistis, just* for jtissisii ; dixti for dixisti. So faxem for (facsiiicm, i. e. J fecissem. {d.) In the perfect of the first, second, and fourth conjugations, a syncope sometimes occurs in the last syllable of the root and the following syllable of the termination, especially intlie third person singular; as, ffa/idt, audit, cupit; for fumdvit, audlvit, cup'ivil. So, also, but rarely, in the first person; as, tepiU, enarrdmus ; for sepel'tvi, enarrdvimus. 8. In the third person plural of the perfect indicative active, the form in in 'jj leps common thm that in irunt, especially in prose. 11 122 VERBS. — RE5IARKS ON THE CONJUGATIONS. § 162. 9. Ancient forms of a future perfect in so, a perfect and pluperfect subjunc- tive in sim and sem, and a perfect infinitive in se sometimes occur. They may, in general, be foiTaed by adding these terminations to the second root of the verb ; as, recepso, emisdm, ausiin from the obsolete perfect, attsi, from audeo, confexim and promissem : divisse and prmnisse. But when the root ends in ar, and frequently when it ends in s, only o, im, em, and e, etc. are added ; as, jusso, dixis ; tntelhxes, percepset ; surrexe, surr.se. V, at the end of the root, in the first conjugation, is changed into s; as, levasso, locassim. U, at the end of the root, in the second conjugation, is changed into es; as,habesso, lices^. Sometimes the vowel of the present is retained in these forms, though changed in the other parts derived from the second root; as, capso, faxo (facso), faxim (facsim). Note. Faxo expresses detennination, ■ I will,' or, ' I am resolved, to make^ cause,' etc. The subjunctive faxit, etc., expresses a solemn wish; as, dii immoftdles frixint. Ausim, etc. express doubt or hesitation, ' I might ven- ture,' etc. The perfect in sim is used also in connection with the present sub- junctive; as, qucBso uti iu calamitdtes prohibessis, defendas, averruncesque. Gate. 10. In the ancient Latin a few examples occur of a future passive of simi- lar fbrm ; as, turbassUur, jussitur, instead of turbdtum faerit, and jussus fue- rit. — A future infinitive active in sere is also found, in the first conjugation, which is formed by adding that termination to the second root, changing, as before, v into s ; as, ex2m(jnassere, impetrassere, for expugnaturum esse, etc. Of the Tenses formed from the Third Root. 11. The supine in um, though called one of the principal parts of the verb, belongs in fact to very few verbs, the whole number which have this supine not amounting to three hundred. The part called in dictionaries the supine in um must therefore, in most cases, be considered as the neuter gender of the perfect participle. 12. In the compound tenses of the indicative and snbjiinctive moods, the participle is always in the nominative case, but it is used in both numbers, and in all genders, to correspond with the number and gender of the subject of the verb ; as, amdtus, -a, -um, est ; amdti, -$3id6ro, r. d. to desire. Destano, d. to design. Dico, irf. r. d. to dedicate. Dicto, to dictate. tDolo, to hew. Done, r. d. to bestow. Duplico, r. d. to double. Dure, r. to harden. tEff igio, to portray. tEnucleo, to explain. Eqiiito, to ride. Erro, to wander. Existimo, u. r. d. to think. Expluro, m. d. to search. Essiilo, m. r. to be ban- ished. Fabrico, d. to frame. jFatlgo, r. d. to weary. Festlno, r. to hasten. Firmo, r. d. to strengthen. Flagito, in. d. to demand. *Flagro, r. to be on fire. — conflagi'o, r. — deflagro. Flo, d. to blow. Formo, r. d. to form. Foro, d. to bore. tFraudo, d. to defraud. JFreno, to bridle. fFrio, — , to crumble. Fugo, r. d. to put to flight. fFundo, r. toyijJMkZ. tFurio, — , to madden. \ Galeo, — , to put on a helmet. Gesto, d. to bear. Glacio, — , to congeal. Gravo, d. to weigh down. Gusto, d. to taste. Hablto, m. d. to dwell. *Halo, — , to breathe. ' Hiemo, m. to winter. *Hio, d. to gape. \ hluLno, 1 . (1. to bury. Ignore, r. d. to be igno- rant of. Impero, r. d. to command. tlmpetro, r. d. to obtain. Inchio. " 'r begin Indago, r. d. to trace cat. Indico, m. r. d. to show. tluebrio, — , to inebriate. Liitio, to initiate. Inqulno, to pollute. lustauro, d. to renew. Intro, r. d. to enter. Invito, d. to invite. Irrito, r. d. to irritate. Itero, u. d. to do again. Jacto, r. d. to throw. Judico, r. d. to judge. Jugo, d. to couple. Jugulo, m. d. to buicher Juro, d. to swear. Laboro, r. d. to labor. Lacero, d. to tear. *Lacto, to suckle. tLanio, d. toteariiipiectt, Liitro, to bark. Laudo, r. d. to praise. Laxo, d. to loose. fLego, to depute. Levo, r. d. to lighten. Libiro, r. d. to free. Libo, d. to 2}our out. Ligo, to bind. tLiquo, d. to meU. Lito, to appease. Loco, r. d. to place. Lustro, d. to survey. Luxurio, to be luxuriant. Macto, d. to sacnfice. Jlaciilo, to spot, stain. ^lando, r. d. to command, JIaiidtico, to chew. *Mano, to flow. Jlatiiro, d. to ripen. Memoro, u. d. to tell. *]\Ieo, to go. *JIigro, u. r. d. to dfpai t *Milito, m. r. U) serve us 1 soldier tSIinio, d. to paint red. Ministro, d. to «ere6. Mitigo, d. to pacyy, Monstro, r to skou^ < tdemonstvo. d _ >luto, r. a. to riuiHf). The following verbs of the firet conjugation are eithel IrreiTular or defective. *Crepo, crepui, to make a noise. *dis- crOpo, -ui, or -avi. incrCpo, -ui or -avi, -itum or -atum. *tpercri po, — . *trecrcpo, — . ■^Cubo, cubui, {perf. suhj. cubaris ; inf. cubasse), cubitum (sup.), to recline. incubo, -ui or avi, d. Those com- poimds of cubo lohich take m before b, are cf the third conjugation. Do, u?di, datum, in. r. d. to give. — So cjrcumdA pessumdc, satfsdo, and venumdo ; {he other compimnds of do are of the third conjugation. Set j 163, Exc. 1. Domo, domui, domltiim, r. d. to tame. Frico, fricui, frictum or fricatum, d. to rub. confrico, — , -atiim. & inlri- CO. defrico_, — , -atum or -ctum. Juvo, juvi, jutum, r. d., also juvatu- rus, to help, adjuvo, -juvi, -jutum, m. r. d. also sdjuvatuiiis. *Labo, labasse, to to' ler. 128 VERBS. SECOND AND THIRD ROOTS. §166 Lavo, lavi, rar. lavavi, lavatum, lautura or lutum; (svp.) lautum or lavatum, lavatunis, d. lo wash. Lavo is also somelimes of tlie third coiijuyatiun. *Mico, micui, d. to (/litter. diin!co, -avi or -ui, -atiirus. *enuco, -ui, -atunis. *intermico, — . *proini- eo, — , d. N<'co, necavi or necui, necatum, r. d. to kill, eneco, -avi or -ui, -atum, or -chim, d. tintemeco, — , -atum. * [ Nexo, — , to tie. riico, — , plicatum, to foil, duplico, -avi, -atum, r. d. multipllco and re- plico have, -avi, -atum. *supplico, -avi, m. r. applTco, -.avi or -ui, -atum or -itiun, -iturus. So implico. — compUco, -ui, -itum or atum. explico, -avi or -ui, -atum or -itum, -atunis or -iturus. I'dto, potavi, potatum or potum, r. r. m. m. d. to drink, fepoto, -avi, -um. — *perpoto, -avi. SCco, secui, sectum, secaturus, d. to Remark 1. The principal irrej^ilarity, in verbs of the first and second con- jugations, consists in the omission of the connecting vowel in the second root, ami the change of the long vowels a and e in the third root into i. The v re- maining at the end of the second root, when it follows a consonant, is pro- nounced as u; as, cj/io, (aibdvi, by syncope cubvi), i. e. cuhui; {cubdtum, by change of the connecting vowel,) cubitum. Sometimes in the first conjugation, anil very frequentlj' in the second, the connecting vowel is omitted in the third root also; as, juvo, (are) juvi, jutum; t-eneo, (ere) tcnui, tentum. In the second conjugation several verbs whose general root ends in d and g, and a few others of liiliereiit terminations, form either their second or third root or both, like verbs of the third conjugation, by adding s ; as, rideo, risi, risum. Rem. 2. The verbs of the first conjugation whose perfects take a redu- plication arc do, sto, and their compounds. Rkm. 3. The following verbs in eoare of the first conjugation, viz. beo, calceo, creo, ciineo, cnucko, illOqiieo, coUlneo, delineo, 7neo, natiseo, screo ; eo and its com- pounds are of the fourth. § 166. All deponent verbs, of the first conjugation, are regular, and are conjugated like miror, § 161 ; as, cut. — *circumseco, — . *interseco — , d. *persOco, -ui. prroseco, -ui, -Xxvm. or -atum. So reseco, d. *S6no, soinii, -aturus, d. to sound. *cons6no, -ui. So ex-, in-, per-, pra;-s6no. *res6no, -avi. *ass6no, — . /SV) circumsono «nd dissono. *Sto, stOti, stiiturus, to stand. *an- testo, -stc-ti. So circumsto, intersto, supersto. — Its compounds with im>- nosyllabic prepositions have stiti; as, *consto, -stiti, -staturus. So ex- sto, insto, obsto, persto. *pra;sto, -stiti, -statiirus, d. *adsto or asto, -stiti, -stitiirus. *prosto, -stiti. So resto, restiti : but subj. perf. restiive- rit, Propert, 2, 34, 53. *disto, — . So substo and supersto. *T6no, tonui, to thunder. So circum- tono. attono, -ui, -itum. iutono, -ui, -atum. *ret6no, — . Veto, vetui, rarely avi, vetitum, to forbid. Abominor, d. to abhor. Adiilor, d. to flatter. iEmulor, d. to rival. Ancillor, tobeahamlmaid. ♦Apricor, to bask in the sun. Arbiti-or, r. d. to think. Aspemor, d. p. to despise. Auciipcr, r. p. to hunt after. Auxilior, p. to help. Aversor, d. to dislike. Bacchor, p to revel. Calumnior, to censure un^ fairly. Causor, to allege. *Coinissor, m. to revel. Comitor, p. to accompany. Concioiior, to harangue. *Confabulor, m. to con- verse together. Conor, d. to endeavor. •^Conspicor, to see. Contemplor, d. p. to view attentively. Criminor, m. p. to com- plnin of Cunctor, d. p. to delay. Deprecor, m. r. d. p. to deprecate. ' *tDigladior, to fence. Dignor, d. p. to deemwor- t)iy. Dominor, p. to rule. Epiilor, r. d. to feast. *Famulor, m. to wait on. Fatur, (defect.) u. d. p to speaJc. See § 183, 6. tFerior, r. to keep holiday. *Frmnentor, m. to for- age. Furor, m. to steal. Glurior, r. d. to boast. Gratulor, m. d. to eo* gratuliiie. §167. VFEBS. — SECOND AND THIRD ROOTS. 129 Hariolor, io practise sooth- saying. Hortor, d. to encmirage. Imitor, u. r. d. to imitate. Indigiior, d. to disdain. Infitior, d. to deny. Insector, io pursue. Insidior, r. d. to lie in wait for. Interpreter, p. to explain. Jaciilor, p. to hurl. Joe or, to Jest. Laetor, r. d. p. to rejoice. Lamentor, d. p. to oewail. *tLignor, m. to gather icood. Luctor, d. to wrestle. Medicor, i d. p. to heal. Meditor, p io meditate. Mercor, m. r. d. p. to buy. Minor, to threaten. Miror, u. r. d. to admire. Miseror, d. to pity. Moderor, u. d. to govern. Modulor, d. p. tomodttt:;ie. Moror, r. d. to delay. tMutuor, p. to borrow. Negotior, r. to traffic. *tNugor, to trijle. Obsonor, m. to cater. Obtestor, p. to beseech. Operor, to work. Opinor, u. r. d. to think. Opitulor, m. to help. t Otior, to be at leisure. Pabiilor, m. d. to graze. Palor, to wander about. Percontor, m. to inquire. Periclitor, d. p. to try. tPiscor, m. to Jish. Populor, r. d. p. to lay waste. Prasdor, ra. p. to plunder. Prc'cor, m. u. r. d. topi-ay. Proellor, to Jight. Recordor, d. to recollect. Rimor, d. to search. Rixor, to quarrel. *Rusticor, ,lo live in tha ccnintry. Sciscitor, m. p. to inquire. *ScItor, m. to ask. Scrutor, p. to search. Solor, d. to comfort. Spatior, to walk about. Speculor, m. r. d. to spy out. tStipulor, p. to bargain, stipulate. tSuavior, d. to kiss. Suspicor, to suspect. Testificor, p. to testify. Tester, d. p. to testify, da detestor. Tutor, to defend. Vagor, to wander. Veneror, d. p. to venerate, worship. Venor, m. p. to hunt. Versor, to be employed. Vocif eror, to bawl. Note. Some deponents of the first conjugation are derived from nouns, and signify being or practising that which the noun denotes; as, ancillari, to be a handmaid ; hariolari, to practise soothsaying ; from ancilla and hai'i/ius. SECOND CONJUGATION. § 167. Verbs of the second conjugation end in eo, and form their second and third roots in u and U ; as, moneo, monm, monitum. The following hst contains most of the regular verbs of this conju- gation, and many also which want the second and third roots : — *Aceo, to he sour. *jEgi-eo, — , to be sick. *A]beo, — , to be while. *Arceo, d. to drive aicay; part. ad), arctus or ar- tu8. The compounds change a into e; as, coerceo, d. to restrain. exeroso, r. d. to exer- ciie. =* Ajeo, to be dry. *Aveo, — , to covet. *Crileo, r. to he warm. *Calleo, — , to be harden- ed. *percalleo, to know well. *Calveo, — , to be &♦ M. *Candeo. to be white, *Caneo to be hoary. *Caveo, r. d. to want. * Cuvjo — , toftion. *Clareo, — , to be bright. *Clueo, — , to be famous. *Denseo, — , to ifiicken. *DLnbeo, — , to sort the voting tablets. *D61eo, r. d. to grieve. *Egeo, r. to want. *Ernlneo, to rise above. *Flacceo, to droop. *Flaveo, — , to be yellow. *Fir)reo, to blossom. *F«teo, — , to be fetid. *Fn2;oo, — , to be cold. *Frondeo, — , to bear leaves. Habeo, r. d. to have. The compounds, except post- hiibeo, change a iiito I ; as. ad-, ex-, pro-hibeo. cohlbeo, d. to restrain. inhlbeo, d. to kinder. *tperhibeo,d. to report. tposthabeo, to postpone. prsebeo, {for prsehlb- eo), r. d. to afford. *pr3ehIbeo, — . debeo, {for dehabeo), r. d. (A owe. *Hebeo, — , to he dull. *Horreo, d. to be rough. *Humeo. — . to be moist. *Jaceo, r. to lie. *Lacteo, — , to suck. *Langueo, — , to befaini *L;"lteo, to lie hid. *Lenteo, — , to be slow. *Liceo, to be valued. *Liveo, — , to be livid. *Jiriceo, — , to be lean. *JIadeo, to be wet. *Ma2reo, — , to grieve. Mtreo, r. to deserve. 130 VERBS. — SECOND AND THIRD ROOTS. §168 tcommSreo, to fully de- serve, fdemereo, d. to earn, temereo, tosfr«e out one'' s time. *tper- mereo, — , to go through service, promfireo, to deserve. Moneo, r. d. to advise. admoneo, m. r. d. to re- mind, commoueo, to impress upon, prsemo- neo, to forewarn. *Muceo, — , to be mmddy. *Nigreo, — , to he black. *Nlteo, to shine. Noceo, m - to hurt. *01eo, to smell. *Palleo, to be pale. *Pareo, m. r. d. to obey. *Pateo, to be open. Placeo, io pilease. *Polleo, — , to be able. *Puteo, to stink. *Putreo, to be jmtrid. *Ren!deo, — , to glitter. *RTgeo, to be stiff. *Ru)3eo, to be red. *Scateo, — , to qush forth. *Seueo, — , tooe old. *S31eo, d. to be silent. *Sordeo, — , to be filthy. *Splendeo, — , to shine. *Squaleo, — , to be foul. *Strideo, — , to creak. *Studeo, d. to study. *Stupeo, to be amazed. *Sueo, — , to be i>.'«<. Taceo, r. d. to be s:,lent. *Tepeo, to be warr^. Terreo, d. to terrify. So deterreo, to deter, tab- sterreo, to deter, fcon- terreo, fexterreo, tper-- teiTCO, to frighten. *Timeo, d. to fear. *Torpeo, — , to be stiff. *Tumeo, to swell. *Valeo, r. to be able. *Vegeo, — , to arouse. *Vieo, — , to plait. Pa. vietus, shriveled. *Vigeo, to founsh. *Vireo, to be green. *Uveo, — , to be moist. § 168. The following verbs of the second conjugation are ir- regular in their second or third roots or in both. Note 1. As the proper foiTa of verbs of the first conjugation is, o, dvi, dtum, of the fourth io, Ivi, Hum, so that of the second would be eo, evi, etum. Very few of the latter conjugation, however, retain this form, but most of them, aa noticed in § 165, Eeni. 1, drop in the second root the connecting vowel, e, and those in veo drop i;e ,■ as, cdveo, (cdvevi) cdvi, (cavitum or cavltum) cautuni. Others, imitating the form of those verbs of the third conjugation whose gen- eral root ends in a consonant, add s to form the second and third roots. Cf. \ 165, Rem. 1,- and §171. Note 2. Four verbs of the second conjugation take a reduplication in the parts formed from the second root, viz. mordeo, pendeo, spondeo, and tondeo. See § 163, Rem. Aboleo, -evi, -itum, r. d. to efface. *A]geo, alsi, to be cold. Ardeo, arsi, arsum, r. to burn. Audeo, ausus sum, {rarely ansi, whence ausim, § 183, R. 1,) r. d. to dare. Augeo, auxi, auctum, r. d. to increase. Caveo, cavi, cautum, m. d. to beware. Censeo, censui, censum, d. to think. recenseo, -ui, -um or -itum. *per- ceuseo, -ui. *succenseo, -ui, d. Cieo, civi, citum, to excite. There is a cognate fwjn, cio, cf the fourth conjicgation, both of the simjde verb and of its compounds. The penult of the participles excitus and concitus is coimnon, and that of accitus is al- ways long. *Conniveo, -nivi, to wink at. Deleo, -evi, -etam, d. to blot out. Poceo, docui, doctum, d. to teach. *Faveo, favi, fautunis, (o favor. *Ferveo, ferbui, to buil. Sometimes fervo, vi, of the third conjugation. Fleo, flevi, itetum, r. d. to weep. F6\so,fdvi, fOtum, d. to cherish. *Fulgeo, fulsi, to sAiwe. Fulgo, ofth* third conjugation, is also in use. Gaudeo, gavisus siun, r. to rejoicts. § 142, 2. *Ha3reo, hsesi, hassurus, to stick. 8* ad-, CO-, in-, ob- hsereo; but *subha- reo, — . Indulgeo, indulsi, indultum, r. d. to i» dulge. Jiibeo, jussi, jussum, r. d. to order. *Liiceo, luxi, to shine, polliiceo, -luxi -luctum. *Lugeo, luxi, d. to mourn. *Maneo, mansi, mansum, m. r. d. 4 remain. Misceo, miscui, mistum or mixtum. misturus, d. to mix. Mordeo, momordi morsum, d. to bite. remordeo, -di, -morsum, r. Moveo, movi, raotum, r. d. to Tnove. Mulceo, raulsi, mulsum, d. to soo*he. permuiceo, pennulsi, permulsura an gently. *Mulgeo, mulsi m- muJxi, to mtlk. euiulgeo, — , emulsum, to mtlk out. § 169-171. VERBS. SECOND AND XniRD ROOTS 131 Neo, nevi, netuin, to spin. *Paveo, pavi, d. to fear. ♦Peiiileo, pepeudi, to har.g. *hiipen- deo, — . propendeo, — , proijeiisum. Pleo, (oSsoktt). compleo, -evi, -eturn, to till. So (he other compounds. Prandeo, pr:iiidi, pransuni, r. to dine. Rideo, risi, nsum, m. r. d. to laugh. *SC'deo, sedi, sessum, m. r. to sit. The compounds loilh inonosyllabic pre- positions change e into i, in the first root ; as, iusideo, insedi, insessum. *dissideo, -sildi. So prsesideo, and rarely circumsideo. Soleo, solitus sum atid rarely solui, to be accustomed. § 142, 2. ♦ Sorbeo, sorbui, to suck in. So *ex- sorbeo : but *resorbeo, — . *absor- beo, -sorbui or -sorpsi. Spondeo, spopondi, sponsini x> pro mise. See ^ 163, Rem. *StrIdeo, idi, to whiz. Suadeo, suasi, suasuin, r. d. io advise Teneo, ttuui, teutum, r. d. to hold. Thf compouiuls change e into i in the first and secimd roots ; as, detineo, deti- nui, detentum. *attineo, -tiiiui. Sc pertineo. Tergco, tersi, tersum, to wipe. Tergo, of the third conjugation, is also in use. Tondeo, totondi, tonsum, to shear. The ccnnpcmnds have the perfect tondi. Torqueo, torsi, tortum, d. io twist. Ton-eo, torrui, tostum, to roast. *Turgeo, tursi, to swell. *Uvgeo or urgueo, ursi, d. to urge. Video, vidi, visum, m. u. r. d. to see, Voveo, vovi, votum, d. to vow. § iGO. Impersonal Verbs of the Second Conjugation. Decet, decuit, it becomes. Libet, libuit or libitum est, it pleases, is agreeable. Licet, licuit or licitimi est, it is lawful, or permitted. Liquet, liquit, it is clear, evident. MisOret, miseruit or miseritum est, it moves to pity ; miseret me, I pity. Oportet, oportuit, it behooves. Note. Lubet is sometimes written for Piget, piguit or pigitum est, d. it trou- bles, grieves. Pcenitet, pcenituit, pcenitiirus, d. it re- pents; pcenitet me, I regret. Pudet, puduit or puditum est, d. ; t( shames ; pudet me, / am ashamed. Tsedet, taeduit or tsesum est, it disgusts or wearies, pertasdet, pertaesum est. libet, especially in the comic writers. § ITO. Deponent Verbs of the Second Conjugation. Fateor, fassus, r. d. p. to confess. The compounds change a into i in the first root, and into e tn the third ; as, con- flteor, confcssus, d. p. to ac/cnowl- edge. *tdift'iteor, to deny, profi- teer, professus, d. p. to declare. Liceor, licitus, to bid a price. *M6deor, d. to cure. llOreor, meritus, to deserve. Misereor, miseritus or misertus, to pity. PoUiceor, poUicitus, p. to promise. Reor, ratus, to think, suppose. Tueor, tuitus, d. p. to protect. Vereor, veritus, d. p. to fear. THIRD CONJUGATION. § 171. Li the third conjugation, when the first root ends with a consonant, the second root is regularly formed by adduig s ; when it ends with a vowel, the first and second roots are the same : the thii-d root is formed by adding t ; as, cai-po, carpst, ^ai-ptMrn ; arguo, argu?, argut^^m. In annexing s and t, certain changes occur in the final consonant of the root : — 1. The palatals c, g, qu, and also h, at the end of the first root, form with i tho double letter x in the second root; in the third root, c remains, and the others are changed into c i ilore t; iis, dico, {dicsi, i. e.), dijci, dictum; regq (regsi, i. e.), rexi, rectum; velio, vexi, rectum ; c6quo, coxi, coctum. 132 VERBS. — SECOND AND THIRD ROOTS. §171 Note. Fltio and st^ruo form their second and third roots after the analogy of verbs whcse first root ends in a palatal or h. 2. B is changed into p before s and t ; as, scrlbo, scrijjsi, sciiptum. 3. D and t, before s, are either dropped, or changed iiito s ; as, claudo, claud; cedo, cessi; inilto, misi. Cf. § 56, I, Kera. 1. After m, p is sometimes inserted before s and t ; as, sumo, sutnpsi, sumptum. R is changed to s before s and t in giro and uro. 4. Some other consonants are dropped, or changed into s, in certain verbs. Exc. 1. Many verbs whose first root ends in a consonant, do no! add s to form the second loot. (a.) Of these, some have the second root the same as the first, but the vowel of the second root, if a monosyllable, is long ; as, Bibo, Exciido, Ico, Mando, Scabo, Solvo, Verro, Edo, Fodio, Lambo, Prehendo, Scando, Strido, Verto, Emo, Fiigio, Lego, PsaUo, Sido, ToUo, Volvo; to which add the compounds of the obsolete cando, fendo, and nviO. (h.) Some make a change in the first root. Of these, some change a vowel, some drop a consonant, some prefix a redupKcation, others admit two or more of these changes ; as. Ago, egi. Capio, cepi. Facio, feci. Findo, fidi. Frango, fregi. Fundo, fudi. Jacio, jeci. Linquo, liqui. Eumpo, rupi. Scindo, scidi. Sisto, stiti. Vmco, vici. Those which have a reduplication are Cado, cecidi. Csedo, cecidi. Cano, cecini. Curro, cucurri. Disco, didlci. FaUo, fefeUi. Pago, (ohs.) pepigi Parco, peperci. Pario, peperi. aiul pegi. Pedo, pepedi. Pello, pepiili. Pendo, pependi. Posco, poposci. Pungo, pupugi. Tango, tetigi. Tendo, tetendi. Tundo, tiitudi. Exc. 2. Some, after the analogy of the second conjugation, add u to the first root of the verb ; as, Alo, alui, etc. Consiilo, Gemo, Eapio, Tremo, Colo, Depso, Geno, (oSs.) Strepo, Volo, Compesco, Fremo, Molo, Texo, Vomo. Meto, messui ; and pono, posui ; add «m, with a change in the root. Exc. 3. The following, after the analogy of the fourth conjugation, ftdd w to the first root : — Arcesso, Cupio, Lacesso, Riido, Tero, dropping e. Capesso, Incesso, Peto, Quajro, vAili a change ofx into s. Exc. 4. The following add v, with a change in the root; those in no and $co dropping n end sc, and those having er before n changing it to ?'g or ra, : — Cresco, Pasco, Scisco, Spemo, Lino, Sero, Nosco, Quiesco, Cemo, Stemo, Sino, toscno. Exc. 5. (a.) The third root of verbs whose first root ends in d or t, and some in g, add s, instead of t, to the root, either dropping the d, t, Aivl g, or changing them intos; as, claudo, clausum; defendo, de fensmn; cedo, ce.'fsum ; Jlecto, Jlexum, ; figo, fixum. But the com- pounds of lo add li; as, perdo, perdilum. §172. VERBS. — SECOND AND THIRD ROOTS. 138 (6.) The following, also, add s, with a change of the root : — ■ Excello, Fallo, Pello, Spargo, Verro. Percello, Mergo, Premo, Velio, Exc. 6. The following add t, with a change of the root ; those having n, nc, ng, nqu, or tnp at the end of the first root dropping n and 771 in the third : — Cemo, Fingo, Gero, Sero, Spemo, Stringo, Uro, Colo, Frango, Kumpo, Sisto, Stemo, Tero, Vinco; to which add the compounds of linquo, and verbs in sco with the second roo< in v; the latter drop sc before to prit forth shoots. *Gelasco, — , s. to freeze. So *cong6- lasco, s. to congeal. *Gemisco, — , s. to begin tc sigh. *Gemmasco, — , to begin to bud. *Generasco, — , s. to be produced, *Grandesco, — , to grow large. *Gra,vesco, — , to grow heavy. *H3eresco, — , s. to adhere. *Hebesco, — , s. to grow duU. *Horresco, horrui, s. to grow rough. *Hiimesco, — , s. to grow moist. *Ignesco, — , to become inflamed. *Ind61esco, -dolui, d. to be grieved. *Ins61esco, — , to become haughty. *Integrasco, — . to be renewed. *Juvenesco, — , to grow young. *Languesco, langui, s. to grow languid. *Lripidesco, — , to become stone. *Latesco, — , to grow broad. *Latesco, tobe concealed, s. *delit<»co -lltui ; *oblitesco, -litui. *Lentesco, — , to become soft. *Liquesco, — , s. to become liquid *deliquesco, -licui. *Liicesco, — , 9. to arow light, to daton *Liitesco, — , s. to cecome muddy. *Macesco, -, s. K ^^^ *Macresco, — ) ^ *remacresco, -macrui. *Miidesco, m^dui, s. to grow moist. 138 VERBS. — SECOND AND THIRD ROOTS. §174. *Marcesco, — , s. to pine away. *Maturesco, maturui, to ripen. *Miseresco, miserui, s. to pity. *Mitesco, — , to g7-ow mild. *Mollesco, — , to grow soft. ♦Mutesco, — , to become dumb. *ob- mutesco, obmiitui. *Nigresco, nigrui, s. to grow black. *Nltesco, nitui, s. to grow bright. *N6tesco, notui, to become hnaim. *Obbmtesco, — , to become brutish. ♦Obdormisco, — , s. to fall asleep. *Obsurdesco, -surdui, to grow deaf. *OccaUesco, -callui, to become callous. *01esco, (scarcely used.) *rvb61esco, -olevi, s. to cease, adolesco, -olevi, -ultum, 8. to gi-ow up. ex61esco, -olevi, -oletum, to grow out of date. So obsolesco. inolosco, -olevi, -611- tum, d. to g7-ow in or on. *Pallesco, pallui, s. to grow pale. *Patesco, patui, s. to be opened. *Pavesco, pavi, s. to grow fearful. *Pertimesco, -timui, d. to fear greatly. *Pinguesco, — , to grow fat. *Pubesco, — , to come to maturity. *Puerasco, — , to become a boy. *Putesco, — , 8. K jg^^^g j^^_ *Putresco, — , s. ) _ -^ *Raresco, — , to become thin. *Eeslpisco, -sipui, 8. to recover one's senses. *P.igesco, rTgui, s. to grow cold. *Rubesco, rubui, s. to grow red. *erii- besco, -rubui, d. § 174. Deponent Verbs of the Third Conjugation. *Sanesco, — , to become sound. *con sauesco, -sanui. *Seiiesco, senui, s. d. to grow old. 8c consenesco. *Seutisco, — , s. to perceive. *Siccesco, — , to become dry. *Silesco, sllui, s. to groio silent. *S61idesco, — , to become solid. *Sordesco, sordui, s. to become filthy. *Splendesco, splendui, s. to becomt bright. *Spiimesco, — , to begin to foam. *Sterilesco, — , to become barren. *Stiipesco, stupui, s. to become asUm ished. Suesco, suevi, suetum, s. to become ac- customed. *Tabesco, tabui, s. to waste axoay. *Teiu'resco and -asco, — , to become tender. *Tepesco, tepui, s. to grow warm. *Torpesco, torpui, s. to grow tmpid. *Tremisco, — , s. to begin to tremble. *Tumesco, tumui, s. | ^^ i,egin to sweU. *Turgesco, — , s. ) ^ *Uvesco, — , to become moist. *Valesco, ^, s. to become strong. *Vaxiesco, — , S) vanish. *evanesco, evanui. *VettTasco, veteravi, to grow old. *Viresco, virai, s. to grow green. *Vivesco, vixi, s. to come to life. *r6- vivisco, -vixi. Apiscor, aptus, to get. The compounds change a into i in the first root, and into e in the third; as, adlpiscor, adeptus. So iudlpiscor. Expergiscor, expen-ectus, to awake. *Fatiscor, to yo/je or crack open. The compouiuls change a into e; as, defe- tiscor, -fessus. Fruor, fruitus or fructus, frultiirus, d. to enjoy. Fungor, functus, r. d. to jjerform. Gradior, grcssus, to walk. The com- pounds mange a into e ; as, aggredior, aggressus, r. d. Inf jtres. aggredi oMc/aggrediri ; so, progredi ajici progi-e- dSri ; and pres. ind. egreditur. Plant. *Irascor, to be angry. Labor, lapsus, r. to fall. * Liquor, to melt, fiow. Loquor, locutus, r. d. to speak. Miiiiscor, [obsolete.) cominlniscor, com- meutus, p. to invent. *reniIniscor, to remvnoer. Morior, (mori, rarely raonr'i,) mortuus, moriturus, d. to die. So emoiiri, Plavt. for emori. Nauciscor, nactus or nauctus to obtain. Nascor, natus, nascitui^us, u. to be boi-n. Nitor, nixus or uisus, nisurus, to lean upon. Obliviscor, oblitus, d. p. to foi-get. Paciscor, pactus, d. to bargain. So depaciscor. Patior, passus, r. d. to suffer, perpetior -pessus. From plecto, to tvjine, come, ampleo« tor, amplexus, d. p. complector, com- plexus, p. So circumplector. Proficiscor, profectus, r. to depart. _ Qucror, questus, m. u. d. to complain. *Riiigor, to snarl. Sequor, secutiis, r. d. to follow. Tuor, tutus, to protect. *Vescor, d. to eat. Ulciscor, ultus, ra. d. p. to avenge. Utor, usus, r. d. to use. § 175, 176. VERBS. SECOND AND THIRD ROOTS. 139 Note. Drvertor, prczvertor, revertor, compounds of verto, are used as depo- nents in the present and imperfect tenses; recenor also, sometimes, in the perfect. FOURTH CONJUGATION. § 175. Verbs of the fourth conjugation regularlj form their second root in iv, and their thu'd in it ; as, audVo. audiv^■J au- (iMum. The following list contains most regular verbs of this conjuga- tion : — Audio, -ivi or -ii, m. u. r. d. to hear. *Cio, civi, to excite. Ct. cieo, § 168. Condio, -ivi or -ii, to season. Custodio, -ivi or -ii, d. to guard. *Dormio, -ivi or -ii, m. r. d. to skep. Eriidio, -ivi or -ii, d. to instruct. Expedio, -ivi oi- -ii, d. to disentangle. Finio, -Ivi or -ii, r. d. to jinish. *Gestio, -ivi w -ii, to exult; desire. Impedio, -ivi or -ii, r. d. to entangle. Insanio, -ivi or -ii, to be mad. Irretio, -ivi or ii, to ensnare. Lenio, -ivi or ii, d. to mitir/ate. Mollio, -ivi or -ii, d. to so/ten. *Mugio, -ivi or -ii, to bellow. Miinio, -ivi or -ii, r. d. to fm-tify. Miitio, -ivi, to mutter. Niitrio, -ivi or -ii, d. to nourish. Partio, -ivi or -ii, r. to divide. Polio, -i%-i, d. to jwUsh. Piiuio, -ivi or -ii, d. to ^yunish. Eedimio, -ivi, to crown. Scio, -ivi, u. r. to know. Servio, -ivi or -ii, m. r. d. to serve. Sopio, -ivi or -ii, to lidl asleej). Stabilio, -ivi or -ii, to establish. Tinnio, -ivi or -ii, r. to tinkle. Vestio, -ivi or -ii, to clothe. § 170. The following list contains those verbs of the fourth con- jugation which form their second and third roots irregularly, and those which want either or both of them. Remark. The prmcipal irregularit^i- in verbs of the fourth conjugation arises from following the analogy of those verbs of the third conjugation whose first root ends in a consonant ; as, 'sepio, sejysi, septum. A few become irregular by syncope ; as, venio, veni, ventum. Amicio, -ui or -xi, amictum, d. to clothe. *Balbiitio, — , to stammer. Bullio, ii, itum, to bubble. *Gfficiitio, — , to be dim-sighted. *Cambio, — , to exchange. *Dementio, — , to be mad. Effutio, — , to babble. lilo, ivi or ii, itum, r. d. to go. The compounds have only ii in the perfect, except obeo, praeo, antf siibeo, which have ivi or ii. All the compouiuls icant the supine and perfect participles, except adeo, ambio, ineo, obeo, pras- tereo, subeo, circumeo or circuco redeo, transeo, and *tveneo, venii r. {from venum eo), to be sold. Farcio, farsi, fartum or farctum, tt cram. The compounds generallif change a to e; as, refercio, -fersi, -fertum, but con- and sf-, -farcio and -fercio. Fastidio, -ii, -itum, d. to loathe. ♦Feiio, — , d. to st-ike. *Ferocio, — , to be fierce. Fulcio, fulsi, fultum, d. to prop up. *Gannio, — , to yelp, bark. *Gir)cio, -;7, to cluck as a hen. *Gliitio, ivi, or gliitii, to swallow. Grandio, — , to make great. *Grumiio, grunnii, to grunt. Haurio, hausi, rar. liaurii, haustum, rar. hausituni, hausturus, hansiirus, u. d. to draw. *Hinnio, — , to neigh. *Ineptio, — , to trijle. *Lascivio, lascivii, to be wanton. *Ligurio, Ugiirii, to feed delicately. *Lippio, — , r. to be blear-eyed. *Obedio, obedii r. to obey. Pario is of the third conjugation, but its compounds are oftkejourth, changing & to e; as, apC-rio, aperui, apertum, r. d. to open. So optrio, d. compCrio comperi, compertum, rarely dep. coniperior, to Jind out. So reperio r. d. 140 IRREGULAR VERBS. 177, 178. PaTio, — , pavitum, to beat. *Prurio, — , to itch. Queo, quivi or quii, quitum, to be able. So *nequeo. *Raucio, — , r. to be hoarse. *Rugio, — , to roar as a lion. Ssevio, ssevii, itum, r. to rage. *Sagio, — , to perceive keenly. *Salio, salui or siilii, to leap. The compcyunds changed into I; as, *absi- lio, — . So circumsilio. *assilio, -ui. So dissilio, insilio. *desilio, -ni or -ii. Bo exsilio, resilio, subsilio. *transll- io, -ni or -Ivi, d. So prosilio. Saiio, — , Itum, r. d. to salt. Sancio, sanxi, sancitum or sanctum, d. to ratify, sanction. Note. Deslderative verbs want both the second and third roots, except these three ; — ^esUrio, — j esuritus, r. to desire to eat ; ^nuptimo, -im, to desire to marry; *pariurio, -Im, to be in travail. See 4 187, II. 3. Sarcio, sarsi, sartuin, d. to patch. Sarrio, -ivi or -ui, sarritum, d. to weed, hoe. *iScatiirio, — , to gush out. Sentio, sensi. sensum, r. to yeel. Sepelio, sept livi w -ii, rar. scpeli, sft pultum, r. (L to bury. SSpio, sepsi, septum, d. to hedge in, *Singultio, — -, to sob, hiccup. *Sitio, sitii, to thirst. Suffio, -ii, -itiim, d. to fumigate. *Tussio, — , to cough. *Vagio, vagii, fo cry. Venio, veni, ventum, r. to come. Viucio, vinxi, vinctum, r. d. to bind. iTT. Deponent Verbs of the Fou7ih Conjugation. Assentior, assensus, r. d. p. to assent. Blandior, blanditus, to flatter. Largior, largitus, p. to give, bestow. Mentior, mentltus, r. p. to lie. Metior, meusus w metitus, d. p. to vieaswe. Molior, molitus, d. to strive, toil. Ordior, orsus, d. p. to begin. Orior, ortus, oriturus, d. to spring up. Except in the jtresent infinitive, this verb seems to be of the third conjuga- tion. Perior, {obs. whence peritus.) perior, expertus, r. d. to try. rior, oppertus or opperttus, wait for. Partior, partitas, d. to divide. Potior, potitus, r. d. to obtain, In the poets the present indicative~and imperfect subjunctive are sometimes of the third conjugation. Sortior, sortitus, r. to cast lots. ex- oppe- d. to enjoy. IRREGULAR VERBS. § 178. Irregular verbs are such as deviate from the com- mon forms in some of the parts derived from the fii'st root. They are sum, volo, fero, edo, fio, eo, queo, and their compounds. Sum and its compounds have akeady been conjugated. See § 153. In the conjugation of the rest, the parts which are in-eguhir are fully exhibited, but a synopsis only, of the other parts is, in general, given. Some parts of vob) and of its compounds are wanting. 1. Volo is irregular only in the present of the indicative and infin- itive, and in the present and imperfect of the subjunctive. Remark. It is made irregular partly by syncope, and partly by a change in the vowel of the root. In the present uifinitive silso and in the imperfect sub- junctive, after e was dropped, r following I was changed into t; as, veiert (velre) »eZfe ; veUrem (yeike^m.) vdlem. * Pres. Indie. Pres. Infin. Perf. India. vo'-lo, vel'-le, v61'-u-i, to he willing, to wish. § 178. IRREGULAR VERBS. lil INDICATIVE. Pres. S. v6'-lo, vis, vult ; Per/. vol'-u-i. P. vol'-u-mus, vul-tis, vo'-lunt. Plup. v6-lu'-e-ram Jmperf. v6-le'-bam, v6-le'-bas, etc. Put. perf. v6-lu'-e-r5. Fut. vo'-lam, vo'-les, etc. SUBJUNCTIVE. Pres. S. ve'-lim, ve'-lis, ve'-lit; Per/. v6-lu'-e-rim. P. Tfe-fi'-mus, ve-li'-tis, ve -lint. Plup. vol-u-is'-sem. Imperf. S. vel'-lem, vel'-les, vel'-let; P. vel-le'-miis, vel-le'-tis, vel'-lent. INFINITIVE. PARTICIPLE. Pres. vel'-le. Pres. vo'-lens. Perf. v6l-u-is'-se. Note. VoU and voltxs, for vuU and vuHis, and vm\ for visne are found in Plau- tu8 and other ancient authors. 2. Nolo is compounded of the obsolete ne (for non^ and volo. The V of volo after ne is dropped, and the vowels (e o) are contracted into 0. Pres. Indie. Pres. Infin. Perf. Indie. no'-lo, nol'-le, nol'-u-i, to he unwilling. INDICATIVE. Pres. S. no'-lo, non'-vis, non'-vult; Perf nol'-u-i. P. nol'-u-mus, non-vul'-tis, no'-lunt. Plup. no-lu'-e-ram. Imperf. no-le'-bam, -bas, -bat, etc. Fut. pjerf. no-lu'-ero. Fut. uo'-lam, -les, -let, etc. SUBJUNCTIVE. Pres. S. no'-lim, no'-lis, no'-lit; Perf no-lu'-e-rim. P. no-li'-mus, no-li'-tis, no'-lint. Plup. nol-u-is'-sem. Imperf. S. nol'-lem, nol'-les, nol'-let ; P. nol-le'-mus, nol-le'-tis, nol'-lent. IMPERATIVE. Present. Future. Sing. 2. no'-li ; Plur. no-li-te. Sing. 2. no-li-to, Plur. nol-i-to'-te, 3. no-li'-to; no-lun'-to INFINITIVE. PARTICIPLE. ' Pres-. nol'-le. Pres. no'-Iens. Perf. nol-u-is'-se. NoTK. In norths, no'i-vult, etc. of the present, noii takes the place of ne, bal n«tn8 ard nevolt also occur in Plautus. 142 IRREGULAR VERBS. §179 3. Malo is compounded of magis and volo. In composition mSflis drops its final syllable, and volo its u. The -vowels (do) are then contracted into a. Pres. Indie. Pres. Infin. Perf. Indie. ma'-lo, mal'-le, mal'-u-i, to prefer. INDICATIVE. Pres. S. ma'-lo, ma'-vis, ma-vult; Pcrf. mal'-u-i. P. mal'-u-mus, ma-vul'-tis, ma'-lunt. Plup. ma-lu'-e-rani Imperf. ma-le'-bam, -has, etc. Put. perf. ma-lu'-e-ro. Fut. ma'-lam, -les, etc. SUBJUNCTIVE. Pres. S. ma'-lim, ma'-lis, ma -lit; Perf. ma-lu'-e-rim. P. ma-li'-mus, ma-li'-tis, ma'-lint. Pluj:/. mal-u-is'-sem. Imperf. S. mal'-lem, mal'-les, mal'-let ; P. mal-le'-mus, mal-le'-tis, mal'-lert. INFINITIVE. Pres. mal'-le. P<^rf mal-u-is'-se. NoTK. Mav6lo, mavdlunt ; mSvdlet ; mdvelim, mdvelis, mdvelit ; and mdveUem ; for mdlo, ■mdlunt, etc., occur in Plaatus. § 170. Fero is irregular in two respects:—!. Its second and third roots are not derived from the first, but from otherwise obsolete verbs, viz. tiilo for l(Mo, and tian, sup. tlalum, by aphaeresis, Icitwii : — 2. In the present infinitive active, in the imperfect subjunctive, and in certain parts of the present indicative and imperative,^ of both voices, tlie connecting vowel is omitted. In the present infinitive passive, r is doubled. ACTIVE VOICE. PASSIVE VOICE. Pres. Indie, f e'-ro, (to bear.) Pres. Indie, fe'-ror, (to be borne.) Pres. Infin. fer'-re, Pres. Infin. fer'-ri, Perf. Indie, tu'-li, Perf. Part, la'-tiis. Supine. la'-tum. INDICATIVE. Present. S f e'-ro, fers, fert ; fe'-ror, fer'-ris or -re, fer'-tiir ; F fer'-i-mus, fer'-tis, f e'-runt. f er'-i-miir, f e-rim'-i-ni, f e-run'~tm Tmperf. fe-re'-bam. Imperf. fe-re'-bar. Fut. f e'-ram, -res, efe. Fut. f e'-rar -re'-ris or -re'-re, e1a Perf. tu'-li. Pcrf la'-tus sum or fu'-i. Plup. tu'le-ram. Plup. la'-tus e'-rara or fu'-e-ram. Fut. perf. tu'-le-ro Fut. perf la'-tus e'-ro or fu'-e-rO. §180. IRREGULAR VERBS. lis Pres. fe'-ram, -raa, etc. hnperf. fer'-rem, -res, etc. Perf. tu'-Ie-rim. riup. tu-lis'-sem. SUBJUNCTIVE. Pres. f e'-rar, -pa'-ris or -tit re, etc. Imperf. fer'-rer, -re'-ris, etc. Perf. la'-tus sim or fu'-e-rim. Plup. , la'-tus es'-sem or fu-is'-sem. IMPERATIVE. Pres. S. fer, P. fer'-te. Pres. S. fer'-re, Fut. S. fer'-to, P. fer-to'-te, fer'-to; fe-run'-to. Fut. S. fer'-tor, fer'-tor. P. fe-rim'-i-ni. P. (fe-rem'-i-ni,^ fe-run'-tor. Pres. fer'-re. Per/, tu-lis'-se. Fut. la-^^'-^us es'-se. INFINITIVE. Pres. fer'-ri. Per/, la'-tus es'-se or fu-is' Fut. la'-tum i'-ri. PARTICIPLES. Pres. fe'-rens. Per/ la'-tus. Fut. la-tu'-rus. Fut. fe-ren'-dus. GERUND, fe-ren'-di, etc. SUPINES. Former, la'-tum. Latter, la'-tu. Note. In the comic writers the following rechiplicated forms are found in parts derived from the second root, viz. tetiUi, tetulisti, teiulii, tetulerunt ; tetuh'ro, ttlulerit; tetulissem, aud tetulisse. § 180. Flo, ' to become,' is properly a neuter verb of the third conjuf;ation, having only the parts derived from the first root; but it is used also as a passive of /acio, from which it takes those parts of the passive which are derived from the third root, together with the participle in du3. The infinitive present has been changed from the regular form Jiere to /en. Pres. Indie. Pi-es. In/n. Per/ Part. fi'-S, fi'-e-ri, fac'-tiis, to he made or to become. INDICATIVE. Pres. S. fi'-o, fis, fit ; Per/ fac'-tiis sum or fii'-i. P. fi-mus, Ti'-tls, fi'-unt. Plup. fac'-tiis e'-ram or fu'-e-raaa. TJw/^er/. fi-c'-bam, fi-e'-ba3,-eto. i^/.7;e»/. fac'-tus e'-r& or fu'-e-rS. Fut. fi'-am, fl'-es, etc. SUBJUNCTIVE. Preit fi'-am, fi'-as, etc. Imp. fi'-e-rem, -e'-res, etc. Per/ fac'-tiis sim or fu'-e-rim. Plup. fac'-tiis es'-sem or fu-is'-sem. 144 IRREGULAR VERBS. § 181. IMPERATIVE. INFINITIVE. Pres. Sing, fi ; Plur. fi'-te. Pres. f i'-e-ri. Perf. fac'-tus es'-se or fii-is'-sS. Fut. fac'-tum i'-ri. PARTICIPLES. * SUPINE. Perf. fac'-tus. Latter, fac'-tu. Fut. fa-ci-en'-dus. Note. The compounds o^facio which retain a, have alsoyjo in the passive; as, calefdcio, to warm ; passive, calefio ; but those which change a into » form the passive regular! v. (Cf. facio in the list, § 172.) Yet confii, defit, and inJU, twcur. See § 183, 12, 13, 14. § 181. Edo, to eat, is conjugated regularly as a verb of the third conjugation ; but in the present of the indicative, imperative, and infinriive moods, and in the imperfect of the subjunctive, it haa also forms similar to those of the corresponding tenses of sum: — Thus. INDICATIVE. Present. S. e'-do, e'-dis, e'-dit, (or es, est) ; P. ed'-i-mus, ed'-i-tis, e'-dunt. (or es'-tis), SUBJUNCTIVE. Imperfect. S. ed'-e-rem, ed'-e-res, ed'-e-ret, (or es'-sem, es'-ses, es'-set) ; P. ed-e-re'-mus, ed-e-re'-tis, ed'-e-rent, (or es-se'-mus, es-se'-tis, es'-sent). IMPERATIVE. Pres, S. e'-de, P. ed'-i-te, (or es ; es'-te). Fut. S. ed'-i-to, P. ed-i-to'-te, e-dun'-t^. (or es-to, es-to'-te). INFINITIVE. Pres ed'-e-re, (or es'-se). PASSIVE. Pres. ed'-i-tiir, (or es'-tiir). Imperf. ed-e-re'-tur, (or es-se'-tiir). Note, (a.) In the present subjunctive, edim, edi«, etc., are foimd, for gdam idds, etc. {b.) In the compounds of edo, also, fonns resembling those of sum ocoxa Ambido has the participles amhens and ambisus ; comedo has comesus, comesurus and rarely comestus ; and adcdo and exedo have adesus and exesus. § 182, 183. DKKKCTIVE VERBS. 146 . § 182. Eo is irregular in the parts which, in other verbs are formed from the first root, except the imperfect subjunctive and the present infinitive. In these, and in the parts formed from the second and third roots, it is a regular verb of the fourth conjugation Note. Eo has no first root, and the parts usually derived from that root, consist, in this verb, of terminations only. Pres. Indie. Pres. Injin. Perf. Indie. Perf. Part. e'-o, i'-re, i'-vi, I'-tum, to go. INDICATIVE. Pres. S e'-6, is, it ; Fut. i'-bo, i'-bis, i'-bit, etc. P. i'-miis, i'-tis, e'-unt. Per/. i'-vi, i-vis'-ti, i'-vit, etc. Imperf. S. i'-bam, i'-bas, i'-bat; Plup. iv'-e-rara, iv'-e-ras, etc. P. i-ba'-mijs, etc. Fut. perf. W-e-ro, iv'-e-rls, etc. SUBJUNCTIVE. Pres. e'-am, e'-as, e'-at, etc. P'ii'f. iv'-e-rim, iv'-e-ris, cto. Imperf. i'-rem, i'-res, i'-ret, etc. Plup. i-vis'-sem, i-vis'-ses, etc IMPERATIVE. INFINITIVE. Pres. S. i, P. i'-te. Pres. i'-re. Fut, 2. i'-tS, i-to'-te, Perf. i-vis'-se. 3. i'-to; e-un'-to. Fut. i-tii'-riia es'-sS. PARTICIPLES. GERUND. Pres. i'-ens, (jgen. e-un'-tis.) e-un'-di, Fut. i-tii'-riis, a, um. e-un'-do, etc. Remark 1. In some of the compounds the forms earn, ies, iet occur, thouj^ rarely, in the future; as, redeam, redies, abiet, exiet, proaienl. Istis, issetn, and isae, are formed by contraction for ivistis, ivissein, and ivisse. See ^ 162, 7. Rem. 2. In the passive voice are found the infinitive hi, and the third per- sons singular Itur, ibdlur, ibitur, itum est, etc. ; eulur, iretur, eundum ett, etc., which are used impersonally. See § 184, 2, (a.) Rem. 3. The compounds of eOj mcluding tvneo, are conjugated like the 8im- ple verb, but most oi them have li in the perfect rather than ivi. See under eo m fj 176. Adeo, anteeo, Ineo, prcetereo, subeo, and transeo, being used actively, are found in the passive voice. Inieiur occurs as a future passive of ineo. Avibio is regular, Uke audio, but has either amb'ibat or ambiibal. Note. Q,ueo, I can, and nequeo, I cannot, are conjugated like eo, but they wskDt the imperative mood and the gerund, and their participles rarely occuj?. f hey are sooietimes found in the passive voice, before an infinitive passive. DEFECTIVE VERBS. § 183. (1.) Defective verbs are those which are not used in certain tenses, numbers, or persons. Remark. There are many verbs which are not found in all the tenses, numbers, and persons, exhibited in the paradigms. Some, not originally defective, are accounted so, because they do not ocxur in the classics now extant. Others are in their nature defeo- tive. Tbu.-<. the first ami xecond pernnns of tbe passiru voice must be wanting in mf al i«rt>e, froui the nature of their Niguilicutiou. IS 146 DEFECTIVE VEKB8. § iSii (2.^ Ifae followinw list contains such verbs as are remarkaDle foi wanting many of their par.s: — 1. Odi, J hate. 6. Van, to speak. 11. Cedo, er^ 6-dis'-se; fiit. o-su'-rum es'-se. Part. jut. o-su'-rus; pei'J". o'-sus. NoTBl. Exosus and perosns, like 6sus, are used actively. Odivit, for idii, 00 curs, M. Anton, in Cic. Phil. 13, 19: and odiendi in Appuleius. 2. Ind. per/, coe'-pi ; php. coep'-e-ram ; /ut. per/. ccBp'-6-ro. SuBj. perf. ccep'-e-rim; plup. ca-pis'-sem. Inf. perf. cce-pis'-se ; /ut. coep-tu'-rum es'-se. Pakt. jut. coep-tii'-nis ; per/, ccep'-tus. Note 2. In Plautns are found a present, caejno, present subjunctive, ca^Mam, and infinitive, capere. Before an infinitive passive, cosptus est, etc., rather than caept, etc., are commonly used. 3. Ind. per/ mem'-i-ni ; pbip. me-min'-e-ram ; /ut. per/, me-min'-e-ro. SuBj. per/, me-inin'-e-rim ; plup. mem-i-nis'-sem. Inf. perf. mem-i-nis'-se. Impekat. 2 pers. 8. me-men'-to ; P. mem-en-t5'-te. NoTB 3. Odi and memini have, in the perfect, the sense of the present, and, in the pluperfect and future perfect, the sense of the imperfect and future , as, fugiet at(jue oderit. Cic. In this respect, nod, I know, the perfect of nosco, to learn, and consuvvi, I am wont, the perfect of consuesco, I accustom myself, agree with odi and memini. 4. Ind. pres. ai'-o,* a'-is, a'-it; , , ai'-unt.* imp. ai-e'-bam, ai-e'-bas, ai-e'-biit; ai-e-ba'-miis, ai-e-ba'-tls, ai-e'-bant SuBj. pres. , ai'-as, ai'-at ; , , ai'-ant. Imperat. pres. a'-i. Part. pres. ai'-ens. Note 4. Ais with ne is contracted to ain' like videri', dbin'' ; for videsne, ■lUsne. The comic writers use the imperfect albas, albat and aibant, which are dissyllabic. 5. Ind. jTres. in'-quam, in'-quis, in'-quit; in'-qui-mus, in'-qul-tis, in'-qui-unt. imp- , , in-qui-e'-bat, awt? in-qui'-bat; , , in-qui-e'-bant /ut. , in'-qui-es, iii'-qui-et ; , , . jjery. , in-quis'-ti, in-quit; , , . BvBj.pres. j^ in'-qui-as, in'-qui-at ; , in-qui-a'-tis, in'-qui-ant. Imperat. in'-que, in'-qui-to. 0. Ihd. pres. , , f a'-tur; /ui. f a'-bor, , f ab'-i-tur. per/ fatus est; plup. f atus eram. Imperat. f a'-re. Part. pres. fans ; per/ f a'-tus ; /ut. fan'-diis. Infin. pres. f a'-ri or fa'-ri-er. Gerund, gen. fan'-di; abl. fan'-do. Supine, fa'-tii. •Pronounced a'-yo, a'-!/i(»it, etc., wherever the diphthoug at is foUotrecl by a v«wt 9» » ». i ^ 184. IMPERSONAL VERBS. 147 TtUerfari has the forms inter/ atur, inter/ ata est, inter/ari, inter/ans, and inter/dtus.—Kffari has effCibor, effabere, eH'ulus est, effdli aunt; unperat effare; effari, effCttm, effandus, effamlo ; eJIcitu.—Prce/ari occurs in the following fomis, prce/dtur, prctfumur; pra/abaniur ; pra/arer prcE/arentur ; pvce/ati sumus ; pra>/dius /luro ; impenit. prtzfdio, pra/a- mim; prce/ans, prce/dtus, pra/ancliis; prcffaiulo.—Prd/drihsispro/dtur, pro/dta est, pro/dta sunt, pro/dlus and prd/ans. 7. Ind. prei. quae'-so, , quas'-sit; quses'-ii-miis, , . Ixv. pres. quaes'-e-re. 8, ' T. a'-ve, a-ve'-te ; a-ve'-to. Inf. a-ve'-re. Avere and solvere are often used with jiibeo. 9 VsD. pres. sal'-ve-o ; /ut. 8al-ve'-bis_. Inf. pres. 8al-ve'-r6. Imperat. sal'-ve, sal-ve'-te ; sal-ve'-to. 10. Impekat. ap'-a-ge. So age with a subject either singular or pluraL . 11. Imperat sing. c6'-do ; pi. cet'-te /or ced'-i-te. Hence cfidodum. 12. Ind. pres. con'-fit ; /ut. con-f i'-et. SuBJ. pres. con-fi'-at; imj}e>/. con-fi'-6-r6t. Inf. pres. con-fl'-6-ri. 13. Ind. pres. de'-fit; pi. de-f i'-unt ; /!t<. de-f!'-et. SuBJ. pres. dS-fi'-IILt. Inf. pres. de-f i'-e-ri. So ef-f i'-e-ri, and in-ter-f I'-e-rt. FlatU. ; and in-ter- fi'-at. Lucr. 14. Ind. pres. in'-fit; pi. in-fi'-unt. 15. Ind. pres. o'-vat. Subj. pres. o'-vet; imper/. 6-va'-ret. Part. pres. 6'- vans ; per/ o-va'-tu-s ; /ut. ov-Sr-tii'-riis. Gerund, S-van'-dL Remark 1. Among defective verbs are sometimes, also, included the follow- ing: — /'(Jrem, /(5res, etc., y re, (see§154, R. 3.) Ausim.misls, ausit; attsint. Faxo B.nd /axim, f axis, /axit; /aximus, /axitis, /ixint. Faxem. The form in o is an old future perfect; that in m a perfect, and that in e??* a pluperfect sub- junctive. See \ 162, 7, (c), and 9. Rem. 2. In the present tense, the first person singular, /uro, to be mad, and dvr and der, from do, to give, are not used. So in the imperative sci, cupe and polle, from scio, cupio, and polleo, do not occur. Rem. 3. A few words, sometimes classed with defectives, are formed by contraction from a verb and the conjunction si; as, sis for si vis, suhis for st vuUis, iodes for si audes (for audits.) IMPERSONAL VERBS. § 184, (a.) Impersonal verbs are those which are used only in the third person singular, and do not admit of a personal subject. (6.) The subject of an impersonal verb in the active voice is, for the most part, either an infinitive, or an infinitive or subjunctive clause; but in English the neuter pronoun, it, commonly stands before the verb, and represents such clause; as, me deleclat scribere, it delights me to write. Sometimes an accusa- tive depending on an impersonal verb takes, in English, the place of a sub- ject; as, me iniseret tui, I -pity thee. • 1. Impersonal verbs in the active voice are conjugate'l in the sev- eral (loujugations hke delectat, it delij^hts; decet, itbecomea; cuntingit^ •t harpens ; evenit, it happens ; th is : — 148 IMPERSONAL VE: RBS. § i»4 l«i Onij. 2d Conj. 3d Conj. ith Cbiy. Ihd. Pres. delectiit, • decet, contingit. wenit, Imp. delectabat, decebat, contingebat, jveniebat, Fut. delectabit, decSbit, continget, 3veniet, Perf. Php. delectavit, decuit, contigit. evenit, delectavorat, decuerat, contigerat, evenerat, Fut. perf. delectaverit. decuerit. contigerit. evenerit Sdb. Prei. delectet, deceat, contingat, eveniat, Imp. delectaret, deceret, contingeret, evemret, Perf. delectaverit, decuerit, contigerit, evenerit, Plup. delectavisset. decuisset. contigisset. evenisset. Ikj. Prei. delectare, decere, contingere, evenire, Ptrf. delectavisse. decuisse. contigisse. evenisse. 2. (a.) Most neuter and many active verbs may be used imperson- ally in the passive voice, by changing the personal subject of the ac- tive voice into an ablative witk the preposition a or ab ; as, Illi pugnant ; or pugnatur ab illis, they fight. Illi quarunl, or qucBrltur ab illis, they ask. Cf. § 141, Rem. 2. (6.) In the passive form, the subject in English is, commonly, either the agent, expressed or understood, or an abstract noun formed from the verb; as, Pugnatum est, we, they, etc. fought; or, the battle was fought. Concwrritvr, the ptojde run together ; or, there is a concourse. (c.) Sometimes the Engh"sh subject in the passive form is, in Latm, an ob lique case dependent on the verb ; as, favetur tibi, thou art favored. The following are the forms of impersonal verbs in the several conjugations of the passive voice : — Indicative Mood. Pres. pugnatur. Imp. pugnabatur, Fut. pugnabltur, Perf. puo^atum est or (uit, favetur, favebatur, favebitur, fautum est or fuit, curritur, currebatur, curretur, cursum est fuit. or venitur, veniebatur, venietur, ventiim est yS^ation, loses its final o; the second part is always the verb fdcio. 4. Of an adverb and a verb; as, benefdcio, mdUdlco, sdidffO, nolo, negll^o. 5. Of a preposition and & verb ; as, ctdduco, excvlo, prddo, siihrepo, discemo, tejungo. 6. Of a preposition and a noun, as, pemocto, irretio. § 180. In composition with particles, the vowels a and e and the diphthong ce in the radical syllable of the simple verb are often changed in the compound. 1. The following simple verbs in composition change a into e: — Aroeo, Carpo, Farcio, Jacto, Pario, Patro, Sparge, Candeo, Damno, Fatiscor, Lacto, Partio, Sacro, Tracto. Capto, Fallo, Gradior, Mando, Patior, Scando, Exc. A is retained in amando, prcemuTido, desacro, and retracto ; prcedamno, and pertraclo sometimes also occur. A is also changed into e in occento from canto, and anhelo from halo ; comperco also is found. 2. The following, in the first root, change a and e into % ; viz. &go, cado, egeo, (5mo, frango, pango, premo, rego, sedeo, specio, tango. • 3. These change a and e, in the first and second roots, into i; viz. salio, to leap, sapio, taceo, and teneo. 4. These change a into i, and oe into t, in all the roots ; viz. habeo, lacio, lateo, placeo, statuo; caado, laedo, and qusero. 5. The following change a, in the first root, into t, and in the third root into e ; viz. cano, capio, fateor, jacio, rapio, and apiscor. Exc. (a.) A is retained in circumago, perdgo, saldgo; antekdbeo, posthdbeo, depango, repango, compldceo, and perpldceo. Occdno and recdno also sometime3 occur. E is retained in cohno, cifcumscdeo, and snpershho. Antecdpio and a»- Ucipo are both used ; so also are superjdcio and superjicio. (b.) Cogo and dego are foiTned, by contraction, from con, de, and ago; demo, promo and sumo, from de, pro, sub, and emo ; prcebeo, and perhaps dibeo, from prce, de, and hdbeo ; pergo and surgo, from per, sub, and rego. Note 1. Fdcio, compounded with a preposition, changes d into i in the first rootj and into e m the tlaird ; as, nfficio, affeci, affectum. Some compounds of facto with nouns and adjectives, change « into i, and also drop i before o, and are of the first conjugation ; as, signlflco, Icetifico, magrvlfico. Specio forms some compounds m the same manner; as, conspicor and sufpicor. Note 2. Lego, compounded with con, de, di, e, inter, nee, and se, changes i into i, in the first I'oot ; as, colllgo, negligo, etc. ; but with ad, prce, per, re, sub, and trans, it retains e; as, allego. Note 3. Calco and salio, m composition, change a into u ; as, inculco, insuUo. Plaudo changes au into o ; as, explodo ; except applaudo. Audio changes an into e in obcdio. Camo, clauda, and qudtio, drop a- as, accOso, recludo, perc&tio Am changes u int.:) e in di'ji o and pejiro, but dejuro, also, is in use. §190,191. ADVERBS. 155 Note 4. In the compoimds of caveo, maneo, and trdh< d remaiijs nw hanged, and 80 also does te in the compounds of hcereo. Note 5. The simple verbs with which the following are com pounded are not used : — Defendo, Irnpedio, Confilto, Instigo, Conniveo, Otfendo, Imbuo, Refuto, Impleo, Percello, Experior, Compello, (-are,) Ingrao, Compleo, Indue, and soma Expedio, Appello, (-are,) Congmo, Renideo, Exuo, others. For ths changes produced in prepositions by composition with verbs see ^ 196. PARTICLES. § 190. 1. Particles are those parts, of speech which are neither declined nor conjugated. They are divided into four classes — adverbs, prepositions, conjunctions, and interjections. NoTB. A word may sometimes belong to two or more of these classes, ac- cording to its connection. ADVERBS. 2. An adverb is a particle used to modify or limit the mean- ing of a verb, an adjective, or another adverb ; as, B,6ue et sjupienter dixit, he spoke well and wisely ; Cants egregie Jidelis, a r«- markabJy faithful dog; Niniis vakle laudare, to praise too much. Compare 4 277, R. 1. 3. Adverbs, in regard to their signification, are divided into va- rious classes ; as, adverbs of place, time, manner, etc:, and some be- long to either class according to their connection. 4. In regard to their etymology, adverbs are either primitive or derivative. Remark. Among primitive adverbs are here classed not only such as can- not be traced to any more renaote root, but also all which are not included in the regular cla.sses of derivative adverbs hereafter mentioned. PRIMTIVE ADVERBS. § 191. The primitive adverbs are few in number, when com- p.ire>l with the derivatives, and most of them are contained in the following lists marked I, n, and III. I. Adverbs of Place and Order. Meo, so far J as far. sXicvibi, somewhere. . allqucversum, toward adhuc, to l]ns place. aliounde, fr&m some some place. adversus, \ opposite, place. aliunde, from another Bdversum, >overagainst,X\\w, to another place. place. exadversus, — urn, ) toward. allqua, in some way. circa, ) , alia, by another way. aliorsum, towardanoth- circum, } "^^^• alias, in another place. er place. chciti'-r, on every side. alibi, eUewheure. ailquo, to some place, circumcirca iUaround. 156 ADVERBS. §191. citra, on this side, citro, hither. contra, over acjainst. coram, before. dehinc, henceforth. deinceps, successively. deinde, tfter that. denique, finally. denuo, again. deorsum, downward. destrorsum, imonrd tht right. eS, that way. eadem, the same way. eo, to that place, thither. eodem, to the same place. exinde, after that. extra, mthout. extrinst'cus, /VoT?* wii1}out. f oras, out of doors. f oris, mthout. liac, this way. hactenus, tfius far. hie, here. hinc, hence. hue, hither. hucusque, this far. horsiim, hitherward. Ibi, there. ibidem, in the same place. iliac, Hiat way. illic, there. illinc, thence. illo, thither. illorsum, thitheiioard. illuc, thitlier. inde, thence. indidera, from the tame place. Kemark 1. (a.) The quorsum? whithenvard? 3uSt, l^— •^i'^«- '■'^^'"°' \bachward, retrorsiim,^ j^^^_ ' rursum, ) sicubi, if anil where. sicimde, if from any place. sinistrorsum, toward tht left. subter, beneath. super, supra, above, cm top. sursum, vpward. infra, below, beneath. Inilii, in that place. ultrinsecus, from mthin intra, iiitro, ji introrsum, > within. intils, ) istac, that way. istic, there. istinc, thence. isto, istuc, thither. juxta, near, alike. neciibi, lest any where. neutro, to neither side. neutriM, to neither place, turn, then, i» the neeot side no where. to neither nullibi, nusquam penltiis, within. pone, post, behind, back. porro, onward. procul, far. prope, propter, near. prorsum, forward. protinvis, onward. qua ? in which way ? quaqua, ) what way quacumque, j soever. quaqui', wheresoever. qualibet, | ■„ quavis, ) ii J quo '? whither ? quoad, quousque quopiam, quoquam, quoquo, ) whither- quocumque, ) soever. quoquoversus, toward every side. interrogative adverbs of wherever, wheresoever. place iibi? where? ubicumque, ubifibi, ubilibet,| ,j,^^e ^^J^l^"^' (everywhere. ubivis, J '' ultra, ultro, beyond. undt^? whence? undelibet, undevls, undique, undeunde, ) whence- undecumque, j soever. usjiiam, ) someivhere, usquam, ) any where. usque, all the tvay. usquequaquC, in all ways. utrimque, on both sidea. , wXro'i ivhich toay ? to someplace. ^^.^^.^ •„ ^^,^J^ ^^^^^ , from every where. how far. utrobique, in both places. utroque, to both sides. utroqueversum, toward both sides. place, iibi ? where ? unde 1 •whence ? quo 1 whither ? and qua f in what way ? have relation to other ad- verbs formed in a similar manner, thus constituting a system of adverbial cor- relatives similar to that of the pronominal adjectives. See § 139, 6, (3.)_ (b.) As in the case of the pronominal coiTclatives, the interrogative and relative forms are alike, beginning with u or qh. The demonstratives are formed from is, which is strengtliened by dem, and tlie indefinite from allquis. The general relatives and the general indefinites or universals, like those of the pro- nominal adjectives, are made, the former by doubling the simple relatives ca by appending to them the termination cumqui, ' soever,' and the latter by ad- ding qui, vis, or Ubei. Thus : Jnterrog. Demonstr. Relat. Gen. Relat. Indefin. ubi? ibi, ubi, ubiubi, alicubi, Ibidem, iibiciimque. und6? qao? qa&? inde, indldem, eo, eodem, ea, eadem. unde, quo, qua. undeunde, undi'cumque, quoquo, quocumqup, quaqua, quacunwue. alicunde, aliquo, aliqua. Gen. Indefin ubique, ubivis, ubilibet. undique, undevis, undelibet, quovis, quoilbet, quavis. QualTbCt §191. ADVr.RBS. 157 (f.) To those answering to fiMT maybe added dlihi, nulJihi, and inibi, th« kttcr being a sti-fii<;tliened form of iV«'. lu like iiuinner aliiiiule, utri/nqite, in- Irimevus, and extrinsecus may be added to those answering to untUf and alio to those answerins: to quo? So also' to iitro? answer ulrOqite and nnutro. (d.) The (lemoiistratives ibi, imie, and to are used only in reference to rela^ ti(7e sentences which precede; but more definite demonstratives are formed from the pronouns //7c, isie, and tile, jmswering in like manner to ul/if undS? and quo ? These together with the preceding correlatives are, in the following table, arranged respectively under their several interrogatives ulnf umief quo? fud t &^d quursum f — Thus : quo ? qua V hue, hac, istuc, istac, illuc, Dlac, eo, ea, eodem, eadem, alio, alia, aliquo. aliqua. (e.) Etc, hinc, Mc, refer to the place of the speaker; iMlc,istinc, istuc, to the place of the second person or person addressed; and ilUc, illinc, illuc, to that of the third person or the person or thhig spoken of. Cf. ^ 207, R. 23, (a.) and (c^) (/.) The interrogative adverbs lAi, wide, quo, qua, etc. are often used with- out a question, sunply as adverbs of place; as, hi mm partem ituros, atque ibi futuros ndvvtios, ubi eos Ooesar coiistifuisset. (^.) In consequence of a transfer of their meaning, some of the adverbs of place, as, hlc, ibi,- Hit, hinc, inde, hactenHs, etc., become also adverbs of tune, and some of them are used also as conjunctions. n. Adverbs of Time. ubiV unde ? hie, hinc, istic, istinCr illic. illinc. ibi, inde. ibidem, indldem, alibi, aliunde. allcubi. aUcunde. quorsum ? horsum, istorsum, illorsum. aliorsura, aliquoversum. actutum, immediately. abhinc, from this time. udeo, so loni/ (as). adhuc, nntil m>w, still. alias, at another time idiquamdiu, for awhile. allquaiido, at some time. aliquoties, several times. ante, ) before, antea, ) previously. antehiic, formerly. bis, twice, (see ^ 119). circiter, about, near. eras, tom^trrow. cum or quum, ivhen. deinceps, in succession. delude wdein, ) thereupon, exindi-arexin, ) afterward. dt-hinc, from this time. iemum, at hnylh. deulque, lastly. diu, lonij. duduni, previously. eousque, so long. hf^Tf' or ht"vT, yesterday. hic, here, hereupon. hinc, /row thistijne, since. bodie, to-(i'iy. ibi, then, thereupon. dentldem, now and then, repeatedly. 14 illieo, immediately. hide, after that, men. interdum, sometimes. interim, meanwhile. itcrum, again. jam, now, already. J='™^}'.^,' I long ago. jamdudum, ) ^ " janijam, presently. jampridem, hng since. modo, just noio. mox, soon after. nondum, not yet. nonn^imquam, sometimes. nudiiis tertiiis, three days ago. nunc, now. numquam, never. nuper, lately. olim, formerly. parumper, ijor a short paulispir, j time. pr.reudie, two days hence. porro, hereafter, in fur- ture. post, postea, afterwards. postliac, hereafter. postridie, the day after. pridem, long since. pridie, the (lay bifore. protinus, instuntlii. quamdiu ? hmu Icmg ? quandoV when? quandocumque, when- ever. quandoque, at some time. quatcr, four times. quoad? U^iong* quousque r J ^ qiiondam, formerly. quotidie, daily. quoties V how often ? quum or cum, when. rursils, again. sffipe, ofte7i. semel, once. semper, always. statim, immediately. subinde, immediately, now and then. tamdiii, so long. tandem, at length. tantisper, for so long. ter, tUrice. toties, so often. turn, tunc, then. ubi, when, as soon as. umquam, ever. usque, until, ever. ut (>r uti. as, nt aoon as^ when. 158 A.D VERBS. §191 TTT Adverbs jf Manner, Quality, Degr e, etc, adeo, so, to that degree. ac'niodum, venj much. &]KSr, otheriuise. ceu, as, like as. cur? whyf duntaxat, only, at least. etiam, also, trv,'y, yes. etiamnuuc,* ^ j^;^g^_ etuimtum, ) ' 1*^^**'- [ almost, nearly. ferme, J ' ' fortasse, perhaps. frustra, in vain. gratis, freely. baud, not. haudquaquam, by no means. hucusque, so far. identidem, constantly. immo, nay, on the con- trary. Ita, so. Item, just so, also. Itidem, in like manner. juxta, equally, alike. ■ magis, nwre. modo, only. DEB or no, truly, verily. ne, not. nedum, much less. nempe, truly, forsooth. nequaquam, ) by tw neutiquam, ) means. nimirum, certainly, wbe sure. °i™^«' too much. mm mm, ) non, not. omiiino, altogether, only. peene, almost. palam, opienly. pariter, equally. parum, too Utile. paulatim, by degrees. pemtus, wholly. pfrLnde, / just as, proiiide, | as though. perquam, very much. plerumque, for the most piart, commonly. potius, rather. porro, mo7-eover, then. prseter, beyond, except. prsesertim, particularly. profecto, truly. prope, almost, near. propemodum, almost. prorsus, wholly. quam, how much, as. quamobrem, wherefore. quare ? why f wherefore ? quasi, as if, as it toere. qui'^madmodum, as. eqmdem, ) quomodo i how f in what manner f quoque, also. rite, duly. saltern, at least. ' ' ? separately. so as, as. sane, truly. ■ ' ^! / enough. satis, ) ^ satiiis, rather. scXlicet, truly, to tmt. spcus otherwise. seorsum, ) seorsus, sic, so. sicut, ) slcuti, ) simul, together. singillatim, one by one. solum, only, alone. tam, so, so much. tamquam, like, as if. tantwpere, so greatly. tantum, so much, only. tautummddo, only. temere, at random. Qna, together. usquequ aque, in allpointt, ■ in all ways. ■fit, uti, utiqui", at any rate, cer- tainly. utpote, as, tnasmuch at. valde, very much. vol, even. velut, ) as, like as, for veluti, J example. vicissim, in turn, again. videlicet, clearly, to wit. vix, scarcely. Rem. 2. Adverbs denoting quality, manner, etc., are sometimes divided into those of, 1. Quality; as, icvie, m«fe'. 2. Certainty; as, certe, plane. 3. Con- tingence; a.s, forte. 4. Negation; as, hand, 7i6n, ni', immd. 5. Affirmation; as, ncB, quidem, utique, nempe. 6. Swearing; as, /iertfe'. 7. Explaining; as, w"c?('K- C(H utpOte. 8. Separation- as, seorsum. 9. .Joining together; as, simid, una. 10.' Interrogation; as, curf qudref 11. Quantity or degree; as, satis, adeo. 12. Excess; as, perquam, niaxlme. 13. Detect; as, pdrum, pcene. 14. Prefer- ence ; as, j9(5fe'iis, sfW^us. 15. Likeness; as, iia, sic. 16. Unlikeness; as, a/«CT-. 17. Exclusion ; as, tantum, solum. Eem. 3. Non is the ordinary Latin negation. Baud signifies either ' not at all,' or ' not exactly.' It is used by the comic ana later writers in all combina- tions, but in the authors of the best age its use is more especially limited to its connection with adjectives and adverbs denoting a measm-e; as, haud mullum, hand magnum, haucl parvus, hand mediocris, hand paulo, haud procul, haudhng^.. especially haud sane in connection with other words; as, haud sane facile, res haud seine diffidlis, haud sane intelligo ; also haud quisquam, haud umquum, haud quaquam. With verbs haud is scarcely used until Livy and Tacitus, es.cept in the common phrase haud scio an, wliich is equivalent to nescio an.—Ne , (or « 5 ) is the primitive Latin negative particle, signifying m or not. It is used' ui this lense and as an adverb, («) with qiddem to make an emphatic negation f the word standing between them : as, ne in oppidis quidem. not even in the towns; (6) in composition as in ne»io,nefas, neuter ete.; (e) with imperatives and § 191. APVKRBS. 159 eubjnnctives used as irnperatives; as, Ne pueri, ne tanta nnlmii tsmesdte heUa. V rg. So, also, in wishes and asseverntioiis; as, Nc klJujMer unf ret, m».y Aw- piier forbid it. Liv. Ne rlvam, $i »ciu, may I die, if I know. Cic; and in con- cessive and resti-ictive clauses; as, Nt /iieril, suppose there was not. Cic. Si7it mlftricurdes in J'urlbas mrarii, nt ilUs snnyulneiii, iiostraiii lart/iantur, only let ihein not, etc. Oic. So iht/n nt, dummodo ne, modo ne, dum qiiidtm ne ; and in intentional clauses with tit. — fmmo, as a negative, substitutes something stronger in the place of the preceding statement, which is denied; as, Cama iffitui- non bona esif Inimo optima, sed, etc. Cic. It may often be translated bj ' nay,' or ' nay even.' Eem. 4. Quid em gives particular emphasis to a word or an idea, and then answers to our ' certainly ' or ' indeed,' but frequently, especially with a pro- noun, it merely adds emphasis. Equidem, which is considered as a com- pound of er/o dndquldem, is used exclusively in this sense by Cicero, Virgil, and Horace, but by other and particularly by later ^Titers it is used like quidem. — Nempe, ' surely,' is often used ironically, when we refute a person by con- cessions which he is obliged to make, or by deductions. In other connections it may be translated ' namely.' Rem. 5. Sic , ltd, tam, as also tantdpere, and*a£Zeo signify 'so.' Sic is more particularly the demonstrative ' so,' or ' thus ' ; as, sic se res hdbet. It a defines or limits more accurately, and is equivalent to our ' in s\ich a man- ner,' or ' only in so far ' ; as, ita defendito, ut neviinem Uedns. Frequently, ho\v- ever, ita has the signification of sic, but sic has not the limiting sense of ita. — Ta m, 'so much,' generally stands before adjectives and adverbs, and in- creases the degree ; before vowels tantopere is generally used instead of tam. — .a.deo, 'to that degree' or 'jxiint,' increases the expression to a certain end or result. Hence it forms the transition to the conclusion of an argument or to the essential part of a thing; and Cicero employs it to introdifce the proofs of what he has previously alleged; as, Id adeo ex ipso sendtus consulto corjnoscite, Rnd always in such case puts adeo after a pronoun. Rem. 6. Umquam, 'ever,' and ^usquam, 'somewhere,' like qmsquam, require a negation in the sentence, and thus become equivalent to numquam and nusquam. A negative question, how^ever, may supply the place of a nega- tive proposition ; as, num tu enm umqnam vidistif — Us pi am, like quispiam, is not negative, but is the same as dlicubi, but strengthened, just as quispiam is the same as aliquis. So, also, quopiam is used affinnatively, and quoquam nega- tively. — Jam, with a negative, answers to our 'longer'; as. Nihil jam spero, I no longer hope for any thing. When used to connect sentences it signifies 'further,' or 'now.' — tjsque is commonly accompanied by the prepositions ad, in, ab, or ex. It rarely signifies ' ever and anon ' ; as, NalHram exptllns furcd, tdmen usque recurret. Hor. — Nuper, mddo, and max are relativs and indefinite. — Dudum, ' previously,' or ' before,' in relation to a time which has just passed away, may often be translated 'just before." — Jamdudum signifies ' long before,' or ' long since.' With the poets jamdudum contains the idea of impatience, and signifies ' without delay,' ' forthwith ' ; as, Jamdudum tumite pcenas. Virg. — Tandem, 'at length,' also expresses the impatience with which a question is put. Resi. 7. Tunc is 'then,' 'at that time,' in opposition io nunc, 'now': Turn is 'then,' as the correlative of quum, 'when ;' as, quum omnes adessent, turn ille exorstis est dicere, when all were present, then he began to speak. Without a relative sentence turn signifies 'hereupon,' or 'thereupon'; but a relative sentence may always be supplied. The same difference exists between etiam nunc and ■itiam turn, ' still,' or ' yet ' ; and between mine ipsiim and '.urn ip- »um; quummcxlme and tummaxime, 'just,' or 'even then'; for edam nunc, nunt ipsum and quum maxime refer to the present; but etiamtum, tuinip$um, and tummaxime, to the past. 16C DERIVATION OF ADVERBS. §192 DERIVATION OF ADVERBS. § 103. Adverbs are derived from nouns, adjectives, pro Douns, and participles. I. From Nouns. 1. Of these a fewend in im (generally dtim), and denote manner; as, ' gregatim, in herds ; membratim, limb by limb ; vinssaiim, or more frequentlj, vicissim, by turns ; from grex, membrum, and rids. 2. Some end in itus, and denote origin or manner ; as, caelitus, from heaven ; funditus, from the bottom ; rddlcltus, by the roots ; from caelum, fundus, and radix. 3. Some are merely the different cases of nouns used adverbially ; as, (a.) Some adverbs of time ; as, mane, noctu, diu, tempdri or tempSrt, Initio, principio, niiido. — (b.) Adverbs of place; as, fdr'is, fdrds. — (c.) Adverbs ol manner ; as, sponte, forte, gratis or grdtils, ingratiis, Xfulgo, pavtim. n. From Adjectives and Participles. By far the greater number of derivative adverbs come from adjec tives and participles (present and perfect), and end in e and ter. 1. Adverbs derived from adjectives and participles of the second declension, are formed by adding e to the root ; as, agre, scarcely ; alie, high ; llbere, freely ; longe, far ; ml'sere, miserably ; pUne, fully; docte, learnedly; orndt!', elegantly; from ager, alius, liber, longiis, misery plenus, doctus, and orndtus. Beni, well, is from bonus, or an older form bentis. Remark. A few adverbs in e differ in meaning from their adjectives ; as, sane, certainly; valde, very; from sdnus, sound, well; and vdlldus, strong. Exc. 1. A few adverbs derived from adjectives and participles of the second declension, add iter, itus, im, or atiin to the root; as, ndvitlr, activelj"^; antlquitus, anciently; dlvinUiis, divinely; pinvdtim, privately; tuaiim, after vour manner; singulatim, singilldtim, sigilldtim, or singnUvn, sever- ally; ccEsim, carptim, sensim, stdtim, etc. from ndvils, anilquus, div'mus, pricdtus, tuus, singuli, cxbsus, carptus, etc. Exc. 2. Some adverbs are formed with two or more of the above termina- tions with the same meaning; s.s, dure, duHter ; firme, fii-miter ; nave, ndviter; large, largiter ; luculente, luculenicr ; turbulenie, turbulenter : so caute and cauiim ; humane, humdniter, and humdnitus ; publice and pubUcitus. 2. Adverbs derived from adjectives and participles of the third de- clension, are formed by adding iter to the root, except when it ends in t, in which case er only is added; as, dcritlr, shivrply; fellciter, happily; turpiter, basely; — eleganfer, elegantlv , prudentlr, pnidently; dnumter, lovingly; 2)rdpi'ranter,\\.i\.it\\Y; from deer, fclix, turpis, elegans, prcidens, dmans, and prdperans. So also from the obsolete dlU for dliUs, and prdjns, (neuter prdpe), come dliter and prqptSr for prdpiter. Exc. From «Mc?(w; comes by svncope rt?cfve, over. citra, I '^ ^^'' '^^^' '^''""- per, through, throughmit, trans, over, leyond. contra, against, opposite. by, during. ultra, beyond. erga, towards, opposite. p5ne, behind. 5. Eleven prepositions have after them an ablative : — a, J de, from, dmi>n from, of- pras, before, for, on ac- ab, \fr(ym, after, by. ter, of, concerning. count if, in comparison abs, ) e, I out of, frvm, if, by, with. ^ ^ . ^ absque, without, but for. ex, } after. pro, before, for, instead ccram, before, in pi-es- palam, befoi-e, in pres- of, according to. ence of. ence of. sine, without. cum, with, tenus, as far as, up to. 6. Five prepositions take after then\ sometimes an accusative, and sometimes an ablative : — clam, without the hnowl- siib, under, about, near. siipgr, above, over ; upon edge of. subter, under, beneath. concerning. In, in, on ; to, into, against. Remaek 1. Prepositions are so called, because they are generally placed be- fore the noun or pronoun whose relation they express. They sometimes, how- ever, stand after it. Cf. § 279, 10. Eem. 2. A is used only before consonants; ab before vowels, and frequently before consonants, though rarely before labials: ois is obsolete, except in the piirase abs te. E is used only before consonants, ex before both vowels and consonants. Rem. 3. Versus, which foUows its noun, (cf. § 235, R. 3), usqui, and exitd- versUs ( -urn), sometimes take an accusative, slmiil and prdcul, an ablative, aud are then by some called prepositions. Secus, with an accusative, occurs in Pliny and Cato. Rem. 4. Many of the prepositions, especially those which den>te place, are also used as adverbs. Cf. § 191. Signification and Use of certain Prepositions. Rkm. 5. (a.) Ad denotes direction, and answers to the questions Whither? and Till when? as, Venio ad te. Sophocles dd summam senectutem tragcediai ficit. Cic. It also denotes a fixed time ; us, ad hoi-nm, at the hour; ad tempus aliquid facere, — at the right time. But sometimes ad tempus denotes ' for a time.' Sometimes, also, (td denotes the approach of time; as. ud iTicem, ad »«»- peram, ad extremum, towards day-break, etc. ; and also the actual aiTival of a time; as, dd prima signa veris profectve at the first sign of Spring. § 195. PREPOSITIONS. 165 (6.) In answer to the question '\^here? drf signifies 'rrear' a plnci as, dd ttrbem esse ; ad portas urbts ; pugna navdlis ad Tenedum. It is used like fw, ' at,' in such phrases as dd cedem BelUmce, or, without cEt/ej/i, dd Opis; neyulium habere dd pvrtum. — With numerals it may be rendered ' to the amount of or ' nearly ' ; ns, dd ducentos. It is also used "like circiter without any case ; as, Occlsis dd homlnum millibus quatuoi: — The phrase omnes dd unum signifies, ' all without exception,' ' every one.' (c.) Ad often denotes an object or purpose, and hence comes its signification of ' in respect to ' ; as, hdmo da labures belli impiger. It is also used in figura- tive relations to denote a model, standard, or object of comparison, where we say ' according to ' or ' in comparison with ' ; as, dd modum, da ejfigiem^ dd slmU- itudinem, dd speciem alicujusrei; dd norvmni, etc. dd volunidtem alicujus facere abquid. Ad verbum signifies, ' word for word ' ; nihil dd hanc rem, ' nothing ua comparison with this thing.' Rem. 6. Apud expresses nearness to, and was primarily used of persons as dd was applied to things. Apad also denotes rest, and dd direction, motion, etc. Hence it signifies ' with," both literally and figtiratively. With names of places it signifies 'near,' like dd; as, Male pugndtum est djma Caudium. But in early writers, «y;u(ns used for f 71 ; as, Augustus dpiid urbein Nolam extinctus est, — at Nola. — With me, te, se, or the name of a person, it signifies ' at the house ' or ' dwelling of ; as, Fuisli dpud Ixecam ilia node. — Before appellatives of persons having authority in regard to any matter, it is translated ' before,' ' in the pres- ■enceof ; ?is, dpud judues, dpikl pratorem, dpud piopulum. — It is also used with names of authors, instead of in with the name of their works ; as, Apud Xeno- phontem, but we cannot say in Xenophonte. Rem. 7. Adversus, contra, and ergd signify ' opposite to.' Cbre is sometimes used instead of the genitive; as, ancilla db Andrid. — In a figurative sense it signifies ' with regard to'; ds, db equitdtu Jiniius. — With names of j)ersons it also denotes relationship, and signifies 'on the side of; as, Augustus a mntre Magnum Povijieium nrtisshno contingebat grddu, — on his mother's side. — Sldtim, confestim, recens db aliqua re, ' immediately after.' — Ab itinere aliquid facere, to do a thing while on a journey. Rem. 11. Cum is used not only to desimate accompanying persons but also Rccompunying circumstances; as, cum aliquo ire; hostes cum detrimento autU 166 PEEPOSITIONS. § 195 dmuld. It signifies also ' in,' i. e. ' dressed in ' ; a,s, cum tunica pulla gedere. With verbs implying hostility, it signifies with,' in the sense of ' against ' ; as, cum aliquo bellum gerere ; cum aliqtio queri to complain of or against. Rem. 12. Z)c commonly signifies 'concerning,' ' about.' Hence traditur de Homero is very difl'erent from traditur db Hmmro ; in the former, Homer is the object, in the latter the agent. — In the epistolary style, when a new subject is touched upon, de signifies ' in regard to,' ' as respects ' ; as, de fratre, corifido ita esse, ut semper volui. — It often signifies 'down from'; and also 'of,' in a partitive sense; as, homo de piebe, unus de popido. — From its partitive significa- tion arises ii s use in denoting time ; as, in comitium de node venire, i. e. even by night, or spending a part of the night in coming; hence multd de node, med*& de node, ' in the depth of night,' ' in the middle of the night.' — In other cases, also, it is used for ex or db; as, Audlvi hoc de j^eirente meopuer. Cic. ; espeeiallj- in connection with enter e, mercdri, conducere. Tiiumphum agSre de Cillis and ex Gallis are used indiscriminately — Sometimes, like secundum, it signifies ' iii accordance with,' ' after ' ; as, de cotisilio meo : — sometimes it denotes" the man- ner of an action ; as, denuo, de integro, afresh ; de improviso, unexpectedly ; di indiistrid, purposely : — qtid de re, qua de causa, quibus de causis, for which reason or reasons. Rem. 13. Ex^ , ' from,' ' out of.' Ex equo pugndre, to fight on horseback ; 80 ex itinire scrihfre: ex adverse, e regime, opi)osite; ex omni parte, in or from all parts. — Ex vino or ex aqua coquere or bibere, i. e. ' with wine,' etc. are medi-» cal^expressions. — It sometimes denotes manner ; as, ex anlmo lauddre, to praise heaxtUy; exsententid and ex voluntdte, according to one's wish. — It is also, like de, used in a partitive sense ; as, unus e plebe, Unus e multis. Rem. 14. In, with the accusative, signifying 'to' or 'into,' denotes the point towards which motion proceeds; as, in cedem Ire; or the (Jirection in which a thing extends ; as, decern pedes in aliiiudinem, in height; so, also, it denotes figuratively the object towards which an action is directed, either with a friendly or a hostile design ; as, amor in patriam, odium in malos cives. In milites liberdlis'; oralio in idiquem, a speech against some one. — It also de- notes a purpose ; as, pecunin data est in rem militdrem. Pax data FMlippo in has leges est, on these conditions. — With words denoting time, it expresses a predetermination of that time^ like ' for ' ; as, invitdre aliquem in posterum diem, for the following day. In diemvivere, to live only for the day; in futurum, in postirum, in reb'quum, for the future; in mternum, in perpetuum, forever; in prcBsens, for the present: with all these adjectives tempus may be supplied. In with singuli, expressed or understood, denotes a distribution, and may be translated ' to,' ' for,' ' on,' ' over.' — In singUlos dies, or simply in dies, with comparatives and verbs denoting mcrease, signifies ' from day to day.' — In some phrases it denotes the manner of an action; us, servtlem in mOdum, mlrum in mOdtnn ; so in universum, in general ; in commune, in common ; in vlcem, alternately, or, instead of ; in alicujus Idcum aliquid jietere, in tho place, or, instead of. or 'notwithstanding'; as, In summd copia oratorum, nemo tdmen Cicermit laudem aquavit. — Vvitli nouns which by themselves denote time, such as tecilum, annus, mensis, dies, nox, vesper, etc., the time, in answer to the ques- tion When ? is expressed by tho simple ablative ; but in is used with words which acquire the .signification of time onl}' by such connection; as, in cour- tiddtu in principio, in bello ; bttt even with these in is sometunes omitted, but is usually retained in connection with the gerund or gerundive; as, in legendo, in leyKnclis libris. In picesenti, or in prasentid, signifies ' at the present mo- ment,' ' for the present.' — Esi in eo, ut aliquid Jiat signifies that seme thing is oa the polct of happening. § 196. PREPOSITIONS IN COMPOSITION. 167 PREPOSITIONS IN COMPOSITION. § 190- Most of tlie prepositions are used also in forming com- pound words. In composition, they may be considered either in reference to their form, or their force. ' I. (a.) Prepositions in composition sometimes retain their final consonants, and sometimes change them, to adapt them to the sounds of the initial consonants of the words with which they are compound- ed. In some words, both forms are in use ; in others, the final con- •♦onant or consonants are omitted. 1. A, in composition, is used before m and v; as, am&oeo, avello, and some« times beforey in afui and afdi'e, for abfui and ahfure. Ab is used before vowels, and before d,f, h, j, f, n, r, and s; as, abjuro, abrdgo, etc. Abs occurs only before c, q, and t ; as, abscondo, absque, cwstineo. In aspello. ayjer-nor, and asporto, the 6 of abs is dropped; in aufero and atifuyio, it is changed into u. 2. Ad remains unchanged before vowels and before 6, c/, h, m, v. It often changes d into c,f, , r, s, t, before those letters respectively; as, ca> cedo, affero, a(/(jrcd'mr, alb'c/o, annilor, appoyio, arriyo, asseguor, attollo. Its d is usually omitted before s followed by a consonant, and before gn; m, aspergo, aspicio, agnosco, agndtus. Before q, the d is changed into c ; as, acquiro. 3. Anie remains unchanged, except in antldpo and antisto, where it changes e to i ; but aniesto also occurs. 4. Grcum in composition remains unchanged, only in drcHmeo and its de- rivatives the m is often dropped; as, circueo, circuUus, etc. 5. Cu7H (in composition, coTn), retains m before b,m,p; as, comMbo, com- iniUo, compono: before I, n. r, its m is changed into those letters respectively; as, colligo, connltor, corrtpio : before other consonants, it becomes n ; as, con- diico, conjungo. Before a vowel, gn or h, m is commonly omitted ; as, cofOf vnuplo, cognosco, cohabito; but it is sometimes retained; as, cOTnedo, cdmes, cdmi- tor. In cogo and cogito a contraction also takes place ; as, cddgo, cogo, ete. In comburo, b is inserted. 6. Ex is prefixed to vowels, and to c, h, p, q, s, t ; as, exeo, exigo, excurro, ex- hibeo, expedio. Before J", x is assimilated, and also rarely becomes ec ; as, effe- 1-0, or ecfero. S after x is often omitted ; as, exequor, for exseqttor ; in exciamm (from txscindo), s is regularly dropped. E is prefixed to the other consonants; as, eblbo, ed'ico, except in eclex. Before these however, with the exception of n and r, ex is sometunes used ; as, ex7ndveo. E is sometimes used before p ; as, epoto. 7. In remains unchanged before a vowel. Before 6, to, p, it changes n into m; a.?, imbuo, immitto, impono: before I and r, n is assimilated; as, iUlgo, irretio: before gn, n is omitted; as, ignarus. Before the other consonants in is un- changed. In some compounds, in retains d btifore a vowel, from an ancient form indu; a,s,indigena,indigeo, iiidolesco. So anciently induperdtor, for im- perator. 8. Inter remains unchanged, except in intelligo and its derivatives, in which r before I is assimilated. 9. Ob remains unchanged before vowels and generally before consonants. Its b is assimilated before c, /, g, p ; as, occurro, officio, oggannio, oppeto. In 6mitto, b is dropped. An ancient form obs, analagous to abs for ab, is implied in obsolesco, from the ample verb oleo, and in osiendo, for obstendo. 10. Per is unchanged in composition, excoj)t in pdlicio and sometimes in pellufKO, in which r is assimilated before I. In pi'jiiro, r is dropped. 11. Post remains unchanged, except in pOmwrium and pomirididnui, in which St is dropped. 168 PREPOSITIONS IN COMPOSITION. §197 12. Prce and prceter in composition remain unchanged, except that pra is ehortened before a vowel. Cf. §' 283, II Exc. 1. 13. Pro has sometimes its vowel shoi-t^ned, (cf. § 285, 2, Exc. 5) and, to avoid hiatus, it sometimes takes d before a vowel; as, 2}i-6aeo, prodesse, prod iijo. Before verbs beginning with r and I, 2>ro sometimes becomes i>or and poL; as, pcM'rigo, poUiceor. 14. Sub in composition remains unchanged before a vowel and before b, d, i, I, n g, t, V. Before c, f, y, m, p, r, its b is regularly assimilated ;_ as, smaito, suffero, suycfiro, summoveo, siipplico, surrfpio. Before c, j), and t, it sometimsa takes the form siis from subs, analogous to abs and obs ; as, siiscrpio, smpendo, tuslollo: b is omitted before s, followed by a consonant; as, suspicio. 15. Subter and si'iper in composition remain unchanged. *■ 16. Trans remains unchanged before a vowel. It omits s before s; as, ti-anscendo : in irctdo, traduce, trdjicio, and trdno, 7is is commonly omitted. (b.) The following words are called inseparable prepositions, be- cause they are found only in composition : — AmbI or amb, (Greek ^M/ nt,,\ fim latter is used By means of--. , , „ , ir ample' or 'to take a case,' for which velut is more frequently used. — (6.) \ e, the apocopated vel, leaves the choice free between two or more things, and in later but good prose vel is used in the same manner. (c.) Slve commonly retains the meaning of si, and is then the same as vel si, but sometimes loses it, and is then equivalent to vel, denoting a difference of name; as, VoccMlum sive apjiellatio. Quint. The form sew is rarely used by Cicero except in the combination seu pdtius.— (d.) Aut and ve serve to continue the negation in negative sentences, where we use ' nor ' ; as, iwn — aut, where noil— neque also may be used. They are used also m negative questions ; as, Nam Icfjes nostras moi-esve novitf Cic. ; and after comparatives; as, Doctrma paidv asperior, quam Veritas aut natura jMtiatzir. Cic. It is omy when both ideas are to be united into one that a copulative is used instead of aut and ve. — (e.) ' Either — or' is expressed in Latin by aut— aut, denoting an opposition be- tween two things, one of which excludes the other, or by vel— vel, denoting that the opposition is immaterial in respect to the result, so that the one need not exclude the other; as, Vei imperafore \e\ milite me utimini. SaU. — Sive — sive is the same as vel si— vel s'l, and retains the meaning of vel— vel. If nouns only are opposed to each other, an uncertainty is expressed as tohow a thing is to be called; as, Cretum leges, quas sive Jupiter sive Minos sanxit; i. e. I do not know whether I am to say Jupiter or Minos. 3. Comparative conjunctions express a comparison. These are, ut or uti, sicut, velut, 2}rout, prceut,thGpoeticii\ceu, quam, tamquam, {with and without si), quasi, ut si, dc si, with dc a,nd atque, when they sig- nifv ' as.' Rehiark. Ac and atque signify ' as ' or ' than ' after adverbs and adjectives which denote similarity or dissimilarity; as, ceque, juxtd, par and pdriter, perinde and proinde, pro eo, similis and similiter, dissimilis, talis, tdtidem, alius and dliter, contra, secixs, contrarius. — Quain is rarely used_ after these words, except when a negative particle is joined with aKws; as, Virtus nihil aliud est, quam, etc. ; and et and que do not occur in this connection. — Ac is used for Yuam, after comparatives, in poetry and occasionally by late prose writers ; as, Ariius atque hedera. Hor. Insdnius ac si. Id. 4. Concessive conjunctions express a concession, with the general signifi cation 'although.' These are ets'i, etiamsi, tdmetsi, or tame net si ^ quamquam, quamvls, quantumvis, quamlibet, licet, ut in the sense of ' even if or ' although,' ana quum when it signifies 'although.' Remark. Tdm^n and other particles signifying ' yet,' ' still,' are the correl- ftives of the concessive conjunctions ; as, Ut desmt vires, tamen eH laudanda §198. CONJUNCTIONS. 173 voluntae. Ovid. The adverb qutdem becomes a concessive cor. pnc on, when it is used to connect propositions and is followed by sod. — Qumnquam in absolute sentences, sometimes refurs to something preceding, which it limits and partly nullLfies; as, Quamquam quidluquwl Yet why do I speak? 5. Conditional conjunctions express a condition, their fundamental signi- fication being 'if.' These are si, sin, nisi or nl, si modo, dummddd^ 'if only,' 'if but,' (for which du7n and mddo are also used alone), dum- KiodO ne, or simply mddo ne or dumne. Remark, (a.) In order to indicate the connection with a preceding proposi- tion, tlie relative quM, which in such case loses its signification as a pronoun, and may be rendered, ' nay,' ' now,' ' and,' or 'then,' is frequently put before si and sometimes before nisi and etsl, so that quodsl may be regarded as one word, signifying ' now if,' ' but if,' or ' if then.' It sei-ves espe'cially to mtro- duce something assumed as true, from which further inference* may be drawn." It sometimes signifies ' although.' Quodnisl signifies ' if then — not,' and quod- 9til, ' nay, even if.' QuOd is found also before quu7n, vbi, quia, qicaiiiam, ne, uti. n(un, and 3V3n before the relative pronoun. (6 ) Nl and nisi limit a statement by introducing an exception, and thus dif- fer from sj non, which introduces a negative case. It is often immaterial whether nisi or si non is used, but the difference is still essential. Si non is used when single words are opposed to one another, and in this case si minfn m.iy be used instead of si non. — If after an affirmative proposition its negative opposite is added without a verb, our ' but if not ' is commonly expressed in prose by si miniis or sin minHs or sin aliier ; as, Educ tecum etidm omnes iuos ; si minus, quam pluHmos. Cic. ; rarelj' by si non. junctions, quapropter, qudre, qtiamobrem, quocirca, unde, ^wherG- fore.' Remark. Ergo and igitiir denote a logical inference. — Ildqne, ' and thus,' expresses the relation of cause in facts. — Ideo, iccirco, and proplcved, ' on this account,' express the agi-eement between intention and action. — Ed, ' on this account,' or ' for this purpose,' is more frequently an adverb of place. Proinde, ' consequently,' imphes an exhortation. — CWe, ' whence,' is propeily an adverb of place. — Adeo, ' so that,' or simply ' so,' is also properly an adverb. Hinc, 'hence,' and hide, 'thence,' continue to be adverbs. 7. Causal conjunctions express a cause or reason, with the general sifniifi- cation of ' for ' and 'because.' These are nam, namque, enim, etenim quid, qu6d, qudniam, quippe, qunm, quando, quandoquidem slquidem; and the adverbs nlmlrum, nempe, scilicet, and videlicet. Remark, (a.) Nam is used at the beginning of a proposition, enim, after the first or second word. Nam introduces an objective reason, and enim merely a subjective one. There is the same diflerence between namque and eihiim. Namqne, however, though constantly standing at the beginning of a proposi- tion in Cicero, Ca;sar, and Nepos, is in later wTiters often put after the beo-in- ning. Eni7n in the sense of at enim or sed enim is sometimes, by comic writers put at the beginning of a proposition. — Nam, enim, and etenim ar^ often usei in the sense of ' namely,' or ' to wit,' to introduce an explanation of some- thing going before. Nlmlrum, videlicet, and scilicet likewise answer to our 'namely' or 'viz.' Nlmlmm, compovLnded of nl and mlrum, and signifyinc a wonder if not,' is used as a connective in the sense of 'undoubtedlj'' or surely,' and implies strong confidence in the truth of the proposition with which it is connected. — Videlicet and scilicet inti-oduce an explanation, with this difference that videlicet generally indicates the trae, and scilicet a wrong explanation. Sometimes, however, nam, enim, etenim, nlmlrum, and videlicet are used in an ironical sense, and scilicet introduces a true reason. — Nempi surely,' often assumes a sarcastic meaning when another person's concession It ^aken for the purpose of refuting Lim. — (6.) Quid and qudd indicate a defi> 16* 174 CONJUNCTIONS. § 198 nite and conclusive reason, qudniam, (i. e. quum jam), a motive.— /c/eo, iccirco prqAevea qtidd, and quid, are used without any essential difference, except that Buid introduces a more strict and logical reason, whereas qv^niam, sigiiifymg 'now as,' introduces important circumstances.— Quawc^o, qtianduquidem, ana nquidem approach nearer to qiiAniam than to quid, as they introduce only sub- jective reasons. Quanddquidem denotes a reason implied in a circumstance previously mentioned ; siquidem, a reason implied in a concession. In siquidem the meaning of si is generally dropped, but it sometimes remains, and then si and quidem should be -m-itten as separate words ; as, fortmatam rempubli- cam, si quidem hcinc sentinam ejecerit. Cic— Quippe, with the relative pronoim or with qmim, introduces a subjective reason. When used ellipticaUy without a verb it signifies ' forsooth ' or ' indeed.' Sometimes it is followed by a sen- tence with enim, and in this way gradually acquires the signification oinam. 8. Final conjunctions express a purpose, object, or result, with the signifi- cation of in order that,' or ' in order that not.' These are ut or uti,-qud, ne or ut ne, neve or neu, qurn and quo minus. Kesiark. Ut, as a conjunction indicates either a result or a purpose, ' so that,' and ' in order that.' When indicating a result, if a negative is added to it, it becomes «< w« ; when indicating a purpose, if the negative_is_ added, it, becomes ne or ut ne, but ut non also is very rarely used for ni: — Neve (i. e. velne) Bignilies either ' or in order that not,' or ' and in order that not.' Ut ne is a pleonasm, not difi"ering perceptibly from ne. It is used more frequently by Cicero than by other writers. Quo ne for ne occurs once in Horace. 9. Adversative conjimctions, express opposition, with the signification of 'but.' These are sed, autem, verum, vero, at (poetical ast), at inim, atqu'i, tdmen, attdmen, sedtamen, veruntdmen, dt vero (enimvero ), verumenim, verum, vero, ceterum. Remark, (a.) Sed denotes a direct opposition, and inteiTupts the narrative or argument; autem marks a transition, and denotes at once a coimection and an opposition. Porro, ' further,' denotes progression and transition but not oppo- sition, except m later authors. — Vei-um has a similar relation to vero as sM t: autem. Verum, while it denotes opposition, contanis also an explanation. Ver: connects things which are dillerent, but denotes the point in favor of ^v•hich the decision should be. It thus forms the transition to something more important as in the plu-ase, Jllud vero plane mm est fereiulum, i. e. that which I am about to mention. In affirmative answers vero is often added to the verb ; as, Dasne f Do vero. Hence, when the protasis supplies the place of a question, it is some- times introduced into the apodosis merely to show that it contains an answer. Hence als- vera alone signifies 'yes,' Vike sane, ltd, and etiam. — Enimvero, 'yes, traly,' ' in truth,' does not denote opposition. It sometimes, like vero, forms the transition to that which is most important. The compound verum enim- vero denotes the most emphatic opposition. (6.) At denotes that that which is opposed is equivalent to that which pre- cedes. It frequently follows si, in the sense of ' yet,' or ' at least ' ; as, etsi non sapientissimus, at aniicissimus. It is especially used to denote objections whether of tlie speaker himself or of others. At enim introduces a reason for the objec- tion implied m ai.— By atqui, 'but still,' 'but yet,' or 'nevertheless,' ^ye admit what precedes, but oppose something else to it ; as. Magnum narras, vix credi- bile. Atqui-sic habet. Hor. So, also, when that which is admitted, is made use of to prove the contrary. Fmally, atqu'i is used in syllogisms, when a thing is assumed which had before been leYt undecided; m this case it does not de- note a direct opposition of facts, and may be translated by ' now,' 'but,' 'but now.' — Ceterum, properly ' as for the rest,' is often used by later ^Titers for ted. — Contra ea, in the sense of ' on the other hand,' is used as a conjunction. So ddeo with a pronoun, when it may be translated 'just,' ' precisely,' ' even,' 'indeed,' or an mtensive ' and.' 10. Temporal conjunctions, express time. These are quum, quum prl- num, ut, ut pri'mum, ubi, postquam, antequam, and print- r'^.am, quando, simuldc or simulatque, or si mil alone, *que aum , donee , quoad. %m ft 198. CONJUNCTIONS 175 Remark. Ut and ubl, as particles of time, signify ' when.' Dum, dmt'c, and qnond signify either ' as long as,' or ' until.' iKim often precedes nUerca or ii>- 'Jrim, and both dum and donee are often preceded by the adverbs us(^iie, us themselves in du-ect questions, but only sei-ve to give to a proposition the form of a question. In direct speech the interrogative particles are sometiim-s onatted, but in indircL questions they are indispensable, except in the case oi a double question, where the first particle is sometimes omitted.— -£'c5?«'/ and numquid, !V^ inteiTOgative particles, have the meaning of num, quid in this case Other inten-ogative word. (6.) In direct questions, warn and its compounds numne, numnnm, numquid, numquidnam, and the compounds with en or ec suppose that the answer will be ' no ' ; as, Num putas me tain demeniem fuisse f But ecquid is sometimes used in an affirmative sense. In general the negative sense of these particles does not appear in indirect questions. (c.) Ne properly denotes simply a question, but it is used sometimes affii-ma- tively and sometimes negativelv. When ne is attached, not to the principal verb but to some other word, a'negative sense is produced ; as, mene istud potu- isse facere putas f Do you believe that I would have done thatV The answer expected is 'no.' When attached to the principal verb ne often gives the af- firmative meaning, and the answer expected is ' yes.'— iVowwe is the sign of an affirmative question ; as, Cn7iis nonne lupo similis estf—Uirum, in accordance with its derivation from uter, which of two, is used only in double questions ■whether consisting of two or more. It is sometimes accompanied by ne, which is usu.ally separated from it bv one or more words; as, Ulrum, taceamne an pradicem f In later writers, hoVever, utrumne is united mto one word. Ne is rarely appended to interrogative adjectives, but examples of such use are some- times found in poetry ; as, uter7ie ; quone malo ; quantane. In a few passages it is even attached to the relative pronoun. (c7.) ^M is not used as a sign of an indirect question before the silver ag(!; when so used it answers to ' whether.' It is used by Cicero exclusively in a second or opposite question, where we use ' or ' ; as, (5>i sitis, niUl interest utrura aqua sit, an vinwn ; nee refert, utrum sit aureum poc&lum, an vitreuin, an mnnm concava. Sen. In direct interrogations, when no interrogative clause precedes, in, anne, an vera are likewise used in the sense of ' or,' that is in such a man- aer that a preceding interrogation is supplied by the mind; as, Invltus te offendi, an putas me delectari kedendis hominibus? Here we may supjjly before an doubtful ; as, 4 re6«s ^rcr . - • tt Juventute ac viribus f Is it not from those kinds of business, which V etc. Here ■we may suppose aliisne f to be supplied before an his ? Is it from other kinds of business, or from those? etc. buch questions may be introduced l)y 7umne, but without allusion to an opposite ques'tion, which is implied in an. (e.) To the rule that an, in indirect questions, is used exchisively to indicate a second or opposite question, there is one gi-eat exception, for it is employed in single indirect questions after such expressions as duhUo, dMumest, inrertum est ; delihero, hcesOo, and especially after nescio or haud scio, all of which denote uncertainty, but with an inclination to the affirmative; as, Si per se virtas sine 176 INTERJECTIONS. § 9& fartuna pondtranda sit duhito hvnc primum omnium ponam, If virhie is to be estimated without lef'eveiice to its success, lam not certain whether I should not prefer this man t;o aU otiiers. Nep. It is not Latin to say dubiio annon foi diibilo an. — Nesciu an, or hand scio an are used quite in the sense of ' perhaps,' so that they are followed by the negatives nuUus, nerrM,^ nmnguam, instead of uUus, qziisgu'am a,iid vmguam. When the principal verb is omitted, a» is often used in the sense of azii; as, Tliemistocles, quum ei Simonides, an guis alius, artem memorice 2)olUceretur, etc. In such cases incertum est is understood, and in Tacitus is often supplied.— The conjunction si is sometimes used in indirect interrogations instead of num, like the Greek ti, and it is so used by Cicero after the verb experior. Note 1. The conjunctions -7ie, -gue, -ve, are not used alone, but are always affixed to some other word, and are hence called enclitics. Note 2. Some words here classed with conjunctions are also used as ad- Tsrbs, and many classed as adverbs are likewise conjimctions ; that is, they at the same time qualify verbs, etc., and connect propositions ; as. Ceteris in rebus, quum venit ccdamitas, tum detrimentum accipitur, In other concerns, when mis- fortune comes, then damage is received. Note 3. Conjunctions, like adverbs, are variously compounded with other parts of speech, and with each other; as, ntgue, (i. e. adgue), iccirco or idcirco, (i. e. id-circa), idea, namgue, etc. In some, compounded of an adverb and a conjunction, each of the simple words retains its meaning, and properly belongs to its own class; a", eiiam {et jam) and now; iMgue, and so; neque or nee, and not. INTERJECTIONS. § 199. Ai\ interjection is a particle used in exclamation, and expressing some emotion of the mind. The most usual interjections are, ah! ah! alas! hem! oho! indeed ! well ! hah ! alas ! alat^! aha ! aim ! ah ! haha ! heu ! oh ! ah ! alas ! apage! away! hegcme ! hens! ho! ho there! hark!, haUcal atati o)-at;Ute! oh! ah! alas Ho! hui! hah! ho! oh! au! 01- ban! oh! ah! io! ho! hurrah! huzzah! ecc'e! lo! see! behold! 61 o ! oh! ah! ehem! ha! what! oh! oh! o! ah! eheu ! ah ! alas ! ohe ! ho ! halloa ! ho there ! eho! ehodum! ho! soho! oho! oho! aha! eia! or heia! ah! ah ha! indeed! oi! hop! alas! en! lo! see! behold! ^iq>x\ strange! wonderful' eu ! well done ! bravo ! phui ! foh ! fugh ! euge ! well done ! good! phy ! pish !_ tush ! euax ' ) 7 7 17 If pro ! or pruh ! oh i ah ! encBl I ^'''"'"^'' '*"*■''"'' • St ! hist ! whist ! hnsh ! ha! hold! ho! t&tsel so! strange! hai ha! he! ha! ha! vse! ah/ alas! woe.' Lei! ah! wo! alas! vah! vaha! ah! alas! oh! Remark 1. An interjection sometimes denotes several different smotions. Thus vah is used to express wonder, gi-ief, joy, and anger. Eem. 2. Other parts of speech may sometimes be regarded as interjections; as, 7Jrtx/ be stiU! So indignum, i7if and um, malum, miserum, miserabile, nefas, R-hen used as- expressions of astonishment, gi'ief, or hoiTor; and macte and mncti, as expressions of approbation. In like manner the adverbs na, profecto, pito, bSne, belle ; the verbs quceso, precor, dro, obsecro, amabo, age, agtte, cedo, $odes, (for si audes), s'ls, sultis, (for si vismxAsi vultis), dgesis, dgedum, and d^it dum, and the interrogative quid? wbat? used as exclamations. §200,201. SYNTAX. — PROPOSITIONS. 177 Rem. 3. With the interjections ^may also be classed the following invoca tions of the gods : herculcs, hercule, kerde; or mthercules, meheirule, mehercle , medium fidins, mecastor, ecastor, ecere, pol, edepol, equirine, per deum, per deum immortCdem, per decs, per Jovem, jn-o (or prOh) Jupiter, pro dii imnuyr' tales, jiro deum fidem, pro deum atque hominum fidem, pro deum immo^-talium (scil. fidem), etc. SYNTAX. § SOO. 1. Syntax treats of the coustiniction of sentences. 2. A sentence is a thought expressed in words ; as, Canes latrant, The dogs bark. 3. All sentences are either (1.) Declarative; as, Fen^i spirant, The winds blow : — (2.) Interrogative; ss, Splrantne ventif Do the winds blow ? — (3.) Exclamatory; as, Quam veJiementer spirant vend I How fiercely the winds blow ! — or (4.) Imperative ; as. Vend, spirdte, Blow, winds. 4. The mood of the verb in the first three classes of sentences is either the indicative or the subjunctive; in imperative sentences it is either the imperar- tive or the subjunctive. 5. A sentence may consist either of one proposition or of two or more propositions connected together. PROPOSITIONS. § 301. 1. A proposition consists of a subject and a pre- dicate. 2. The subject of a proposition is that of which something is aifirmed. 3. The predicate is that which is afiu'med of the subject. Thus, in the proposition, Equxis currit, The horse runs, equus is the subject and currit is the predicate. NoTB. The word affirm, as here used, includes all the various significations of th* verb, as expressed in the several moods. 4. Propositions are either principal or subordinate. 5. A principal proposition is one which makes complete sense b/ itself; as, Phocion fuit perpetuo pauper, quum ditissimm ette potaet, Phocwn was always DOW, though he might have been very rich. 178 SYNTAX. SUBJECT. § 202. 6. A subordinate proposition is one which, by means of a subordi- nate conjunction, is made to depend* upon or limit some part of another proposition ; as, Phocion fuit pei"fietuo pmqKT^ quum ditissimus esse posset, Phocion was al ways poor, thuuyh he might have been very nch. 7. Subordinate propositions are used either as substantives, adjec- tives, or adverbs, and are accordingly called substantive, adjective or adverbial propositions or clauses. 8. Substantive clauses are connected with the propositions on which they depend by means of tlie final conjunctions ut, we, quo, quin, etc., sometimes h} quod, and" in clauses containing an mdirect question, by interrogative pronouns, adjectives, adverbs and conjunctions. See §§ 262 and 265. Remark. A dependent substantive clause often takes the form of the accusative with the infinitive and in that case has no connective; as, Gaudeo te valere. 9. Adjective clauses are connected by means of relatives, both pronouns anc pronominal adjectives; as, qui, qudlis, quanius, etc. Adverbial clauses are con nected either by relative adverbs of place and time, (§ 191, R. 1, (6.), or b^ temporal, conditional, concessive, comparative, and sometimes by causal cod- junctions. 10. A sentence consisting of one proposition is called a simple sen tence; as, Cadunt fdlia. The leaves fall. Semirdmis Babylonem concRdit. 11. A sentence consisting of a principal and one or more subordi- nate propositions is called a complex sentence ; as, Qui Jit, ut nemo contentus v'lvat f How happens it, that no one hves content ? Qiiis ego sim, me royitas. You ask me, who I am. 12. A sentence consisting of two or more principal propositions, either alone or in connection with one or more subordinate proposi- tions, is called a compound sentence ; as. Spirant venii et cadunt fdlia, The winds blow, and the leaves fall. 13. The propositions composing a complex or a compound sen- tence are called its viembers ov clauses ; the principal proposition is called the leading clause, its subject, the leading subject, and its verb, the leading verb. SUBJECT. § 30S' 1. The subject also is either simple, complex, or compound. 2. The simple subject, which is also called the grammatical sub- ject, is either a noun or some word standing for a noun ; as, Aves vdlant, Birds tiy. Tu legis, Thou readest. A est v6cdlis, .4 is a vowel. Mentiri est turpe. To he is base. 3. The complex subject, called also the logical subject, consists of the simple subject with its modifications ; as, Conscientia bene actae vitK est jucundissima. The consaousness f a well tment Hfe is very pleasant. Here conscientia is the grammatical, and conscientia ohi* acta vUoB the compi as, subject. § 202. SYNTAX. SUBJECT. 179 4. The compound subject consists of two or more simple or com- plex subjects to which a single predicate belongs ; as, Luna et steWos fide/ebant, The moon and sla7-$ were shining. GrammaHce ac mvL^icod jitncice J^erunt, Gi-ammar and 7»Msic were united. Semper honoa no- tneuque tuum luudes(/«e mdnibunl. Remark. Words are said to modify or limit otlier words, when .hey servo to ex])lain, describe, define, enlarge, restrict, or otherwise quaUfy their mean- -i«g- 5. Every sentence must contain a subject and a predicate, called its principal or essential parts : any sentence may also receive addi- tions to these, called its subordinate parts. Complex or Modijied Subject. 6. The complex subject is formed by adding other words to the simple subject. All additions to the subject, like the subject itself, are either simple, complex, or compound. I. Simple additions. The subject may be modified by adding : — 1. A single word: — (1.) A noun in the same case; as, Nos consules desumus, We consuls are remiss. Mucins augur multa narrdvil, Mucins the auyur related many things. (2.) A noun or pronoun in an oblique case, modifying or limiting the subject ; as, Ainor multitudinis commovvtur, The love of the multitude is excited. Cura mei, Cjire for me. Viribus usus, Need of strength. (3.) An adjective, adjective pronoun, or participle ; as, Fiigit invida cetns. Envious time flies. Mea mater est benigna. Ducit agnUna Penthesilea furens. Litera scripta mdnet. 2. A phrase consisting of a preposition and its case ; as, Sdpor in gramine. Opplda sine praesidio. Receptio ad te. 3. A dependent adjective clause introduced by qui, qudlis, quari' tus, etc. ; as, Lece ft, quod bene fertur, dnus. The burden, which is borne well, becomes light. Literce, quas scripsisti, acceptcB sunt. Ut, qiialis (ille) haberi vellet, talis esset. Tanta est inter eos, quanta maxima esse potest, morum distaniia. n. Complex additions. The subject may be modified : — 1. By a roord to which other words are added. (1.) AVhen the word to which other words are added is a noun oi pronoun, it may be modified in any of the ways above mentioned. (2.) When it is an adjective it may be modified : — (a.) By an adverb either simple or modified ; as, Krai exspectatiovaXAe magna. P rcesidium non nimis fi'inum. (Ii.) By a noun in an oblique case; as, Mdjiir pietdte, Superior in piety. Contentionis cupidus, Fond of contention Phtfi similis, Like liis father. I^Hdus membra. Juvenes patre digni. 180 SYNTAX. — SUBJECT § 208. (c.) By an infinitive, a gerund, or a supine ; as, Insuctus vinci, Not accustomed to be conquered. Venandi stMiosus. Fond oj huntina- Mlrablle dictu, Wonderful to tell. (tZ.) By a plirase consisting of a preposition and its case ; as, Rudis in republlca, Unskilled in civil affairs. Ab equitatu firmus. Celer in pugnam. Promts ad f idem. (e.) By a subordinate clause ; as, Meliar est certapax, quam spei-ata victoria, A certain peace is better thxi an expected victory. Dubvus sum, quid f aciam. (3.) When it is a participle, it may be modified like a verb. See § 203. 2. By a phrase consisting of a preposition and its case to whicb otier words are added ; as, De victoria CaBsaris fama perfertur, A report concerning Cxsar's victory \e brought. Remark 1. As the case following the preposition is that of a noun or pro- noun, it may be modified like the subject in any of the foregoing ways. Rem. 2. The preposition itself may be modified by an adverb, or by a noun or adjective in an oblique case ; as, Longe ultra, Far beyond. Multo ante noctem. Long before night. Sexennio poit Veios captos, Six years after the capture of Veii. 3. By a subordinate clause, to whose subject or predicate othei words are added. Remark. These additions may be of the same form as those added to the principal subject or predicate of the sentence. TTT. Compound additions. The subject may be modified : — 1. By two or more nouns in the same case as the subject, connect- ed by a coordinate conjunction ; as, Consules, Brutus et CoUatinus, The consuls, Brutus and Collaiinus. 2. By two or more oblique cases of a noun or pronoun connected cobrdinately ; as, Yit2eqite necisque pdtestas. Periculorum et lahorum incUdmentum. 3. By two or more adjectives, adjective pronouns, or participles, connected codrdinately ; as, Grave bellum perdiiiturnumgwe. Animi teneri atque molles. 4 . By two or more adjective clauses connected codrdinately ; as, Et ijui f ecere, et qiii facta alionim scripsere, multi laudantur. Sail. 5. By two or moi'e of the preceding modifications connected codr- dinately; as. Genus liommum agi-este, sine legibus, sine imperio, liberum, atque solutum. Rem. 1. A modified grammatical subject, considered as one com- plex idea, may itself be modified ; as, Omnia tua consilia, All thy counsels. Here omnia modifies, not conailia, hvi the complex idea expressed by tua consilia. So Triginta naves hnga. Praepi^ ens fltUtimus rex. §203. SYNTAX. PREDICATR. 181 Rem. 2. An infinitive, -with the words connected with it, may b« the logical subject of a proposition ; as, Virtus est vitium fugere. To sJmn vice is a virtue. Rem. 3. A clause, or any member consisting of two or more clauses, may be the logical subject of a proposition ; as, H cmh descendit ' Nosce te ipsum.' ^quum est, ut hoc f iicies. Rem. 4. The noun or pronoun which is the subject of a proposi- tion is put in the nominative, when the verb of the predicate is a finite verb ; but when the verb is in the infinitive, the subject is put in the accusative. NcTK 1. A verb in any mood, except the infinitive, is called a finite verb. Note 2. In the foUowiug pages, when the term subject or predicate is used alone, th« grammatical subject or predicate is intended. PREDICATE. § 303. 1- The predicate, like the subject, is either simple^ complex, or compound. 2. The simple predicate, which is also called the grammatical pre- dicate, is either a single finite verb, or the copula sum with a noun, adjective, and rarely with an adverb ; as, Sol liicet, The snn shines. Multa animdlia repunt. Many animals creep Brevls est t'(5 "y'i".s, Pleaswce is biHef Europa est peninsiila, Europe is a per ninsiila. Rectissime sunt apicd te omnia. 3. The complex predicate, called also the logical predicate, con- sists of the simple predicate with its modifications ; as, Scipio fudit Aiinibalis copias, Scipio routed the forces of Hannibal. Her« fiidit is the fi^i-ammatical, and fudit Annibdlis copias the logical predicate.— So, Romulus Ilomanse conditor lu-bis fuit. 4. The compouhd predicate consists of two or more simple or com- plex predicates belonging to the same subject; as, Prdbitas laudatur et alget. Honesty, is jpraised and neglected. Leti vis rapuit^ rapietque gentes. Lucius Catillna fuit magna vi et animi et corporis, sea in- genio malo pravoqne. Complex or Modified Preancate. 5. The complex predicate is formed by adding other words to the gmiple predicate. AH additions to the predicate, like the predicate itself, are either simple, complex, or compound. L Simple additions. The predicate may be modified by adding: — 1. A single word ; — (1.) A noun or adjective in the same case as the subject. This occurs after certain neuter verbs and passive verbs of naming, call- ing, etc. (See § 210, R. 3.) ; as, iSie/-v;(s_^< liliertlnus, The shive becomes a freedman. Serviv^ Tullius tex ea decldraius. Aristides jxistus ist appelldtus. Inci-do regina. (2.) A nonn or pronoun in an oblique case ; asj Spe vlvimm, We liveJft^ hope Deus regit mundum, Grod rules the toorld. IB 182 SYNTAX. PREDICATE. §203 (3.) An adverb either simple or modified ; as, Sajpe vcnk, He came often. Festlna lente, Hasten skmiy. Liiera ficUe dia euntur. Chremes nimis gi-aviter crucial adOlescentulum. (4.) An infinitive mood ; as, CXipil discere, He desires to learn. Audeo dicere. Ver esse cosperat. 2. A phrase consisting of a preposition and its case ; as, Venit ad nrbeni, He came to the city. 3. A dependent substantive or adverbial clause ; as, Vei'eor ne repreliendar, I fear that T shall be blamed. ZenOnem, quum Athenia essem, audiibam frequenter. Fdc cogites. II. Complex additions. The predicate may be modified : — 1. By a word to -whicli other words are added. Remark. These words are the same as in the corresponding cases of com- plex additions to the subject. See § 202, 11. 2. By a phrase consisting of a preposition and its case, to which other words are added. See complex additions to the subject, § 202. 3. By a subordinate clause, to whose subject or predicate other words are added. See complex subject, § 202, 11, 3. Rkm. 2. Each of the words constituting a proposition may be modified by two or more additions not dependent on, nor coimected with each other, and consisting either of single v/ords, phrases, or dependent clauses; as, Agamem- nonis belli gloria. Patenuim ddium erga Romanos. Mens sibi conscia recti. Mea maxime interest, te adCre. Ago tibi giTitias. Meipsum inertice condemno. Eos hoc mdneo. In quo te accUso. MCnet eum, ut suspiciones vitet. m. Compound additions. 1. The predicate may be modified by two or more words, phrases, or clauses, joined together by a coordi- nate conjunction. See Compound additions to the subject, § 202, IQ 2. The leading verb is usually either in the indicative or impera tive mood, but sometimes in the subjunctive or the historical infin- itive. 3. The members of a compound sentence are connected by coordi- nate conjunctions; those of a complex sentence by some relative word, or by a subordinate conjunction. 4. Instead of a dependent clause connected by a conjunction, a noun and participle, or two nouns, sometimes stand as an abridged proposition ; as, Bello confecto discessit, i. e. qimm bellum confectwm esset, discessit. The wfir being finished, or when the war was finished, he departed. Nil desperarulvm, Teucro diice. 5. All Infinitive may be modified like the verb of a predicate. 6. Agreement is the correspondence of one word with anothei ia gender, number, case, or person. 7. A word is said to govern another, when it requires it to be put m a certain case or mood. 8. A word is said to depend on another, when its case, gender Dumber, mood, tense, or person, is determined by that word. 9. A word is said to follow another, when it depends upon it in construction, whatever may be its position in the sentence. §204. SYNTAX. — APPOSTTKN. 18iJ APPOSITION. § 304r. A noun, annexed to another noun or to a protounj and denoting the same person or thing, is put in the same case as, Ui-bs Roma, The city Rome. Nos consules, We consuls. So Apiid Berocldtum-^ patrem Idstdrice, sunt inmimernhiles fabUlcB, In Herodotus, the/cfrter of history, etc. Cic. Xn/)iV/es silices, ^tn< stones. Liv. Anttrrn consiilem, BeforG I was xxmtul. Fons cui nomen Arethiisa est. Cic. Kesiakk 1. (a.) A noun, thns annexed to another, is said to be in apposition to it. It is generally added for the salce of exphinatijn, identification, or de- scription; sometimes it denotes character or purpose; as. Ejus faijm ctruteiii me adjanxl, I added myself, as a companion of his flight; and sometimes t^e time, cause, reason, etc., of an action; as, Alexander puer, Alexander when a boy. Cuto senex scrlbere Mstdriam instituit. Suet. (b.) A noun in apposition, like an adjective iised as an epithet, (§ 205, N. 2,) assumes the attribute denoted by it as belonging to the noun whicli it limits, while the predicate-nominative affirms it. Hence both nouns belong to tho pame part of the sentence, whether subject or predicate. In cases of apposi- tion, there seems to be an ellipsis of the ancient participle ens, being; qui est, who is ; qui vocdtur, who is called ; or the like. Rem. 2. If the annexed noun has a form of the same gender as the other noun, it takes that fonn ; as, Usus magister egreyius. Win. Fhilosdphia magis- tra v'llce. Cic. If the annexed noun is of the common gender, the adjective qualifying it takes the gender of the preceding noun ; as, Laurus fidissinui custos. Rem. 3. The annexed noun sometimes dilTers from the other in gender or in number; as, Duo fulmina belli, Scipiadas, cladem Lihyce. Virg. Miiyleme, urbs tiobilis. Cic. Tullidln, deYic'ioi nostrce. Id.; — and sometimes in both; as, Nate, viem vires. Virg. Nos, animse viles, inhwmlta injittiique turba. Id. Rem. 4. The substantive pronoun is sometimes omitted before the word in apposition to it; as, Consul aixi, scil. ego; (I) the consul said. And instead of tlie substantive pronoun, a possessive adjective pronoun is sometimes used; as, Tua ddmus, talis viri. Cic. See § 211, R. 3, (b.) Rem. 5. A noun may be in apposition to two or more nouns, and, in such case, is usually put in the plural ; as, M. Antonius, C. C'assius, tribiini plebis, M. Autonius, d. Cassius, tribunes of the people. Cks. Publiuset Servius Sullse, Servi fUii. Sail. Tib. et Gains Gracchi. Cic. Oraiiones L. et C. Aurelionim Orestarum. Id. But sometimes in the singular; as, Cn. et L. Domitius. Cic. (1.) So when the nouns are connected by cu7n, the annexed noun taking the case of the former; as, Diccearchum vero cum Arisloxeno, doctos sane hom- ines, omittamus. Cic. ^'\.) If the nouns are proper names of different genders, a masculine noun is an;:?xed rather than a feminine, when both forms exist; as, Ad Ptolemawn Ckqpatramque reges legati missi sunt. Liv. Rem. 6. The annexed noun is sometimes in the genitive; as, Urbem Patavl Iccavil, The citj of I'atavium. Virg. Plwimus Eridani amnis. Id. Arbdrem fici numquam viderat. Cic. In ojipldo Antiochiie. Id. Ruplli et Persi jtar. Hor. Rem. 7. The name of a, town in the genitive occurs with an ablative in ap- position to it; as, Connthi Achaice urbe; At Corinth, a city of Achaia. Tac. AntiochicE, celebri urbe. Cic. See ^ 221, Note, and § 254, Rem. 3. Rem. 8. (a.) A proper name, after nomen or cognomen, with a verb followed by a dative, is put in ap]iosition either to ncmen, etc., or to the dative, the latter by_ a species of attraction ; as, Fons, cui nomen Arethusa est. Cic. Stirps virilit, ctti Ascanium paren!€$ dixere ndmen. Liv. Nomen Arcturo est mihi, I have the 1 84 SYNTAX. — ADJECTIVES. § 205. name Arcturas. Plaut. Cui nvnc cognomen lulo additnr. Virg. Cut Xgerio iru&- lumnomen. Liv. — (6.) The name may also be put in the genitive; as, Nomcn Merciirii est mihi. Plant. Q. Mtfellus, cui Macedonici nomen imlitum. eral. Veil. Cf. R. 6. — (c.) In Ilia ntas, cui fecimus Aurea nomen, Ov. Met. 15, 96, Anrea is used as an indeclinable noun, inateiid of Aweam {soil, letdtem) ; or Aui-ece dat. (scU. cetati.) Eem. 9. A clause may supply the plaee of one of the nouns; as, Oagiiet ora- t5rem institui — rem arctuam, Let him reflect that an orator is training — a diffi- cult thing. Quint. — So also a neuter adjective used substantively; as, Trista lupus stabuUs, The wolf, a sad thing to the folds. Vii-g. Varium et mutabilo semper' femina. Id. Eem. 10. Sometimes the former noun denotes a whole, and its parts are ex- pressed by nouns in apposition to it; as, Onerdrice, pars maodma ad jEgimurum^ — aliiB adversus urbem ipsam delcltce sunt, The ships of burden were earned, the greatest part, to Jilgimurus, — others opposite to the citj^ itself. Liv. Pictores et poeicB suum quisque dpiis a- vulgo considerdri vult. Cic. In the construction of the ablative absolute, quisque remains in the nominative, though the word to wliich it is in apposition is in the ablative ; aS, Mullis sibi quisque inipiirium pefentilius. Sail. J. 18. So also, in Liv. 26, 29, quisque remains' in the nomina- tive although the word to which it is in apposition is Ln the accusative with the infinitive. To this rale may be subjoined that which relates to the agreement of inter- rogative and responsive words. Rem. 11. The principal noun or pronoun in the answer to a ques- tion, must be in the same case as the corresponding interrogative word ; as, Quis herus est iibi ? Amphitruo, scO. est. Who is your master? Amphitruo (is.) Plaut. Quid qucei-isf Librum, scil. qucero. What are you looking for? A book. Quota hord venisti ? Sexta. At what hour did you come ? At the sixth. Note 1. Instead of the genitive of a substantive pronoun, the corresponding possessive pronoun is often used, agreeing with its noim; us, Cvjns, est liber i Mens, (not Mei.) (See § 211, Rem. 3, (b.) So cujum for genitive cujiis? Ciijum pecusf an Mtlibaif Non; vvi-um JEgonis. Virg. Note 2. Sometimes the rules of syntax require the responsive to be in a different case from that of the interrogative; as, Quanti enustif Viginti minis, Damnatusne is furti? Jmo alio crimiue.. See §§ 214, R. 1, and 217, R. 2. ADJECTIVES. § 30^. Adjectives, adjective pronouns, and participles, Rgree with their nouns, in gender, number, and case ; as, Bdnus vir, A good man. Bdnos inros, Good men. Benigna mater, A kind mother. Vdna leges, Useless laws. Trisie bellum, A sad war. Mindcia verba, Threatening Trords. Spe amissd, Hope being lost. Hcec res. This thing. So, Mea mater est benigna. JJcBc leges vdnce sunt. Note 1. Adjectives, according to their meaning, (^ 104), are divided into two classes — qualifying and limiting — the former denoting some property or miality of a noun ; as, a wise man, lead is heavy ; the latter defining •r restricting its meaning; as, ^/( is man, ?e?i cities. To the foitner class belong such adjec- tives as denote a property or quality, including all participles and participia. adjectives; to the latter, the adjective p^jnouns, pronominal adjectives, ana numerals. § 205. SYNTAX. — ADJECTIVES. 18.1 Note 2. An adjective, participle, or pronoun, may either be Ti:?ed rs an epi tliet to modify a noun, or, with the copnla sum, may constitute a predicate 1(1 the former case the quality is assumed, in the latter it is assei-tcd. In both cases, the rule for their agreement is, in general, the same. See ^ 210, E. 1. Note 3. Any word or combination of words added to a noun to moony or limit its meaning is of the nature of an adjective. Note 4. In the following remarks, the word a/fjective is to be considered as incladlijg participles, either alone or combined with the auxiliary *«»!, and also adjective pio- Douns, unless the contrary is intimated. Remark 1. An adjective agrees also with a substantive pronoun, taking its gender from that of the noim for which the pronoun stands ; as. Ipse capellm se^er ago, soil, ego, Melibceus ; Virg. Fortunate puer, tu nunc ei-is alter ab illo. Id. Ut se totxxxa ei trdderet. Nep. me miser urn (spoken by a man), nnseramme (spoken by a woman). So salvi siimvs, srdvce sumus, scil. nos, masculine or feminine. — In general propositions which include both sexes, the pronouns are considered masculme ; as, Nos fruges conswmere nati. Hor. Rem. 2. An adjective may belong to each of two or more nouns, and in such case is put in the plural. If the nouns are of the same gender, the adjective agrees with them in gender, as well as in num- ber; as, Lupus et agnus sTti compulsi, A wolf and a Iamb, constrained by thirst. Phsed. Sicilia Sardi'iidque amissaj. Liv. AATien the nouns are of different genders, (1.) Kthey denote living things, the adjective is masculine rather than feminine ; as, Pater viihi et mater mortui sunt, My father and mother are dead. Ter. So also uterque in the singular. Procumbit uterque, scU. Deucalion et Pyrrha. Ovid. (2.) If they denote things without life, the adjective is generally neuter; as, Eis genus, cetas, eloquentia pi-dpe seqnalin fuere. Their family, age, and elo- quence, were nearly equal. Sail. Regna, imperia, nobilitates, honores, divltice in casu sita sunt. Cic. ITuic bdla, raplncB, discordia civllis, gi-ata fuere. SaU. Anima atque animus, quamv'is integra recens in corjnis eunt. Lucr. Note. When nouns denoting things without life are of the sam.e gender (either masculine or feminine), but of different numbers, the adjective is some- times neuter; as, Ch-o>so et vita et patrimonii partes, et ttrbs Barce concessa iunt. .Just.; sometimes also when both nouns are in the singular number; as, Pleroscjue velocUas et regio hostibus igndra tutata sunt. SaU. Nox atque prasda remoruta sunt. Id. (3.) If one of the nouns denotes an animate, and another an inan- imate thing, the adjective is sometimes neuter, and sometimes takes the gender of that which has life ; as, Numida atque signa milituria obscnrati sunt. The Numidians and the military standards were concealed. Sail. Romani rcgem regnmnnue Ifaceddnice sua futiira sciunt. Liv. Jane, fac SEternos pacem pacisque mintstros. Ovid. Exc. to Rem. 2. The adjective often agrees with the nearest noun, and is understood witli the rest ; as, SOciis et rege recepto, Our com' anions and king having been recovered Virg. Agri oranes et maria. Cic. CogrAtum est salutem, liberos, famam, for' tunoi ease canssimas. Cic. 16* 186 SYNTAX. — ADJECTIVES. § 205. Note. A norm in tho sinp^lar, followed by an ablative ■w'ii\ cum, has some- times a plural adjective, the gender being the same as if the nouns ivere con- nected by ei ; as, Filiam cum filio ac Jitos. Liv. Jlia cum Lauso de Nuiml&rt sati. Ovid. FUium Alexandn cum matre in arcem custodiendos miiiit. Just. Rem. 3. (1.) An adjective qualifying a collective noun is often put in the plural, taking the gender of the individuals wliich the noun denotes; as, Pars certare parati, A part, prepared to contend. Virg. Pars per agra dilapsi suam quisque spem exsequentes. Liv. Supplex turba erant sine judm tuti. Ovid. This construction alwavs occurs when the collective noun is the subject of a plural verb. See § 209, "K. 11. ■2.) Sometimes, though rarely, an adjective in the singular takes the gendti of the individuals; as. Pars arduus altis pulverulentus e'/i«s yurii. Virg. Pan una diicum — fractus morbo. Ovid. (.3.) Sometimes other nouns, which onlj' in a figurative sense denote human beings, have by si/nesis an adjective of a different gender from their own, refer- ring to the words which they include; as, Lutimn Ciqmuque ayro mulctati Latium and Capua were deprived of their land. Liv. Chp'ita conjuratidnia dr- gis ciesi ac securi percussi sunt. Id. Auxllia irati. Id. So after millia; as, Dim millia Tyriorum, crucibus affix i. Curt. Cf. § 323, 3, (4.) Rem. 4. Two adjectives in the singular are sometimes joined to a plural noun; as, Maria TyiThenum atque Adriaticum, The Tuscan and Adriatic seas. Liv. Cum legionibus secunda et tertia. Liv. Circa portas CoUinam Esquili- namque. Id. But sometimes the noun is in the singular; as. Inter EsqiiUlnam Ckilinamque portam. Id. Legio Martia et quarta. In comic writers, an adjec- tive or participle in the singular is sometimes used with a plural pronoma; as, Nobis prwsente. Plant. Absente nobis. Ter. Re3I. 5. A participle which should regularly agree with the subject of a proposition, when placed after the noun of the predicate, {a) sometimes takes the gender and number of the latter; as, Non omnis error stultUia est dicenda, Not every error is to be called folly. Gic. Gens universa Venetl appellati. Liv. (6.) Sometimes also it agrees with a noun following the subject and in apposi- tion to it; as, Cunntkum, patres vestri, iotius Grcecice lumen, exstinctum esse vdluerunt. Cic; or (c) with the noun of a subordinate sentence; as, JllOrum urbem ut propugniiciilum oppositum esse barbdris. Nep. Rem. 6. When the subject of an infinitive is omitted after a dative of the same signification, (§ 239, R. 1,) an adjective in the predicate, belonging to that subject^ is sometimes put in the dative; as, Mihi negligent! esse non licvit, i. e. me negiigentem esse mini non Ucuit. Cic. Da mihi justo sancto5'?ie videri. Hor. A noun is sometimes expressed with the adjective; as, Vobis necesse esi fortibus esse \iris. Liv. But the adjective often agrees with the omitted sub- .ject; as, Jicpedit bonas esse vobis, scil. vos. Ter. Si clvi Romano licet ess( (xadltanum. Cic. Rkm. 7. (1.) An adjective is often used alone, especially in th ' plural, the noun, with which it agrees, being understood ; as, Boni sunt rCiri, scil. hdmines, Good (men) are rare. Cesar suos mmt. ?r2 . mllites, Cajsar sent his (soldiers). Dextra, scil. mdnus, Tlie right (hand* /;«- plentur pingids f erinte, scil. carnis. Virg. H'tberna, scil. cas/ra. Ahum scil. widre. Quartdnn, scil. febris. ImmortCdes, scU. Dii. Lucr. Amantium, scil. lOtm- num. Ter. Jllum indignanti similem, similemque minanti nspiceres, scil. himini. Virg. Tibi primas dPfero, scil. partes. Cic. Reqnce praetvritum, scil. teinjnis^ which is often omitted, as in ex quo, ex eo, and ex illo, scil. tevipOre. Cogiiiyvi ex uieoi'utn omnium Uteris, scil. dmadrwsn. Cic. So patrial adjectives; ;is, Mitsi ad Parthum Armeuiumque legdti sail, regem. In TuscOluno, scil tyra-dic'. §205. SYNTAX. ADJECTIVES. 187 Note 1. The noun to be supplied with mascnline adjectives is commonly \6mincs, but wlien they are posessives, it is oftener drnUi, mllites, elves, or /wo pinqiii. Note 2. The nouu to be supplied is often contained in a preceding clause. (2.) An adjectiA'e in the neuter gender, without a noun, is often used substantively, where, in English, the word thing or things is to be supplied ; as, Bunion, a good th ilia:; mrtfom, a bad thing, or, an evil. So honestum, veruM, tvrpe; and in the plural, bdna, mala, turpia, levia, ccelentia, etc. LdbiT oinm» in«cj7, Labor overcomes all things. Virg. Note 1. The Latins generally prefen-ed adding 7-es to an adjective, to using its neuter as a substantive. But sometimes, when res is used, an i omnia plilna. scil. sunt. Virg. Rem. 8. (a.) Imperatives, infinitives, adverbs, clauses, and words considered merely as such, may be used substantively, and take a neuter adjective in the singular number; as, Supremum vale dixit. He pronounced a last farewell. Ovid. Dulce et decorum est pro pati-ia mori. Hor. Velle suum cidque est. Pei-s. Cras istud f/uando venitf Mart. J. Redibo actutum. A. Id actiitum diu est. Plant. Excepto quod non simul esses, cetera Icetus. Hor. (6.) In the poets and later prose wTiters the adjective, as in Greek, is sometimes in the neuter plural ; as, Ui u^Lm'as pilugo jaciciur — nota tibi. Vu'g. Rem. 9. {a.) Adjectives and adjective pronouns, instead of agreeing with their nouns, are sometimes put in the neuter gender, with a partitive signification, and their nouns in the genitive; as, Multum tempdris, for multum iempus ; iriucb time. Id rei, for ea res ; that thing. So, plus elogueiUicB, the other form not being admissible with plus. (See § 110, (b.) Neuter adjectives are used in like manner in the plural; as, Vana rerum, for vdwe res. Hor. Pleraque huiiid- ndrum rerum. Sail. Cf. § 212, R. 3, N. 4. But in some such exam])les, the ad- Jec'^lve seems to be used substantively, according to Rem. 7,(2); as, Acuta oelU. Hor. Telluris operta. Virg. Summa pectoris. Note. The adjectives thus used partitively in the singular, for the most part, signify quaiititj'. See § 212, Rem. 3, Note 1. Rem. 10. A neuter adjective is sometimes used adverbial!}' in the nomina- tive or acciisative, both singular and plural ; as, Dulce r'ldentem Ldlugi.n dviib-}, dulce lOquentem. Hor. Magnum strldens. Virg. Anna hon-endum sOmu'rt. Id. ^li\\ta deos vcu'irdti sunt. Cic. i/y(ZJe «Mi summum c»"«s. Id. See § 192, II. 4, (6.) Rem. 11. (a.) A noun is sometimes used as an adjective; as, Nemo 7/i(/e4 Rcmdnus, No Roman soldier. Liv. Nemo fere dddlescens. Cic. Vir namo bonus. Id. Cf. § 207, R. 31, (c. ) Tibiirim accblis Jluviis arbdlum. Tac. Incola turba. OAid. The poets use in this manner the Greek patronymics in as and is; as, Pilius hasla. Ovid. Laurus Parndsis. Id. Ursa Libystis. Virg. Cf. also S 129, 8. (b.) An adverb is jlso sometimes used as an adjective; as, Neque inim ignuri sumus ante milarum- i.e. antiqiwrum or prmteritm'um. Virg. Nana hdminv.m 7ndret Plaut 188 * STNTAX. ADJECTIVES. § 205 Rem. 12. (a.) An adjective or adjective pronoun, used partiti-My, stands alone, and commonly takes the gender of the genitive phiral, whiol depends upon it; but when it is preceded by a noun of a diftereut gender, to which it refers, it usually takes that gender, but sometimes that of the genitive; as^ Elqjhanto belluarum nulla est prudentior, No beast is wiser than the elephant. Cic. Indus, qui est omnium Jlmnnum maximus. Cic. Velocissimum omnium animAlium est deljJnnus. Plin. See § 212, Rem. 2.—(h.) So also with de, ear, in, dpud, inter, etc., with the ablative or accusative instead of the partitive geni- tiv3. See §212, R. 2, N. 4. ';.) tVhen a collective noun follows in the genitive singular, (§ 212, R. 2.) the adjective takes the gender of the individuals which compose it; as, Vir for- tissimiis nostrcB clvUatis, The bravest man of our state. Cic. Maximus stirpii Liv. Rem. 13. (^ ) When a possessive pronoun or adjective is used instead of the genitive of its primitive or of its con-esponding noun (see ^ 211, R. 3, (b.) md (c.) and R. 4), an adjective agreeing with that genitive_ is sometimes joined with such possessive; as, Solius meum jieccdtum corriyi not) pdtest, The fault of me alone cannot be corrected. Cic. Noster duorum cvenliis. Liv. Tuum ipsius stiidium. Cic. Pugna Romana stabiUs suo pondere incumbentium in hog- tern. Liv. (b.) Sometimes a noun in the genitive is expressed, in apposition to the sub- stantive pronoun for which the possessive stands ; as. Pectus tuum, hominis simpllcis. Cic. Rem. 14. An adjective, properly belonging to the ' genitive, is sometimes fiitis, for majorum. M. lis nominibus clvitdtum, quibus ex cieitdtibus, etc., for edrum clvitdtum. Ctes. Rem. Id. (a.) An adjective agreeing with a noun is sometimes used, instead of an adverb qualifying a verb, especiallj' in poetry; as, Ecce venit Teldmon properus, Lo, Telamon comes in haste. Ovid. LaJti pdcem df/iidbdmits, for late. Sail. JSneas se matutinus dffcbat, for mane. Virg. Nee lupus greglbus noctur- nus dbambulut, i. e. by night. Id. (6.) So 7iullus is used for non; as, Memlni ~ scripsisti, coram videfniuus ; scil. de rrbus. In regard to tbe things of wliich yi/u wrote to me, we will consider when we meet. Cic. r% qwQxw i>tlnmm I gressi su/H locum, Troja vdcdtur ; sell, l/jcus. Liv. l^uanta vi expelunt, 'nntd defi'vhint. Quales^ae visits hram vldisse viros, ex orcUne tales aspicio. OvM. * • 190 SYNTAX. PRONOUNS RELATIVES. § 2«6 (a.) The ilace of the antecedent is sometimes supplied by n deinoiiyitrati\fl pronoun; sa, Ad quas res (iptissmi erimus, in us jMtissimuyn ek'ibdrdbimus. Cic. But the demonstrative is often omitted when its case is tlie same as that. of the relative, and not unfrequently, also, when the cases are different. When the relative clause precedes that'of the antecedent, is is expressed only for the sake of emi)luisis. Hence we find such sentences as. Maximum orndrntntum dmlci- tke toUU, qui ex ed tolUt verecundiam. Cic. Terra quod accepit, numquam sine iisuru reddit. Id. — The demonstrative adjectives and adverbs are in like manner often omitted before their corresponding relatives; talis before qudlis, tnmus bo- fore quantus, inde before unde, ibi before iibi, etc. (b.) Sometimes the latter noun only is expressed, oven when the relati-vd rlause does not precede; as, Quis non mdldrum quas amor- cQras hdbet, hac inter OuUmcilur f Hor. (4.) Sometimes neither noun is expressed ; tHs happens especially when the antecedent is designedly left indefinite, or when it is a sub- stantive pronoun ; as, Qui bene lutidt, bene vixit, scil. hdma, (He) who has well escaped notice^ has lived well. Ovid. Sunt quos curricuh j^dixreni Olt/mptcum collegisse jtivat, scil. homines, There are whom it delights, i. e. Some delight. Hor. No7i hdbeo quod te nccilsem, scil. id propter quod. Cic. Non solum sapiens mderis, qui hinc cdisis, sed etlnm bedtus, scil. tu. Cic. {6.) The relative is sometimes either entirely omitted; as, Ui-bs anViqua fiiit; Tyrii tenucre coloni, scil. quam or earn, There was an ancient city (which) Tjn-ian colonists possessed, Virg. ; or, if once expressed, is afterwards omitted even wlien, if supplied, its case" would be different; as, Bocihus cura pedilibus, quos filius ejus adduxerat, neque in pi-iore pugna adfmrant, Romdnos invddunt, for et qui non in priore, etc. Sail. (6.) (a.) The relative sometimes takes the case of the antecedent, instead of its own proper case; as, (Juum scribas et dllquid dgas eorum, quorum constiesti, for qtuB. Cic. Rajitijii quibus quisque ])dterai eldtis, exibant, for iis, qua quisque efferre pdterat, eldtis. Liv. (b.) The antecedent likewise sometimes takes the case of the relative, the substantive either preceding or following the pronoun; as, Urbem quam statue vestra est, for urbs. Virg. tunuchum quem dedisli nobis, quas turbas dedit! for Eunuclius. Ter. Nancratem quem eonvenlre rdlui, in ndvi_non erat. Plant. Atque alii, quorum eomaidia prisca ^aroram est, for utque alii viri, quorum est. Hor. llli, scripta qnilnis comx£dia prisca viris est, for itli vi~i, quibus. Id Quos pueros mlseram, epistolam mild attulerunt. Cic. These conetructions are said to occur by attracthn. (7.) (a.) An adjective, which properly belongs to tlie antecedent, is some- times placed in the relative clause, and agrees with the relative; as. Inter jdcos, qwos maowAitos juviunt, (or jocos ineonditos, quos, etc. Amidst the ruda jests which they utter. Liv. Verbis, quae magna volant. Virg. Galore, quem naultum hdbet. Cic. (6.) This is the common position of the adjective, when it is a numeral, a comparative, or a superkttice ; as, Nocte quam in terris ultimam egit. The last nig. t which he spent upon earth. jEscHldpius, qui pnmus vulnus obligdvisse dKii'Ur. Cic. Consiliis pdre, quse nunc pulcherrima Nautes dat senicn; Listen to tJie excaUent advice, which, etc. Virg. Some instances occur in which an ad) 3ctive belonging to the relative clause, is placed ui that of the antecedent; as', Quum vlnissent ad vada Volaterrana, qu£B nomlnantur, Which are caUed Volatenan. Cic. (8.) When to the relative or demonstrative is joined a noun ex- planatory of its antecedent, but of a different gender or number, the pjlative or demonstra! Ive usually agrees with that noun ; as, §206 SYNTAX. PRONOUNS RELATIVES. 191 Santdnes mm Imige a IVlosdfium fjHibus abswii, q\\x ci\itas est in provincid The Santones are not tar distant from the borders of the Tolosutes, which State is h' the pnn'ince. Cses. Ante coinilia, quod tempus hnid loiifje dherat. SalL Mfmne J dnum Di('in(e pdjmli Lat'ini cu7n pojndo Romano fech-unt : ea erai confessio caput r?rum. Romaui esse ; i. e. that thing or that act. Liv. Si omnia facienda sunt, qiue iimici velirH, non dmJcitice tales, sed conjurationes pufandce sunt; i. e. such things or such connections. Cic. So, Ista quidem vis, Surely this is force. Ea ipsa causa belli fuit, for id ipsum. Hither also may be refer- red such explanatory sentences as, Qui meus amor in ie est, Such "is ray love for you. Cic. (9.) II' the relative refers to one of two nouns, denoting the same i'bject, but of ditFereut genders, it agrees with either; as, F lumen est Arar quod in Rhdddnum influit-. Cjes. Ad fiHrnen Oxum perverttm ini, qui turbidus semper est. Curt. (10.) When, in a relative clause containing the verb »um or a verb of naming, esteeming, etc., a4|)redicate-noun occurs of a different gender from the antecedent, the relative commonly agrees with the latter ; ])ut wlien the preceding noun is to be explained and distin- guished from another, the relative agrees with the former ; as, Naiune vultus quem dixh-e Chaos, The appearance of nature which they called chaos. Ovid. Genus huminum quod Hflotts tdtdtur. Nep. Animal, quem vucamns hominem, The animal whom w^e call man. Cic. Locus in car- cere, quod TuUiauum appelldtiir. Sail. Pecunidrum conquisUio ; eos esse belh clvUis uervos dictilaiis Mucidnus. Tac. (11.) The relative sometimes agrefes with a noun, either equiva- lent in sense to the antecedent, or only implied in the precediu" clause ; as, Abundanlia cdrum rerum, qu£E rnortdles prima putant, An abundance of those things, which mortals esteem most important. Sail. Cf. § 205, li. 7, (2.) N. 1. But sometimes when a neuter adjective used substantively has preceded, res with a relative foEows; as, Permulta sunt, qme did jxssimt^ qua re intelliydtur. Cic. Fdtdle monstnmi, quaj, etc., soil. Ckdpdtra. Hor. Cf. § 323, 3, (4.) (a.) A relative or deuionstrative pronoun, referrhig to a collective noun, or to a noun which only ui a figurative sense denotes a human being, sometimes takes the gender and number of the individuals which the noun implies ; as Enultdtum, quos. Sail. Genus, qui premuntur. Cic. Sendtus — ii. Sail. (b.) A pronoun in the plural often follows a noun in the singular, refen-ing not only to the noun but to tJie class of persons or things to which it belongs as, Bcmdcritumdmittdmus; nihil est enim dpud istos, quod, etc. i. e. with Demo-' critus and his followers. Cic. BiOnysiiis ni'(jdvit sejure iUo nigro qiwd ccena caput erai, dCkctdtum. Turn is, qui LUa coxerat, etc. Id. (12.) The antecedent is sometimes implied in a possessive pronoun; as, Omnes lamldre fortmas meas, qui ndtum tali inrjinio jmeditum hdberem; scil. mei, All were extolling my fortune, who, etc. Ter. Id mea mlnlme refert, qui twn ndtu maximus. Id. Nostrum consilium lavdandum est, qui ndluerim, etc. Cic. ; cr in a possessive adjective; as, Servlli tUmidlu, quos, etc. Cces. 113.; (a.) Sometimes the antecedent, is a proposition; the relative then is commonly neuter; as, Postrimo, quod difficillimum, inter rnortdles, gloria in- vidiam vicisti. Finally, you have overcome envv with glory, 7chich, among men is most diflicult. Sail. Equidem exspectdbam Jam tuas lltiras, idque cum multis. Cic. {b.) Im such instances, id is gen3rally placed before the relative pronoun, refering to the idea in the antecedent clause; as, Slvc, id quod anistat, Pldtmit ttudiosus nndiendi fuit. Cic. Diem consunii vOh'bant, id quod fecertmt. Id. (c.) Si>iiietimes is, referring to a clause, agrees with a noun following; as, M6m velle aique idtm nolle, ea demum Jirrtui dmicltia est. Sail. 192 SYNTAX. PRONOUNS RELATIVES. § 206 (14.) Qiwd relating to a preceding statement, and serving the purpose of transition, is often placed at the begimiing of a sentence after a period, v/here it may be translated by ' nay,' ' now,' or ' and.' It is thus use I especially be- fore si. e/s;', and 'rtjsi ,• as, Quodsi illinc inctnis jyrofugisses, lamey^ ista tua fuga nefdna judicareiur, i. e. and even if you had fled without taking any thing with you, still, etc. Cic. Verr. 1, 14. Quodsi, ' if then,' is especially used in in- troducing something assumed as true, from which further inferences may be drawn. Sometimes also it is equivalent to ' although.' Qiiodntsi signifies ' if then — not ' ; as, Quodnisi ec/o meo adventu illius conatus alumantidum represas- ivm, lam multus, etc. Q,ii6cletsi is ' nay, even if ; as, Quodetd ingeniis magtiit prxditl qu'idam dicendi copiam sine rdiione consoquentur, ars idinen eil dux cer- iiar. — Quod is found also before qinnn, ubi, quin, quuniam, ne and utinam, where the conjunction alone would seem to be sufficient; as. Quod idinam ilium, cujus impio jdcindre in lias miserias prqjectus sum, eddem hcec slmidaniem rideum. Sail. It is so used even before a relative in Cic. Pliil. 10, 4, _fin. — Quod, in such ex- amples, seems to be an accusative, with propter or ad understood. (15.) (a.) A relative is always plural, ^^en referring to two or more nouua in tlie singular. If the nouns are of differmt genders, the gender of the relative is determined by Kem. 2, page 185; as, Ninus et Semlrdmis, qui Bdhylona condi- dSranl, Ninus and Semiramis, who had founded Babjdon. Veil. Crebvo fimdli el llhlcine, quse sibi sumpserat. Cic. Ex summd ketitiu alque lascwid, quce diu- turna quies pepicrirat. Sail. Naves el capl'iws quaj cd Chium ccipln erant. Liv. {b.) If the antecedents are of different persons, the relative follows the first person rather than the second or third, and the second rather than the third; as, Tu et pater, qui in concivio erdtis. Ego et tu, quierdmus. Cf. ^ 209, R. 12, (7.) (16.) The relative adjectives qmt, quantus, gudlis, are construed like the relative qui. They have generally, hi the antecedent clause, the corresponding demonstrative words, Idl, tantus, Idlis ; but these are also often omitted. Fre- quently also the order of the clauses is reversed, so that the relative clause ' precedes the demonstrative. (17.) Qm;, at the begimiing of a sentence, is oftsn translated like a demon- strative; as, QuiB quum ita slut. Since these (things) are so. Cic. (18.) The relative qui with sum and either a nominative or the ablative of quality, is used in explanatory clauses, instead of pro, ' in accordance with,' or ' according to ' ; thus, instead of Tu, pro tiid'jjrudenlld, quid optimum faetu sit, videbis. Cic, we may say, qua tua est priidenlla, or, qua priidcntid es. So, Veils tantummodo, qu£e tua virtus, expugndbis. Hor. Qua prudeiitia es, nihil ie fugiet. Cic. (19.) A relative clause is sometimes used for the purpose of denoting by circumlocution the person of the agent in a definite but not permanent con- dit' ;u; as, Ji, qui audiunt, or qtd adsunt, i. e. the hearers, the persons present. S3 also, a relative clause is used for the English expression ' above men- tioned'; as. Ex llbris quos dixi or quos ante (siy;r«) lauddvl: and the English 'so called,' or 'what is called,' is expressed by quern, quam, quod voc ant, or by vui, quoi, quod vdcdtur, dlcitm; etc.; as. Nee Hermas has, qiuis vacant, imponi [Athenis) licebat. Cic. Vestra, quce dlcitur, vita, mors est. Id. (20.) Relative and demonstrative adverbs (see § 191, R. 1), are frequently Esed instead of relative and demonstrative pronouns with prepositions; as. Is, nnde te audisse dicis, i. e. a quo. Cic. Diviiice upud illos sunt, aut ubi illl vdlunt. i. e. dpiur. (/uos. Sail. Huic ab ddolescenlld bella intestina, ccedes, rdplnce, dis cordia civllls, grata fucre, ibique jUventUtem exercuii, i. e. in Us, in these things. SaU. (21.) With quam qui and the stiperlative after tarn the verb of the relative clause is sometimes omitted; as, Tarn mihi grdtum id erit, quam quod grdtissi- mu^i. Cic. Tarn, enim sum amicus reijmblicm, quam qui maxime. Id. Ta7H sum mitis, quam qui lenissirnus. Id. So also with t(< jui without r an oath, nor i)ity, has restrained. Ter. Is when used for the sake of em- phasis seems sometimes in English to be superfluous; as, Male se res habtt, quuin, quod virtute effivi debet, id tentatur pccuniu. Cic. Hem. 22. Sic, ita, id, hoc, illud, are often used redundantly as a preliminary announcement of a subsequent proposition, and are added to tlie verb on which this proposition depends; ■as,&\c a miijoribus suis ncccperant, tanta popidi lio- tn/'ini esse beneficin, ut, etc. Cic. Te illud admoneo, ut quotldie mediU're, resi'si- eniUtm esse iriicundice. Id. Hoc iibi perswideas vclim, me nihil omlsisse, I wish you to be persuaded of this — that 1 have omitted nothing. These pleonastic additions have generally no influence on the construction of propositions, but in a few instances they are followed by ut ; as, De cujus dlcendl cOpid sic accejA- mus, ut, etc. Cic. Ita enim dp f mil, ut perlurbntio sit, etc. Id. In the phrase Aoc, illud, or id dgere ut, the pronouu is established by custom and is necessary. See § 273, 1, («.) Rem. 23. (a.) Hie 'this ' refers to what is near to the speaker either in place or time, ille 'that' to what is more remote. Hence hie sometimes refers to the speaker himself, and hie homo is then the same as Hf/u. On this .account Idc is sonietimes called the demonstrative of the first person. When reference is made to two tlimgs previously mentioned, hie commonly refers to the latter, ille to the former, and the pronouns are arranged in the same order, as the ob- jects to which they relate; as, Iijnavia corpus liehvlut, hdjor Jirmat ; ilia mdturam %eneelutem, hie lonr/am ddOleseeniiam reddit. Sloth enervates the body, labor Btreugthens it ; the former produces premature old age, the latter protracted youth. Gels. (h.) But the order is often reversed, so that hie refers to the object first men- tioned, and ille to the one mentioned last; as, Hie deus ei ciri/o est ; hie spe celtr, ilia limore. Ovid. So when alter... niter, ' the one. ..the other,' refer to two things mentioned before, the previous order is sometimes observed and sometimes re- versed; but wherever there is ambiguity the order is reversBd, so that the first al'ir refers to the liist object. Sometimes hie. ..hie are used instead of hie . ille. Sc ille.. .ille sometimes denote 'the one. ..the other.' (c.) Hie and ille have the same relation to time present and past as nunc and iunc, see \ 277; and hence whatever, in speaking of present time, is expressed by hie and its derivative adverbs. Arc, hine, hue, and adhue, is expressed by ille and its derivatives, when it is spoken of as belonging to past time. Rem. 24. Ille, when not in opposition to Idc, is often used to denote tnat which is of general notoriety; as, ^[nf tha person addressed; ille, etc., of some other person or ■thing. See J 191, R. l,(e./ Jsie from its frequent forensic use, and its appl-'jatior' to the opponent oftei; denotes contempt. Rem. 26. (a.) Is does not, like hie, ille, and isie, denote the place or ordsi ol the object to which it relates, but either refers without particular emphasis If' something already mentioned or to something which is to be defined by the relative qui. Hie, is, or ille, may be used in this way before the i-elative, but only hie or is after it; as. Qui ddeet, is discit, or hie discit, but not ille discit, un- less some individual is referred to. (b.) Is before a relative or ut has sometimes the sense of talis, such, denoting a class ; as, Neque enim tu is es, qui quid sis nescias. Nor are you such a person, as not to know what j'ou are. Cic. ; sometimes it has the force of 'idem; as, vos — a. Cic. Manil. 12. ^ (c ) If the noun to which is refers is to receive some additional predicate, we must uso et is, atque is, isque, et is quidem, and with a negative nee is ; as, Vincfda vero, et ea sempitei-na, etc. Cic. Una in domo, et ea quidem angusia, ztc Id. Adoleseentes cdlquot, uec ii tenui lOeo orli, etc. Liv. Sed is is used when the additional predicate is opposed to the preceding; as, Severitdiem in senee/i'ile pvobo, sed earn, s'nut alia, mOdieam. Cic. The neuter et id, or idqut, sei-ves to introduce an addition to the preceding proposition; as, Quamqiuwi te, Mnree f'di, annum jam audientem Crdllpjmm, idque Alhenis, etc. (d.) Is is not expressed when it woiild be in the same oblique case as the preceding noun to which it refers; as. Pater dmat liberos et idmen castlgat. Multos illustrat forluna, dum vexai. ( e. ) When in English ' that ' or ' those ' is used instead of the repetition ol the preceding substantive, is is never used in Latin, and ille only in later au- thors. In such cases the noun is commonly not repeated in Latin, and no pro- noun is used in its place ; as, Philippus hostium mcmus scepe v'ltdvit, suorum effu- ffere non vuhiit, those of his own subjects. Curt. Sometimes the substantive is repeated; as, Jfidhia clvitdds eum jiidlciis prineipis certant. Veil. Sometimes a possessive adjective is used insteiid of the genitive depending on the omitted substantive; as, Terentii fOlndas studiose lego, Plnutlr.is minus diiector : and sometimes instead of the genitive or a possessive adjective the name of the per- son itself is put in the case which the verb governs; as, Si cw»» Lycurgo ei Dracone et Solone nostras leges eonferre volueritis. Cic. — In Cicero hie and ille, when the preceding substantive is understood, retain their demonstrative sig- nification, and therefore do not merely supply the place of the omittad sub- stantive; as, Nullam enim virtus dliam mercedem deslcUrat, prceter banc, i. e. the one of which I am speaking. Cic. Rkm. 27. (ft.) Idem, as denoting a subject which stands in equal relations to two different predicates, often supplies the place of item or etiam, ' also,' ' at the same tlmCj' or of tianen, 'yet,' if the things are apparently inconsistent; as, Miisici, qui erant quondam ' ildem poetce, ^lusicians, who formerly were poet? also. Cic. Euphrates et Tigris niagno dqudrum dlvortio iter percurrunt; iidem (and yet) panldtim in arctius coSunt. (h.) £< i;jsc, on the other hand, denotes that the same predicate belongs to »wo subjects. It is rendered by ' too ' or ' also ' ; as, Antmmus Com.nMus 7iihU paternum hdbnit, msi quod contra Germdnos feliciter et ipse pitgndiit, for Hem or ij>!se is used m the sense ot ' neither [; as, Pi'imis j-epuhis Maharhal mm majori robdre virorum miasm uec ipse ervpiiSnum cdhcrtium smUnuiL Liv. §207. SYNTAX. PRONOUNS INTENSIVE, ETC. 195 (c.) Idem is sometimes repeated in the sense of ' at once,' denoting tl.e union of qualities which miglit be thought incompatible ; as, Fuere qiudam qui ildem ornate ildem versute dicerent, There have been some who could speak at one* elegantly and artfully. Cic. (ci.) 'The same as' is variously expressed in Latin, by idem Avith qui, ac oJ atque, qiiam, quasi, ut or cum; as, Verves idem est qui fuit semper, Verres is tha same as he has always been. Cic. Vita est eadem ac fuit. Liv. Disputatimem exp5nimus iisdem fere verbis ut actum est. Cic. Eandem constituit pdtestatem quam si, etc. Cic. Eodem l6co res est, quasi ea pecunia legdta non esset. Id. Hnnc ego eodem mecum patre genitum. etc. So also poetically with the dative; &s, Eiidem aliis sqpitu' quiete est. Lucr. Cf. § 222, R. 7. IPSE, Intensive ok Adjunctive. Rem»2S. {a.) Ipse, when used with a substantive pronoun taken reflexively, agrees either with such pron^/un or with the subject of the proposition, accord- ing as either is emphatic ;_ as, Again per me ipse', I will do it myself. Cic. Non egeo mcdlclna (i. e. m* ulii me cansokntur) ; me ipse coTisohr. Cic. Acciisarulo eum, a cujiis crudclitute vosmet ipsi armis vindicasti!!. Liv. — Cn. Pompeium omni- bus, Lentuliim mlhi ipsi antOpOuo. Cic. Fac ut te ipsum custodias. Id. Deforme est de se ipsum pnedicarc. Id. — Rut Cicero often construes ipse as the subject, even where the emphasis belongs to the object; as. Quid est negotii ccmtinere eos, quilms jtrcesis, si te ipse contineas ? {b.) When ipse is joined with a possessive pronoun used reflexively, it usually takes the case of tlie subject; as, Meajn ipfie legem lu'gltgo ; not meam ipsius, according to § 211, E. 3, (a). So, Si ex scrijjtis cog7iosci ipsi suis pdtuissent. Cic. Earn fraudem vestrd ipsi rirtide intastis. Liv. But the genitive is necessary when the possessive does not refer to the subject; as, Tua ipsius causa hoc feci. And it is sometimes found where the case of the subject should be used; as, Conjec- tilram de tuo [Tpsivis studio ccpiiris, instead of ipse.^c.) Ipse is sometimes used as reflexive without sui ; as, Omnes boni, quantum in ipsis fuit, Gesdrem occlde- runt. Cic. {d.) Ipse, with nouns denoting time or number, expresses exactness, and may be rendered, 'just,' 'precisely'; or 'very,' 'only'; as, DyrrhCtchio sum profectus ipso illo die, quo lex est data de nobis, on the very dav. Cic. Triginta dies erant ipsi, qmitn has duham I'deras, per quos nullns a vobis acceperam, just thirty days. Id. £t quisquam dubUdlnt — quam facile imjjcrio atque exercitu socius et vectlgdlia conservdturus sit, qui ipso nomine ac rUmore defenderit, by his veiy name, or, by his name only. Id. General Relatives. Rem. 29. Quicu vi q u e, quisquis, and the other general relatives (see § 139, 5, R., are, in classical prose, always connected with a verb, and form the protasis. QMtcM?/i/7«e is commonly used as an adjective, and quisquis as a substantive; but the neuter quodcumque is used as a substantive with a following genitive; RS, Quorlcumque militum; and, on the other hand, quisquis is raiely an adjec- tive ; as, Quisquis erit vitoe cdlor. Hor. ; and even the neuter quidqiiid is used in the same manner; as, Quisquis honos tum&li, guidquid sdldmenhiimandi est. Viro-. Qulcunujue seems sometimes even in Cicero equivalent to cn?iiiis or quln's; as Qua sdndri pdterunt, quacumque rdtione sdndbo. What can be cured, I will cure by every possible means. Cic. Yet possum is rather to be supplied; — ^in whatever way I can.' But in later writers quUwngue is frequently used in the absolute^ sense for qulvis_ or quillbet ; :is, Ciceronem cuicunujue eOrum firtiter opposu'lrim. Qiiint. Qudliscumque and qumUuscumque are likewise used in an absolute sense by ellipsis; as, Tu non comi'ijnsccs qunnt'icvmque ad Viberldtem pervinire ? At any price, be it ever so high. Sen. So quisquis is occasionally iissd, not as a relative, but as an indefinite pronoun. — Siquis often seems to ■itaod as a relative, like the Greek liti; for Sct/c, 'whoever'; but it alwavs '.•oiitains the idea of ' perhaps ' ; as, Niula fere Alpium cdcHminii. sunt, et vi quid «W pdbuh, cbrumit nives Li~. 196 SYNTAX. INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. § 207. Indefinite Pronouns. Rem. 30. (a.) Aliquis and guispiam are partlcu]ar and affirmative, coires- ponding to the English some oree; as, Ecndltas est pectaiia, giue moiie allcujus ad queinpiam pervhiit jure. An inheritance is property which, at tlie death of Bome one, falls to some (other) one by law. Cic. Multi sine doctrina aliquid omnium f/enerum ei artium cons^.quuntur. Id. (6.) Aliquis is more emphatic than tlie indefinite pronoun quis. (See § 137, (3.) Hence dllquis stands by itself, but quis is commonly connected with certaia conjunctions or relative words, but these are sometimes separated from it by one or more words. Sometimes, however, quis is used without such conjunc- tions or relatives; as, Moi-btis aui egestas ant quid ejusmddi. Cic. Letrahirt quid de dllqiio. Id. Injuriam cui facere. Id. So, Dixerit quis, Some one might say. But even after those conjunctions wliich usually require quis, dh'quis is used when emploj^ed antithetically and of course emphatically; as, Timibat Pompeius ovinia, ne aliquid vos timeretis. Cic. In English the emphasis of dliqau is sometimes expressed by ' reaUy ' ; as, Sensus mdntndi, si aliquis esse potest, is ad exiauum tempus dunii. Cic— Quispifnn, also, is sometimes used like quis after si, etc., and sometimes stands alone; as, Qum-ei fortasse quispiain. _ Re:m. 31. ( a. ) Quisqua ?n, 'any one,' and ullus, 'any,' are universal. Like uin- quam and usquam they are used m propositions whic-h' involve a universal nega- tive, or which express an interrogation with a negative force, or a condition (usuallv with si or 5?/ffsJ); also, after comparatives, after the adverb rjx, and the preposition sine; as. Neque ex castris Cii^/^wce quisquam omnium disccsserat Nor luid any one departed from the camp of Catiline. Sail. Nee ullo ccisu pd- test amiinyire, lit ulla inttrmissin flat offuii. Cic. An quisquam HO/es? sine per- turbcitimie mentis Irasci? Id. Tcirior ttic tyrannus Syracusanis fuit, qu a m q\,is- quam superionmi. Id. Vix quidquam spei est. Sen. But after the depeiiilent negative particles ne, neve, and the negative interrogative particle num, quis and not quisquam is used. (6.) hnt quisquam und ullus after si are often used not in a negative sense, but instead of aliquis or quis, serving only to increase the indefiniteness which would be implied in the latter pronouns;' as, Aut enim nemo, quad quidem mcigu credo, aut, si quisquam, ilk sapiens fuit, if any man. Cic. Hence, ultimately, even without si, where tlie indefiniteness is to be made emphatic, quisquam, ullus, itmquam smd usquam were used; as, Quamdiu quisquam ei'it, qui te de- fem/eve aiuleat, vlves. Cic. Bellum maxlme omnium memdvdblle, qwB umquam gesta sunt, seripturus sum. Tac. (c.) Ullus is properly an adjective, but quisquam is commonly used without a noun, except it is a word denoting a person ; as, Cuiquam c'lvi, To any citizen. Oijusquam ordtoris eloquentiam. Hence quisquam coiTesponds to the substan- tive nemo and ullus to the adjective nullus. Nemo is often used with other substantives denoting male persons so as to become equivalent tothe adjective mdlus ; as, nanu pictor, nhno ddOlescens, and even homo nemo.- Cic. Quisquam is sometimes used in a similar manner: as, quisquam homo, quisquam civis. On the other hand nullus and ullus are used as substantives instead of nenia and quisfiuam, especiallv the genitive nullius and the ablative nuUo. Rem. 32. (a.) Alius, like ullus, though properly an adjective, is sometimes ns& Hike a pronoun. It is often repeated, or joined with an adverb derived frorr it, ill the same proposition, which may be ti-anslated by two separate propositions, commencing respectively with ' one. ..another ' ; as, Aliud aliis vldr'tur optlmiiiir. One thing seems best to one, another to another. Cic. Aliis aliunde per'iadum est. Danger threatens one from one source, another from another; or. Danger threatens diflerent persons from difl'erent sources. Ter. Dionysinm I'lliter cum iiliis de nobis loeutum aiidiebam. Cic. — Alter is used in the same manner when only two persons are spoken of, but there are no adverbs de- rived from it; as, Alter"?/' alterum causa7n conferunt. They accuse each otaer, (6.) Alius, repeated in difcrent propositions, is also translated ' one.. .another'; as, Aliud dqitur, aliud slu/iildlnr, One thing is done, another pretended. Cic. Aliter %((?.'//■, aliter st;76?V, like r/fi^e/- (7c or atque, He speaks othiirwiie than he writes. So Aliud loquitur, aliud scribit. §207. SYNTAX. POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. 197 (c.) Uter^ue,^ each of two,' is always used by Cicero in the singular i.uin- ber, when ouly two individuals are spoken of. Its plural, nirloue, is used oniy when each of two parties consists of several individuals; as, Miciddnes—Tyrd, utrtque. But in other good prose writers the plural utr'ique is occasionally used in speaking of only two; as, Utrlque Didnysii. Nep. Cf. §209, R. 11, (4.) Hem. 33. (rt.) Quid am differs from dliquis by implying that a person or thing, though indefinitely described, is definitely known; as, Quidam de coUe- gis nostris, A certain one of our colleagues. Cic". Scis me quodam tempdre Met- ^pontum venlsse tecum. Id. (6.) Quidam is sometimes used for some, as opposed to the whole, or to others; as, Excessirunt urbe quidam, idii mortem sibi cuninlirrunt, Some departed from the city, others destroyed themselves. Liv. Hence it is used to soften an ex- pression, where in English we say ' so to speak," etc. ; as, Milvo est quoddara Mlum nuturCde cum.corvo, A kind of natural warfare. Cic. Fuit enim illud quad- dam caecum tempus sercUulis. Id. Etenim omnes artes quae ad humdnitdtem jiertU nent, habent quoddam commune vinculum et quasi cognatiOne qufidam inter se con- tmtntur. Id. — Tamquam is used for the same purpose, and also ut ita dicam. Rem. 34. Qulvis imAgulUhet,'- anj ohq,'' and unusquisgne,''Qa.c\i,'' are uni- versal and absolute; as. Omnia sunt ejvsmddi quivis ut persplcere possit. All are of such a natuie tliat any one can perceive. Cic. Uic dpud majores nostros adhih- ebcltur perltus, nunc quilibet. Id. Ndtura unumquemque trdhit ad disctiidum. A neptive joined with them denies only the universahty which they imply; as, iVore cuivis humi/u contingit ddlre Cdrinthum, i. e. not to every man' without distinction. Hor. Ciiicjuam would have made the negation universal. Rem. 35. (a.) Quisque signifies each, every mie, distributivelv or relatively, and generally stands without a noun ; as, Quod cuique obtigit, id'quhqne teneat. Let each one keep what has fallen to each. Cic. Hence it is used particularly after relative and interrogative pronouns and adverbs; as, Sclpio polllcetur sibi magna curm fdre, ut omnia civitdtlbus, qua; cxijusque fuissent, restituerentur. Cic. Ut prcedlci posset, quid cuique eventmmm, et quo quisque fato ndtus esset. Id. Cur An^ quidque qiueris: recte oninlno. Id. Quo quisque est soUertior, hoc ddcet Idboriosius. Id. Ut quisque opiime elicit, ita maxlme dlcendi difflcultdtem timet. Id. And hence the expression quOtusquisque in the sense of ' how few amon^ all.' It is also used distributively after numerals; as, Decimus quisque sorte lectus, Evei-y tenth man. Quinto quuque atmo. In every fifth year. So also after s«!(s; as, Sui cuique libUri cdnssimi: suum cuique pldcet. (Respect- ing the order of the words, cf. § 279, 14: and respecting quisque in the nomiiuo- tive in apposition to a noun or pronoun in the ablative absolute or in the ac- cusative with the infinitive, see § 204, R. 10.) (6.) Quisque with a superlative, either in the singular or the plural, denotes universality, and is generally equivalent to omnes with the positive; as, doctis- Amus quisque, Every learned man, i. e. all the learned; but often, also, in con- nection with the verb, it retams the idea of a reciprocal comparison, and is to be rendered by the superlative; as, In omni arte optunum quidque rdrissimum, The best is the rarest. Cic. Altissima quffique flumina minhno sdno Idbuntur, The deepest rivers flow with the least sound. Curt. With primus, it denotes 4he Jirst possible ; as. Prima quoque tenipOi-e, As soon as possible. Cic. POSSESSIVES. Rem, 36. (a.) The possessive pronouns meus, tutts, suus, noster, and vester, are joined to nouns, to indicate an action or possession of the persons deioted by their primitives; as. Tutus amor meus est iibi, My love is secure to you. Ovid. Tuam ricem ddlere soleo. Cic. — These pronouns, as in English, when belonging to two substantives, are generally expressed but once, even when the substantives are of different genders; as", amor tuus ac judicium de me. (b.) But tliese pronouns are sometimes used when tlie persons to which they refer are the o^ecse mercedem exigat cdritdiis sues, sed quod per se sibi quisque cdrus est. Cic. (1.) In dependent clauses, in which the subject does not remain the same, the reflexives are commonly used in references to the lead- ing subject, when the thoughts, language, purposes, etc., of that sub- ject are stated ; as. A7-idvistus prcedlcdvil, non sese Gallis, sed Gallos sibi helium iniHUsse, Ariovistus declared that he had not made war upon the Gauls, but the Gauls upon him. Cses. Homerum Culdphonii clvem esse dlcunt suura, The Colophonians say that Homer is their citizen. Cic. Tyranmis peilvit ut se ad dmlcltiam tertium ascrlbe- rent. Id. But sometimes, to avoid ambiguity, the cases of is or ille are used in such clauses in references to the leading subject; as, HelvStii sese AllohrOges vi coaciuros exislhndbant, ut per suos fines eos Ire pdtirentur. Cses. Here suos refei's to the subject of the dependent clause, and eos to Helvctii, the subject of tlie leading clause. And sometimes, even in tlie same dependent clause, two reflexive pronouns are used, referring to different persons; as, Scytlus petebant ut 7'egis sui fUiam mdtrimOnio sibi junyerel. Curt. (2.) K, however, the leading subject, whose thoughts, etc., are ex- pressed, is indefinite, the reflexives relate to the subject of a depend- ent clause ; as, Medeam predicant (scil. homines) in fugd frdtris sui membra in iis Idcis, qiia Be parens persequeretur, disslquivisse. Cic. Ipsum regem trudunt dperdtum his tacns se ahdidisse. Liv. C3.) (o.) When the leading verb is in the passive voice, the re flexive often refers not to its subject, but to that which would be its subject in the active voice ; as, A Gcesdre invUor ut sim sibi Icgatus, i. e. CcBsar me invliat, I am invited bj Caesar to become his lieutenant. Cic. (6.) So when the subject is a thing without life, the reflexive may relate to some other word in the sentence, which denotes a thing hav- ing life ; as, Canum tam flda custodia quid significai dliud, nisi se ad hdrMnum commdc^ taUs esse geneidtos f Cic. §208. SYNTAX. PRONOUNS REFLEXIVES. 199 (4.) Instead of sui and suu.t, whether referring to a lea Hug or a Biibordiiiate subject, ij>se is sometimes used, to a^oid ambiguity from the similarity of both numoei's of sui, and also to mark more emphat- ically than suns, the person to whom it relates; as, Jufjiirtha Icgdtos misit, qui ipsi Uberisque ritam peterent, Jugurtlui sen* ambns- sadors to ask life for himself and his children. Sail. Ea mukstissime ft-rrt homines debeni, qu.) Suus, and not hvjus, is used when a noun is omitted ; as, Octdvius quem sui {scil. TimTci) Goesdrem salutdbant, Octavius, whom his fc.'- ti-wars sainted as Csesar. • (c.) Suus is also commonly used when two nouns are coupk/J by rutn but not when they are connected by a conjunction ; as, PiolimcEics dmlcos Demetrii cum suis rfbus dlmlsit, Ptolemy dismissed the friends of Demetrius with their ett'ects. Just. (8.) Suus sometimes denotes Jit, favorable ; as. Sunt et sua dona pdrenti, There are likewise for my father suitable presents. Virg. Ut IMrdtor ille pdpiili ROmdni c^jpenn'tur iempdra sua. Liv. Alphewta atebd/ur pdpulo sane suo. Cic. Sometimes it signifies ^>t(»iiar; as, Mdlles »na turn Sdbcei, scil. mittunt, i. e. the frankincense for which their countiy was fa* aous. Virg. Fesaosgue sdpor suus ocdipat artus. Id. Y- f 200 SYNTAX. SUBJECT-NOMINATIVE. S 209 NOMINATIVE. SUBJECT-NOMINATIVE AND VERB. § SOO. (a.) The noun or pronoun which is the subject of a finite verb is put in the nominative. Note 1. (n.) A yerb in any mood except the infinitive is called a finite rerb. (b.) In historical writing the nominative is sometimesjoined with the present infinitive instMul of the imperfect indicative. Of. R. 5. (b.) A verb agrees with its subject-nomiaative, in numLei and person ; as, Ego lego, I read. Nos Ugfws, We read. Tu scrlbis, Thou writest. Vos scriuids, You write. Equus currit. The horse iims. Eqtd currunt, Horses run. Note 2. The imperative singular is sometimes used in addressing several persons; as, IIuc ncitas adjice septem, scil. vos, Thebaiche. Ovid. Met. 6, 182. So Adde drfectionem Ilulkn, scil. vos, mUites. Li v. 26, 41. Remark 1. (a.) The nominatives f-f/o, tu, nos, vos, are seldom ex- pressed, the termination of the verb sufficiently marking the person ; as, Ciipio, I desire; vlds, thou livest; hcibemus, we have. See ^ 147, 3. {b.) But when emphasis or opposition is intended, the nominatives of the first and second persons are expressed; as, Ego regcs ejeci, vos tyrannos intro- dfidtis, I banished kings, you introduce tyrants. Auct. ad Her. Nos, nos, dico aperie, consuks di'sumiis, Cic. Tu es patrdnus, tu paler. Ter. In indignant questions and addresses tu is expressed ; as,_ Tu in forum prodlre, tu lucem conspicere, tu in horuin compectum venire conaris f Avict. ad Her. Rkm. 2. The nominative of the third person is often omitted : — (1.) When it has been expressed in a preceding proposition : — (a.) As nominative; as, Mdsa profluit ex montt Vosego, tt in Oceanum injlait. Cajs. ; or {b) in an oblique case; as, Cursorem m'lserunt, nt id nuntidret, soil. mrsor. Ncj). : or (c) in a possessive adjective; as, Et vereor quo se Junonia vertant HoqMia ; haud tanto cessahit cardine rerum, scil. ilia, i.e. Juno. Virg Mn. I. 672. (2.) When it is a general word for person or thing : — Thus homines is often omitted before aiimt, d'lCimt, ferirnt, etc. ; as, Ut ennnt All they sav. Cic. Max'ime admirantur eum, qui 2>ccunia own indvetur. Id — Sc iene'est, hene hiibet or bene agitur. It is Avell; as, Si rales, bene e.^t, ego valeo Cic. Quum melius est, gratulor dis. Afran. Optume habet. Nothing can be beter. Plant. Bene hkbet: jactn sunt fundamenta defensionis. Cic. Bene agi- tui pro noxia. Plaut. Note 3. This omission of the nominative is common m the clause preced- ing a relative; as, Qui Bdmum non odit, dniet tua carmina, Mcevl, scil. h6mo. Let hini who hates not Bavius, love your verses, Msevius. Virg. Vastdiur agri quod inter urbem ac Fidenas est, scil. i'd spCdium. Liv. Sunt quos juvat...scil. hdmlnes^ There are (those) whom it delights. Hor. Est qui nee veteris iJocUla Mussla spernii scil. k6mo. Hor. Hei'e sunt qtios and est qui are equivalent tn incipiant, circunis])ectant. Liv. Cf. § 20", K. 32, (c.) N(JTK S. This construction may be explained by passages like the following, in which the plural is placed first, and tlicD the singular, denoting its parts; Ceieri, suo quisque tempore, aderunt. Liv. Decemviri perturbdti alius in aliam jiarie/M c'(««7W'uw (liscurrunt. Id. Seej^ 2(11, B, 10. v^2-'Ssi^^l) 204 SYNTAX. SUBJECT-NOMINATIVE. § 209 Rem. 12. Two or more nominatives sinffular, not in apposition, generally have a plural verb ; as, Furor n\ujue mentem praeeipitant, Fury and rage huny (n (my) mind. Virg. I}u?n cetas, metus, mdgister, prohlbebaiit. Ter. (1.) K the predicate belongs to the several nominatives jointly, the verb is always plural; as, Grammatice qmndam ac musice juuctse fuerunt. Quint. (2.) A verb in the singular is often used after several nominatives singular, especially if they denote things without life ; as, Mens t'liim, et ratio et consilium in senibus est. Cic. Beneficentia, Uierviitai, ■bdnitas, justitia yunditustoUitui. Id. Note 9, This construction is most common when the several nominatives, as in the preceding examples, constitute, as it were, but one idea. So also the compound subject Sendlus pdpiilusqne Romdnus has always a predicate in the singular. The same construction sometimes, especially in the poets, occurs with names of persons; as, Goi-yias, Tkmsymachus, Protagoras, Prddlcus, Hip- jnas in Mmre fuit. Cic. Quin et PiOinetheus et Pilopis parens dulci Idboruin decipitu. S(5«o. Hor. When the nominatives denote both persons and things, the verlj is commonly plural ; as, Coltio consulum et Pompeius obsunt. Liv. (3.) When one of the nouns is plural, the verb is generally so; but some- times it is singular, when the plural noun does not immediately precede it; as, Dii te ])cndtcs patrilque, et pntris Imago, et domus 7-egia, et in ddmo regale so- lium, et nomen Tarquinium creat vocat/we regem. Liv. (4.) When each of the nominatives is preceded by et or turn, the verb agrees with the last; as, Hoc et ratio doctis, et necessitas barbdris, et mos gentibus, et feris natura ipsa proescripsit. This, reason has dictated to the learned, and ne- cessity to barbarians, and custom to nations, and nature itself to wild beasts Cic. Et ego, et Cicero meus flfiCTitabit. Id. Turn fetas vires(y«fe, iiim dvlta gloria animum stimfilabat. Liv. So when the subject consists of two infinitives; as, Et f acere, et pati fortia, Romdnum est. Cic' Unuset alter always takes a singu- lar verb ; as, Dicit anus et alter br&viter. Cic. Unus et alter assuitur pannus. Hor. (5.) When the nominatives are connected by aut, sometimes the plural, but commonly the singular, is used ; as. Si Socrates aut Antisthenes diceret, If Socratesor Antisthenes should say. Cic Ut quosque studium prlvaiim aut gratia occixpaverunt. Liv. (a.) The plural is necessary with disjunctives, if ths subject includes tht, first or second person ; as. Quod in Decemviris neque ego neque Qesar habiti es- Bemus. Cic. — (o.) With aut.. .aut and nec.nec the singular is prefeiTed, but with seu...seu and tam...quam tlie verb is in the plural. (6.) A nominative singular, joined to an ablative by the preposition cum, sometimes has a singular but more frequently a plural verb ; as, Domitius cum Messala certm esse videbatur. Cic. Bocchus, cum peditibus, postrtimam RO- mdrm-um dciem invadunt, Bocchus, with his foot-soldiers, attacks the rear of tlie Roman army. Sail; 7/Jse dux, cum aliquot principibus, capiuntur. Liv. ( 7.) if the nominatives are of different persons, the verb is of the first person rather than the second or third, and of the second r aer than the third ; as, Si tu et TulUa valetis, ego et Cicero valemus, If you and Tulli- are well, Cicero and I are loell. Cic. Hiec ncqiie ego neque tu f eclmus. Ter. Ego pdpw- lusque Romdnus bellum jiidico f aciojwe. Liv. (o.) Yet sometimes the verb agrees in number and person w' the nearest nominative, and is understood with the other; as, Vos ipsi et -^enatm frequent restitit. This is always the case when the action of the vert, is qualified with reference to each nominative sabaratelv ; us. Eico numrf. tn feiirJUr uStiU. §210. SYNTAX. PREDICATE-NOMTNATIVE. 205 Rem. 13. The interjections en, ecce^ and 0, are sometimes followed by the nominative ; as, En Pridmiis! Lo Priam! Virg. En ego, vester Ascdyihis. Id. Ecce hihm Calienus ! Cic Ecce tiue litirce. Id. vir fortis atque amicus ! Ter. PREDICATF -NOMINATIVE. § 310. A noun in the predicate, after a verb neuter or pas Bive, is put in the same case as the subjact, when it denotes th^ same, person or thing ; as, (a.) When the subject is in the nominative; Ira furor hrevis est, Anger is a short madness. Hor. Eyo vocor Lyconides, I am called Lyconides. Plaut E(jo incf''(lo regina, I walk a queen. Virg. Cams et Lucius fratres fuerunt. Cic. — So [b.) when the subject is in the accusative with the infinitive; Jiidicem me esse r6lo. Cic. (c.) SomeJ-mes also a dative, denoting the same object, both precedes and fohows a verb neuter or passive. See § 227, N. — And (d.) a predicate abla- tive sometimes follows passive participles of choosinr/, naming, etc.; as, Cons&li- hus certioribus factis. Liv. See ^ 257, R. 11. (e.) If the predicate nottn has a fonn of the same gender as the subject, it takes that form; as, Licentia coniiptrix est mfmun. Cf. § 204, R. 2. — (_/.) But if the subject is neuter, the noun of the predicate, :f it has both a masculine and a feminine form, takes the former; as, Ttmjnis v'ltm magister est. {(/.) An infinitive may supply the place of a predicate nominative. See ^ 269, E. 4. Remark 1. (a.) Adjectives, adjective pronouns, and participles, standing in the predicate, after verbs neuter or passive, and relating to the subject, agree with it in gender, number, and case. (b.) When the subject consists of two or more nouns, the gender and num- ber of such predicate adjectives iye determined by § 205, R. 2. Rem. 2. (a.) The noun in the predicate sometimes dLft'ers in gender and number from the subject ; as, Sanguis erant lacrimoe, Her tears were blcod. Ovid. Cnptlvi militum prteda fuerunt. Liv. (i.) So when a subject in the singular i;; followed by an ablative with cum, the predicate is plural; as, Exsilles esse juhet L. Tarquinium cum cunjuge et liberis. Liv. Reji. 3. The verbs which most frequently have a noun, etc., in the predicate agreeing in case, etc., with their subject, are : — '1.) 1\\& cojiula sum; as, Ego JOvis sum films. Plaut. Disce esse pater. Ter. The preilicate with sum maybe an adverb of place, manner, etc. ; as, Quod est longe iiliter. Cic. Rectissime smit apud te omnia. Every thins; with you is in a verv good condition. Id.; or a noun in an oblique case; as, Numen dine tiire tst7 Ovid. Sunt nobis mUia poma. Virg. (2.) Certain neuter verbs denoting exisiewce , position , motion , etc.; as, VIVO, exsisto, appdreo, cddo, eo, evddo, fugio, inccdo, jdceo, mitnei>, sedeo, sto, venio, etc. Thus, Hex circuibat pedes. The kmg went roimd on foot. Plin. Quos judicubat non posse Oratores evddere. Cic. Ego huic causce patrCnus ejcsiiti, Cic. Qui Jit, ut niiiw contentus vlvat ? (3.) The passive of verbs denoting, (a.) To name or call; as, appellor, dicor, noniinor, nunciipor, perhibeor, tdlulor, scr'ihor, inscribor, vucur. Tims, Cognomine Justus est appclldlus. He wad Billed by the surname Just. Xep Aristteus ulicce dieiiur iuventp"-. OiA. 206 SYNTAX. GENITIVE AFTER NOtTNS. § 21 I, IP.) To cnoose, render, appoint, or constitute; &%,cutans Nymphce. Ovid. Ndces dnerdrias, qudrvn minor nulla erat duum nillium amphdrum, i. e. gudrum minor nulla erat quam i avis duum, etc. Cic. (2) When it is a general word denoting a person, an anintal, »tc. as, 18* 210 SYNTAX. — GENITIVE TER NOUNS. § 211 Thucydides, qui ejusdem cetdtis fuit, scil. hdmo, Thncydides, who wfis of thf same age. Nep. 3Iultum ei detraxit, qiuod dlieiwe erat cirifdtis, scil. homo or clvis Id. Prlmum stipendlum meruit anndrum decern sepemque, scil. dddlescens. Id. Summi tit sint laboris eficiunt, scil. (Mmalin. Caes. ( CImuUus) somnl bremssimi erat. Suet. Jiflra sum dlacritale. Cic. Vul(/us ingeiiio iiiobili erat. Sail. Non est juris sui, He is not his own master. Lucan. PotestCdis sucb esse. Li^. Sudrumque rerum erani. Id. Of. Rem. 6, (7.) (3.) When it is a general word denoting thing, for which, in Eng lish, the words part, property, duty, office, business, characteristic, etc. are commonly supplied ; as, Tementds est fidrentis cetdtis, prudentia senectutis, Rashness is (the character- istic) of youth, prudence of old age. Cic. Est hoc Galltca consuctudlnis. Cass. So, stulmiie est ; est Imtdtis, etc., which are equivalent to stultitia est, levUas eat. Omniti hostiuiiL era.nt. A paucis emi, quod multorum esset. Sail. (a.) This happens especially when the siibject of the verb is an infinitive, (ft an entire chmse, in which case, instead of the genitive of the personal pront)uns, mi, ttii, etc., the neuters of the possessives, meum, tuum, etc., are used; as, Adolescentis est mdjOres ndtu revereri, It is (the duty) of a youtli to reverence the aged. Oviil. 'Ci'uusvis hdminis est errare, nidUus nisi inslpientis in errOre persiuiirdre. Cic. Pauperis est numerdre p)ecus. Ovid. So especially 7noris est ; as, Nett in the genitive after verbs of buying, selling, letting, and hiring , ns, Mercdtores non tantidem vendunt, quanti emcrunt. Cic. Nulla pestis humdno generi pliiris sti'tit, quam Ira. Sen. Note 1. Verbs of buying, selling, etc., are emx>, vendo, the neutral passive, veneo, consto, prosto, and liceo, to be exposed for sale. Note 2. With verbs of buying, selling, etc., the ablatives magno, permagno, plurinw, j)arvo, mini nto, nuA nihilo axe often used instead of the genitive; as, Non potest parvo res 7iiagnaconstdre. Sen. Quanti emere possum mimmo V What is the lowest price I can buy at? Plaut. Sometimes also the adverbs ctire \iene, and mate taka the place of the genitive tr ablative of price. §215,210. STNTAX. GENITIVE AFTER VERBS. 217 § ^15. (1.) Misereor, miseresco, and ine imper^onals mtse- ret, poenitet, pudet, t/edet, and plget, are followed by a genitive of the object in respect to which the feeling is exercised ; as, Miseremini socidrum, Pity the allies. Cic. Miserescile n'gis, Pity the king. Y'xtg. Meamdier, tui me tniseret, raei pi get, I pity vou, and am dissatisfied with myself. Ace. Eos iueptiiinimj9QS«! make oneself master of the city. Sail. Potiri regni (Cic), hostium {SaM.), (v.-^/M, To make or.etelf master of the world. Cic. Potio (active) occurs in riautus ; as. Earn rMnc pdilvit servitiitis, He has made him partaker of slavery. In the same writer, piHltus esthostimn signifies, 'he fell into the hands of tM enemy.' So, also, Allquem compollre prsedce or voti. App. So, Rerum ddeptut est. Tac. Domlnationis apisci. Id. Rcgndvit popiilorum. Hor. § 221. SYNTAX. GENITIVE OF PLACE. 221 GENITIVE OF PLACE. § 2^\m 1. The name of" a town in which any thing is said to be, or to be do7ie, if of the first or second declension and sin- gular number, is put in the genitive ; as, Habitat Mileti, He lives at Miletus. Ter. Quid Rojna fdciam ? WTiat can I do at Rome? Juv. Hercules Tyri maxime cdlitur. Cic. Note. For tlie constraction of nouns of the third declension or plural num- ber, see § 254. The following appears to be the best explanation that Las been given of this diversity of construction, depending solely on the number or declension of the noun. The name of the town ' where ' or 'in which ' is probably neither in the genitive nor the ablative, but always, as in Greek, in the dative. Since the genitive and dative are alike in the singular of the first de- clension and the dative .and ablative plural are the same in all declensions, such examples as Ronue and Athenis present no difficulty. In the third de- clension the dative and .ablative singular were anciently alike, and in such ab- latives as Anxuri, Carthagini, Ldcedamdni, the old form remains, see § 82, Exc. 5, (c.) In the second declension there was an old dative in oi, as in Greek, which was commonly changed to o, but sometimes to i: and the latter is still found in nulli, uni, etc., see ^ 107, and in the adjective pronouns ; as, illi, etc. Rkmark i. Names of islands and countries are sometimes put in the geni- tive, like names of towns; as, Ithdcce vivere, To live in Ithaca. Cic. Coi-cyra fuimus. Id. Cdnon plurimum C}-pri vixH, Tlitwlheus Lesbi. Nep. Quum Miltiudes domum CiiersonGsi hahuil. Id. Cntm Jussit consldere Apollo. Virg. Rorrus Niimid- iceque facindra ejus menwrat. Sail. Rem. 2. {a.) Instead of the genitive, the ablative of names of towns of the first and second declension and singular number, is sometimes, though rarely, used; as. Rex Tyro decedit, The king dies at Tyre. Just. J£i Corintho et Athenis et LdcedcBmdne ramcidta est victoria. Id. Pons quern ille Abydo fecerat. Id. Hujus exevijilur RGma nullum Mhemus. Vitiniv. Nun Libyce, non ante Tyro. Virg. For the explanation of this apparent anomaly, see the preceding note; in accordance with which it may be remarked, that the adverbs of place, fiM, ibi, ibidem, alibi, dlicubi, hie, ill'ic, isi'ic, etc., appear from their foiTn to be ancient datives. — (b.) When the noun is (jualified by an adjective, it is put, not in the genitive, but in the ablative with ^7^ ; as, //i ipsa Alexandria. Cic. And poeti- cally without in. Genus Lonyd nostrum dominubitur Alba. Virg. — (c.) When urbs, oppidum, locus, etc., follow the genitive of place as appositions, they are put in the ablative either with, or, more rarely, without, in; as, Archias Antid- chlce ndtus est, celebri quondam urbe. Cic. Clves Romdnos Nedpdli, in ctde- ben-imo oppido scBpe vidimus. Id. But when in urbe, etc., precede the name of a town, the latter also is put in the ablative; as, In oppido Citio. Nep.; and but very rarely in the genitive; as, Cassius in oppido Antiochise tsi, — in the town of Antioch. Cic, wliere the genitive depends on oppido. Rem. 3. The genitives domi, mllitice, belli, and Jiumi, are construed like names of towns ; as, Tenuit se domi. He staid at home. Cic. Vir domi cldnis. Liv. Spartjit hum jussos dentes, — on the ground. Ovid. Mllitiae and belli are thus used, especiallj wlien opposed to dduii ; as, Una semper mllitise et domi fuiinus, — both at home and in the camp. Ter. So Domi mllitiaoue. Cic. Et ddmi et milltice. Id. Militia domlque. Liv. Mllltim et domi. Ter. Belli dUmique, in war and in peace. Hon (1.) Domi is thus used with the possessives mece, turn, sua, nostra, vestrce, &r\d dliena; as, Domi nostrjE n'xiY, He lived at my house. Cic. Apud eum sic fui tainqunm mese domi. Id. Sacrlficium, quod aliena domi Jieret trivtsere. Id. But witli other adjectives, an ablative, generally with a preposition, is used; as, In '!idud domo. Ovid. Pdternddomo. Id. Sometimes also with the po.ssessives ; as, Mea i« domo. Hor. In domo sttd. Nep. So, instead of hUrni, ' upon the gi-ound,' 19* 222 SYNTAX. DATIVK AFTER ADJECTIVES. § 222 iumc is soiiietimes used, with or without a preposition; as, In humo artrtoid Ovid. Sedire hwno nudd. Id. (2.) When a genitive denotino; the possessor follows^ either domi or in dCmt is used; as, Diprehensus domi CoRsaris. Cic. Domi illius fuisti. Id. In domo Oxsaris. Id. In domo ejus. Nep. (3.) The ablative rf'JjJW for dowij also occurs, but not in Cicero; an, Ego in nunc experiiyi' domo. Plant. Domo se tenere. Nep. Domo abditas. Suet. Bello for belli is found in Livy — Dd7ni belloque. So, also, humo for liumi ; Strdtut Mmo. Stat. Flgit hiimo plantas. Yirg.: and in Immo lumen flgii. Ovid. (4.) Terra is sometimes used like Mini; as, Sacra terras celdvimus. Liv. Prajectus terrce. Virg. Ignes terrce condit. Luc. So, also, drence ; Truncum riliquit iirense. Virg. : and vicinioe ; ProximcE viciniaj habitat. Plant. (5.) The genitive of names of towns, d6mi, militia, etc., is supposed by some to depend on a noim understood; as, urbe, oppido, mdibus, solo, l6co, tempore, otc., but see a different explanation above hi Note. GENITIVE AFTEK PARTICLES. n. Certain adverbs are followed by the genitive. See § 212, R. 4. m. The genitive plural sometimes depends on the preposition tenus ; as, CUmdrum tenus, As far as Cumas. Ccel. Crurum te.nus. Virg. Ldterum t&- nus. Id. Urbium CorcyrcE tenus. Liv. — For the ablative after tenus, and for the place of the preposition, see ^ 241, and R. 1. DATIVE. § 293. 1. The dative is the case of reference, as it denotea the object with reference to which the subject acts, or in reference to ■which it possesses any specified quality ; or, in other words, the ob- ject for which, to the henejil or ioss'of which, any tiling is or is done. Hence, in distinction from the dative of the end (§ 227) the dative of reference is called datlvus commodi et Incommvdi, the dative of ad- vantage and disadvantage ; as, Scrlbo vobis hunc libriim, I write tliis book for you. Prosum tibi, or Titi utilis sum, I am useful to you. 2. Hence the dative of advantage and disadvantage may be used (a) with adjectives and particles whose meaning is incomplete unless the object is mentioned in reference to which the quality exists, (i) With verbs both transitive and intransitive. If transitive they take an accusative of the nearer and a dative of the remoter object. if intransitive they take a dative only, (c) With certain verbs -com- pounded with prepositions, after which the dative is used instead of the case which the preposition, if separate, would govern. {r writing. PL"a. Note. T1 e dati,'e «s commonly translated by the prepositions to ox for ; but some- limes by other i/.-sp.^Sitions, or without a preposition. ^ Remark 1. Ar'/ectives signifying useful, pleasant, friendly, fit, I'^-e, inclined, read'/, eas;/, dear, equal, and their opposites, also those signifying near, maas- compounded with con, and verbals in bllis, aio (bnowed by the dativb , as, Felix tms. Propitious to mur fritnds. Virg. Orc'itio ingrd/n GaUis, A speech lispleasing to the Gauls, \..\is. Anicm tyrannidi, Frieiidlv to tyrannii. Nep. Liibori r/i/ioi(7/.s-, Unsuited to uiw. Colum. P Atri si milis, Like his fatlier. Cic. Nihil tarn est Lysix 'f^rersun\ qiumi Isocrates. Aptum tempori. Id. M;\lo pro- mis. Sen. Promptus ^r.Wtion'. Tac. Cuivis/fk(7e est. Ter. M?Ui certiim est Cic. /•«/• fratri ?KO. Id. Fdisi. veris finitima sunt. LI. Ocftli amcoldres corpori. Colum. Multis bonis ^-'6i&. Uv. Mors est tei-ribilis iis, ipwrum, etc. Cic. - (a.) The following are some ol the adjectives included in Rem. 1, viz. (/ratus, (uceptus,dukis,jricuudiis,lis, inutilis, Ounus, saluber, siiluturis. frintiU'Siis ; a'ddmitdstis, damnost/s, funestm. vodiis, pestifer, pei-niciosus, exitiosti.';: — amuus, bencvolus, cams, fihniliaris, arpius, ftdus, fi'd/'lis, prdpiiius, swu?idus ; iuimicus. discdlor :— promts, prd<.ln-is, propemus. promptvs, pdrdtus :—fticilis, dijfidlii, :- dpertus, conspicmis, 7ndnifestus, peisjicnus, obscurus, certiis, compertus, nOtiis, amhlguus, dubius, iynotus, incertus, m Mittis ;—vliinus, finitimns, cvn finis, con- terminus, prOpior, proximus, cor/ndlus, concdlor, concors, conijruiis, am'sanguineus, consentaiieus, cmsdnus, converdeiu, contit^ uus, cantitmus, contintns. {b.) Many adjectives of other sijjnifi ;atioas, including some compounds of Ob, sub, and siij^r, as obnoxius, obmis, iubjectus, supplex, and superstes, are also followed by a dative of the object (c.) After verbals in iffc, the dative i; usually rendered bv the preposition by; as, Tibi ardibilis senna, A speech c edible to vou, i. e. worthy to be be- lieved by you. Ovi.id, ho»ti$ tfcough a substantive, h i.xum, ohlrfcto, obvfnio, nl/versor, occumbo, occurro, occurso, officio;— obi uco, objtcio, offiro, ojfuiido, oppono. 7 P( stfSro, posthdbeo, postpOno, postpUto, poxtscribo. 8. Frtrcer/o, prtrcurro, prcBeo, prcpliiceo, prcEmineo, prceniteo, prasideo, prcBSum.pra^ vdleOy pircBVertor; — t^eefSro, prer/icio, prcepono. 9. Pr5cu7nbo, proficio, propugno, prospicio, provXdeo. 10. Succedo, succresco, siiccumbo, succttrro, siifficio, suffragor, subSleo, tuhjIUeo, tubrlpo, subsum, subvenio ;—subflo, subjicio, subjugo, sitbinitto, su-ppono, substerno. 11. Supercuno, siiperstu, supersitm, supervinio, supervlvo. Note 2. In some verbs compounded with prepositions the meaning of the preposition is lost. Such compounds are either not followed by a dative oi the case depends, not on the preposition, but on the signification" of the verb according to § 223. Rem AUK 1. (rt.) Some verbs, compounded with db, de, ex, circum, and con- tra, are occasionally followed by the dative ; as, abs7im, desum, di'lahor, dtspero, exchlu, drcumdv, ciixumfumlo, circumjuceo, circitmjuio, contrddicu, cuiUrui'o ; as' Serta capiti di'lapsn, Tlie garlands having fallen from his head. Virg. Numqm numiiu vxcidh-unt tibi? Plant. Tigris urbi drcumfunditui: Plin. Sib! despeians. Gxi. — (b.) Circumdo and civcumfundo talie either an accusative of the thai" with a dative of the person, or an ablative of the thhig with an accusative of Xha per- son ; as, circumdo dlicui cusiodias, or circumdo lUiquem custodiis. Asperao, in- speri/o, doiio, impertio, exm, and induo, are construed in the same maimer. Cf. § 251, R. 2. Re3i. 2. Some verbs of repelling and taking awav (most of which are com- pounds of partide, may^at times be used ; as, 230 SYNTAX. DATIVE AFTKR PARTICLES. § 228 lyr/tivia evil tibi marirw dedecori, Cowardice will bring ^-eat disi,Tace to yen Oic. Ilcec rt's est arguniento, This thing is an argument, or serves as an p.Vgu- ment. Id. Hoc vltio viihi dant, This they set down as a fault in me. Uni- versos eura; hubuil. Snet. Una res erat mar/jio usui 'was of great use. Lucil. Quod tIbi maqndpere cordi est, riiihi vehemtnter displhet, What is a great pleasure, an object of peculiar interest to you, etc. Id. (6.) Sometimes the words Jit, able, ready, etc., must be supplied, <;specially before a gerund or a gerundive; as, Quum solvendo cicitate^^ nan esstnt, .... not able to pay. Cic. DlvUes,_ qui Oneri ferendo essent. Liv. Hn^ce restingueiido igni forent. Liv. Radix ejus est vescendo. Plin. Rem. 4. Instead of the dative of the end, a predicate nominative or accusa- tive is sometimes used; as, Ndtura tn illi pater es. By nature you are his father. Amor est exitium pecori : or the purpose is expressed by the accusa- tive with ad or in; as, Alicui cdmes est ad bellum. Cic. Se Reniis in clientelam 'iicdOant. Cajs. : or by the ablative with jn-o ; as, Itindcentia pro mallvolentia duci ccepit. Sail. Alcibus sunt, arbores pro ciibillbus. Cffis. Rem. 5. Instead, also, of the dative of the end or purpose, quo? to what end? for what purpose? why? sometimes occurs, with an accusative, which gen- erally depends on a verb understood, or with an infinitive or a clause; as. Quo milii fortiinam, si non concedltur utif Hor. Quo tibi, Pasiphaf, pj'etiOsas suniere vstes f Ovid. Reji. 6. After do and other similar active verbs an accusative of the purpose is found in apposition; as, Latlni coronam aurtaiii Jovi donum in CdpiioliuTn mittunt. Liv. Alicui comitem esse ddlum. Cic. Cf. ^ 204, R. 1; and § 230, R. a. Note. The dative, instead of the accusative, is sometimes used after the infinitive, when a dative precedes, and the subject of the infinitive is omitted; as, V'ibis necesse est J'l^jjiihus esse viris. Liv. Maximo tibi et civi et diici evddere contigit. Val. Max. See §§ 205, R. 6, and 239, R. 1. .DATIVE AFTER PARTICLES. § 238. Some pai'ticles are followed bj the dative of the object ; as, 1. Some adverbs derived from adjectives ; as, Prdpius TibOri qiuim Thermopylis. Nep. Proxime castris, Veiy near to tliu camp. Ca3s. PrOpius stabiilis armenta tenerent. X'irg. Conyruenter iiatarEe, convenienterque vivcre, Agreeably to nature. Cic. UpicHrus qmuii sibi constan- ter conreinenterque dicat, mm IdbOrat. Id. "Niimlm liimiuiu bene est. Afran. lliiii numquum in vltu fuit melius. Hor. Vlcere vita; hundnum dmlce. Cic. Beu^t mihi, bene vobis. Plant. So, Mihi vbvlam viinisti. Cic. In certdnilna scevu com- minus 'ire viro. Sil. Quaistores prOvincim mihi pi'cesio fuirunt. Cic. Sdmos est exadversum JNIileto. App. Remark. Prdpius and proxime, like their primitive prOpe, are sometimes construed with a and the ablative; as, Prdpt a meis aidlbus. Cic. Slellit exrantes propius a terris. Id. A Sura proxime est Philiscum, 02)pidum Parllid- rum. Plin. 2. Certain prepositions, especiallv in comic wi'iters; as, Mihi clam esi, It is unknown to me. Plaut. Contra mhis. Id. But in such instances they seem rather to be used like adjectives. 3. Certain interjections; as, Eeimlhi! Ah me! \'n'g. Vcb mihi.' Wo is me! Ter. Vce victis esse ! Liv. Va misero mihi. Plaut Hem tibi. Id. JEcce tibi. Cic. Note, (a.) The dative of the substantive pronouns seems sometimes nearly redundant, but it alvvaj^s conveys the expression of a lively feeUng, and ij therefore t(}\n\ed ddtivus etiiicus ; as, §229. SYNTAX. ACCUSAItVE AITRP. VKRBS. 2'U Fur mill! es .... iii my opinion. Plant. An il/e inlhi I'lbfr, civl inulier impirat} Cii;. Toiu/iliiim milii cdnxit. Id. Uhi nunc nobis dens Hit iiuiijisler? V'ir^. Jic ce Uhi Sctiosus! Cic. ffcm tihi Wiknt/int iirf/(;n/i ! Pliiliij/ih itm csl. IMiuit. Sihi is sometimes subjoined ijiiite pleoiiMstically to .su».f; as, Suo sibi (jladio liunc jutfulo. I'hiut. Ignorans suo sibi servit pnlri. Id. Sibi suo tempdre. (b.) The fo. lowing phrases also occur with vulu and a reflexive pronaun: quid libi vis? what do you wautV 'pad sibi iste vult? what does he wantV quid vuU sibi luec oraiio ? what does this sjieecli mean i* (piid luec sibi dona v6lunt * wliat is the meaning of these presents? or, what is thek object? ACCUSATIVE. ACCUSATIVE AFTER VERBS. § 339. The object of a transitive verb is put in the accu-sa tive ; as, Legatos 7niUunt, They send ambassadors. Cces. Animus mdvet corpus, The mind moves the body. Cic. Da veniam banc. Grant this favor. Ter. Eum tmitdti sunt, They imitated him. Cic. Piscem Syi-i venerantur. Id. Remaijk 1. A transitive verb, with the accusative, often takes a genitive, dative, or ablative, to express some additional relation ; as, Te convinco amentiis, I convict you of madness. Cic. Da foruw meliOrlbus. Give place to your betters. Ter. Solvit se Teucvia luctu, Troy frees herself from grief. Virg. See those cases respectively. Rem. 2. Such is tlie differetioe of idiom between the Latin and English languages, that many verbs considered transitive in one. are used as intransitive in the other. Hence, in translating transitive Latin verbs, a preposition must often be supplied in English; as, Ut me caveret. That he should beware of me. Cic. On the other hand, many verbs, which in Latin are intransitive, and do not take an accusative, are rendered into Englisli by transitive verbs ; as, Ille milii favet. He favors me: and many verbs originally in- transitive acquire a transitive signification. Rem. 3. The verb is sometimes omitted : — 1. To avoid its repetition ; as, Eventum sendtus, quern {sciL dare) videbltur^ dubit. Liv. 2. The interrogative interjection i^irtW? what? depends on ais or censes. So also quid vero ? quid njitur f quid eryo ^ quid enim ? which are always folkiwoc by another question, and both questions may be united into one proposition, the first sei'ving merely to introduce the interrogation. With quid posteai quid turn? auypW sequiiur. With 5?arf juofZ, occurring in transitions, r/icrtm c/e eo is omittcfl, but it maybe rendered 'naj-,' 'naj^even,' ' but now,' 'more- over,' etc., without an interrogation. — Dlcam is also to be supjjlied with quiA mtiltaf quill plura? ne laulta ; ne mullis ; ne plura. The infinitive (/icere is also sometimes omitted; as, Nimis mulia videor de 7ne. Cic. Peryerelioua. Id. Rem. 4. The accusative is often omitted : — 1. Whsn it is a reflexive pronoun ; as, Nox pnecipltat, sell, se Virg. Vum p?-dra dvei'tit. Id. Ko lardtum, scil. me. Hor. The reflexives are usually wanting after abdleo^ ah.ttlneo, accingo. adaquo, trquo, ag- gloDilro, au^eo, cllSro^ congiiinno, conttnuo, rlii/ino. '/erd^um ext, are followed by an accusative of the person exercising the feeling, and a genitive of the object in respect to which it is exercised. Cf. § 215, (1.) ; as, Eoram nos miseret, We pity them. Cic. The impersonal Ventum est :dso occurs with such an accusative; Quos non est veriium pmere, etc. Cic. Rem. 7. Jiivat, delectat, fallit, fiujit, prcelerlt, and decet, with theii compounds, take an accusative of the person ; as, Te hildri animo esse valde me jurat, That you are in good spirits greatly delights me. Cic. Fur/it me ad te scribrre. Cic. JUud nlterum quam sit difficile, te non fHyit. Id. Nee vero CiBsarem fefelUl. Ctes. Fdcis, ut te decet. Ter. So also when used personally; as, Parviim j)arva decent. Hor.; but decet often takes the accusative of the person with the infinitive; as, Hanc mdcHlain nos decet eft" iigi're. Ter. ; and in comic writers a dative ; as, Vdbis decet. Ter. For mea, tua, sua, nostra, vestra, after refert and intSrest, see § 219, R. 1 : and for the accusative by attraction, instead of the nominative, see J 206, (6,) (6.) § SOO. Verbs signifying to name or call ; to choose, render or constitute ; to esteem or reckon, which in the passive voice have two nominatives, are followed in the active voice by two accusatives, one of the object and the otlier of the predicate. Cf. § 210, R. 3, (3.) ; as, Urbem ex Antidchi patris nomine Antiochiam vdcdvit. He called lr.3 city An- tioch, etc. Just. Ludos faeis me. You make game of me. Plaut. Me consii. lem J" i!cistis. Cic. Iram bene I'M7iius initium dixit insdnice. Id. Ancum Mar- cium regem populus credvit. Liv. Sulpicium accusatorem suum numerdbat^ non compctitorem. Cic. Quum vos testes hdbeam. Nep. Note 1. The following are among the verbs included in this rule, viz. appello, dlco, nominn, nuncupo. pfrJiiheo, saluto, scrlho vind inscrlho, I'oco ; cdpio, ccnsttiiio, creo, dS' cl9.ro, deli^n, desi^nn, diro, Slit^a. facia, efficio, institun, lego, prodo, reddo, renuncioi ditco, dignor, exisUmo, habeo, jfidico, nuincro, piito, rSperio, iutelUgo, invetiio, se prcR- bSre or prcnstare, etc Note 2. An ablative with ex occurs, though rarely, instead of the accusa- •.ive of the object; as, Fortuna me, qui I'lher fuerani, servum fecit, e summa xnfimum. Plaut. Cf. Qui recta priiva fdciunt. Ter. Note 3. An infinitive may supply the ph^ce of the objective accusative ; as, Hi sXmu. assQ vdcat crimen. Ovid.: — and sometimes of the predicate accusative §231 SYNTAX. ACCUSATIVE AFTER VERBS. 233 also; as, Si reperire vdcas amittfire certius; aut si scire ubi sit rcperire vdctts. Id. So also nil adjective may supply the place cf the predicate accusative; as, Prtsbuil se diguum suis mujonbiis. Cic. dvsdrem certiOrem faciunt. Cses. Remakk 1. After verbs signifying to esteem or reckon, one of the accusatives is often the subject, and the othe\ the predicate, of esse expressed or understood ; as, Euni avanxm possiimvs existimdre. Cic. Tdlem se imperatorem prcebvii. Nep. Pnefla te cum, qui mihi es curjnitus. Cic. Merciiriura omnium inventorem nrlium fenml; liunc vidrum aUiue iliniriim ducQm arbitrantur. Cses. ; or an adjective 8uppli3S the place of the predicate accusative; as, Ne me existimuris ad mane'\ ium esse propensiorem. Cic. Note 4. Instead of the predicate accusative, (1) pro with the ablative some- times follows ^;uto, duco, and lidbeo, but denotes only an approximation; as, Allqtdd j)ro certo habere or putare.. Ea pre fahsis ducit. Sail. Aliquem pro hoste habere. Caes. — So also in with the ablative ; as. Nihil prceter virtuttm in bonis h'lbi're. Cic. Aliquem in numero hosiium diicere. Cic. — and the ablative with- out in ; as, U(i vos affinium loco diicerem. Sail. — So also e or ex with the abla- tive; ■.I!', ( Ut) ydceret qiiod e reimbUca, fideque sna ducerei. Liv. — vSometimes (2, the cenitive; ns, Otl'icii duxil exoi-dre J'iUcb pntrem. Suet. (See V211, K. S, (3.) Sc with a genitive or an ablative of price or value; as, Putdrt aliquem nihilo. Cic. y on hdbeo nanc'i Mai-sum augitrem. Enn — and sometimes (3) a dative; as, Quando tu me hdbes desplcfitui. Plant. : — or an adverb ; as, jEgre hdbuit, f ilium ia pro pdrente nnsum. Liv. And (4) ad or z« with the accusative; as, Ldca Sid hibernacula ^(j^e/-e. Liv. Aliquem in Patres legere. Id.: or (5) the genitive depending on the ablative of cause, manner, etc. ; as, Qui servitdtem deditionis nomine appellant. Caes. Rem. 2. Many other verbs, besides their proper accusative, take a eecond, denoting a purjjose, time, character, etc. Such are do, tribuo, sumo, peto, pono, adjungo, ascribo, cognosco, accio. Jingo, significo, etc. ; as, Qiidre ejus figce comitem me adjungerem. Cic. Hdminum dplnio socium 7»e ascribit tuis "laudibus. Id. Quos eqo sim tdties jam dedigndta maritos. Virg. Hunc Igitttr Y^gQxn ugnoscimus, qui FhlVqipum dediyndtur patrem? Curt. Flliam iuam mihi uxorem posco. Plaut. Petit hanc Sdturnia munus. Ovid. Such 3onstnactions may often be referred to apposition, or to an ellipsis of esse. § 331. Verbs of asking, demanding, and teaching, and celo (to conceal), are followed by two accusatives, one of the person, the other of the thing ; as, Hoc te vehementer rOgo. Cic. Illud te oro, ut, etc. Id. R6go te nummos, I ask you for money. Mart. Posce deos veniam. Ask favor of the gods. Virg. Quum leyent quis miisicam ddcuerit Epaminondam, When they shall read who ta-rht Epaminondas music. Nep. AntigOnus iter omnes celal, Antigonus cou ceak his r)ute from all. Id. Deprecdri deos mala. Sen. Quoiidie (Jasar £.i.vizs irvimiiniwra jldgitare. Cses. Multa deos dram. Virg. RzMARK 1. This rule includes the verbs of asking and demanding, flagito. efflasTito, obsecTO, Oro, exuro, coiifndo, perr.ontor, posco, rc/tosco, consulo, precor. dejTlcur, rus;o, and inltrro^o, which, with the accusative of the person, take the accusative of the neuter pronouns hoc, id, illud, quod, r/iiid, more frequently than that of a substantive .■ of teach- ing, duceo, Idoceo, deducro, and eriidio, which last has two accusatives only in the poets. Admuneo and consiito are rarely found with two accusatives; as, Consulain /lanc rem unit OS. Plaut. Earn retn nos Hinis ndmutiuil. Sail. • Rkm. 2. Instead of the accu-;ative of the person, verbs of asking and de- manding often take the ablative with ah or ex; as, Non di^hlbavi abs te has lit^ ras jMjscere. Cic. Veniam orimiu ab ipso. \'irg. Istiid vdlebam ex te percvntdri Plaut. 20* 234 STKTAX. — ACCDSATIVE AFTER VERBS. ^ '2o2. Rem. 3 (a.) Instead of the accusative of the thing, tlie ablative with Uc is sometimes used; as, Sic ego te eisdem de rebus inienv;jciii._ Oic. De itlnC-re bostiiun senutiim eddcet. Sah. Bassus noster me de hoc hbro cPldctl. Cic. Cf. ij 229 R. 5, (6.) — [/).] Sometimes also instead of the accusative of the thing an infini- tive, or an infinitive or subjunctive clause is used; as, Bcus prcciiri dcbPiis, ut urbem defendant. Cic. Ul ddcmm Rulluin posthac tacere. Id. Docui id non fieri posse. Id. Doceant cum qui vir Sex. Roscius fuerit. Id. — (c.) With verbs of teaching, tlie instrument by means of which the art is practised is put in the ablative ; as, Allqucm fldlbus ducere. Cic. Docere dliquem armis. Liv. Z,i/e/'(« may be used eitlier in the accusative or in the ablative ; as, Telitcraa doceo. Cic. IJoctus Grcecis Uteris. Id. Rem. 4. Some verbs of asking, demanding, and teaching, are not followed by two ac- cusatives; as, f.rvjio, peto, postulu, r/iirrro. srltor, sriscilor, which, with the accusativi ol ihe thing, take an ablative of the person with the preposition ah, rA, orf.r,- hnbiio. in- stUuo. instnin. etc., which are sometimes used \vith the ablative of the thing, generuUj «ithout a preposition, and are sometimes otherwise construed ; as, Instituere aliquem ad dicendum. Cic. Rem. 5. {a.) Many active verbs with the accusative of the person, take also an accusative denoting in ivhat respect or to what deijree the action of the verb is exerted. {b.) The accusative of degree, etc., is commonly 7M7ii7, a neuter pronoun, or a neuter adjective of quantit_y; {is, Non quo vi-e ahquid jiivure posses. Cic. Pauca 2}''o taii/wre mllites hortaiiis. Sail. Id adjuta me. Ter. Neque est te fal- lere quidquam. Virg. Cf. § 232, (8.) Rem. 6. By a similar construction, genus and secus, 'sex,' are sometimes used in the accnsative, instead of the genitive of quality; as, NuUas hoc genus vigi- lins viyilarunt. Gell. So, Omnes muliebre secus. Suet. Cf. 211, R. 6, (4.) § 2S2. (1.) Some neuter verbs are followed by an accusa- tive of kindred signification to their own ; as, Yita-m jucunda7H vlve.re, To live a pleasant life. Plaut. Mlrum somniavi Bomnium, 1 have dreamed a wonderful dream. Id. FUrere hunc fhrorem. Virg. Islam pugnam jmgnabo. Phxut. Piu/ndre dicenda Musis proelia. Hor. Lus^m insolentem ludere. Id. Si non servitutem serviat. Plaut. Queror hand fiiciles que,~tus. Stat. JCirdvi verissimum jufijumndum. Cic. Ignotas jt'ibef Ire vias. Val. Flacc. So, also, Ire exsequias, To go to a funeral. Ter. Ire suppti- tias. To gg to one's assistance. Ire infltias. To denj-. This expression is equivalent to infitior, and may like that take an accusative; as. Si hoc uiiiim a^imxero, qnod ni'mo eat i7i/itlas. Nep. : or the accusative with the infinitive; as, Ncque infltias Imus Siciliam nostram provinciam esse. Liv. Ui swim gau- dium gmuli'remus. Coel. ad Cic. Fnficisci magnum iter. Cic. PoUuj: itqni reditque viam. Virg. This accusative is usually qualified by an adjective. (2.) Verbs commonly neuter are sometimes used transitively, and are then followed by an accusative. Accusatives are thus used with Cleo and sajno, and their compounds, red,'ho. resiqtio; as, Oiei! unguenta. He smells of perl'umes. Ter. Wv-e peregj-Imru, • To have a foreign smell. Cic. Ordliones rcdOlentes antlquitatem. Id. Miila herbam earn sapilint, The honey tastes of that herb. Plin_. Una picem /•«?/«", ns. Id. So, Sitio honores. Cic. Camera 2)lmt. Liv. Claudius aleam stiidiosiitsime lusit. Suet. Erumpere diu coercitam iram in hostes. Liv. Libros ivigudre. C>vid. Prmre verba. Liv. Nee vox hominem s6nat. Virg. Stiddre mella. Id. Murien- tem nonilne cldmal. Id. Quis post vlna grdvem militiam ant paupOriem crepati Hor. Om\\ev in the sense of ' in no way,' ' in no respect.' So non nihil, ' to some extent,' ' in some measure.' Note 2. In the above and similar examples, the prepositions ob, propter, per, ad, etc., may often bp supplied. This construction of neuter verbs is most common with the neuter ufrusatives id, quid, quidquam, dll'/uid, quicquid, quod, nihil, nonnViil, Idem, illud, tail til HI, qumituiii, unum, multa, pauca, alia, cetera, om7iia, etc. Cf. §256, R. 16, N. § !SS3. Many verbs are followed by an accusative depend- ing upon a preposition with which they are compounded. (1.) Active verbs compounded with trans, ad, and circwn, have sometimes two accusatives, one depending upon the verb, the other upon the preposition ; as, Omnem equitatum pontem transdiicit, He leads all the cavalry over the bridge Cks. Agesiiaus Hellespontum copias trdjecit. Nep. Petreius jusjiirandum cid igit Afranium. Cajs. Roscillum Pompi}ius omnia sua prajsidia eircumdnxll. Id So, Pontus scopulos sUperjacit undam. Virg. So, also, adverto and vuUuo with unimum ; as, Id dnimum advertit. Caes. Id quod iinimum induxerat piitdisper non tenuit. Cic. So, also, injicio in Plautus — Ego te mdnum injlciam. (2.) Some other active verbs take an accusative in the passive voice depending upon their prepositions ; as, Mdgicas accingier artes. To prepare oneself for magic arts. Virg. In proae writers the ad is in such cases repeated; as, accingi ad consuldtum. Liv. Clussis circumvehitur arcem. Id. Quod anguis dumi vectem circumj tctus yuisset. Cic. I .ocuxn prceterveclus sum. Id. (3.) Many neuter verbs, especially verbs of motion, or cf rest in a place, when compounded with prepositions which govern an aecus i- tjve, become transitive, and accordingly take an acciisative ; as, Gentes qua mare dlnd adjacent. The nations which border upon that sea. Nep. Obeq-Mdre agmen. Curt. Incedunl mcestos locos. Tac. Trnnsilui flammas. Ovid.- Succedire tecta. Cic. Ludorum dii:bus, qui cognitiOnem intenvneranl. Tac. Aftire provinciam. Suet. Caveat ne proelium ineat. Cic. Ingredi iter pedlbus Cic. Ejneuri horli quos mddo prcjetenbamus. Id. Note. To thi.s rule belong many of the compounds of umbuln, cedo, ci'rro. eo. fqutto ftuo, iciar/itr, labor, »o and vato, re/io, salioy sriim/n, vudo, x-i^/inr, viinio, volo ;- nuho jio o, sidet , si.tto, sto, etc., with the prepositions included in § 224. and «ith ex. 236 SYNTAX. — ACCUSATrVE AFTER VERBS. § 23*4. Remark 1. Some neuter verbs compounded with pr f^Bitiona •which jrovern an ablative, in like manner become transitive, and are followed by an accusative ; as, Neminem conveni, I met with no one. Cic. Qui societatem coieris. Id. Aversdii honores. Ovid. Ursi arborem dversi derepunt. Plin. Edonni crapulam. Cic. Egressus exsilium. Tac. Evaditque celer npam. Vir^. Exccdere niime- rum. Tac. Exire limen. Ter. Tibur dqxuz fertile prcBjiuunt. Hor. Rem. 2. After verbs both active and neuter, compounded with prepositions which take an accusative, the preposition is often repeat- ed, or oiie of similar signification is used ; as, Gi'sar se ad vtemmem adjunxit. Cic. Mnllltudinem trims 'Rhenum in GaTihm transduccre. Cffis. — In Galliam inrasit Antonius. Cic. Ad me ad'ue 'juuam meinini. Id. Orcdor peraqrat per animos hoinlnum. Id. A'is in senatiim aca'de- rem. Id. Raj'nia ad templum incessit. Virg. ,Iuxta gemtorem addat Ldvinia. Id. Fines extra quos egredi non possim. Cic. A dative instead of the accusative often follows such compounds, according to \ 224. Circum is not repeated. Note. Some verbal nouns and verbal adjectives in hundus are followed by an accusative, like the transitive verbs from which they are derived ; as, Qidd libi h^lc riic^Y'^io ad te est ineum v\Y\\m.'i Wherefore do you receive my husband liither to you ? Plant. Quid tibi, mahim^ me, aid quid ego agam, eurCdio 'st? Id. Quid tibi hanc dditio est? Id. Quid itbi ha.nc notio est, inqua/n, iumaxm. meam? Quid tibi hanc dic/ito taclio 'st'^ Id. Hanno vitabundus castra hostium coiisiilesque. Liv. Mlthrldates Romanum meditabundus bellum. Just. Mird- bundi vanam speciem. Liv. PopHldbundus agi-os. Sisenn. Cariiificem imdyina- bumlus. App. § 234:. A verb in the passive voice has the same govern- ment as in the active, except that the accusative of the active voice becomes the nominative of the passive. Note 1. The accusative of tlie person with the infinitive, after verbs of sai/ing and eommandiny, may become tlie subject of the passive voice; as. Active, D'ico regeni esse juslum ; — Passive, Rex dlcilur Justus esse. Act. Jubeo te re- dlre ; — Pass. Juieris red'ire : the construction in the passive being the same as though re(jem and te had depended immediate!}' upon dlco and ji'^eo. — So, also, when the accusative of the person is the object of the verb and the infinitive stands as the accusative of the thing. Cf. ^ 270, N. I. When a verb, which in the active voice takes an accusative both of the person and of the thing, is changed to the passive foi-m, the accusative of the person becomes the nominative, and the accusa- tive of the thing is retained ; as, RUjdtus est sententiam. He was asked his opinion. Liv. Jnterrdgdtus causam. Tac " St'gttes alimentru/isix prepositions are followed by the accusative. These are lirf, i/lversus or adversutn, ante, apud, circa OT,circum, circiier, cis or citrS, contra, erga, frtra, infra, intSr, intra, juxta, db, penSs, pSr, post, pOnS, pra.tSr, prS/'S, propter, secundum, supra, trails, ultra; as, Ad ternplum nmi mqius Palladis Ibant, — to the temi)le. Virg. Adversus hostes, Against the enemy. Liv. Germdniqui cis Rlu'iium incOlunt, — this side the Rhine Cses. tin um tantuiii resident intra muros mdU. Cic. Prinnpio ierum imju'rinm penes n'ujes erat. Just. Ternplum pounin propter dqiiniii. Virg. fnter agendum. Id. Ante ddi.iandum. Id. Respecting the siguification of some of the preced tng prepositicas see ^ 195, R. 6, etc. 238 SYNTAX. ACCUSATIVE AFTER PREPOSITIONS. i 23d Rkmark 1. ds is generally used with names of p iices; a'trn with othei words .also; as, Cis Tatirum. Cic. Gs Pddimi. Liv. Faucos cis mtrisi-s. Plant Citra VHiam. Cic. Citra saticfatem, Not to satiety. Col. Ciii-a j ail(jdti6ntm, Cels. Citra Trojdna teti/pdra. Ovid. Rkm. 2. Inter, signifying between, applies to two accusatives jointlj-, and sometimes to a single plural accusative; .as, Inter me et Se'tpionem. Cic. Inter natos el pdrentes. Id. Inter nos. Among onrsel yes. Id. Inter fa Icdrios, Among the scythe-makers. Cic. When it denotes time it signifies durincj, and more rarelv at ; as, Inter ipsum puijnae. tempus. Liv. Inter canain. Cic. Rem. 3. Ante and post are commonly joined with concrete official titles, when used to indicate time, rather than with the corresponding abstract nouns; Et-, mile or 2}ost Ciceronem consiilem, rather than ante or post consiilatum Cici- Vi-nis. (2.) In and sub, denoting motion or tendency, are followed by the accusative; denoting situation, they are followed by the ablative; as, Via duett in urliem, 'I'he way conducts into the city. Virg. Nosier in te dnwr. Cic. Cnlllmdchi epi (/rnmina in Cleombrotum est — on or concerning Cleombrotus. Id. Kxeratns siili jiigum missus est. The army was sent under the yoke. Cass. Miiyna mei sub terras ibit imdno. Virg. Media in urbe, In the midst of the city. Ovid. In his ^fiiit Ariovistus. Cass. Bella sub lUdcis moenibus gercre, To wage war under the Trojan walls. Ovid. Sub nocte silenti. Virg. Rem. 4. The most common significations of in, with the accusative, are, into, to, towards, until, for, (if/ninst, about, concerninr/, — with the ablative, in, 07i, upon, nniong. In some instances, in and std), denoting tendency, are followed by the ablative, and, denoting situation, by the accusative; as. In conspectu meo audet ven'ire. Phsed. Ndlidnes qtuB in amicitiam populi Romdni, ditionem- we essent. Id. o and ejmhr, ' to live or feast upon,' are followed by the ablative ; as, Dapibns 6puldmur djnmis. Virg. Lacte atque pecore vlvuni. CiBS. 5. Sio signifying ' to be filled or covered with,' and also when signifying ' to cost,' is followed by the ablative without a preposition ; when signifying ' to persevere in, stick to, abide by,' ' to rest or be fixed on,' it is followed by the ablative eitli^r with or without in; as, Jam pulvere coslum stare mdent. Virg. — Multo sanguine nc vulneriljus ea Pcems vicioria stetil. Liv. Stare conditionibus. Cic. Omms in Ascknio Stat ciira 2}arentis. Virg. — Consto, ' to consist of or 'to rest upon,' is followed by the ablative either alone or with ex, de, or in ; as Cmistat mdteries soUdo corpore. Lucr. Hdnio ex animo constat et corpore. Cic. Remark 1. Fldo, confido, misceo, admisceo, permisceo, and assuesco often take the dative. Rem. 2. When a preposition is expressed after the above verbs, sto, yido^ confido, 7iltor, innitor, and assuesco take in or ad; acquiesco, in ; and vtitceo with its compounds, cum. § S4:0. Perfect participles denoting origin are often fol- lowed by the ablative of thQ. source, without a preposition. Such arft natus, prdgnatus, s&tus, creatus, cretus, editus, gSnttus, gSniratus, ortus ; to which maj be added driundus, descended from. Thus, Nate dea ! son of a. goddess ! Virg. Tantdlo jn-oc/ndttis, Descended from Tantalus. Cic. Sdtus Nereide, Sprung from a Nereid. Ovid. Credtua rege. Id. Alcdndre creti. Virg. Edite n'(/ihus. Hor. I)iis gcnite. Virg. ArgdU tco genirdtus Alemdne. Ovid. Ortus nullis mdjoj^ibus. Hor. Ccelesti semine 6riundi. Lucr. Remark 1. The preposition is also rarely omitted after the verbs creo, genera, and Masfor ; as, Ut \:>aXre certo nascerere. die. Fortes creantur fortihus. Hor. Rem. 2. After participles denoting origin, the preposition ex or de is_ usually joined to tlie name of the mother; and in a few passages ex or ab is joined to the name of the father; as, Prdgndti ab Dite patre. Cfes. In speaking of one's ancestors ah is frequently used ; as, Plerosque Belgas esse oi'tos a Germanis. Id. Rem. 3. Origin from a place or country is generally expressed by a patrial adjective; as, Thrdsylmlus Atheniensis, Thrasybulus of Athens, tivy ofter. ases ab; as, Turnus Herdonius ab Alicia. Cajsar prefers the ablative" alone; fts. On. Magius Cremona; and in this manner is expressed the tribe to which a person belongs ; as, Q,. Veyres Rdmilia, — of the RomiUan tribe. ABLATIVE OF CAUSE, Etc. § 24:7. Nouns denoting the cause, manner, means, and m- strument, after adjectives and verbs, are put in the ablative with- out a preposition. Note. The English prepositions with the ablative of cause, manner, moars and instrument are by, ivita, in, etc. 1. The cause. (1.) Adjectives which have a passive significa- tion, as denoting a state or condition produced by some externH/ cause, may take such cause in the ablative ; as, Campdni fuerunt superbi bonitate agrorum. Cic. Animal pabiilo latum. Sen Prselio/e^sj lass'tque, Weary and faint with the battle. SaU. Hdmines cegr gravi morbo. Cic. (2.) Neuter verbs expressing an action, state or feehng of tht subject originating in some external cause, may take that cause is the a jlative ; as, § 247. STNTAX.^ABLATIVE OF CAUSE, ETC. 247 Interiit fame, He perished with hujger. Laude aliena ddlet. Cic. Lf'; as, Rhiuiltmus hoc tibi, ne nostram vicem Irascaris, That you may not be angi-y on our account. Liv. Tuam vicem scepe doleo, quod, etc. Cic. Suam vicem magis anxius, quam ejus, cui auxUium ab se piitebdtur. Liv. Remark 1. '^ lien the cause is a voluntary agent, it is put in the accusative with the preposition ob, jvopter, or per ; as, Non est cequum me propter vog decijn. Ter. These prepositions, and a, or ab, de, e or ex, and prw, are also sometimes used when the cause is not a voluntary agent; as, Ob adulterium ccBsi. Virg. Nee Idqiii prse mcprore jwtidt. Cic. Rem. 2. {a.) After active verbs, the cause, unless "expressed by an ablative in u from substantives having no other case ; as, Jussu, rdgatn and admvn'ttu, is seldom expressed bj' the simple ablative, but either by a jni position, or by causa, gratia, ergo, etc., with a genitive; as, Lil gibus proptir nic-tum pctret. Cic. Ne ob earn rem ipsos desjnceret. Id. JDonari virtutis ergo. Ifl. Bi hoc honoris mei causa suscejxris. Id. But with causa, etc., the adjective pronoun is commonly used for the corresponding substantive pronoun; as, Tt abesse mea causa, 'mdleste fero. Cic. Cf. § 211, K. 3, (6.) (b.) When the cause is a state of feeling, a circumlocution is often used with a perfect participle of some verb signif\'ing ' to induce ' ; as, Ciipidildte ductus, inductus, incitntus, iiicensus,injlammalusjmpuhus,m6tus, capttis, etc. Mihi bene- volentia diictus tnbucbat omnia. Cic. Livy frequently uses ab in this sense; as, Ab Ira, a spe, ab udio, from anger, hope, hatred. 2. The manner. Cum is regularly joined with the ablative of manner, when expressed simply by a noun, not modified by any other word ; and also* when an adjective is joined with the noun, provided an additional circumstance, and not merely an essential character of the action, is to be expressed. Thus : Cum voluptate dlirjuem audlre. Verres Lampsdcum venit cum magna calami- tate civitdtis. Cic. Hence also when the connection between the subject and the noun denoting the attribute is only external ; as, Proccdere cnm vestc pur- purea: in distinction from Nudis pedibus incedere ; Aperto capite sedire, etc., which express circumstances or attributes essential to the subject. But modus, ratio, mos, rltus, etc., signifying manner, never take cum, and it if omitted in some expressions with other substantives; as, Hoc nwdo scripsi ; ConstUuerunt qua ratione ageretur ; More bestidruin vdgdri ; LalrOnum ritu vlvere ; ^quo aniraoy"ero; Maxima fide dm'icUias cdluit. Summa axiuitate res consU- tuU ; Viam iiicredibili celeritate confecit; Librum magna cuiiv dillgentia^aa Bcripsit; the action of the verb being intimately connected with the circum- stance expressed by the ablative. So in some expressions with substantives alone; as, Silentio y^rceie/vre or face re dliquid ; LUseugSrt; Jiire and iiijiiriii fdofre ; Magislrdtus vitio credlus ; Rede ei ordine Jit. Rem. 3. The manner is also sometimes denoted by de or ex with the abla- tare ns, De or ex indmlrid. On purpose. Liv. I'^ inkgro, Anew. Quirt. 248 SYNTAX. ABLATIVE OF CAUSE, ETC. §248 3. The means and in si r u m int . An ablative is joined with verbs of every kind, and also with adjectives of a passive significa- tion, to express the means or instrument ; as, A7nlcos observantia, 7-em parsimonia retinuit, He retai/ied his friends by at- tention, his property by frugality. Cic. Auro ostrojwe decori. Virg. jEgrescii medando. Id. Cornibus tauri, aj>ri dentlbus, morsu leones se tuiantur. Cic. Qbs^js est virgis. Id. Trabs saucia securi. Ovid. For the ablative of the means after verbs oi jilling, etc., see \ 249, I. Eem. 4. When the means is a person, it is seldom expressed by the simple ablative, but either hy. per, or by the ablative dperd with a genitive or a pos- sessive pronoun ; as, mea, tud, sua, dperd, which are equivalent to per me, per . Rem. 2. An object with which a person or thing addressed is cDmpared, if also put in the abVative ; as,. fons Bandusue splendldiai- vitro ! Hor. Rem. 3. Sometimes the person or tiling with which the subject of a proposi- tion is compared, instead of following it in the ablative, is connected with it by qunm, and it is then put in the same case as the subject, whether in the nomi- native or the accusative; as, Orddo quam habitus fidt miser dbilioi\ Cic. Affinno mdlam esse laudem ampliortm quam cam. Id. So, also, when an abla- tive in the case absolute takes the place of the subject; as, Eodeni (scU. dace) plui'ci, quam gregario milite, tolerante. Tac. Rem. 4. If the person or thing which is compared with any object is neither the subject of the sentence nor the person addressed, qunm is commonly used, and the' object which follows' it is then put in the nominative with smn, and sometimes' in an oblique case to agree with the object with which it is com- pared; as, ilfeZ/OT'e?«, quam ego sum, suppcno tibi. Plaut. Efjo hominem calli- diorem vidi neminem quam Phonniunem. Ter. Advenius hosiium fuit agris, (\\\i\m \irh\ terHblUor. Liv. Omnes fonies x^tsXQ, quiim hieme, sunt yclidiores. Plin. Themistoclis nOmen, quam "Solonis, est ilhistrius. Cic. — The following example illustrates both the preceding constructions: — Ut tibi mulio mOjon, quam AfrTcanus fuit, me nan multo minorem quam Loelium facile et in rcpublicd et in limicitid adjimcium esse patidre. Cic. Rem. 5. (a.) The person or thing with which the object of an active verD is compare i, though usually connected with it by quarn^ (R. 4,) is sometimes put in the ablative, especially in the poets, and frequently also even in prose, if the obiect is a pronoun, particularly a relative pronoun ; as, Attdlo, quo grdviorem inimicum non hdbui, sdrorem dedit, He gave his sister to Attains, than whom^ etc. Curt. Roc 7iihil yrdtius fdcere 2}(>tes. Cic. Camam enim suscqnsti antiquidrem menioria tua. Id. Exeqi mdnHmentum asre perennius. Hor. Cur olmun san- guine \'ipt'nno caulius vitat f Id. Quid prius dlcam solitis parentis laudibus '? Id. Majnra viribus audes. Virg. Nullam sacra vite prius severis arborem. Hor. NuHos his viallem lUdos sjyectasse. Id. § 178, 3. (6.) The ablative instead of quam is never used with any other oblique case except the accusative, but qtiam is sometimes found, even where the ablative mit'ht have been used; as, Melior tutiorque est certa pax quam sperdta victoria. Liv. After quam, if the verb cannot be supplied from the preceding sentence, est, fuit, etc., must be added; as, Bcec verba sunt M. Varronis, qiiam fuit Claudius, doclioris. Gell. Brusum Germanlcum minorem ndtu, quam ipse erat, frdtrem dnilsit. Sen. Rem. 6. (rt.) Minus, plus, and ampUus with numerals, and with other words denoting a certain measure or a certain portion of a thing, are used either with or without quam, generally as indeclinable words, without influence upon the construction, but merely to modifv the number; as. Nonplus quam qudtmr millia effuaerunt, not effCigit. Liv. i'ictores antlqui non sunt Usi plus quam qud- tuor cdloribus, not jMrtbus. Cic. (b.) Quam is frequently omitted with all cases; as. Minus duo millia lidmi- num ex tuntv exercitu effilgcrunt. Liv. Milites Romdni scepe plus dtmididti men- sis cibdria J'erebant. Cic. Quum plus annum ceger fuisset. Liv. Sedecim rum amplius CO anno leyionlbus dcfensum imperium est. Id. (c.) These comparatives, as in the preceding example, are sometimes in- sertiid between the numeral and its substantive, and sometimes, when joined witl a negative, they follow both, as a sort of apposition ; as, Quinque millia armdtdrum, non amplius, reUctma erat prmsidium, — a garrison of five thousand Boldiers, not more. Liv. So, also, loiujius ; Ccesa^ certior est /actus, magnat Gallurum copias non longius millia passuum octo ab hibernis suis abfuisse. Cks. See ^ 236. id.) The ablative is sometimes used with these as with other comparatives; as, I>ies ir'tginta aut jjIus eo in ndvi fui. Ter. Triennio amplius. Cic. Horii amplius moliebanlur. Id. Ne kmyius tnduo ab castris absit. Cajs. Apud Sitevoi now longiu^i anno remdnt're Una in loco incolendi vausd fleet. Id. Qnum initio mm vmplius du'^bus millibus Mbuissei. Sail. § 25G. SYNTAX. ABLATIVE AFTER COMPARATIVES. 2.'<7 Rem. 7. Quam is in like manner sometimes omitted, without s chaj ge ol case, after inujor, minor, and some other coinpiinitives ; as, Obsides ne minorei octonum denum annonim neu majores quininn qiuidragGnum,.... uf not less than eighteen, nor more than forty-five years of age. Liv. I\x lubarM exeraiu, qui mini/fes quinque et trlginta annis erani, in naves imposiii ftmt. The genitive ftnd ahlative, in these and similar examples, are to be referred to ^ 211, K. 6. Lonffiiis a!) nrbe mille passuum. Liv. Annos natas matjis quadra yinta. Cic. Kem. 8. When the second member of a comparison is an infinitive or a clause, quam is always expressed; as, Mhil est i?i a'lcendo mdjus qaam ut faveat rrati'ri auditor. Cic. Rem. 9. Certain nouns, participles, and adjecWves, — as dpmione^ spe, ex- tpeciatione, fide, — dicto, sdlito, — cequo, credibiU, necesscirio, vera, and justo, — are ased_ iu a peculiar mamier in the ablative after comparatives ; a-s, Opinione celerius venturus esse dlcUur, — sooner than is expected. Ca;s. Dicto citius tuini- da (equora pldcat, Quicker than the word was spoken. Virg. Injurias grdviut requo habere. Sail. [a.) These ablatives supply the place of a clause; thus, (jvchhus cequo is p.qw'walQnt to gravius quam quod cBquum est. They are often omitted; as, T:d- mistocles llbC-rius vlvPbat, soil. ut)junctive is also rarely used in the sense of a softened perfect indicative ; as, Fordtan temere fecerim, I may have acted inconsiderately. Rkm. 5. The subjunctive is used in all its tenses, in independent sentences, to express a doubtful question implying a negative answer; as. Quo eugnandum, (\no fiant acrim'es, They stimulate them to fight, that they may become fiercer. Varr. Remark 1. C/if or w/i, signifying ' that,' 'in order that,' or simply 'to' wi':h the infinitive, relates either to a purpose or to a result. In the latter case it often refers to sic, ita, ddeo, ta/n, IcJlis, tancus, is, (ijusinudi, etc., in the preceding clause ; as, Jd mlhi sic erit grdtum, ut grdtius eifse nihil possit. That will be so agreeable to me, that nothing can be more so. Cic. Non sum ita hebes, ut istuc dlcam. Id. Neque tarn erdmus dmenies, ut expldrdta nobis esset victoria. Id. Tantum induLfii cJ /on, ut eum pietas vincerel. Nep. Ita and tam are sometimes omitted; as, Epdmlnondas fuit etiam disertus, ut'nimo Thebdnus ei par esset cldquentid, instead of tai7i disertus. Id. Esse dpurtet ut vivas, non vlvere ut edas. Auct. ad Her, iol efffcit ut omnia floreant. Cic. 23* 270 SYNTAX. SDBJUNCTIVE AFTER PARTICLES. § 262. Rem 2. C7/, signifying ' even if ' or 'although,' expresses a suppo- eition msrely as a conception, and accordingly takes the subjunctive as, Ut desint v'n-es, tamen est laiidanda vdluntas, Though strength be wanting, yet the will is to be praised. Ovid. Ut, in this sense, takes the negative «on ; as, Exercitus si jjacis nomen audimit, ut non referat pedem (even if it does not with- draw) insislet certe. Cic. Rem. 3. Ut, with the subjunctive denoting a result, is used with impersonal verbs signifying it happens, it remains, it follows, etc. ; as. Qui fit, ut nemo contentus vivat? How does it happen that no one lives con- tented? Hor. Huic contigit, ut patriam ex serviiute in llbertatem mndlcavet Nep. Sequitur iaitur, ut etlam vitia sint parca. Cic_. Ridlquum est, ut ec/dmel mihi consulam. Nep. Restat itjitui; ut mutus astrorum sit volwWirms. Cic. Extremum illud est, ut te orera et obsecrera. Id. Note 1. To this principle may be referred the following verbs and phrases sio-nifying ' it happens,' viz. Jit, 'fieri non potest, accidit, iiicidit, contingit, evenit, usu venit, occurrit and est (it is 'the case, or it happens, and hence esto, be it that):— and the following, signifying ' it remains,' or ' it follows,' viz. futarum, extremum, jjrdpe, proximum, and reliquum — est, relinquUuy, sequitur, restat, and superesi ; and sometimes accedit. Note 2. Contingit with the dative of the person is often joined with the infinitive, instead of the subjunctive with id ; as, Non cuiris homini contingit ddlre Corinthum. Hor. And with esse also and other verljs of simifer meaning, the predicate fas m the case oUicet) is often found in the dutive.— Sequitur and efficUur, ' it follows,' have sometimes the accusative with the infinitive and sometimes the subjunctive ; -awA nascUur, in the same sense, the subjunctive only. Note 3. Mos or moris est, consuetudo or consuetudinis est, and natiira or con- suHudo fert, are often followed by ut instead of the infinitive.— W! also occurs occasionally after manv such phrases as ndvui7i est, rdrum, ndturiile, necesse, usttdium, niirum, singuldre—est, etc., and after oeqwum, rectum, verum, utile, vert- simile, and integrwii^—est. For other uses of ut, with the subjunctive, see § 273. Rem. 4. Ut is often omitted before the subjunctive, after verbs de- noting wiUingness and permission ; also after verbs of asking, advis- ing, reminding, etc., and the imperatives die and fac; as. Quid vis fdciamf What do you wish (that) I should do? Ter. Insdni feriant sine I'Mra fluctus. Virg. Tentes disslmuldre rdgai. Ovid. Id sinas oro. Id. Se suddere, dixit, Pliamabdzo id nigotii daret. Nep. Accedal iipvriet actio vdi-ia. Cic. Fac cogUes. Sail. So, Vide ex naii eff"erantm-, quce, etc. Plaut Verbs of -wiUingness, etc., are vdlo, malo, permitto, concccio, patior, s'ino, licet, veto, etc.; thoseof asking, etc., are rog-o, oro, gua;so, 7n5neo, ad7n(inn), jubeo, mando, pgto, prScor, cens(o, suadto, oportet, nScesse est, postulo, hortor, euro, dccerno, opto, impcro. Rem. 5. Ne, ' that not,' ' in order that not,' or ' lest,' expresses a purpose negatively ; as, Ciira ne quid ei desit, Take care that nothing be wanting to him. Cic Nemo prudens pUnit, ut ait Plato, quia jyeccdtum est, sed ne peccctur. Id. Ul ne is fre- quently used for ne, especiallv in solemn discourse, and hence In laws; as. Opera dHnr, ut judicia ne fiant. Id. Quo ne is used in the same manner in one passat^e of Horace. Mssus ad /joc~quo ne ^je?- vacuum Roindno incun-eret hos- (js."j_5n the other hand ut non is used when a simple result or consequence is to be expressed, in wMch case ita, sic, tarn are either expressed or undei stood as Turn forte cegrotdbavi, nt ad nuptias tuas venire non pos::cm. In a few cases, however ut i m is used for ne.— Ut non is further used, when the negation ra- § 262, SYNTAX. SUBJUNCTIVE AFTER PART.CLES. 271 fers to a particular word or to a part only of the sentence, as in similar ca.-*efl si nmi must be used, and not nisi; as. Confer te ad Manlium, ut a mi iwu ijectug ad dlienos, sed invltdtu^ ad iiios isse videaris. Cic. Real 6. Ne is often omitted after cave ; as, Q'tve putes, Take care not to suppose. Cic. Compare § 267, R. 3. Rem. 7. After metiio, timco, ver'cor, and otlier expressions denoting fear or caution, ne must be rendered by that or lest, and ul by Hint f,Ot. Note 3. To the verbs meiuo, tUneo, and vcreor are to be added the substan- t'ves expressing fear, apprehension or danger, and the verbs t&reo, conterreo, delerreo, caveo, to be on one's guard, video and ohservo in requests (as, nde, videte and videndum est), in tlie sense of ' to consider ' ; as, Milo nietucbat, ne a inrris indlcaretur, MOo feared that he should l)e betrayeistus numquam fllios suos j>ujiiilo commendiivit ut non adjiceret (withoTr addina;) si mh-ehuntur. Suet. And if no negation precedes, or \( non belongs to a particular word, and not to the verb, qui non and ut non nmst of course be used and not quin. 2.^ For ut non, 'tliatnot,' or 'without' with a participle, especially after fdcere non possum, fieri non jjotest, nulla causn est, quid caiisce est ? nihil causa est; as, Fdcere non possum quin ad te mittam, i. e. ut non, etc. Cic. Numquam tarn male est SicuUs, (\\\in dliquid fdcrte et ennmdde dicant. Cic. Nurnquam ac- cede, quin abs te abeam docftor, — without goiug from you wiser. Ter. Note 7. Quiyi takes the subjunctive also after the negative expressions non diibito, non est diibium, non amhlgo, I doubt not ; non dbest ; nihil, paidum, non procul, haud multxtm dbest; non, vix, mcjre alstineo ; tenere me, or temperure mihi non possum; nonimjx'dio, non rUctiso, nihil praitermitto, and the like. In thesa cases, however, the negation in quin is superfluous, and it is generally trans- lated into English !jy 'that,' 'but that,' or 'to' with an infinitive; as, Non diibito quin doini sit, that he is at home. Non multum dbest, qiiin miserrimus siin, Not much is wanting to make me most wretched. Cic. Hence, as quin is not in such cases regarded as a negative, non is sjuperadded when a negative se^ise isreqiiired; as, In qutbus non diibito quin offensionem ner/li(jenti(e vitdre atque eff&ejere non possum. Cic. Diibltandum non -est quin numquam possit Utilitas cum hdnestdte contender^. Id. Note 8. In Nepos, non diibito, in the sense of ' I do not doubt,' is always fol lowed by the infinitive with the accusative, and the same construction ofter. occurs in later writers but not in Cicero: iu the sense of to scruple or hesitate, when the verli followin.g has the same subject, diibito and non diibito are gener- ally followed by the infinitive; as, Cim-o non dubltabat conjurdtos sujjplicio af- flcfre. — It may be added that ' I doubt whether' is exoressed in Latin by diibito sitne, diibito uivuin — an, diibito sitne — an, or dUhito num , numquid, for diibito an, and d&bium est an are usetl, like nescio an with an affirmative meaning. Note 9. Qijm signifies also 'why not?' being compounded of the old abla- tive qui and ne, i. e. turn, and in this sense is jtc. Cic. 274 SYNTAX. SUBJUNCTIVE AFTER PARTICLES. § 2^^ 3. Ai'ter antequam and priusquam, the imperfect and pluperfect tenses are usually in the subjunctive; the present and perfect may be either in the indicative or subjunctive. The present indicative is commonly used when the action is to be represented as certain, near at hand, or already begun ; the subjunctive is used when the thing is still douotful, and also in general propositions ; as, £a causa ante mortua est, quam tu natus esses, That cause was dead before you were bora. Cic. Avertit equos, priusquam pdbula gustassent Trojce, Xun- ihumque bibisseut. Virg. Priusquam iiicipias, consulto dpus est, Before you be- gin tliere is need of counsel. Sail. 4. (1.) Dum, donee, and quoad, signifying until, are followed by the subjunctive, if they refer to the attainment of an object; as, Dura hie vf niret, lOcum relinquere noluit, He was umvilling to leave the place until he (Milo) should come. Cic. Nihil puto tibi esse utllius quam ojjperlri quoad scire possis, quid tibi agendum sit. Id. Gornu telendit, et duxit longe, donee curvd- ta colrentinltr se capita. Virg. — In the sense of 'as long as,' these particles take the indicative, iDut Tacitus joins dmec with the subjunctive even when a simple fact is to be expressed. (2.) fJnm, while, is commonly used with the indicative present, whatev«t majf be the tense. of the principal sentence. Cf. ^ 259, R. 1, (1. ', (a.) 5. Quum (cum), when it signifies a relation of time, taken the indicative ; when it denotes a connection of thought, the subjunctive ; as, Qui non dcfendit injuriam, neque repidsat a suis, quum potest, injuste f&cit. Cic. Quum recte naiigari poterit, turn mliiges. Id. Credo turn, quum Slcllia florebat dplbus et copiis, inagna artvflcia fuisse in ea insula. Id. Quum tot sustin- eas et tanta mgotia, peccetn, si mdrer tua teinjjdra, Since you are burdened with so many and so important allau's, I should do wi-ong, if I should occupy your time. Hor. Quum vita sine dmicis metus plena sit, i-dtio ipsa monet amlcit- tas compardre. Cic. Remark 1. (a.) The rule for the use of quum may be thus expressed: Quum temporal takes the indicative, qman causal the subjunctive. Hence, when quum is merely a particle of time, with no refeisnce to cause and etiect, and not occurring in a historical narrative (see Rem. 2), it may be joined with any tense of the indicative. But when it is employed to express the relation of cause and etiect, or has the meaning of ' though ' or ' although,' it is joined with the subjunctive {b.) Quum, relathig to time, is commonly_ translated when, while, or after; referring to a traui of thought, it signifies as, since, though or although, because ; but may often be translated when. Rem. 2. In narration, quum, even when it relates to time, is joined with the imperfect and pluperfect subjunctive, when a historical per- fect stands in the principal clause ; as, Gracchus, quum rem illam in religimem populo venisse sentiret, ad sendtum rei aiit. Cic. Alexander, quum interemisset Clltum, vix viiinus a se aistinuit. Id. Note. Quum temporal, when it expresses an action frequently repeated, may be joineil with the pluperfect indicative, and the ap-jdosis_ then contains the imperfect; as, Qmun antem vir esse ccvyivriit, dabat se labori. Cic. Quum rdsam vJderat, tU7n incipere ver arbitrabatur. Id. Cf. ^ 264, 12. Rem. 3. Quum in the sense of * while ' is joined with the perfect and imper- fect indicative, often with the addition of interea or interim, to express sunulta- peous occ'irrences; as, G'llAlus ccpit magnum sucb virtiitis fructnni, quum omnea prdpe una vice, in eo ipso cos spem Mbituros esse, dixistis. Cic . Canlibatur virgis § 264. SYNTAX. SUBJUNCTIVE AFTER Q JI. 27c in rnidio fd-ro Messaim clvis Rdnuinus, judices, quum interea nulla vi/dtio Octfivii, in qaii pericOli suspicio nun sHiessel, i. e. lU in ea. Id. Nee tdinen e(/o sum ille j'erreus, qui Jrd- tris tdrissimi vvzvbve nmi movear, i. e. ut eyo mm mdvear. Id. Nvn sumus ii, (i\uba>i nlliil vHrum esse videatnr, i. e. ut nobis nihil, etc. Id. Nulla yens turn f era est, cujus menteni non imbuerit deorum dp'mio, i. e. ut ejus mentem, etc. Id. (&.) Sometimes the demonstrative word is only implied ; as, Res pnrvn dictu, sed quae slUdiis in matjmim certdmen excesserit, i. e. tdlii y!«B....of such a kind that it issued in a violent contest. Cic. Nunc dicis dliquid, juod (ul rem pertineat, i. e. tdle ut id, etc. Id. So (/uis sum, for num tdlis sum; a.s, Quis sum, cdjus aures kedi 7iefns sit'^ Sen. — In like manner, also, a demon- strative denoting a character or quality, is implied in the examples iiicludi'd ia tlie following rule : — 2. When the relative is equivalent to quamquam is, etsi is, or dum- modo is, it takes the subjunctive ; as, Loco, consilii quavivis egregii, quod non ipse afFerret, Inimicus, Laco, an oppo nent of anv measure, however excellent, provided he did not himself propose it. Tac. Tu dquam a pUmice posttdas, qui t/««s sitiat. Plant. Nihil mdleslum, quod non desidcres, i. e. dummddo id. Cic. 3. Quod, in restrictive clauses, takes the subjunctive ; as, QwkI sciam as far as I know; quvd memlnerim, as far as I recollect; quod eyo mtellii/am; qi.d intellUji possit; quod conjectUrd j)rdvideri possit; qtiodsaird fidti pnssim ; qmid tueret. Id. NoTK 4. (a.) The relative cl.anse takes the subjunctive after the expressions included in this and the last rule, only when it expresses the character or quality of the subject of the antecedent clause; and the relative, as in the pre- ceding cases of the relative with the subjunctive, is equivalent to a personal or demonstrative pronoun with ut; as. Nemo est, qui nesciai, There is no one who is ignorant, i. e. no one is ignorant. Cic. So, Sunt, qui hoc caipant, There are some who blame this, i. e. some blame this. Veil. (b.) If the relative clause is to be construed as a jjai-t of the loijical subject it does not require the subjunctive; as, Nihil stabile est, quod infldum est Nothing which is faithless is firm. Cic. 8. (1.) A relative clause expressing the reason of what goes before, takes the subjunctive ; as, Peccdvisse mihi videor, qui a te discesserim, I think I did wrong in leaving you. Cic. Inertiam accUsas dddlescenlium, qui istam artem non ediscant. You Dlame the idleness of the young men, because -they do not learn tiTat art. Id. fortUndtt dddlescens, qui tuce virtuiis Homirum prceconem mveueris ! — in hav- ing found. Id. Cdnlnius fuit mirij'icd vigilantid, qui suo toto consHldtu somnum non vTderit, — since, etc. Id. (2.) Sometimes, instead of qui alone, ut qui, quippe qui, or xdpotf qui, is used, generally with the subjunctive ; as, 0)ni-'iviii cum pntre non inibat, quippe qui ne in opjndum guidem nisi perrdra venisset. Cic. Neque AntOnius prdcul dberat, utpote qui ma(jm> exercitu sequ5- fetur. Sail. But sometimes with the mdicative m SsUlustand Livy; as, Quippe qui omnia vicC-rat. Sail. 9. After dif/nus, indi(/nux, aptvm, and idoneus, a relative clause takes the subjunctive ; as, Vidi'tur, qui dliqunndo imperet, dignus esse, He seems to be worthy ,ai some time to command. Cic. Rustlci nostri quum J'idem dlicHjus bdnitdtennfue Uuulant, iigmtTii esse dlcunt, quJcum in tinebris mlces. Id. Nulla vidcbdtur aptior per- 24 278 SYNTAX. SUBJUNCTIVE IN INDIRECT QUESTIONS. § 26.5 Eono, quae cle celate loqueretur. Id. Pompeius idSneus turn est, qui impetret. Id Et rem idoiieam, de qua quceratur, et homines dignos, quTbusc«?>J disscratur, pu- taut. Id. Note 5. It the relative clause does not express that of which the person oi thing denoted by the antecedent is worthy, its construction is not influenced by this rule. Thus, Quis servus Ijbertate dignus fiiit, cui nostra salus cava non esset? The subjunctive is here used according to No. 7 of this section. Note 6. The infinitive frequentlv follows these adjectives in poetry, thou:];b rarely in prose; as, Et puer ijjse fuit cantfiri dignus. Vii'g. :— and sometimeA ul; as, £■/■«« diguus, ut haberes iBte(/rant 7?iu;iM7?i. Quint. 10. A relative clause, after unus, solus, prmius, etc., restricting the affirmation to a particular subject, takes the subjunctive ; as, E(ec est iiiia contentio, qnse. ddhuc permanscrit. This is the only dispute which has remained till this time. Cic. Voluptas est sola, qua nus vocet ad se, et alli- ceat suajjte naturd, Pleasure is the only thing that, by its own nature, invites and allures us to itself. Id. 11. When the relative refers to a dependetit clause, it often takes the subjunctive. See § 266. 12. The imperfect and pluperfect subjunctive are used in narra- tion after relative pronouns and adverbs, when a repeated action is spoken of; as, Semper habiti sunt fortissmii, qui suiiimam imperii potirentur, Those were al- ways accounted the bravest, who obtained the supreme dominion. Nep. Quemcumque llctw jnssii consuUs prehendisset, tribunus mitti jiibebnt. Liv. Ut quisque maxime lahi'irilret locus, aut ipse occurrvbnt, aut dllqiws mittcbal. So after si (/wis or -alio dlrecta iuio the obliqua, d.;pend on the tense of the verb which introduces the quotation, according to the nde, ■^ 258. But when the future perfect would be used in the du-ect, the pluperfect is necessary in the oblique form ; but the perfect is used after tha present, perfect definite, or future. Rem. 5. When the comiected clause contains merely a descriptive circum- stance, or expresses what is independent of the sentiment of the preceding clause, it takes the indicative; as, Imperdvit Alexander Lysippo, ui edrum eqm- tum, qui apud Gran'icum ceciderant, fdceret stdtuas, Alexander ordered Lysip- pus to make statues of those horsemen who had fallen at the Granieus Sometimes, in other cases, when it is evident from the sense, that the connect- ed clause is an essential part of the proposition, the indicative is used, to avoid giving the appearance of contingency to the sentence. 3. A clause connected to another by a relative or causal con- junction, takes the subjunctive, (whatever be the mood of the preceding verb,) when it contains not the sentiment or allegation of" the ■s\Titer, but that of some other person alluded to ; as, Socrates accusdtus est, quod corrumperet juventutem, Socrates was accused of cornipting the youth, lit., because (as wa-s alleged) he corrupted the youth. Sewn inrdcdbant, cujus ad solenne venissent. They invoked the god, to whose solemnities they had come. Liv. Quos viceris dmicos iibi esse cave credns, Do not believe that those whom you have conquered are your friends. Here, m the first example, the charge of corrupting the youth is not made by the writei", but by the accusers of Socrates. So, in the second example, the wor- shippei-s allege that they have come to attend upon the solemnities of the god. In th^ last, it is implied bj- the use of the subjunctive mood, that the belief spoken of is that of the person addressed: — quos rlcisli would have been merely an addition of the speaker, bj^ means of which he would have designated the persons whose friendship he was speaking of; and, in general, the indicative, in such sentences, is employed in those statements which are independent of the sentiments of the person, to whose thoughts or words allusion is made. Cf. supra, 2, R. 5. REJtAitK. In the preceding cases, it is not directly said that the sentiments are those of another than the writer. In Cicero, however, the words dlco, puto arhitror, and the like, are often constnied m a similar manner, although, pro- perly speaking, not these verbs, but those in the clauses dependent on them, eliould be in the subjunctive ; as, Qmtm enim, HanmhaUs permissu, e^risset « (latum Ir'i -filio uxorem siu), .After he had heard that a wife woul- cially when the verb has no future; as, Dvsine fdta deiuii flecti spci-dre, Cease to hope that the fates of the gods will be changed. Virg. Frot/eniem Trqjdno a sanguine diici aud'i/'rat. Id. Cms mihi nrf/enfnm dare dixit, 1. e. se ddturum esse. Ter. Cdto affirmat se vivo ilium mm triumphare. Cic. Rkm. 4. (rt.) The infinitive future active is formed by a combination of tha piirticiple 'future active with es.ft ; •A?,,amdtu.rtis esse; the infinitive future pas- sive by a combination of the supine in wii with 'iri ; as, dmdliim Ir-i. These future infinitives denote an action or state a.s continuing. The participle in ru.i whi '.h properly expresses intintion (see 4 162, 14), takes also tlie infinitive fuisseh express a past intention; as, Scio te scripiM-uni fuisse, I know that 284 SYNTAX. — INFINITIVE MOOD. § 269 you have had the intention to write, whence it was an easy tra isilion t:, the Bense, ' you would have written,' in conditional sentences, when tho conuition is not fulfilled This infinitive is used especially in the apodosis of hypotheti- cal sentences, where in direct speech the pluperfect subjunctive would ba used (cf § 162, 14, R. 3.); as, Etiamsi obtennKrasset ausjnciis, idem eveutiirum fuisse pitlo. Cic. In like manner the infinitive future with esse is used in the apodosis of hypothetical sentences instead of the imperfect subjunctive; as, Iiiberlus, nisi jurasset, sceliis se facturum (esse) arhitrabatur. Id. (b.) Instead of the future infinitive, in both voices, J'u/ii7-tmi esse or fore, followed by tvith the passive con- struction ; as, a c t. licet hoc J'dcere ; decet specimen cdjjere tv hac re; pass, licet hoc Jieri; decet specimen cdpi. Rem. 2. The infinitive, with or without a subject accusative, is often the subject of a proposition, when the substantive verb with a noun, a neuter ad- jective, or iin impersonal verb forms the predicate. Of tbis kind are jiistvm, cequum, verisimile, consentdneum, dpertum — est, erat, etc., 7iei-esse est, opus est; — appdret, constat, convenit, decet, licet, oportet ; intdliyitur, perspicitur, etc. ; as, Cui verba dare difficile est. Ter. ]\Iendacem memorem o«se dportet. Quint. Legem brevem esse dportet. Sen. Constat pirofecto ad sdluien c'wium inventas esse leges. Cic. Non enim me hoc jam dicCa-e 7>«d'^7. Id. See § 209, R. 3, (5.), (a.) Rem. 3. The infinitive may itself be the subject of an infinitive; as. Audio non licere cuiijuam in nave cdpillos depunere. Ter. Rem. 4. The infinitive, with or without a subject accusative, may also be the predicate nominative; as, ImpHne qucelibet facere id est re.gem esse. Sail. In tliis sentence y«cere is the subj'ect, and rHyem esse is the predicate; for id, which .only represents by a kind of apposition the clause impHne qituelibet fdcere. can be omitted. Rem. -5. When the infinitive esse, (or otliers of shnilar meaning, as, Jieri, vlrHrv, vititm d('(/ere, cedere, dbire, etc.), with a predicate adjective (or noun), is joined with licet, such predicate is put in the accusative, if the subject-accu>.i- tive of the infinitive is expressed, and sometimes, also, when it is omitted, but more fixquently, in the latter case, the predicate adjective or noun its attra'-ted to the dative following licet; as, Ut eum liceitt ante tempus consuiem i. 'Ti. Auct. ad Her. Meiiios esse jam- mm llcdbit. Cic. Si clvi Jtomdno licet - ise Giiditanum. Id. — Licuit enim esse utioso Themislocli. Id. Mild neglig6tenii sperdre. Id. Sutrliias fi'icei-e insc'ms. Ya.rr. Insuetus vera audire. Liv. Certa mdi-i. Virg. Felicior unguere tela. Virg. ^0, A\\Aa.Tii omnia pierjKti, Resolute to endure every thing. Hor. SoUers ornare Cypnssis, Skilful to adorn. Ovid. Segnes solvere nddum. Hor. Indocilis pau- periem pdti. Id. Non iGuis fata r^cludere. Id. See § 213, R. 4, (1.) (6.) It may also depend upon adjectives signifying vsij'ulness, Jitness, etc., which are sometimes by the poets construed with the infinitive instead of tlie dative; as, {Tibia) iis]mi\re et adesse cJwris erat utilis. Hor. ^tas mollis et apta regi. Ovid. Fotts ctiam rlvo dare nomen jdoneus. Hor. Friiyes consiamcre nilti. Id. And. ?dtex difjnus 2mA contenius ; as, \)\s.nxv^ dmdri. Virg. Cf. 4 244, R. 2, (i.) (c.) Upon a noun; as, Tempus est hujus lihri tkcere yinem, It is time to finish this book. Nep. Jniit consilia rcges tolK-re, He devised a plan to destroy the kings. Id. En ernt confessio caput rcrum licmuim esse. Liv. Cfipido inces- eerat ^ithidpiam invisOre. Curt. Quibus in dtio vivere co]ji;i erat. Sail. So, Nee mihi sunt vires ininilcos pellere ttctis, instead of pellendis inimicis, or ad pellendos inimhos. Ovid. (d.) If for the infinitives depending on nouns or adjectives other nouns were substituted, these last would be put in the genitive, dative, or ablative; and hoice such infinitives may perhaps be properly regarded as exceptions to the rule, that tlie infinitive has but two cases, the nominative and the accusative. Rem. 2. (rt.) The infinitive with the accusative sometimes stands uncou- nected, especially in exclamations and indignant inteiTogations, where cridilnle estf or verumne estf maybe supplied; as, Mme i?icepto desistere victamf That I, vanquished, should desist fi'om mv undertaking V Virg. iWe mlserum ! ie in tanlas cerumnas propter me mcidisael Cic. — But m/, also, with the subjunctive, either with or without an interrogative particle, may be used to express a j|uestiou with indignation; nf-, Ktne (f,cil. pntri) c(/o nt adverser? Liv. Tu nt fiiiuiuam ie corrlgas? Cic. Judicio ut drdto-r decumdnum persequaturV Id.; where fieri pdtestf may be supplied. (6.) So, in the ordtio obliqua, the words signifying said, saying, etc., are often 'jmitted, ur implied in a preceding verb or phrase; as. Id facile effici pose^ &cil. dudt. Nep. Uuem dgnum datiirum fugtentibm f Curt. § 271. SrNTAX. INFINITIVE MOOD. 287 Rem. 3. The infinitive is sometimes to be supplied; and esse and fuisstt with a prediciite adjective, and also in the compound forms of thi infinitive, both active and j)assive, are commonly omitted, especially after verbs of s«^- ill(/, tliiukini/, knoicinrj, and perceivhifj ; as, Vos cognovi fortes. Sail. Quern pul- mm memordn. 'I'ac. — So, also, with the infinitive perfect passive when depend- ing on vOlo, 7idlii, cujiio, and uportei ; aH^Addlescenii morem f/estum uporUdl. Ter. Qii-xl jdiii pridem factum Oportuit. Cic. — Sometimes in a relative clause an in- finitive is to be supplied from tlie finite verb of the main proposition; as, Qims vOlult omiies intaficit, scil. interficere. Ne illaiii quUkm conseqauniur, 'jitum putant, yrni'unn; i. e. quam se consecutiiros putant. Cic. I HE INFINITIVE WITHOUT A SUB JE CT- AC C US ATI VE. >? S7S. The infinitive, without a subject-accusative, is used aftor verbs denoting ability, obligation, intention or endearor ; after verba signifying to begin, continue, cease, abstain, dare, fear, hesitate, or be '.font; and after the passive of verbs of *'a^iVi^, believing, reckoning, etc. Note 1. To th(tse classes belong pos5HOT, qiieo, rjcqufo, valeo, r/cbeo ; euro, rogito, ctererno. stdtuo, ronst'iiiio. histitiio, paro ; Conor, nltor, teni/o, contendo, lento, mdtiiro, liropSro, (igsfredior, perscvcro, ; — capi, inc'ifiio, pergo, desino, desisto, intermilto, purco, recuso ; soleo, assiirsco, consiiesco, insuesco; aiiileo, vSreor, mctiio, reform'ido, litiieo, korreo, diiblto : — aiidior, credor, existiinor, fSror, nigor,nunlior, per/uhfior, putur, trador, jiibeor, videor, and rogor. Note 2. When the preceding verbs are joined with esse, haberi, judicari, vldiri, etc., the jiredicate noun or adjective is put in the nominative; as, Solei irxiWi vld'ri ; «!irfe sapiens esse ; ccBjnt viihi molestus esse; debes esse dillgens; potest liber esse: and so also inereiur, scit, didlcit liber esse. Note 3. The poets, in imitation of the Greeks, iise the infinitive after fiige, aufer, a'tce, paixe, mhnnnto ; paveo, refiifjio, qiuei-o, urgeo, Idboro, dmo, gaudeo, furo, culleo, suiiw, initio, remitto, pdtior, Jitro, conjuro, pugno, ndtus, and some other verbs, especially to denote a tcish or purpose ; as, Iiitroiit vtdcre. Ter. ' Non te frangert ptrscquor. Hor. Non pupidare pindtes vcnimus. Virg. In this construction, the poets are sometimes imitated by the later prose wi-iters. Remakk 1. Many of the verbs above enumerated, instead of the infinitive, may be foUowetl by the subjunctive with tit, ne, etc. ; and witli some of them this Is the regular construction ; as, Sententiam ne diceret, recusCivit. Cic. Rem. 2. The passives dlcor, trador, feror, narror, reperior, existimor, vldeor, etc., may either be used pei-sonally, with the infinitive alone, or impersonally, fjllowed' by the accusative with the infinitive. Thus we may say, I\ldter P'lusdnia eo tempOrc vixisse dicitur, or, Dicitur to tempore mdtrem PauA'nnst vi.xisse, The mother of Pausanias is said to have been living.. ..or, It is said that the mother of Pausanias was living.... Nep. The former construction i8 more .jommon especially with videor, see § 272, R. 6; but the latter is frequent with nuiUidtiir, and very common with the compound tenses, trddltum est, proilllurii est, etc., and with the participle future passive ; as, crcdendum est, inttlligendum est, etc.; as, Quorum nominem tdb m ftiisse credendum, etc. Cic. Rem. 3. The infinitive without a subject 1= used after a verb, only when ih denotes an action or state of the stibject of thhi verb. 1!km. •!. The verbs to wish or desire, vulo, nOlo, mdlo ; viipio, opto, studeo, have a twofold construction :— the infinitive without a subject-accusative is used ftfter them, when the subject remains the same; and when followed by e^se, hdbrri, etc., the predicate-noun or adjective is in the nominative; — but the accusative with the infinitive is used when the subject is changed, or when a -ellexive uronoun of the same person follows. We say, therefore, rdlo iri'id'ilus /iV//, and un the other hand, volo tt I'rudiluin fcri, and voto me iruditum feri. So, V'Uo ia esse^ quevi tu me esse vuluiili. Cic. Ciipio me esse clementem, ciq)io— 288 SYNTAX. INFINITIVE MOOD. §272. me non dissdlidum, videri. Id. ; or, omitting the pronoun, cupic esse clemens nee dissolutiis yjc/e;-*. — Omnis hdmlnes qui sese student prcBsidre tetens aiiimdllbus, etc. Sail. Note, t. Vdlo is used with the present infinitive passive ; as. Me amSri vulo, I wish to be beloved; hoc velim intelli(/i, I wish this to be understood; and also with the infinitive perfect passive to ddhote the easier desire that something should be instantl)' accomplished; as, LeCjCiti quotl erant appdldti supcrbius, Covinthvm patres vestri — exstinctum esse vdliierunt. Cic. ; but it occxirs most frequently with the omission of esse ; as, hoc factum vdlo ; nunc illos commoni- tos velim : so, pairinm exstinctam cfipit. Note 5. The nominative with the infinitive after verbs of saying, perceiv- ing, etc. (§ 272), is rare even in poetiy, and is an imitation of the Greek idiom, which requires the nominative with the infinitive Avhen the sam6 subject re- mains; as, Phdsrlus ilk, quern vidciis, hospUes, ait fuisse ndriiim celerrimus. Catull. Quia retillit Ajax esse Jovis nepos, instead of se esse Jovis ncpotem Ovid. Se7isit medics dSlapsus in Iwstes, instead of se delapsum esse. Virg. THE INFINITIVE WITH A SUBJECT-ACCUSATIVE. § ST^. The infinitive with a subject-accusative follows verbs of saijiug, Ih inking, knowing, jje?'ceiyi/!^, and the lilce ; as, Videbat, id non posse fien, He saw that that could not be done. Nep. Sentit animus, st sua vi, non dliend, mdvcri. Cic. Audivi te venire. Me in ejus putes- tdte dixi fore. Id. Affirmant mllitum jdcere dnimos. Liv. /Soepe venit ad aui'os meas, te ist/id nlmis crebro dicere. Cic. Earn puynarn ad Pirusinm p)U(indtinti (esse), quldtim auctores sunt. Liv. Note 1. This rule includes all such verbs and phrases as denote the exercise of the external seuses aud intellectual faculties, or the conimunicatiou of thought toothers; as, auilio, vvleo, sentio, dnitnadverto, cognosco, intellign, perc'ipio, /lisco, scin, nescin, eenseo, spero. despero, cogito, judico, credo, arbitror, pnlo, oplnor, diico, statuo, inei/tlni, recordor, ohllviscor, ijpliiio est, spes est, em.; — dlco, trailo, prodo, scrtbo, refero, nnrro, nuntio, confirmo, nSgo, ostendo, indico, doceo, cerliorem facio, demimstro, per/nbm, promitto, poWireoi , spnndeo, etc.; but with most of these a differeut construction often occurs. See § 273 Note 2. The propositions, whose subjects are thus put in the accusative and their verbs in the iuiiuitive. are those which are directly dependent on the verbs of saying and perceiving. Respecting the clauses inserted in such dependent propositions, s"e S 266, 1. Note 3. (a.) When a relative clause inserted in a proposition containing the accusative with the infinitive, has the same verb as the proposition in which it is inserted, but such verb is not repeated, the noun which is the sub- ject of the relative clause is also put by attraction in the accusative ; as, Te tuspicor eisdem rebus, qulbus me ipsum, commoveri. If the verb is expressed Vfe must !^Ay, eisdem rebus commdwi-i, quibus (ego) ipse commdveor. So, also, in inserted relative clauses where the verb, if expressed, would be in the sub- junctive, (sec § 266, 2.); as, ( Vei'res) aiebat se tantidem ceslimasse, quanii Sacer- dotem, -for quTinti Sdcerdos cBStimasset. Cic. Gnifitftur se in ed jxirte fuisse qua le, qud virum omni laude dignum patrem tuum. Id. (b.) The same is the case with the particle quam after a comparative, see \ 256, R. 5, [a.) But sometimes when quam connects a clause to a preceding proposition containing the accusative with the infinitive, the same construction follows that precedes quum, even when the verb of the-latter clause is express- ed; as, Nonne tlbi ajjirmdvi quidns 7ne potius perpessurum, qnam ex ltd lid ad bellum civile me exiturum; instead of quam ex'trem or quam ut exlrem. Cic. (<.'.) In long speeches in the ordtio obl'tqita, relative clauses, having a verb of their own which should pnjyierly be in the subjunctive, are put in the ac- cusa tve witli the infinitive, if the relative clause is not subordinate to the one with the infinitive, and which is governed by a verb of saying or perceiving, § 272. SYNTAX. INFINITIVE MOOD. 289 »jut is ratlier coftrdinate with it; in which case the relative i« equivalent to the demonstrative with et; as. Nam- illorum urbem ut propzif/nOculujii ojyjidgitum esie burhdris, upud quam jam his classes rigias fecisse naufrayium ; for et Opud earn jam bis, etc. — In Li^-i,' and Tacitus the same constraction sometimes occurs even after conjunctions ; as after quvm in the sense of ' wliile,' see ^ 20.3, 5, W. 3 ; after quamquam on account of its absolute signilication, see § 198, 4, and after quia. ■ Note 4. The personal pronouns, which, with the other moods, are expressed only when they are emphatic, must be alwavs expressed in the accusative with thfi infinitive. The verbs 'to promise' and 'to hope' are in En£;lish usually joined with the infinitive present without a pronoun, but in Latin not only is the pronoun expressed, but the infinitive which follows is iu the future; as,j He promised to come,' is in Latin, Proimsit se veniurum (sell, es.s-e, see § 270, R. 3). But the infinitive present sometimes occurs after these verbs; as, Polliceninr ohsides dure, C:es. B. G. 4, 21 ; and the pronoun is occasionally omitted, see § 239, R. 2 and 3. RK5tAKK 1. When ambiguity would arise from the subject and the object of the verb being both in the accusative, the passive infinitive is substilitted for the active, by which means tlie subject is put in the ablative, or in the accusative with _?>er ; as, Ne fando qiiidem aud'itum est, crdcodllmn violdtum esse ab .Egyptio; instead of ^gyptium crucud'dum vivlasse. Cic. Reji. 2. After verbs of saying, thinking, etc., the conjunction that is omitted m translating from English into Latin, and the subject of the dependent clause is put in the accusative, and its verb in the infinitive. Rem. 3. The accusative with the infinitive is sometimes rendered into Eng- lish by a similar form; as. Si vis me flere. If you wish me to weep. Hor.; but the de])endent clause is more frequently connected to the verb of saying, etc., by the conjunction that, and the infinitive translated by the indicative or po- tential mood ; as, Seniiiiiiis nivem esse albaiu. We perceive that snmo is white. Cic. Sometimes the dependent clause is annexed to the other without the conjunction; as, Credunt se neghgi. They think they are neylected. Ten Rem. 4. A pi-esent infinitive corresponds to the imperfect indicative, when with an accusative it follows a preterite tense ; as. Dixit Gesdrem venire. He said that C»sar was coming. C»s. In like manner the perfect infinitive with an accusative after a preterite tense corresponds to the pluperfect indicative; as, Dixit Gesdrem venisse, He said that Csesar had come. See § 268, 2. Rem. 5. The present infinitive, after verbs of sense, is often equivalent to the present participle; as,_Surgere videt Imam He sees the moon (to rise) rising. Virg. Arma riitilare vident. Id. V)debis collucere faces. Id. Nee Zephgros aiidis ^m-are? Do you not hear the zephyrs blowing? Id. Sa;pe hoc mujores niitu dJcere andu-i. Cic. The two constructions are sometimes united; as, Medium video discedere c(elum, palantesj^/e ^.icito stcllas. Vu'g. Rem. 3. The subject-accusative after verbs o^ saying, showing, and believing ; as, d'tco, nego, tram, fero, memdro, narro, nuniio, perhtbeo, prOdo, scr'ibo, de- monstro, oslendo, arguo, credo, puto, existimo, and the like, and*ilso after 7i/6eo, veto, aiKl prohibeo, is regarded also as the accusative of the object after these verbs; and hence such verbs are used also in the passive, the accusative of the active voice becoming, as usual, the nominative of the passive. This is espe- cially the case when their subject is indefinite; as, Dlcunt (thev or people say) me virum pi-dbum esse, or d'lcor vir jirobus esse. So, Veidmur hoc fdcere, instead of, Nos hoc fdcere vetant. Instead also of the impersonal vidctur {it appears) followed by the infinitive with its subject-accusative, it is common to say personally, videor, videris, etc., with the infinitiye; as, vldeor errasse, it appears that T have eiTed. .. - ^^-r::^^— -^ 25 290 SYNTAX. INFINITIVE MOOD. § 273 INFINITIVE AND SUBJUNCTIVE CLAUSES. § 272, When the particle that, in English, introdn'^es a clause denoting a purpose, object, or result, it is a sign of the Bubjunctive in Latin, and is to be expressed by ut, etc. ; but otherwise it is usually the sign of the accusative with the infini- tive. Cf. §§ 262 and 272. 1. (a.) Verbs of encleavorinfi and resolving take after them the in- finitive and more rarely the subjunctive, when the subject remain! the same ; but when the subject is changed, they take the subjunc- tive only. Note 1. Such are statiio, consfituo, decerno, tento, laboro, pdro, mSditor, euro, nltor, conleii'lo, ronsiliiim capio, annnum or in antmiim induco. Cf. ^ 271, N.l. After opS- ram do, I exert myself, id. hoc, or ilbid ago, I endeavor, nj/iil antiquius liaJbeo or duco qumn, nothing is of more importance to me, and video for euro, the subjunctiTe is al- most exclusively used. (5.) Verbs of effecting are construed with ut or ne and the sub- junctive. Note 2. Such are fario, efT'ieio, perfieio, Svinco, pervinco, impetro, assequor, consS- gitor, etc. But facere ' to effect ' occurs in Cic. Brut. 38, in connection with the accusa- tive and infinitive passive. Note 3. Facio with tit is also used as a periphrasis for the indicative ; as, Invltus quidem feci, ut L. Fldminium e sendtu cjicerem, for invlius cjeci. Cic. — Fac, ' su]:>pose ' or ' ^-anting,' and efflcere, ' to prove,' take the accusative with the infinitive; but tlie passive efficitur, ' it follows,' takes also the subjunctive. — Facere, ' to inti-oduce ' or ' represent,' is joined with a present or perfect participle; as, ZxBlium et Sclpionem facimus admirantes. Cic. In the passive the accusative also with the infinitive is found, there being no present par- ticiple; as, Isocratem Fldto laudari facit a Socrdte. Cic. 2. Verbs signifying to request, to demand, to admonish, to advise, to encourage, to command, and the like, both when the subject remains the same and when it is changed, are followed by the subjunctive with ut or ne, and only rarely by the infinitive. Note 4. (a.) Such are rtjgo, oro, precor, peto ; posco, postulo, flagito ; mbneo, ad- niOneo, coinmoneo, hortor, cohortor, exhortor, suadeo, persnadeo, instituo, (I instruct) impeUo, cogo, mando, prcescribo, edico, deeerno, Icgein do, censeo, perpeUo,.exclto, in- tito, impSro, etc. ; as, Te non hortor solum, sed etiam ore, ut tola mente in rempublictim incumbas. Cic. (b.) Li the poets and later prose writers the infijiitive more frequently fol- lows those verbs without any difference of meaning. The poets even use the infinitive to express a purpose; as, Proteus pecus egit altos vis ere mantes. Hor. (c.) Nuntio, scribo, mitto, and even d'lco, are followed by the subjunctive, when thej' imnly an injunction or intention that somethuig should be done; as, Hiec ut facias, scribo. Cic. (d.) Jubeo and veto commonly take the accusative with the infinitive, but sometimes the subjunctive with or rarely without ut. Sometimes, with the mfinitive, the person to whom the command is given is omitted, especially when it is either obvious from the nature of the command or indefinite ; as, Castra mUmre jiibet, acil. milites. Cajs. Lex recte fdcere juhet, scil. homines. Cic. With the subjimctive the dative of the person sometimes follows jubeo ; as, Brilnnnico jussit, exsiirgeret. Tac. — Impero is sometimes followed by the uccusative with the infinitive passive; and so also is censeo, I vote, or, I ordain. Tiie latter is often construed with the participle iu dus with esse expressed c* understood ; a8, Cn/rthdginem delendam cenaeo. § 273. SYNTAX. INFINITIVE MOOD. 291 (e.) Moneo anA admdneo, ' I remind,' and ^'erswaf/eo, 'Icon\mce takf- tha accusative with the infinitive. 3. (rt.) In the oratio obllqua, the construction of the accusative with the infinitive, is exchanged for that of the subjunctive, to denote pos- sibility, liberty, duty, etc. ; as, Virginius unum Ap. Claudium legum expertem esse aiebai : respicerent tribinai hdniines casldltim omnium scelerum. Liv. (6.) On the contrary, when the subjunctive has been used after a verb of requesting, commanding, etc., the constnictiou often passes into that of the accusative with the infinitive; the verb of saying beuig considered as implied in the verb of requesting, etc. ; as, Ordbat ne se ut parricldam llbenlm aversa- icuiur: sibi \\\.a.m fil'uB sua cariorem fuisse, si.... Liv. Cf. § 270, R. 2, (6.) 4. (fl.) Verbs which denote willingness^ unwillingness, permission, and necessitij, commonly take the infinitive, or the accusative with the Infinitive, but sometimes the subjunctive. Note 5. Such are volo, nolo, malo, opto, permitto, patior, sino., concedo, licet, prdht- beo, oportet, and jieresse est. Cf. 5 271, H. 4. Volo ut is used to express a strong em- pliiisis. Nolo is not construed with the subjunctive. (i.) An infinitive passive without a subject is sometimes used with dportet; as, JYon opuriuii rehctas, scU. esse ancillas. Ter. Ut ut erat, mansum tame"* dportuit, scil. esse. Id. Non jjutabant de tali viro suspicimibus Sportere judicar;. Nep. (c.) Some other verbs which regularly take the accusative with the infini- tive after them, are occasionally followed by the subjunctive. 5. Quod, ' that,' commonly with the indicative, introduces a sub- stantive clause containing the explanation or ground of the predicate or of some other word in the principal clause. Remark. The subjunctive follows giwd in those cases only in which the clause expresses the view or sentiment of some other person than the writer or speaker,, Cf. § 266, 3. Quod is used : — (1.) After such expressions as bene, male, prudenter facio ; bene, male fit; evenit, accidit, and the like ; prcetereo, mitto ; and generaUy adde, accedit, etc. ; as, Bene fdcis, quod me adjuvas. (2.) To introduce the explanation of a noun, pronoun, or pronominal adverb in the principal clause; ns, Magnum beneficium est naturce, quod necesse e$i mori. (3.) Atter Yerhs sigaifymg an affection of the mind, and the outward ewpres- tion of such feeling ; and also after verbs of praising, censuring, accusing, and thmktng. Note 6. Such are gaudeo, delector, gratum, or jucundum est mlhi, angor, dSleo, eegre, ni!'. .ite, or grdviter /era, succenseo, poenitet, miror, adiniror, glorior, gratiilor. gratiai igf, quSror, hulignor, and others of similar meaning; as, Scipio SfiP/ie querebatur, quod omnibus in rebus honunes dlligentibres essent, ut, etc. Cic. Gaudeo quod te inter- pell.iTi. Id. <^\xoi spiralis, c^noii vocem mitfUis, qViOiX formas hSm'inum lidbetis, indig- nantur. Liv Cato mlriiri se aiebat, quod non rtdSret hanispex, karuspicem quum vidi- ret. Cic. Note 7. After those verbs which express the feeling of joy, grief, etc.; as, qaudeo, ddleo, mlror, the accusative with the infinitive is more commonly found, but those which denote the outward expression of such feeling are mora commonly constiiied with quod ; but sometimes this distinction is reversed Gratulm- is oimmonly joined with quod. 292 SYNTAX. PARTICIPLES. § 274 Notes. A purely obiective proposition is expressed hj qiuxl ^nlj wlien i( depend? upon fifZtZo, (genenillj^ in the imperative nrfr/e), or upon /««o joniec' with an adverb; as, Adde quod puhes tibi crescit omnes. Hor. Adde hue ciu(Ki merceni sine fucis gestat. Id. Fecit hiimamter Licinius, quod ad me vcsperi veml. Cic. In all other cases the infinitive is employed in purely objective propo- sitions. 6. By the infinitive, with or without a subject-accusative, a proposlticr. is expressed as a rtoiif//)/, so that it resembles an abstract noun ; by jMoti, with the indicative or the subjunctive, it is represented simply as a fact. To the latter is frequently joined hoc, id, illud, istud, or hue, etc. ; as, Illud qiiOijue nihk accp.dit incommddum, quod M. Junius abest. Cic. Hue acccdcbat, quod, etc. Sail. Quod fjenerally refers to past time, and hence it is preferable to_ say, Graiiisi- viuni mihi est, quod ad me tiia vidnu scripsisti; but with the infinitive, Grdtissi- mum mlhi est te bene valere. (a.) Quod, with the indicative, in the sense of as to, or with regard to, is used at the beginning of a sentence, especially in letters, in repeating an expression of a person for the purjiose of answering it; as, Quod auiem me AgdmemnOnem oemuldri putas, fnllevis. Nep. Quud scrlbis te velle scire, qui sit reipfiblicw status . simimn dissensio est. Cic. Sentences thus introduced by guod are in no gram- matical connection with the verb that follows them. See § 206, (14.) {b.) Quod is used in explanatory or periphrastic propositions which refer tc a preceding demostrative pronoun, as hoc, id, etc., unless such pronoun be added ])leonastically, in the nominative or accusative, to verbs governing the accusative with the infinitive; as, Mihi quidem videntur homines hac re maxtme Mluis prosstdre, quod loqui possunt. Cic. Note 9. The constructien of the infinitive resembles, in the fol- lowing particulars, that of a. noun in the singular number and neuter /render : — (a.) Like a noun, it may have an adjective or pronoun agreeing with it; as 1 fitum hoc phllosophari Jisplicet. Cic. Quum vlvere ipsum turpe sit nobis. Id. Me hoc ipsum nihil agere delectat. Id. ]\Ieum intelUgere nulla pecunid vendo. Petr. See § 205, E. 8. (b.) It may be followed by a limiting genitive; as, Cujus mm dimlcare/«i< vincere. Val. j\Iax. ir (c.) It may be either the subject or object of a verb. See §§ 209, R. 3, (5,) and 229, R. 5. It may also be vised after neuter verbs, like an acciisative, tepending on a preposition understood; as, Te accepisse 7neas llteras gaudeo. fer. See §§ 232, (2,) and 273, 5. (d.) It is also used like a predicate-nominative; as, Videre est perspicere aliquid. Cic. See § 210. (e.) It may, like a genitive, limit the signification of an adjective or noun. See § 270, R. 1. (/. ) It may, like an accusative, depend on a preposition ; as, Aristo et Pyrrho inter optiine valere et grdvissime segrotare, nihil prorsus dtcebant inth-esse. Cic. Qvod crimen dlcis prseter amasse meum f Ovid. Invcniet nil sihi legatiim, prajter jvlurare. Hor. (q.) It is used also like an ablative; as, Audita regem in Siciliam tenders. Sail (h.) Sometimes, also, especially in the poets, it denotes a purpose, like S participle in dus, (see § 274, R. 7.); as, Loricam donat habere viro. Virg.; or like a dative of the end, (see § 227.) PARTICIPLES. § 274:. !• Participles are followed by the same cases ard constructions as th^ii* verbs ; as, § 274. STT^TAX. PARTICIPLES. 293 Quldam, poeta nomlnalus, A certain one, called a poet. Cic. Ca'-Qlora n oblldi kcena, The lioness forgetful of her whelps. Virg. Fdventes rebus Carihc.tjfnieitr tium, Favoring the interests of tlie Carthaginians. Liv. Tendens ad s'uUra \yA- mas. Virg. Accusatus rei cupitiilis. Cic. jPi'imd dkte mihi summa dicende Gl- nu'nu. Hor. Oinina doctits. Stat. Casns cibies v'lsura mdvlnus. Id. G'lriiuri ur- bore monies. Ovid. Parcendam est teneris. .Tuv. Uteiidum est aetate. Ovid. L. Brutus arcens reditu tyrannum, in proiUo concidii. Cic. 2. The present, perfect, and future active participles, denote re- spectively an action which is present, past, or future, in reference to the time of the verb with which they are connected ; as, Siiwd hoc dicens aitolUt se. Virg. Turn ad Thraseain in horiis agentera mis- sus est. Tac. TurntuH fngientem. hcec tei'ra videl/itf Virg. Qui missus ab An/ is Mid consederat urhe. Id. Lamia munere adilUdtis perfunctus, petit 2}>'ieturam. Cic. Jussus cum fide poenas luam. Hor. Juvenis medios moritiirus i?i hustei irruit. Virg. Peritiirus injecit sese in agmen. Id. Ilia tlbi ventui-a bella expe- diel. Id. Note. The participle expresses the action or state of the verb, and also marks its complete or incomplete state or condition. Cf. § 144, 1-3. Except, Remark 1. The present participle, particularly that of the verb eo, some- times denotes that which is about to be done; as, Interclusit hiems, et terniil Auster euntes, .... as they were on the point of going. Virg. Nee nos via fullil euutf**. Id. Rem. 2. (a.) The present participle, also, sometimes denotes a purpose ; as, Ibant,^ orantes veniam,.. ..to sue for tavor.... Virg. Eui-yfijlum scitantem ordcitla Plnebi mittimus. Id. (b.) It is also used to express a state or condition, where, in English, a substantive is employed with a preposition ; as, ignorans. from ignorance; mctuens, from fear; consiildfum petens, in his suit for the consulship; omne nudum Tiascens facile oppi-imiiur, — in its origin. Rem. 3. (a.) The perfect participle passive, especiallv in the poets, often denotes the result of a past action, and thus supplies the place of a present participle passive; as, Ndius cvOlat jficed tectus c«/(r/iHe.... covered with pitcliy darkness. Ovid. Cf. Virg. ^n. 1, 480; 2, 277; 4, 72, 589; 5, 113, 708; 6, 33o: Georg. 1, 204. It is often to be translated by a present active participle; as, Mdnu pectus percussa decorum, fldventesque abscissa cdmas, i. e. percidiens, ab- scindtns. Virg. Tunsa; pectura palmis. Id. So, also, sdlitus, ausus, fisusjnud the perfect participles of deponent verbs; as, Longum cantu solata luborem. Id. Vox auditur fractos sdnitus imitata tubdrum. Id. Jjiviiidcus Gesdrem complexus obsecrdre ccepit. Ctes. Concretes sanguine crines gerens. Vkg. Tonsis in valr- libus, i. e. quas tondentur. Id. (6.) The perfect participle of a preceding verb is often used in a succeeding clause, to express the completion of an action ; as, Eaercltum fundit fugatqiie, f asum persequitur. Liv. This idiom frequently occurs in Ovid. Rem. 4. Hdbeo, with perfect participles denoting knowledge and determina^ Hon; as, cognitum, perspectum, percepium, comprehensum, explordtum, stdti'dupi, constitUtum, diliberdtum, persmsum mihi hdbeo, etc., forms a periphrasis, like tlie passive verb in English, and equivalent to cognovi, perspexi, percijn, etc., in- stead of the verb of the participle; as, Clddii dnimum perspectum or co"-nitum \dbeo ; for perspexi, etc., I perceive, know, jrersudsum mihi hdbeo and 'jiersun- eissimum, hdbeo are used only in the neuter gender and with an accusative with the infinitive in the sense of mihi persuasi or persudsinn Tfiihi est. When hdbeo with any other participle than those above indicated is used, it expresses mora than the ordinary perfect active ; as. Quod me horUh-is ut absolvam ; habeo ab- lolntam suive epos ad Qesdrem ; i. e. I have it ready. Cic. Do, reddo, euro, 26* 294 SYNTAX. PARTICIPLES. . § 274 teneo, possideo, and missum fdcio, are sometimes so construed with paiticiples as, Missam Irani faciei, for mittet. Ter. Eostes victos dare, for vinceh. Sail. Kem. 5. (o.) The passive participles may supply the place of a verbal noun m to or us, the perfect being employed to represent an action as completeil, and the future when it is conceived as stUl incomplete ; as, Ante Romam condi- tam. Before the building of Rome. Cic. Consilia urbis delendoe. Plans for the destruction of the city. Id. See § 275, II. With the limitations about to be made in regard to the nominative, this construction is used ui aU -the cases, and even when thej- are governed by the prepositions, ad, ante, ob, 230st, prop- ter ; ab and ex ; as, Hai- literce recitatag magnum Iticittin ficvrunt, Tlie readi ig of this letter. Liv. Tdrentum captum. The taking of Tareutum. Ob receptt .ti Eannibulem, On account of the reception of Hannibal. Slbi quisque cifisi reyit txpMebat decus, The glory of kiUing, or, of having_ killed the king. Propter Afiicam domitam. Eutrop. Ante Epaminondam natum. Nep. Post Christum Datum. Ab condita urbe ad hberatam. Liv. The oblique cases only of partici- p'-js ui dus are used in this manner as the nominative dei^otes necessit^y, (see Rem. 8,) and even the perfect participle is not thus used in the nominative by Cicero. (b.) The neuter of the perfect passive participle without a noun is used by Livy, as the subject of a proposition ; as, Tentatum per dictdtorem, ut ambo pa- tricii consules credrentur, rem ad interregnum perduxit : i. e. the attempt, or the fact of the attempt being made by the dictator. Compare a similar use of this participle in the ablative, \ 257, R. 9, (1.) (c.) (c.) The English ' without ' with a verbal substantive; as, ' without writing, without having waited,' etc., is expressed in Latin by means of a negative Qoun, adjective or particle connected with a participle; as, (Xesar exercitum numquam per insidiosa itinera duxit, nisi perspeciiliitus Idcorum situs, without having examined the localities. This form occurs often with the ablative absolute; as, Alhenienses non exspectato auxllio adversus ingentem Persdrum excrctiwn in prceliu7>i egrcdiunfur, without waiting for assistance. So, nulla priBstltuta t/i'e, Without fixing any time. Cic. Miserum est nihil perficientem angi. Id. Rem. 6. (a.) The participle in rus, especially with verbs of motion, oftec denotes intention or purpose; as, Ad Jdvem Ammonem pergit consulturus da drlgine sua. He goes to Jupiter Amnion, to consult respecting his origin. Just. (b.) It is also used where in English a clause connected_ by since, when, al- though, etc., is employed; as, Plura lociituros dbire nos Jussit, When or although we uitended to say more. Herctdem Germdni, Ituri m prmlium cdnunt. Tac. Hence it is sometimes used, though not by Cicero, to express the mference from a hypothetical proposition ; as, Egredltur castris ROmdnus, vallum invasu- rus, ni cdpia pugnce Jieret. And witli the repetition of the_ preceding verb; as, Dedit mihi quantum maxime p)utuit, daturus amplius, si potuisset, i. e. ac dedisset amplius. Plin. Ep. Rem. 7. (a.) The participle in f?i(s, also, denotes a purpose passively, irhen joined with verbs signifying to give, to deliver, to agree Jor, to have, to receiie tc undertake, etc. Such are do, trddo, tribuo, attrlbuo, riiando, mitto, permitlo. eonci'do, redimo, comluco, l6co, hdbeo, accijno, susdpio, relinquo, cUro, dt'posco rogo; as, Testdmentum tibi trddit legendum. He delivers his will to you to read. Wni- Aitribuit nos trucTdandos Ceihego. Cic. Quod utendum acceperis, reddito, xu. iJOnon muros dlrutos a Lysandro reficiendos curdvit, — ordered them to '^1 restored. Nep. (b.) But the same meaning may be expressed actively by means of ad aiid the gerund; as, Qxsar oppklum ad diripiendum m'diiibus concessit. — The poets sometimes use the infinitive active for the same purpose; as, Tristttiam et mi- ttis trudam prdtervis in mare Caspium portare ventis. Hor. In prose such u*' of the infinitive is of exceedingly rare occurrence ; as, Blbere dare. Cic. §27'1. SYNTAX. PARTICIPLES. 295 Rem. 8. (a.) Tbe participle in dus, when agreeing with the subject of a sentence, has the signification of necessity or j^roprietii ; some- iisces, though rarely, except in later writers, that of possibility ; as, Is vcnOrandus a nobis et colendus est, He should be worshipped and honored by us. Cic. Delenda est Carikdgo, Carthage must be destroyed. Cato. Hiet eperanda ywej-Mrti. Virg. So with esi used impersonally; as, tJirum pace noItU an belh esset uteudum. Cic (6.) Sometimes, also, when not agi-eeing with the subject of a sentence, 'u has fais signidcation ; as, Facta narrdbas dissimiilanda twi, You were relating facts which you should have concealed. Ovid. A. L. Bruto princlpe hujus maxlme couservandi generis el nominis. Cic. Rem. 9. The participle in dtis, in its oblique cases, supplies the place of a present participle of the passive voice, to denote a continued or incomplete action; as, Occupdius sum in Uteris scribendis, in ■v\Titing letters; literally, in letters which are beiuir written. See § 275, II. — So, also, in the poets both in the nominative and oblique cases; as, Triginta viagnos volvendis niensibus orbet impirio explebit. Virg. Volvenda dies. Id. Cf. V'olventibus annis. Id. Rem. 10. After participles in dus, the person by whom a thing must be done, is put in the dative, but in a few passages even of Cicero it is found in the ablative with ab. See § 225, III. Rem. 11. The neuter of the participle in dus, joined with a tense of esse in the periphrastic conjugation (see § 184, 3,) retains the signification of necessity; as, Audenduni est. We must venture. In early writers and sometimes also in the poets, an accusative of the object is joined with this neuter, if the verb is transitive; as. Nunc pacem orandum, nunc — arma reponemlum, et helium exi- tidle cavendum. Sil. But in classical Latin such accusative is generally changed to the nominative, and the participle is made to agree with it in gender and number. Thus, instead of virtutem laudandum est, we iisuallv find virtus lau- danda est. The accusative in this connection is used by Cicero in only two passages. Uteiidum est with the ablative occurs more than once in Cicero ; as, Quu7n S2W cuique judlcio sit utendum. Rem. 12. In classical prose the participle in dus never has the signification of j50«sifa7iXv, except when joined with I'ix ; as, Vix opta7idum nobis cidijbdtur. Cic. Vix erat cride/ulu/n, i. e. vix crcdi ^^dterat. Later writers use it in ',hi3 Bense with negative particles, and at a later period it was used with still mo»-e frequency in the sense of possibility as well as in that of necessity. 3. (a.) A participle is often employed, instead of a vei '), in a conditional, explanatory, adversative, relative, or othei dependent clause; as, Curio, ad fdcum sedenti (as he was sitting) wa^/wwrn aui-i pondus Snmnltes aitulerunt. Cic. Trldui viam progressi, i-iirsits reverteruni ; for, quuin progrtssi tssenl. Cajs. Dionysius tyrannus, Syrdcusis expulsus, Cdrinlld pueros docPlint. Cic. Dionysius, cultros metuens tonsorios, candenti carbone sibi ddurebr.l c/qnlluTa. Id. Rlsus interdum ita repente erumpit, ut eum cupientis tenire neguedmus. Id. fliconi'Ji abiturjE congreganlur in lOco certo. Plin. Note 1. If the participle refers to a noun not contained in the leading proposition, it « put \vith that noun in tiie ablative absolute. See § 257, R. 3. Note 2. (a.) The English clauses most frequently expressed in Latin by means of par- ticiples are such as are connected by relatives or b}' as, when, after, ult/ioiig/i, since, be- cause, etc.; as. Nemo ohservat luiiain nisi laburantem. Sen. Vt Bonlits, sic anhnus, st noil videns, alia cernil, — though not perceiving itself. Cic. Sfrv'iliiis Ahaln S/ntnum Mfxliujn, re!;ninii appetentem, intSrcmil, — because he was a.spiring to the sovereignty. Cic. — (b.) UTien a participle is connected with a relative or iiitJ>rrogative it can only b« translated by a circumlocution; as, Non sunt fa btina iliceni/n, quibiis abundautera ticet esse mtserrimu»i, — which one maj' pos.sess in abundance, and still be very miserable Cio. Sinatus absurdum esse ilicebat, ignorare rej^tyn, quid spOraus ant peteus vEnSrit, — ritb wh.at hopA ->r request he had come. liT. 296 SYNTAX. GERUNDS AND GERUNDIVES. § 275 (6.) SVlien two verbs are in English connected by and, and the act pns de- noted by them are regarded as simultaneous, one of them may be expressed m Latin by the present participle; as, He sits and holds his lute, lUe (Arion) Bedens cilhdram ihiei. Ovid, i^iinulhoc dicens attoUit in mgrum se femur. Yirg. 1. e. hoc d'lcit et atiollii. But if one of the actions precede the other, tho perfect participle must be used; as, Ctcsar attaclced and defeated the enemy, Gtsar Iwsits aggressus fugavit. Submersas ohrue pupjKS, i e. Submerge et obrue. Virg. — When the English clause would be connected by although, the partici])le is often followed l)y tdmen. Later \vriters in such case join the par- ticles quainquam, quamvis, etiiivi and vel with the participle it=elf; as, Qesarem mllites, quamvis rectisantem uUro in Africam sunt secuii. Suet. ; and tliese are 8ometin>es retained in the ablative absolute. — It is only in late Latin that par- ticiples are sometimes used in describing persons as possessing certain attri- butes, e. g. aclsiantes, audientes, for it qui adsiant, audiimt, i. e. the bystanders, hearers. (c.) A participle is used with verbs signifying to represent and perceive, especially to see and hear, when the object is describeil or perceived in a parti- cular state; as, Apelles pinxll Alexandru7H Magnum fulmen tmentem. Plin. Li English the infoiiiive is often joined with verbs of seeing and hearing; as, A.tidivi te canentem, I heard you sing. Audiri te cdnere, would be, I heard that you sung. Vldemus Pdlyphi-miim vastd se mole moventem. Virg. Note 3. In many cases, for want of a perfect participle active, and a present participle passive, this construction cannot lie used. Thus, quum amavisset cannot be exchanged for a participle corresponding with the English /taring loved. As the perfect participles of deponent verbs, however, have an active signihcation, they admit of the participial construction. The want of a perfect active participle may also be supplied by the perfect passive participle in the ablative absolute. See § 257, R. 5. GERUNDS AND GERUNDIVES. § 275. I. Gerunds are governed like nouns, and are fol lowed by the same cases as their verbs ; as, Mctus pdrendi sibi. Fear of obeying him. Sail. Parcendo victi'), By sparing the vanquished. Liv. Ejferor studio patres vestros videndi, I atd transported ■with a desire of seeing your fathers. Cic. Petendi con'siilatum gratia. Sail. Vmit ad recipiendum pecQnias. Varr. Remark 1. The gerund is the same in form as the oblique cases of the neuter singular of participles in dus, but it has the meaning of the active voice. It is sometimes translated by the present participle with a preposition, and sometimes by a present infinitive active; as, Consilium Lucedxxminem occu- paudi, A design of occupying, or to occupy, Lacedsmon. Liv. Rem. 2. The gerund is sometimes, though rarely, used in a passive sense ; as Spes restituendi nulla erat, — of being restored. Nep. Aihenas erudiendi gratia missus, — for the purpose of being instructed. Just. Ante domanduni. Virg. Adee ad imperandum. Cic. Rem 3.' The gerund is in its nature a verbal noun, having only the genitive, dative, ablative, and, after a preposition, the accusative. In its signification it corresponds with the English present participle when used as a verb.al noim. Hence in the oblique cases, it supplies the place of a declinable present infin- itive active; but in the accusative there is this difference between the infini- tive used as an accusative and the gerund, that the infinitive has simply the :)ower of an abstract noun, whereas the gerund expresses a real action ; as, Midtum interest inter dare et aceipere. Sen. Non solum ad discendum pi'opensi %umus, sed etiam ad ddcendum. Cic. § 275. SYNTAX. — SERUNDS AND GERUNDIVES. 297 II. Wlien thi; object of an active verb is to be expres^sed. the participle in diis is commonly used in preference to the gerund ; the object taking the case in which the gerund, if used, would have been put, and the participle agreeing with it. Tliii'', to express ' the design of writing a letter,' which, with the aid of tii6 gerund, would be represented in Latin by Consilium scrlbendi ejAstnlajii, the participle in dus is commonly substituted "for the gerund : and since, in tliis example, the genind, iscrlberidi) is in the genitive, the rule requires that, in substituting the participle for the gerund, the object of the genuid {epiMolam) should also be put in the genitive, and that the participle (scvibendus) should agree with it in gender, number, and case. Hence with the participle. the ex- pression is. Consilium scribendce epistolce. Between the two fonns of construc- tion there is no difference of signification. So, Consllia urbis delendaj (Cic), for urbem dilendi, Plans for destroying the city. Eeparandarum classium causa [Suet), for repdrandi classes. Perpetiendo labori idoneus. Colum. ^c? defen- dendam Rumam a6 oppugnanda Capua dCces Eom^nos absirdhere. Liv. Remark 1. The same constraction is used with the future passive partici- ples of ator, fj-uor, fungor, potior, and rarely of medeoi; as these verbs were originally followed by the accusative; as, jEtas ad hac utenda idonea. Ter. Justitice tmendse causa. Cic. In mUnere fuugendo. Id. Eostes in spent potiun- dorum castrorum veneraht. Cses. Aquce sdlmntdte medendis^we corporlbus nob- iles. Veil. Rem. 2. When a participle is thus used for a gerund, it is called a gerundive, and is usually translated like a gerund. The gerundive cannot be substituted for the gerund, where ambiguity would arise from the gender not being dis- tinguishable. It should therefore not be used when the object of the gei'und is a neuter pronoun or adjective; as, Aliquid fdciendi ratio (Cic), not ullcajus. Artem et vera et falsa dljUdicandi (Id.), not verovum dljudicandorum : because it would not be kno^\'n whether dlicujus and verorum were masculine or neuter. It is to be remarked, also, that the change of the gerund into the gerundive is less frequent in some writers than in others. m. Examples of the construction of gerunds, in each of their cases, have been al- ready given, among other nouns, under the heads Genitii-e, Dative, Accusative, and Ab- lative. The following remarks specify in what connections they are used: and when it is said that the gerundive is governed in any of the cases hke the gerund, it will of coursB be understood of the noun which is limited by a gerundive. RE:MArvK 1. The genitive of gerunds and gerundives may follow either nouns or relative adjectives ; as. Amor hdbendi. Cic. Palriam spes videndi. Virg. Nam hdbet rultrtra, ut dliamm ouiniuni rcrum, sic Vivendi mddiim. Cic. Barbara consuetUdo hdrninum immd- landdrum. Id. Postrimo Cdtillna dissinmlaudi caitsd ant sui expurgandi, in $em'itum venit. Sail. Inita sunt consilia urbis delemla?, cirium tn'icidandC>rura, nominis Romdni exstiuguendi. \A. Venandi stiidiOsi. Cic. Cerius eundi. Virg. Insuitus nOvigandi. CiEs. Peritus clvitdtis regendw. Nep. (1.) The nouns after which these genitives most frequently occur are cbTh^r, ars, causa, consilium, consiuiUdo, copia, cUpiditas, deslderium, difficultas, J'inis, facullas, forma, gratia, illccebra, libido, Idcus, licenlia, mddus, materia, mos, occcisio, otium, pOtestas, ratio, spdtium, spes, si&dium, tempus, usus, venia, vis, voluntas. Note 1. With these and other substantives the infinitive also may be used when with a tense of sum they form a jieriphrasis for a verb which is foiloweil by ti:e infinitive, or supply the )>lace of an adjective of which the infiiiitive is the subject; as, Quibus Omnia honesta atque inhdnesta vendOre vws erat. With whom it was a custom, or, who were accustomed. Sail. Tempiu est abire, It ii kime, i. e. tempestivum est, it is proper to go. 298 SYNTAX. GERUNDS AND GERUNDIVES. § 275. (2.) The relative adjectives, which most frequently take after them thesa genitives, .ire such as denote desire, knowledfje, remenibrance, and their contra- ries; as, avidiis, cupklus, studiosus, perUus, imperltus, insuetus, certus, conscius, ignarus, rudis, etc. See § 213, R. 1, (3.) Note 2. With the relative adjectives the infinitive is also joined poetically. Instead of an accusative after the gerund, or a genitive plural with a exemplorum I'ligendorum. Cic. Earum rerum wyji rvan comldnandi. Cic. Nominandi istorum erit copia. Plaut. (4.) The pronoun iui and also the plurals vesti'i and sui, even when feminine are joined with the masculhie or neuter form of the gerundive in di ; as, Qu6- niam tai videndi est copia. Plaut. Non vereor, ne quis hoc me vestri adhortandi causa viaynifice Idgui existlmet. Liv. In castra venervnt sui purgandi causa.— "With the demonstrative pronouns, ejus, hujus, ilVms, the participle usually agrees, but in two passages of Terence ejus, thopgh referring to a woman, has tlie participle in di, not in dcB; as. Ego ejus videndi cupidus recta, consequor. Ter. Tm in the first example and ejus in the "last are feminine. (5.) By a Greek idiom the gerund and gerandive, after the verb sum, are sometimes found in the genitive denoting a tendency or pwipose, with no noun or adjective on which thev can depend; as, Regiwn imjierium initio conservandse libertatis /werai. SaU. Sometimes esse in some form is to be supplied; as. Qua jwsfqtiam glonosa mddo, neque belli patrandi cognovit, scil. esse. Id. Cama or gratia may sometimes be supplied. In some other cases, also, the word on which the ge'nind in di depends is not expressed, and the gerund seems to be used instead of the infinitive; as, Mcineat provincicdihus iMteniiam suam tali mddo ostentandi, scO. fdcultas. Tac. Quum liaberem in dnlmo navigandi, scil. propdsitum. Cic. Rem. 2. The dative of gerunds and gerundives is used after adjec- tives which govern a dative (§ 222), especially after those which sig- nify usefulness or fitness ; and also after certain verbs and phrases, to denote a purpose ; as, Charta empdrctica est inMlis scrlbendo. Plin. Capessendffi relpUblicm hdbilis. Tac. Ut nee triumviri accipiundo, nee scinbm ref crundo sufficerent. Liv. L6cum D;j/:iif?o condendo cdpere. Id. Non fuit consilium agrum cbXnwAo aut venando intentum cetatem dgere. Ssdl. Tiberius quasi Jirmandce valetudini in Campdniam concessit. Tac. Quum solvendo cere alieno respHblica non esset. Liv. Quum sol- vendo cli-itutes non essent, — were insolvent. Cic. (1.) The verbs and phrases upon which this dative most frequently depends are, Stiidcre, intentum esse, tempus impendere, tempus consumere or insumere, 6pe- ram dure, sufficere, satis esse, deesse, esse, signifying to serve for, to be ade- quate to, and, in later writers, on verbs of motion.— The dative of the gerund after sum is usually supposed to depend on idmeus understood; but see § 227, R. 3. (2.) The dative of the gerandive, denoting a purpose, is also used after names of office ; as, Decemvin legibus scribendis, i. e. the ten commissioners for thawing up a code of laws. Liv. So, Cdmitia creandis decemviris. Id. Triumviros agro dando creat. Id. (3.) A purpose is more commonly expressed by ad and the accusative of ^e gerund, or by a clause with ut, tlian by the dative; as, Pecus ad vescendum hdnmiibus ajAa. Cic. Rem. 3. The accusative of gerunds and gerundives follows the prepositions ad, to, or inter, during or amid, and sometimes ante, circa, or oh ; as, 1 276. SYNTAX. — SUPINBS. 299 ^rf poenltendum prdpSrat, qui cito judical. Pub. Syr. M^r bibendum, WhU\ drinking. Just. Ad tolcrandos fdcilius labores. Quint. Ad castra fdcienda Cic. Ob absohendum. Id. N )TE. The constiiiction of the genind!ve instead of the genand almost in- variably occurs here when the object of the gerund is to be expressed. Rem. 4. The ablative of gerunds and gerundives follows the pre- positions a, (ah), f/« Supines, like gerunds, are verbal nouns, having no other cases except the accusative and ablative singular. In certain connections they supply the place of the present infinitive; the supine in iim having an active and the supine in u a passive ngnification. As in the case of gerunds, we are to regard their construction both as verbs and as nouns. A,s verbs we are to notice their government, as noun.s, their de- pendence. I. Supines in um are followed by the same cases as their verbs ; as, Non Grdiis servltum matribus ibo, I shall not go to serve Grecian matrons Virg. Te id admonitum venio. Plaut. n. Supines in mot follow verbs of motion, and serve to denote ' the purpose of the motion ; as, Ciibitum disces.^mus. Cic. Ire dejectum mdnumenta regis. Hor. Legdti venei-unt questum injurias, et res repetitum. Liv. Quum spectatum ludos iret. Nep. So after participles; a,s, Patriam defensnm revocdtus. Nep. Spectatum udmissi. Hor. Note. The con.struction of the supine in um, considered as a noun, is analogous to bat of names of places in answer to the question ' whither? ' (§ 237), the notion of pur- pose arising from its verbal character. Remark 1. Supines in um sometimes follow verbs which do not express motion ; as. Do f'diam nupium. Ter. Vos ultum injurias hortor. Sail. Reji. 2. The supine in um with eo literallj' signifies ' I go to do a thing,' and hence ' 1 intend,' or, 'am going to.' Instances of this use are found in Plautua and Terence and in the prose writers later than Cicero; as, Mta Glucirimn, uuid dyisf cur te Is perdltum? Why are vou going to desti'oy yourself i* Plaut. Biinorum proemia ereptum cunt. SaU. With eo the supine in um often forms a periphra.eis equivalent to the same mood and terse of the verb from which the 800 SYNTAX. ADVERBS, §277 Bupine is forii ed ; as, Ne bdnos omnes perditum eant ( Sail. ), for pcrdant. Erep- Uim euHt (Id.), for eripiunt. U Itum Ivit {Tac), for ultus est. Ultum ire injwruu festmat, i. e. ulcisci. Sail. Resi. 3. The supine in 7im most -frequently occurs with the infinitive in with which it forms the future infinitive passive; as, Bri'dum visum !ri a me piito. Cic. In this construction the accusative properly ilepends upon the su- pine, and h-i is used impersonally ; ' I suppose that I am going to see Brutus.' \ 184, 2, {a.) Its notion of futurity is derived from the proper signification of Mie active voice, as perditum Iri, to go to destroy, the idea of intending passing easily into that of futurity. Rem. 4. But to express a purpose Latin writers in general prefer using a genind or gerur dive in the accusative with ad or in the genitive with ccmsa or (jratld, a subjurctive clause with ut or qui, a present or future active participle, and sometimes poetically an irJInitiTe. See § 275, R. 1, 2: ^^ 262, 264, 274, and 271. m. The supine in u is used to limit the meaning of adjec lives signifying wonderful, agreealie, easy or difficult, worthy or nnivorthy, honorable or base, and a few others ; as, MlrahUe dictu! Wonderful to tell, or to be told! Virg. Jucundum cognitu at- que aiulltu, Pleasant to be known -and heard. Cic. Res factu facilis, A thing easj' to be done. Ter. FaciUa inventu. Gell. liicredibile inemdrdtu. Sail. Tur- pia dictu. Cic. Optimum factu. Id. Note. The pWncipal supines in u in common use are auditu, cognitu, dictu, fcuttu, in- ventu, mSmoralu and natu, which occurs in the expressions, grnnriis, major, minor, maximus, and minimus natu. lu magna natu, of an advanced age, and maximo natu fllius, the ►Idest son, natu Is the ablative of a verbal substantive, since neither gerunds nor supinei are joined with adjectives. Remark 1. The principal adjectives, after which the supine in u occurs, are affabUis, arduus, usper, bonus, deformis, dignus,indignus, dulris, diirus, facilis^ difftcllis, fccdus, fiaris, konestus, horrendus, ihcredthilis, jucundus, injucundus, m,agnus, ■inemorahilis. mollis, procllvis, pulcher, rarus, turpis, and utllis. Rem. 2. The supine in u is used also after the nouns fas, nefas, and 6pus; as. Hoc fas est dictu. Cic. Nil/as dictu. Ovid. Dictu opus est. Ter. — In the following examples it follows a verb: PUdei dictu. Tac. Agr. 32. 3ictu fast'id- ienda sunt. Val. Max. 9, 13, 2. Rem. 3. As the supine in u is commonly translated by a passive form, it is placed un- der the passive voice ; but, in many cases, it may with equal or greater propriety be translated actively. As a noun,its construction may be referred to the ablative of limi- tation. § 250. « Rem. 4. (a.) Instead of the supine in u, an infinitive, a gerund or gerun- dive with ad, or a verbal noun in the ablative, and sometimes in tlie dative or accusative, may be used ; as, Ardua imitdtu, cUterum cognosci Utllia. Val. Max. Illud autem facile ad credendum est. Cic. Ojms proscriptione dignum. Plin. Agua potui jUcunda. Id. Fdcillor ad inteUectum atque imitfitionem. Quint. With opus est the perfect passive participle is often used instead of the supine to u ; as. Opus est maturato. There is need of haste. Cf. § 243, R. 1. (b.) The construction with fwZ and the gerand; as, res fdcilis ad intelligen- ium; or with sum and the infinitive active; as, fdcile est inveiilre, is used by the best writers after fdcilis, difficilis, and Jucundus. The most common con- Btruction of dlgnus is with qui and the subjunctive, (§ 264, 9), but the poeta w\A later prose writers have joined it with the infinitive passive. ADVERBS. § 27T. I. Aiverbs modify or limit the meaning of verbs, adjectives, and sometimes of other adverbs ; as. 5 277. SYNTAX. ADVERBS. 301 Bene rndKes, You advise well. Ter. Fortissimc urgentts, Most Vigorously pressing on. PlLn. Male, narramlo. Ter. Loiuje dlsstmilis. Cic. Valde bene. Id Remark 1. Adverbs may also modify nouns, wlien they arc used as adjec< rives or participles, and accordingly 'denote a quality, or 'when a participle is inderstood. They are also joined to adjective pronouns, when their adjective- haracter predominates; and sometimes limit the raeauius; of a preposition; as, Pojmlus late rex, for k'lte reynans, — ruling far and wide. V^'irg. Nihil admddi/m, Nothing at all. Cic. Bomo plane noster, — entirely ours that is, devoted to us. Id. Bomerus plane orator. Id. Admodum puella. Liv. Late tyrannus. Hor. Grdribus superne ictibus conjlktdbantur, i. e. superne acdden/lbus. Tac. Multd- '■um circa chitdtum, i. e. neighboring cities. Liv. Rem. 2. (a.) Most of the modifications made by adverbs may also be made iy means of the various cases of nouns and adjectives, and many modifications may be made bj' these, for expressing which no adverbs are in use. In general those limitations which are most common can be expressed by adverbs; as, edpitnter tor cum sdpieniid ; hie for in hoc Idco ; bene for in bono mddo ; nunc for hoc ttmpOre. — {b.) The following are examples of other parts of speech used adverbially, viz. Nihil, ' in no way ' ; nonnihil, ' in some measure ' ; guidquam, ' at all ' ; dliquid, ' somewhat ' ; quidf ' why ? ' Rem. 3. A negative adverb, modifying another negative word, destroys the negation; as, Nan pdrere noluit. He was not unwilling to obey. Nep. Baud igndi-a 7/mli, Not ignorant of evil. Virg. Baud nihil est, It is something. Ter. Nee hoc ille non vldit. And this lie clearly perceived. Cic. So, nonnulli, some; nonnumquam, sometimes. Non, before a negative word, commonly heightens tlie affirmative sense, while it softens the expression; as, Bdmo non indoctus, i. e. homo sane docfus. Non semel, i. e. scepius; non ignore, non nescio, non sum nescius, I know very well. Qui mortem in mdUs jjonit, non potest earn iK)n timcre, — must needs fear it. Cic. Rem. 4. When the subject and predicate of a proposition are both inoditied by negative words, and also when the predicate contains two negatives, the proposition is affirmative ; as, N'mo non videt, Every one sees. Cic. Neque hcec non evewrimt. And this inde >d took place. So, if botli the antecedent and the predicate of a relative clau; J are legative, the proposition is affirmative ; as. Nemo est, qui nesciai, Evei / bodj snows. Cic. RiSiVi. 6. a.) But in the case of wow followed by me — quide7n, the two nega- tivef do n' destroy each other ; as, Non fugio ne hos quidem mores : and whfin the rAgative leading proposition has subordinate subdivisions with neque — ni j[ue, rHut — neve, or non — non, these negative particles are equivalent to aut — at/i; as, Non me carminibus vincet, nee Orpheus, nee Linus. Virg. NemTnem, non re, non verbo, non vultu denique offendi. Cic. Nullius rei neque p7-ces, ne- que manceps /actus est. Nep. (b.) In a few passages, however, two negatives in Latin, as in Greek, strengthen the negation, and this exception appears to have been derived from the language of common life; as. Jura te non 7idcitaram hiimini neralni. Plaut. (c.) Nemo, nullus, nihil, and numquam have a different sense according as the turn is place ' befoi-e or after them ; as, Non nhno, some one ; ncino non, every one; nonnulu, some; nullus non, ever}^; nonnihil, something; nihil non, every thing; non numqunm, sometimes; mimquam non, at all times. So, nusquam non, every where, but instead cf nonnusquam, alicObi is used. Rem. 6. (a.) Non is sometimes omitted after non mddo or non so- lu7)i, when followed, in a subsecjuent clc»iise, by ne cjuldevi, if both clauses have the same verb, and if the verb is coretained in the second clause ; as, as 302 SYNTAX. ADVERBS, §277 Mihi non riddo irasci, sed ne ddlere quidem hnpune licet, which is e nivalent tn Mihi non mOdv non Irasci, sed ne ddlere quidem impUne licet, or Mlhi nartim e nobit ita timidi sunt, ut, etc., ^j«r^if« iia repiMica, dversi, ut, etc. — Simul — simul, ' as well — as,' like 7iu>ic — nunc, is not found in Cicero. — Qua — quel is equivalent to ei — et. — Turn — t?im is used sometimes like mddo — mddo, sometimes like 7;nrtim — pdrtim ; as Erumpunt sape vitia dmicorum ium in ipsos dmicos, tum in dUUnos. Cic. Hac {heneflcia) tum in Universam remjmbllcam, tum in singfdos elves con- fevuntur. Id. Rem. 9. Quum — tum is equivalent to et — et, except in assigning a greater hiiportance to the second part : hence it must be translated by ' both — and es])ecialh',' ' not only — but also,' or ' but more particularly.' Sometimes ad- ditional weight is given to the second part by means of vei-o, certe, etiam, qud- que, prcBcijnie, imprimis or maxlme. This use of quum — ttim seems to have had its origin in the use of quum with the subjunctive and often with the indica- tive in the pi'otasis, followed by twn in the apodosis. When quum followed by tum serves to express the opiposition between single words which have the Bame verb, it is to be regarded as a complete adverb; as, FortUna quum in rell- quis rebus, tum prcecipue in bello j^lilrlmum 2)dtest. Sometimes the verb stands in the first part of the sentence ; as, Quum omnis arrdyantia ddiosa. est, turn ilia myenii atque floquentice inulto mdlestissima. Tum is sometimes repeated in the second part of tlie sentence ; as, Qucm pater mdriens quum tuiorlbus et prdpi'n- fuis, tum leylhus, tum mquUdti mayistrdtuum, turn judlciis vestvis commendatum pHiavit. Cic. Sometimes the gi'adation is, quum — turn — ium vrro. Rem. 10. Non mddo — sed etiam (or non solum, or non tantum — va-um etiam) icuerally expresses the transition from less important to more important things, fiko the English 'not only — but (also)'. The transition from greater to smalW things is expressed by non mddo — sed, without the etiam, which we render in English by ' I will not say — but only,' and in Latin, too, we may say non dicam cr rum dlco — sed ; as, Quid est enim minus non dlco drdtoris, sed hdminis. Rem. 11. Tam — quam expresses a comparison in degree; as. Nemo tam multa scripsit, quam midta sunt nostra. With super^itives they are rendered into English by ' the — the' and comparatives; as, V Iterndsus qimm plurmum inbit, tam maxime sitit, The more he drinks, the more he thirsts. Cato. Quam quisqut pcssime fecit, tam maxime tutus est. Sail. — Tam — quam quod maxlme signifies, ' as much as possible.' — Non tam — quam signifies, ' not so much — as,' or ' less — than ' ; as, Provincia non tam gratiosa et Ulustris, quam neydtidsa ac mdlesta. Cic, Rem. 12. Non minus — quam and non magls — quam are equivalent to ceque — f c, ' as much as,' but in non magis — quam the greater weight is attached to tha amncative clause beginning with quam ; as, Alexander non ducis magis quam § 277. SYNTAX. PREPOSITIONS. 303 miUtis munin exslquehalnr, Alexander perfonned as much tt j service of a sol- dier as that of a comiuan.ler. In this connection plus frequently sup^ilies the place of nidc/is. (a.) Sic and ita are demonstrative adverbs corresponding to the relative ut. The restrictive meaning of ita (see § 191, R. 5.), is sometimes made more em- pliatic by the addition of tiimen. Tmitus is used in a like restrictive sense; as, PrcBsidii tantuin est, ut ne milrus quklem cuHji possit, i. e. ' only so much.' Ca^s. (b.) Ut — ita or sk places sentences on au equality. They may sometimei- be translated ' altliouch — still,' or ' indeed — but.' — The adverb ut, ' as,' some- times takes the signification of the conjunction quod, 'because'; as, Atgue i'le^ ut semper J'uit apertissinms, non se puryavit. Cic. Reji. 13. In an enumeration, prlmum, deinde, turn, denique are commonh preferred to the numerals, prlmnm, sccundo, (for secundum is not often used), tertium, quariuiii, etc., unless the strict succession of the luxmbers is required. Sometimes turn is used once or twice instead of deinde, or the series is extended by acchlit, hue adde, etc. Sometimes dcnigue is followed by postremo to form the conclusion of a series, but often denique without the other adverbs con- cludes a seiies, and is then equivalent to ' in short 'or 'in fine.' See CIc. Cat. 1, 5. Resi. 14. Mintts is often used for non ; as, Nonnumquam ea, qua prcedicta su)ii, minus eveniunt. Cic. — So, si mimis — at, ' if not — yet;' and sin minus, 'but if not,' without a verb, after a preceding si ; but with si iwn the verb is repeated. — The English ' how little ' is in Latin quam non ; and ' so little,' ita non or ddeo non ; as, ddeo non curabat, quid hdmines de se Idquerentur. Rem. 15. Nunc always expresses the time actually present, or the time to which a narrator transfers himself for the puqiose of making his description livelier. Thus in speaking of the present time we may say. Nunc p)rimum somnia me eladunt or elUserunt; \>\\X in a narrative we must say, Somnia twnc primum se dlccbat eldsisse. Compare the use of hie and ille. See § 207, R. 23, (c.) Rem. 16. The conjunction dum, ' while,' when added to negatives, becomes an adverb, signifying • yet ' ; as, nondum, ' not yet ' ; necdum, ' and not yet ' ; nul- lusdum, ' no one yet ' ; nihildum, ' nothing yet.' Hence vixdum signifies ' scarcely yet ' ; as, Vixdum epistdlam iuam legeram, qwwn ad me Ourtius venil. Cic. — So, also, the conjunction nisi, by omitting its verb or uniting it with the lead- ing verb, acquires, after negatives and negative questions, the sense of the ad- verb ' except,' which is generally expressed by prceterquani or the preposition prater, and must be so expressed when no negative precedes. But the ex- pression 'except that' may be rendered either by nisi quod or praterquam quod. — After nihil idiuil we may use either nisi or quam, nisi referring to nihil and quam to aliud. Hence nihil aliud nisi signifies ' nothing further,' or ' noth- ing more,' and nihil aliud quam, ' nothing else,' or ' no other thing but this.' Rem. 17. Ut, ' as,' in interposed clauses, such as vt dplnor, ut pulo, ut censeo, ut credo, is frequently omitted. Credo, used in this manner often takes an ironi- jal sense. PREPOSITIONS. II. 1. See respectmg the constnaction of prepositions with the accusative, \ 235: and with the ablative, \ 241. See, also, for the diff'erent meanmgs of prepositions, ^ 195, and for their arrangement, § 279, 10. 2. Two prepositions must not be joined in Latin, as they sometimes are in English, with the same noun; as, to speak /b?- and against a law; or, I have learned this roith, and, to some extent, from him. These sentences may be thus expressed in Latin ; pro lege et contra h'gem d'icere ; hcsc cum eo, partim eiiam ab eo didici. Those dissyllabic prepositions onlv, which are sometimes used as adverbs, may follow another, without being joined with a case; as, Quod aut secundum natUram esset, aut contra. Cic. Cis Padum uUrdque- Liv Ciesar reverses the order, fnlj-a extrdque ijiuniiiones. B. Civ. 3, 72 304 SYNTAX. CONJUNCTIONS. § 278, 3. Wlien ncuns mutually dependent upon a prepositioi are in ap- position, when they constitute an enumeration without a coonective, and when connec-ted by copulative, disjunctive, ad\ ersative, or com- parative conjunctions, the preposition is not repeated, unless such nouns are to be distinguished from each other, or are emphatic ; as. Quid dlcam de tlmsAuro omnium reruni, memoria? Hoc aiiparet in bestiis, vohicribus, nantibus, ap-estibus, cicuribus, ('Oris, ut se ipsw dlligant. Cic. Scepissime inter me tt Scipioiiem de am'ailid dtsgerebatur. Id. Quid faceres si in aliquam domum villamve venissesf Id. Niliii per Tram nut cupiilitatom (U turn est. Id. Theiiiinludts no7i minus in rebus gerendis prumjHus quam ex.cb- gitandis ej-at. Nep. 4. The monosyllabic prepositions ab, ad, de, ex, and in are often used bf-,iore each of two iiouiis connected by et, etc., especially if the qualities denoted by such nouns are to be considered separately. If the nouns are separated by tt — ct, ntc — nee, etc., the prepositions must be repeated; as, Ut eOrum et in bellhis et in clvilibus officiis vUjeat industria. Glc— Inter is fi-equently repeated by Cicero after inieresse, and other writers repeat it after other verbs also; as, duid intersit inter pdpularem—c'n'eni, et inter comtnnlem, seventm et ffrdvem. Cic. Certdtum inter Ap. Claudimn maxlme ferunt et inter P. Deeium. Liv. 5. («.) In poetry a preposition is occasionally omitted with the first of two nouns, and put with the second only; as. Qua nemdra, aut quos dyor in specus, ( Hor. ) for, in qua nemdra nut in quos speeus dgor. So, Hor. Ep. 2, 1, 25. — (b.) An ellipsis of a preposition with the relative pronouu sometimes occurs, together with that of the verb belonging to the preceding demonstrative ; as, In eddem dpinione fui, qua reliqui onmes, (Cic), properly m qua reliqui omnes fueruni. CONJUNCTIONS. r § 278. Copulative, disjunctive, and other coordinate con- junctions, connect similar constructions. Note 1. Clauses are similarly constmcted, which are mutually independent, whose subjects and verbs are iii the same case and mood, and which hav*- either no dependence or a similar dependence on another clause. Note 2. (a.) Words have a similar constnaction, when they stand in th( same relation to some other word or words in the sentence. Hence, (6.) Conjunctions coiuiect the same cases of nouns and pronouns, depend ent, if the cases are oblique, upon the same government; the same number case, and gender of adjectives, belongiug to the same noun; the same mood of verbs, either independent, or alike dependent; adverbs qualifying the same verbs, adjectives, etc. ; and prepositions on which depends the same noun or pronoua; as, Concidunt venti, fugiuntqwe. nubeg^ The winds subside, an<' the clouds disperse. Hor. Ldcum, quern et non cdquit sol, et Uingit ros. Varr. Lvdi decern per dies, facti sunt, neque res ulla prcetermissa est. Cic. Vldes, ut alta stei nlve cnndlduvi Soracte, ncc jam sustmeani onus silvce lihorantes, geluque Jiuminn constiterint acuto. Hor. JnfeUif/itis et dnimuvi ei prceslo fuisse, nee co«- siliiim dffuisse. Cic. Geiierl ummantlum omui est a ndturd trihutum, id se tuedtur, dicl'metque en, qua nociluni vtdeniitur. Id. Aut nemo, aut Cato sapiens futi. Id. Pulvis et umbra siinius. Hor. Si tu et Tullia vdletis, ego eiCjcero wilcmiis. Cic. AggC-re jacto turriljusrywe constiti'dis. Cx%. Clams et honoratus vir. An illus- trious and honorable man. Id. Casar Rcmos cohortatus, llberdlUerque drdtidm proseciitus. Ca3s. Pater tuus, quern colui et dilexi. Cic. Behjo' spectavt in septentrionem et orientem solera. Cses. Navlbus juiictis, ratibusgwe compluri- bus factis. Id. Lege, ret tubeWis redde. Plant. AllobrOges trans RhddCmum vicos possessionesgwe hdbebant. C:bs. Quum triamplium egeris, censorqne fueris, ei ob'eris iej atus. Id. Quum ad opiMum accessisstt, castraque ibi poneret. Cacs § 278. SYNTAX. — CONJUNCTIONS. 305 Ades an(m- et fimitte iifnorem. Cic. Ea vldere ac persp!ccie pdtestis. Id Gnivltcr ct ^opiose dlxisse dicUiir. Id. Cum f nitre an sine. Id. Cf. § 277, II. 2. Citi carmiua cordi, numerosqiie intendere nems. Virg. Nee census, nee eJdi-un; udmen avOnmi, sed probitas maynos ingi'uimnque jacit. Ovid. Philosfijjhi ne- gant queniquam vlrum ionum esse, nisi sapientem. Cic. Gloria virtutevi tarn- quam umbra seqiiitur. Id. Remark 1. Copulative conjunctions may connect either single words and phrases or entire clauses ; the other conjunctions, whether coordinate or subordinate, connect clauses only. Rkii. 2. Words thus connected are sometimes in different oases, though in the same construction; as, Mea e< reipubHc;« interest. Cic. (See ^ 219.) Slve es RGm», sive in Epiro. Id. (See §§ 221 and 254. But see also ^ 221, Note.) In Mtttii descendat judlcis awes, et patris et nostras. Hor. See § 211, R. 3. In like manner, Hannibal non aliter vinci pOtwit, quam mora. Rem. 3. As the subjunctive is often used for the imperative, they may be comiected by coOixlinate conjunctions; as, Disce nee invideas. Pers. Rem. 4. Where the purpose of the writer requires it, coordinate conjunc- tions sometimes connect independent propositions, whose verbs are in different moods; as, Sliiporem hdminis, vel dicam pecUdis, videte. Cic. JVec satis scio, nee, si sciam, dicere ausim. Liv. Rem. 5. £t is used after multi followed by another adjective, where in English 'and' is usually omitted; as, Multa et niagnce arhOres, Many large trees. In such cases et supplies the place of et is, intro'^.ucing a more accurate description. See § 207, R. 26, (c.) Rem. 6. The conjunction is often omitted; as, (a.) When two single words, an comprehending the whole idea, are opposed to each other, as, x^elim, noUin, whether I would or not; maxima minima, the gi'eatest as well as tlie least; jyrlma postrema, from the first to the last ; dignos mdiejnos adlre ; ire red'ire, to go^o and fro. yEdiJ'iciis omnibus pUblieis prlvatis, sacris pi'.dfCinis sic pepercit. Cic. Nam gloriam, hdnorem, imperium bdnus ignavus (sque sibi exoptant. Sail. C. 11. (6.) Et is very frequently omitted between the names of two colleagues; a-s, Consuks di'elcirciti sunt Cn. Pompeius M. Crassus. P. Lentido L. Tridrio, qiues- loribus urbclnis. Cic. Sometimes, also, when the two persons are not colleagues. it is also occasionally omitted between two words in the oratorical style; as, Aderant dmlci, prdpinqui. Id. ; also with verbs ; as, Adsunt, qucruntur Sicidi. Id. In good prose, if three or more substantives are joined, it is usual either wholly to omit the conjunction or to insert it between each. The following may sei-ye as an example of both cases: Qui non mddo CUriis, Cdfonlbus, Pompeiis, anVquia illis, sed his recenlibus, Mdnis et Didiis et (Jceliis commemdrandis jdeebant. This is also the common practice with adjectives and verbs, and hence when et has not previously occurred in an enumeration of persons or things, we should not conclude the enumeration with et alii, et reliqui, et eeiera, etc., but should make use of the adjectives alone, alii, reliqui, eetera, etc. But though et, ae and ai- gue are not used alone in the third or fourth place, yet the enclitic que fre- quently occurs in this position ; as, Precor ut ea res vobis pcieem, tranquilUid' lent, oiium, concordiamque afferat. Cic. Et may be supplied also when two jirotases introduced by sJ are joined together; where we say* if — and if,' or 'if— and.' See an example in Cic. Off. 3, 9. (c.) An ellipsis of m( is supposed when we precedes and el, aique, or qtte is used to continue the sentence, those copulative conjunctions in such case ob- taiuing the meaning of the adversative sed; as, MOnere ccepit Porvm, ne ultima experiri persevirdret, dederetque se viciorl. Curt. Rem. 7. Copulative conjunctions are often used, before each of two or more connected words or clauses, in order to mark the connection more forcibly; as, Et petunia persuddel, et gratia, et auetdrilns dlcentis, et dignitas, et postrema aspectus. Quint. Hoe et turpe, nee tdmen tutum. Cic. Neque nala est, et aslernc est. U. Kt liln et mihi rdlupldli /Ore. Id. Before clauses the disjunctive coc 26* 3C6 SYNTAX. ARRANGEMENT OF WORDS. § 279 junctions aie used in a similar manner; as, Res ipsa aut invitabit aut dehortoM tur. Id. "So, also, nunc. ..nunc, simul...simul, partim...partim, qua. ..qua, turn,.. turn, quura...tum, are used before successive clauses. Rem. 8. To connect different names of the same person or thing, s'we or sei/, rather than aut or vel, is employed; as, Mars s'tve Mavors. Cf. § 198, 2, (c.) Rem. 9. Instead of et and ut with the negatives nemo, nihil, nullus, and num- quam, nequt (or nee), and ne are used with the con-esponding affirmative words quisquam, ullus, umquam, and usquam. But ' in order that no one ' is rendered in Latin by ne quis and not by ne quisquam, see § 207, R. 31, (a.); as, Ej^ra quiiJem cedunt, et dies, et menses, et anni : nee prcetiritum tempus umquam re- vertUur. Cic. Senatus decrevit, darent dperam consiiles, ne quid reepublica deirl- nienti aiperet. Goes. Rem. 10. The conjunctions igitur, vei-um, verumtamen, sed, and sed {amen, iii dicate a return to tlie construction of the leading clause, when it has been disturbed by the insertion of another claus'6. These conjunctions,_ in such connection, are usually rendered by ' I say,' and sometimes in Latm inquam is so used. Nam also is occasionally employed in this way and very rarely itdque. Rem 11. Vero and autern are frequently omitted in adversative clauses, especially in short ones ; as, Vincere scit Hcinnlbal, victoria uti nescit. Liv. This omission' often occurs in describing a progi-ess from smaller to gi-eater things, as in Cic. Cat 1, 1. And it is to be remarked that noii in the second member of such adversative sentences is used without et or vero ; as, aliena vitia ivlet, sua non ridei. But in unreal suppositions or ironical sentences, where tlie second member contains the ti-utli, et non or ac twn must be used, where we may sup- ply 'rather'; see § 198, 1, (c); as. Quasi nunc id dgdtur, — ac non hoc qnaiVA- tm\ Cic. INTERJECTIONS. * Respecting the construction of Inteijections with the nominative, see § 209 R. 13 ; — with the dative, § 228, 3 : — with the accusative, § 238, 2 : — and witb the vocative, § 240. ARRANGEMENT. I. OF THE WORDS OF A PROPOSITION. § ^yO. 1. In arranging the parts of a proposition in English, after connectives, are placed, first, the subject and the words which modify or limit it; next, the t"er6 and its modifiers ; then, the object of the verb; and finally. prepositions and the words depending upon them. This is calle ;1 the loyical or natural order. 2. (a.) In Latin, either of the four principal parts of a sentence may be placed first, and thei'e is great freedom in the .an-angement of the rest, bu; with this general restriction in prose, that words which are necessary for i!.<- complete expi-ession of a thonffht should not be separated by the intervention ofothi-r icords. In ordinary discourse, especially in historical writing,^ the followin;' general rule for the arrangement of the parts of a sentence is for tlie most p-iri observed. {b.) In a Latin sentence, after connectives, are placed, fii-st, the subject and its modifiers; then, the obliqve cases and other woi-ds which depend upon or modify the verb; and \iis.\ of all, tlie verb. § 279. SYNTAX. — ARRANGEMENT OF WORDS. 307 (c.) Hence a Latin sentence regularly be^ns with tlie_ subject and ends witli tlic principal verb of its predicate; as, Dumnorix f/ratid vi lar»?« ta- cent, clamant. Cic. Fragile corpus animus sempLternus movet. Id. 6. Iiiqunm and often aio, introducing a quotation, follow one or more of the words quoted; as, ' iVbra iwsti quid pdter,^ inquit, ^ Chr^sipjms dicat.'' Hor. ' Quid,'' ^io, ' tua crlmina prodisV Ovid. When a nominative is added to iiiquit, it usually follows this verb ; as, Mihi vero, inquit Cotta, vldetur. Cic. — Dlcii and dixit are used like inquit only bj' the poets. 7. (a.) The adjective may be placed before or after its noun according as ons or the other is cmiihatic, the more emphatic word being placed before the other. When any thing is ilepemlent on the adjective, it usually follows its noun. When a noun is limited by another noun, as well as by an adjective, the adjective usually precedes both; as, Ulla ofl'Icii praecepta. Cic. Tuum erga dignitatem meani stikhum. Id. (b.) Demonstratives, and the adjectives primus, medius, etc., when signifying the first part, the middle part, etc., (see § 205, R. 17), usually precede their nouns; as, JEa res. Cajs His ipsii verbis. Cic. Media nox. Ctes. Reliqua yEgypius. Cic. 8. Jlonosyllables are usually prefixed to longer words with which they are connected; as, Vir cldrissimus. Cic. Di imnwrtales. Res innumerdbiles. Vis tciapestdtis. Cses. 9. (a.) When nouns are put in apposition, the one which explains or defines the other is generally put last, unless it is to be made emphatic ; as. Opes irrl- tamenta mdtdvum. Ovid. Hence names of honors or dignities, and every thing of the nature of a title, are commonly placed after the proper name, as explan- atory additions. Thus, especially, the names of changeable Roman dign.ties; as, (7ice)'o consul ; C. Curioni tribuno plebis_; but also pennanent appellations; its, Ennius poeta; Plato pliilosophus; Didnysius tyrunnus; and such epithets as vir Jwnestissimus ; hdmo doctissimus. But the hereditary title rex is frequently placed before the name; as, rex Deiotarus; and so the title Imperdtor after it became permanent. (6.) In the arrangement of the Roman names of persons, the prcendmen •tands first, next the nomen or name of the qens, third the cognome'n or name of the fdmrUa, and last the agnomen ; as, Publius Cornelius Scipio AJ'r1cd':i^s. The prienomen is usually denoted by a letter. In the imperial times the nomen is often either omitted or follows as something subordinate. 10. (a.) Oblique cases precede the words on which they depend, but they follow prepositions ; as, Populi Romdni laus est. Cic. Laudis dvidi, pecuniae llberdles. Sail. Cunctis esto benignus, nulli blandus, paucis fdmilidris, omnibus ceqmis. Sen. MdnO- mentum sere perennius. Hor. Hanc tibi ddno do. Ter. — Ad meridiem spectans, Cic. Extra jKrlcidum. Id. (6.) Genitives dependhig upon neuter adjectives are commonly placed last, as, Ijicf.rta foriunce. Liv. Nee tlhi plus cordis, sed minus oris inest. Ovid. § 279. SYNTAX. ARRANGEMENT OF WORDS. 309 Remark. This rale, so for especialh' as it relates to genitives, is in a grea' degree arbitrary, as the position of the governed and governing words depends on tlie idea to be expressed; thus, 7nors jxitns ttii, contrasts the doath with tha preceding life ; but, frdtris tui mors distinguishes this case of ileath from otliers. Hence we say, dnimi motits, dnimi morbus, corpdi-is partes, terrce motus. — An ob- jective genitive usually follows the worJ on which it depends; as, una siyiiifi- cdlidne llterarum, by means of a single notice by letters. — When several geni- tives are dependent on one noun, the suljjective genitive commonly precc'les and the objective genitive may either precede or follow the governing noun. — The genitive dependent on causa or gratia, ' on account of,' regularly precedes these ablatives ; as, glorwe causa mortem dblre ; emolumenti siii gratia. (c.) When a noun which is governed by a preposition, is modified by other words which precede it, the preposition' usually stands before the words by winch the noun is modified; as, A prima liwead sextam haram. Liv. Ad dnimi met hetitiam. Cic. Ad bene bedtcque vivendum. Id. ((/.) Sometimes, however, the preposition comes between its noun and an ndjective or a genitive, by which the noun is modified; as. Nulla in re. Cic. Justis de causi.<. Id. Siws inter aqudles. Id. Hanc ob causam. Id. Magna cum vietu. Id. Qua in urbe Id. Ed in re. Id. jEtdtis suce cum primis. Nep. — So, also, a conjunction may follow the preposition; as, PostvQro Sulhe victo- riam. (e.) Per, in adjurations, is often separated from its case by other words; as, Per ego te deos d)'o. Tei'. — In the poets, other prepositions are sometimes sepa- rated in the same maimer; as, Viclnera, qua circum plurima muros acccpit pa- trios. Virg. (/.) Tenus and versus, and sometimes other prepositions, (cf § 241, R. 1,) follow their cases, especially when joined with qid or hie. This occurs most frequently with the prepositions ariie, contra, inter, and propter ; moi-e rareh' with circa, circum, penes, ultra and adversus ; and with still less frequency with post, per, ad, and de ; as, quam ante, quern contra, quos inter, quem prop- ter, quos ad, quem idtra, hunc adversus, htmc j^ost, quam circa. — The precedinc prepositions, and more rarely others also, sometimes, especially in the poets and later prose writers, follow nouns and personal pronouns. In such case, if the noun be modified by an adjective or a genitive, the preposition sometimes stands between them, and sometimes follows both; as, Posies sub ipsos. Virg. Ripam dpnul Eiiphrdlis. Tac. Maria omnia circum. Virg. And more rarely other words intervene; as. Bis accensa super. Id. Vitiis namo sine na^citur Hot. 11. Infinitives precede the verbs on which they depend; as, Jugurtha, ubi eos Africa decessisse ratus est, neque propter Idci ndtHram Cir- tam armis expugnare possit, mcenia circumdat. SaU. Servire mdgis quam imp6- rare parati estis. Id. 12. A word which has the same relation to several words, either pi-ecedes or follows them all; as, Vir gravis et sdjnens. Cic. Cldrus et honordtus vir. Id //i scri])toribus lec/endis et imitandis, or In legendis imitandisque scripturlbus , but not In legemhs scriptoi-ibus ei imitandis. Quum respondere neque vellet neque posset. Hdbentur et dicuniur tyranni. Amicitiam 7iec Hsu nee rdtione habent cogiiitam. 13. Relatives are commonly placed after their antecedents, ami as near to them as possible ; as. Qui si7n, ex eo, quem ad te misi, cognosces. Sail. Literas ad te misi, per quas grdtios libi egi. Cic. 14. Qnisque is generallyplaced after se, suus, qtii, ordinals and superlatives; lis, Suos (luisque debet tu^ri. Cic. Satis superque est slbi suarum cuicjue rfrtim cura. Id. Sevtr-itas dnimadversionis infimo cuTque grdtissima. Id. Maxima decet, quod est cujusque mamme suum. Id. Quisque very rarely begins a ropo- (ition. 810 SYNTAX. ARRANGEMENT OF CLAUSES. §280. 15. (a.) An adverb is usually placed immediately before the word ^ liicb it qualifies; but if the same word is modified by the oblique case of a noun, tiia latter commonly follows the adverb; as, Male parla male dllabuntur. Cic. iV''(7/i7 tam asperum neque tam difficile esse, quod non cCipidissime factan essent. S;ill. — Imperlum facile iis ar-tibus retiiietur, qiitbus initio jMriuin est. Id. Sed maxirae adulescentium familiaiitates appetebat. Id. Non tam in bellis et in praliis, quam in jn-amissis et fide firmiorem. Gic. — {b.) When non belongs to a single word of the proposition, it always stands immediately before it ; as, nop (e rejn^ehendo, sed fortanam. But if it belongs to the proposition generally, it stands before the verb, and particularly before the finite verb, if an mfinitive depends on it ; as. Cur tantdjMre te angas, inteUigere sane non possum. _ Instead of nondico, nego is generally used; as, negdvit eum cidesse. — The negatives 'ion, 7wque, nemo, nuUus, when joined to general negative pronouns or adverbs, such as qidsquam, ullus, umqiiam, "always precede them though not always immediately; as, nemini quidguam negdvit ; non niemlni me umquam te vldisse. § 207, R. 31. Note 1. In some phrases, custom has established a certain order, which must be observed and imitated; as, Clvis liomdnus, piipidus Eiimdnus, jus civile, ces ilicnum, terra marique, Pontifex maximus, mdyister equitwii, tribuniis militum, tribCim mllitmn consHldri jMestdte, Jupiter optlmus maximus, via Apjna ; ne quid respulilica detrlmenti cdpidt. Cic. The ablatives dpinione, spe, justo, sdlito, (see § 256, R. 9), generally precede the comparative. Note 2. Exceptions to the foregoing principles are very numerous. These may arise (a) from emphasis; {h) from poetic license; and (c) from regard to the harmony of the sentence. The following general rule sometimes modifies nearly all the preceding. 16. The emphatic word is placed before the word or words con- nected with it which are not emphatic. Note 3. The last place is often an emphatic one, except for the verb. When the verb is neither first nor last in a proposition ttie word before it is emphatic. An adjective, when emphatic, commonly precedes its substantive; when not emphatic, it commonly follows it. But with the demonstrative pro- nouns the rule is reversed. Note 4. The principal poetical variation in the arrangement of words consists in the Reparation of the adjective from its noun, and in putting together words from different parts of a proposition. 17. A sentence should not close like a hexameter verse, with a dactyl and spondee ; as. Esse vidHtur ; nor, in general, with a monosyllable. 18. Hiatus should be avoided; that is, a word beginning with a vowel should not follow a word ending with a vowel. 19. A concuiTcnce of long words or long measures, — of short words or short measui-es, — of words beginning alike or ending alike, — should be avoided. II. OF THE ARRANGEMENT OF CLAUSES. § S80. A compound sentence, whose clauses are united as prot* asis and apodosis, or in which the leading clause is divided by the insertion of one or more subordinate clauses, is called a period. 1. («.) In the former kind of period the protasis must precede the apodosis; as, Quum Pausdnias semidnimis de teinjilo cldtus esset, confestim animam eftlavit, When Pausanias had been carried out of the temple but just alive, he imme- diately expired. In a period of the latter kind the verb of the principal propo- sition 'is placed at tlie end, and the subordinate clauses between the parts of the loading clause; as, Pausanias, c/mim semidnlmis de iemplo i'ldtus esse! , con- 'esrim aniniam effiaviJ, Pausanias, when he had been carried out of the temple out just alive, immediately expired. Nep. [b.) A sentence, sucli &?■ Sctpio exercitum in Africam trajecit,ut Hann?b&lem 4x Mlid deducirtt, is not periodic in its structure, but it becomes so when w« §280. SYNTAX. CONNECTION OF CI.AUSES. 311 «ay, Scipio, til nanntbdlem ex Ildlin dcducirei, exercUum in Afrlcnm trtjecU, Periods in which the subordinate clause precedes with two conjuiict.cns; as, Quum iijihir ROmam vcnisset, stutim imperCitoi-em ddiit, are matle still more strictly ])eriodic by placing first the conjunction which belongs to the whole, and then inssrting the subordinate proposition; as, Itaque, quu7ii Rmnam ve- Ktsset, statim imperatorem adiit. 2._ (a.) If the verbs of the leading and dependent clauses liave the same 8ul)ject, or the same noun depending on them, thev are commonly formed into a period; a.s, Aiiiigonus, quum adversus Seleucum Lyslmdchumgue d'wiicdret, in I)ni3lio occlsus est. Nep. Quem, ul barbdri incendium effuyisse eminus vlderunt, tolis missis interf ecerunt. Id. (b.) So, also, when the noun which depends on the verb of the leading clause I- the subject of the dependent clause; as, L. 'Manlio, quum dictator /uisset, M. Pomponius, tribuuus plebis, diem dixit. Cic. 3. When obscm'ity woiild arise from separating the leading subject and verb by dependent words or clauses, they are often placed together at the be- ginning or end of the sentence; as, Lataj (sunt) delude leges, non solum quce ri(/ni suspicione consulem absolvcrent, sed quus ddeo in contrdrium verterent, uipopii- Idieta eti(i-i fdcemnt. Liv. The position of the leading verb is also often otherwise varied, from regard to emphasis, to avoid monotony, or to prevent its meeting with the verb of the last dependent clause; but clauses, when so arranged, do not constitute a period. 4. When one clause is inteiTupted by the introduction of another, the latter should be finished before the first is resumed. 5. Clauses expressing a cause, a condition, a time, or a comparison, usually precede the clauses to which they relate. 6. A short clause usually stands before, rather than after, a long one. III. OF THE CONNECTION OF CLAUSES. (1.) In connecting propositions, relatives, whether pronouns, pronominal ad- jectives, or adverbs, are often employed in order to avoid the too frequent re- currence of e<, rtM/ew, and certain other conjunctions. Every relative maybe used for this purpose instead of its coiTesponding demonstrative with et ; as, '(ui for et is, qudlis for et talis, quo for et eo, etc. They are used also before those conjunctions which are joined with et or auieni at the beginning of a proposi- tion; as, si, nisi, ut, quum, etc. (see § 206, (14.); as, quod quum audlvissem, quod si Jecissem, quod quamvis non igndrassem, for et quum hoc, et si hoc, et quamnis hue; or quum autem hoc, etc.; and, often, also, whei'e in English no conjunction is used, and even before other relatives ; as, quod qui fdcit, eum ego impium ju'lico, i. e. ei qui hoc fdcit, or, qui autem hoc fdcit. In the ablative with com- paratives the relative is often used as a connective ; as, Cdto, quo nemo tun irat prudentior, i. e. Cato, who was more prudent than aU others. (2.) In propositions consisting of two members, the relative pronoun is joined grammatically either to the apodosis or to the protasis; with the former in, Qui, quum ex eo qucereretur, cur tam diu vellet esse in vttd. Nihil habeo, inquit, qu )d accusem senectiitem. Cic. de Sen. 6. But is more frequent with the protasis or secpndaiy clause; as, A quo quum quaererOtur, quid maxlme expe- (iTret, respondit. Cic. Off. 2, 25. When it ir ti, as joined with the protasis, the nominative of the demonstrative is supplied with the apodosis from another case of the relative in the protasis, as, in the preceding passage, from the abla- tive. But for the sake of emphasis the demonstrative may be expressed, and frequently, also, for the sake of clearness ; as. Qui mos quum a posteridrlbus non esxel retentiis, Arcesllas eum revdcdvit. Cic. de Fin. 2, 1. The accusative is sometimes to be supplied; as. Qui {HerdclUus) quoniam intelligi ndluit, dmittd' mus. Cic. N. D. 3, 14. When the demonstrative precedes, and is followed by a proposition consisting of two members, the relative is attached tc the prota- 312 SYNTAX. ANALYSIS. §281 sis, which is placed first, and not to the leading clause o\ apodosis; as, Et smsi Pompeio^ quibus ille si paruisset, Ccesar tantas opes, quantas nunc hdbet, non hab'ret. Cic. Fam. 6, 6. Noll adversus eos me velle ducire, cum quibus ne contra te arma ferrem, Ilaliam religui. Nep. Att. 4. (3.) Where in English we use 'however' with the relative; as. He promised me many things, which, however, he did not perfoim, the Latins made use of the demonstrative with sec? or verum, or the I'elative alone implying the ad- versative conjunction; as, multa mihi promlsit, sed ea no7i priestUit, or, qujw non pntstitil,' hut not rjua autem or quw vera. Qui autem and qui vi'ru are used however in protases, where the relative retains its relative meaning, and there is a corresponding demonstrative in the apodosis; as, Qui autem omnia bona a te ipsis petunt, Us nihil malum videri potest, quod ndiuroe necessitas afferat. Cic. de Sen. 2. (4.) In double relative clauses, especially where the cases are different, Cicero frequently for the second relative clause substitutes the demonstrative; as, Sc'd ipslus in maite insidcbat species pidchritudlnis eximia qucedam, quam in- fuens, in eaque defixus, ad, etc. for ei in qua. Cic. Orat. 2. And sometimes even when the cases are the same ; as. Quern Phliuntem vmisse feruni, eumque mm Leonte disseruisse qumdam. Cic. Tusc. 5, 3; where et alone would have been sufficient. (5.) From this tendency to connect sentences by relatives arose the use of 5?w(Z before certain conjunctions merely as a copulative. See § 206, (14.) (6.) Neque or nee is much used by Latin writers instead of et and a nega- tion, and may be so used in all cases except when the negative belongs to one particular word; see §278, R. 9. Neque or iiec is added to enim, vcro, and td- men, where we cannot use ' and.' To these negative expressions a second negative is often joined, in which case wt^gwe enim non is equivalent to nam; non vcro non, to atque etiam, a stronger ei ; nee tdmen non, to atidmen. ANALYSIS. § S81. I. 1. The analysis of a complex or a compound sen- tence consists in d ding it into its several component propositions, and pointing out tb '• relation to each other. 2. In resolving a si ence into its component clauses, the participial con structions equivalent to oiauses should be mentioned, and ellipses be supplied See § 203, 4 ; § 274, 3 ; and § 257. 3. In a continued discourse the connection and relation of the successive sentences also should be specified. Rulf> for the Analysts of Comjilex and Compound Sentences. (1.) State whether the sentence is complex or compound. § 201, 11, 12. (2.) If complex, (1) specify the principal and subordinate clauses. (2) Speci- fy the class to which the subordinate proposition belongs, (§ 201, 7), and (3), its connective, and the class to which such connective belongs, (§ 201, 8 and 9.) (3.) If compound, specify the principal propositions, with their subordinates, if any they have, as in the case of complex sentences. II. The analysis of a proposition or simple sentence consists in distinguish- ing the subject from the predicate, and, in case either of them be compound, in pointingout tie simple subjects or predicates of wliict it is composed, and if complex, in specifying the several modifiers, whether of the essential or sub- ordinate parts. • !i 281. SYNTAX. ANALYSIS AND PARSING. 313 Rules for the Analysis of a Simple Sentence. 1. Divile it into two parts — the subject and the predicate, § 20.1, \ — 3 If these are simple, the analysis is complete, but if either is compound: — 2. Specify the simple subjects or predicates of which the compound con sists. — If either is complex: — 3. Point out tlie grammatical subject, and the words, phrases , etc. directly modifying it. 4. Point out the words, phrases, etc., which modify the direct modifiers of the grammatical subject, and those which modify them, and so on succes- sively, until the relation of each of the words composing the logical subject is specified. 5. Point out the grammatical predicate, and the words, phrases, etc., directly modifying it. 6. Point out the words, phrases, etc., which modify the direct modifiers of the grammatical predicate, and those which modify them, and so on succes- sively, until the relation of each of the words composing the logical predicate is specified PARSING. m. Parsing consists in resolving a proposition into the parts of speech of which it is composed, tracing the derivation of each word, and giving the rules of formation and construction applicable to it. Rules for Parsing. 1. Name the part of speech to which each word belongs, including the sub- division in which it is found. 2. If it is an inflected word : — (1.) Name its root or crude form, and declme, compare, or conjugate it. (2.) If it is a noun or pronoun, tell its gender, number and case: — if intha nomuiative or in the accusative with the infinitive, tell its verb : — if in an ob- liaue case depending on some other word, tell the word on which its case depends. (3.) If it is an adjective, adjective-pronoun, or participle, tell the word which it modifies. (4.) If it is a finite verb or an infinitive with the accusative, tell its voice^ mood, tense, number, person, and subject.^ 3. If it is a conjunction, tell its class and what it connects. 4. If it is a preposition, tell the words whose relation is expressed by it. 5. If it is an adverb, tell its class and what it qualifies. 6. Prove the correctness of each step of the process by quoting the definition w rule of formation or construction on wliich it depends. Note. The words constituting a proposition are most conveniently parsed in "iiat order in which they are arranged in analysis. Examples of Analysis and Parsing. 1. Equus currit, The horse runs. Analysis. This is a sijnple sentence: its subject is Squus, its predicate is mrrii, both of which nre simple. See ^ 201, 1-3; § 202, 2; and ^ 208, 2. 27 {514 SYNTAX. ANALYSIS AND PARSING. § 281 Parsing . Equm is a common noun, § 26, 1 and 3; of the 2d d>jcl., § 38; Liasc. gender, § 28, 1; third person, § 35, 2; its root is egw-, § 40, 10; decline it, 6 46; it is in the nominative case, singular number, ^ 35, 1, (6.);-tlie subject ot'currit, § 209, (a.)—Currit is a neuter verb, § 141, 11.; of the 3d conjugation, § 140, 2, from curro ; its principal parts are curro, cucun-i, cursum, currere, § 151, 4 ; it is from the first root curi-- ; give the formations of that root, § 151, 1 ; it is in the active voice, § 142, 1; indicative mood, § 143, 1; present tense, § 145, I.; third person, § 147; singular number, § 146; agi-eeing -with its subject-nomi- native equus, § 209, (b.) NoTK. The questions to be asked in parsing eqnus are such as these. Why is iguus a nou7i f Why a common noun ? Why of the second declension ? Wliy masculine f etc.— In parsing currit, the questions are, Why is currit a vei-b f Why a neuter verb ? Whv of the third conjugation? Which are the principal parts of a verb? Of what does the first root of a verb consist? What parts of a verb are derived from the first root? etc. The answer in each case may be found by consulting the etymological rules and definitions. S 2. Scevius vends agitcitur iiuiens plnus, The great pine is more violently shaken by the winds. Hor. Analysis. This also is a simple sentence :— its subject is ingens p'mws, its predicate scudus ventis dgitdtur; both of which are complex, § 201, 10, ^ 202, 6, and § 203, 5. , . , , . The grammatical subject is jnnus, the pine; this is modified by i7igens, great, § 201, 2, § 202, 2, and §*202, 6,H3.) The gi-amraatical- predicate is dgitdtur, is shaken; this is modified by two independent modifiers, scevius, more violently, and ventis, by the winds, § 203 U. 3 Kern., § 203, I. 1, (2), and (3.) Parsing . Plnus is a common noun, § 26, 1 and 3; of the 2d and 4th de- clensions, §"88 and § 99; feminine gender, ^ 29, 2; 3d person, § 35, 2; from the root pln^, § 40, 10; (decline it both in the 2d and 4th declensions); — it is found hi the singular number, § 35, 1, and the nominative case, the subject of dgttd- iur, § 209° (a.) Ingens is a qualifying adjective of quantity, § 104, 4, and § 205, N. 1; of the 3d decl., § 105, 1, and § 38; of one termination, § 108, and § 111; from the root ingeni-, § 40, 10; (dechne it like iirmsens, § 111, but with only i in the ablative, ^ 113, Exc. 3,) ; — it is found in the singular number, feminine gender, ^ 26, R. 4; and nominative case, agreeing with its noun plnus, \ 205. Agitdlur is an active frequentative verb, § 141, I., and ^ 187, 11. 1; of the 1st conjugation, § 149, 2; from the first root of its primitive dgo, § 187, II. 1, {b.); inume 'its°principal parts m both voices, see § 151, 4; and give the conjuga- tion of the passive voice, indicative mood, present tense, see §156,); — it is found in the singular number, §146; thhd person, § 147; agreeing with its subject-nominative ^nmis, § 209, (6.) ioBvius is a derivative adverb of manner, § 190, 2-4; in the comparative de- gree from the positive sceve or smviter, which is derived from the adjective scevus, § 194, 1 and 2, and § 192, II. 1, and Exc. 1 and 2; modifying the verb dgitdtur, by expressing its degree, § 277. Ventis is a common noun, § 26, 1 and 3 ; of the 2d declension, § 38 ; masculine gender, § 46; from the root vent-, § 40, 10; (decline it); — it is found in the plural number, § 35, 1; ablative case, modifying dgitdtur by denoting its means OT instrument, § 247. 3. Mtthriddtes, duarum et viginti gentium rex, totXdem Unguis jura dixit, Mithridates, king of twenty-two nations, pronounced judicial decisions in as many languages. Plin. Analysis. This also is a simple sentence; its subject is Mitlirlddtes, dua- rum et viginti gentium rex, its predicate is tMidem Unguis jura dixit, both oi which are complex, § 201, 10, § 202, 6, and § 203, "5. § 281. SYNTAX. ANALYSIS AND PARSING. 313 The graiumatical subject is Mithrtddtes; this is modified directly by rea § 202, I. (1.) Rex is limited by gentium, § 202, 1. 1, (2.) Gentium is limited by the compound addition dudrum and viginti con].ec<.etl CoOrdinately by et, § 202, III. 3. The gi-ammatical predicate ^s dixit ; this is limited by jUra and Unguis, the former a simple, the latter a complex addition, as it is modified by totidem §203,1. 1, (2.)andn. 1. Parsing. il/iVAnrfa^es is a proper noun, § 26, 2 ; of the third declension, § 38; m.iisculine gender, § 28, 1; fi-om the root Mithridat-, §40, 10; genitive Milhrkh'dis, § 73, 1; (decline it in the singular number only, § 95, (a.); — it is found in the nomLnative case, the subject of dmi, § 209, (a.) Bex is a common noun — third declension, § 38; masculine gender, § 28, 1; from the root reg-, § 40, 10; genitive regis, § 78, 2; (decline it); — it is found in the singular number — the nominative case, in apposition to MUhnd&tes, § 204. Gentium is a common noun from gens — third declension — feminine gender, § 62; from the root gent-, § 56, I, R. 1 ; genitive gentis, § 77, 2 and (2.); (de- cline it); — it is found in the plural nximber — genitive case, § 83, II. 3; limitiag rex subjectively, § 211 and R. 2. Dudrum is a numeral adjective, § 104, 5; of the cardinal kind, § 117; from dua, duce, duo ; from the root dti^ ; (decline it, § 118, 1,); — it is found in the plural number, § 118, 2; feminine gender, genitive case, § 26, R. 4; agreeing with its noun gentium, § 205. £i is a copulative conjunction, § 198, 1, connecting dunrum and Viginti, § 278. Viginti is fL n\vcae,ra\ adjective of the cardinal kind, indeclinable, §118,1; limiting gentium, § 205. Dixit is an active verb, § 141, I.; of the third conjugation, § 149, 2; from dlco, (give the principal parts in the active voice, and its first, second, and third roots, § 150, 4, and § 171, 1;) it is fonned from the second root dix-, (give the formations of the second root); — it is found in the active voice, § 141, 1; indicative mood, § 143, 1 ; pgrfect indefinite tense, § 145, IV. and Rem. ; sin- gular number, third person, agreeing with Mithriddtes, § 209, {b.) Jura is a common noun, of the third declension, from jus, root JUr-, § 56, I. R. 1 . genitive juris, § 76, Exc. 3 ; neuter gender, § 66 ; (decline it) ; — it is found lin the plural number, accusative case, § 40, 8; the object of dixit, § 229. Linguis is a common noun, of the first declension, feminine gender, from lingua root lingu-, (declmeit); — found in the plm-al number, ablative case, after dixit. § 247. Totidem is a demonstrative pronominal adjective, § 139,5, (2.) and (3.); in- declinable, § 115, 4; it is in the ablative nlural, feminine gender, limiting Un- guis, § 205. 4. Pamdnvas, quum semiammis de templo eldtus esset, confestim ant- mam effldvit. Nep. Paus. 4. Analysis. This is a complex sentence, § 201, 11 ; consisting of two mem- oers, which are so arranged as to constitute a period, § 280, 1. The principal proposition is, Pamdnias confestim dnimam effldvit, § 201, 5. The subordmate proposition is, quum (is) semidnimis de templo clutm esset. \ 201, 6. y X- -, The leading proposition has a simple subject, Pausdnias, § 2Q2, 2, and a complex predicate, confestim anlmam effldvit, § 203, 3 ; La which effldvit is the rammatical predicate. § 203, 2 ; which is modified by confestim and anlmum, 203, 1. 1, (2.) and (3.), and II. R. 2., and also by the adverbial clause quum semidnimis, etc. § 201, 6 and 7, and § 203, 1. 3. The subordinate proposition, which is connected to the leading clause by the subordinate conjunction quum, § 201, 9, has a simple subject, viz. is under- stood, and a complex predicate, semidnimis, de templo ildtus esset, § 203, 3.— The grammatical predicate is eldtus esset, § 203, 2 ; which is modified by sennA- nimis, <, 203, 1. 1, (1.), and de templo, § 203, 1. 2, and II. Rem. 2. 316 SYNTAX. ANALYSIS AND PARSING. §281 Parsing. Pausanias, a Greek proper noun, § 26, 2;— 1st decl., §\ 41 and 44; masc. gender, § 28, 1; root Pausanv- ; found in sing, num., nom. case, tlw Buh]ect or effldvif, ^ 209, (a.) Cunftstim, an adv. of time § 190, 3; limiting efflamt, § 2/7. Anlmam is a com. noun of 1st decl., fem. gender, ^ 41; from awwrea, root aniin-; (decline it);— it is found in the sing, num., ace. case, the object of ekdmt, \ 229. ^ , „ , .r<, ^ Efflavit, an act. verb, 1st conj., from efflo, comporjided of ex and Jto, ^ 196, 6; (cive he principal parts in the act. voice and the three roots); — it is formed from the second root; (give the formations of that root); in the active voice ind. mood, perfect indehuite tense, sfng. num., 3d pers., agreeing with PautA- nias, ^ 209, \h.) , ^ j .. ^ ^, Quum is a temporal conjunction, § 198, 10; connecting the dependent to the principal clause, § 278. _ . i ,„„ SPviidnimis is a predicate adj., of the 3d decl., of two termmations, § 109; (decline it);— it is in the sing, num., masc. gend., nom. case, agreemg with u understood, ^ 210, K. 1, (a.) , , De is a preposition, expressing the relation between eldtus esset and templo, Templo is a com. noun, 2d decl., neut. gend., from templum, root tempi-; (de- cline it);— in the sins;, num., abl. case, after cfe, § 241. Elatus esset is an irregular active verb, of the third conjugation, § 179 ; from effcro, compounded of ex and fero, ^ 196, 6; (see f&ro and compounds, § 172); (2;ive the principal parts in both voices, and the 1st and 3d roots); — it is formed from the third root, ildt-, (give the formations of that root in the passive voice)-, in the subjunctive mood, pluperfect tense, § 145, V.; sing, num., third person, agreeing with is understood referring to Pausanias, ^ 209, (b.) 5. Romana pubes, sedato tandem pavore, postquam ex tarn turbido die aerena et tranquilla lux rediit, ubi vcicuam sedem regiam vidit, etsi satis credebat patribus, qui proximi steterant, subllmem raptuvi pro- cella ; tamen, velut orbitatis metu icta, moestum aliquamdiu silentium obtinuit. Liv. 1, 16. Analysis. This is a complex sentence, whose clauses constitute a period, ^ 280. It is composed of the following members or clauses : — 1. Romana pubes [tamen] mmsttim aliquamdiu silentium obtinuit. This is the eading clause. The following are dependent clauses. 2. velut orbitatis metu icta, 3. sedato tandem pavore, 4. postquam ex tarn turbido die serena et tranquilla lux rSdiit, 5. ubi vacuum sedem regiam vidit, 6. etsi satis credebat patribus, 7. qui proximi steterant, 8. sublimem raptum pr^elld. Note 1. In the preceding clauses the predicates are printed in Italics. Note 2. The connective of the 1st clause, is the adversative tamen, which 'n inserted on account of eUi intervening between the principal subject and predicate. The connective of the 2d clause is velut, of the 4th postquam, of the 5th ubi, of the 6th etsi, followed by a clause constituting the protasis, and of the 7th qui. The 3d and 8th clauses have no connectives. (1.) The gi-ammatical subject of the leading clause is pObes, which is limited by Romana. — The grammatical predicate is obtinuit, which is limited by dli- qunmdiu and silentium, and also either directly or mdurectly by all the depend- ent clauses. Silentium is itself modified by mcestum. The second, third, fourth, fifth, and sixth clauses are used adverbially to denote the time and other cu-cumstances modifying the principal predicate silentium obtinuit, ^ 201, 7. S 281. SYNTAX. — ANALYSIS AND PARSING. 3l1 (2.) The second is a participial clause, equivalent to vllut (ea soil, pubet , triitdtis meiu icta esset, ^ 274, 3, (a.) (3.) The third clause is also participial, and is equivalent to quum tandem pdvor scdciius esset, § 257, R. 1 ; and hence pdvore represents the subject, and sedato tandem the predicate — the former being simple, the latter complex. (4.) The grammatical subject of the 4th clause, which is connected to the leading clause by postquam, § 201, 9, is lux, which is modified by serena and iranquilla. — The gi-ammatical predicate is rediit, which is modified "bv postquam and ex tarn turbido die, § 203, I. 1, (3.), and II. 1. (5.) The grammatical subject of the fifth clause is ea understood. — The grammatical predicate is vldit, which is modified by ubi and vdcuam slckm regiam, § 203, I. 1, (3.) and II. 1. (6.) The grammatical subject of the sixth clause also is ea. Its grammati- cal predicate is credcbat, which is modified by satis and patribius, ^ 203, I. (2.) and (3.), and by the 8th clause, II. 3. (7.) The grammatical subject of the seventh clause is qui. Its grammatical predicate is steierant, which is modified by proxlmi, § 203, I. (1.) It is an ad- jective clause, modifying patribiis, § 201, 7 and 9. (8.) The grammatical subject of the eighth clause, which has no connective, ^ 201, Rem., is euin, i. e. Romulum, understood. Its grammatical predicate is raptum (esse), which is modified by subllmem and prdcelld. Parsing. Romana is a patrial adjective, § 104, 10, derived from Roma^ §128, 6, (a.) and (e.); of the 1st and 2d declensions, § 105, 2; fem. gender, sing, number, nom. case, agreeing with pubes, § 205. Pubes, a collective noun, § 26, 4; 3d dec!., fem. gender, § 62; from the roof pub-, 4 56, I. R. 6; genitive ^juifs, ^ 73, 1; (decline it); — found in the nom. sing., the subject of oblinuit, ^ 209, (a.) Tdmen, an adversative conjunction, ^ 198, 9, relating to etsi in the 6th clause. Mastum, a qualifying adj., § 205, N. 1; of the 1st and 2d declensions, neut gender, sin^;. num., ace. case, agreeing with siltntium. Aliquamdiu, an adverb of time, § 191, II.; compounded of dliquis and diu § 193, 6; and limiting obtimdi, ^ 277. Silentium, a com. noun, 2d decl., neut. gender, § 46; sing, number, ace. case the object of obtlnuit, § 229. Obtinuit, an active verb, of the 2d conj., § 149, 2; from obtineo, compounded of ob and teneo, see § 168; (give the principal parts in the act. voice, and the formations of the 2d root, § 157 at the end); — found in the active voice, ind. mood, perf. indef. tense, sing, num., 3d person, agreeing with pubes, § 209, (6.) Velut for velut si, an adverb, compounded of vel and iit, §193, 10; modifying icta, and obUnuisset understood, (as they would have done if, etc.) Orbitdtis, an abstract noun, § 26, 5; from the primitive orbus, § 101, 1 and 2; 8d decl., fem. gender, § 62; from the root orbltdt-, § 56, I., and R.. 1; (decline it); — found in the sing, num., subjective gen. case, limiting m&lu, { 211. Metu, im abstract noun, 4th decl., masc. gen., § 87 ; sing, num., abl. case, S 247. Icta, a perf. part, pass., from the active verb ico, of the 3d conj. (give the principal parts in both voices, and decline the participle) ; — found in the fiem. gen., sing, num., nom. case, agreeing with pubes, § 205. Seddto, a perfect pass. part, from the active verb sedo, of the 1st conj., § 149, 2; (give the principal parts in both voices, § 151, 4; and decline it, § 105j R. 2.); — found in the masc. gender, sing, num., abl. case, agi'eeing with ^w- vore, § 205. Tniulem, an adverb of time, § 191, 11.; modifying serfato, § 277. Pdvore, an abstract noun, § 26, 5, and § 102, 1; (from pdveo), 3d decl., masc. gen., § 58; root ^di'or, § 56, II., and § 70, (decUne it); — found in tiie sing, number, abl. case, absolute with seddto, § 257. Postquam, an adverb of time, compoyjaded of post and quam, § 193, 10; mod< ifying rediit, and connecting the 1st and 4th clauses, § 201, 9. Ex, a preposition, § 195, K. 2. Tarn, an adverb of degi-ee, ^ 191, R 2; modifying turbido, \ 277. POKi- 318 STKTAX. — ANALYSIS 4.ND PARSING. § 281 TurMdo, an adjective, agreeing with cSe. Die, a common noun, 5th decl., masc. gender, ^ 90, Exc. 1. ; sing, n nmber abl. case, after the prep, ex, § 241. Serena, an adj., 1st and 2d decls., fem. gen., sing, niun., nom. case, agreeing with ItLx, § 205. Et, a copulative conjunction, § 198, 1; connecting serena and tranquilla, § 278. Tranquilla, like serena. Lux, a common noun, 3d decl., fem. gen., § 62 ; from the root lHo-, § 56, 1., and R. 2; genitive lucis, § 78, 2. Rediit, an irregular neuter verb, of the 4th conj., § 176; from rerfeo, com- pounded of eo, § 182, and the inseparable prep, red, § 196, (6.), 3; (give its priu- sipai parts); — found in the ind. mood., perf. indef. tense, sing, num., 3d pers., igreeing with lux, § 209, (6.) Ubi, an adverb of time, and like postquam, a connective, § 201, 9 ; and modi- fying vidit, § 277. Vdcuam, an adj., qualifying sedem. Sedem, a common noun, 3d decl., fem. gen., § 62; from the root sed-, § 56, 1., R. 6; genitive sedis, § 73, 1; (decline it); — found in the sing, num., ace. case, the object of the transitive verb vidit, § 229. Recjiam, a denominative adj., § 128, I., 2, (a.); from the primitive rex, agree- ing with sedem. F2t?ii, an active verb, of the 2d conj., (give its principal parts in the active voice, and the formations of the 2d root); found in the active voice, ind. mood, perf. indef. tense, sing, num., 3d pers., agi'eeing with ea, i. e. pubes, under- stood. Etsi, a concessive conjunction, ^ 198, 4; corresponding to the correlativu ad- versative conj. tdmen, § 198, 4, R. and 9. Satis, an adverb of degree, § 191, III., and R. 2; modifying credebat, ^ 27.'. Credebat, an act. verb, § 141,1.; 3d conj., (give the prmcipal parts in the active voice and the formations of the 1st root) ; — found in the act. voice, ind. mood, imperfect tense, suig. num., 3d person, agreemg with ea, scD. pubes, understood. Patribus, a common noun, § 26, 3; 3d decl., from the root pair-, § 56, U., E. 3 ; gen. patris, § 71 ; masc. gender, § 28, 1 ; plur. num., dat. case, depending on credebat, ^ 223, R. 2. Qui, the subject of the 7th clause, is a relative pronoun, § 136; masc. gender, plur. num., agreeing with its antecedent ^aJn'^MS, § 206, R. 19, (a.); and is nominative to stetcrant, § 209, (a.) Proxlmi, an adj. of the superlative degree, § 126, 1, (compare it); of the Ist and 2d decls., masc. gen., plur. num., nom. case, agreeing with qui, §205, §210, K. 1, (a.) andR. 3, (2.) /S, of de and fero ; Adoro, of ad and oro. So dbdrior, dmdveo, circumSo, cdmedo, enllor, produco, subomo. 2. The change of a vowel or a diphthong in forming the compound does not aher its quantity ; as, concido, from ccido ; concido, from caedo ; erigo, from rego ; recludo, from claudo ; inlquus, from cequus. Exc. 1. A long syllable in the simple word becomes short in the following compounds : — aynitus and cogniius, from noius ; dejero and pejero, from juro ; hddie, from hoc die : nihilum and nihil, from hilum ; causidicus, and other com- pounds ending in dicus, from dlco. Exc. 2. Imbecillus, from bdcilluin, has the second syllable long. The partici- ple ambllus has the penult long.from Uum, but the nouns ambitus and ambitio follow the rule. Exc. 3. Innuba, pronuba, and subnuba, from nwfio, have u short ; but in con- nubium, it is common. Exc. 4. final, in the compounds of do and sto, is common, though long in the simple verbs. § 294, (a.) Note 1. Prepositions of one syllable, which end in a vowel, are long^ (§ 294. {a.); those which end in a single consonant are short (§ 299, 1.) — I'm from trans is long ; as, trddo, trddUco. V.X.C. 5. .'Pro, in the following compouftds, is short :—/)r^d7ms, prdfat-i^ pn'ifecti', prSfestus, prdflciscor, prdfiteoi; prof Agio, prdfugus, procella, prd fimdus, pronepos, prdneptis, and prdtervus. It is common in procuro, projundo propdqo, prvpello, and propmo. — Respecting jorcE in composition before a vowel see ^ 283, II. Exc. 1. Rem. 1. The Greek preposition pro (before) is short; as, prdphcia. In proi- 6gus, propola, and propino, it is common. Rem. 2. The inseparable prepositions di (for dls) and se are long ; as, (iMiico, separo. Res])ecting disertus, see § 284, Exc. 5, 2, N. 1. ^ 286. PROSODY. — QUANTITY — INCREMENT OF NOUNS. 325 Rem. 3. (a) The inseparable preposition re or red is short; as, remitto, rcfero, redanu). {b.) ^e is sometimes lengthened in relifjki, reliquice, religtcus, reperit, retulit, rejMlit, recidit, reducere, where some editors double the consonant following re Cf. § 307, 2. In the impersonal verb refert, re is long, as coming from res. Rem. 4. A ending the former part of a compound word, is long the other vowels are short ; as, mdio, qtidprojHer, trddo, {trans do); nefas, valed'ico, hujuscemddi ; biceps, tii- dens, ommpOtens, significo ; hddie, quanmqufdem, jjhildsophus ; ducenti, lOcuples, Irojujena; PolydOrus, Eurypylus, ThrusybUlvs. Exc. 1. A. A is sjort in quasi, eddem, when not an ablative, and in some Greek compounds; as, cutCipuIla, liexdmeter. Exc. 2. E. E is long in credo, nemo, nequam, nequaqiiam, nequidquam, tie qtns, rit-qnllid ; mcmet, mccum, tecuvi, secum, sese, vecoi's, vesdnus, veneficus, and tidilicet; — also in words compounded with se for sex or semi; as, sedecim,' semestris, semddius ; biit in selibra it is fomid short in Martial. Note 2. (a.) The first e in videlicet, as in vide, is sometimes made short. See ^ 295, Exc. 3. (6.) E is common in some verbs compounded with facio; as, liquefdcio, patefdcio, rdrefdcio, tdbefdcio, tepe/dcio. Exc. 3. 1 . (1.) / is long in those compounds in which the first part is de- clined, (^296;) as, quidam, quivis, quilibet, quanilvis, quanticumque, tantidem, unlcmque, eidem, reqmbliae, utrlque. (2.) / is also long in those compounds which maybe separated without al- terirg the sense, (§296;) as, lOdimdgister, slquis, agricultura. (8.) /, ending the former part of a compound word, is sometimes made long by I ontraction; as, fibUen for tlbiicen, from tibia and cdno. See § 283, III. (4.) /is long in b'lgce, quadrlgce, tllcet, scilicet. (5.) In idem, when masculine, i is long; but when neuter, it is short. The i ofuiique and utrdblque, the second in Ibidem, and the first in nimlrum, are long. In abtcumque, as in ubi, i is common. (6.) Compounds o{ dies have the final i of the former part long; as, bUluutn, triduum, mer'idies, qiMldie, quotididnus, piridie, postrldie. Note 3. In Greek words, i, ending the former part of a compound, is short ; as, Odlivuichus ; unless it comes from the diphthong ei (u), or is made long or common by position. Exc. 4. O. (1.) In compounds, the final o of com^7-o, iniro, refro, and ywan^fc .except qitniuldquidem,) is long; as, controversia, introduco, retrocedo, quandoque. is long also in ulioqui (-quin), and ulroque. (2.) i& long in the compounds of ^uo and eo; as, qmm6do, quocmnque, qud- nim, quolibet, qvominus, quocirca, quovis, quoque (i. e. et quo) ; eddem,, erne ; but m the conjunction quoque, it is short. (3.) Greek words which are written with an omega (») have the o long; as, gvometra, Minotaurus, Idgojnis. Exc. 5 U. C^is long in Jupiter {Jdvls pater), and jUdico (jus dico). III. INCREMENT OF NOUNS. § 2^G. 1. A noun is said to increase, when, in any ot its cases, it has more syllables than in the nominative singular; as, pax, pads; sermo, .ferrnonis. The number of increments in any case of a noun ia equal to fha.* of its additional syllables. 326 PROSODY. QUANTITY INCREMENT OF NOUNS. § ^87 2. Nouns in general have but one increment in the singular, Ini iter, supellex, compounds of caput ending in ps, and sometimes /&-.«', have two increments ; as, iter, i-tirir-e-ris ; supellex, su-pel-lec-ti-Us ; anceps, an-cip-i-iis ; jecur, je-:i^ 5-ris. Kemark. The double increase of iter, etc., in the singular number arises from their coming from obsolete uomLnatives, containing a syllable more thaij those now in use ; as, liiner, etc. 3. The dative and ablative plural of the third declension have one increment more than the genitive singular ; as, rex, Gen. re-gis, D. and Ab. reg-i-hus. sermo, ser-mo-nis, ser-nion-l-bus. iter, i-tiiir-e-ris, it-i-ner-i-bus. 4. The last syllable of a word is never considered as the incre- ment. K a word has but one increment, it is the penult ; if two, the antepenult is called the first, and the penult the second ; and if three, the syllable before the antepenult is called the first, the antepenult the second, and the penult the third increment ; as, 1 12 12123 ser-mo, ser-mo-nis, ser-mdn-i-bws ; i-ter, i-tln-e-ris, U-i-ner-i-^us. 5. In the third declension, the quantity of the first increment is the same in all tlie other cases as in the genitive singular ; as, sermonis, sermdnl, sermonem, sermone, sermones, sernwnum, sermonibus. Bdbus, or bubus, from bos, bdvis, is lengthened by contraction from bdvibzis. Note. As adjectives and participles are declined hke nouns, the same rules of increment apply to all of them ; and so also to pronouns. INCREMENTS OF THE SINGULAR NUMBER. OP THE FIRST, FOURTH, AND FIFTH DECLENSIONS. § 287. 1. When nouns of the first, fourth, and fifth declensions in- crease in the singular number, the increment consists of a vowel before the final vowel, and its quantity is determined by the fli-st general rule with its ex- ceptions, § 283, 1. Thus, aura, gen. aurai, § 283, 1. Exc. 3, (a.): fructus, dat. fructHi, § 283, I. (o.): dies, gen. diei, § 283, I. Exc. 2, (a.) INCREMENTS OP THE SECOND DECLENSION. 2. The increments of the second declension in the singular number are short ; as, giner, geniri; sdtur, sdturi ; tener, teneri ; vir,viri. Thus, Ne, pugri, ne tanta Snimis assuescite bella. Virg. A. 6, 838. Monstra sinuntj gSniros externis all ore ab oris. Id. A. 7, 270. Exc. The increment of Iber and Celtiber is long. For that of genitives in ins see ^ 283, Exc. 4. ?287. PROSODY. QUANTITY INCREMENT OF NOUNS. 82V INCREMENTS OF THE THIRD DECLENSION. 3. The increments of the third declension and singular numi' ber in a and o are long ; those in e, i, u, and y, are short ; as, animal, animalis ; audax, avdacis; strmo, sermonis ; ferox, ferbcis ; 6pui^ ftpiris; celer, celeris; miles, militis; supplex, supplicis ; mminur, murmuris, aux,ducis; chldmys, chlamydis ; Styx, Sty y is. Thus, PronSque cum spectent anhnSlin cetera terram. Ovid. M. 1, 84. HsBC turn multipllci populos sermone replebat. Yirs;. A. 4, 189. Incumbent generis lapsi sarcire ruTnas. Id. Q. 4, 249. Qualem virgineo demessum pollice florem. Id. A. 11, 68. Adsplce, ventosi ceclderunt murmUris aurse. Id. E. 9, 58. Exceptions in Increments in A. 1. (a.) Masculines in al and ar (except Car and Na7-) increase short ; as, Aimibal, Annlhulis ; Amilcar, Amilcdris. {h.) Par and its compounds, and the followmg — anas, mas, vas (vadis), bac- car, hepar, jObar, lar, nectar, and sal — also increase short. 2. A, in the increment of nouns in s with a consonant before it, is abort; as, daps, dap is ; Arabs, Ardbis. 3. Greek nouns in a and as (adis, anis, or dtis) increase short ; as, lampas, lampddis ; Melas, Meldnis , poema, poemdtis. 4. The following in ax increase short: — dbax, anthrax, ArctHphylax, Atax^ Atrax, climax, cdlax, cdrax, and nycticdrax, dropax, fax, harpax, panax, smilax, and stpi'ox. — The increment of Syphax is doubtful. Exceptions in Increments in O. 1. 0, in the increment of neuter nouns, is short; as, marmor, marmdns ; corpus, corpdris ; ebur,eb6ris. But os (the mouth), and the neuter of comparatives, like their masculine and feminine, increase long. The increment of a.d»r is common. 2. is short in the increment of Greek nouns in o or on, which, in the obUque cases, have omicron, but long in those which have omega; as, Aedon, Aeddnis ; Aadmemnon, Agdmemndnis : — Plato, Pldtonis ; Sinon, Sinbnis ; Sicyon, Slcyonis. S'ldon, Orion, and uEgceon, have the increment common. 3. (a.) In the increment of gentile nouns in o or on, whether Greek or barbaric, o is generally short ; as, Macedo, Muced6nis. So, Amazones, Adncs, Myrmiddnes, Santones, Saxdnes, Sendnes, Teutones, etc. (6.) But the following have o long: — Eburones, Lacones, Idnes-, Nasamoiies, Suessones (or -iones), Veitones, Burgundimes. Britones has the o common. 4. Greek nouns in or increase short ; as. Hector, Hector is ; rhetor, rTietoris ; Agenor, Agenoris. 5. Compounds of pus, (tolIc), as tripus, polypus, (Edipus, and also arbor, tnemor, bos, compos, impos, and lepus, increase short. 6. 0, in the increment of nouns in s with a consonant before it, is ihort; as, 328 PROSODY. QUANTITY INCREMENT OF NOLNS. § 288, scrobs, scrdbis ; inops, Indpis ; DdBpes. But it is long in the increment ol eercops, Cyclops, and hydrops. 1. The increment of Allobrox, Cappadbx, and pi-iecox, is also short. Exceptions in Increments in E. 1. Nouns in en, enis (except Hymen), lengthen their increment as, Siren, Sirenis. So, Anienis, Nerienis, from Anio and Nerio, oi rather from the obsolete Anien and Nerienes. 2. Hmres, Idciiphs, mansues, merces, and quies—alao Iber, ver, lex, rex, alec at dlex (hal-) narthex and vervex—plebs and se^js— increase long. 3. Greek nouns m es and er (except aiir and (Ether) increase long ; as, may lies, magnetis ; crater, crateris. Exceptions in Increments in I. 1. Nouns and adjectives in ix, increase long; as, victrix, victrlcis felL' fellcis. Exc. Calix, Cilix, coxendix, filix, fornix, hystrix, Idrix, nix, pix, salix, strix and rarely sandix or sandyx, increase short. 2. Vibex and the following nouns in is increase long:— dis, glis, lis, vi$, Ne- sts, Quirts, and Samnis. The increment of Psophis is common. 3. Greek nouns, whose genitive is in wits increase long ; as, del- phin, delphlnis ; Sald^nls, Sdldmlnis. Exceptions in Increments in U. 1. Genitives in udls, uris, and utis, from nominatives in ms, hav« *Jie penult long; as, palus, pdladis ; iellus, ielluns; virtus, virtUtis. But intercus, Ltgus and picus pecudis, increase short. 2. Fur, frux, (obs.), lux, and PoUux, increase long. Exceptions in Increments in Y. 1. Greek nouns whose genitive is in ynis, increase long; as, Tra- cTiyn, Trdchynis. 2. The increment of bmnbyx, Cei/x, gryps, and mormyr, is long ; that of Be- brvx and sandyx is common. INCREMENTS OF THE PLURAL NUMBER. § S88. 1. A noun in the plural number is said to increase, when, in any case, it has more syllables than in the ablative singular. Remakk. When the ablative singular is wanting," or its place is supplied by a form derived from a different root, an ablative may, for this purpose, be aa- Bumed by annexing the proper termination to the root of the plural. 2. When a noim increases in the plural number, its penult is called thpt Ddcus, merdcus, dpdctis; dmicus, apncus, Jlcus, mendicus, plcus, posticus, pudicus, spicus, unrnllctis, vicus. 2. Words ending in abrum, ubrum, acrum, and atrum, lengthen the penult; as, candeldhinim, del^yrum, Idvdcrum, verdtrum. 3. Nouns in ca lengthen the penult ; as, apdtlieca, clodca, lactuca, lorica, phoca. Except dlica, bvassica, dica, fuUca, mantica, pedica, pertica, scStica, phdldrtca, tunica, vomica ; and also some nouns in ica derived from adjectives in icus; as, fabiica, grammdtica, etc. So mdniccB. 4. PatronjTuics in ades and ides shorten the penult; as, Atlantiddes, Pridniides. F.xcept those in ides which are formed from nouns in eus or es («f } ; as, Atride^, from Atreus ; Neoclldes, from Neocles ; except, also, Amphidrdides, Belides, Amyclides, Lycurgldes. 5. PatronjTiiics and similar words in ais, eis, and ois, lengthen the penult; as, Achais, Chryseis, Mlnois. Except Phocdis and Thebdis. The penult of Ne- reis is common. 6. Words in do lengthen the penult ; as, vddo, cedo, dulcedo, formldo, rodo, testudo. Except cddo, divldo, edo (to eat), comedo, Macedo, mddo, sdlido, spado, trepido. Rudo is common. 7. Words in idus shorten the penult ; those in udus lengthen it ; as, callidus, herbldus, limpidus, Uvidus, perfidus ; crUdits, l&dm, nudus, sOdus, udus. Except Idus, /idus, infldus, nidus, sidus. 8. Nouns in ga and go lengthen the penult ; as, saga, colb'ga, auriga, rUga; Imago, cdligo, aerugo. Except cdliga, ossifrdga tdga, pldga, (a region, or a net), fuga and its compounds, stega, ecldga, igo, harpdgo, ligo. 9. Words in le, les, and lis, lengthen the penult ; as, criruile, mantele, ancile ; dies, miles, proles ; anndlis, crudelis, clvilis, curulis. — Except male; — verbals in His and bills; as, dgilis, dmubilis ; — adjectives in tttilis; as, umbrdiilis, ; — and also, indoles, subdks ; periscelis, dapsihs, grdcilii, iHmilis, pdnlis, similis, sterilis, mUgilis, strigilis. 10. Words in elus, ela, elum, lengthen the penult; as, phdeelus, querela, prelum. Except gelus, gelum, scilus. 11. Diminutives in oltis, ola, OMin, ulus, ula, ulum, also words ia 332 PROSODY. — QUANTITY — PENULTS. § 291 Uus, and those in ulus, ula, and iilum, of more than two syllables, shorten the penult ; as, urcedlus, fllidla, lectulus, rdtiuncula, corculum, pabulum; ruHhis, garriilua, fabula. Except dsilus. 12. Words in ma lengthen the penult; as, fdma, poema, rlma, pluma. Except anima, cd?na, decuma, lacrtma, victima, bama. 13. A vowel before final men or mentum is long ; as, levdmen, gi-dmen, crimen, flumen, jumentum, atramentum. Except tamen, c6- l&men, Hymen, elementum, and a few verbal nouns derived from verbs of the second and third conjugations; &,?,, alimentum, ddcumen or ddcumentum, erri^lH- mentum, mdnumentum, regimen, specimen, iegimen, etc. 14. Words ending in imus shorten the penult ; as, Animus, decimus, flnitlmus, fortissimus, maxlmus. Except h'lmus, limus, mimm Op'imus, quddrlmus, s'lmus, irimus, and two superlatives, Imus and pnmus. Note. When an adjective ends in umus for imus, the quantity remains the same ; as, decumus, optumus, maxumus, for decimus, etc. 15. A, e, 0, and u, before final mus and mum, are long ; as, ramus, remus, extrcmus, promus, dumus, pOmum, v6levium. Except atdmug, hdlsamum, cinndmum, ddmus, glomus, Mmiis, postumus, ihdUmus, tdmus, calamus, nemus. 16. (a.) Words in na,ne, ni, and nis, lengthen the penult; as, Idna, arena, carina, mdtrona, lima, mane, septeni, octoni, indnis, finis, immUnis. Except advena, cottdna, ptisana, mina, gena, bene, sine, cdnis, cinis, juvenis ; and the following in iwa, — buccina, ddmina, Jiscina, f cmina, fuscina, lamina, mdcldna, pdgina, patina, sarclna, tib'icina, trUlna : and in pliu'. dpAiUB, mina, nundina So compounds of ^-CTw; iis, indi gena. (b.) Verbs in i7io and inor shorten the penult; as, desttno, fascino, inquino, sino, criminpr. Except festlno, proplno, sagino, 6pi- nm; and the compounds of clino ; as, inclina, etc. 17. (a.) Adjectives in inus, when they express time, or indicate a material or an inanimate substance, shorten the penult ; as, crastinus, diHtinus, prisilnus, perendinus : fdcj^inus, crdcinus, hydcinihinus, add- mantinus, crystalllnus, dledginus, bombycinus. Except mdtutlnus, repentinus, ves- pertinus. (b.) Other adjectivea and words in inus and in inum lengthen the penult; as, caninus, binus, peregrinus, mdrinus, clandestinus, supinus: linum. Except fkinus, dslnus, cocclnus, cominus, eminus, cdpMnus, ddminus, facinns, fdticinus, proiinus, sinus, terminus, geminus, circinus, minus, vdticinus, succinum, fascinum. 18. A, e, 0, and u, before final nus and num, are long; as, urbdnus, serenus, patronus, pronus, munus, tribunus, fdnum, venenum, donum. Except anus, an old woman, galbdnus, mdnus, ocednus, pldtdnus, ebeiius, genus, limigenus, penus, tenus, Venn's, onus, bdnus, sdnus, ihrdnus ; Idgdnum, peuceddr num, pdpdnum, tympanum, abrdionum. 19. Words ending in ha, bo, pa, and po, shorten the penult; as, fdba, j&ba, sylldba ; bibo, cubo, prdbo ; dldpa, Ifqja, scdpha ; crepo, particlpo. Except gleba, scriba, bubo, glubo,_ llbo, nvbo, scribo, sipiw, cepa, rUpa, papa, pupa, ripa, scdpa, stnpa ; capo, repo, stipo. § '^91- PROSODY. QUANTITY PENULTS. 333 20. Words in al, ar, are, and aris, lengthen the penult ; as, tribunal, vect'ir/al : lupdnnr, pulvlnar ; altare, laqueare ; ndris. Except animal mpilnl, cubital, (urdl, jubar, solar, mare, bimaris. Maris, canthm-is, canparis liar IS. t jj . 21. Before final ro or ror, a and e are short; i, o, and «, are lon '^ 334 PROSODY. QUANTITY ANTEPENULTS. § '292, 2^3 30. Words ending in dex, dix, mex, nix, lex, rex, lengthen th« ■enult; as, codtx, judex; lodix, radix; cimex, pumex; junix; ilex; car ex, murex. Except culex, silex, rumex. II. ANTEPENULTS § @0S> 1. /is short in diminutives in iculus and icellus (a, ■jan) whether nouns or adjectives ; as, foUiculm, duldculus, craticula, pellicula, moUicellus. Except words in which tfie preceding vowel is sliort; as, cutlcula, canicula: or in wliich i is long in the primitive; as, cornicula, from cornix, -Ids. 2. Numerals in ginti, ginta, eni, and esimus, lengthen the antepe- nult; as, viginti, quadrdyinta, iriceni, quingudgesimus. 3. and u before final lentus are short; as, viiwlenius, fraudulenius, pulverulentus, truculentus. 4. A vowel before final nea, neo, 7iia, nio, nius, nium, is long ; as, ardnea, linea, cdneo, munia, punio, Fdvonius, patrimdnium. Except casidnea, tinea, mdneo, inineo, monco, seiieo, ieneo, igndminia, luscinia, venia, Idnio, renio, ingi'.numi, genius, senio, senium ; words in cinium, as, lindcinium ; and deriva- tives in onius, when o in the root of the primitive is short ; as, Agdinemndnius, from Agdmemnon, -onis. 5. Words ending in areo, arius,'arium, erium, orius, orium, lengthen the antepenult; as, area, cihdrizis, plantdrvum, dicterium, censorius, tentorium. Except careo, va- riics, desiderium, impenum, rtidgisterium, ministeriuin. 6. Adjectives in atlcus, atilis, lengthen the antepenult ; as, dqudiicus, plumdtilis. Except some Greek words in atlcus ; as, gi^amrndticus 7. / before final ali!i, Eiimelis, Juvenalis, Martiiilis, Phaselis, Stvraphali.s. — '^Bcnacus, Calcus, Granlcus, Nuinicus, Trivlcus. — i^Ophiuchus. — l^^Yijvtiug. — '^■'Ciiphareiis, Ei)i|)eus, Prometlieus, PhorCmeus, Salmoneus, Uileus. — li'Cetho- eus. — itijVawcs in -clus, in -olus {except iEolus, NaubOlus), in -bulus, (except liibfilus) Kumelus, Gaitulus, lulus, Massylus, OrbSlus, Pharsalus, Sardaniipa- liis, Styuiphalus. — ^'i Some in -demus aiia -phemus; as, Academus, Polyplif)- niu.?. — isSeriphus. — '^Alcraena, AtbeniB, Cameiia, Fidena, Messena, MurenSk, Myc-Gua;. — ^"Amasis. — ^'HOraerus. Iberus. — 22A,-atus, Cteratus, Toi'quatus. — "Ht'iaclitus, Herraaphroditus. — 24Uuthrutus. 2. Proper names of more than two syllables, found in the poeta with the following terminations, lengthen the penult : — ana,' sa. nuni,' tas. nus,!''^ urus, etus,'6 ina,- ta,-» turn. des,9 pus, '3 esus,'5 utus. ona,3 ':e,5 or,s tes,io irus. isus. ytus," yna. e)ie,6 nas. tis," orus,i4 ysus. vus. Exceptions. ■ 'iSequana. — 2jiuti,ia, Prosei-piua, Riispina, Sarsina. — ^Axona, Matroiia.- "•Dalmata, Prochyta, Sarmata, LfipJtha. — SGaifitse, Jaxametaj, MassagOtae, Macette, SaiirOiiiataj. — BQiyn^iene, Helene, Melpomene, Nyctimene. — ''Arimi- num, DrC-panuin. — sj^fuy^itor. — yJIiltiades, Pylades, Sotades, Thucydides; i^a- Irunymics in -des, (§ 291, 4,) and jilurals in -ades. — wAntiphates, Cbarites, Eu- rybates, Ichnobates, Euergetes, Massagetes, and all names in -crates. — ^'Der- cetis. — '-Apidamis, Aponus, Cariinus, Chrysogonus, Ciminus, Clymenus, Con- canus, Dardanus, Diadumenus, Earinus, Eildanus, Fucinus, Helenus, Libanus, Morini, Myconiis, Nebrophonus, Olenus, Periclymeuus, Rhodanus, Santonus, Sequani, Stt-]jhanus, TelOgonus, Terminus, and names in -gonus and -xenus. — '3(Ed)pus. — ''ip;-ic5nis^ Bosporus, and names in -chorus and -phorus; as, Stesi- chorus. Phosphorus. — i^EphOsus, Vogesus, Volesus. — isig^petus, Taygetus, Venetus.^— ''?jEi)5'tus, Anytus, Eurytus, Hijjpolytus. 3. The penultimate vowel of the following proper names, and ad- jectives derived from proper names, though followed by a vowel, is long. See § 283, I. Exc. 6. iEntJas, ^thion, Achelous, Achilleus, AlcyoneuF Alexandria, Aloeus, Al- plieus, Amineus, Ainphiaraus, Amphigenia, Ampb^^n, Amythaon, Arion, An- cliiseus, Atlanteus, Antiochia, Bioneus, Gassarea, Ciilaurea, Calliopea, Cassio- pea, Cleantheas, Cydoneus, Cj'raodocea, CytherGa, Darius (-eus), Deidan. la, Didyraaon, Diomedeus, Dolichaon, P^chion, Eleus, Endymioneus, Enyo, Eous, Erebeus, Ei'ectheus, Galatea, Giganteus, Heraclea (-eus), HippOdamia, Hype- rion, Illthyia, Iniaon, lolfius, lj)higeuia, Ixlon, Laodamia, Latous, Lesbous, Lycaou, Miichaon, Mausoleum, Medea, Menelaus, ilethion, Myrtous, Ophion, Orion, Oritliyia, Orpheus, Pallanteum (-us), Pandion, Paphagea, Peneus, Peu- thesllea, Phojbeus, Poppea, Protusilaus, Pyreneus, SardCus, Thalia. Note. Eus in the termination of Greek proper names, is commonly a dipti- thong; as, Alceus, Qeneiis, Orpheus, Peleas, Perseus, Proleus, Theseus, Tydeua, whicn are dissyllables; Bridreus, Enipheus, Macdreus, Typhoeus, which are tri- Byllabies, JdOmentus, etc. Cf. ^ 2^3, Exc. 6, Note 2. But in those which in Greek are written aoc (eios), e«5 torms two syllables; as, Alpheiis. So also in idjectives in eus, whether of Grees. or Latin origin; as, Erebeiit, Erecihel's. Orpheiis; aureus, lii/nHls. 336 PROSODY. QUANTITY OF FINAL SYLLABLES." § 294, 295 QUANTITY OF FINAL SYLLAISLES. I. VOWELS. MONOSYLLABLES. § 304:. (a.) All monosyllables, except enclitics, ending in a vowel, are long ; as, a, ah, da, sta, e, de, me, te, se, ne, re, i, fl, hi, qui, ni, si, or oh, do, prO, pron, qm, sio, iU. POLYSYLLABLES. A JinaL 1. A final, in words declined, is short ; as, musd, templa, capi- ta,, Tyded. Thus, Mfisa mihi causas memora; quo numtne liBso.... Virg. A. 1, 8. Exc. A final is long in the ablative of the first declension, and in the vocative of Greek nouns in as and es ; as, MiJusd, funds, ; ^nea, Palla, Anchisd. 2. A final, in words not declined, is long; as, dmd, friistrd, anted, ergd, intra. Thus, Extra fortQnam est quldquid donatur SLmlciB. Mart. Epig. 5, 42, 7. Exc. ^ final i? short in eirt, iia, 5Mta, and m puts, when used adverbially, in the sense of ' for example.' It is sometimes short in the preposition c&ntra, and in immerals ending in ginta ; as, triginla, etc. In posiea, it is common. A final is also short in the naines of Greek letters; as, alpha, beta, etc., and in taraianiara, the imitated sound of the tnunpet. E JinaL § 295. E final, in words of two or more syllables, is short ; as, ndte, patre, ipse, eurre, regere, nempe, ante. Thus, Tncipl, parvS puer, risu cognoscerS matrem. Virg. E. 4, GO. Remark. The enclitics -que, -ne, -ve, -ce, -te, -pte, etc., as they are not used alone, have e short, according to the rule; as, neque, hiljusce, suapti Of. § 294, {a.) Exc. 1. E final is long in nouns of the first and fifth declensions as, CaUidpe, Tydide, fide. So also in the compounds of re and die ; as, quare, hddie, prldie, jJostridie, qudtldie, and in the ablative fame, originally of the fifth declension. Exc. 2. £■ final is long in Greek vocatives from nouns in -es, of the third declension; as, Achille, Hipp6mene ; and in Greek neuters plural; as, cete, mele pelage, Tempe. Exc. 3. In the second conjugation, e final is long in the second person singjiilar of the imperative active; as, doce, mone ; — but it is Bometini.es short in cave, vale smd vide. § 296-298. PROSODY. — quantity of final stllibles. 337 Exc. 4. E final is long in adverbs formed from adjectives of the pecond declension ; as, placide, pukhre, valde for vdlid^, maxtme; but it is short in 6ewe, maU, ^nfe^ne^ and superm. Fxc. 5. Fere,, ferme, and She, have the final e long. I final. §390. /finalislong; as, domini, fill, classi, doceri, si. Thus, Quid dSmtnl fiicient, audent cum talia ffires. Virg. E. 3, 16. Exc. 1. (a.) /final is common in mihi, tibi, sibi, ibi, and ubi. (b. ) In ub'ique and commonly in ibidem it is long, but in iibivis and ubinam it is short. — (c.) 1\\ nisi, quasi, and cui, y^YLQ-n. a dissyllable, i final is common, but usually short. In utinam and viique, and rarely, also, in iUi, it is short. Exc. 2. /final is short in the dative singular of Greek nouns of the third de- clension, which increase in the genitive ; as, Pallddi, Mlnoidi, T ethyl. Exc. 3. / final is short in the vocative of Greek nouns in -Is ; as, Alean, Daphnl, Pari. But it is long in vocatives from Greek nouns in -is, (ac) -entos ; as, Simoi, Pyrdl. Exc. 4. / final is short in Greek datives and ablatives plural in si, or, be- fore a vowel, -sin ; as, Drycisi, herolsi, Trodsin. O fitial. § 307. final, in words of two or more syllables, is com- mon ; as, virgo, amo, quando. Thus, irgS metu cipita Scylla est Inimica pSlterno. Virg. Cir. 386. Ergo soUicitse tu causa-, pecunia, vltse es ! Prop. 3, 6, 1. Exc. 1. final is long in the dative and ablative singular; as, ddmim, regna^ bono, sud, illo, eo. Exc. 2. final is long in ablatives used as adverbs ; as, certo, falso, mertlo, vulgo, eOj quo ; and also in omnlno, in ergo, ' for the sake of,' and in the inter- jection id. Kemark 1. The final o of verbs is almost always long in poets of the Augus- tan age. Eeji. 2. In poets subsequent to the Augustan age, final o in verbs, in ge- runds, and in the adverbs adeo, idea, ergo, sera, vera, porro, retro, inimo, idcirco, siblto, and postremo, is sometimes short. Exc. 3. final is short in dto, ilUco, prdfecto, and the compounds of mddo ; as, dummddd, postmddd, etc. ; and in 6go and hdrno it is more frequently short than long. Exc. 4. final in Greek nouns written with an omega (•) is long; as, Ctid, Dido, Aiho, and Andrdged, (gen.) TJ final. §398. 1. Z7 final is long; as, vultu, comu. Panthu, dictu, diu. Thus, Vttlta, que caelum tempest^tecqne sSrSnat. Virg. A. 1, 256. 29 338 PROSODY. — QUANTITY OF PINAL SYLLABLES. § 299 Exc. Indu and idmi, ancient fonns of in and non, have u short. C is also short in terminations in us short, when s is removed by elision ; as, CMtentu for ccmtentus. See § 305, 2. Y final. 2. T final is short ; as, Moly, Tiphy. Thus, M5ly vocant supSri : nigra radlce tenetur. Ovid. M. 14, 292. Slia F in the dative Teihy, being formed by contraction, is long. \ 283, 111 11. CONSONANTS. MONOSYLLABLES. § SOO 1. Monosyllabic substan tives ending in a consonant are long ; all other monosyllaI)les ending in a consonant aro short ; as, sol, vlr, fur, jus, splen, ver, far, Idr, Ndr, par, Ser, fur, fas, mas, res, pes, Dis, glls, lis, vis, fids, mos, ros, Tros, 6s, (oris), dos, grus, rus, ius ; — nee, in, dn, ab, pd, quid, quis, qudt, et; as, Ipse docet quid agam. FSs est St ah hoste doceri. Ovid. M. 4, 428. Ver adeo frondi nemorum, ver utile silvis. Vir^. G. 2, 323. Note. The rules for the quantity of final syllables ending in a consonant imply that the consonant is single, and that it is preceded by a single vow Note Final m with the preceding vowel is almost always cut off, wben^ the next word begins with a vowel, bee Ecthlipsis, § 305, 2. M final. iding vowel el. bee Ecth 3. Final syllables ending in 7n, when it is not cut off, are short Qiiam laudas, pluma? cocto num &dest honor Idem. Hot. S. 2, 2, 28. Remark. Hence in composition the final syllables of cum and circum are short; as, c&medo, circ&mago. \ C final. 4. Final syllables ending in c are long ; as, alee, illic, istdc, illuc. Thus, IlRc indocto primum se exercuit area. Tib. 2, 1, 69. Exc. The final syllable of dmiic is short ; as, DSnic £riB felix, multos numerabis Stmlcos. Ovid. Trist. 1, 0, 6. AS, ES, and OS, final. § 300. Final syllables in as, es, and 05, are long ; as, musas, pietas, am/is, ./Eneas, quies, sermones, dies, Peneldpes, duceniies, mdnee, bfiTWS, vivos, ddminds. Thus, Hd.^ autem tirras, Itallque banc lltSris oram. Virg. A. 3, 396. Si modo ties illis cultus, si77iilesqne pSratus. Ovid. M. 6, 454. Exc. 1. (a.) AS. As is short in anas, in Greek nouns whose genitive ends in ddis or ados; as, Areas, Pallas; and in Greek accusatives plural of the third declension ; as, herods, lampddds. {b.) As is short also in Latin nouns in as, ados, formed like Greek patroni'm- ics; as, Appids. Exc. 2. ES. (a.) Final es is short in nouns and adjectives of tTie third declension which increase short in the genitive ; as, ]lo.); as, Athos, gen. Atho ; (3) in genitives singular of the third declension; as, Pallddds, Tethyds, from Pall^ and Tethys. IS, us, and YS, fnal § 301. Final syllables in is, us, and ys, are short ; as, turiis, militis, mitts, dmdtis, amabis, mdgis ; pectus, bdnus, ejus, dmdmus, i'urtA$, (fyiis; Capys, Itys. Thus, Non apis inde tulit collectoa sedula flores. Ovid. M. 13, 928. Serius aut citius sEdem prSpSratnus ad unam. Id. M. 10, 33. At Capys, et quorum melior sententia menti. Virg. A. 2, 35. Exc. 1. IS. (a.) Is is long in plural cases; as, mUsls, nobis ; omnis, urbis, (for omnes, woes); quis, (for quels or quxbus). So also in the adverbs grails, ingrdtis, and fdrls, which are hi reality datives oi ablatives plural. Et liquid! simul ignis; ut kis exordia prlmls.^ Virg. A. 6, 33. Qiils ante ora patrura Trojae sub moenibus altis. Id. A. 1, 95. Non omnls arbusta juvaut, humilesque myrlcae. Id. E. 4, 2. Adde tot egregias urbis, 5perumque laborem. Id. G. 2, 165. (6.) Is is long in the nominative of nouns whose genitive ends in His, Inis, or entis; as, Samnis, Saldmis, Simois. (c.) Is is long in the second person singular of the present indica- tive active of the foui'th conjugation ; as, audis, nescis. So also in the second persons, fis, is, sis, vis, veils, and theii compounds; as, adsls, possis, quamvis, mdlis, noils, etc. Of. § 299, 1, Exc. 3. (d) Ris, in the future perfect and perfect subjunctive, is common; as, videi-is. Exc- 2. US. (a.) Us is long in nouns of the third declension which increase long, and in the genitive singular, and the nominative, ac- cusative, and vocative plural of the fourth declension, (§ 89, Rem., and § 283, III.) ; as, tellus, virtus, incUs ;—fructus. But pdlus, with the us short, occurs in Horace, Art. Poet. 65. (b. ) Us is long in Greek nouns written in the original with the diphthong om (oi}f)whether in the nominative or genitive; as, nom. Amaihus, Ojjus, CEdipOs, tripus, Panihus ; gen. Dldus, Sapphus. But compounds of pus {^ov(), when of the second declension, have us short ; as, polypus. Note. The last syllable of every verse, (except the anapsestic and ihe Ionic a minor c), may be either long or short at the option of the poet. Keiviark. By this is meant, that, although the measure require a long syl- lable, a short one may be used in its stead ; and a long syllable may be used where a short one is required ; as in the following verses, where the short syl- lable ma stands instead of a long one, and the long syllable cu instead of a b1 ort oce: — Sanguineaque manu crepitantia concutit armS. Ovid. M. 1, 148. No- figet Mauri jSiciills. nee arcu. Hor. Od. 1, 22, 2. §302. PROSODY. VERSIFICATION FEET. 341 VERSIFICATION. FEET. § 303. A foot is a combination of two or more syllables of a certain quantity. Feet are either simple or compound. Simple feet consist of two ot three syllables ; compound feet of four. I. SIMPLE FEET. 1. Of two Syllahles. Spondee, two long, ; as, .fundunU Pyrrhic, two short, — ^•, as, , Deus. Vi-ochee, or choree, a long and a short, — ^-^■, as, anna. Iambus, a short and a long, -^ — ; as, erant. 2. Of three Syllahles. Dactyl, a long and two short, — ^^ ~^; as, corpdrd. Anapcest, two short and a long, ^~- ^^ — ; as, ddmini. THbrach, three short, ^ -^ — ; as, fdceH. Mohssiis, three long, ; as, cmtendunt. Amphibrach, a short, a long, and a short, ^-- — w ; as, . .dmdre. Amphimdcrus, or Ci-etic,a, long, a short, and a long, — ^^ — ; as, . .cdstitas. Bacchltts, a short and two long, ^^ ; as, Cdiones. Antibacchius, two long and a short, ^^ ; as, RdmanOt. • II. COMPOUND FEET. Dispondee, a double spondee, Procdeusmatic, a double Pyrrhic, ^_ ^^ ^^ Ditrochee, a double trochee, — -^ — Diinmbus, a double iambus, — ^ — ^- - Greater Ionic, a spondee and a Pyrrhic, — Smaller Ionic, a Pyrrhic and a spondee, -_- Choriamhus, a choree and an iambi;s, — Antispast, an iambus and a choree, >— First epitrit, an iambus and a spondee, ^- Second epitrit,. ..... .a trochee and a spondee, — Third epiint, a spondee and an iambus, — Fourth ejntrit, a spondee and a trochee, — First pceon, a trochee and a Pyrrhic, — Second pceon, an iambus and a Pyrrhic, ^ Third pceon, a Pyrrhic and a trochee, — Fourth pceon, a Pyrrhic and an iambus, ^ — ; as,. ^-' ; as,. -~'i as.. ; as,. conflixerunt, hdminibus. cdmprdbdvit. dmdverdnt. as,. . .correximus. as, . . . jn'dpb'cibdnU as,. . .terrficdnt. as,. . .ddlicBsisse. .amdvrrunt. .conditonls. .disco rdids. . ddduxlstis. .tlmjjdiibus. .pdtcntid. .dnimdtiis. . celeiitas. as,, as,, as,, as,, as,, as,, as,, as,. Remakk. Those feet are called isocnrcnums, which consist of equal times as the spondee, the dactyl, the anapaest, and the proceleusmatic, one long tima being considerec' equal to two short. 39* 342 PROSODY. VERSIFICATION METRE VERSES. § 303. 304 » METRE. § 303. 1. Metre is an arrangement of syllables and feet according to certain rules, 2. In this general sense, it compreiiends either an entire verse, a part of a verse, or any number of verses. 3. Metre is divided into dactylic^ anapcesiic, iambic, trochaic, chori amble, and Ionic. These names are derived from the original oi fncdamental foot employed in each. 4. A metre or measure, in a specific sense, is either a single foot or a combination of two feet. In the dactylic, choriambic, and Ionic metres, a measure consists of one foot ; in the other metres, of two feet. Two feet constituting a measure are sometimes called a syzygy VERSES. § 304:. A verse is a certain number of feet, arranged in a regular order, and constituting a line of poetry. 1. Two verses are called a distich; a half verse, a hemistich. 2. Verses are of different kinds, denominated sometimes, lil^e the diflfprent species of metre, from the foot which chiefly predominatea in them ; as, dactylic, iambic, etc. ; — sometimes from the number of feet or metres which they contain ; as, sendrius, consisting of six feet ; jctondriiis, of eight feet ; manometer, consisting of one measure ; dime- ter, of two ; trimeter, tetrameter, pentameter, hexameter ; — sometimea from a celebrated author who used a particular species ; as, Sapphic Anacreontic, Alcaic, Asclepiadic, Glyconic, Phalcecian, Sotadic, Archi- lochian, Alcmanian, Pherecratic, Aristophanic, etc., from Sajfpho, Ana- creon, Alc(eus, Asclepiddes, Gltjcon, Phalcecus, Sotddes, Archilochus, Alcman, Pherecrdtes, Aristophanes, etc.— and sometimes from the particular uses to which they were applied; as, \hQ prosodiac, from its use in solemn processions, the paroemiac, from its frequent use in proverbs. 3. A verse, with respect to the metres which it contains, may be complete, deficient, or redundant. (1.) A verse which is complete is called acatalectic. (2.) A verse which is deficient, if it wants one syllable at the end, t8 called catalectic ; if it wants a whole foot or half a metre, it ia called brachycatalectic. (3.) A verse which wants a syllable at the beginning, is called acephalous. (4.) A verse which has a redundant syllable or foot, is called hypercatalectic or hypermeter 4. Hence, the complete name of every verse consists of three terms — the first referring to the species, the second to the number of metres^ and the third to the ending ; as, the dactylic trimeter catalectic § 305. PROSODY. VERSIFICATION FIGURES. 348 5. A verse or portion of a verse of any kind (measured from the beji^nning) which contains three half feet, or a foot and a half, ia called a trihemimeris ; if it contains five half feet, or two feet and a half, it is called a pentliennmeris ; if seven half feet, or three feet and a half, a hepthemimeris ; if nine half feet, or four feet and a half, an ennehemimeris. A portion of a verse consisting of one whole metre And a half, is called a heiyiiolius, as being the half of a trimeter. Note. The respective situation of each foot in a verse is called its place. 6. Scanning is the dividing of a verse into the feet of which it ia composed. Remark. In order to scan correctly, it is necessary to know the quantity of each syllable, and also to understand the following poetic usages, which are sometimes called FIGURES OF PROSODY. STNAL(EPHA. § 30S. 1. Synaloepha is the elision of a final vowel or diphthong in scanning, when the following word begins with a vowel. Thus, terra antiqua is read terr' antiqua; Dardcmidce infensi, Barddntd' in- fensi; vento hue, venV hue. So, Quidve mbror? si omnes uno ordine habetis Achiyos. Virg. A. 2, 102. Which is scanned thus — QuidTe moror? s' omnes un' ordin' hSbetis Achivos. (1.) The interjections 0, Aeu, ah, proh, i;£E, vaA, are not elided ; as, O et de Latia, O et de gente Sablna. Ovid. M. 14, 832. Kemark. But 0, though not elided, is sometimes made short; as, Te Corydon O Alexi ; trahit sua quemque voluptas. Virg. E. 2, 65. (2.) Other long vowels and diphthongs sometimes remain unelided, in which rase, when in the thesis of a foot, they are commonly made short; as, Victor Spud rSpidum Simoenta sub IliS alto. Virg. A. 5, 261. Anni tempore eo gut Etesice esse feruntur. Liccr. 6, 717. Ter sunt condtl imponere Peli5 Ossam. Virg. G. 1, 281. Glauco et PdnSpeiz, et Inoo Mellcertae. Id. Q. 1, 436. (3.) Rarely a short vowel, also, remains without elision; as, Et vera incessu patuit rfea. Hie ubi matrem.... FiVg-. A. 1, 405. (4.) Synalcepha in a monosyllable occasionally occurs ; as, Si ad vitulam spectas, nihil est, quod pocula laudes. Virg. E. 8, 48. For synalcepha at the end of a line, see Synapheia, § 307, 3. ECTHLIPSIS. 2. EctJilipsis is the eli.sion of a final m with the preceding pQwel, when the following word begins with a vowel. Thus, cures homlnum, quantum est in rebus Inane! Fen. 1, 1. 844 PROSODY. VERSIFICATION BIGUKES. § 30i Which is thus scanned — curas homin' quant' est in rebus inane. yionstrum hoTrendum, informe, ingens, cui lumen ademptum. Virg. A. 3, 6158. (1.) This elision was sometimes om^cted by the early poets; as, CorpSrum oflScium est qu'Sniam premere omnia deorsum. Lucr. 1, 363. See § 299, 2, (2.) Final s, also, with the preceding vowel, is sometimes elided by th« early poets before a vowel, and sometimes s alone before a consonant; as, con- tend' atque (Emi.), for contentus atgue; omnlbu' rebus. (Lucr.) So, Tum latSralV dolor, certisslmu' nunciu' mortis. Lucil. Remark. This elision took place principally in short syllables. For ecthlipsis at the end of a line, see Synapheia, § 307, 3. SYNiERESIS. § 30G. 1. Synaeresis is the contraction into one syllable of two vowels which are usually pronounced separately. Thus, Aured percussum virga, Ter.siunque venenis. Virg. A. 7, 190. Eosdem hsibuit secum, quibus est elata, caplllos. Prop. 4, 7, 7. Tityre, pascentes a flumine reice capellas. Virg. E. 3, 96. Remark 1. So Phaethon is pronounced Phoeihon ; alveo, alvo ; Orphea, Orpha ; deo7-sum, dorsum. (1.) Synajresis is frequent in m, ildem, iisdem, dii, diis, dein, deinceps, deinde, deest, deerat, deSro, deerii, deesse; as, Praecipltatur iquis, et aquis nox surgit ab tsdem. Ovid. M. 4, 92. Sint Maeoenates; non deerunt, Flacce, Marones. Mart. 8, 56, 5. Rem. 2. Oui and huic are usually monosyllables. (2.) When two vowels in compound words are read as one syllable, the former may rather be considered as elided than as united with the latter; as, e in anteatnbido, anieli'e, aniehac, dehinc, meherciUe, etc., and a in contralre. ■(3.) The syllable formed by the union of i or u followed by another vowel retains the quantity of the latter vowel, whether long or short ; as, dbiete, driUe, abiegiuB., parietibus, consilmm, foriu'dus, Ndsidienus, vindHmidtm', omnid ; genua, tenuis, pituita, flUviorum, etc. In such examples, the i and u are pronounced like initial y and w; as, dbyete, paryetibus, consilyum, fortwUus, Ndsidyenm, omn-yd, ienwis, piiwUa, etc. ; and, like consonants, they have, with another consonant, the power of lengthening a preceding short vowel, as in the above examples. Note. In Statius, the word tenuiore occurs as a trisyllable, in which the three vowels, uio, are united in pronunciation ; thus, ten-wio-re. (4.) Sometimes, after a sjmaloepha or echthlipsis, two vowels suffer synaere- sis ; as, stellio et, pronomiced stell-yet : consilium et, — consil-yet. (5.) If only one of the vowels is written, the contraction is called crcms; as, sK, consili, for dii, consilii. DI^RESfS. 2. Diceresis is the division of one syllable into two ; as, auUl, Trdia, siliia, suddent ; for aulce, Troia or Troja, silva, suadent. So, sinsco for suesco ; reliquus for "eliquus ; ecquis for ecquis ; miluus for milvm, etc., as §307. PROSODY. VERSIFICATION FIGURES. 345 ^thfreum sensum, atque aurai simplicis ignem. Virg. A. 6, 747 Atque alios alii irrldent, Veneremque siiadent. Lucr. 4, 1153. Grammatici certant; et adhuc sub iudice lis est. Hor. A. P. 78. Aurarum et sUucb metu. Id. 0. 1, 23, 4. (1.) So in Greek words originally written with a diphthong (Men,); a* (lAiieia for elegia, Baccheid for Bacchea, RluBleius for Rlmleus, Plelas i'oT FMs And also in words of Latin origin; as, Vems for Veins, Aguilcld for Aquileid. Rejuark. This figure is sometimes called dialysis. SYSTOLE, § 307. 1. Systole is the shortening of a syllable which li long by natui-e or by position ; as, vide'n for vUlesne, in which e is naturally long; sdWn for sdtisne, in which » is I'-.ng by position ■,—h6die for hoc die ; mulUinddis for multls mddis. So, DQcere multlmQdis voces, et flectere cautus. Lucr. 5, 1405. (1.) By the omission of y after a6, ac?, (5J, suj, and re, in compound words, those prepositions retain their naturally short quantity, which would otherwise be made long by position ; as, dbici, ddicit, dbicis, etc. Thus, Si quid nostra tuis Micit vexatio rebus. JMart. 10, 82, 1. Remark. In some compounds the short quantity of dd and db is preserved oefore aconsonant by the elision of the J or 6 of the preposition, as in dperio Operio, dmitto, etc. ' (2.) The penult of the third person plural of certain perfects is said by Bome to be shortened by systole ; as, steterunt, tulenmt, etc. ; but others ascribe tliese irregularities to the errors of transcribers, or the carelessness of writers. DIASTOLE. 2. Diastole is the lengthening of a syllable which is naturally short. (1.) It occurs most frequently in proper names and in compoimds of re ; as. ''riamides, religio, etc. Thus, Hanc tibi Fnamides mitto, Ledsea, salutem. Ovid. H. 16, 1. Retigione patrum multos servata per annos. Virg. A. 2, 715. (2.) Some editors double tlie consonant after the lengthened re; as, relUgio. (3.) Diastole is sometimes called ectdsis, SYNAPHEIA. 3. Synapheia is such a connection of two consecutive verses, that the first syllable of the latter verse has an influence on the final syllable of that which precedes, either by position, synalce- pha, or ecthhpsis. See §§ 283 and 305. (1.) This figure is most frequent in anapsestic verse, and in the Ionic a nunore. The following lines will illustrate its effect:— Pra;ceps sUvas montesque fvgit Citus Actaeon. Sen. Here the t in the final syllable oi fugit, which is naturally short, is made lona ^ position before the following consonants, <<;, " S46 PROSODY. VERSIFICATION ARSIS AND THESIS. § 308 Omnia Mercuric simTlis, vocemque ccloiemque Et crinea flavos.... Virs- A. 4, 558. Dissidens plebi numSro beatorwjn Eximit virtus. Hor. 0. 2, 2, 18. In the former of these examples, syiiapheia and sjmaloepha are combiied, que being eHded before et in the following line; in the latter there is a similar combination of synapheia and ecthlipsis. (2.) By synapheia, the parts of a compound word are sometimes divided be- tween two verses ; as, .... si non offenderet unum- Q«cOT5«e poetarum limae labor et mora... Hor.A.P 290. (3.) In hexameter verse a redundant syllable at the end of a line elided be- fore a vowel at the beginning of the next line, by causing the accent to fiiU on the second syllable of the concluding spondee, and connecting th" two verses by synapheia, excites the expectation of something which is to follow, and often tends to magnify the object; as, Quos super- | -atra si- | -lex, jam- I -jam lap- | -surSl cSl- | -denti- | -que Imminet assimilis. Virg. A. 6, 602. Remark. The poets often make use of other figures, also, which, however, are not peculiar to them. Such bxq prosMsis, ajiJuxresis, syncdpe, epenthisis, apocdpe, paragoge, tmesis, antitltesis, and metathesis. See § 322. ARSIS AND THESIS. § 308. (1.) Rhythm is the alternate elevating and depress- ing of the voice at regular intervals in pronouncing the syllables of verse. (2.) The elevation of the voice is called arsis, its depression thesis These terms designate, also, the parts of a foot on which the eleva- tion or depression falls. 1. The natural arsis is on the long syllable of a foot ; and hence, in a foot composed wholly of long, or wholly of short syllables, when considered in itself, the place of the arsis is undetermined ; but when such foot is substituted for the fundamental foot of a metre, its arsis ia determined by that of the latter. Remark. Hence, a spondee, in trochaic or dactylic metre, has the arsis on the first syllable ; but in iambic or anapaestic metre, it has it on the last. 2. The arsis is either equal in duration to the thesis, or twice as long. Thus, in the dactyl, — >- - , and anapaest, ^ ^ — , it is equal; in the t»v> chee — — and iambus, ^ — , it is twice as long. This difi"erence m the pro- portionate duration of the arsis and thesis constitutes the difi'erence of rhj'thm. A. foot is said to have the desceitding rhythm, when its arsis is at the beginning, and the ascending, when the thesis is at the beginning. 3. The stress of voice which falls upon the arsis of a foot, is called the ictus. When a long syllable in the arsis of a foot is resolved into two short ones, the ictus falls upon the former. Note 1 Some suppose that the terms arsis and thesis, as used by the an- Oients, denoted respectively the rising and falling of the hand in beating time, and that the place of tlie thesis was the syl.able which received the ictus 5309,310. PROSODY. VERSIFICATION DACTYLIC MEfRE. 347 Note 2. As the ancient pronunciation of Latin is not now understood, writers differ in regard to the mode of reading verse. According to some, the accent of each word sliould always be preserved; wliile otiiers direct that the stress of voice should be laid on the arsis of the foot, and that no regard should be paid to the accent. _ It is generally supposed that the final letters elided by synaloepha and ectli- lipsis, though omitted in scanning, were pronounced in reading verse. cj:sura. § 309. Ccesura is the sepai-ation, by the ending of a word, of syllables rhythmically or metrically connected. CjBsura is bf three kinds:—!, of the foot; 2, of the rhythm; and 3, of the verse. 1. Cffisura of the foot occurs when a word ends before a foot is completed; as, Silves- I -trem tenu- | -i Mu- | -sam medi- | -taris a- | -veaa. Virg. E. 1, 2. 2. Caesura of the rhythm is the separation of the arsis from the thesis by the ending of a word, as in the second, third, and fourth feet of the preceding verse. Rem 1. It hence appears that the ca3sura of the rhvthm is always a cajsura of the foot, as e. g. in the 2d, 3d, and 4th feet of the preceding verse; but, on the contrary, that the ciesura of the foot is not always a caesura of the rhythm, as e. g. in the fifth foot of the same verse. (1.) CiEsura of the rhythm allows a final syllable naturally short, to stand in the arsis of the foot instead of a long one, it being len_ ^ i^SL) 6. In the construction of the Iambic Trimeter an accent should fall on tlie seoond syllable of either the third foot or both the second and fourth feet; aa, Ibis I Libur- I -nis in- | ter al- | -ta na- | -vium | . Utrum- I -ne jus- | -si per- | -se^Kc'- | -mur 6- | -tium. | n. The scazon, or choliamhus (lame iambic), is the iambic trime- ter, with a spondee in the sixth foot, and generally an iambus in the fifth; as. Cur in I Ihea- | -trum, C5.t6 I eSve- | -re, ve- | -nisti? An ide- | 5 tan- 1 -turn ven- | -eras, | ut C-x- | -Ires? Mart. Ep. 1, 1, 8. This species ol" verse is also called Eipponaciic trimeter, from its inventor Hipp*! nax. 3/)2 PROSODY. — VERSIFICATION — lAJIBIC METRIt. § 314 TTT . The iaynbic tetrameter or quadratus, called also from the iimn ber of its feet octonarius, a measure used by the comic poets, consista of four iambic measures, subject to the same variations as the iambic trimeter (I.) ; as, Niinc hic |, dies | ailSm | Titam if- H -f ert, &1I- | -os mo- 1 -res pos- | -tulat. Ter. A. 1,2, 18. Kesiark. The caesura regularly follows the second measure. IV. The iambic tetrameter catalectic or Hipponactic, is the iambic tetrameter, wanting the last syllable, and having always an iambus in the seventh place, but admitting in the other places the same var nations as the trimeter and tetrameter ; as, Depren- | -sS na- | -vis In | mari, | vesa- | -men- 1 -te ven- | -to. Catidl. 25, 13. V. The iambic trimeter catalectic or Archilochian, is the iambic tri- meter (I.), wanting the final syllable. Like the common iambio_ tri- meter, it admits a spondee into the first and third places, but not into the fifth ; as, Voca- I -tus at- | -que non ] voca- | -tus au- | -dit. Hor. Od. 2, 18, 40. Trahiint- | -que sic- 1 -cas mach- | -inae |cari- 1 -nas. Id. Od. 1, 4, 2. VI. The iambic dimeter consists of two iambic measures, with the same variations as the iambic trimeter (I.) ; as, Forti I seque- 1 -mur p5c- | -tore. Hor. Epod, 1, 14. Canidi- | -a trac- i -tavit | dapes. Id. Epod. 3, 8. Vide- I -re prope- | -rantes | domum. Id. Epod. 3, 62. Re^iark. The iambic dimeter is also called the Archilochian dimeter. The following is its scale : — 4 12 3 Vn. The iambia dimeter hypermeter, called also Archilochian^ u the iambic dimeter, with an additional syllable at the end ; as, Rede- I -git In | Teros | timo- | -res. Hor. Od. 1, 37, 15. Remark. Horace always makes the third foot a spondee. VTTT. The iambic dimeter acephalous is the iambic dimeter, want- ing the first syllable ; as, Non I ebur | neque au- | -reum.... Hor. Od. 2, 18, 1. ■Remark. This kind of verse is sometimes scanned as a catalectic trochaic xieter. See § 315, IV. IX. The iambic dimeter catalectic, or Anacreontic, is the iambic dimeter, wanting the final syllable, and having always an iambus in the third foot ; as, Ut tl- I gris or- 1 -ba gna- | -tis. Sen. Med. 863. X. The Galliambus consists of two iambic dimeters catalectic, the last of which wants the final syllable. Remark 1. It was so denominated from the GaUi or priests of Cybele, by vhom it was used. i 315. PROSODY. — VERSIFICATION — TROCHAIC METRE. 353 Rem. 2. In the first foot of each dimeter the anap^st was generally pre- ferred to the spondee. The catalectic syllable at the end of the first diaetet is long, and the second foot of the second dimeter is commonly a tribrach; as. Sup6r 51- I -ta vec- | -tus A- | -tys || c61eri | rite m&- | -ria. Catult, 63, 1. Rbm. 3. The csesnra uniformly occm^ at the end of the fiist dimeter. TROCHAIC METRE. § olo. 1. Trochaic verses bear a near affinity to iambics. The addi- tion or retrenchment of a syllable at the beginning of a pure iambic verse ren- ders it pure trochaic, and the addition or retrenchment of a syllable at the be- ginning of a pure trochaic Ime, renders it pure iambic, with the deficiency or redimdancy of a syllable in each case at the end of the verse. I. The trochaic tetrameter catalectic consists of seven feet, fol- lowed by a catalectic syllable. In the first five places and very rarely in the sixth, it admits a tribrach, but in the seventh a trochee only. In the even places, besides the tribrach, it admits also a spondee, a dactyl, an anapaest, and sometimes a proceleua- matic ; as, Juesus I «Bt In I ermis | IrS : |I pQrus | irS | jQssua | eat. Auct. P. VSn. Romu I Ijeas | Ipsa | fecit || cum Si- | -binis | nupti- | -as. Id. Dinai j des, Co- | -Ite ; | vestras || hic dl- | -es quSB- | -rit mi- | -nus. Se». Thefo 1 lowing is 2 its scale:— 3 4 6 6 — >_ w — ^ ^ Remark 1. The pure trochaic verse was rarely used, and the dactyl very rarely occurs in the fourth place. The cjesural pause uniformly occurs afte'r the fourth foot, thus dividing the verse into a complete dimeter and a catalec- tic dimeter. The comic writers introduced the spondee and its equivalent feet into the odd places. _ Rem. 2. The complete trochaic tetrameter or octmarius properly consists of eight feet, all trochees, subject, however, to the same variations as' the catalec- tic tetrameter ; as, IpsS I summis | saxis | fixus | aspe- | -ris, e- | -vIscS- | -ratus. Enn. n. ITie Sapphic verse, invented by the poetess Sappho, consists of five fra* — the first a trochee, the second a spondee, the third a dactyl, and the fourth and fifth trochees ; as, Inte- I -ger n- \ -CS, || Bcele- | -risque | purus. Hot. Od. 1, 22, 1. 1. Sappho, and, after her example, Catullus, sometimes made the second foot a trochee. 2. Those Sapphics are most harmonious which have the caesura after -the fifth semi-foot. Note 1. In the composition of the Sapphic stanza, a word is sometimes divided between the end of the third Sapphic, and the beginning of the Adouio wbick follows; as, Labi- I -tur rl- | -pa Joye | non prB- | -bante ux- 5rlug I amnis. Hor. Od. 1, 2, 19. 80* S51 PROSODY. — VERSIFICATION — CHORIAMBIC METRE. 3 316 It has been thought by some that such lines should be considered as one Sappliic verse of seven feet, the fifth foot being either a spondee or a trochee. Note 2. This verse is sometimes scanned as epichoriambic, having an epi- trite in tL 3 first place, a choriambus in the second, and ending with an iambio sizygjf c&'alectic; thus, Integer Ti- | -tal, Bcelerls- | -que purUs. in. The PhalcEcian verse consists of five feet — a spondee, a dac- eyl> and three trochees ; as, Non est I vivere, | sed v3,- | -lere | vita. Mart. Remark 1. Instead of a spondee as the first foot, Catullus sometimes uses s trochee or an iambus. This writer also sometimes uses a spondee in thfl second place. Rem. 2. The Phalcecian verse is sometimes called hendecasyllahic, as con- sisting of eleven sj'Uables ; but that name does not belong to it exclusively. IV. The trochaic, dimeter catalectic consists of three feet, properly all trochees, and a catalectic syllable, but admitting also in the second place a spondee or a dactyl ; as, N5n e | -bur ne- | -que aure- | -um. Hor. Od. 2, 18, 1. Lenis I ac modi- | -cum flii- | -ens Aura, I nee ver- | -gens la- | -tus. Sen OSd. 887. Note. This measure is the same as the acephalous iambic dimeter (see ^ 314, VIII.), and it is not important whether it be regarded as iambic of trochaic. CHORIAMBIC METRE. § 316. (a.) In a pure choriambic verse each metre except the last is a choriambus, and the last an Iambic syzygy. Note. A spondee and iambus, i. e. a third epitrite, are sometimes used iu place of the Iambic sj'zygy. (h.) An epichoriambic verse is composed of one or more choriambi with some other foot, especially a ditrochee or a second epitrite, joined with it. 1. The cTiorimnhic pentameter consists of a spondee, three chori- ambi, and an iambus ; as, Tu n5 I qnsesiSrIs, | scire nefas, | quern mihi, quem tibl., Hor. Od. 1, 11, 1. n. The cJioriambic tetrameter consists of three choriambi, or feet of eqnal length, and a Bacchius ; as, Omne nemus ] cum fluvils, | omne cS.nat | prof uudum. Claud. 2. In this verse Horace substituted a spondee for the iambaa con- tained in the first choriambus ; as, Te decs 5- | -ro, SybSrln | cur prbperes | amando. Hot. Od. 1, 8, 2. 3. Some scan this verse as an epichoriambic tetrameter catalectic, begin- ning vfith ihe second epitrite. HI. 1. The Asclepiadic tetrameter (invented by the poet Ascle« pia liis) consists of a spondee, two choriambi, and an iambus ; as, MSce- I -rSe, Sitavls 1| edlt6 rep- | -ibxa. Hor. Oi. 1, 1. 1. I 317. PROSODY. VERSIFICATION IONIC METRE. 355 2. This form is invariably observed by Horace ; but other poeta Bome.omeB, though rarely, make the first foot a dactyl. 3. The caesural pause occurs at the end of the first choriambus. 4. This measure is sometimes scanned as a dactylic pentameter catalectio. See § 311, III. Thus, MSce- I -nas, &ta- ] vis || edite | regibus. IV. 1. The choriambic trimeter, or Glyconic (invented by the poet Glj^co), consists of a spondee, a choriambus, and an iambus; aa, Sic te I diT& potens | CJprl... Hor. Od. 1, 3, 1. 2. The first foot is sometimes an iambus or a trochee. 3. When the first foot is a spondee, the verse might be scanned as a dactylia trimeter. Thus, Sic te I diva po- | -tens Cypri. V. 1. The choriambic trimeter catalectic, or Pherecratic (so-called from the poet Pherecrates), is the Glyconic deprived of its final syl- lable, and consists of a spondee, a choriambus, and a catalectic sylla- ble ; as, Grato, I Pyrrhi, sub an- | -tro. Hor. Od. 1, 5, 3. 2. The first foot was sometimes a trochee or an anapest, rarely an iambub. 3. When the first foot is a spondee, this measure might be scanned as a dactylic trimeter. See § 312, VI. 4. The Pherecratic subjoined to the Glyconic produces the Priapean verse. See § 310, II. VI. 1. Th& choriainbic dimeter consists of a choriambus and a Bacchlus ; as, Lydia. die | per omnea. Hot. Od. 1, 8, 1. 2. This verse is by some called the choriambic dimeter catalectic. Cf. k 316, (a.) IONIC METRE. § 317. I. The Ionic a majore, or Sotadic, (from the poet So- tades), consists of three greater Ionics and a spondee. 1. The Ionic feet, however, are often changed into ditrochees, and eithe'' of the two long syllables in those feet into two short ones ; as, Has, cum gemi- | -na compede, | dedlcat ci- | -tenas, Saturne, ti- | -bl Zoilus, | anniilos pri- | -ores. Mart. 2. Hence the following is its scale : — 1 2 3 4 N)TK. The final syllable, by ^ 301, note, may be short. n. 1. The Ionic a minore consists generally of verses of threo or four feet, which are all smaller Ionics ; as, Puer SJiJs, I tlbi tC-lSs, I operosffi- | -que Minerva... Hor. Od. 3, 12, 4. 2. In this verse, as in the anapsestic, no place is assigned to the pause; be« .:ause, since the metres, if rightly constructed, end with a word, the e/Tect of a t>«iu8e will b3 produced at the end of each metre. 356 PROSODY. VERSIFICATION COftlPOUNl METRES. § 318. COMPOUND METRES. § 318. Compound metre is the union of two specifis of metre in the same verse. 1. The dactylico-iamhic metre or Elegiambus consists of a dactylic pentheinimeris ( 312, vii.), followed by an iambic dimeter (§ 314, VI.); as, Scrlbere | Tersicu- | -los || 5.mo- | -re per- | -culsum | giavi. Hor. Epod. 11, 2. II. The iambico-dactylic metre or lamhelegus consists of the same members as the preceding, but in a reversed order ; as, Nives- I -que de- | -ducunt | Jovem : || nunc mare, | nunc sUu- | -se. Hor. Epod. 13, 2. Note. The members composing this and the preceding species of verse ara often written in separate verses. m. The greater Alcaic consists of an iambic penthemimeris, i. e. of two iambic feet and a long catalectic syllable, followed by a chor- iambus, and an iambus; as, VidSs I ut al- | -ta || stet nive can- | -didum. H»r. Od. 1, 9, 1. Remark 1. The first foot is often a spondee. Rem. 2. The caesura uniformly occurs after the catalectic syllable. Rem. 3. This verse is sometimes so scanned as to make the last two feet dactyls. IV. The dactylico-trochaic or Archilochian heptameter, consists of the dactylic tetrameter a priore (§ 312), followed by three trochees; as, Solvitur I acris hi- | -ems gra- | -ta vicS || veria | et Fi- | -vont. Hot. Od. 1, 4, 1. Remark. The caesura occurs between the two members. V. The dactylico-trochaic tetrameter or lesser Alcaic, consists of two dactyls, followed by two trochees, i. e. of a dactylic dimeter followed by a trochaic monometer ; as, Levia I persSnu- || -5re j.saxSl. Hor. Od. 1, 17, 12. COMBINATION OF VERSES IN POEMS. § 319. 1. A poem may consist either of one kind of verse cnly or of a combination of two or more kinds. 2. A poem in which only one kind of verse is employed, is called carmen monocolon ; that which has two kinds, dicolon ; that which has three kinds, tricolon. 3. When the poem retm-ns, after the second line, to the same verse with which it began, it is called distrophon ; when after the third line, tristrophon ; and when after the fourth, tetrastrophon. 4. The several verses which occur before the poem returns to the kind of verse with which it began, constitute a stanza or strophe. 5. A poem consisting of two kinds of verse, when the stanza contains twa verses, is called dicolon distrdphon, (see § 320, 3); when it contains thi-ee, died- § 320. PROSODT. — VERSIFICATION — HORATIAN METRES. 357 ton tristrdphon, (Auson. Profess. 21); when four, dicdUm tetrastrdphon, (§ 320, 2); and when five, dicolon pentastrdphm. 6. A poem consisting of three liinds of verse, when the stania contains thre« verses, is called tricolon tristrdphon, (§ 320, 15); when four, tncolon tetrastr6- phm, (^ 320, 1). HORATIAN METRES. § 330. The diflPfrent species of metre used by Horace in his lyric composiuous are twenty. The various forms in which he has employed them, either sepai-ate or in conjunction, are nineteen, arranged, according to the order of preference given to them by the poet, in the following SYNOPSIS. 1. Two greater Alcaics (§ 318, iii.), one ArchilocMan iambic dimeter hypermeter (§ 314, vii.), and one lesser Alcaic (§ 318, v.) ; as, VIdes, ut alts stet nive candidum Soracte, nee jam austineant onus Silvse laborantea, ggluquS Flumina confititerint &cuto. (Lib. 1, 9.) Remark. This is called the Horatian stanza, because it seems to have been B favorite with Horace, being used in thirty-seven of his odes. 2. Three Sapphics (§ 315, ii.) and one Adonic (§ 312, viii.) ; as, Jam satis terrls nivis atque dlrae Grandinls misit p&ter, et, rubentS Dextera sacras jiculatus arces, Terruit urbem. • (Lib, 1, 2.) 3. One Glyconic (§ 316,*iv.) and one Asclepiadic (§316, iii.); as, Sic te Diva pStens Cypri, Sic fratres Helenee, lucida sidera... {Lib. 1, 3 )■ 4. One iambic trimeter (§ 314, i.) and one iambic dimeter (§ 314, VI.); as, Ibis Libumis inter alta navium. Amice, propugnacula. (Epod. 1.) 5. Three Asclepiadics (§ 316, iii.) and one Glyconic (§ 316, iv,); as. Beriberis Vario f ortTs, St hostinm Victor, Maeonil earminis aliti, Quam rem cumque ferox navibuB aut Sqois Miles, te duce, gesserit. (Lib. 1, 6.) 6. Two Asclepiadics (§ 316, in.), one Pherecratic (§ 316, v.), aid one Glyconic (§ 316, iv.); as, Dianam, tenfirae, dicTte virgines: Intonsum, puerl, dicite Cynthlum, Latonamque supremo Dilectim penitus J5vl. {Lib. 1, 21 ) 7. The Asclepiadic (§ 316, in.) alone; as, MScenas atavis edite rSgibns. lX«i. 1, 1.) JJ58 --'ROSODT. VERSIFICATION HORATIAN METRES. § 320 8. One dactylic hexameter (§ 310, i.) and one dactylic tetrameter a posterior e (§ 312, v.); as, Laudabunt 5.1ii cliram Rhodon, aut Mitylenen, Aut Ephesum, bTmirisve Corinthl... {Lib. 1, 7.) 9. The choriaunbic pentameter (§ 316, i.) alone; as, Tu ne qUEESlerls, scire nefas, quern mihl, quern tibi... (Lib. 1, 11.) 10. One dactylic hexameter (§310, i.) and one iambic dimetet (§ 314, VI.); as, Nox erat, et coelo f ulgebat luna sereno Inter minora, sldera. (Epod 15.) 11. The iambic trimeter (§ 314, i.) containing spondees; as. Jam, jam efficaci do manus scISntiSB. {Epod. 17.) 12. One choriambic dimeter (§ 316, vi.) and one choriambic tetra meter (§ 316, ii.) with a variation ; as, Lydia, die, per omnes Te Deos oro, Sjbarin cur properas amando... {Lib. 1, 8.) 13. One dactylic hexameter (§310, i.) and one iambic trimetei •without spondees (§ 314, i.) ; as, Altera jam teritur bellis clTllibus mtas ; Suls et ipsa Roma vlribus ruit. {EpSd. 16.) 14. One dactylic hexameter (§310, i.) and one dactylic penthe- mimeris (§ 312, vii.) ; as, Diff ugSre nivSs : rSd6unt jam gramlna campis, Srboribusque comae. (LiJ. 4, 7.) 15. One iambic trimeter (§ 314, i.), one dactylic trimeter cataleo- tic (§ 312, VII.), and one iambic dimeter (§ 314, vi.) ; as, Petti, nihil me, gicut antea, juvat Scribere versiculos, Amore perculsum gravi. (Epoa. 11.) Note. The second and third lines are often written as one verse. Sed § 318, 1. 16. One dactylic hexameter (§ 310, i.), one iambic dimeter (§ 314, VI.), and one dactylic penthemimeris (§ 312, vii.) ; as, Horrida tempestas coeliim contraxit; et Imbres Nivesque dediacunt Jovem : Nunc mare, nunc siluae... {Epod. 13.) Note. The second and third lines of this stanza, also, are often written at- one verse. See 4 318, ii. 17. One Archilochian heptameter (§ 318, IV.) and one iambic tri meter catalectic (§ 314, v.) ; as, Solvitur acri8 hiems grata vTc8 vEriS 5t FavonJ, Trahuntque slecas machin® carinas. {Lib. 1, 4.) 18. One iambic dimeter acephalous (§ 314, viii.) and one iambic trimeter catalectic (§ 314, v.) ; as, Non ebur neque aureum Mea rfinidet in domo lacunar. (Lib. 2, 18.) 19. The Ionic a miiwre (§ 317, ii.) alone; as, IiUuUton is a redundancy of conjunctions; as, Una, £urusque Ndtus- que ruunt creberque prdceUis Afncus. Virg. (3.) Hendindys is the expression of an idea by two nouns connected by et -que, or atque, instead of a noun and a limiting adjective or genitive; 'fts, PatO- ris llbdinus et auro, for mn-eis pater is. Virg. Libro et silvestri sub ere clausam for libro suberis. Id. Cristis et auro. Ovid. Met. 3, 32. (4.) Periphrasis OT circuinldcutio is a, circuitxins mode of expression; as, Ti- neri fcEtus avium, i. e. ugni. Virg. 3. {a.) Enallage is a change of words, or a substitution of one gen di-.r, number, case, person, tense, mood, or voice of the same word foi another. (h.) Enallage includes antimeria, heterosis, antiptosis, synesis, and ajiacoliithon. (1.) Antimeria is the use of one part of speech for another, or the abstrac* for the concrete; as, Nostrum istud vivere t7-ist.e, for nostra vita. Pers. Aliiif was. 111. Coiijiigium w"c^p6/«? for c(w;M^em. Virg. (2.) Heierusis is the use of one form of noun, pronouuj verb, etc., for anc)ther. af Ego {uoque una pereo, quod 7nihi est carius, for qui mihi sum cdrior. Tet 5 324. APPENDIX. TROPES AND FIGURES OK RMETOMC. 363 Komaims pralio victor, for Romini vict&re$. Liv. Many words are used by the poets in the plunil instead of the singular; as, colla, corda, m-a, etc. See § 98. Me truncus illapsus cereiro sustulerat, for sustuhsset. Hor. See § 259, R. 4. (3.) Antiptosis is the use of one case for another; as, Cui nunc coyimnen lulo, for Icdus. Virg. ^ 204, R. 8. Uxor invicti J&vis esse nescis, for te esse uxo- rem. Hor. § 210, R. 6. (4.) Si/nesis, or synthesis, is adapting the construction to the sense of a word, rather than to its gender or number; as, Siibeunt Te^aa jiiventus auxilio tarii. Stat. Concursits populi mlrantium miid rei est. Liv. Pars in crucem acti. Sail. Ci-J illic est scelus, qui me perdiditl Ter. Id mea minime referi, qui swrx naiu maxlmvs. Id. See § 205, R. 3, (1.) and (3.), and § 206, (12.) (5.) Andcdluthon is a disagreement in construction between the latter and fonner part of a sentence ; as. Nam nos omnes, qulbiis est dlicuwle dllquis objectui tabos, onine quod est interea tevipus, priusquam id rescitum est, lucro est. Ter. In this example, the writer began as if he intended to say lucro h/ibemus, and ended as if he had said nobis omnibus, leaving ncs omnes without its verb. 4. (a.) Hyperbdlon is a transgression of the usual order of words or clauses. (h.) Hyperbaton includes cinastrophe, hysteron proteron, hypalldge, synclius'is, tmesis, and parenthesis. (1.) Anastrdphe is an inversion of the order of two words; as, Pranstra per et remos, for per trnnstra. Virg. CoUo dure brdchia circum, for drcumddre. Id. AW erit una super, for supiririt. Ovid. Et Jacit are, for drefdcit. Lucr. (2.) Hysteron prdtiron is reversing the natural order of the sense; as, Mdrid- mur, et in mMia ar/na I'udmus. Virg. Valet atque vlvit. Ter. (3.) Hmalldye is an interchange of constructions ; as. In nOva fert dnlmut mdtdtas ulcere formas corpora, for corpdra mutdia in ndvas format. Ovid. Dare classibus Aust7-os, for dare classes Austi-is. Virg. (4.) -St/Tic/ijrsis is a confused position of words; as, Saxa vdcant Itdli, midiis qwe in Jiuctibus, dras, for quie saxa »j mediis Jiuctlbus, Itdli vOcant drag. Virg. (5.) Tmesis or diacope is the separation of the parts of a compound word; as, Septem subjecta trioni yens, for septenti-toni. Virg. Qiub me cunnju^ vdcant lerrce. Id. Per mild, per, inqtiam, grdtum feciris. Cic. (6.) Pdrenthesis or dialysis is the insertion of a word or words in a sentence interrupting the natural connection; as, Tityre dum redeo, (brevis <'6t via,) pasce cdpeUas. Virg. Remark. To the above may be added archaism and Hellenism, which belong both to the figures of etymology and to those of syntax. (1.) Archaism is the use of ancient forms or constructions; as, auldi, for auliB ; stndtl, for sendtus ; fuat, for sit ; prdhibesso, for prdhlbuero ; impetrassere, fox impetrdturum esse; f drier, for fari ; nenu, for non ; enilo, for in; — Operam dbutltur, for dperd. Ter. Quid tlbi hanc cHrdtio est rem f Plaut. (2.) Hellenism i» the use of Greek foniib or constructions; as, Helene, for Helena; Antiphon, for Aniipho; auras (gen.), for aurce ; Pallddos, Pidldda, for Pullddis, Pallddem; Trodsin, Troddas, for Troddibus, Troddes ; — Abstineto ird- rum. Hor. Tempiis disistere pugna. Virg. S O-^'i* (1.) To the grammatical figures may not Improperly be subjoined cef" Vain others, which are often referred to in philological vorki, and which are called TROPES AND FIGURES OF RHETORIC. (2.) A rhetorical jiyure is a mode of expression different from the direct and simple waj' of expressing the same sense. The turning of a uwd from its nriginal and customai y meaning, is called a trope. 864 APPENDIX. TROPES AND FIGURES OF RHETORIC. § S24 1. (a.) A metaphor is the transferring of a word from the object to which it l^roperly belongs, and applj'ing it to another, to which that object 1 as some ■ anal'.;gy; as, Ridet agei\ The field smiles. Virg. uS'lias aurea, The golJen age. Ovid. Naufragia forturuB, The wreck of fortune. Cic. Mentis ociih. The eye3 of the mind. Id. Virtus dnimum (jlorice stimuHs concUat. The harshness of a metaphor is often softened by means of quasi, tamquam, guidam, or ut Ua dicam; as. In fin' vhildsdphid qiiiisi tabemacvilum vltce suce colldcdrunl. Id. Opimum quoddam o^ tamquam adipatEe dictionis genus. Id. (6.) Gitachrcsis or dbusio is a bold or harsh metaphor; as, Vir grSgis ipsa caper. Virg. Eurus per Skfdas equitavit undas. Hor. 2. Metonymy is substituting the name of an object for that of another to which it has a certain relation; as the cause for the effect, the container for what is contained, the property for the substance, the sign for the thing signi- fied, and their contraries; the parts of the body for certain affections; the pos- sessor for the thing possessed; place and time for the persons or things which thav comprise, etc. ; as, Mortdles, for homines. Virg. Amoi' duri Martis, i.e. 6&Et. Id. Friiges Cererem appelldmits, vinum auteni Liberum. Cic. Cupio vig^- liara meam iibi irdilere, i. e. meam cUram. Id. Pallida mors. Hor. Hausit pa- teram, i. e. v'mum. Virg. Vina cOronant, i. e. pateram. Id. Necte ternos colores, i. e. iria ftla diversi cOloris. Id. Ccdant arma togse, i. e. helium pad. Cic. Sseciila mUescent, i. e. hdmuies in sceculis. Virg. Vlvat Pdcuvius vel Nestora totum. Juv. Doetrind Grwcia no's siiperdbat, for Grmci siijKrdbant. Cic. Pagi centum Suevdru7n ad r'ipas Rheni consederant, for jxlgorumincd^ie. Cses. Tempora dmlcorum, for res adversce. Cic. Claudius lege prcedidtond vendlis pependit, for Claudii pradium. Suet. Vici ad Jauum medium sedentes, for Jdni vi- cum. Cic. 3. Synecdoche is putting a whole for a part, a genus for a species, a singular for a plural, and their contraries; also the material for the thing made of it^ a definite for an hidefinite number, etc.; as, Fontem ferebant. Id. Tectum, for dOmus. Id. Armdlo milite complent, for armdtis mllitlbus. Id. Ferrum, for gld^ dias. Id. Qui Cdrinlhiis operibus abundant, i. e. vdsis. Cic. Urbem, m'bem, mt Rufe, cdle, i. e. Romam. Cic. Centum puer artium, i. e. multdrum. 4. Irony is the intentional use of words which express a sense contrary to that which the writer or speaiier means to convey; as, Salve bone vir, curasti probe. Ter. Egregiam vero laudem, et spolia ampla refertis, tuque, puerque iuus. Virg. 5. i7y7Je?-&(5fe is the magnifying or diminishmg of a thing beyond the truth ; as. Ipse arduus, altdque pulsat sidera. Virg. Ocior Euro. Id. 6. Meldlepsis is the including of several tropes in one word ; as, Post aliquot iristas. Virg. Here arislas is put for messes, and this for annos. 7. {a.) Allegwy is a consistent series of metaphors, designed to illustrate one Bubjoct by another; as, ndvis, referent in mare te ndvi fiuctus. Hor. (b.) An obscxire allegory or riddle is called an (enigma; as, J>ic, quibtis in (erris tres pdteat cmli spdiium non amplius idnas. Virg. 8. Ant^ndmasia is using a proper noun for a common one, and the contrary ; Rs, Irus ei est subito, qui mddo Crossus erat, for pauper and dives. Ovid. So, by periphrasis, potor Rhoddni, for Gallus. Hor. Eversor Carthdginis, for Scipio. Quint. ElOquentice princeps, for Cicero. Id. Tydides, for Diomedes. \ irg. 9. Llfdtes is a mode of expressing something by denying the contrary ; as, Nim lamlo, I blame. Ter. Non innoxia verba. Virg. 10. Anttphrdsis is using a word in a sense opposite to its proper meaning, as, Auri siicra fames. Virg. 11. Euphemism is the use of softened languageto express what is offensive or distressing; as, Si quid accidisset Ccesdri, i. e. si mortuvs esset. Veil. 12. Antunncldsis or punning is the use of the same word in different senses . as, Quis neyet ^nm Tidtum de stirpe Nermemf Susttilit /iic mdtrem, sustuli* ille patretn. Epigr. Amari juctundum est, si curetur ne quid insit amari. Cic. § 324. APPENDIX. TROPES AND FIGURES OF RHETORIC. 365 13. Anaphdra or ep&naphdra is the repetition of a word at the beginning of successive clauses; as, Nihilne te nocturnu7ii prcesidiu7n jxilatii, nihil vrbis ■'•if/i- liw, nihil timor pdpuli, etc. Cic. Te, dulcis conjux, te, solo in I'Mre sccum, te, veniente die, te, deccdente, cdnebat. Virg. 14. Epistrdphe is the repetition of a word at the end of successive clauses; as, Panes pdpulus Romanus justitid vicit, armis vTcit, liberdUtdte vicit. Cic. In pure Latin this figure is called conrer-sio. 15. Stfinpldce is the repetition of a word at the beginning, and of another at the end, of successive clauses, and hence it includes the anaphora and the epistrophe; as, Quis legem tulitf Rullus: Quis mOjOrem pdpuli partem snffrd' giis pi'ivdvit? RuWns: Qnis cdmitiis prcsfuit? Mem KuWus. Cic. 16. Epdnalepsis is a repetition of the same T^ord or sentence after inteivcn- ing words or clauses. See Virg. Geor. II. 4 — 7. 17. Anddiplosis is the use of the same.word at the end of one clause, and the beginning of another ; as, Sequitur pulcherrimus Astur, Astur equo fidens. Virg. A. 10, 180. JVztnc etiam audes in hoi-um conspectum venire, venire audes in karwn conspectum f Cic. This is sometimes called epdnastrdphe. 18. Epanddiplosis is the use of the same word both at the beginning and end of i sentence ; as, Crescit amor nummi, quantum ipsa pecunia crescit. Juv. 19. Epdnados or regressio is the repetition of the same words in an inverted order as, Crudelis mater mdgis, an puer imprdbus ille f Impi-dbus ille puer, crO- dC'lis tu qudque, mater. Virg. 20. Ejn,zeuxis_ is a repetition of the same word for the sake of emphasis ; as, Excitate, excitate eum ab inferis. Cic. Ah Corydon, Corydon, quce te dementia cepii ? Virg. Ibiinus, ihimus, utcumque prceccdes. Hor. 21. Climax is a gradual amplification by means of a continued anadiplosis, each successive clause beginning with the" conclusion of that which precedes it ; as, Quae reliqua spes manet libertatis, si illis et quod libet, licet ; et quod licet, possunt ; et quod possunt, audent ; et quod audent, vobis molestum non est V Cic. This, in pure Latin, is called grdddtio. 11. Tncrementum is an amplification without a strict climax; as, Fdcinus est, i-inclri civem Romanum ; seem, vei'berdri ; prope parricidium, necdri ; quid dU cam in crucem tolli f Cic. 23. Polyptoton is the repetition of a word in different cases, genders, num- bers, tenses, etc. ; as. Jam clipeus dipeis, unibone repellitur umbo; ense minax ensis, pede pes, et aisplde cuspis. Stat. 24. Paregmenon is the use of several words of the same origm, in one sen- tence ; as, Abesse non pdtest, quin ejusdem hdminis sit, qui improbos probet, pro- bos improbare. Cic. Istam pugnam pugnabo. Plaut. 25. Pdrdndmdsia is the use of words which resemble each other in sound as, Amor et inelle et felle est fecu7ulissimus. Plaut. Civem boiulrum artium hdnarum partium. Cic. Amantes sunt amentes. Ter. This figure is sometimes called agnomindiio. 26. HdmrBLprvpliiron or alliteration is the use in the same sentence of sev- eral words beginning with the same letter; as, Tite, lute Tali, tibi tanta, iyranne, tuli^ti. Enn. JVeu patrice validas in viscera verlite vires. Virg. 27. Antithesis is the placing of different or opposite words or sentiments in contrast; as, Eujm ordtionis difflcilim est exitum quam principium invenlre. Cic. Ca?sar beneficiis ac miinlficentia magnus hdbebdtur ; integritate vitse Cato- Sail. 28. Oxymoron unites words of contrary significations, thus producing a seem- ing contradiction; as, Concordia disccn-s. Hor. Quum tdcent, ctdmant. Cic 29. Spnonymia is the use of different words or expressions having the same import; as, Non feram, non pdtiar, non slmm. Cic. PromitU), recipio, spon- deo. Id. 81* 366 APPENDIX. TROPES AND FIGURES OF RHETC iKIC. §325 3C Parabdla or Simile is the comparison tf one thing with another; as, BS- pente te, tamquam serpens e Idtibulis, oculis emlnentllms, tiiflato collo, tumidts cer- tUdbuSf intulisti. Cic. ?1. Erotesis is an earnest question, and often irnplies a strong aflarmation of the contrary; as, Orediiis dvectos hoslesf Virg. Beu! qua me aqudra possurU acctperef Id. 32. Eparuyrthosis or Gorrectio is the recalling of a word, in order to place a stronger or more significant one in its stead; as, Filium unlcum dddlesceniulttm habeo: ah! quid dixit me habere? /ww habui. Ter. 33. Apdsiqpesis, Eettcentia, or Interruptio, is leaving a sentence unfinished in consequence of some emotion of the mind; as, Quos ego—sed motos proestat compmire Jluctus. Virg. 34. Prds5pdpceia or personification represents inanimate things as acting or speaking, and persons dead or absent as alive and present; as, Q.we (patrta) tecum, Cailllna, sic agii. Cic. Virtus sumit aut ponit secures. Hor. 35. Apostrdphe is a turning off from the regular course of the subject, to ad- dress some person or thing; as, Ti pdtitur ; quid nm mortdlia peci^ra cogis, auri sacra fames ! Virg. 36. Pdrdleipsis ia a pretended omission of something, in order to render it more observed. See Cic. Cat. 1, 6, 14. 37. Epiphonema or Acclamdtio is an exclamation or grave reflection on some- thing said before; as, Tantce molis erai Romdnam condere gentem. Virg. 38. EqMnesis or Exclamdtio shows some violent emotion of the mind ; as, tempdra ! mores ! 39. Apdria, Diapdresis, or Dubitdtio, expresses a doubt in regard to what is to be said or done ; as, Quos accedam, aut quas appellem f Sail. 40. Prdlepsis is the anticipation of an objection before it is made, or of an event .before it occurs ; as, Verum anceps puyiuB fuerat fm-tuna. Fuisset : Quern metui moritiira ? Virg. § Sfi5. To the figures of rhetoric may be subjoined the follow- ing terms, used to designate defects or blemishes in style : — 1. Barbarism is eitlier the use of a foreign word, or a violation of the rules of orthography, etymology^ or prosody; as, rigorosus, for ingidus or severus; domminus, for ddminus ; dam, for dedi. 2. Solecism is a violation of the rules of syntax ; as, Venus pulcher ; vos invi- ieviiLs. 3. Neotensm is the use of words or phrases introduced by authors living Bubsequently to the best ages of Latinity; as, murdrum, a miu-der; constaMld- rius, a constable. 4. Tautology is a repetition of the same meaning in different words ; as, Jam vos aciem, et proelia, et hostem poscltis. Sil. 5. AmpMbdlia is the use of equivocal words or constructions ; as, Gallus, Gaul, or a cock. Aio te, ^dcida, Romanes vincere posse. Quint. 6. Idiotism is a construction peculiar to one or more languages : thus, the Rblative after comparatives is a Latinism. When a peculiarity of one language ts irritated in another, this is also called idiotism. Thus, Mitte mihi verbum, '^OfiU'H.d of Fac me certiorem, is an Anglicism. M26. APPP^rnix. — roman mode of reckoning — time. 367 ROMAN MODE OF RECKONING. I. OF TIME. 1. The Roman Day. § 330. (1.) With the Romans, as with us, the day was either rivil or natural. Their civil day, like oure, extended from midnight to midnight. The natural day continued from sunrise to sunset, as. on the other hand, the night extended fr-^ra sunset to sunrise. The natural day and night were each di\ided into twelve equal parts oi hours, which were consequently of different length, according to the varying length of the days and nights in the successive seasons of the year. It was only at the equinox that the diurnal and nocturnal hours of the Romans were equal to each other, as each was then equal to the twentj'-fourth part of the civil day. (2.) In the Roman camp the night was further divided into four watches {vTgtlicB), consisting each of three Roman hours, the second and fourth watches ending respectively at midnight "^nd at sunrise 2. The Roman Month and Year. (1.) The calendar of the Romans, as rectified by Julius Caesar, agreed with our own in the number of months, and of the days in oach, according to the Ibllowing table : — Januarius . 31 days. Maius . . 31 days. September 30 davs. Februarius 28 or 29. Junius. . 30 " October . . 31 "" Martius. . . 31 days. Quintllis 31 " November 30 " Aprilis ... 30 " Sextilis . 31 " December 31 " In early times the Roman year began with March, and the names QuintilLs, ScxTilu^, September, etc., indicated the distance of those months from the commencement of the year. Quintllis and Sextilis were afterwards called Julius and Augustus in honor of the first two emperors. The Romans, instead of reckoning in an uninterrupted series from the first to the last day of a month, had in each month Shree points or periods from which their days were counted — the Calends, the Nones, and the Ides. The Calends {Calendxe), were al- ways the first day of the month. The Nones (Nonce), were the fifth, and the Ides (Idus), the thirteenth ; except in March, May, July, and October, when the Nones occurred on the seventh day, and the Idea on the fifteenth. (2.) They always counted forward, from the day whose date was to be determined, to the ne.xt Calends, Nones, or Ides, and desig- nated the day by its distance before such point. After the first day of the month, therefore, they began to reckon so many tlays before the Nones ; after the Nones, so many days before the Ides ; and after the Ides, so many before the Calends, of the next month. Thus, the second of January was denoted by quarto Nonas Janunrioi, oi Jdnudrii, soil, die ante : the third, tertio Nmas ; the fourth, prldio ?fmas ; and the fifth, Nmtis. The sixth wus denoted by octavo Idus ; the seventh 368 APPENDIs*.. ROMAN MODE OF RECKONING TIME. $i oP.C) septimo Idus ; and so on to the thirteenth, on which the Ides fell. The four- teenth was denoted by undeingesimo Calendas Febi-udnas, or Februdrii ; and sc on to the end of the month. (3.) The day preceding the Calends, Nones, and Ides, was termed pridie Calendas, etc., scil. ante : in designating the other days, both the day of the Calends, etc., and that whose date was to be deter- mined, were reckoned ; hence the second day before the Calends, etc., was called tertio, the third quarto, etc. (4.) To reduce the Roman calendar to our own, therefore, when the day is between the '^r.l^uds and the Nones or between the Nonea and the Ides, it is necessary to take one from the number denoting the distance of the given day from the Nones or the Ides, and to sub- tract the remainder from the number of the day on which the Nones or Ides fell in the given month. Thus, to detennine the day eqiiivaleut to IV. Nonas Jdnuarias, we take 1 from 4, and subtract the remainder, 3, from 5, the day ibtain the proper expression for the remaining five days we regard the month as having 29 davs. Thus the 27th of Februarv in leap-year is 29-f-2 — 27=4, and the proper lioman expression is IV. Cal. Mart. {b.) On the other hand, to reduce a Roman date of February in leap-year to our date we reverse the above process, and during the Nones and Ides and until tlio VU. Cdlendas Martias we reckon the month to have only 28 days: — bisexto Cal. Mart, is set down as the 24th, and for the rcmahiing days desig- nated as VI. V. IV. III. and pridie Cal. Mart, we reckon the month to have 29 days. Thus ///. Cal. Mart, is 8— 2=1, and 29—1=28, and the given day is equivalent to the 2Sth of February. 370 APPENDIX. ROMAN MODE OF RECKONING MONET. § 327. .8) The Latius not only suidte7'urity in the Lsvtin language. 329. APPENDIX. WRITERS IN DIFFERENT AGES. 375 3. The silver age extended from the death of Augustus to the death of Trajan, A. I). 118, a period of 104 years. The writers of this age were inferioi to those who had preceded them ; yet several of them are worthy of com- mendation. 4. The brazen age con-prised the interval from the death of Trajan to the time when Rome was taken by the Goths, A. D. 410. From the latter epoch commenced the iron age, during which the Latin language was much adulter- ated with foreign words, and its style and spirit essentially injured. 5. The body of Latin writings has been otherwise arranged by Dr. Freund^ BO as to be comprised in three main periods, — the Ante-classical, Classical, and Post^lassical. The ante-classical extends from the oldest fragments of the language to Lucretius and Varro; the classical from Cicero and CaBsar to Tacitus, Suetonius, and the younger Pliny inclusive; the post-classical from that time to the fifth century of our era. The classical Latinity is subdivided into (a.) Ciceronian, (6.) Augustan, (c.) post-Auyustan, and to the language of the fourth and fifth centuries he has given the title of late Latin. LATIjjf WRITERS IN THE DIFFERENT AGES (From the Lexicon of Facciolatus.) WRITERS OF THE GOLDEN AGE. Livius Andronicus. L. Cornelius Sisenna. Q. Novius. Lasvius. P. Nigidius Figulus. C. Q. Atta. C. Nffivius. C. Decius Laberius. L. Cassius Hemina. Statins Cascilius. M. Verrius Flaccus. Fenestella. Q. Ennius. Varro Attacinus. Q. Claud. Quadrigarius. M. Pacuvius. Titinins. Ccelius Antipater. L. Accius. L. Pomponius. Fabius Pictor. C. Lucilius. C. Sempronius Asellio. Cn. Gelhus. Sex. Turpilius. Cn. Matius. L. Piso, and others. L. Afranius. Of the works of the preceding writers, only a few fragments remain. M. Porcius Gate. Sex. Aurelius Propertius. P. Ovidius Naso. M. Accius Plautus. C. Sallustius Crispus. Q. Horatius Flaccus. M. Terentius Afer. M. Terentius Varro. C. Pedo Albinovanns. T. Lucretius Cams. Albius Tibullus. Gratius FaUscus. C. V^alerius P-ituIIus. P. Virgilius Marc. Phaedrus. P. SjTUS. T. Livius. C. Comificius. C Julius Csesai M. Manilius. A. Hurtius, or Oppius. C. Cornelius Nepoa. M. Vitruvius. P. Cornelius Severus. M. TuJlius Cicero. To these may be added the following names of lawyers, whose opinions are fraud in the digests : — Q. Mutius Scaevola. Alfenus Varus. M. Antistius Labeo. Masurins Sabinus. 01 the writers of the golden age^he most distinguished are Terence, Catot li's, Claesar, Nepos. Cia'«ro, Virgfl, Horace, Ovid, T. Livy, and Sallust 376 APPENDIX. WRITERS IN DIFFERENT AGES. § 329 WRITERS OF THE SILVER AGE. A. P. J.. A. Q. M. L. Cornelius Celsus. Velleius Paterculus. Junius Moderatus Columella. Pomponius Mela. Persius Flaccus. Asconius Pediauus. Annseus Seneca. Annseus Seneca. M. Annseus Lucanus. T. Petronius Arbiter. C. Plinius Secundus. C. Silius Italicus. C. Valerius Flaccus. C. Julius Solinus. D. Junius Juvenalis. P. Papinius Statins. M. Valerius IVlart'ialis. M. Fabius Quintilianus. Sex. Julius Frontinus. C. Cornelius Tacitus. C. Plinius Csecilius S» cundus. L. Annseus Floras. C. Suetonius TranqTiil lus. The age to which the following writers should be assigned is somewhat on. certain : — Scribonius Largus. L. Fenestella. Q. Curtius Rufus. Valerius Probus. Sulpitia. Atteius Capito. Of the writers of the silver age, the most distinguished are Celsus, Velleius, Columella, the Senecas, the Plinies, Juvenal, QuintDian, Tacitus, Suetonius, and Curtius. WRITERS OF THE BRAZ5eN AGE. A. Gellius. L. Apuleius. Q. Septimius Tertullia- nus. Q. -Serenus Sammoni- cus. Censorinus. Thascius Caecilius Cyprianus. T. Julius Calpumius. M. AureliusNemesianus. .^lius Spartianiis. Julius Capitoliuus. ^lius Lampridius. Vulcatius Gallic anus. Trebellius Pollio. Flavins Vopiscus. Ccelius Aurelianus Flavins Eutropius. Rhemnius Fannius. Amobius Afer. L. Ccelius Lactantius. .Slius Donatus. C. Vettus Juvencus. Julius Firmicns. Fab. Marius Victorinus. Sex. Rufus, or Rufus Festus. Ammianus Marcel- linus. Vegetius Renatus. Aurel. Theodorus Macro« bius. Q. Aurelius Symmachus D. Magnus Ausonius. Paulinus Nolanus. Sex. Aurelius Victor. Aurel. Prudentius els' mens. CI Claudianus. MarceUus Empiricui Falconia Proba. Of an Age not etUirely certat». Valerius Maximus. Jastinus. Terentianus Maurus. Minutius Felix. Sosipater Charisiwi. ^''lavius Avi&aus. The opinions of the following lawyers are found in the digests : — Licinius Prociilus. Neratius Prisons. P. Juventius Celsus. Priscus Jabolenus. Domitius Ulpianus. Herennius Modestinus. Salvius Jnlianus. Caius. Callistratus. jEmilius Papinianus. Julius Paulus. Sex. Pomponius. Venuleius Saturuirm^ jElius Marcianus. .^lius GaUus, and other* Of the wi-iters of the brazen age, Justin, Terentianus, Victor, Lactantius, and Claudian, are most distinguished. Th 8 age to which the following writsrs belong is uncertain. The style of some of them would entitle them to be ranked with the writers of the preced- ing ages, while that of others would place them even below those of tne iron §329. APPENDIX. WRITERS IN DIFFERENT A.GES. 377 PaUadius RutUius Tau- rus ^milianus. ^inilius Macer. Messala Corvinus. Vibius Sequester. Julius Obsequens. L. Ampelius. Apicius Coelius. Sex. Pompeius Festus. Probus (auctor Nota- rum.) Fulgentius Planci&des. Hj'ginus. C. Caesar Germanicus. P. Victor. P. Vegetius. Auctores Priapeiorum. Catalecta Virgilii et Ovidii. Auctor orationis SallustH in Cic. et Ciceronis in Sail. ; item illius Anti- qttam irei in eauiliwn. Auctor Epistolae ad Oo- tavium. Auctor Panegyrlci ad Pisonem. Declamationes quae tri- buuntur Quintiliano, Porcio Latroni, Calpur- nio Flacco. Interpres Daretis Phry- gii, et Dictyos Ore- teusis. ScholiastfE Veteres. Grammatici Antiqui. Ehetores Antiqui. Medici Antiqui. Catalecta Petroniana. Pervigilium Veneris. Poeniatia et Epigramm*i ta Vetera a Pithseo col- lecta. Monumentum Ancyra* num. Fasti Consulares. Inscriptiones Veteres. WRITERS OF THE IRON AGE. 01. Rutilius Numatianus. Servius Honoratus. D. Hieronymus. D.,Augustimis. Sulpicius Severus. Paulus Orosius. Ccplius Sedulius. Codex Theodosianus. Martiauus CapeUa. Claudianus Mamertus. Ridoniu') ApoUinaris. Latinus Pacatus. . Claudius Mamertinus, et alii, quorum sunt Pan- egyrici veteres. Alcimus Avitus. Manl. Severinus Bofi- thius. f Priscianus. Nonius MarcelluB. JuBtiniani InatitatiocM et God«x Ruf. Festus Avienus. Arator. M. Aurelius Cassidoms. Fl. Cresconius Corippus, Venantius Fortunatus. Isidorus Hispaleusis. Anonymus Ravennas. Aldhelmus or Althelmu* Paulas Diaconu*. 83* i N D E X . The fijfures In the fol owing Index designate the Sections and their divisions : e. stands for remark, N for nctt, ■. for exception, w. for with, and pr. for frosody. A, sound of, 7 and 8'; nouns in, of Ist deol., 41; gender of, 41; of 8d decl. gender of, 66; genitive of, 68, 2; in ace. sing, of masc. and fern. Greek nouns, 79 and 80; in nom. ace. ar,d voc. plur. of all neuter nouns, adjectives and participles, 40, 8; 83,1.; 85; 87; 105,2; verbals in, 102, 6, (c); change of in compd. verbs, 189; increment in, 3d decl., 287, 3; in plur., 288; of verbs, 290; ending the first part of compds., 286, B. 4; final, quautitj- of, 294. A, ah. ribs, how used, 195, B. 2, and 10; in composition, 196, i., 1; before the abl. of distance, 236, R. 6; ah, i/e, or ex, with abl. of depriviug, etc., 251, B. 1. Abbreviations, 328. AhJirii, constr. of, 251, E. 2. Abest mihi, 226, B. 2; nan multum abest gjiin. 262, N. 7. Ahhinc, 253. B. 2. Ablative. 37; sing. 3d decl., 82; of adjs. of 3d decl., 113; plur. Ist decl., 40, r. 6, and 43; 2d decl., 40, a. 6; 3d decl., 84; 4th decl., 89,5; used adverbially, 192, i.,n. ; of character, quality, etc., 2ll, R. 6; after prepositions, 241; after compd. verbs, 242; after o]nts and asus, 243; after dignua, etc. 244; after utor, etc., 245, l. ; after nitor, etc., 245, n. ; after parts, denoting origin, 246; of cause, etc., 247; of means and agent, 248 ; of means, 249, I. ; of accord- ance, 249, u. ; of accompaniment, 249, in. ; denoting in what respect, 250; after adjec- tives of plenty or want, 250, 2, (1.); after verbs of abounding, etc., 250, 2, (2.); after fftno and sum. 250, R. 3; after verbs of de- priving, etc., 251; of price, 252; of time when, 253; of place where, 254; of place whence, 255. 1; of place by or through which 255, 2 ; after comparatives, 256 ; of degree of difference, 256, R. 16; abl. ab.so- lute, 257; how translated, 257, N. 1; equiv- alent to what, 257. K. 1; only with pres. and perf. parts., 257, R. 2; without a parti- ciple. 2.")". R. 7; with a clause, 257, R. 8; how it marks the time of an action, 256, E. 4; noun wanting, 256, E. 9. Abounding and wanting, verbs of, with I abl. 256 with gen. 220, (3.) I "About to do," how expressed, 162, H, "abo\»ttobe done," how expressed, 162. 14, R. 4. Abstineo, w. abl., 251, n.; vix or i^-^-re ah stineo. quin, 262, N. 7. Abstract nouns, 26 ; formation from adjs 101; their terminations, 101, land 2, (3.); from verbs. 102. Abnndo,2bO, (2.) R. 1. -abus, dat. and abl. plur. in, 43. Ac or atque, 198, 1, R. (h.) and 2. R. ; in stead of ijriani. 256, R. 15; ac si withsubj. 263, 2, and R. Acatalectic ver.se, 304, 3, (1.) Accent in English, 16; place of secondary accent, 16, 1 and 2 ; in Latin, 14 and 15 ; of dissyllables, 14. 4; of polysyllables, 14, 4, and 15 — written accents, 5, 2, and 14, 2. Accentuation, 14r— 16. Accidents of nouns, 26, 7; of verbs, 141. Accipio, w. part, in diis, 274, R. 7. Accompaniment, abl. of, 249, in. Accordance, abl. of, 249, n. Achi'Vom for Achivormn , 53. -acis, genitives in, 78. 2, (1.) Accusative, 37; sing., terminal letter of in masculines and feminines, 40, 2 ; plural, terminal letter of in do., 40, 7; of 3d decl., 79; of Greek nouns. 80; plur. 3d decl., 85; do. of adjs. of 3d decl., 114; neuter in all declensions, sing and plur., 40. 8; in fwi and im, 79; of Greek nouns in im. in, or a, 79, (6.) and 80; in idem, 80, e. 1; in yyn or yn, 80, n. ; in ea, 80, m. ; in etem, eia, cti, or en, 80, rv. ; neuter used adverbially, 192, n., 4, and 205, R. 10 ; ace. after verbs, 229— 234; omitted, 229, r. 4: inf. or a clause i;i- stead of. 229, R. 5; of a person after nnsfni. etc., 229, R. 6; after jm-at, etc., 229, R. 7; after neuter verbs, 232; after compound verbs, 233; after verbal nouns and verl.'al adjs., 233, n.; of part affected, 234, n. ; a limiting ace. instead of the abl. in partim, vicem, cetera, etc., 234, n., R. 3; after pre- positions, 235; of time and space, 2."fi ; of place, 237; after adverbs and ir'terject'ons, 238; ace. as subject, 239; ace. of the thing supplied by the inf., 270, N., lu'c. w. inf., 272; do. exchanged for the sul^vnstive INDEX. 379 E7S, 8. — two aocusatives after certain verbs, 230 and 231; ace. of thing retained in pas- five voice, 234; place8 supplied by infini- tives, 229, H.2; pred. ace. how supplied, ib. N. 4. Accusing and acquitting, verba of, oonstr., 217, and b. 4. Accusn. constr., 217, and B. 2 — 5. Acephalous verse. 304, 3, (3.) Acer, declined, 108, I. Achilles, declined, 86. Acquiesco, 245, il., 3. Acute accent, 5, 2, and 14, 2 ; when used, 1 a% O. Active voice. 141. Active verb, 141 ; used impersonally, 184, 2 ; object of act. verb, 229 ; two jases after, 229, R. 1 ; verb omitted, 229, r. 3. Afl, how used, 195. r. 5 ; in composition, 196. 1.2; construction of verbs compound- ed \vith, 224 ; a'/ used for in, 224, R. 4. Adde quod, 273, N. 8. Additions to simple subject, 202, 6, etc. ; to simple predicate, 203, 6, etc. Adeo, adv., 191, R. 5 ; adeo non, 277, r. 14.— verb, constr., 2*3. 3, and N. -odes, patronymics in, 100, 1, (a.) Adest. 1/1(1, with subj., 264, 6. Adhuc luconim, 212, R. 4, N. 4. Adipiscor, w. gen., 220, ijin. Adjectives, 104 — 131 ; classes of, 104, 1 16 ; declension cf, 105 ; of 1st and 2d decls 105—107 : of Sd declension, 108—114 ; of three termiuahons. 108 ; of two termina- tions, 109, 110 ; of one termination. 111 ; their gen. sing., 112 ; their abl. sing. 113 ; their nom., ace., and gen. plur., 114 ; irreg- ular, 115—116 ; defective, 115 ; redundant, 116 ; numeral, 117—121 ; cardinal, 117, 118 ; ordinal, 119, 120 ; multiplicative, 121, 1 ; proportional, 121, 2; temporal, 121, 3: in- terrogative, 121, 5 ; comparison of, 122 — 127; irregular comparison, 125; defective jompari.son, 126 ; derivation of. 128—130 ; composition of, 131 ; ampliflcative, 128, 4 ; patrial, 128, 6 ; verbal, 129 ; participial, 130 ; composition of 131 ;— how modified, 202, II., 1. (2.) ; agreement of, 205 ; quali- fying and limiting, 205, N. 1 ; modifiers or predicates, 205, n.2; with two or more nouns, 205, R. 2 ; with a collective noun, 205, R. 3 ; sing, with a plur. noun, 205, R. 4 ; dat. of, for ace. in the predicate of MC. with the inf., 205, r. 6; without a noun, 205, r. 7 ; with infinitive, a clause, etc., 205, R. 8 : in the neuter with gen. of their noun, 205. r. 9. and 212, b. 3 ; neuter »djs. used adverbially, 205, R. 10 ; gender of, when used partitively, 205, r. 12 ; in genitive with po.s.sessive adj. or pronoun, 205. R. 13: agreeing with the governing noun instead of the genitive, 205, r. 14 : two or more with one noun, 205, r. 16; in.stead of an adverb. 205, R. 15 : first, last, etc. part e.xpre.s-sed by the adj. alone, 205, R. 17 ; agreeing with relative instead of its ■.ntcccdent, 206. (7.); with gen. 213; w. gen. or abl., 213, r. 5 | w. dat., 222 ; w gen. or dat., 2.13, a. 6, aid 222, a. 2; of plenty or want with abl., 250 . w. Inf. 270, a. 1 ; place of, 279, 7. ' ,,^ Adjective pronouns, 134—139; naturtoi; 132. 5; classes, 134; agreement, 205. Adjective clauses, 201, 7; how connect- ed, 201, 9. Adjunctive pronoun, 135, R. 1. Adjuvo and adjuto, constr., 223, e. 2, (2.) Admonishing, verbs of, w. gen . 218 ; other constructions, 218, R. 1 and 2; 273, n. 4. Adolescens, its gender, 30; as adj. how compared. 126,4. Adorning, verbs of, w. abl., 249. Adonic verse, 312. Adulari, constr., 223, R. 2, (h), and (1), (a.\ Adverbial correlatives, 191, b 1 ; — clauseg, 201,7,9. Adverbs, 190, 2—194; primitive, 191; of place and order. 191, i. ; correlative, 191, R. 1 ; of time, 191, ii. : of manner, quality, degree, 191, in.; division of, 191, H. 2;— derivation of, 192 ; numeral, 192, ii.. 3, and 119 ; diminutive, 192, iv., r. ; compo- sition of, 193 ; signification of some adverbs of time and manner, 193 ; — comparison of 194;— how modified, 277, i. ; used as adjec- tives, 205, R. 11; w. gen., 212, r. 4; w. dat.. 228, (1.); w. ace., 238; use of, 277; two negatives, force of, 277, r. 3 — 5; equiv- alent to phra,ses, 277, R. 8; of likeness, aa connectives, 278, r. 1; place of 279, 15. Adversative conjunctions, 198, 9. AdvfTsus, how used, 195, r. 7. M, how pronounced, 9. Miixudis, consti-uction of, 222, ft. 2. jEque with abl., 241, b. 2; cequt ac., 198, 3, R. JEqui boni facio OTconsido, 214, N. 1. JEquo and adcpquo, construction of, 214 ; CBquo, adj. w. comparatives, 256, R. 9. Aer, ace. of, 80, R. ; pr. 299, K. 3. 55olic pentameter, 312, ix. ^s, gender of, 61, 2; gen. of, 73, s. 2. ^stimo, constr., 214. JBSther, ace., 80, R. ; pr. 299, s. 3. ■hinc, 253, R. 2. Antecedent, 136; ellipsis of, 206, (3.), (4.), its place supplied by a demonstrative, 206, 3, (a.); in the case of the relative, 206, (6.), (6.); implied in a poseessive pronoun, 206, (12); may be a proposition, 206, (13.) Antecedo and antecello, constr., 256, R 16, (3.) Antepenult, 13; quantity of, 292. . Anlequam, constr., 263, 3. Antimeria, 323, 3, (1.) Antiphrasis, 324, 10. Antiptosis, 323, 3, (3.) Antithesis. 322; 324,27. Antonomasia, 324, 8. -anus, adja. in, 128, 6. Aorist tense, 145, iv., r. Apage, 183, 10. Apertuyn est, w. inf. as subject, 269, B. 2. Aphaeresis, 322. Apiscor and adipiscor, w. gen., 220. Aplustre, nom. plur. of, 83 and 94, 4. Apocope, 322. — Apodosis, 261. Apollo, gen. of, 69, e. 2. Aposiopesis, 824, 33. Apostrophe, 324, 35. Apparet, w. inf. as subject, 269, R. 2. Appellative nouns, 26, 3. Appello, constr., 230, n. 1. Appetens, w. gen., 213, R. 1, (2.) Appendix, 822—329. Apposition, 204; to two or moro nouns, 204. R. 5 ; to nouns connected by cum, 204, R. 5, (1.); to proper names of different gen- ders, 204, R. 5, (2.); genitive instead of, 204, R. 6; 211, R. 2, n. ; abl. with gen., 204, R. 7 ; of a proper name with nomen, etc., 204, R. 8; of a clause, 204, R. 9; of part* with a whole, 204, R. 10; 212, r. 2, n. 5; place of nouns in apposition, 279, 9. Apprime, 127,2; 193. Aptotes, 94. Aptus, constr.. 222, r. land 4, (1.); aptua qui, w. subj., 264, 9; w. gerund, 275, R. 2 and 3. Apud, 196, R. 6. -ar, nouns in, gender of, 66, 67 ; genitiv* of, 70, 71; abl. of, 82; increment of, 287, E. (A.)l. Arbitror, in imperf. subj., 260, R. 2. Arbor {-os), gender of, 61. Arceo, w. abl., 251, R. 2. Arcesso, constr., 217, R. 1. Archaism, 823, R.. (1.) Archilochiau verse, 304, 2;— penthemi meria, 812; — iambic trimeter, 314, v.; do INDEX. 381 limeter, 314, tii. ; — heptameter, 318, iv. ArenfT, aa gen. of place, 221, E. 3, (4.) Argo, genitive of, 69, b. 3. Argos (-g-i), 92, 4. Argito, constr., 217, B. 1. Aristophanic Terse, 304, 2. -ariitm 8nd -ariusy nouns and adjs. Id, 100,8; 128,3; 121,4. Arrangement of words, 279 ; poetical, 279, N 4; of clauses, 280. Ars, declined, 57. Arsis !ind thesis, 308. Article, wanting in Latin, 41, N. -as, genitives in, 43; nouns inof 3ddccl., gender of. 02 ; genitive of, 72 ; gen. plur. of, 83, II., 4: in ace. plur. of Greek nouns of 3d decl., S.5, E. 2. — -as and -anus, adjs. in, 128, 6; -as final, quantity of, 300. As. value of. 327; how divided, 327; — gender of, 62, e. 1; 72, e. 1; gender of p,arts ending in ns, 64, 2; assis non habere, 21i, E. 1. Asclepiadic verse, 304, 2; — tetrameter, 316, III. Asking, verbs of, with two aces., 231; constr. in the pass., 234, I. Aspergo, 249. i. and E. 1 and 3. Aspirate, 3, 1. Assf/iior, ut, 273, N. 2. -assn for -avero, 162, 9. nssuesco and assuefacio, w. abl., 245, II. ; w. ilat., 245, II., R. 1. Asyndeton, 323, 1, (1.) -at, roots of nouns in, 56, il., r. 5. • At, conj., 198, 9; at enim, atqui, 198, 9, («.) -atim, adverbs in, 192, i., 1. Ati/tie, composition and meaning, 198, 1, R. (6.) See ac. Attraction, 206, (6.); 209, N. Band R. 8; 210, R. 6; 272, n. 3. Attrihuo. w. participle in dus, 274, B. 7. -atus, adjs. in, 128, 7. Au, how pronounced, 9, 2 and R. 2. Auileo, how conjugated, 142, B. 2. Audio, conjugated, 160 ; used like appel- lor, 210, N. 2; constr., 272, n. 1; audes for audiex, 183, R. 3; — audiens, constr., 222, B. 1. -am, noans In, gender of, 62; genitive of, 76, B. 4. Ausculto, constr., 222, B. 2, (&.), and (1.), («•) Ausim, 183, r. 1. Aut a.nii vel, Ids, 2, R. (a.); aut and i'<, 198, 2. R. (r/.); aut— out, 198.2, R. («.); aut with the singular, 209, r. 12, (5.) Autem,KH,d; its position, 279, 3, e.); rillpsis of 278, R. 11. • Authority, in prosody, 282, 4. Au.xiliary verb, 153. -av and -atu in the 2d and 3d roots of verbs 164. Avarus, with gen., 213, R. 1. ■ yl(v.lS3. 8. Avidus, with gen. 213, R. 1; w. gen. of gerund, 275, (2.)- w. inf. poetically, 270, il. •iK, nouns in, gen. of, 78, 2, (1.); adjs. in, 129, 6; verbals in with geu., 213, a. 1. B. i B, roots of nouns ending in. 66, I. changed to p., 171, 2. Balneum, plur. -ea or -ece, 92, 6. Barbarism, 325, 1. Barbiton, declined, 64, 1. Belle, belUssime, 192, iv. R. Belli, construed like names of towns, ^^1. R. 3; if Ho, 253. Bene, derivation, 192, II., 1; constr. ol its compounds, 225, i. ; bene est, w. dat., 228,1; bene, w. ace, 239, R. 2; with verb* of price, 252, e. 3. -ber, names of months in, how declined, 71 and 108. Bes, gen. of, 73, b. 2. Bibi, pr., 284, e., (1.) Bicorpor, abl. of, 113, E. 2; 115, 1, {a.) Biduum, triduum, ete., biennium, etc., 121,2. -bilis, adjs. in, 129, 4; how compared, 126, 4; with dative, 222, r. 1. Bimestris, 113, E. 1. Bipes, genitive of, 112, 1; abl. of, 113, E. 2; 115, 1, (a.) Bonus, declined, 105, 2; compared, 125, 5; boni consulo, 214, n. 1. Bos, dat. and abl. plur. of, 84, E. 1; 286, 5; gender of, 30; genitive of, 75, e. 1; gen. plur., 83, II., E. 1. ■br, roots of nouns in, 56, ii., R. 3. Brachyeatalectic verse, 304, 3, (2.) Brazen age of lloman literature, 329, 4. -bru7n, verbals in, 102, 5. Bucolic csesura, 310, 6, r. 4. -bulum, verbals in, 102, 5. -bundus, adjs. in, 129, 1; comparison oi, 126, 5 ; wUh ace, 233, n. C. C, sound of, 10; before s in roots ot nouns, 56, i., r. 2; in roots of verbs, 171,1; gender of nouns in, 66; genitive of, 70; c final, quantity of, 299, 4 ; C. for Caius, i. q. Gaius, 328. CfElebs, 112,2; in abl. sing.. 113, k. 2; 115, 1, (a.) Caesura, 309 ; kinds of, 309 ; in hexametei verse, 310, 3; Ccesural pause, 309, 3; in hexameter verse, 4 — 6 ; in pentameter ver.se, 311.2; in iambic verse, 314, l.andx. ; in trochaic verse, 315, l ; in choriambic verse, 316, HI. Cnlco, change of a to « in its compds., 189, N. 3. Calendar, Roman, 326, 6. Oalends, 326. Callidus, 270, r. 1 ; 213, r. 1. Canalis, abl. of, 82, 5, (c.) Cano receptui, 227. R. 2. Capax, w. genitive, 213, r. 1. (1.), and R. 5, (1.) Crifiio. conjugated, 169; adjs. compuund cd of, 112. 2. Capital letters, how used by the Romany 2, 2; as numerals, 118, 7. Caput declined, 67; capitis and cctpile damnare, accusare, etc., 217, R. 8. 382 INDEX. * Carbasus , plur. -i and -a, 92, S. Cardinal numbers, 117 and 118. Careo, 250, 2, R. 1. Carmen, declined, 57. Caro, gender of, 59, 3; gen. of, 69, B 2j gen. plur., 83, ii., 5. Carthagini, in abl. of the place where, 82, E. 5, (c.) Case-endings, table of, 39. Ca.se8 of noums, 86 and 37. Casus rtcti and obliqui, 37, B. Cuvfa, gratid.^ etc. with med., etc., 247, a 2; their place with genitive, 279, B. Causal coijjunctions, 198, 7. Cause, abl. of, 247; after active verbs, 2^*7, R. 2; ace. of with prepositions, 247, H. 1. fViitso, change of au in its compounds, 189, N. 3. Cave or cave ne, w. subj., 267, B. 3; 262, N. 3. -ce and -cine, enclitic, 134, B. 4. Cedo, coustr., 223, R. 2, (1), (rf.) Cedo, imperative, 183, 11. Celer, how declined, 108; gen. plur., 114, E. 2. Celo, with two aces., 231 ; w. rfe, 231, B. 3. Censeo, 273, N. 4. Centena mUlia, ellipsis of, 118, 5. -ceps, nouns in, gen. of, 77, r; adjs. in, gender of, 112, 2; abl. of, 113, e. 2, and e. 3. Ceres, genitive, of, 73, e. 2. Certe and certo, 19?, N. 1. Certiis, 213, B. 1; 275, ni., (2.); 270, B.l. Cetera and reliqua for ceteris, 234, n., B. 8. Ceterum, 198, 8, R., (6.) Celt, w. subj., 263, 2. C/i, sound of, 10, 1; when silent, 12, a. ; in syllabication, 18, 2. Character or quality, gen. of, 211, e. 6. Chaos, 61, E. 3. Chelys, declined, 86. Choliambus, 314, il. Choriambic metre, 316; 303; — pentame- ter, 316, I.; — tetrameter, 316, n. ; — trime- ter, 316, IV. ; — trimeter catalectic, 316, v. ; — dimeter, 316, vi. Cicur, gen. plur. of, 114, e. 2. Circtim, in composition, 196, 4. Circumdo and circuvitundo, 249, a 3. Circumflex accent, 15, 2, and 14; bow used, 14, 3. , Cis and citra, eonstr., 235, B. 1. Citeritir, compared, 126. 1. Citiim, pr.. 284, E. 1, (2.) Clam, eonstr., 235, (5.) Clanndnm, 192, iv., R. ; 235, (5.); 126,1. Claudo, its compounds, 189, N. 3. Clause, 201, 13; as the subject of a pro- position, 202, in., R. 2; as an addition to the predicate, 203, n., 3; its gender, 34, 4; as the object of a verb, 229, R. 5 ; in abl. absolute, 256, R. 8; connection of clauses, 198, I. and ii . ; 278, R. 1 ; 280, m. ; arrange- ment of. 280; similar clauses, 278, n. 1. Climax. 324, 21. Clothing, verbs of, 249, I. CceUsiis, abl. of, 113, B. 1; gen. plur. of, 114. B. 0. dalum, plcT. cali, 92, 4. Cam, w. gen. of price, 214, n. 1, (V.) Cixpi and captvs sum, 183. 2. Cognate object, 232; — subject, 234, ill. Cognitus, pr., 285, 2, Ei 1. Cognomen follows the gentile name, 2TS> 9, (b.) Cognominis, abl. of, 113, E. 1. Cogo, 273, N. 4. -cola, compounds in, gen. plur. of, 43, 2 Collective nouns, 26, 4; number of theil verbs, 209, r. 11. Com for cu7n in composition, 196, &| 197, 5. Comitiis, as abl. of time, 253, n. 1. Common, nouns, 26, 3; — gender, 30;— syllables, 282, 2; 283, iv., e. 2. Commoneo and comTnonefacio , eonstr., 218; 273, s. 4. Communis, eonstr., 222, b. 2, (a.) and! 6, (a.) Commuto, eonstr., 252, r. 5. Compar., gen. plur. of, 114, K. 2. Comparn, eonstr.. 224, N. 1. 3. Comparative conjunctions, 198, 3. Comparative degree. 122, 5; uses of, 122. R. 1, 2, 3; formation of, 124; by 7)iagis, 127, 1.— comparatives declined, 110; abl. sing, of, 113, 2; w. gen., 212, R. 2,; denotes one of two, 212, b. 2., n. 1; w. abl., 256; used pleonastically , 2."i6, R. 12, 13. Comparison, 25; of adjs., 122 — 127; de- grees of, 122, 3; terminal, 124; — irregular, 125 ; defective, 126 ; by niagis and maxime, 127 ;— of adverbs, 194. * Complex subject, 202, 1, 3, 6; complex predicate, 203, 1, 3, 6; complex sentence, 201, 11. Coniplures. how declined, 110. Compnno, eonstr., 224, N. 1, 3, and B. 4. Compos and impos, gen. of, 112, 2 ; ahl of, 113, E. 2; 115, 1, (a.); pr. 300, e. 3. Composition of nouns, 103; — of adjs.. 131 ;— of verbs. 183 ;— of adverbs, 193. Compound verbs, how conjugated, 163, 4;— subject, 202, 4;— predicate,^ 203, 4;— sentence, 201, 12 ; — metres, 318 ; — words, in syllabication, 23; — nouns, declension of, 91 ; how formed, 103 ; quantity of compd. words, 285. Con, adjs. compd. with, w. dat., 222, r. 1; verbs compd. with, w. dat., 224; w. cum, 224, R. 4. Concedo, eonstr., 273, N. 5; 274, B. 7. Concessive conjunctions, 198, 4. Concors, and discors, geu. of, 112, 2; tbl. of, 113, E. 2. Concrete, nouns, 26, B. 2. ; — adjs., 101, B. ; usa8 for abstracts, in expressions of time, 253, r. 6. Conditio, in abl., 249, n. Conditional conjunctions, 198, 5. Conduco, with part, in diis. 274, R. 7. Condemning, verbs of, w. gen., 217. Confero, w. dat, 224, N. 1, 3. Co)i)if/o, w. abl.,24f', ii.; w. dai, 246, B.l Gonfit, l83, 12; 180, N. Confinis, 222, B. 1. Congruo, 224, N. 1, 3, and R. 4. Conjugation, 25; 149; first, 156 166, second, 157; third, 158, 169; fourth, Ifltt INDEX. 388 of depcnent verbs, 161; periphrastic, 162; fsneral rules of, 163; of irregular verbs, rS — 182; of defective verbs, 183; of imper- sonal verbs, 1"^4; regular and irregular verbs iu the four conjugations, 164 — 177. — conjugations, how characterized, 149; re- marks on, 162. Conjunctions, 198; classes of, 198; coor- dinate, 198, 1.; subor-iinate, 198, n.; encli- tics, 198, N. 1; copuUtive and diiyunctive, their use, 278 ; use of coordinate and sub- ordinate coujs., 193, R. 1; repeated, 278, R. 7; when omitted between adjs., 205, k. 16 ; — between words opposed, 278, B. 6. Ciinjungo, 224, N. 1, 3, and R. 4. Conjunclus, 222, R. 6. Conjux, gender of, 30: gen. of, 78, 2, (5.) Connecting vowel, 150, 5; omitted in 2d root, 163, 2; in verbal nouns, 102, 5, (ft.); in verbil adj.s.. 129, land 4, (6.); in compd. nouns and adjs., 1U3. R. 1. ; 131, N. Connection of tenses. 2-58; — of words by conjunctions, 278; — of clauses by do., 278, B. 3. Connectives, 201, 8, 9; place of, 279, 3. Conor, 271, N. 1. Consents, 213, R. 1; 275, lit., (2.) Consentaneus. w. dat., 222, R. 1, w. abl., 222. R. 6; consenlnneum erat, the indie, in- itead of the subj., 259, R. 3, (a.); with inf. B8 subject, 269, r. 2. Consentio, w. dat., 224, N. 1, 3. Consequor, tit, 273, N. ^. CoHsi'/o. 241, R. 5. Consonant.^. 3, 1; division of, ib.; double, B. 1, 2; sounds of, 10—12. Consors, 213, R. 1. Constat, w. inf. as subject, 269, B. 2. Constituo, 272, s. 1. Q)nsto, w. abl., 245, ii., 5. Consuetudo est, constr., 262, b. 3, N. 2. Consufsco, 245, n., 3. Contendo, 273, N. 1. Conlentus, w, abl., 244; w. perf. inf., 268, B. 2. CorUenninus, w. dat., 222, K. 1. (o.) Conlinens, abl. of, 82, E. 4, (a.) Continental pronunciation of Latin, 6. Cojitin^it, conjugation, 184; w. itt, 262, R. 3 ; w. dat. and inf., 262, R. 3, N. 1. ContinuO, 193, n., 1. Contra, how used, 195, B. 7. Contracted syllables, quantity of, 283, III. Contractions iu 2d root of verba, 162, 7. Convenio, 233, n. Convenit, the indie, for the subj., 259, • 3; w. inf.. 269, r. 2. ConL-ineo, 217, R. 1. Copia est. w. inf., 270, B. 1, (c.) Copula, 140, 4. Copulative conjs., 198,1; repeated, 198, K.(e.) Cor. gender of, 61; genitive of, 71, k. 2; Bompds. of, 112, 2. Correlative adjs,, 139, (2.), (3 ); 104, 14;— tdverbs, 191, r. 1. Comu, declined, 87. Crasis, 306, (5.) and 322. Crater, genitiv* of, 71. Credo, 272, aci b. 6; — crederts, in ttM sense of a pluperfect, 260, ii., B. 2; — ere dendum est, 271, R. 2. Creo, nascor, etc., 246, R. 1. Crime, in genitive after verbs, 217. Crimine, without a preposition, 217, R. 2, (ft.) Crude form or root, 40, 10. -crum, verbals in, 102, 5. Ct, initial, 12, 3. Cui and huic, how pronounced, 9, 5; pr. 306, R. 2. Cujas, how declined, 139, 4, (ft.) Cujus. how declined, 137, 5 ; cujusmodi, etc., 134, R. 5. -cidum, verbals in, 102,5; contracted to -clum, 102, 5, (ft.) -cuius, a, um, diminutives in, 100, 3, and B.,1, 2; 128,5. Cum, prep., afflsed to abl., 241, r. 1; 133, R. 4; 136, R. 1; how used, 19o, R. 11; w. abl. of manner, 247, 2 ; in composition, 196, 5. Cum or quum, mood of the verb following it, 263, 5. Cum, ' while,' 263, 6, R. 4. -cumque, used to form general indefinites, 191, R. 1, (ft.); 139, 5, R. ; composition and meaning, 139, 5, n. 1; sometimes separated from qui, etc., .323, 4 (5.) Cumprimis. its meaning, 193, ll., 2. Cuncti and omnes, w. gen. plur. 212, a. 2, N. 6. -cundus, adjs. in, 129, 1. Cupido, gender of, 59, r. 2. Cupyus, constr., 213, r. 1; 275, (2.); 270, R. 1. Cupio, 271, R. 4; eupiens, 213, R. 1, (2.) Curo, 273, n. 1; 274, R. 7; curaut, 267, R.3. Curritur, conjugated, 184, 2, (6.) Custos, gender of, 30; 61, 3; genitive, 76, E. 1. D. D final in prosody, 299, 2; before * in roots of nouns, 56, r. 1 ; in roots of verba, 171, 3, and e. 5. Da, pr., 284, b. 2, (ft.) Dactylic metre, 310 and 303; — ^trimeter, 312, VI. ; — dimeter, 312, vii. ; — hexameter, 310, I. Dactylico-iambic meter, 318, i. ; dao tylico-trochaic heptameter, 318, iv. ; — teti»- meter, 318, v. Damn, gender of, 42, 2. Daynni infeeti satisdo, etc., 217, R. 3. Dative, Si; sing, of 3d decl., 79; plur. always like abl., 40, 6; exceptions In do 1st decl., 43; of 3d decl., 84; of 4th decl., 89, 6; used for predicate nom.j 210, n. 3; for gen., 211, r. 5; commodi et incommodi, 222, land 2; dative of the end, 227; dat. of the object, after adjs., 222; different con- structions instead of, 2^, r. 4 and 6; after idem, 222, R. 7; after verbs, 223—227; after verbs compounded with ad, ante, etc., 224: with aft, ex, de, circuin and contra, 22-1, R. 1 and 2; with dis, 224, R. 3; with salts, ften* and male, 225, l- ; dat. of the agent, 226, a. 884 INDEX. and in.; of the poseesBor after est, 226; after particles, 228 ; dat. with the ace, 223, (1.); two datives after sum, etc., 227; want- ing, 225, III., R.: dativus ethicus, 228, r. Datum, pr., 284, e. 1, (2.) De, 195, a. 12: with abl. instead of ace, 229.R. 5, (6.); 231, e. 3. Dea, dat. and abl. plur. of, 43. Debehat, indie. in.stead of Bubj., 259, R. 3. Decedo, w. abl., 251. Decerno, 273, n. 1 and 4. Decet, conjugated, 184; its construction, 229, R. 7; 223, r. 2,(6.); indie, for subj., 259, R. 3. Declarative sentences, 200, 3. Declaro, 230, n. 1. Declension, 38; parts of speech declined, 25, 3 ; of nouns, 38—40 ; rules of, 40 ; first, 41 — 45; exceptions in do., 43: paradigms of, 41 ; — second, 46 — 54 : paradigms of, 46 ; exceptions in do., 52; third, 55 — 86; para- digms of, 57; exceptions in do., 68 — 85; fourth, 87 — 89; paradigms of, 87; excep- tions in do., 89; formed by contraction, 89 ; fifth, 90 ; paradigms, 90 ; exceptions in, 90 ; -of acljs., Ist and 2d. 105—107 ; third, 108— 111; — declensions, how distinguished, 38; tabular view of, 39. Dedi, pr., 284, 2, e. 1. Deest mihi, 226, R. 2 ; pr., 306, 1, R. 1, (1.) Defective nouns, 94-— 96; — adjs., 115; — verbs, 183. Defendo, 251, R. 2. Defero, w. gen. of the crime, 217, R. 1. Defi.cior, w. abl., 250, 2, R. 1. D'efit, 183, 13, and 180, N. ; 226, R. 2. Deflecto, 229. r. 4. DefungoT, 245, i. Degree, ace. of, 231, E. 5; 232, (3.) Degrees of comparison, 122 and 123; in- ferior degrees, 123, 1 ; equal degrees, 123, 3; a small degree, 123, 2 ; superior degrees va- riously expressed, 127, 2, 3, 4. Dejero, 189, N. 3; pr., 285, 2, e. 1. Dein, deinceps, deinde, pr., 306, 1, R. 1, (1-) Delectat, conjugated, 184; its construc- tion, 229, R. 7; 223, R. 2. Delector, w. guod, 273, n. 6. Deligo, w. two aces., 230, N. 1. -dem, enclitic, 134, R. 6. Demonstrative adjs., 104, 15; 139, 5, R.; — pronouns, 134; constr. of, 207; in appo- rtion to a clause, 207, R. 22; 206, (3.); used when the reference is not to the subject, 208, (6.); place of, 279, 7; ellipsis of de- monstratives before their relatives, 206, (3.), (a.); constr. of dem. adjs., 206, (16.); dem. ad vs. for dem. pronouns, 206, (20.); dem. pronouns is, etc., used for the oblique cases Itim, her, etc., 207, R. 20; redundant, 207, R. 21; dem. prons. and advs. announcing a proposition, 207, R. 22. Demove.o, w. abl., 251, n. Denarius, value of, 327, R. 3; divisions of, ib. Deniqut, its use, 277, I., R. 13. Denominatives, adjs., 128 ; — verbs, 187, 1. Dens, gender of, 64, 1 ; conapds. of, 64, 1. Depello, w. abl., 251, n. Dependence, defined, 203, ill , 8; o tenses, 258. Dependent or subordinate propositions, 201, 6. • Deponent verbs, 142, r. 4; conjugated, 161 ; participles of, 162, 17 ; lists of in Ist conj., 166; 2d conj., 170; 3d conj., 174; 4th conj., 177; increment of, 289, 3. Deposco, 274, R. 7. Depriving, verbs of, w. abl., 251. Derivation of nouns, 100; — of adjs.. 128 —of verbs, 187;— of advs., 192. Derivative words, quantity of, 284. Deses, gen. of, 112, 1; abl. of, 113, S. 2; defective, 115, 2 ; compared, 126, 4. Desiderative verbs, 187, II., 3; 176, n.j quantity of the u in, 284, e. 3. Designo, \nth two aces., 230, N. 1. Desjiero, constr., 224, R. 1. Desuper and insuper, 235, E. 8. Deterior, compared, 126, 1. Deterreo, quin, tie, or quominus, 262, R. 11; w. inf. ib. n. Deturbo, w. abl., 251, N. Dexter, how declined, 106; how conv pared, 125, 4. Deus, declined, 53; deum for deorum, 53. Di or dii, 53 ; ellipsis of, 205, R. 7. -di or -dis, see -dis. Diceresis, 806, 2 ; mark of, 5, 2. Dialysis, 306, R. Diana, pr. 282, I., E. 5. Diastole, 307, 2. Dico, w. two aces., 230, N. 1; ellipsis of, 229, E. 3, 2: 209, R. 4; 270, R. 2, (6.); w.inf. and ace, 272, n. 1; w. ict, 273, 2, (c.);- diciint, ' they say,' 209, r. 2, (2.); dicor, w. predicate nominative, 210, R. 3, (3.), (a.) and N. 1, cf 271, R. 2; 272, r. 6; die, im- perative, 162, 4. Dieolon, 319, 2. Dido aiuJiens, w. dat., 222, R. 1; dicto, w. comparative, 256, R. 9. -dicus, words ending in, pr., 284, 2, e. 1. Dido, declined, 86 ; genitive of, 69, e. 3. Dies, declined, 90; its gender, 90, e. 1, compds. of with numerals, 121, 3; quantity of, 285, E. 4, E. 3, (6.) Difference, degree of, how expressed, 25'1, R. 10. Differo, constr., 251, R. 3, N. ; 229, R. 4, 1. Differing, verbs of, 251, R. 3. Difficile est, the indie, for the subj., 259, R. 4, (2.); with an inf. as subject, 269, r. 2; with supine in u, 276, in., R. 1; w. ad and a gerund, 276, in., r. 4. Digne, w. abl., 244, R. 1. Dignor, w. abl., 244, R. 1; w. ace. of tie person, ib. ; w. inf., ib. ; w. two aces., ib. Dignus, w. abl. of the thing, 244; w.gen. 244, R. 2, (a.): w, ace. ot neut. pron. or adj., 244, R. 2, (a.); w. inf. or a subj. clause, 244, r. 2, (6.); with relative and subj., 264, 9; w. supine in u, 276, iii., x. 1. Duneter, 304, 2. Diminutive nouns, 100, 3; — adjs., 104, 11 128,5;— verbs, 187, il., 4 ;— adverbs, 192, a Diphthongs, 4; sOQBds oS, 9; qnantitj of, 13 4; 288, U. Dlptotee, 9ft. INDEX. 385 Dir for rfn, 196, (6.). 2. Dis or (li, inseparabja prep., 196, (*.), 2; Bonstruction of some verbs compounded with, 251, B. 3, N. ; pr., 285, 2, E. 2. -dis, genitiveB in, 77, K. 1 ; rfw, adj., gen. plur. of, 114, s. 3. Discerno, 251, E. 3, N. ; In impeif. subj. torpluperf,260, ii., R. 2. Discolor, abl. of, 113, K. 2. Discordo and discrepo, 261, K. 8, and W. Disertus, pr., 28i, E. 6, 2, N. 1. Disjunctive conjs., 198, 2. Dissideo, constr., 251, E. 8, and N. Dimmilis, 222, r. 1, and r. 2. Distich, 304. Dhtin^uo and disto, 251, r. 3, and n. Distributive numbers, 119, 120 ; gen. plur. of, 105, R. 4; used for cardinal numbers, 120, 4;— for multiplicatives, 120, 4, (6.) Distrophon, 319, 3. Div, compared, 104, 6. Dives, gen. sin,;. 112, 1; gen. plur., 114, E.2; 115, 1. (rt.) Division of'words Into syllables, 1" — 23. Do, 149, E. ; w. perf. participles, 274, R. 4 ; w. participles in dus, 274, a. 7 ; incle- ment of, 290, E. ; 284, e. 4. -rfo, nouns in, gender of, 59,2; genitive of, 69, E. 1. Doceo, 231, R. 1 ; w. gen. of price, 214, n. 1. Doleo, w. (fuod, etc., 273, n. 7. Dominus, declined, 46. Domus, declined, 89; different use of dornils and domi, 89, (a.); constr. of gen., 221, R. 3; of ace, 237, R. 4; of abl., 255, E. 1; 254, R. 2. Donee, w. subj., 263, 4; pr., 299, 4, e. ■ Dono. w. abl., 249, i., e. 1; w. two da- tives, 227, E.l. Dos, gen. of, 61*, 3 ; doii dicare, 227, E. 2. Double consonants, 3, 1. Doubtful gender, 30. Dubito and non dubito, 262, N. 7 and 8; dubito an, 198, 11, («.); dubito sit tie, etc., «62, N. 8. Duco, constr., 214; 227, R. 1; 230, N. 1; innum-iT3. or in loco, 230, n. 4; due, im.- perat.. 162, 4. Dudum and jamdudum, 191, E. 6. Ditim, duis. etc., 162, 1. Dum, w. sultj., 263, 4; dumne and dum- modo ne,2^2, N ; rfjim. ' until,' 263, 4, '1.); — 'while 263. 4, (2.) — compounded with a negative, 277, R. 16. Duntaxat, 193, ii., 3. Duo, declined, 118; duuin for duorum, 118, E. 1. -dus, participle in, how declined, 103, fl. 2 ; of neuter deponent verbs, 161 ; with turn, 162, 15 , neuter in .dum with tst, 274, B. 11 ; w. dat. of person, 162, 15, R. 6 ; 225, in.; of dep. verbs, 162, 17, (6.); w. ace, 2.34, R. 2 ; its signification, 2(4, 2, e. 7 and 8: used for a gerund, 275, li. E. E. sound of, 7 and 8 ; S changed to u or }, 66, K. 4 and 5 ; uom. in d in 3d decl., 56, i, £.1,7; gender of nouns in < :>f 3d decl., 66; genitive ofj6J; abl. of, 82, old lat. in, 79; ace. plur. in, 54, 5; nom. plur. in, 83, I., 1 ; voc. in, 81, R. ; in gen. and dat. sing. 5th decl., 90, b. 2; cf 40, 11; advs. in, 192, ir. ; syncope of in imperf. of 4th conj., 162, 2: increment in t of 3d decl., 287, 3; plur., 288 ; of verbs, 290 ; e ending the first part of a compound word, 285, E. 4; e final, quantity of, 295. — < or ex, prep., see ex. -fa, Greek ace. sing, ending in, 54, 6, and 80, m. Eapse, etc., 135, R. 3. Ecee, compounded with demonstrative pronouns, 1^, R. 2; w. nom., 209, R. 13; w. ace, 238, 2. Eccum, eccillum, eccistam, etc., 134, e. 2; 238, 2. -ecis, gen. in, 78, (2.) Ecguis and ecgui, how declined, 137, 3, and R. 3; ecquee and ecqua, 137, 3, r. 4, ecguis est qui, 264, 7, N. 2 ; ecquid, interrog. particlCj 198, 11, and a. a and b. Ecquisnam, 137, 4. Ectasis, 307, 2, (3.) EcthUpsis, 305, 2. Edepol, 199, R. 3. Edico, 273, N. 4. Edim, edis, etc., 162, 1. -edis, gen. in, 73, E. 1 and 112, 1. Editus, w. abl., 246. Edo, ' to eat,' conjugated, 181 ; compda. of, 181, n. -edo, abstracts in, 101, 1. Eiloceo, w. two aces., 231, R. 1. Ejficio, 273, N. 2; — efficiens, w. gen., 213, R. 1, (2.); — efficitur, w. ut, or the ace. with the inf , 262, R. 3, n. 1. Etfugio, w. ace, 233, R. 1. Egeo and indigeo, 260, 2, B. 1 ; 220, 3. -«gis, genitives in, 78, 2. Ego, decUned, 133. Eheu, pr., 283, i., E. 5. El, how pronounced, 9, 1, and R. 1; gen- itive in, 73, R. ; pr., 283, i., e. 6, (1.) -eia, verbals in, 102, 3. -eis, fern, patronymics in, 100, 1, (i.) — ace plur. in. 85, e. 1, and 114, 2. -eius, pr., 28-3, 1., E. 6, (3.) Ejus, use of, 208, (6.) Ejusjnodi and. ejusdemmodi, 139, 6, N. 2 -ela, verbals in, 102, 3. Elegiac ver.se, 311, R. 2. Ellipsis, 323; of pronoun in case of appo- sition, 204. R. 4; of the noun of an adj., 205, R. 7; 252. r. 3; of the antecedent. 206, (3.) and (4.); of meus. etc., 207, R. 38; of nom., 209, r. 2 and 3; of verb, 209, r. 4; 229, R. 3 ; of a noun limited by a genitive, 211, R. 8; of gen., 211, r. 9; of a partitive, 212. R. 1, N. 3; of subject ace, 2;39; 269, R. 1; of ace after transitive verb, 229, K. 4; of prep., 232, (2.); 235, R. 5; 241, r. 4; 248, B. 3 ; of voc, 240; ofquatn, 256; of partici- ple. In abl. absol., 257, R. 7; of ut w. subj., 262, R. 4; of «€ after cni-e, 262, r. 6; of non after non niodo, etc., 277, K. 6; of conjunc- tions, 278, R. 6; of ^' in conipo-sition, 307; of centena milUa, 327, R. 6. •ellus, a, um, diiuiuutives in, 100, 3, A. 3. 386 INDEX. -em ind -en, aces. in,45, 1; 80, iv.; -em Id ace sing. 3d decl., 79, 80. Bm N 252, R. 1. Em hatio word, its place in a sentence, 279. 2 and 16. Sn. inteiTOgatiye particle, 198, 11, and E. ;«.); 137, R. 3; «n, interjection, 199; w. nom., 209, R. 13; w. ace. 238, 2; -«», ace. f.n, 45, 1; 80, iv. Enallage, 823, 3. Enclitics, in accentuation, 15, 6\ — con- junctions, 198, N. 1. Endeavoring, verbs of, 273, 1, (o.) tndus and -undus, 163, 20. finglwh pronunciation of Latin, 6. Enim and nam, 198,7, and E.; 2(9,3, a.) and (c.) Enitiivero, 198, 9, E. (a.) Ennehemimeris, 304, 5. Ens, participle, 154, R. 1. .«ni!S, adjs. in, 128, 6, (a. > ■*ntissi?7:us, superlatives in, 126, a -."nMS, adjs. in, 128, 1, (c.) Eo, conjugated, 182; compda of, 182, A. 3; w. supine in um, 276, n-, R. -i; w. two datives, 227, R. 1. -eo, verbsinoflst conj., 16a. B. d. Eo, pron. w. comparatives, 2oD, R. 16. As adverb of place, w. ?en., 212, R. 4., N.2, (6,/— of degree, w. gen., 212, R. 4. N. 3. As an illative conj., 198, 6. EorJtni, vr. gen., 212j_ R. 4. N. J. «os, Greek gen. in, (6, K. 7 ; 54 5; pr., 583, I., E. 6, (2.) Epauadiplosis, 324, 18. Bpauados, 324, 19. Epanalepsis, 324, 16. Epauaphora, 324, 13. Epanastrophe, 324, 17. Epanorthosis, 324, 32. Epenthesis, -322, 3. Epicene nouns, 33. Epistrophe, 324, 14. Epizeuxis, 324, 20. Epulor, with abl., 245, n., 4. Epulum, 92, 6. Equality, how denoted, 123, 3. Eques. gender of, 31, 2; used collectively, 209. R. 11, (1- ),(*•) .,. , ,Qi Equidem, its composition and use, lai, s. 4 -er, nouns in, of 2d decl., 46— syncopated, 48, 1; of 3d decl., gender of, 58 and 60; genitive of, 70 and 71; syncopated, <1;-- idjectives in, superlative of, 125; annexed »o pres. infin. pass., 162, 6. Erga, how used, 195, R. 7. -ere, in 3d pers. plur. of perf. indic. ac- ave. 162, 8. -o o -JA 1 . -eris. genitives in, 76; 73, E. i; 74, a. l, lind 112, 1 and 2. Er'^o, w. gen., 147, R. 2, (a.) Erotesis, 324, 31. -enimtis, superlatives in, 125, 1. -ex, proper names in, 44, 1 ; -es and -e m Oreel nouns changed to a, 45, 3; nouns in of 3d led. increasing in genitive, gender ol, B8; 6i; genitive of, 73; genitive of adjs. in, 112; not increasing, gender of, 62; gemtive rtt, 73; in aim., ace, and voe. plur. of maao. and fern, nouns of 3d decl., 83, i. ; 85; final, sound of, 8, e. 2; quantity of, 300. Escit, 154, R. 4. Esse and fuisse, ellipsis of, 270, b. 3. -esso, -isso or -so, intensives in, 187, n., ii. Est, w. dat. of a possessor, 226; est, qui, with subj., 264, 6; so est, unde, ubi, cur, ot ut, 264, 6, R. 3. ^, Et and gwe, 198, 1, R. (a.); et ipse, 207, R. 27, (b.); ellipsis of er, 298, R. 6, (t>.); et-is, et id, et is quidem, 20/, R. 26, (c); et—€t, et — que, et — neque or nee, 198, 1, R- («.)j et non, 198, 1, (c.) Eteniyn, 198, 7, R. (a.) Etiam, 198, 1, R.(d.); with comparatiTOS, 256, R. 9, (b.y, 127, 3; etiamnum, etiatn turn, 191j_ R. 7. ^ -etis, genitive in, 73 ; 112, 1. Etsi and etiamst, constr., 271, b. 2- -etuni, derivative nouns in, 100, 7 Etymology, 24—199 Eu, the diphthong, 10, 3; when not a diphthong, 10, 3, R. 3; in voc. sing, of Greek nouns in eus, 81. Euphemism, 324, 11. Eus, nouns in of 2d decl., 54, 5;— adjs. in, 128, 1 and 2 ; Greek proper names in, 283, N. 2; gen. of, 76, e. 7; ace. of, 180, in. -eu and -etu, in 2d and 3d roots of verbs, 167. Evado, constr., 251, N. . Evenit, conjugated, 184; eventt ut, 26J, Ex and e, prep., how used, 196, E. 2 and 13;— used with partitives instead of the genitive, 212, n. 4 ; sometimes omitted, 261, and R.l; ex quo, scU. temjJore.^bS, N. 4. -ex, gender of nouns in, 65, 2. Exadversus, w. ace, 195, R. 3. Excedo, w. ace, 233, (3.), n. Excello, constr., 256, R. 16, (3.) Excite, w. ut, 273, N. 4. Excludo, constr., 251, N. Exeo, constr., 251, N. Existimo, w. gen., 214; w. two acc8., 230, N. 1; existimor, constr., 271, b. 2. Exlex,\\2,1; 196, I., 6. Exos, genitive of, 112. 2. £205M5, 183, 1, N. Exsistunt qui, w. SUbj., 264, b. Exter, 106, 3, and n.; comparison o^ 125, 4. ...,^000 Expedio, 251, N.| /'«dif, w. dat., 228, R. 2, (6.) i'ajperjorsi, 198, 11, (e.) , ,_ , , Supers, w. gen., 213, E. 1, (3.), mmJ R. 5, (2.) Extemplo, 193, 11., 1. Extera, how compared, 126, 4; extremus, how used, 205, B. 17; extremum est, vt, 262, R. 3. „ _„. ixuo consti., 225, b. 2; exuor, 234,1., E. 1. F. FaMa, ellipsis of, 29, 2. jFac, imperative, 16'2, 4; /ac ut or ne, *7, R. 3 ; /oc, ' suppose or granting,' w. ace. an4 inf., 273, N. 3; pr.,299, a. 4. INDEX. 887 Fa, He, adv., 192, 4. (6.); w. superlatives, »tc., 277. R. 7. ii'orciV/.SjConstr., 27G, in., R. 4; 222. R. l.{a.) Fario and compds. , pas.sire of, 180 and n . ; changes of in the oouipds., 1S9, N. 1; w. gen. of value, 214. r. 2; w. two aces., 230. N. 1; w. abl., 250, R. 3; w. ut and .^ubj., 273,1, N. 2 .and 3; w. participle, 273, 1; w. (/e, etc., 250, r. S; facere nun possum gum, 262, 2: fnrere quod, 273, n. 8; ellipsis of, 209, R. i;/aeere certiorem, 230, N. 3. FalL=:can ver. Final syllables, quantity of, 294—301 ;— coiyunctions, 198, 8. Finiiiy/ius, w. dat., 222, r. 1. (a.) F(o, conjugated, 180; w. geii. of vjilue, '^14, a. 2 ; w. two datives, 227. R.l;_fit and fifri non potest ut, 262. R. 3; Jit per me, 862, R. 11: quantity of ; in fi.o, 283, e. 1. Fla^ito w. two aces., 231. r. 1; w ut E73, N. 4. ' Flecto, used refle.tively, 229, r. 4, 1. Flocci habere, etc., 214. k. 1. Fluo and struo, 2dand3d roots of, 171, n. Follow, in what sense used, 203, 9. Fans, gender of, 64, 1. Foras and foris, 231. R. 5, (c.) Forem,fore, etc., 154 E. 8; 162, 12, H.)- V two dative* 227, r. 1. n ;. Fractional expression.^, IS 1, 6. Freeing, verbs of, 251. Freniim, plur. freni and frena, 92, 5. Frequens, w. gen. or abl., 213, R. 3, (3.): cf. r. 4, (1.) ' Frequentative verbs, 187. ir., 1; quantity of? in, 284, E. 4. Fretus, w. abl.. 244; w. dat.. 222, R. 6: w. inf., 244, R. 2, (i.) ' ' Fructus, declined, 87. Frugi. 115, 4 ; comparison of, 125 5- Fruor, w. abl., 245. i. ; w. ace, 245, I . R. Frux, genitive of 78, 2, (5.)- 94. Fugio, eonstr., 225. iv.; 210, R. 3. (2 )■ /(/g-£, poetically, w. inf., 271, i^.&;fvgitmr., 229, R. 7. Fm(, etc., in compound tenses, 162 12 (1.); fuisse, w. perf. pass, participlea, 268 R. 1,(6.) Fungor, w. abl., 245, I. ; w. ace 245, r. : 275. II., K. 1. Fuo, root of fui, 154, R. 2 and 3; futum, pr., 284. £. 1. (2.) './ . Furo. 183. R. 2. Furor, w. dat. or ah!., 224, R. 2. Future ten.se, 145, iii.; how supplied in thp suhj., 260, R. 7; future perfect tense, 145, VI.; old form in so, 162, 9 and 10; future indie, for imperative, 267, R. 2: 259, B. 1, (4.); fut. imperative, 267, (2.), (3.); future pass. part. w. ace, 234, i., r. 2: fut. perf. for fut.. 259, R. 1, (5.) Futurum esse or fore, ut. w. subj., 268 R. 4, (6.); futurum fuisse, ut, 268, R. 5. G. G, sound of, 10; before ,t in roots o nouns, 56, R. 2; in roots of verbs, 171, 1 and E. 5. Galliambus, 314. x. Gaiideo, how conjugated, 142, R. 2; with abl., 247, 1, (2.); w. ace, 232, n. 1; with guod, etc., 273, n. 6. Genio, w. ace, 232, N. 1. Gems, gender of names of, 29. •geiM, compounds in, 43, 2. Gener, declined, 46. General relatives, 139, 5, r.; how used, General indefinites, 139, 5, r. Gender, 26, 7 and 27; its divi.sions, 27; general rules of, 27—34 ; natural and gra m- matical, 27; mase from signification, 28; fcm. from do., 29; common and doubtful, 30; epicene, 33; neuter appellatives of per- sons. .32, 2; of Greek nouns, 3-4. h. 1; mu. ter, 34: of 1st decl., 41; exes in lstde<^l.. 42: of 2d decl., 46; exes, in 2d de<-l. 4!)- of .3d decl., 58, 62, and 66; exes. inSddeci..' 59—67; of 4th decl.. 87; exes, in 4th decl., 88; of 5th decl., 90: exes, in 6th decl., 90, gender of adjs., 205. Gemro. w. abl., 246, k. 1: generalus, w. abl., 246. ' s , Genitive, 37; sing., 1st decl., exes, in, 43- of 3d decl., 68: of adjectives, 3d decl., 112 plur., 1st decl., contracted, 43; 2d decl. do., 53; 3d decl., 83; terminal letters in all the declensions, 40, 5; of adjectives, 3d 388 INDEX. 3pc1., 112 and 114; after nouns, 211; its place 279. R. ; what relations it denotes, 211. R 1; subjective and objective, 211, H. 2; of substantive pronouns objective, 211, R. 3; posses.sive adjective used for, 211, R. 4; dative used fcr, 211, R. 5; of character or quality, 211, k. G; of measure, 211, R. 6, and (3.) aud (0): noun liniitedby. omitted, 211, R- 7 ; wanting, it the predicate after suni, 211, R. 8; in other cases, 211, v.. 8,(4.); omitted. 211, R.9; two genitives, 211, r. 10; gen. after opus and iisiis, 211, 11; how translated, 211, R. 12; after partitives, 212; after a neuter adjective or adj. pronoun, 212, R. 3; its place, 279, IC; after adverb^, 212, R. 4: after adjectives, 213; of cause or tcmte, 213, h. 2; different constructions Instead of, 213, r. 4; after dii;nus aud in- Jisnus, 244, k. 2; after verbs, 214—22(1; after sum, and verbs of valuing, 214; of crime, 217 ; after verbs of admonisliiug, 218 ; after verbs denoting an affection of the mind, 220; instead of abl. after verbs of abounding, etc., 220, 3; In.stead of predicate ace, 230, N. 4; of place, '221; after parti- cles. 221, II., III.; of gerund.s, 276, in., r. 1; plur. depending on a gerund, 275, n. 1. (3.); place of, after neuter adjectives, 279, 10. Genitives, two, limiting the same noun, 211, R. 10. Ge.jtiliis. w. abl., 246. Genius, voc. sing., 52. Gentium, 2X2, r. 4, n. 2. Genus, in ace. iusteadof the gen. or abl., as, irl genus, omne genus, etc., 234. II., B. 2, fin.; 209, b. 7, (4'.); 231, r. 6; usedvrith the genit. instead of an apposition, 211, B. 2, N. Georgicon, 54, 4. Gero and fero, compounds of, in nouns of 2d decl., 47; in adjs. of 1st and 2ddecls., 105, 3; not compared. 127, 7. Gerundives, defined, 275, R. 2; how used, 275, II. Gerunds, 25, and 148, 2; by what cases followed, 274; and gerundives, genitive of, 275, III., R. 1; nouns which they follow, ib. (1.); adjectives, ib. (2.); after i»/;) denoting tendency, 275, (5.); instead of a noun in *pposition, 211, R. 2, n. ; dat. of, 275, R. 2; ■ICC. of, 275, R. 3; abl. of, 275, r. 4; infiu. for, after adj.. 270, R. 1, (a.) Gigno, pr., 284, r. 3. Gl, tl, and tlil, in syllabication, 18, 3. GlnrioT, with abl., 247, 1, (2.); w. ace, 232, N. 1, and (3.) Glyconic verse, 304, 2 ; 316, 17. Gn, initial, 12, r. Gnarus, w. gen., 213, R. 1; cf. R. 4, (1.) -g-o, nouns in, gender of, 59,2; genitive Of, 69, E. 1. Golden age, of Roman literature, 329, 2. Government defined, 203, 7. Grammatical subject, 202, 2j cases of, 202, R. 4; predicate, 203, 2; figures, 322. Gratia, w. gen., 247, R. 2; its place, 279, E. ; g^atias ago, constr., 273, n 6. Gratum tniki est, quod, 273, S 6. Gratuler, aiustr-, 278, n. 7. Grave accent, 5, 2, and 14, 2; 15. R 8 Gravidus and gravis, w. gen. or ».b ; 213, R. 5, (3.) Greek nouns, gender of, 34, r. 1 ; tenui- nations of in 1st decl., 44; in 2d decl., 54: terminations of in 3d decl., 55, R. ; ace. of iu 3d decl., 80; declension of, in do., 86 Greek or limiting ace., 234, R. 2. Grex, gender of, 65, 2; genitive of, 78, 2,(2.) Grus, gender of, 30 ; genitive of, 76, e. 3 Quilt and innocence, adjectiven of, with gen ,217, R. 1. H. H, its nature, 2, 6; its place in syllabi- cation, 18, 1; before .s in verbal roots, 171, 1; in prosody. 283, i., {b.) Habeo, with two aocs., 280, N. 1; hdber» in nmnen, or in loeo, 230, N. 4; w. gen of value, 214, t. 2; w. abl. of price, 252, r. 1; w. two datives. 227, R. 1 ; w. participle perf. pass., "274, r. 4; w. participle in dus, 274, R. 7, (".); Iiaben, non habeo, or nihil habeo, qiiO't, w. subj., 2(34, N. 3; haberi, w. predi- cate nom., 210, r. 3,(3.), (c); 271, n. 2, and R. 4. Habito, w. gen. of price, 214, n. 1; w abl. of. price, 252, R. 1. Har iu answer to qua ? 191, R. 1, (c.) Hactenus, adv. of place and time, 191, R. 1, (.?■) „ , Hadria, gender of, 42, 2. Htc, for /ia?, 134, R. 1. Hand, signification and use, 191, R. 3; hand multum abest quin, 262, N. 7; haud scio an, 198, 11, R. (e.) Hebes, gen. of, 112, 1; abl. of, 113, B 3; defective. 115, 2. H'i iiiihi, 228,3. Hellenism. 323. R- (2.) nem. w. dat., 228, 3; w. ace, 238, 2; w, voc, 240, fi. 1. Hemistich, 304. Hemiolius, 304, 5. Heudiadys, 323, 2. (3.) Hepar, genit. of, 71; abl. of, 82, E. 1, (6.) Hephthemimeris, 304, 5. Heres, gender of, 31, 2; genitive, 78, E. 1. Heroic cajsura, 310, 4 and 5. Heios, genitive, 75, 2; ace, 80, R.; dat plur., 84; ace plur., 85, E. 2; declined, 86 Heteroclite nouns, 93. Heterogeneous nouns, 34, R. 2; 92. Heterosis, 323, 3, (2.) Hexameter vers*, 310; Priapean, 310, il. Hiatus, 279, 18. Hihernus, pr., 284, E. 5, R. 2. Hie, pron., declined, 134; distinguished from ille, 207, R. 23; hie — hie, for hie — i'Ke, 207, R. 23, (6.); related in time like nunt and tunc. Hie, adv. of place, hie, hinc, hue, etc., referring to the place of the speaker, 191, R. 1, (fi.); w. gen., 212, r. 4, n. 2, (6.); adv. of time, 191, r. 1, (g.) Him, her, etc., how expressed in Latin 207, R. 20. INDEX. 389 Hipponactic trimeter, 314, n. ; tetrameter, 814, IV. Historical present, 145, i., 3: perfect, 145, rv., R. ; for the pluperfect, 259, r. 1, (d.); infinitiTe, 209, R. 5; tenses, 258. iibc, pleonastic, 207, R. 21 and 22; hoc w. partitive gen., 212, r. 3, n. 1; hoc with lomparitives, 256, R. 16. Hodie, pr., 285, 2, E. 1. Homo, gender of. 31, 2 ; genitiTe, 69, e. 2 ; homo, homines, ellipsis of, 209, R. 2,(2.): 805. R. 7,(1.); 229, R. 4. Homoeopropherou, 324, 26. Honor, (-os), declined, 57. Horace, key to the odes of, 321. Horatian metres, 320. Horreo, w. inf., 271, .\. 1. Hortor, w. atl, 225, R. 1; w. ut, ne, etc., nS. 2 ; without ut, 262, r. 4. Hospes, gender of, 30 ; formation of nom. ring., 56, I.. R. 3; genitive, 73, 2j abl.,113, «. 2; as an adj., 129, 8. Hoscis, w. gen. or dat., 222, r. 2, (c.) ' However ' w. a relative, how expressed in Latin, 280, rn., (3.) Hue, w. genitive, 212, e. 4, n. 3, (ft.); huccine rerutn, 212, R. 4, N. 3. Hiimi, constr.,221, e. 3; hiimo, 2.54, r. 2; 255, R. 1. Hiiie, pronunciation of, 9, 5; pr., 306, a. 2. Hujus non facio, 214, B. 1. Hujiismor/i, 1,34, B. 5; w. qui and the subj., 264. 1. N. Hypallage; 323, 4, (3.) Hyperbaton, 323, 4. Hyperbole. 324, 5. Hypercatalectic or hypermeter verse, 304, 8, (4.) Hypothetical sentences, 259, r. 3, (c), ((/.), and R. 4; 200, n. ; in the inf., 268, R.4 — R. 6. Hysteron proteron, 323, 4, (2.) /, its sound, 7 and 8; ; and ^ but one character. 2, 3; i for ii in gen. of 2d decl., 52; i changed to e in forming certain noms., 56, i., E. 3; nouns in ;, gender of, 66 ; genitive of, 68 : genitive of Greek nouns in, 73, R. ; dat. of 3d decl. in, 79; abl. sing, in, 82; 113; in gen. and dat. sing, of 5th decl., 90, E. 2; i ending the former part of » compound noun or adj., 103, E. 1; 131, H ; i in dat. sing, of nineadjs. in us and er, 117; in 1st person sing, of the perf. act., 147, 3; (', the characteristic vowel of the 4th conj., 149, 2: cf 150, 5; i or « for the Greek «. 283. e. 6, '1.); increment in, 3d decl., 287, 3; plur.. 288; of verbs, 290; J final, quantity of, 285, R. 4. ; 296. -ia, abstracts in. iOl, 3; in nom., ace. and voc. plur., 83: 85. -iV/i, in ace. sing. 3d decl., 79; 80; itti fol eiim, 134, R. 1 ; -im, is, etc., in pres. sabj., 162, 1; adverbs in, 192. i. and ii. Imhecillus. pr., 284, 2, E. 2. Imhun. constr., 231, R. 4. Imitative verbs, 187, 3. Immemor, gen. of, 112, 2; abl.,113, b. 8 gen. plur., 114, i. 3. 390 INDEX. /mwojj&l, R. 3. ImmoiJicus, w. gen. or abl., 213, R. 5, (3.) Im^nunis, w. gen. or abl., 213, k. 5, (3.) cf- 261, N. ■dmonmm, deriv. nouns in, 100, 6; — and •imonia, verbals in, 102, 3. ImpatienSy w. genit., 213, R. 1, (2.) Jmpavidus, w. genit., 213, R 1, (3.) hnpedio, w. quin, 2G2, N. 7; w. quomi- nus, 262, R. 11 ; w. inf., 262, r. 11, n. Impello, 273, n. 4. Imperative, 143, 3; its tenses, 145, B. 3 how used, 26., (1.), (2.); irregular, 162, 4 and 5; subj. for imperative 267, k. 2; sing for plur., 209. n. 2- used as a noun, 205 R. 8. Imperfect tense, 145, n. ; w. oportet, etc. 259, R. 3; theimperf. indie, forplup. subj. 259, R. 4. Imperitus, w. geni^., 213, R. 1, (3.)j of gerund, 275, iii., r. 1, (2.) Impero, constr., 273, n. 4; 262, b. 4; w. dat. and ace., 223, r. 2. (1.) Impersonal verbs, 184 ; subject of, 184, 2 ; list of in 2d conj., 169; 184, R. 1; in 1st, 8d, and 4th conj., 184, r. 1 ; constr. w. gen., 215, 1; 219; w. dat., 223, r. 2, n. (i.); w. ROC, 229, r. 6 and 7. Impertio, 249, i., and r. 3; 225, R. 1, (b.) Impetro, ui, 273. n. 2. hnpleo, 249, R. 1; 220,3. Impotio, 241, R. 5. Impos and impotens, w. genit., 213, R. 1, (8.) Imprimis, 193, ii., 2. Imprudens, improvidus, w. genit., 213, R. 1. Impubes, genitive, 112, 1; abl., 113, B. 2; 115,1, (a.) Ifnpulsus, w. abl. of cause, 247, r. 2, (6.) -in, roots of nouns in, 56, ii., R. 1 and 2; In ace. sing., 79. In, prep., constr., 235, (2.); signification and use, 195, r. 14; in composition, 196, 7; in with abl. instead of predicate ace, 230, N. 4; constr. of verbs compd. with, 224; w. abl. after verbs of placing, holding, re- garding, assembling, etc., 241, e. 5; ellipsis of with some ablatives of place, 254 and rs. ; with ablatives of time, 253, n. 1, and r. 6; with names of towns, 254, R. 2 and R. 3. Inanis, w. genit. or abl., 213, E. 5, (3.) Incassum, 193, li., 4. Incedo, 233, (3.), N. ; 210. r. 3. (2.) Inceptive verbs, 187, n, ^; list of, 173. Incertus, w. genit., 213, R. 1; incertum Mt an, 198, 11, B. (e.)\ 265, R. 3. liichor.tives, see inceptive verbs. Incidit ut, 262, R. 3. Incito, constr., 225, R. 1 ; incitatus, w. abl. #f cause, 247, R. 2, (6.) Incipio, w. inf., 271, N. 1. Inclino, constr., 229, r. 4, 1; 225, iv. Incommodo, w. dat., 223, r. 2, n. (b.) Increment of nouns, 286; sing, num., 187; plur. num., 288; of verbs, 289. Incrementum, 324, 22. Increpo and increpilo, w. gen., 217, R. 1. Incumbo, w. dat., 224, 4; w. ad, ^2A, r. 4. Incuso, w genit., 217, r. 1. Tnde., ellipsis of before unde , 206, (8. ), (« Y indp. loci, 212, r. 4, n. 4. Indeclinable nouns, 34; 94; — adjectives. 115, 4. Indefinite adjectives, 104; 139, 6, E. ; — pronouns, 138; — adverbs, 191, R. 4. Indicative mood. 143, 1 ; its tenses, 145 ; how used, 259 ; tenses used one for another, 259, R. 1—4; indie, of the preterites with oportet, etc., 259, R. 3; in in.serted clauses, 266,2, R. 3 and 5; 266, 1, R. 1. Indico, w. ace. and inf., 272, N. 1. Indigeo, w. abl.. 250, 2, (2.); w. genii 220, 3, Indirj^nor, constr., 273, 5, N. 6. Indignus, w. abl., 244; w. genit., 244, R. 2; indignus qui, w. subj., 264, 9; w. su- pine in u, 276, iii., R. 1. Indigus, w. genit. or abl., 213, R. 5, (2.) Indirect questions, subj. in, 265: — indi- rect reference, 266, 3 : — indirect discourse, 266, 1, N. and 2. Induce, id animum inducere, 233, (1.); pass. w. ace, 234, r. 1; inductus, w. abl of cause, 247, R. 2, (6.) Indulgeo, constr., 223, (1.), (a.) Induo, w. dat. and ace. 224, 4; w. abl. and ace, 249, i., r. 1; cf 224, r. 1, (6.); indue and exuo, constr. in pass., 234, R. 1. -meor-io»e,fem. patronymicsin, 100, 1,(6.) Inee, 183, R. 3; inire consilia, w. inf., 270, R. 1, (c); 134. III. Iners, abl. of, 113, E. 3, and R. 1. Inexpcrtus, w. genit., 213, R. 1. Infamo, w. genit. of crime, 217, E. 1. Infero, 224, 4, and R. 4. Inferus, comparison of, 125, 4; — inferior w. dat., abl., or qumn, 256, R. 10; injimut and imus, 205, R. 17. Infinitive, 143, 4 ; as a noun, 26, r. ; 269; its gender, 34, 4; 205, R. 8; its cases, 269, (i.); as an ace, 229, E. 5; 270; as a verb, 269, (a.); its tenses, 145, R. 4; old inf. pres. pass, in -er, 162, 6; — inf. as logical subj., 202, B. 2; 269; how modified, 203, ii., 5; with subject nom., 209, r. 5; for the geni- tive, 213, R. 4; its subjetc, 239; w. dat. in- stead of ace, 227, n.; construction and meaning of its tenses, 268; inf. as subject of inf., 269, r. 3; as predicate nom., 269, R. 4; esse, etc., with licet and a predicate noun or adj., case of such predicate, 269, R. 5 ; poetically after what verbs, 271-, i.. 3; depending on a verb, 270; 229, r. 5; on an adj. or noun. 270, r. 1; 2v5, ii., r. 1, n. 1; absolute, 270, r. 2; ellipsis of, 270, r. 3; inf. without a subject after what verb« used, 271 ; with a subject, after what verbs, 272 ; 273 ; how translated, 272, r. 3 ; used like a noun, 273, n. 9; its place, 279, 11; inf. pres. for inf. perfect, 268, r. 1; inf. perf. for present, 268, r. 2; pres. forfuture, 268, B. 3; poet, to denote a purpose, 274, R. 1, (b.) Infinitum est, the indie for the subj., 259, B. 4, (2 ) Infirmus, w. genit. or abl., 213, r. 6, (3.) hifit, 183, 14-, 1^0. 7> Inflection. 25 ; parts \1 aneecb iwfleoted 24.4. INDEX. 391 ly>t«7is, abl of, 113, e. 3. mimicus, tr. dat., 222, r. 1; w. genit., E22. B. 2, (c.) -t«i> genitives In, 69, b. 1 and 2. Initio, "at first," 263, N. Inttitor, 224, r. 4. See also nitor. Innocent and innoxius, w. genit 213, R. 1. Insatiabilis, w. genit., 213, E. 5, (1.) Insciui, w. genit., 213, R. 1. (3.) Inscribo, iTiscxtioo, and insero, constr., 241, R. 6. Insimulo, w. geii.: , ^7, R. 1. Insolens and insolitus, w. genit., 213, R. 1. Inops. abl. of. 113, J. 3; 115, 1, (a.); w. fmit., 213, E. 1; cf. r. 4, (1.); w. abl., 250, Inquam, 183, 5; ellipsis of, 209, r. 4; its position. 279. 6. Inserted clauses, 266. Insinuo,, constr., 229, R. 4, 1. Insons. genit. plur. of, 114, K. 3j 115, 1, (a.); w. genit.. 213, r. 1. Inspergo. 249, l., R. 1 and R. 3. Instar, a diptote, 94. Instkuo, 273. n. 4; 230, N. 1; 231, R. 4; w. inf., 271, N.l. Instrument, abl. of, 247, and r. 5; w. verbs of teaching, 231, R. 3, (c.) Instruo, 231, E. 4. Insumere tempus, 275, R. 2. Insuesco. w. dat. or abl. of the thing, 245, n., 3; w. inf., 271, n. 1. Insuetits, 213, r. 1, (3.); 222, b. 2, (a.); ?75, III., (2.); 270, e. 1; 275, iii., r. 1, (2.) Insuper, w. ace. or abl., 235, E. 8. Integer, w. genit., 213; integrum est ut, 262, R. 3, N. 3. Intelligo, w. two aces., 230, N. 1; w. ace. and inf., 272, n. 1; intelligitw, w. inf. as subject, 269, r. 2. Intention denoted by participle in riu with sum, 162, 14; 274, r. 6. Intentus, w.acc. n//u7, 232, (3.); intentum esse, w. dat. of gerund, 275, in., r. 2, (1.) Inter, use of, 235. 1, E. 2; in composition, 196, I., 8; — w. se or ipse, 208, (5.); w. ge- runds, 275, III., r. 3; instead of partitive gen., 212, r. 3, n. 4; construction of its eompds., 224; repeated by Cicero after m- teresse. 277, u., 4. Inttrcedo, w. quin, ne, or guominus, 262, r. 11. Interdutio and intertjico. 251, N. and r. 2. Intenlico, w. abl., 251. >. Inter// iu or f/ie, 253, s. 1. Interea loci. 212, K. 4, N. 4. Interest, Roman computation of, 327. Intercut, w. genit., 219; yt-mea, etc., 219, 1. 1; subject tf. 219. a. 4; degree of interest how espre.soed, 219. R 5.' Interior, comparison of, 126, 1 ; intimus, 205. R. 17. Iiiteijections, 199; w. nom., 209, r. 13; w. dat., 22.3 (3.); w. ace, 23S. 2; w. voc., MO; O.htu. etc., not elided. 305. InteAnitto. w. inf , 271, N 1 Jn£ery/r«, gender of, 30; 61 2; genit. of, rs. 8. Inttrrittu. w. genit., 213, b 1 and 2 luterrogativo particles, 198, 11;- adjs. 104, 14; 121, 5; 139, 5, 3;— pronoun*, 137. in indirect questions, 137, N. ; 265, n. 2;— < sentences, 200, 3. Inttrrogo, w. two aces., 231, R. 1; constr. In pass., 234, i.; w. genit. of the ciime, 217, R. 1. Intersuvi. w. dat., 224, 5. Intiis. w. ace, 338, 1, (6.) Intra, how used, 195, R. 8; 253, R. 4 (6.) Intransitive verb, 141. ii.; used imper- sonally in pass. w. dat., 223 N. 1, (c.) -inns, acijs. in. 128, 1, 2, and 6. Inva'/o, 233, (3.), N. Invariable ailjs., 122; specified, 127, 7. Invenio, w. two aces., 230, N. 1; invent- unt'tr, qui, w. subj., 264, 6. Invideo, constr., 223, (1.), (c); 220, 1 invidetur 7nihi, 223, R. 2, N. (c.) Imnttts, w. dat. of the person, 226, r. 3, invito Minerva, 257, R. 7. Involuntary agent of pass, verb, 248, ii., and N. -10, nouns in, gender of, 59, 1; personal appellatives in, 100, 4, (6.); verbals in, 102, 7; verbs in of 3d conj., 159. Ionic metre, 317 ; 303 ; — a majore, 317, 1. ; — a minore, 317, 11. -ior, -ills, in terminational comparatives, 124,1. Ipse, declined, 135; how used, 135, R. 1; 207, R. 28; used reflesively, 208, (4.); 207, K. 28, (e.); w. i7iter, 208, (5.)|_ et ipse, 207, R.27, (6.); ipse, with the inf., 2/3, n. 9, (a.); nunc ipsum and turn ipsinn, 191, R. 7. Ipstts and ipsissitnus, 135, R. 2. Irascor, w. dat., 223, R. 2, N., (i.) Iri, w. supine in i(7>t, 276, ii., R. 3. Iron age of Roman literature, .329, 4. Irony, 324, 4. Irregular nouns, 92 ; — adjs., 115 ; — verbs, 178—182. -is, nouns in, gender of, 62; 63; genitive of. 74 ; -Is or -eis instead of -es in Ktc. plnr. of 3d decl., 85, e. 1; abl. of adjs. in is used as nouns, 82, K. 4: — used as proper names, 82, E. 4, {b.); -is for -us in genitive of 4th decl., 89, 2; fem. patronj-mics in, 100, 1, (6. ) ; eUipsis of in 2d root of verbs, 162. 7, (c ) Is, pron., declined, 134; how used. 207, R. 26; referring to a clause, 206, (13.); ii and ille with r/uidem used pleonastically, 207, R. 21; (5 for talis, 207, R. 26, (6.) ; 264, 1, N.; et IS, atque is. isque, et is quidem 207, B. 26, '. c.) ; eUipsis of w, 207, R. 26, (d.); ii-qui, 264, 1, N. Islands, gender of, 29; constr. of namea of, 237, R. 5, (b.) -issi7nus, a, um, the terminational super lative, 124, 2. -isso, verbs in, 187, ii., 6. Iste. how declined, 134; how used, 20? R. 23, 25; iste qui, w, subj., 264, 1, N. Istic, pron., declined, 134, U. 3. Istic, adv., istinc, istuc, the'f reference, 191, R. 1. (e.) Istiusmodi. 134, R. 5. -it. roots of nouns in, 56. ti., r. 5; In 3d root of 4th conj., 176 of certain verb« of 3d conj.. 171, K. 7 R92 INDEX. Ita, 191, R 5; 277, R. 12. (o.); ita non, I'll, R. 14. ItHi/iie, its meaning, 198, 6, R. ; its place, 279,3,(6.) Iter, declined, 57; 71, 2; with sum and ace. of place, 237, E. 1: incremente of, 286.2. •iter and -ter, advs. in, 192, ii. and iv. -itas, -id, -itia, -ities, -itudo, and -itus, l^Btracts in, 101, 1. -itis, genitive in, 73; 78, 1; 112, 1. ^-ito, frequentatives in, 187, il., 1. ' -ithis or -icius, adjs. in, 129, 5. Itiim, sup., in prosody, 284, s. 1, (2.) -itus, advs. in, 192, i. and ii. ; adjs. in, 138,7. -tmn, verbals in, 102, 2; -ium or -itium, nouns in, 100, 5. -i«s, genitives in, place of English accent, 15; in what adjs., 107; quantity of the r, 588., I., E. 4:— adjs. in, 128, 1, 2, and 5; voo.. sing, of patrial.? and possessives in, 52. -t'P, in 2d roots of verbs, 175; 171, E. 8. -tMM, adjs. in, 129, 7. J. vowel before, in prosody, 283, iv., n. 1. Jaceo, 210, R. 3, (2.); 233, (8.), n. Jam, with a negative, 191, r. 6; jamdu- dum, ib. Jecur, genitive of, 71, 3; increments of, 286,2. Jejunus, w. gen. or abl., 213, r. 5, (3.) Jesus, decl. of, 53. Jocus, ^lur. joci and joca, 92, 2. Jubar, abl. of, 82, e. 1, (6.) Jubeo, constr., 223, (2.); 273, 2, (rf.); 272, B. 6; 262, R. 4; ellipsis of jubeo valere, 238, E. 2; jubeor, w. inf., 271, N. 1. Jucundus, constr., 276, iii., r. 1 and 4; jucundum est, w. quod, 273, 5, N. 6. Judico, w. two aces., 230, N. 1; w. ace. and inf., 272, n. 1; in pass., 210, r. 3, (3.), (c); judicari w. predicate nominative, 271, N. 2. Jugerum, 93, 1 ; 94. Jugu7n, quantity of its compds., 283, iv., K. 1. Jungo, constr., 229, p.. 4, 1. Junctus and conjunctus, constr., 222, a 6, (c.) Jupiter^ genitive of, 71 ; declined, 85. J%Te aliquid facere, without cum., 247, 2. Ju)». its compds., 189, N. 3:—jiiratus, with tr«tive meaning, 163, 16 :— j«ro, poet. w. inf., *n, N. 3. Jusjurandum, declined, 91. Justum erat, indie, for subj., 2.59, R. 3; justum est with inf. as subject, 269, R. 2; justo aft«r comparatives, 256, r. 9; its plac«, 279, N. 1. Juvat, w. ace, 229, R. 7. Juvenalis, abl. of^ 82, E. 4, (6.) Juvenis, abl. of, 82, E. 4, (6.); 113, e. 2; lomparison of. 126,4; 115, 1, (a.); for in juventute, 253, r. 6. Juxta as an adv., 195, R. 4; juxta ac or ntque, 198, 3, b K, its use, 2, 4. Key to the Odes of Horace, 821. Knowing, verbs of, their construction, 3^2 L. i, roots of nouns in, 56, ii. ; gender ni nouns in, 66 ; genitive of, 70 ; — final, quax tity of, 299, 2. Laboro, constr., 273, N. 1; poet. w. irJ 271, N. 3. Labials, 3, 1. Lac, gender of, 66, e. ; genitive of, 70. Lacesso, constr., 225, R. 1. LcEtor, w. abl., 247, 1, (2.); ace., 232, (8 ) L(Ptus. w. abl. or gen., 218, r. 5, (4.}; cf. R. 4, (1.) Lampas, declined, 86. Lapis^ declined, 5(. Lar, pr., 284, N. 1. Largus,y}. gen. or abl., 213, r. 5,(8.); cf. R. 4, (1.) Lars, genitive of, 71. Lassus, w. genit., 213, R. 2. Lateo, w. dat. or ace, 223, R. 2, n., (6.), and (1.), (a.) Latin grammar, its divisions, 1. Latinis, for ludis Latinis, 253, n. 1. Lotus, alius, and Inngiis, w. ace. of space, 236. Lavo audto.ro, scil. se, 229, R.4, 1; lavo, w. abl. of price, 252, r. 1. Laxo, w. abl., 251, N. Leading clause, subject, and verb, 201, 13. Lego fere), its form in the compds., 189, N. 2;" constr., 2.30, N. 1. Lenio, constr., 229, R. 4, 1. -lentus, adjs. in, 128, 4. Letters, 2; division of, 3; sounds of, 7 numeral, 118, 7 ; capital, 2, 2 ; silent, 12, r. terminal in 3d decl., 55. Leva, w. abl., 251, n.; w. gen. poet. 220, 2. Lex, gender, 65, 2; genitive, 78, 2, (2.);— legem dart, constr., 273, 2, N. 4; — lege, abl. of manner, 247, 2. Liber, w. abl. or gen., 213, R. 5, (4.); tf 220,2; and 251, N.; w. genit., 218, r. 5, (4.); cf. R. 4, (1.) Libera, w. abl., 251, w. ; poetically, w genit., 220, 2. Liberalis. w. genit., 213, E. 5, (1.) Lihram and libras, 236, R. 7. Libra, abl. w. adj. without prep., 264, R. 2. Licentia, w. genit. of gerund, 275, in., R. 1, (1.) Liceo, w. genit. of price, 214, r. 3: w abl., 2,52, R. 1. L/ceZ, w. dat., 223 R. 2;w. subj. the ace. with the inf., or the inf. alone, 2i3, 4; 2i".2. R.4; w. inf. as subject, 269, e. 2 ; case of the predicate after licet esse, etc., 269, R. 5; w. indicative instead of subj., 259, ^ 3, (o.' — licet, conj. w. subj., 263, 2. Limiting ace, 234, n. ;— abl., 250 and R. -limus, superlatives in, 125, 2. Linguals and liquids, 3, 1- INDEX. 393 Liqwduf, pr., 2R4, E. 5., R. 8. 4is. adjs. iu, comparison, 125, 2. literas ilare, scribere or mittere, 22o, m., t. 4; ellipsis of, 229, r. 4, 2; literas or Ute- ris, after Terbs of teaching, 231, r. 3, (c.) Litotes, 324. 0. Litiim,pT., 2Si, E. 1, (2.) Loading, verbs of. w. abl., 249, 1. Lontplrf. genitive of, 112, 1; abl., 113, B. 2; gen. plur., 114, e. 3; 115, 1, (n.) ; w. »bl. .Drgen.. 213, R. 5, (4.) Lnciis, plur. loci and lora, 92, i., 2; !oco »nd lor is, abl. of place without a prepoai- tion, 254, r. 2; loco, w. gen. for predicate nora., 210, N. 3; for predicate aoc., 230, n. i: loci and locorinn . 2V2, u. 4, n. 2 and N. i; /oci/.s iu appo.«ition to names of towns, 237, R. 2; loco, VI. gen. of price, 241, r. 5; w. .^bl. of price, 252, r. 1; w. participles iu i/i(.', 274. R. 7; w. genitive of gerunds, 276, HI.. R. 1, (1.) Logical subject, 202, 3 .—predicate, 203, 3. Long syllsMe, 2.S2. 2. Lon^e. w. comparatives and superlatives, 127, 3; 25f), n.; w. ace. of .space, 236, n. 1; .ongr gftiiium, 212. r. 4, n. 2, (6.); longins trithout r/iinm, 2513, r. 6. Lon^ititi/in^. w. genit. of measure, 211, R. 6, i6.) Ln/igii3, w. ace. of space, 236; longum est. the indicative in.stead of the subjunc- tive, 259, H. 4, ,2.) -h, genitive of nouns in, 77, 2, (2.) Luili.s. for in tempore ludorum, 253, N. 1; 257. R. 9, v2.) Luo, w. abl., 252, r. 1. M. M, roots of nouns ending in, 56, i. ; be- fore '/changed to n, 134, .\. 1; dropped in the 3il rootof certain verbs, 171, k. 6; final, quantity of, 299, 3; elided, 305, 2. -jTia, Greek nouns in, genitive plur. of, 84. E. 2. Macttis, 115, 5; macte, w. abl., 247, 1, N. 2; w. genit., 213, r. 5, {4.} Ma'^ii and mnxime, use of in forming comparatives and superlatives, 127, 1 ; ple- onastic with wnHf^etc, 256. R. 13. Mngiius. compared, 125, 5^ w. supine iu u, 276, III.. R. 1 : ningnam partem, 234, il., R. 3; niagni.parci, etc., w. verbs of valu- ing, 214, R. 1; magnn, parvo, etc., w. verbs- of buying, etc., 252, r. 3. lnhile. constr. of its compounds malefar.io, tnale'liro. etc., 22o, i.; j/m/f , instejid of abl. of price, 252. r. 3; male. hme. or prur/enter facio : maU or h^iie Jit. w. ',uorl. 273, 5, (1.) Malo, conjugated, 178. 3; constr., 273, 4; 862. R. 4 ; inalUm. meaning of, 260, il. n. 2 ; eoustr. w. abl. like a comparative, '256, r. 16,(3.) Malua. compared. 125, 5. .•./rt»K#o, constr., 223, r. 2. and (1.), (6.) ; «73. \. 4; 274 r. 7, (a.); 262, r. 4. ISlane. 94 ; 192, 3. Maneo.tVd, k. 3,(2.); compds. of, 233, R.), N Uani/eshtf. w. gHuit., 213, b. 1. Manner, ad vs. of, 191, i.i., abl of -247 with rum. 247, 2; w. i/e or ex, 247, R- 3. Manits. gender of, 88 ; ellipsis of, 205, a 7; mriniim injirere. 23S. il.) JSlure, abl. of. 82, e. 1. (i.;; ellipsis of, 205, R. (. Mas, gender of, 62, e. 1; genitive, 72, E. 1; genit. plur., 83, ii., 3, e. ; used t« distinguish the sex of epicenes, 33. N. Masculine nouns of 3d decl., 5S: e.xcefv tioiis in, .59 — 61; — masculine cresura, 310. .N. 1. Itlaterfmnilias. declined. 91. Materia, w. genit. of gerunds, 275, III , R. l.,(10 Material nouns, 26, 6;— adjs.. 104, fs JMatiiro, scil. se, 229, R. 4, 1; w. inf., 271, N. 1. I\[e and mi for mihi, 133, R. 1. ilia, tua, etc., w. refert and interest, 219, R. 1 and 2. Means, abl. of, 247; when a person, 247, R. 4; w. passive verbs. 248. Measure or metre. 3UtS; Roman me;uiissum facto, 274, R. 4. Mil. initial, 12, 2, r. Mohilis, pr., 284, e. 5, R. 1. Moderor, constr., 223, (1.), (a.) Modi annexed to pronouns, 134, R. 5; its u.se, 211, R. 6, (5.) Modiciis, w. genit., 213, R. 5, (1.) Modified subject, 202, 6; itself modified, 202, III., R. 1 ;— precUcate, 203, 5. Modify or limit, in what sense used, 202, 4, R. Modo as abl. of manner, 247, 2. Modo, conditional conj., 198, 5; w. subj., 263,2; modo, adv., 193, ii., 3; inodo ne, 2(^3, 2, N. 1; 7nodo — modo, 277, R. 8. Modus, w. genit. of gerunds, 275, iii., R. 1, (1.) Mollio, 229, R. 4, 1. Molests, (F.gre or graviter fero, w. quod, 273, N. 6. Moneo. conjugated, 157; constr., 218, and R. 1, 2 ; 273, n ± ; without lit, 262, r. 4 ; w. »cc. and inf., 273, n. 4, (e.); in pass., 234,1. Money, Roman. 327, pp. 370—372. Monocolou, 319, 2. Monometer, 304, 2; 313, I. Monoptotes. 94. Monosyllables, quantity of, 294, (a.); i99. 1 ; their place. 279, 8. Mnns. gender of, 64, 1. Month.s. i'voman, 32G, 2; names of, 326; division of. -326, 1 ; gender of names of, 28 ; 116, 3; ab'. of names in er and is, 82, e. 2,. 0-^ Moods, 143. Mora, in prosody, 282, 2. Mos OT moris est, constr., 26l4, N. 2; w genit. of gerunds, 275, iii., R. 1, (l-); mon aa abl. of manner without c«?«, 247, 2. Motion or tendency, verbs of, constr., 225, IV. ; 237, b. 3. Motum, pr., 284, e. 5, r. 1. Mountains, gender of names of, 28, 3. Moveo, constr., 229, r. 4, 1; 251, w.j motus, w. abl. ofcau.se, 247, R. 2, (6.) -ms, nouns in, genitive of, 77, 2, (1.) Multiplicatives, 121, 1. Miilto, (are), constr., 217, R. 5. Multtis. compared, 125, 5 ; miilii et, hois used, 278, r. 5; multo, w. comparatiTSs . etc., 127, 3; 256. r. 16; so muUuui, ib., n.,- mtiltmn, w. genitive, 212, R. 3. N. 1; as ace. of degree, 212, (2.);mi/7<2«insteadof an adverb, 205, R. 15. Mus. gender of. 30; 67, 4; genitive, 76, B. 3; genit. plur., 83, ii., 3. Munijicus, w. genit., 213, R. 5, (1.) Mutes, division of, 3, 1; a mute and a liquid in prosody, 2S3. IV., E. 2. Miililvs, w. abl., 213, R. 5, (5.) Muto, constr., 252, r. 5; 229, r. 4, 1. N. jV, roots of nouns in. 56, n. ; nouns in, gender of, 58; 61; genitive of, 70; 71; final, quantity of, 299, E. ; dropped in the 3d root of certain verbs, 171, e. 6. -nactis, genitive of Greek names in, 78, 2,(1.) Nam and enim, 198, 7, R., (a.); place ofi 279, 3, (a.) ami (f.) Names of persons, their order, 279,9,(6.); of nations instead of those of countries 2.5S, R. 3; 2.37, R. 5. Narro, w. ace. and inf., 272, N. 1, and r. 6; narror, constr., 271, R. 2. Nascor, w. abl., 246, R. 1; nascitur, w. subj., 262, R. 3, N. 2. Nato, 232, (2.), n. 1; constr. of compds., 233, (3.), N. Natiira fert, constr., 262, R. 3., N. 2. Naturale est, w. ut and the subj., 262, R. 3, N. 3. Nattis, w' abl., 246; natus, ' old,' w acc , 236, N. 3; poet. w. inf., 271, n. 3. Natu,^i; 250,1; 126,4. Naiici habere, 214, R. 1. -nS, enclitic conjunction, 198, 11; qusn tity of, 295, R.; as an interrogative parti cle, 198, 11, R., (c); its place, 279, 3, V.) Ne, adv., the primitive negative particle, 191, III., R. 3, p. 168; w. quidem, ib. ; 279, 3, (rf.); w. subjunctives used as impera/- tives, ib. ; in wishes, asseverations and con- cessions, ib.; 260, R. 6, (b.) with the imper- ative, 267, R. 1 ; ne miilta, ne plura, etc., 229, R. 3, 2 ;— in intentional clauses, 262, R. 5; ne non, for ut, 262. N. 4: ellipsis of, 262, R. 6; ne, for nediim, 202. M. 5. Nee or neque, 198, 1; nee non or nequt non. ib. ; nee — »iec, with the si)igular, 209, R. 12, (5), («.); neque, for et ne, after ut and 9ie, 2o2, r. 6, n. 4; — nee ipse, 207 , r. 27, INDEX. 39,5 (6.); nrc w, 207, R- 26, (c); n«c«« or nnnon, 865, R. 2; necdum, 2(7, l., k. 16; its place, 279, 3, (a.) Ntcesse, defective adj., 115. 5; necesse est ut, etc., 202, u. 3, n. 2; without ut, 262, N. 4; necesse /'ttit, the ii;dic. for the subj , 259, R. 3; w. inf. as .subject, 269, R. 2; w. -redicate dat.,2G9, R. 5; 273, 4. Necessity, how expressed, 1G2. 15. jVecessario, after comparative.?, 256, R. 9. Nei/utii, w. 8ubj., 262, N. 5; without a ferb, ib. Nf/nf, getider of, j62, e. 2: 94; w. supine (n II. 270, lu., R. 2. Negatives, two, their force, 277, ». 3 — 5 ; c^aative joined to the conjunction, as, nee iitisijiiam. nee ullus, etc ., instead of ct nemo, •I niiUiis. etc., 278, b. 9. Ne^ligtns, constr., 218, R. 4, (2.) iWifn, instead of non /lico, 279, 15, (6.); •T .ICO. and inf., 272, N. 1, and R. 6; negor, w. inf.. 271, V. 1. Xi;otiiim. ellipsis of. 211, R. 8, N. Ntma, 94 and 9.^: for nulliis, 207, R. 31; nemo est iiui. 2i'i4. 7, N. 2; nemo non, ' every one.' 277, r. 5, (e.) ^Vmpe. 191. R. 4: 198, 7, R., (a.) Neoterism, 325, 3. Seifiia and nei/uet, 138, 2. Nequam, indeclinable, 115, 4; compared, 125, 5. JVet/ue, see nee; for et non, 198, 1, (c); neqiie — nff/ne, or nee — nee, nei/ue — tiee, nee — nf^Hf, 198. 1. («.); 7ifi/ue — et, ib. ; neque w. general negatives. 279, 15, (b.); neque non, 277, K. 3: neque quisquam, uUus, um- qiiam, etc.. 278. R.9. yrqiifo, how conjugated, 182, N. ; w. inf., 271, N. 4. iVe guis OT neqiiis, how declined, 188,2; ve qicis. instead otne quisquam, 207, R. 31; 278. R.9. AVr/o, genitive of, 69, E. 2. Ntscia «rt, 198, 11, R., (e.); 265, R. 3; r.tscio qiiis, 265, R. 4; nescio quomodo, ib. ; w. ace. and inf.. 272. n. 1. Neseius, w. genit., 213, R. 1, (3.) -nnis and -niis, adjs. in. 128, 1, (i.) Neuter, nouns, -34: not found in 1st and 5th decls., 40, 9; of 2d decl., 46; 54; of 3d decl., i>0 ; exes, in, 66 ; t)7 ; .ailjs. used adverb- ially, 205. R. 10, adjs. ami adj. prons, w. genit., 212, R. 3; ace. of denoting degree w. another ace. after transitive verbs, 231, R. 5 ; rerbs. 141; form of. 142, 1; neuter passives, 142. 2; neuter verbs with cognate, etc., iub.jects, 2.34, ill. ; w. cognate ace, 2.32, (1.) ; «•. ace. of degree, etc., 232, (3.); w. abl. of Bg'"it. 248, R. 2; used impersonally, 184,2; in the pa-ssive voice, 142. r. 2: participles of. Ii'i2, 18 ; neuters of posses.sive pronouns and adjs. instead of the genitive- of their [ersoiial pronouns, or of a corresponding uoun, 211, R. 8, (3.), (n.) and (6.) Neutral pa,«sive verbs, 142, 3. j\'eve or ntu, 198, 8 ; after ut and ne, 262, .V.4. Ni or nrvi, 198, 5, R., (6.); nisi, ' except,' 801, K. 6; 277, R. 10; ni.\i quod, ib.; nisi vero, and nisi forte, • unless perhape,' ib. iV(Ai7, nihiluni, 94; w. genitive, 212,R. 1; instead of non, 277, R. 2, (6.); 232, (3.)' nihil all ud quam or nisi, 277. r. 16; nihil. ace. w. ceslimo and moroT, 214, N. 2 niliih yf.facio, 214; as ace. of degree, 215. JJ. 3: 232, (3.); nihil est quod, etc., 264, 7, n. 2; nihil ahest, quin, 262. n. 7; nihil antiqiiiut habeo or duco quam, w. subj., 273, N. 1; nihililum, 277, i., R. 16. Niinius, w. genit. or abl., 213, R. 5, (3 ) Nimio, w. comparatives, 256, R. 16; aa abl. of price, 252, r. 3. -71(5, nouns in, gender of, 63, 1. Nitor, w. abl., 245, n. ; w. m or ad, 245, 11., r. 2; w. inf. or subj., 273, 1, N. 1. Mix, 56, R. 2; genit. sing., 78, (3.); genit plur., 83, II., 3. No, constr. of compds. of 2.33, (3.), n. Noetic or node, 253, N. 1. Nolo, conjugated, 178. 2; constr., 273, 4; noli w. inf., paraphrasing the imperative, 267, N. andK.3; nollem, meaning of, 260, II., R. 2. Nomen est, constr., 226, R. 1; 211, R. 2, N.; nomine, without a prep, before the genitive following verbs of accusing, 217, n. 2, (b.); its place, 279, 9, (i.) Nominative, 37; construction of. .209; 210; ellipsis of, 209, r. land 2; wanting, 209, R. 3; w. inf., 209, k. 5; after interjec- tions, 209, R. 18; formation in 3d decl. from the root, 56; plural, 3d decl., 83: of adjs. of 3d decl., 114. See Subject-nominative and Predicate-nominative. Nomina, 230; pass., 210, R. 3, (3.) Non. 191, R. 3; ellipsis of, after no/i modo, etc., followed by ne quidem. 277, R. 6; non quo, non quod, non quin, 262, R. 9; non est quod.eur, quare, or quamobrem, w. subj., 264,7, X. 3; non before a negative word, 277, R. 3; — before ne quidem, 277, R. 6; position of, 279, 15, (6.); non, rare with the imperative, 267, R. 1; difference between 7ion and A^aifrfj 191, R. 3; non nemo, non nidli, non nihil, non numquam, different from nemo non, etc., 277, R. 5, (c.); non nihil, to .some extent, 232, (3.); ?ion/ie,198, 11, R., (c); non modo- -ted etiam, and non modo — sed, equivalent to non dicam — sed, 277, R. 10; non dubito, non est ditbium^ non ambigo, non proeul, non abest, quin, 262, 2, N. 7; non quo non, non quod non, or non quia non, instead of ?!o/i quin ; non eo quod, non idea quod, for non quod, 262, R. 9; non priusquam, non nisi, w. abl. ab- solute, 257, N. 4; nondum, 277, l., R. 16; non in the second member of adversatlr* sentences without et or vero, 278, E. 11; non nisi, separated, 279, 3, (rf.) Nonit., ' the Nones.' 326, 2. Nonnullus, pronominal adj., 139, 5, (1.) Nos, for ego, E. 7. Nosco, 171, E. 6. Noster, how declined, 139, 3. Nostras, how declined, 1.39, 4, (ft.) Nostrum, how formed, 133, 3; different use of nostrum, and nostri, 212, R. 2, N. 2. ' Not ' and ' nor,' how expressed with tfa« imperative, 267, R. 1; witb subj., 260, K. 6, (6.) 896 INDEX. Nouns, 26—103; proper, common, ab- icract, collectiye, and material, 26 ; gender of, 27 — 34 ; number of, 85 ; cases of, 36, 37 ; declension of, 38—40; nouns of 3d decl., mode of declining, 55 ; compound, deolen- Bion of, 91 ; irregular, 92 ; variable, 92 ; de- fective, in case, 94; in number, 95, 96; sing, and plur. having different meanings, 97; redundant, 99 ; verbal, 102; derivation of, 100—102; composition of, 103; how modified, 201, in., r. 1; used as adjs., 205, K. 11; extent given to the term noun, 24, R. Novum est itt, 262, r. 3, n. 2. iVoz, declined, 57; genitive of, 78, 2, (4.); genit. plur., 83, ii., 3. Noj-ius, w. genit. of the crime. 213, R. 1, (3.); 217, K. 1, {a.); w. dat., 222, r. 1, la.) -KS, participles in, abl. of, 113, 2 ; when used as nouns, 82. e. 4; nouns in, genit. plur. of, 83, II., 4: genit. sing, ot 77. 2, i2.) and E. 1; participials and participles in, construction of, 213, R. 1 and 3. Nubilo. scil. (-a;/o. 257, 9, (1.) VkU). w. dat., 223; quantity of u in coaipds. of, 285, 2, e. 3. Nwli), w. abl., 251, n. Niirtiis, w. abl. or genit., 213, R.5, f4.); 250, R , (1 ); w. ace, 213, r. 4, (3.) Niilhts, how declined, 107 ; a pronominal adj., 139, 5, (1.); for non. 205, R. Ij; refers to more than two, 212, r. 2, n., (*.) nullKs est, 7»i, w. subj.. 264, 7, N. 2: 7iiiUus jion, 277, R. 6, (c.) ; nullius and nullo, instead of neminis and nemine. 207, E, 31, (c); nul- lusdnm, 277, I., R. 16. Nutn, with its compounds, meaning of, 198, 11, R., (i.); ntim — nn, used only in direct questions, 205, R. 2. Number, 26, 7; of nouns, 85; of verbs, 146 ; of the verb when belonging to two or more subjects, 209, r. 12; when belonging to a collective noun, 209, R. 11. Numbers, cardinal, 117, 118; ordinal, 119, 120: distributive, 119, 120; w. genit. plur., 212, R. 2, (4.) Numerals, adjs., 104,105; classes of, 117; placed in the relative clau.se, 206, (7.), (b.); w. genit. plur., 212, r. 2, (4.); letters, 118, 7 ; adverbs, 119 ; 192, 3 ; multiplicative, 121 ; proportional, temporal, and interrogative, 121. Nnmmns, 327, R. 3, (J.) ■ Ntmiqua77i non, and non numquam, 277, Numqvis, num quis, or numgui, etc., how declined, 137, 3; numqnis est qui, 264, 7, N.2; numqua and tihot^kce, 137, r. 4; numquid, as an interrogative particle, 198, ?i'u}nquisnam, 137, 4. J\'»7if, useof, 277, r.15; nunc — nunc, 277, B. 8' nunc and etiamnunc, w. imperfect and perfect, 259, R. 1, (6.) Niinciipo, w. two aces., 230. n. 1; nunctc- »or, 210, R. 3, (3.) JVH«rfmtf>, 326,2, (11.) Nimtio, 273, 2, c); 272, N. 1; pass. w. inf., 271, N, 1; nuntiatur, constr., 271, R. 2. Nuper, mode and viox, 191, R. 6. Nusqunm, w. geni ,., 212, r. 4, N 2, (b.) Nitx, pr., 284,8, 5, R. 2. -nx, nouns in, genitive of, 65, 6, 7. O. O, sound of, 7, 8 ; changed to u in form- ing certain nominatives from the root. 56. I., R. 4, and il., r. 4; nouns in, gender of, 58, 59; genitive of, 69; Greek nouns in, gender of. 59, E. 3; genitive of, 69, K. 3; amplificatives in, 100, 4, (a.); verbals in, 102, 6. (c); adverbs in, 192; increment ia, of 3d decl., 287, 3; of plur., 288; of vertsj 290: final, quantity of. 285, R. 4;. 297: sometimes used for it after v, 322, 8; 58; 178, 1, N. O, interj. w. nom., 209, R. 15; w. ace, 238,2; w. voc, 240, k. 1; O s(, w. subj., 263; 1. Ob, government of, 195, 4: 275, in., r. 3; in composition, 196, l., 9; construction of verbs compounded with, 224; of adjs., 222, R. 1. (6.) Obedin, how formed, 189, N. 3. Obequiin, constr., 233, (3.) Obeo, constr., 233, (3.), N. ; pa.ss., 234, in. Object, of an active verb, 229; the dative of the remote object, 223, N. Objective genitive, 211, r. 2; .after adjs., 213; dat. for objective genitive, 211, R. 5; — propositions after what. 273, N. 8. Oblique cases, 37; their place, 279, 10 and 2. Ohliviscor, w. genitive or ace, 216; w ace. and inf., 272, N. 1. Obnoxiu-s, w. dat., 222, r. 1, (6.) Obri(o,w. abl., 249, i., r. 1. Obsecro, w. two aces., 231, R. 1. Obsequor, obtempero, and obtrecto, w. dat , 223, R. 2. Observe, w. lit or ne, 262, n. 3. Obses, gender of, 30 ; genitive of, 73, E. 1 Obsonor, w. abl. of price, 2.52, R. 1. Obsto, and obsisto, quoniinus, etc., 262, R. 11. Ohtemperatio, w. dat., 222, r. 8. Obtrector, constr., 223, (1.), (a.) Obvius, w. dat., 222, r. 1, (i.) Obviam, w. dat., 228, 1. Occasio, w. genit. of gerunds, 275, in. R.l, (1.) Occumbo, w. dat., 224; w. ace, 224, r. 5. Occurro, w. dat., 224; w. ace, 233, S ); occurrit ut, 262, p.. 3, n. 1. Ocior, comparison of. 126, 1. -ocis. genitive in, 78, {4.} ; 112, 2. Octonarius, 304, 2; — iambic, 314, m Odi, 183, 1. -odis, genitives in, 76, E. 5; 75, e. 1 -odus, Greek nouns in, 49, 2. (E, how pronounced, 9; in nom. plur. 2<1 decl., 54, 2. (Edipus, genitive of, 76, E. 5. CEta, gender of, 42. Officio, w. guo7niiuis, etc., 262, R. U. Ohe, pr., 283, i., E. 5; 295, e. 5. Oi, how pronounced, 9, 1. -ois, genitives in, 76, t. 2; words in, pr 288,1.,!!. 6,(8.) INDEX. 391 Old, how expressed In Latin, 236, N. 3. Oleo and redoleo, w. ace., 232, (2.) Ollus, for ille, whence oUi, masc. plur. for Uli, ISl, R. 1. -olus, a. um, duninutires in, 100, 3, A. 2. -om, for -wm, 53. Omission of a letter or syllable, see syn- cope — of a word, see ellipsis. Omnes, w. genitive plur., 212, R. 2, N. 6; otritiiutn, w. superlatives, 127, 4, w. 2; &7rnia. ace. of degree. 232, (3.) -on, Greek uouus in, 54, 1; Sn toT-orum, 64, 4; -on, roots in, of 3Jdecl., 5G, ii., R. 1; nouns in, of 3d decl., 58 and 61, 5; genit. piur. in, of Greek nouns, 83, ii., 6; -os and ■on, nouns in, of 2d decl., changed to -its iud -tnn. 54, 1. Oniistit.t, w. abl. or genit., 213, R. 5, (4.) )]i(ru>ii ilare, w. ut, 273, N. 1; w. dat. of g< ruod, 276, III., B. 2, (1.); w. ace. id, 232, (Ji. ) ; — opera med, equivalent to per me, 247, R. 4. Opinio ext, w. ace. and inf., 272, R. 1; o;);nio«f after comparatives, 256, R. 9; its place. 279, n. 1. O/iinnr, w. ace. and inf., 272, N. 1. Oj'ortet, w. inf a.< its subject, 269, R. 2; w. inf., ace. with the inf., or the subj., 273, N. 5; without ut, 262, r. 4. " Oportehitt , oportuit, the indie, instead of the subj., 259, r. 3, (a.) O/ipiilo, w. adjs., 127, 2. Oppii/um, in apposition to names of towns, 237, R. 2, (b.) Oppleo. w. abl., 249, i., r. 1. Opinbilius erat, the indie, instead of the Bubj.. 259, K. 3. Ojiiime. instead of abl. of price, 252, r. 3. Opto, 271, R. 4; 273,4; opto, w. subj., without lit, 262, r. 4. Opidentus w. genit. or abl., 213. R. 5, (3.) 0/'K.«, work, declined, 57; opus, need, w. genit. and ace, 211, R. 11; w. abl. of the thing, 243; as subject or predicate of est, 243, R. 2; 210, r. 5; w. perfect par- ticiple, 243, R- 1; w. supine in u, 276, in., R. 2; opHs est. w. inf. as subject, 269, r. 2. -or, nouns in, gender of, 58; 61; genit. of, 70; 71; verbals in, 102, 1; 102, 6. Omtin ohliqan, 266, 1, N., and 2; 273, 3; tenses in, 266, r. 4. Orho, w. abl., 251, N. Orhus, w. abl., 250, 2, (1.); or genit., 213. B. 5, (4.) Order, advs. of. 191. 1. Ordinal numbers, 119, 120; in expressions »f thno, 2.36. R. 2. Origin, participles denoting, w. abl., 246; from a country expres-sed by a patrial, 246, R 3. -flm, genitives in, 76 ; 112, 2 ; Sris, genit. In, 75. -oriiim, verbals in, 102, 8. Orinn'lics, 'oustr.. 246. fhn. w. two aces., 231, R. 1 ; w. ut, ne, or (nf.. 273. 2. N. 4; without «.*, 262, r. 4. Orthoepy, 6—23. Orthogniphy, 2—5; figures of, 322. Ortus, w. abl., 246. ■oi, nouns in, of 2d decl., 54, 1; of 3d M decl., gender o.' 58 and 61, 3; genit ef. 75; Greek genitives in, 68, 1; fitjil in plural aces., sound ol. . e. 3; quantity of. 300. Os, {oris), g' er of, 61, 3; genit. of, 75; wants genit. plui., 94. Os, (ossis), gender of, 61, 3; genit. of 75 B. 1. Ossa, gender of, 42. 1. Ostendo. w. ace. and inf., 272, n- 1. -051/5, adjs. in, 128, 4. -Otis, genit. in, 75; 112, 2. ' Ought ' or 'should,' expressed by indie. of debeo, 259, R. 4, (2.) -ox, nouns in, genit. of, 78, 2, (4.) Oxymoron, 324, 26. P. P, roots of nouns ending in, 56, I. ; when inserted after ni in 2d and 3d i-oots of verbs, 171,3. Facf or in pace, 253, n. 1 ; 257. R. 9, (2.) Palat;iLs, 3, 1. PnlUo, w. ace, 232, n. 1. Pan, ace. of, 80. R. Pant/uwi, voc. of, 54, 5. Par. abl. of, 82, e. 1, (6.); 113, E. 3; su- perlative of, 126, 2; w. dat. or genit., 222, R. 2, (a.); w. cu7n and the abl., 222, r. 6; par erat, indie, instead of subj., 209, R. 3, (a.); pr., 284, N. 1; par ac. 198, 3. Parabola, 324, 3u. Paradigms, of nouns, 1st decl., 41; 2i decl., 46; 3d decl., 57; 4th decl., 87; 5th decl., 90;— of adjs. of 1st and 2d decl., 105 —107; 3d decl., 108— 111;— of verbs, sum, 153; ist conj., 155, 156; 2d conj., 157: 3d conj., 158, 159; 4th conj., 160; deponent. 161; periphrastic, conj., 162; defective, 183 ; impersonal, 184. Paragoge, 322, 6. Paratus, con.'^tr., 222, r. 4, (2.) ParcOj w. dat., 223, R. 2, n., (o.); parct- tur 7niht, ib., (f.); w. inf., 271, N. 3- Parens, w. genit. or abl., 213, r. 6, (2.); w. m,213, R. 4, (2.) Paregmenon, 324, 24. Parelcon, 323.2. (1.) Parenthe-sis. 324, 4, (6.) Pariter ac, l98, 3. Paro, coustr., 273, N. 1; w. inf., 271, H 1. Paroemiae verse, 304. 2. Paronomasia, 324, 25. Pario. couipds. of, 163, K. 4. Parsing, 281, III. Prirs, ace. of. 79, 4; abl. of, "2, e. 6, («.): e'-'-is of. 205. R. 7; its use in fractional I'lcssions, 121. 6; niaifniim and miixi- 'Oil partem .2^, II., R. 3; multis parstf/us, 256, R. 16, (3.) Part, ace. of, 234, n. Particeps, genit. of, 112, 2; genit. plur of, 114, B. 2; 115, 1, (a.)— w. genit., 213, E. 1, (3.) Participial adjs., 130;— of perfect t/inse, meaning of, with tenses of sum, 162, 12, ( 2. 1 ; w. genit., 213. K. 1, (2.) Participles, 25 .and 148, 1; in us, how de- clined. 105. H. 2; iu H5, do.. Ill; ab!. sing of, 113,2; participles of active verbs, 148 398 INDEX. 1, (2); of neuter rerbs, 148, 1,(3.); 162,16; of deponent verbs, 162, 17 ; of neuter pas- give verba, 162, 18; in -nis, genit. plur. of, 162, 19: pres. and perf. compounded with. in, 162, 21; when they become adjs. or nouns. 102, 22; cases of in compd. tenses, 162, 12. 13; sometimes with esse indeclina- ble, 162, 13, (1); in -rtts with sum, force of, 162, 14; how modified, 202, li., (3.); agree- ment of. 205; agreement with a predicate nom. instead of the subject, 205, R. 5; geuiler when used impersonally, 205, R. 18; p-rfect denoting origin, with abl., 246; in »\A. absolute, 256 :— passive of naming, etc., with predicate abl., 257, R- 11; their gov- ernment, 274; their time how determined, 274. 2, and 3; perfect in circumlocution, for abl. of cause. 247. 1, R- 2, (6.); with hnbeo, etc., 274. 2, R. 4; for a verbal noun, 274. 2, R. 5; for clauses, 274. 3. Participo. poetically, w. genit., 220, 2. Partidis. 190. 1. Parthn, 79, 4; partim, w. genit., 212, R. 4; partijn— partim, w. genit. or ex, 21 1, Partitive nouns. 212, R. 1;— adjs., 104. 9; —partitives with plur. verbs, 209, R. 11; 211, R. 1; w. genit. plur., 212; ellipsis of, 212, R. 2, N. 3; w. ace. or abl., 212, R. 2, N. 4; genit. sing, after neuter adjs. and pronouns, 212, R. 3. Parts of speech. 24, 2 and 3. Parum, its meaning, 191, ill.; compared, 194, 4: w. genit.. 212, R.4. Porumper, its meaning. 191, n. Parvus, compared. 125, 5; parvi, w. verbs of valniug, 214, R. 1, («•), (1); parvo. with comparatives, 256, R. 16; after xstiwo, 214, E. 2, N. 2; as abl. of price, 252. R. 3. Pasco, 171, E- 6 l>assive voice, 141, 2; construction of, 234 ; passive voice with a reflexive pronoun understood as the agent equivalent to the middle voice in Greek, 248, r. 1, (2.); with ace. of the thing 234, i. Pateo, w. two dats_., 227, R. 1. Pater, declined, 57. Pater-faniilias, etc., how declined, 43, i. Pathetic or emotive word, 279, 2, (e.) Patinr, 273, 4; 262. r. 4; par/.ns, w.gen., 213, R. 1,(2.); w. inf., 271, N. 3. Patrial nouns. 100.2; m o. genitive of, 69 „. ;— adjs.. 104. 10: 128. 6, (a.); ellip.sis if their substantive, 205, R. 7: pronouns, 139. 4 Pnlrocinor. w. dat.. 223, R. 2. Patronymics, 100, 1; in -es, genit. plur. ill inn instead of -arunu 43, 2; m as and is used M adjs., 205. r. H; quantity of their peuuU, 291, 4 and 6. Pauca, ace. of degree, ^61, (6- ) Fanlisper, its meaning, 191- "• Paulp, w. comparatives, 256, R- 16; pau- \ui!i abestquin. 272, «■ 7. , , ^. „- Pn-uper, abl. of. 113, E. 2; defective, 115, I, ((/ ); w. genit. or abl., 213, R. 6, (2.) Pnviiius, w. genit., 213, R. 1. PavoT est ne, etc., 262, N. 3. Peeui. i-^uiis), genit. of, 67, k. 3. Peciiiiaris, 222, r 2, (a.) Pedes, gender of. 31, 2; genit. of, 3, 3, for perlites, 209, R. U, (1.), (4) Pejero, pr., 285, 2, E. 1. Pelagus, gender of, 51 ; ace. plur of, 54 5; 94. PfHo, 171, E. 1, (*.); 251, N. Penrlo, w. genit. of value, 214; w. abl. of price, 252, R. 1. Pensi and pili habere, 214, R. 1. . Pentameter verse, 304, 2 ; 311 ; 312, IX., X. Penthemimeris. 304, 5. Peuult, 13; quantity of, 291; of prope* names, 293. Per, its uses, 195, R. 9; 247. 1, R- 1; w. the means when a person, 247, 3, R 4; in adjurations. 279, 10, («.); in composition 196, I., 10; per compounded with adjectives strengthens their meaning, 127, 2. Perceiving, verbs of, their construction, 272. Percipio, w. ace. and inf , 272, N. 1; per- ceptum haheo, instead of percepi, 274, K. 4. Pfrcnntor, w. two aces., 231, R. 1- Perrnnis. abl. of. 113. E. 1. Perdo, w. capitis, 217, R. 3; perditum ire, for perdere, 276. II., R- 2. Perduim, for perdam, 162, 1. Perfect tense. 145, iv. ; definite and in- definite, 145, IV., R. ; old form in smi, 162, 9; quantity of dissyllabic perfects, 284, e. 1. perfect participles translated jictively, 162, 16; both actively and passively, 162, \i, (a.);— of neuter verbs. 162, 18; of imper- sonal verbs, 184, R. 2; the perf. subj., 260, II. R. 1, (3.); in the connection of tenses, 25^; signification of perf definite. 259, R 1, (2.).' («.); of perf indefinite, ib.. (6.) — (d.)\ perf subj.. siirnification of. 260, il., R- 1, (3 ) and R. 4 and 0; in the protasis, 261, 2 and R. 2 and 3; 263. R. ; perf subj. for im- perative. 267, R 2: perf inf., how used. 268, R 1.(0.); perf participle, 2i4, 2 and N.; supplies the place of a pres. pass, par- ticiple. 274. R. 3. (a.) ; perf part, of a pre- ceding verb used to express the completion of an action, ib., (i.); v. haheo, 274. R- 4; w do, reddo. euro, etc., ib. ; supplies the place of a verbal noun, 274, R. 5; used in circumlocution for abl. of cause, 24i, R. i, [b.); neuter perf pass, participle used as the subject of a verb, 274, R. 6, (*.) Perftcio U/.273. n 2. . , „„ , per^o. constr.. 225, iv. ; w. inf., za, N 1. Perhibto: 230, N. 1; 272,. n. 1, and r. 6; perhibeor, 210, R. 3, (3.); w. inf., 271, N 1 Periclilor. capitis or eapite, 21 r, R- o. Period, 280. Perinde, 191, lU. ;— ac or atque, 198, 3, B Periphrasis, 323, 2, (4.) Periphrastic conjugations, mi, 14 and Id Ferities, 213, R. 1, and R. 4; 275, (2.); 270, R. 1; w. ad, 213, R. 4, (2.); 226, m. Per/riiiceo. 245, n., 2, and R- 1 and 2. F«nw«o, 73, 4; w. part. fut. pass., a71| R. 7; w. subj. without ut, 262, R. 4. Permuto, 252, R. 5. Pernox, genit. of, 112, 2. Perosus, 188, 1, N. INDEX. 399 Perpello. 273, n. 4. Perprs, in gemt. sing., 112, Ij 115, 2. Persevero, vr. iuf., 271, N. 1. Personal pronouns. 132, 4; ellipsis of as subject-nominatives, 209, R. 1; expressed wi' infinitive. 272, N . 4 ; -personal termi- oauuiis of verbs, 147, 3. Personification, 324, 31 Person of a noun or pronoun, 35, 2- 132, 4. of a verb, 147; used in the imperative," 111, 2; _lst and2d person.s used indefinitely, ili9, R. 7; of verbs with nominatives of dif- ferent persons, 2i)9. r. 12. Ptrspfclum hatjfo, iu.stead of perspexi, bti, R. 4. FersiiailfOj w. dat., 223, N., (6.); hoc per- madftiir mihi, 223, N., (c.);—persuasum TTtthi hntfo. 274, R. 4. Pfri:rjiim est, constr., 229, E. 6; 215, (1 1 und .N. 2. ' I ^ / Pertinto, ellipsis of, 209, r. 4 Peto constr., 230, r. 2; 231, b. 4; peto «t, 2,3, N. 4; 262, r. 4 Pes and compds., genit. of, 73, B. 1 ; 112 1: abl of, 113, E. 2; pr., 284, n. 1; m] E. i, to.) P/i, in syllabication, '^8, 2: when silent, 12, R. Phalecian verse, 304, 2; pentameter. Finer, declined, 106 ; constr., 222, r. 4, (2.) Pii(tt. w. genit., 215; w. ace, 229, r 6- participle and gerund of, 184, R. 3. ' Pill habere, etc., 214, e. 1. Place, advs. of, 191, i. ; 192, in.; genit. of. 221; ace. of, 237; dat. of, 237, R. 3- place where, abl. of, 254;— whence, abl. of i)o; through which, 255, 2; place of a foot m verse, 309. .v. Plants, gender of their names, 29. Plaudo, change of a« in its compds., 189, N. 3. Plenty or want. adjs. of, w. abl., 250. ^/ev,«5,w. genit. or abl., 213, r. 5, (3.); Pleonasm, 323, 2. ^Ux, adjs. in, abl. of, 113, e. 3; how de- clined, 121, 1. ' 1 : Ple'iqite, w. genit. plur., 212, R. 2, (1.) Pluperfect tense, 145, v.; old form in sem, 162, 9; for the historical perfect, 259. K. 1, (3.) Plural number, 35. 1 ; when wanting, 95 • noun.= only plur.. 9.J; plur. of Greek nouns of Ist decl., 45, 2; do. of 2d decl., 54, 2;— nouns used for singular. 98; tins for ego, M9. R. 7, (i.); of verbs with collective nouns, 209, K. 11; the plur. of abstract nouns, 95, R. ; plur. nouns in appo.sitioii to two or more nouns in the singular, 204, R. 5. riierimin,,. w. genit., 212, r. 3; plurimi and pliirnno after verbs of buying, etc 214, R. 1, (1. , and r. 3, n. 2; plurimo, abi! of price, 252, r. 3. Pt'w, declined, 110; w genit., 212, r. 3, ir. 1, («.p; with numerals, etc., with or ftithnut 7Krt)», 256, R 6; plus for masis 277. r 12; ;i/Hr*, abl. of price, 252, r. 3. ' Podimi, declined, 57. Poem.s, gender of names of. 29. PanitH ■^. genit., TJ>; w. gubj., 215, r. w. ace 229, r. 6; participle.^ of, 184, R. 3 w. quod, 273, .\. 6. Po'esis. declined, 86. Poetical arrangement of words, 2/9, & (e.)\ 16, N. 4. ' J -1 -politamis, adjs. in, 128, 6, [g.) Pollens, w. genit. or abl., 213, r 5 (4 )• cf. R. 4, (1.) ■" Polliceor, w. ace. and inf., 272 > 1 Polyptoton, 334, 23. Polysyndeton, 323, 2, (2.) Pondn. indeclinable. 94; poivlo libram ri Mras, 211. R. 6, (4.); 236. r. 7. Ponoin, E. 2; 2.30, R.2; 241, R. 5; pr., 284. R. 2, (c); 229, R. 4,1. ^ ' Posco, w. two aces., 231: 230. r. 2; w. u«. etc., 273. N. 4; in pa.ss.. 234, i. Position in pro.sody. 283, iv. Positive degree, 122, 4. Posses.sive, adjs., 104; pronouns. 139; to what equivalent, 132, 6; how used, 207, R- 36 : 211, R. 3 ; ellipsis of when reflexive, ■iOi, R. 36; used for subjective and posses- sive genit., 211, R.3, (6.), and R. 8,(3 ), fa .• for objective genit., 211, r. 3. (<-.); so pos- sessive adjectives, 211. r. 4, and r. 8. (3 ) (h-t ; mea, tua, etc., after refert and intertit, 219, R. 1. Possiiho, w. perf p.ass. part.. 274, r 4. Possum, conjugated. 1.54. r. 7; ^vith m- perlatives, 127, 4; w. inf., 271, N. 1; pote. rat. the indie, for the subj., 259, R. 3- pot- ^im fOTposse?)}, 259, r. 4, (2.) Post, postqitam. etc., how pronouncj?d, 8, E. 4; post, its case. 195, 4; post in cnui- positiou, 196, 11; 197, 14; constr. of verbs compounded with, 224; with concrete nffi- cial titles, 233, r. 3; w. ace. and abl of time, 2.33, r. 1 ; ellipsis of, 235, .\. 3; w. abl like a comparative, 256, r. 16, (3.) Fasten loci, 212, r. 4, n. 4. Fostera, defective, 115, 5; compared, 125 4; derivation, 130, v. Posterior and postremus, instead of jws- terius and postremum. 205, r. 15. Postquam and postenquam, w. historical perfect instead of pluperfect, 259, r. 1, (2.). Fostulo, w. two aces., 231, r. 1; w. arc and genit., 217, r. 1; vi.de or the simple abl., 217, r. 2; w. subj., without «/.. 26'' R. 4. Potens, w. genit., 213, r. 1, (3.); w. in o. ad and ace, 212, R. 4, (2.) Potior, w. abl., 245. i. ; w. ace, 245. i R.; w. genit., 220, (4.); potiundus, 162, 2.) 273, ir., R. 1. Fnti.'i. defective. 115, 5. Potiirs. compared, 194, 4; used pleonasti- cally, 256, r. 13. Pol IIS. translate. B. 1, (a.), and R. 3. ; 272, r. 4 and 5; par- ticii'le pres., how deijlined, 111, R. ; whatit denotes, 274, 2 and n. ; denoting something about to be done, 274, R. 1 ; also a purpose. 274, R. 2, (tt.); and a stiite or condition, 274, R. 2, (6.); present pass, participle, how supplied, 274. r. 9. Preterites. 145, N. 2; 258, B. ; preterites of the indicative used for the pluperfecj subjunctive, 259. R. 4^ (1.) Preteritive verbs, 183, i. Pretii and pretio, 214, R. 2, n. 3; ellipsU of, 252, R. 3. Priapean verse, 310. ii. Price, ablative of, 252; genitive of tanti^ etc., 214, R. 1. PnVVie, w. genit., 212, R. 4, N. 6;w. ace, 238, 1. Primus, mediiis, etc., how translated, 205, R. 17 , their place, 279. 7 ; prior, pri- mus, for prius, primum, 205, R. 15. Princeps. genit. of, 112,2; abl. of, 113, E. 2; 115, 1, (a.); used instead of an adverb of time, 205, R. 15. Principal parts of a verb, 151, 4 ;— propo- sitions, 201, 5;— parts of a proposition. 202, 5; ten.*es, 255. A. Prinripin, abl. of time. 253, N. Priiisquam. with what mood, 263, 3. Privo, w. abl., 251. N Pro. constr. of verbs compounded with, 224; w. abl. for predicate noiii., 210. N. 3; for predicate ace, 230. .n. 4; in composition, quantity of. 285, E. 5, and r. 7; pro nihilo duco, etc.. 214, R. 2, N. 2; pro eo and pro- inde ac, 198, 3, R. Proclivis, 222, R. 4, (2.) ; 276, in., R. 1. Procid, w. abl., 195, R. 3; 24L R. 2 Prodigiis, w. genit. or abl., 213, R. 5, (2.) w. m, 213, R. 4, (2.) Prodo, w. ace and inf., 2(2, N, 1, and R. 6- Proditur, constr., 271, R- 2. Proficiscor, w. two datives, 227, R. 1. Prohibeo, 251, R-2; w. qiiominus, 262, r. 11 ; 273, 4 ;-w. genit., 220, 2 ; w. abl., 251, n. ; w. dat. or abl., 224, R. 2; w. ace and inf., 272, R. 6. Proinde, adv., 191, lU.; proinde ac, 198, 3, R. Prolepsis, 323, 1, (b.) and (4.) Promitto, constr., 272, N.4; 217, R. 3, (c.) Pronouns. 132—139; simple, 132, 2; neuter w. genit., 212, r. 3, N. 1. Pronoraiual adjs., 139, 5. Pronunciation of Latin, 6 Pronus, constr., 222, r. 4, (2.) Prope est, w. ut and the subj., 262; a a. Proper nouns, 26, 2; found only in lit, 2d, and3ddecls.,40^9. Propero, w. inf., 271, n. 1. Propinquo. 225, R. 2. _ Propinquits, w. the dat. or gemt., 2252, Propior, how compared, 126, 1; propiot and proximiis. \t. dat., 222, R. 1; w. ace. 222 R. 5; 238.1; iuste.ad of propuis, prox- wi', 205, K. 15; proximuin est, w. ut and the subj., 262, B. 3, K. 1 Propius and proxitju, constr, £Si, 1, and R. INDKX. 401 Proporf.ional, adjs . 121. 2. Proposition, 2U1, 1; analysis of, 281. Froiiriiis, constr.. 222, R. 2, (n.) Proritmpo, coustr., 220, R. 4, 1. Prosodiuc verse, 304, 2. Prosody. 282—321; figures of, 305—307. Pro.'JOijopoeia, 32'1, 34. Prusptr nniX ]jro.'ij)erus, 105, N.; w. genit. »rabl . 213, r. 6, (2.) Prosthesis, 322, 1. Prosto, w. abl. of price, 252, R. 1 Pro^mn, 151. n- 6. Prnvidfo, constr.. 223, (1.). (a.) — Protasis aud apodosis, 261 ; import of the differ*- nt teuses in the protasis and apodo- Bis. 2G1, 1 aud 2. ProviiJus. w geuit.,213, R. 1, (3.) Prudent, w. genit., 223, K. 1, (3.) Ps, initial, 12, r. \—ps, nouns in, genit. Of, 77,2,(1.) -p.sf, enclitic, 135, E. 3. Pt, initial, 12, R. -pte, enclitic, 133. R. 2; 139. Pitbes and iinpubes, genit. of, 112, 1; abl. of, 113, E. 2; 115, 1, (a.) Piuht, w. genit., 215; w. inf., 215; w. ace, 229, R. G; w. perf. inf., 268, r. 2; w. Bup. in u, 270, m., r. 2; participle in diis, and gerund of, 184, r. 3. Puer, instead of in jiueritia, 253, R. 6. Pueritia, how used iu the abl., 253, N. 1. Pugna. for in ptigna, 253, N. 1; pugnam pugnnre, 232, (1.) Pugnatur, conjugated, 184, 2. (h.) Piilchre, instead of abl. of price, 252, R. 3. Punctuation, 5. Punio, constr., 217, R. 5. Punishment, coustr. of words denoting, 217, R. 3. Piirgo, w. genit., 217, R. 1; 220, 2; w. abl., 251, N. Purpo.se, denoted by vt, etc., with the gubj., 262; by participles, 274. 2, R. 2, 6 and 7; by inf., 271: 273, n. 4, (6.); by gerund, 275, iii-, k. 2, aud (1.), (2.); by supine in -hwi, 276, ii. Punts, w. genit. or abl., 213, R. 5, (3.); cf. 251, N. pus, Greek nouns in, genit. of, 70, E. 5. Piito. w. genit. of value, 214 ; w. abl. of price, 252, r. 1; w. two aces., 230, n. 1, and .\. 4; w. ace. and inf.. 272. s. 1 ; puta- r«, 260. II., R. 2; putor, 210, R. 3,(3.1, (c); • 1; con.-tr., 2U6, (16); quunlo, w. comparatives, 250, R. 16; qvuntum, w. genit., 212, R. 3, N. 1; in ace. of degree, 231, R. 5: 232, (3.); 256, r. 16, n.; (, etc., 206, (14); as ace. of degree, 232, (3.) Quojiis and 71(0/, for cujus and cui, 136, R. 2. Quoque and etiatn, difference between, 19g, 1, R.. ('/.); place of 06, (16); ?iii with sum, instead of pro, 206, (18); peraon of, 209, r. 6; 206, r. 19;— w. subj., 264; their place, 279, 13; 280, lu., (2.); relatiTes as connectiTes, 280, iii., (1.); 198, ir. Resolving, rerbs of, 273, 1, (a.) Relinqito, w. two datives, 227, b. 1 ; w. part, in iliis^ 274, r. 7; relinquiUir, w. vi and the subj., 262, r. 3, N. 1. Reliqua, ace, 234, ii., E. 3; reliquum est vt, 262, R. 3. Roninlscor, constr., 216. Rfmitto, 229, R. 4, 1. Kemoviug, verbs of, w. abl., 251. R'tiiiiiirror, w. abl., 249, I., R. 1. Re}ittncio, w. two aces., 230, n. 1; pass., 210, R. 3, (3.), (6.) Kepeated words, their place, 279, 4. Repens, abl. of, 113, E. 3. Repr-rio, w. two aecs., 230, N. 1; — repe- rior, 210, R. 3, (3.), (c); 271, r. 2 ;— rfpen- •tnlur, qui, w. subj., 264, 6. Repo, constr. of compds. of, 233, (3.), N. Repono, 241, R. 5. Rf])Osco, w. two aces., 231, R. 1. Repugno, with quominusoTne, 262, R. 11. Res, declined, 90; use of, 205, R. 7, (2.), N. 1. Reses, genit. sing, of, 112, 1 ; defective, 115, 2. Resipio, w. ace., 232, (2.) Responsives, case of, 204, r. 11. Respuhlica, declined, 91. Restat, ut, 262. r. 3, \. 1. Retf,a.h\. of. 82, e. 1, (6.) Retracto, constr., 229, r. 4, 1. . Reus, w. genit., 213, R. 1, (3.) ; reum agere or facfre, w. genit., 217, R. 1. Rhetoric, figures of, 324. Rhus, genit. of, 76, E. 3; ace. of, 80, ii. Rhythm, 308, (1.) Ridfo, w. ace, 232, jj. 1. -rimus, -ritis. quantity of. 290, E., (1.), 4. -rimus, superlatives in, 125, 1. Ritu, as abl. of manner without cum, 247,2. Rivers, gender of names of, 28. -rix, verbals in, 102. 6, (a.) See tor and irix. Rogo. w. two aces., 231, R. 1 ; w. ut, 273, N. 4: 274. R. 7: without ul, 262, r. 4; oon.otr. in pass., 234, i. Roman day, 326, 1 ; — hour, ib. ; — month, 826, 2:— niimes of the months, 326. 2, (1); —calendar table of, 326, 2,(6), p.369;— *ct>k, 326, 2, (10); names of the days of the week, ib. ; — year, how designated, 326, 2, ',11);- -money, weights and measures, 327 ; — tables or weights, etc., 327, pp. 370—373;— coins, 327, p. 371; — intere.st, how comput- ed, ib. Root or crude form of words inflected, what and how found, 40, 10 ; formation of nominative sing, from in 3d decl., 56, i. and n. Roots of verbs, 150; general, 150, 1; special, 150, 2; second and third, how formed, 150, 3 and 4; third, how determin- ed when there is no supine, 151, >.; first, Its dertratlves, 151, 1; irregularitiea in tenses formed from, 162, 1 — 6; second, do. 151, 2 ; Lrrt'gularities in tenses formed from 162, 7—10; third, do., 151, 3; second and third, formation of, 1st couj., 164 — 106; 2d conj., 167—170; 3d conj., 171—174; 4th conj., 175 — 177: second and third irregu- lar, 1st eonj., 165; 2d conj., 168; 4th conj , 176. -rs nouns in, genitive sing, of, 77, 2 [2); genit. plur. of, 83, ii., 4. Rudis, 213, R. 1. and r. 4. (2.); 275,:il., E. 1, (2.) Rupes, declined. 57. Rus, construed like names of towns, m ace, 237, R. 4; in abl., 254; 255; cf. '32, E. 5, (6.); rure, not ruri with an adj., 255, R. 1. -rus, participle in, how declined, 105, R. 2; its signification, 162, 14; 274, 2, r. 6; with sim and esseni serving as future sub- junctives, 162, R. 3; with essf and fuisse, 162, 14, R. 3; 268, r. 4; genitive plur. of, 162, 19; denotes intention, 274, r. 6: used for an English clause connected by ' since, when,' etc., ib. ; as an apodosis, ib. Rutum, pr., 284, E. 1, (2.) S, sound of, 11 ; added to some roots of nouns of 3d decl., 56, i. ; added to roots of verbs ending in a consonant, 171 ; used in- stead of r in the 3d root of some verbs, 171, E. 5; inserted in some verbals, 102, 5, (b.)- s preceded by a consonant, nouns in, gen- der of, 62; 64; genit. of, 77; final, elided, 305, 2. Sacer, vr. genit. or dat., 222, E. 2, (a.) Sacerdos, gender of, 30; 61, 3. SiTpe, comparison of, 194, 5- Sai, 82, E. 1, (6.), and 66, K.; 96,9; pr., 284, N. 1. Salio, constr. of compds. of, 233, (3.), n. Saltern, 193, ii., 3. Saluto, w. two aces., 230, N. 1; salutor, w. two nominatives, 210, R. 3, (3.) Salve, 183, 9. Samnis, genit. sing., 74, E. 4; genit. plur., 83, II., 5. Snpio, w. ace., 232. (2.) Sapphic verse; 304, 2; 315, II. Sal, indecl., 115, 4; satis, w. genit., 212, R. 4; satis esse. w. dat. of gerund, 275, in.. R. 2, (1); satis haheo, and satis niilii est^ w. perf. infin., 208, R. 2; satis erat, indie. instead of subj., 259, R. 3; degrees of com- parison, 126, 4. Satago, w. genit., 215, 2.) Satelles, gender of, 30; 61, 2. Satialus, w. abl. or genit., 213, R. 5, (3.) Satisdn, w. damni in/ecti, 217, R. 3, (c), w. dat., 225, 1. Satisfacio, w. dat., 225, I. Saturn, pr., 284, e. 1, 2. Saturnalibus, for ludis Satumalibus, 253, N. 1. Satur. how declined, 105, R. 1; w. genit or abl., 213, r. 5, (3.) Saturo. w. abl., 249, I., r. 1; w. genit poet., 220, 3. 404 INDEX. Sattts, w. abl., 246. Saying, verbs of, constr., 272; ellipsis of, 270, K. '2, (6.)auil 3; implied, 273, 3, (6.); used iu the passive, 272. R. 6. Sianilo, coiupds. of, 233, (3.), N. Scanning, 304, 6. Srateo, w. abl., 250, 2, (2.), R. 1; with ge))it. poet., 220, 3. Scazon. 314, ii, Sridi, pr., 284, E. 1, (1.) Scilicet, 198, 7, R., (a.) Scio, w. ace. and inf., 272, n, I: scito, i62, 4. Scitor and sciscifor, constr., 231, E. 4. -SCO, verbs in, 187, n.. 2; drop sc iu 2d »nd 3d root before t, 171, e. 6. Scrihc}, 273. 2, (c); w. two aces., 230, N. 1; w. aec. and inf., 272, N. 1, and r. 6; in pa.ss. w. predicate nominative. 210, k. 3, (3); scrihii, w. pres. inf. instead of perf., 2G8, R. 1, {a.) Se, inseparable prep., 196, (6.) Se, w. inl^T, 2US, 5. See .>«!. Secerno, 251, N., and R. 2, N. Secus, for sexus, 88, 1; 94; 211, R. 6,(4.) 230, R. 6; adv., 191, in.; w. ace, 195, r. 3 Sed, 198,9, K;{a.)j its place, 279,3, (a Sf^d, setJ (jiiod, sed quia, 262, R. 9; sed, sed tamni, 278, r. 10; sed et, 198, 1, (d.) Sedeo, 210, R. 3, (2.); compds. of, 233, '3), N. Sedile, declined, 57. Sedo, constr., 229, R. 4, 1. -sf.m, old termination of plup. indie, ac- tive, 162. 9. Semi-deponent verbs, 142, 2. Spnarius. 304, 2; Iambic, 314. Senex, its degrees of comparison, 126, 4; gender of. 65, 2; genitive of, 78, 2, (2); abl. of, 113, E. 2; 115, 1; for in senectute, 253, R. 6. Senten«es, 200; analysis of, 281. Sentiments of another, in dependent clauses, 266, 3. Sentio, w. ace. and inf., 272, N. 1. Separating, verbs of. w. abl., 251. Sejmro, w. abl., 251, N. Sfr/iiitur, constr. 262, R. 3, n. 1. -si-rf, future infin. in, 162, 10. Hereno, scil. caio, 257, R. 9, (2.) Sn-i/io, declined, 57. Serpetis, gender of, 64, 3. Sese, intensive. 1.33, R. 2. Sfrvitiitem s>-rvirf, 232, ll.) Sestertius, its value, 327. R. 2, (b.); how denoted, ib. ; mode of reckoning, ib. ; ses- ttrtium, ib.. r. 5 — 7. Seu, or five, 198, 2, r., (c.) Ships, gender of their names, 29. Short syllable. 282, 2. Showing, verbs of, constr., 272, R. 6. Si, how pronounced, 11, E. 1. -si or -sin, Greek datives in, 84. Si, conj., 198, 5; si for num, 198, 11, R., {i.)\ si 7>iiniis. sin ii'.irttis or sin nliter, 198, 6, R., (6.); 277, r. 14; ellipsis of in the protasis, 261, r. 1; si with the imperfect subj., instead of the pluperfect, 261, R. 5; $1 nihil aliud, 209, r. 4; si r{uisquam and si ullu», 207, B. 30, (*.) ; si non, 262, j. 5. Sibi sun, 228, N., (a.) Sic, 191, K. 5; 277, b. 12, (a.); pljonag tically, 207, R. 22. Sicuti, w. subj., 263, 2, (1.) Significant word, in a proposition, 278 2, {e.) Sie7n, sies, etc.j 154, R. 4. Silentio pra-tenre or facere aliquid, with out cum, 247, 2. Sileo, w. ace, 232. n. 1; pres., 234, rn. Silver age of Roman literature, ^29. 3. -sim, old termination of perfect indie active, 162, 9. Similar constructions, 278, N. 1 and 2 Sunile, 324, 30. Similis, w. genit. or dat., 222, R. 2, (.-i ) w. dat. in imitation of the Greek, 222, r. 7; similes, w. inter., 222, R. 4, (4.); w. etc and atque, 222, R. 7, fin. Simple, subject, 202, 2 ; — predicate, 2rt3, 2;— sentences, 201, 10. Simul, w. abl., 195, r. 3; 241, r 2; simul — simul, 277, R. 8. Sin, 198, 5; its place, 279, 3, (a.); sin minus. 277, R. 14. Singular number, 35, 1; sing, for plur., 209, R. 11, 1, (6.) Singulare est ut, 262, r. 3, N. 3. Singuli, 119. Sino, 273, 4; 262, r. 4. Siquidtm, 198. 7, R., (6.) Siquis, how declined, 138, 2; siquis and siquid, how used, 138, 2, (a.) and (ft.); 207, R. 29; si quis est, qui, w. subj., 264, 6. Sis for si vis, 183. r. 3. Sisto, constr., 229, r. 4, 1. Situ7n, pr.,2S4, e. 1, (2.) Sive or seUj 198, 2, R. ; 278, R. 8 ; its place 279, 3, (o. ) ; sive — sive, w. verb in the indie, 259, R. 4, (3.) -50, -Sim, -urn, old verbal terminations, 162, 9. Socius, w. genit. or dat., 222, a. 2, (a.) Sndes, for si audes, 183, B. 3. Solecism, 325, 2. Soleo, how conjugated, 142, R. 2; w. inf., 271, y. 1. Solitus, 274, R. 3; snlito, after compara.- tives, 2.56, R. 9; its place, 279, n. 1. Solum, solummodo. 193. il., 3. Solus, how declined, 107 ; w. relative and subj., 264, 10; for solum, 205, E. 15. Solutus, w. Renit., 213; w. abl., 251, N ; solutum, pr.. 284, R. 3. Solvo, w. abl., 251, n. Sons, genit. plur. of, 114, e. 3 ; 115, 1, (a.) Sospes, gtnit. of, 112, 1; abl. of, 113, E 2; 115,1. («.); 126,5. (ft.) Sotadic verse, 304. 2; 317, i. Sounds of the letters, 7—12; of the vowels, 7 and 8; of the diphthongs, 9; of the consonants, 10- 12. Space, ace. and abl. of. 236; ellipsis of, 236. R. 3. Spatium, w. genit. of gerund, 275, ni., R. 1, (1); spatio as abl. of space, 236, R. 4. Specto, constr., 225, R. 1. Specus, 88, 1. Spero, w. ace. and inf., 272, n. 1. Spes est, w. ace. and inf., 272, M. 1. INDEX. 406 spes, w. genlt. of gerunds, 275, it., r. 1, (1.); spe, after coinparatiyes, 256, n. 9; its place, 279, n 1. Spolio. w. abl., 251, N. Spondaic verse, 310 ; tetrameter, 312. Spondeo, 163, K. j w. ace. aud inf., 272, N. 1. Stanza, 319, 4. Statim, 193, I!., 1. Statiw, 241, R. 5; 278, n. 1; 271, n. 3; 272, N. 1; slatutiim habeo, 274, R. 4. Statimi, pr., 284, E. 1, (2.) S/eW/M, w. genit. or abl., 213, r. 5, (2); w. ad, 213, R. 4. (2.) Sini and stiti, pr., 284, e. 1, (1.) ' Still,' w. comparatives, how expressed in Latin, 256, R. 9, (6.) Stipidor, 217, R. 3, (c.) Sto, 163, R. ; w. genit. of price. 214, r. 3; w. pi-ed. nom., 210, it. 3, (2.); w. abl., 245, n., 5, and r. 2; stat per me. construction of, 262, R. 11; compds. of, 233, (3.), n. Strophe, 319, 4. Stiideo, w. dat., 223, R. 2; with gerund, 275, III., R. 2, (1.); with the inf. \Tith or without an acci^ative, 271, R. 4; w. tit, 273, 4, (a.); w. ace. id, 232, (3.) Studio.tus, w. genit., 213, R. 1; 275, iii., R.1, (2.) Sliidium, w. genit. of gerunds, 275, ii., R-l,(l) Styx, gender of, 28, e. Suadeo, constr., 273, n. 4; 262, r. 4. Sub, in composition, force of, 122; gov- ernment of, 235, (2); constr. of verbs comp.uuded with, 224; of adjs., 222, r. !,(*■) Subject of a verb, 140 ; of a proposition, 201 ; 202 ; simple, complex, and compound, 202; its place in a sentence, 279, 2; subject of a dependent clause made the object of the leading verb, 229, e. 5, (a.) Subject-nominative, 209; ellipsis of, 209, R. 1 and 2; when wanting, 209, R. 3; w. inf, 209, R. 5; 239, iv. 1; two or more in the singular with a plural verb, 209, r. 12; (2.) Subject-.accusative, 239; ellipsis of, 239, R. 1 — 3; considered also as the accusative of the object after verbs of saying, showing, and believing, 272, r. 6. Subjective genitive, 211, r. 2 ; possessive pronoun used instead of, 211, R. 3. Subjecttis, w. dat.( 222, r. 1, (6.) Subjunctive, 143, 2; its tenses, 145, r. 2; how used, 260 — 2H6. and 273; various u.se of its tenses, 260 : how translated, 260, i. and II., R 1; for imperative, 260, u. 6; in impersonal verbs, 184, r. 2; in conditional clauses, 261; after particles, 262 and 263; after (/If/, 2f!4; after relative advs., 264, R..2; indefinite subj., 264, 12 and ,\. : in indirect questions, 265 ; in inserted clauses, 266 ; in oratio obliqua, 266, 1 and 2; after what verbs used, 273; after adjectives, 213, R. 4; exchanged for ace. w. inf., 273, 3, (b.); subjunctive in doubtful questions, 260, R. 5 ; In repeated actions after relative pronouns and adverbs, 2G4, 12 Siihilo, 193, II., 1. Subordinate conjunctions, 198, il. ;■— pro positions, 201, 6 aud 7. Substantive, 20 — 103; substantive pro- nouns, 132, 138 ; their gender, 132, 8 ; de- clined, 133; as svibject nominative, ellip.yj of, 209. R. 1; dat. of, redundant, 228, N.; substantive verb, 153; substantive clauses, 201, 7 and 8; 229, R. 5; 231, r. 2, (A.); sub- stantive clause instead of the abl. after opiit est, 243, R. 1 ; and after dis:nus and iiidig nus,2i4:,R.2,{h.) Siibter, constr., 235, (4.) Subtractive expressions in numerals, 113 4; 120, 2, 3, and 5. Succenseo, 223, R. 2; w. (iiwd, 273, N. 6. Sufficio, w. dat. of gerund, 275, :n., R. 2, (1.) Sm, signification of, 132, 4 ; declined., 133 ; use of, 208; 266, r. 3: 275, ii,, r. 1, (4.) Sidlis for si viiltis. 183, R. 3. Slim, why called an auxiUary, 153; why substantive, ib.; why the copula, 140, 4; conjugated, 153; compds. of. 1.54, r. 5 — r. 7; w. a genit. of quality, 211, r. 6. (7); in expressions denoting part, property, duty, etc., 211, R. 8, (3); 275, R. 1, (5); denot- ing degree of estimation, 214; w. dat., 226; with two datives, 227; how translated. 227, R. 3; w. abl. denoting in regard to, 250, R. 3; w. an abl, of place, manner, etc., in the predicate, 210, R. 3, (1); w. dat. of ge- rund, 275, R. 2, (1); w. abl. of price, 252, R. 1; w. genit. of value, 214: sunt qui, w. subj., 264, 6; -^unt quidam, nonnulli, etc.. 264, 6, R. 4; ellip.sis of as copula, 209, r. 4 Jin.; of esse and fuis.ie, 270, R. 3; sum w predicate nom., etc., 210, r. 3, [1); esse w predicate nom., 271, N. 2, and r. 4. Siatio, w. two aces., 230, h. 2; poet, w inf, 271, N. 3. Supellex. genitive of, 78, 2, (2); abl. of, 82, E. 5, (a.) Super, constr., 235, (3); of verbs com- pounded with, 224; of adjs., 222, r. 1, (b.) Superfuo. w. abl., 250, 2, (2), R. 1. Siiperjaciii, "constr., 233, (1.) Superlative degree, 122, 6 ; particular use of, 122 R. 4 ; formation of, 124 ; by maxime, 127, 1; superlative with r/uiscjue. 201. R. 35; w. partitive genit., 212, R. 2, and R. 4, N. 7; place of, 296, (7), (6.) Sitpero, w. abl., 256, R. 16, (3.) Supersedeo, w. abl., 242. Super.'ites, genit. of 112, 2; abl. of, V18 E, 2; 11.5, 1, («.); 126, 5, (ft.); w. genit. w dat., 222, R. 2, (a.) Siipersitm. w. dat., 224, 11; superest ut, etc., 262, R. 3. n. 1. Superus, its degrees of comparison, 125, 4; siipremiis or suiiimus. 205, R. 17; suin- minn used adverbially, 205, R. 10; 234, li., R. 3. Supines, 25 and 143.3; few in number, 162, 11; in 11711, by what cases followed, 276,1.; on what verbs dependent, 276, ii., w. eo, 276, u., R. 2 and 3; supines in u after what adjs., 276, in., and u. 1; aften fcwi. nefas, and opus, 276, in., R. 2; of tw« syllables, quantity of, 284, e. 1. 406 INDEX. Supra, V. ace, 195, . w. adjs., 127,6; 856, R. la (6.) Suppedito, w. two data., 227, b. 1; 229, ». 4, 1; w. abl., 250, 2, r. 1. Supplex, genit. plur. of, 114, E. 2; 115, 1, (a.); w. dat.,222, r. 1, (6.) Supposition or concession denoted by the tenses of the subj., 260, r. 3. Surripio, w. d;it. or abl., 224, R. 2. Sits, gender of, 30; 67, E. 4; genit. of, T6, E. 3; dat. and abl. plur., 84, e. 1. Suscipio, w. participle iu dus, 274, r. 7. Suspensus and suspectus, w. genit., 213, «. 1. Sims, use of, 139, r. 2; 208: referring to Jt word in the predicate, 208, ( / ) i for hujus when a noun is omitted, 208, (7.); when two nouns are united by cuin, 208, (7), ;«.); denoting fit, etc., 208, (8.) Syllabic wesura, 310, N. 1. Syllabication, 17—23. Syllables, number of, in Latin words, 17; pure and impure, SO ; quantity of first and middle, 284; of penultimate, 291 ; of ante- penultimate, 292; of final. 294. Syllep.'iis, 323, 1. (b.) and (3.) Symploce, 324, 15. Syu;eresis, 306, 1. Synaloepha, 305, 1 Syuapheia. 307, 3. Synchysis. 324, 4. Syncope, 322, 4; in genit. plur. of 1st decl., 43, 2; of2d decl., 53; iu cases of >/os and sits. 83, R. 1 and 84, E. 1; of e in ob- lique cases of nouns in er of 2d decl., 48; of 3d decl., 71, e. 1; in perfect, etc., of verbs, 162. 7; see Omission. Synecdoche, 234, ii.; 323,1, (5.); 324,3. Synesis or synthesis, 323, 3, (4.) Synonymia, 324, 29. Synopsis of Horatian metres, 320. Syntax, 1; 200—281. Systole, 307, 1. Syzygy, 303, 4. T, sound of, 12; before .i in roots of nouns, 56, r. 1; in roots of verbs. 171. 3, and E. 5 ; nouns in, gender of, 66 ; genit. of, T8 ; final, quantity of, 299, 2. Taceo, w. ace, 232, N. 1. Ta'det, w. genit., 215; w. ace. 229, R. 6. Taclio w ace, 233, R. 2, n. Talma, gender of, 42, 2. To/i.s, demonstr. adj., 139,5,(3.); talis followed by : 206, (l6); syncope of, before ijuot, 206, .16.) Totidem, indecl., 115, 4. Totie.s, correlative of rjnoties, 121, 5. Tutus, how declined, 107; toto, tota, abl. without in. 254, K. 2; tutus, instead of an adverb, 205, R. 15. Towns, gender of names of, 29, 2 ; constr. ; see Place. •tr. roots of nouns in 56 ii., R. 3. Traditin. w. dat., 222, K. 8. Trndo, w. ace. and inf., 272, N. 1, and n. 6; w. part. fut. pass., 274, r. 7, (a.); traditur, constr., 271. R. 2; trador, constr., 271, R. 2. Tran/i-illo, scil. mari, 257, R. 9, (1.) Trans, constr. of verbs compounded with, 833, 1; in pas.sive, 234, R. 1, (6.) Trajicio, constr., 229, ii. 4, 1; 2.33, (1.) Tran.sitive verbs, 141; w. ace, 229- ellip- ■!is of, 229, R. 2. Trees, gender of names of, 29 Tres, Uow declined, 109. Trepidus, w. genit., 213, R. 1. Tribuo. w. two datives, 227, R. 1; w. two aces., 230, R. 2; w. part. perf. pass., 274, B. 7, (a.) Tricolon, 319, 2; tricolon tristrophon and ►etnistrophon, 319, 6. Tricurpor, iibl. of, 113, E 2; 115, 1. Tricuspis, abl. of, 113, B. 2. Trihemimeris. .304, 5. Trimeter, 304, 2, catalectic, 312, vii. Tripes, genit. ol, 112, 1; abl. of, 118 E. 2. Triptotes, 94. Tristrojihon. 319, 3. Trochaic or feminine c.i^sura, 310, w. 1 ;— metre. 315 and 803 : tetrameter catalectic, 315, I.; dimeter catalectic, 315, IV.; tro- chaic pentameter or Phalecian, 315, ill. Tropes, 324. -truin. verbals in, 102, 5. Trunrus. w. abl. or genit., 213, R. 5, (4.) Til. declined, 133; in uom. with adj. in voc, 205, R. 15, (c.) ; used indefinitely. 2i)9, R. 7; when expressed, 209, r. 1; tiii, femi- nine, with masc. or neuter gerundive, 275, III., R. 1, (4.) Turn and quum, 191. R. 7; tinn — turn, 277, R. 8; turn and tunc, difference between, ib. ; turn }naxi»ie, ib. ; tu>ii lemporis, 212, R. 4. .\. 4. TumuUu, as abl. of time, 253, n. 1. Tunc and nunc, 191, R. 7; tunc temporise 212, R.4, .N.4. Tumidus and turgidits, w. abl., 213, B. 5, (5.) Turris. declined, 57. -tus, adjs. in, 128, 7; nouns in, of 3d decl., 76, E. 2; 102, 7. Tints, how declined, 139; used reflexiv©- ly, 139 R. 1; tua after re/ert and intere.^t, 219, R. 1. U. V, sound of, 7 and 8 ; u and f, 2,3; uii genit. and voc. of Greek nouns, 51; root of nouns of 3d decl. ending in, 56, i. ; dat in, 89; neuters of 4th decl. in. 87: dat. ii of 4th decl., 89, 3: in 2d root of verbs, 167 and 171, E. 2; increment in, 3d decl., 287, 3; plur.. 288; of verbs, 290; final, quanti ty of, 298 ; 285, R.4; u and itu in 3d roota of verbs, 167. Ua, ue. etc., pronunciation of, 9, 4 antf 5; quantity of, 28o, ii., E. 3. Vber, w. genit. or abl., 213, R. 5, (3.) -ubus, in- dat. and abl. plur., 89, 5. Ubi, genit. , 212, r. 4. n. 2; w. indio. perf. instead of pluperf., 259; R. 1, (rf.); ubiitbi, 191, R. 1. -ucis, genitives in. 78, (5); 112, 2. -udis. genitives in, 76, E. 1. -uis, genitives in, 76, e. 3. -ulcus, a, um, diminutives in, 100, 8, c. 1. Ullus, pronom. adj., 1-39, 5, (1', (a.); how declined, 107; how used, 207r. 31. Ulteriur, its degrees, 126, 1; uUimus tot ultimum, 205, R. 15; how translated. 205, R. 17. Ultrix, gender of, 125, 1, (6.) Ultra, prep., 195. 4; adv., 191, I. Ultutn ire for ukisci. 276, II., R 2. -ulum, verbals in, 102, 5. •ulus, a, um, diminutives in, 100, 8; 128, 5. -uiit, genit. plur. in instead of arum, 48j instead of oruin, 53; nouns ending lu, 46) 408 INDEX. In genit. plur. 3d decl., 83; 114;— adrs. in, 192, II., 4.(6.1 Unria, 327, p. 872. -uni/us, participles iu, 162, 20. Unrle '/nmo, 255, it. 1. Uitu/iiran, 191, u. ; umquam, itsqumn, J«- |Ke, itspiam, 191, R. 6. -uiith. iu genit. of Greek nouns, 76, e. 6. Uniis, declined, 107; when used iu plur., 118, R. 2; added to superlatives, 127, N. 2; unus et alter, with verbs singular, 209, R. 12; w. relative and subj., 264, 10; for tolum, tantum, etc., 205, R. 15, (*.); unum, ts ace. of degree, 232, (3.) Unusc/uisque, how declined, 138, 4. -i/r, nouns in, gender of, 66, 67; genit. f.f, 70, 71. -ura, verbals in, 102, 7, R. 2. Urbs, in apposition to names of towns, 237, R. 2, (6.) -urio, fiThs in, 187, u., b. -tiris, genitives in, 76, E. 3. -us, nouns in, of 2d decl., 46; exceptions in, 49—51; voc. sing, of, 46, n. and 52; of 3d decl., gender of, 66; 67; genitive of, 76; Greek genit. in, 69, E. 3; nouns in of 4tli decl., 87 — 89; participles in, how de- clined, 105, K. 2; verbals in, 102, 7; final, quantity of, 301. Usitalimi est, ut, 262, R. 3, N. 3. Uspiam, xtsqua7n, usque, 191, r. 6; i«- quam. w. genit., 212, R. 4, N. 2; usque, w. ace, 195, R.3; 235, R. 9.. Usus, w. abl., 243; usti venit, ut, 262, R.3, N. 1; w. genit. of gerunds, 275, ill., R. 1, (1.) Ut or iiti, a conj., 198, 8; ut non and ut ne, ib.; w. subj., 262; its correlatives, 262, R. 1; ellipsis of, 2G2. R. 4; its meaning after metuo, etc., 262, r. 7; ut non, 262, R. 5, and R. 6, 2; vt—ita or sic, 277, R. 12, (6.); ut, 'as,' ellipsis of, 277, R. 17; ut, ' even if,' and ut non, w. subj., 262, R. 2; vt with certain impersonal verbs and subj., 262, R.3; iu questions expres.sing indigna- tion, 270, H. 2, (a.); ut, ut prnnum, etc., with the historical perf., indie, instead of the pluperf., 259, r. 1, (d.); its place, 279, 3, (4.); at after est with a predicate adj., 262, R. 3, .N. 4; ut credo, ut puto, etc., in interposed clauses, 277, i., R. 17; ut, 'be- cause,' 277. I., r. 12, (b.); ut qui, 264, 8, 2; utsi,yi. subj., 263, 2; ut ila dica7n, 207, R. 33, (b.) Jin. ; ut, ' as if,' w. abl. absolute, 257, N. 4; utut. w. indie, 259, r. 4, (3); ellipsis of ut when ne precedes and et, etc., fcUow, 278, R. 6, (c.) Utcuiitque, w. indie, 259, K. 4, (3.) Uier, how declined, 107; w. dual genit., 212, R. 2, N. 1. U'ercumque, how declined, 107. Vterlibet, uterque,anA utervis, their mean- ing and declension, 107; 139, 6, (1), (6.); uterque, use of, 207, R. 32 ; uterque, w. plur. verb, 209, R. 11, (4.) Utilis, w. dat., 222, r. 1; 275, in., R. 2; w. ad, 222, r. 4, (1.); utile est ut, 262, R. 3, N. 3; uiilis, w. inf. poetically, 270, R. 1, (h.); 275, K. 2; iitilius f'uit, indie instead of subj., ■iea, B. 3; w. supine in u, 276, iii., a. 1. Utinam and uti, w. subj., 263, 1. -utis, genitives in, 76, E. 2; 112, 2. Utor, w. abl., 245; w. ace, 245, I., B } w. two ablatives, 245, n. ; utor,fruor, etc ■« their gerundives, 275, li., R. 1. Utpote qui, w. subj., 264, 8, (2.) Utrique, how used, 107, R. 32, (a.) Utrum and utrumne, 198, 11. -utus, adjectives in, 128, 7. -ttus, adjectives iu, 129, 3. -MX, nouns iu, genit. of, 78, 2, (5.,) Uxor, ellipsis of, 211, E. 7. V, changed to u, 163, 2 ; sometimes drop- ped iu forming the 2d root of verbs of this 3d conj., 171, E. 4. Vaco, 250, 2, R. 1. Vacuus, w. genit. or abl., 213, R. 5, (3.) of. 251, N. Vado, constr., 225, rv. ; 232. n. 1; 233, (3), N.l. V(F., w. dat., 228, 3; w. ace, 238, 2. Valde, 127, 2. Valeo, w. abl., 250, 2, r. 1; 252; yr. ace, 252, R. 4; valere or vale dico, w. dat., 225, I., N.; w. inf., 271, n. 1. Validus, 213, R. 5, (4.) Valuing, verbs of, 214, R. 2; w. genit., 214; w. abl. ,.252, r. 1. VapuTb, 142, r. 3. Variable nouns, 92; adjs., 122. Vas, genit. of, 72, E. 1; gender of, 62, E. 1, and E. 2; 93, 2. -ve, 198, 2, and n. 1, p. 76; place of, 279, 3, (c.) Vehor, compds of, 233, (3.), n. Vel, 198, 2; difference between vel and aut, 198, H. ; vel w. superlative degree, 127, 4; w. comparatives, 256, R. 9, (b.) Velijn, w. subj. without ut, 260, R. 4; 262, R. 4. Vellem, how used, 260, R. 2. Velox, constr., 222, E. 4, (2.) Velut, veliit si, veluti, w. subj., 263, 2; velut, ' as if,' w. abl. absolute, 257, N. 4. Venalis, w. abl. of price, 252. Vendo, w. abl., 252; w. genit., 214, n.3, N. 1. Veneo, 142, R. 3; 252; 214, r. 3, n. 1. Venio, w. two datives, 227, R. 1 ; w. ad or in, 225, iv. ; w. dat., 225. r. 2; renii mihi in mentein, constr., 211, r. 8, (5); 216, R. 3. Venitur, conjugated, 184, 2, (6.) Verbal terminations, 152; nouns, 102; w. ace, 233, r. 2, n.; of place, 237, R 1; w. dat., 222, r. 8; w. abl. of place, 265; w. genit. of personal pronouns, 21], r. 3, (a.) ; verbal adjs., 129. Verbs, 140—189; subject of, 140, 1; active or transitive, 141. i.; neuter or in- transitive, 141, II.; neuter passive, 142, 2; neutral passive, 142, 3; deponent, 142, 4; common, 142, 4, (6.); principal parts of, 151, 4 ; neuter, participles of, 162, 16 ; in ceptive, 173; dessiderative, 187, ii., 3; 176, N.j irregular, 178—182; defective, 183; re- INDEX. 409 dunilanf, 1*^5; verhs Rpelleil alike, or haviii; the same pi-rfect or supine, 186; deriTatiou of, 187; imititive, 187, 3; fre- quentative. 187, II.. 1; iuceptire, 187, il-, 2; desideratire. 1*7, II., 3; diminutive, 187, II.. 4; intensive, 187, ii., 5; 187. ii., 1, (f.;; composition of. 188; ctianges in composition, 189: compoands from simples not in use, 189, .N. 4: agreement of, 209, (*.); ellipsis of, 209, k. 4; person of with qui, 209, R. 6; agreeing with predicate nominative, 209, R. 9; with collective nouns, 209, b. 11 ; plural with two or more nominatives, 209, R. 12; after uifrr/ue, etc., 209. R. 11, 4); after a nominative with citir) and theabl.,209, h. 12, (t//.>. declension of, 112,2; its superla- tive. 125. 1 ; 126. 3. Vii't. abl of place without in, 254, R. 3. Viretn for fire. 247. 1. N. 3. VfciHw. genit. of place, 221, R. 3,(4.1; 212, B. 4. N. 2,(6.) Viriniis, w. dat. or genit., 222. r. 2, (a.) Viririr, ll;j, 1, ^i.); how declined .is an idj.. 129, 8. Vi'Ulicet and scilicet, 198, 7, R., (a.); pr . 285, K. 4. .N. 2. /itleo. w. ace. and inf., 272, N. 1; w. ut Of ne. 262. N.3: i'i.; Voluntary agent of pass, verbs, 248. t.; ellipsis of. 141. a. 2: 248, i., r. 1; when expressed by per and ace. 247. b. 4; of neuter verbs. 248. r. 2; dative of voluntary agent. 225, ri. and iit. Volutum, pr., 284, r. 3. Vos, see tii. 133. Voti and votorum dainnali, 217, R. 3. Vowels, 3, 1; sounds of, 7 and 8: vowel, before a mute and liquid, its quantity, 13, 6, and 283, iv., e. 2; before another vowel, quantity of, 13, 3, and 283. I.; in Greek words, 283, k. 6; before two consonants, 13. 5, and 283, iv. : ending first part of a compound, quantity of. 285, R. 4. Vii:^us. gender of, 51 ; 95. Vultur, gender of, 67. W. W, not used in Latin. 2. 4. Weight, ace. of, 236, k. 7; weights, Ro man. 327. Willingness, verbs of. constr.. 273 4 Winds, gender of names of. 28 Wishing, verbs of, consti . 271, h 4. Words, divi.^ion of. 17 -23; arrangement of, 279: gender of as n.ere words. 3-1, 3. Writers in different ages, 329. X X, sound of, 12; its equivalents. 3, 2; 66, R. 2; 171, 1; in syllabication, 18, 4; noau in, gender of, 52 and %; genitive of, 78,3 . a- , 410 INDEX. y, found onlj in i^jek words, 2. 5 ; Bound of, 7, R. 2 ; a, E. 5 ; nouns in, gender of, 62; genitive of, 69; increment in. 3d decl., 287, 3; final, quantity of, 298; 285, R. 4. -yrhis, in genitive 78, 2, (6.) -yds. genitives in, 78, 2, (6.) •ydis, genitives in, 77, 1. Yi, baw pronounced, 9, 1; abl. In, 82, ■ygh, genitives in, 173, 2, (6.) -ynns, Greek genitive in, 71, 3. -y.?, nouns in, gender of. 62, 63, E. : gonl tive of. 77; ace. of. 80, ii. ; abl. of, 82. E. 6 final, quantity of, 301. -yx, nouns in, gender of, 65, 6. Z. Z, found only in words derived Som th« Greek, 2, 6; its equivalents. 3, 2. Zeugma 8^, 1 (b., and 2.) RETURN TO the circulation desk of any University of California Library or to the NORTHERN REGIONAL LIBRARY FACILITY Bldg. 400, Richmond Field Station University of California Richmond, CA 94804-4698 ALL BOOKS MAY BE RECALLED AFTER 7 DAYS 2-month loans may be renewed by calling (415)642-6233 1-year loans may be recharged by bringing books to NRLF Renewals and recharges may be made 4 days prior to due date DUE AS STAMPED BELOW LIBRARY USE OCT 31 '86 m 00338 / /(32 7/